Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller (VAR)

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}215|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
  • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

Organizations need to understand their value-added reseller (VAR) portfolio and the greater VAR landscape to better:

  • Manage the VAR portfolio.
  • Understand additional value each VAR can provide.
  • Maximize existing VAR commitments.
  • Evaluate the VARs’ performance.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

VARs typically charge more for products because they are in some way adding value. If you’re not leveraging any of the provided value, you’re likely wasting money and should use a basic commodity-type reseller for procurement.

Impact and Result

This project will provide several benefits to Vendor Management and Procurement:

  • Defined VAR value and performance tracking.
  • Manageable portfolio of VARs that fully benefit the organization.
  • Added training, licensing advice, faster quoting, and invoicing resolution.
  • Reduced deployment and logistics costs.

Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller (VAR) Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our informative Executive Brief to find out why you should maximize value from your value-added reseller, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways to better manage your VARs improve performance and reduce costs.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Organize and prioritize

Organize all your VARs and create a manageable portfolio detailing their value, specific, product, services, and certifications.

  • Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller – Phase 1: Organize and Prioritize
  • VAR Listing and Prioritization Tool

2. “EvaluRate” your VARs

Create an in-depth evaluation of the VARs’ capabilities.

  • Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller – Phase 2: EvaluRate Your VARs
  • VAR Features Checklist Tool
  • VAR Profile and EvaluRation Tool

3. Consolidate and reduce

Assess each VAR for low performance and opportunity to increase value or consolidate to another VAR and reduce redundancy.

  • Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller – Phase 3: Consolidate and Reduce

4. Maximize their value

Micro-manage your primary VARs to ensure performance to commitments and maximize their value.

  • Maximize Value From Your Value-Added Reseller – Phase 4: Maximize Their Value
  • VAR Information and Scorecard Workbook
[infographic]

Applications Priorities 2022

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}183|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Focusing on one initiative will allow leaders to move the needle on what is important.

Impact and Result

Focus on the big picture, leveraging Info-Tech’s blueprints. By increasing maturity and efficiency, IT staff can spend more time on value-added activities.

Applications Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Applications Priorities 2022 – A deck that discusses the five priorities we are seeing among Applications leaders.

There is always more work than hours in the day. IT often feels understaffed and doesn’t know how to get it all done. Trying to satisfy all the requests results in everyone getting a small piece of the pie and in users being dissatisfied. Use Info-Tech's Applications Priorities 2022 to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

  • Applications Priorities Report for 2022
[infographic]

Reinforce End-User Security Awareness During Your COVID-19 Response

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}311|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Endpoint Security
  • Parent Category Link: /endpoint-security

Without the control over the areas in which employees are working, businesses are opening themselves up to a greater degree of risk during the pandemic. How does a business raise awareness for employees who are going to be working remotely?

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • An expanding remote workforce requires training efforts to evolve to include the unique security threats that face remote end users.
  • By presenting security as a personal and individualized issue, you can make this new personal focus a driver for your organizational security awareness and training program.

Impact and Result

  • Teach remote end users how to recognize current cyberattacks before they fall victim and turn them into active barriers against cyberattacks.
  • Use Info-Tech’s blueprint and materials to build a customized training program that uses best practices.

Reinforce End-User Security Awareness During Your COVID-19 Response Research & Tools

Start here

COVID-19 is forcing many businesses to expand their remote working capabilities further than before. Using this blueprint, see how to augment your existing training or start from scratch during a remote work situation.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Reinforce End-User Security Awareness During Your COVID-19 Response Storyboard
  • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
  • Security Awareness and Training Metrics Tool
  • End-User Security Knowledge Test Template

1. Training Materials

Use Info-Tech’s training materials to get you started on remote training and awareness.

  • Training Materials – Phishing
  • Training Materials – Incident Response
  • Training Materials – Cyber Attacks
  • Training Materials – Web Usage
  • Training Materials – Physical Computer Security
  • Training Materials – Mobile Security
  • Training Materials – Passwords
  • Training Materials – Social Engineering
  • Security Training Email Templates
[infographic]

Master the Art of Stakeholder Management in Small Enterprise Environments

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}572|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Stakeholder Management
  • Parent Category Link: /stakeholder-management
  • IT hasn’t taken into account critical stakeholders and their concerns and preferences as they plan projects or operate on daily business.
  • It is difficult to tailor communication and messaging to all of the different personal and professional styles and motivations of stakeholders.
  • Access to stakeholders and getting an accurate understanding of their needs and concerns regarding IT can be difficult to obtain.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Small enterprises have an advantage in stakeholder management. Less people and fewer barriers create opportunities for more productive interactions and stronger relationships.
  • The guiding principles for effective stakeholder management are common concepts, but unfortunately not common practice.
  • By stepping back and taking the time to thoughtfully consider the dynamics and needs of important IT stakeholders, you will be better able to position yourself and your department.

Impact and Result

  • Info-Tech’s guiding principles provide clear and feasible recommendations for how to incorporate stakeholder management into daily interactions.
  • This blueprint’s guidance will enable IT leaders to tailor communication and interactions that will enable them to build stronger and more meaningful relationships with stakeholders.
  • Following this approach and its guiding principles will make IT projects be more successful by reducing their risk of failure due to issues of buy-in, misunderstanding of priorities, or a lack of support from critical stakeholders.

Master the Art of Stakeholder Management in Small Enterprise Environments Research & Tools

Executive Overview

Use Info-Tech’s approach to stakeholder management to guide you in building stronger and more beneficial relationships, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Master the Art of Stakeholder Management in Small Enterprise Environments Storyboard
  • None
  • None

1. Identify stakeholders

Determine the stakeholders for an IT department of a singular initiative.

  • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool

2. Analyze stakeholders

Use the guidance of this section to analyze stakeholders on both a professional and personal level.

3. Manage stakeholders

Use Info-Tech’s guiding principles of stakeholder management to direct how to best engage key stakeholders.

4. Review case studies

Use real-life experiences from Info-Tech’s analysts to understand how to use and apply stakeholder management techniques.

[infographic]

Improve Service Desk Ticket Queue Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}492|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
  • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
  • Service desk tickets pile up in the queue, get lost or buried, jump between queues without progress, leading to slow response and resolution times, a seemingly insurmountable backlog and breached SLAs.
  • There are no defined rules or processes for how tickets should be assigned and routed and technicians don’t know how to prioritize their assigned work, meaning tickets take too long to get to the right place and aren’t always resolved in the correct or most efficient order.
  • Nobody has authority or accountability for queue management, meaning everyone has eyes only on their own tickets while others fall through the cracks.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

If everybody is managing the queue, then nobody is. Without clear ownership and accountability over each and every queue, then it becomes too easy for everyone to assume someone else is handling or monitoring a ticket when in fact nobody is. Assign a Queue Manager to each queue and ensure someone is responsible for monitoring ticket movement across all the queues.

Impact and Result

  • Clearly define your queue structure, organize the queues by content, then assign resources to relevant queues depending on their role and expertise.
  • Define and document queue management processes, from initial triage to how to prioritize work on assigned tickets. Once processes have been defined, identify opportunities to build in automation to improve efficiency.
  • Ensure everyone who handles tickets is clear on their responsibilities and establish clear ownership and accountability for queue management.

Improve Service Desk Ticket Queue Management Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Ticket Queue Management Deck – A guide to service desk ticket queue management best practices and advice

This storyboard reviews the top ten pieces of advice for improving ticket queue management at the service desk.

  • Improve Service Desk Ticket Queue Management Storyboard

2. Service Desk Queue Structure Template – A template to help you map out and optimize your service desk ticket queues

This template includes several examples of service desk queue structures, followed by space to build your own model of your optimal service desk queue structure and document who is assigned to each queue and responsible for managing each queue.

  • Service Desk Queue Structure Template
[infographic]

Further reading

Improve Service Desk Ticket Queue Management

Strong queue management is the foundation to good customer service

Analyst Perspective

Secure your foundation before you start renovating.

Service Desk and IT leaders who are struggling with low efficiency, high backlogs, missed SLAs, and poor service desk metrics often think they need to hire more resources or get a new ITSM tool with better automation and AI capabilities. However, more often than not, the root cause of their challenges goes back to the fundamentals.

Strong ticket queue management processes are critical to the success of all other service desk processes. You can’t resolve incidents and fulfill service requests in time to meet SLAs without first getting the ticket to the right place efficiently and then managing all tickets in the queue effectively. It sounds simple, but we see a lot of struggles around queue management, from new tickets sitting too long before being assigned, to in-progress tickets getting buried in favor of easier or higher-priority tickets, to tickets jumping from queue to queue without progress, to a seemingly insurmountable backlog.

Once you have taken the time to clearly structure your queues, assign resources, and define your processes for routing tickets to and from queues and resolving tickets in the queue, you will start to see response and resolution time decrease along with the ticket backlog. However, accountability for queue management is often overlooked and is really key to success.
This is an image of Dr. Natalie Sansone, Senior Research Analyst at Info-Tech Research Group

Natalie Sansone, PhD
Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

  • Tickets come into the service desk via multiple channels (email, phone, chat, portal) and aren’t consolidated into a single queue, making it difficult to know what to prioritize.
  • New tickets sit in the queue for too long before being assigned while assigned tickets sit for too long without progress or in the wrong queue, leading to slow response and resolution times.
  • Tickets quickly pile up in the queues, get lost or buried, or jump between queues without finding the right home, leading to a seemingly insurmountable backlog and breached SLAs.

Common Obstacles

  • All tickets pile into the same queue, making it difficult to view, manage, or know who’s working on what.
  • There are no defined rules or processes for how tickets should be assigned and routed, meaning they often take too long to get to the right place.
  • Technicians have no guidelines as to how to prioritize their work, and no easy way to organize their tickets or queue to know what to work on next.
  • Nobody has authority or accountability for queue management, meaning everyone has eyes only on their own tickets while others fall through the cracks.

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Clearly define your queue structure, organize the queues by content, then assign resources to relevant queues depending on their role and expertise.
  • Define and document queue management processes, from initial triage to how to prioritize work on assigned tickets. Ensure everyone who handles tickets is clear on their responsibilities.
  • Establish clear ownership and accountability for queue management.
  • Once processes have been defined, identify opportunities to build in automation to improve efficiency.

Info-Tech Insight

If everybody is managing the queue, then nobody is. Without clear ownership and accountability over each and every queue it becomes too easy for everyone to assume someone else is handling or monitoring a ticket when in fact nobody is. Assign a Queue Manager to each queue and ensure someone is responsible for monitoring ticket movement across all the queues.

Timeliness is essential to customer satisfaction

And timeliness can’t be achieved without good queue management practices.

As soon as that ticket comes in, the clock starts ticking…

A host of different factors influence service desk response time and resolution time, including process optimization and documentation, workflow automation, clearly defined prioritization and escalation rules, and a comprehensive and easily accessible knowledgebase.

However, the root cause of poor response and resolution time often comes down to the basics like ticket queue management. Without clearly defined processes and ownership for assigning and actioning tickets from the queue in the most effective order and manner, customer satisfaction will suffer.

For every 12-hour delay in response time*, CSAT drops by 9.6%.

*to email and web support tickets
Source: Freshdesk, 2021

A Freshworks analysis of 107 million service desk interactions found the relationship between CSAT and response time is stronger than resolution time - when customers receive prompt responses and regular updates, they place less value on actual resolution time.

A queue is simply a line of people (or tickets) waiting to be helped

When customers reach out to the service desk for help, their messages are converted into tickets that are stored in a queue, waiting to be actioned appropriately.

Ticket Queue

Email/web
Ideally, the majority of tickets come into the ticket queue through email or a self-service portal, allowing for appropriate categorization, prioritization, and assignment.

Phone
For IT teams with a high volume of support requests coming in through the phone, reducing wait time in queue may be a priority.

Chat
Live chat is growing in popularity as an intake method and may require routing and distribution rules to prevent long or multiple queues.

Queue Management

Queue management is a set of processes and tools to direct and monitor tickets or manage ticket flow. It involves the following activities:

  • Review incoming tickets
  • Categorize and prioritize tickets
  • Route or assign appropriately
  • View or update ticket status
  • Monitor resource workload
  • Ensure tickets are being actioned in time
  • Proactively identify SLA breaches

Ineffective queue management can bury you in backlog

Ticket backlog with poor queue management

Without a clear and efficient process or accountability for moving incoming tickets to the right place, tickets will be worked on randomly, older tickets will get buried, the backlog will grow, and SLAs will be missed.

Ticket backlog with good queue management

With effective queue management and ownership, tickets are quickly assigned to the right resource, worked on within the appropriate SLO/SLA, and actively monitored, leading to a more manageable backlog and good response and resolution times.

A growing backlog will quickly lead to dissatisfied end users and staff

Failing to efficiently move tickets from the queue or monitor tickets in the queue can quickly lead to tickets being buried and support staff feeling buried in tickets.

Common challenges with queue management include:

  • Tickets come in through multiple channels and aren’t consolidated into a single queue
  • New tickets sit unassigned for too long, resulting in long response times
  • Tickets move around between multiple queues with no clear ownership
  • Assigned tickets sit too long in a queue without progress and breach SLA
  • No accountability for queue ownership and monitoring
  • Technicians cherry pick the easiest tickets from the queue
  • Technicians have no easy way to organize their queue to know what to work on next

This leads to:

  • Long response times
  • Long resolution times
  • Poor workload distribution and efficiency
  • High backlog
  • Disengaged, frustrated staff
  • Dissatisfied end users

Info-Tech Insight

A growing backlog will quickly lead to frustrated and dissatisfied customers, causing them to avoid the service desk and seek alternate methods to get what they need, whether going directly to their favorite technician or their peers (otherwise known as shadow IT).

Dig yourself out with strong queue management

Strong queue management is the foundation to good customer service.

Build a mature ticket queue management process that allows your team to properly prioritize, assign, and work on tickets to maximize response and resolution times.

A mature queue management process will:

  • Reduce response time to address tickets.
  • Effectively prioritize tickets and ensure everyone knows what to work on next.
  • Ensure tickets get assigned and routed to the right queue and/or resource efficiently.
  • Reduce overall resolution time to resolve tickets.
  • Enable greater accountability for queue management and monitoring of tickets.
  • Improve customer and employee satisfaction.

As queue management maturity increases:
Response time decreases
Resolution time decreases
Backlog decreases
End-user satisfaction increases

Ten Tips to Effectively Manage Your Queue

The remaining slides in this deck will review these ten pieces of advice for designing and managing your ticket queues effectively and efficiently.

  1. Define your optimal queue structure
  2. Design and assign resources to relevant queues
  3. Define and document queue management processes
  4. Clearly define queue management responsibilities for every team member
  5. Establish clear ownership & accountability over all queues
  6. Always keep ticket status and documentation up to date
  7. Shift left to reduce queue volume
  8. Build-in automation to improve efficiency
  9. Configure your ITSM tool to support and optimize queue management processes
  10. Don’t lose visibility of the backlog

#1: Define your optimal queue structure

There is no one right way to do queue management; choose the approach that will result in the highest value for your customers and IT staff.

Sample queue structures

This is an image of a sample Queue structure, where Incoming Tickets from all channels pass through auto or manual Queue assignment, to a numbered queue position.

*Queues may be defined by skillset, role, ticket category, priority, or a hybrid.

Triage and Assign

  • All incoming tickets are assigned to an appropriate queue based on predefined criteria.
  • Queue assignment may be done through automated workflows based on specific fields within the ticket, or manually by a
  • Queue Manager, dedicated coordinator, or Tier 1 staff.
  • Queues may be defined based on:
    • Skillset/team (e.g. Infrastructure, Security, Apps, etc.)
    • Ticket category (e.g. Network, Office365, Hardware, etc.)
    • Priority (e.g. P1, P2, P3, P4, P5)
  • Resources may be assigned to multiple queues.

Define your optimal queue structure (cont.)

Tiered generalist model

  • All incidents and service requests are routed to Tier 1 first, who prioritize and, if appropriate, conduct initial triage, troubleshooting, and resolution on a wide range of issues.
  • More complex or high-priority tickets are escalated to resources at Tier 2 and/or Tier 3, who are specialists working on projects in addition to support tickets.
This is an image of the Tiered Generalist Model

Unassigned queue

  • Very small teams may work from an unassigned queue if there are processes in place to monitor tickets and workload balance.
  • Typically, these teams work by resolving the oldest tickets first regardless of complexity (also known as First In, First Out or FIFO). However, this doesn’t allow for much flexibility in terms of priority of the request or customer.
This is an image of an unassigned queue model

#2: Design and assign resources to relevant queues

Once you’ve defined your overall structure, define the content of each queue.

This image depicts a sample queue organization structure. The bin titles are: Workgroup; Customer Group; Problem Type; and Hybrid

Info-Tech Insight

Start small; don’t create a queue for every possible ticket type. Remember that someone needs to be accountable for each of these queues, so only build what you can monitor.

#3 Define and document queue management processes

A clear, comprehensive, easily digestible SOP or workflow outlining the steps for handling new tickets and working tickets from the queue will help agents deliver a consistent experience.

PROCESS INCLUDES:

DEFINE THE FOLLOWING:

TRIAGING INCOMING TICKETS

  • Ensure a ticket is created for every issue coming from every channel (e.g. phone, email, chat, walk-in, portal).
  • Assign a priority to each ticket.
  • Categorize ticket and add any necessary documentation
  • Update ticket status.
  • Delete spam, merge duplicate tickets, clean up inbox.
  • Assign tickets to appropriate queue or resource, escalate when necessary.
  • How should tickets be prioritized?
  • How should tickets from each channel be prioritized and routed? (e.g. are phone calls resolved right away? Are chats responded to immediately?)
  • Criteria that determine where a ticket should be sent or assigned (i.e. ticket category, priority, customer type).
  • How should VIP tickets be handled?
  • When should tickets be automatically escalated?
  • Which tickets require hierarchical escalation (i.e. to management)?

WORKING ON ASSIGNED TICKETS

  • Continually update ticket status and documentation.
  • Assess which tickets should be worked on or completed ahead of others.
  • Troubleshoot, resolve, or escalate tickets.
  • In what order should tickets be worked on (e.g. by priority, by age, by effort, by time to breach)?
  • How long should a ticket be worked on without progress before it should be escalated to a different tier or queue?
  • Exceptions to the rule (e.g. in which circumstances should a lower priority ticket be worked on over a higher priority ticket).

Process recommendations

As you define queue management processes, keep the following advice in mind:

Rotate triage role

The triage role is critical but difficult. Consider rotating your Tier 1 resources through this role, or your service desk team if you’re a very small group.

Limit and prioritize channels

You decide which channels to enable and prioritize, not your users. Phone and chat are very interrupt-driven and should be reserved for high-priority issues if used. Your users may not understand that but can learn over time with training and reinforcement.

Prioritize first

Priority matrixes are necessary for consistency but there are always circumstances that require judgment calls. Think about risk and expected outcome rather than simply type of issue alone. And if the impact is bigger than the initial classification, change it.

Define VIP treatment

In some organizations, the same issue can be more critical if it happens to a certain user role (e.g. client facing, c-suite). Identify and flag VIP users and clearly define how their tickets should be prioritized.

Consider time zone

If users are in different time zones, take their current business hours into account when choosing which ticket to work on.

Info-Tech Insight

Think of your service desk as an emergency room. Patients come in with different symptoms, and the triage nurse must quickly assess these symptoms to decide who the patient should see and how soon. Some urgent cases will need to see the doctor immediately, while others can wait in another queue (the waiting room) for a while before being dealt with. Some cases who come in through a priority channel (e.g. ambulance) may jump the queue. Checklists and criteria can help with this decision making, but some degree of judgement is also required and that comes with experience. The triage role is sometimes seen as a junior-level role, but it actually requires expertise to be done well.

For more detailed process guidance, see Standardize the Service Desk

Info-Tech’s blueprint Standardize the Service Desk will help you standardize and document core service desk processes and functions, including:

  • Service desk structure, roles, and responsibilities
  • Metrics and reporting
  • Ticket handling and ticket quality
  • Incident and critical incident management
  • Ticket categorization
  • Prioritization and escalation
  • Service request fulfillment
  • Self-service considerations
  • Building a knowledgebase
this image contains three screenshots from Info-Tech's Standardize the Service Desk Blueprint

#4 Clearly define queue management responsibilities for every team member

This may be one of the most critical yet overlooked keys to queue management success. Define the following:

Who will have overall accountability?

Someone must be responsible for monitoring all incoming and open tickets as well as assigned tickets in every queue to ensure they are routed and fulfilled appropriately. This person must have authority to view and coordinate all queues and Queue Managers.

Who will manage each queue?

Someone must be responsible for managing each queue, including assigning resources, balancing workload, and ensuring SLOs are met for the tickets within their queue. For example, the Apps Manager may be the Queue Manager for all tickets assigned to the Apps team queue.

Who is responsible for assigning tickets?

Will you have a triage team who monitors and assigns all incoming tickets? What are their specific responsibilities (e.g. prioritize, categorize, attempt troubleshooting, assign or escalate)? If not, who is responsible for assigning new tickets and how is this done? Will the triage role be a rotating role, and if so, what will the schedule be?

What are everyone’s responsibilities?

Everyone who is assigned tickets should understand the ticket handling process and their specific responsibilities when it comes to queue management.

#5 Establish clear ownership & accountability over all queues

If everyone is accountable, then no one is accountable. Ownership for each queue and all queues must be clearly designated.

You may have multiple queue manager roles: one for each queue, and one who has visibility over all the queues. Typically, these roles make up only part of an individual’s job. Clearly define the responsibilities of the Queue Manager role; sample responsibilities are on the right.

Info-Tech Insight

Lack of authority over queues – especially those outside Tier 1 of the service desk – is one of the biggest pitfalls we see causing aging tickets and missed SLAs. Every queue needs clear ownership and accountability with everyone committed to meeting the same SLOs.

The Queue Manager or Coordinator is accountable for ensuring tickets are routed to the correct resources service level objectives or agreements are met.

Specific responsibilities may include:

  • Monitors queues daily
  • Ensures new tickets are assigned to appropriate resources for resolution
  • Verifies tickets have been routed and assigned correctly and reroutes if necessary
  • Reallocates tickets if assigned resource is suddenly unavailable or away
  • Ensures ticket handling process is met, ticket status is up to date and correct, and ticket documentation is complete
  • Escalates tickets that are aging or about to breach
  • Ensures service level objectives or agreements are met
  • Facilitates resource allocation based on workload
  • Coordinates tickets that require collaboration across workgroups to ensure resolution is achieved within SLA
  • Associates child and parent tickets
  • Prepares reports on ticket status and volume by queues
  • Regularly reviews reports to identify and act on issues and make improvements or changes where needed
  • Identifies opportunities for improvement

#6 Always keep ticket status and documentation up to date

Anyone should be able to quickly understand the status and progress on a ticket without needing to ask the technician working on it. This means both the ticket status and documentation must be continually and accurately updated.

Ticket Documentation
Ticket descriptions and documentation must be kept accurate and up to date. This ensures that if the ticket is escalated or assigned to a new person, or the Queue Manager or Service Desk Manager needs to know what progress has been made on a ticket, that person doesn’t need to waste time with back-and-forth communication with the technician or end user.

Ticket Status
The ticket status field should change as the ticket moves toward resolution, and must be updated every time the status changes. This ensures that anyone looking at the ticket queue can quickly learn and communicate the status of a ticket, tickets don’t get lost or neglected, metrics are accurate (such as time to resolve), and SLAs are not impacted if a ticket is on hold.

Common ticket statuses include:

  • New/open
  • Assigned
  • In progress
  • Declined
  • Canceled
  • Pending/on hold
  • Resolved
  • Closed
  • Reopened

For more guidance on ticket handling and documentation, download Info-Tech’s blueprint: Standardize the Service Desk.

  • For ticket handling and documentation, see Step 1.4
  • For ticket status fields, see Step 2.2.

#7 Shift left to reduce queue volume

Enable processes such as knowledge management, self-service, and problem management to prevent tickets from even coming into the queue.

Shift left means enabling fulfilment of repeatable tasks and requests via faster, lower-cost delivery channels, self-help tools, and automation.

This image contains a graph, where the Y axis is labeled Cost, and the X axis is labeled Time to Resolve.  On the graph are depicted service desk levels 0, 1, 2, and 3.

Shift to Level 1

  • Identify tickets that are often escalated beyond Tier 1 but could be resolved by Level 1 if they were given the tools, training, resources, or access they need to do so.
  • Provide tools to succeed at resolving those defined tasks (e.g. knowledge article, documentation, remote tools).
  • Embed knowledge management in resolution workflows.

Shift to End User

  • Build a centralized, easily accessible self-service portal where users can search for solutions to resolve their issues without having to submit a ticket.
  • Communicate and train users on how to use the portal regularly update and improve it.

Automate & Eliminate

  • Identify processes or tasks that could be automated to eliminate work.
  • Invest in problem management and event management to fix the root problem of recurring issues and prevent a problem from occurring in the first place, thereby preventing future tickets.

#8 Build in automation to improve efficiency

Manually routing every ticket can be time-consuming and prone to errors. Once you’ve established the process, automate wherever possible.

Automation rules can be used to ensure tickets are assigned to the right person or queue, to alert necessary parties when a ticket is about to breach or has breached SLA, or to remind technicians when a ticket has sat in a queue or at a particular status for too long.

This can improve efficiency, reduce error, and bring greater visibility to both high-priority tickets and aging tickets in the backlog.

However, your processes, queues, and responsibilities must be clearly defined before you can build in automation.

For more guidance on implementing automation and AI within your service desk, see these blueprints:

https://tymansgrpup.com/research/ss/accelerate-your-automation-processes https://tymansgrpup.com/research/ss/improve-it-operations-with-ai-and-ml

For examples of rules, triggers, and fields you can automate to improve the efficiency of your queue management processes, see the next slide.

Sample automation rules

Criteria or triggers you can automate actions based on:

  • Ticket type
  • Specific field in a ticket web form
  • Ticket form that was used (e.g. specific service request form from the portal)
  • Ticket category
  • Ticket priority
  • Keyword in an email subject line
  • Keywords or string in a chat
  • Requester name or email
  • Requester location
  • Requester/ticket language
  • Requester VIP status
  • Channel ticket was received through
  • SLAs or time-based automations
  • Agent skill
  • Agent status or capacity

Fields or actions those triggers can automate

  • Priority
  • Category
  • Ticket routing
  • Assigned agent
  • Assigned queue
  • SLA/due date
  • Notifications/communication

Sample Automation Rules

  • When ticket is about to breach, send alert to Queue Manager and Service Desk Manager.
  • When ticket comes from VIP user, set urgency to high.
  • When ticket status has been set to “open” for ten hours, send an alert to Queue Manager.
  • When ticket status has been set to “on hold” for five days, send a reminder to assignee.
  • When ticket is categorized as “Software-ERP,” send to ERP queue.
  • When ticket is prioritized as P1/critical, send alert to emergency response team.
  • When ticket is prioritized as P1 and hasn’t been updated for one hour, send an alert to Incident Manager.
  • When an in-progress ticket is reassigned to a new queue, alert Queue Manager.
  • When ticket has not been resolved within seven days, flag as aging ticket.

#9 Configure your ITSM tool to support and optimize queue management processes

Configure your tool to support your needs; don’t adjust your processes to match the tool.

  • Most ITSM tools have default queues out of the box and the option to create as many custom queues, filters, and views as you need. Custom queues should allow you to name the queue, decide which tickets will be sent to the queue, and what columns or information are displayed in the queue.
  • Before you configure your queues and dashboards, sit down with your team to decide what you need and what will best enable each agent to manage their workload.
  • Decide which queues each role should have access to – most should only need to see their own queue and their team’s queue.
  • Configure which queues or views new tickets will be sent to.
  • Configure automation rules defined earlier (e.g. automate sending certain tickets to specific queues or sending notifications to specific parties when certain conditions are met).
  • Configure dashboards and reports on queue volume and ticket status data relevant to each team to help them manage their workload, increase visibility, and identify issues or actions.

Info-Tech Insight

It can be overwhelming to support agents when their view is a long and never-ending queue. Set the default dashboard view to show only those tickets assigned to the viewer to make it appear more manageable and easier to organize.

Configure queues to maximize productivity

Info-Tech Insight

The queue should quickly give your team all the information they need to prioritize their work, including ticket status, priority, category, due date, and updated timestamps. Configuration is important - if it’s confusing, clunky, or difficult to filter or sort, it will impact response and resolution times and can lead to missed tickets. Give your team input into configuration and use visuals such as color coding to help agents prioritize their work – for example, VIP tickets may be clearly flagged, critical or high priority tickets may be highlighted, tickets about to breach may be red.

this image contains a sample queue organization which demonstrates how to maximize productivity

#10 Don’t lose visibility of the backlog

Be careful not to focus so much on assigning new tickets that you forget to update aging tickets, leading to an overwhelming backlog and dissatisfied users.

Track metrics that give visibility into how quickly tickets are being resolved and how many aging tickets you have. Metrics may include:

  • Ticket resolution time by priority, by workgroup
  • Ticket volume by status (i.e. open, in progress, on hold, resolved)
  • Ticket volume by age
  • Ticket volume by queue and assignee

Regularly review reports on these metrics with the team.

Make it an agenda item to review aging tickets, on hold tickets, and tickets about to breach or past breach with the team.

Take action on aging tickets to ensure progress is being made.

Set rules to close tickets after a certain number of attempts to reach unresponsive users (and change ticket status appropriately).

Schedule times for your team to tackle aged tickets or tickets in the backlog.

Info-Tech Insight

It can be easy for high priority work to constantly push down low priority work, leaving the lower priority tickets to constantly be ignored and users to be frustrated. If you’re struggling with aging tickets, backlog, and tickets breaching SLA, experiment with your team and queue structure to figure out the best resource distribution to handle your workload. This could mean rotating people through the triage role to allow them time to work through the backlog, reducing the number of people doing triage during slower volume periods, or giving technicians dedicated time to work through tickets. For help with forecasting demand and optimizing resources, see Staff the Service Desk to Meet Demand.

Activity 1.1: Define ticket queues

1 hour

Map out your optimal ticket queue structure using the Service Desk Queue Structure Template. Follow the instructions in the template to complete it as a team.

The template includes several examples of service desk queue structures followed by space to build your own model of an optimal service desk queue structure and to document who is assigned to each queue and responsible for managing each queue.

Note:

The template is not meant to map out your entire service desk structure (e.g. tiers, escalation paths) or ticket resolution process, but simply the ticket queues and how a ticket moves between queues. For help documenting more detailed process workflows or service desk structure, see the blueprint Standardize the Service Desk.

this image contains screenshot from Info-Tech's blueprint: Service Desk Queue structure Template

Input

  • Current queue structure and roles

Output

  • Defined service desk ticket queues and assigned responsibilities

Materials

  • Org chart
  • ITSM tool for reference, if needed

Participants

  • Service Desk Manager
  • IT Director
  • Queue Managers

Document in the Service Desk Queue Structure Template.

Related Info-Tech Research

Standardize the Service Desk

This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management to create a sustainable service desk.

Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

This project will help you build a strategy to shift service support left to optimize your service desk operations and increase end-user satisfaction.

Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake

This project will help you streamline your ticket intake process and identify improvements to your intake channels.

Staff the Service Desk to Meet Demand

This project will help you determine your optimal service desk structure and staffing levels based on your unique environment, workload, and trends.

Works Cited

“What your Customers Really Want.” Freshdesk, 31 May 2021. Accessed May 2022.

AI Governance

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}206|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $389 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 3 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
  • The use of AI and machine learning (ML) has gained momentum as organizations evaluate the potential applications of AI to enhance the customer experience, improve operational efficiencies, and automate business processes.
  • Growing applications of AI have reinforced concerns about ethical, fair, and responsible use of the technology that assists or replaces human decision making.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Implementing AI systems requires careful management of the AI lifecycle, governing data, and machine learning model to prevent unintentional outcomes not only to an organization’s brand reputation but, more importantly, to workers, individuals, and society.
  • When adopting AI, it is important to have a strong ethical and risk management framework surrounding its use.

Impact and Result

  • AI governance enables management, monitoring, and control of all AI activities within an organization.

AI Governance Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. AI Governance Deck – A framework for building responsible, ethical, fair, and transparent AI.

Create the foundation that enables management, monitoring, and control of all AI activities within the organization. The AI governance framework will allow you to define an AI risk management approach and defines methodology for managing and monitoring the AI/ML models in production.

  • AI Governance Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

AI Governance

A Framework for Building Responsible, Ethical, Fair, and Transparent AI

Are you ready for AI?

Business leaders must manage the associated risks as they scale their use of AI

In recent years, following technological breakthroughs and advances in development of machine learning (ML) models and management of large volumes of data, organizations are scaling their use of artificial intelligence (AI) technologies.

The use of AI and ML has gained momentum as organizations evaluate the potential applications of AI to enhance the customer experience, improve operational efficiencies, and automate business processes.

Growing applications of AI have reinforced concerns about ethical, fair, and responsible use of the technology that assists or replaces human decision-making.

Implementing AI systems requires careful management of the AI lifecycle, governing data, and machine learning model to prevent unintentional outcomes not only to an organization’s brand reputation but also, more importantly, to workers, individuals, and society. When adopting AI, it is important to have strong ethical and risk management frameworks surrounding its use.

“Responsible AI is the practice of designing, building and deploying AI in a manner that empowers people and businesses, and fairly impacts customers and society – allowing companies to engender trust and scale AI with confidence.” (World Economic Forum)

Regulations and risk assessment tools

Governments around the world are developing AI assessment methodologies and legislation for AI. Here are a couple of examples:

  • Responsible use of artificial intelligence (AI) guiding principles (Canada):
    1. understand and measure the impact of using AI by developing and sharing tools and approaches
    2. be transparent about how and when we are using AI, starting with a clear user need and public benefit
    3. provide meaningful explanations about AI decision-making, while also offering opportunities to review results and challenge these decisions
    4. be as open as we can by sharing source code, training data, and other relevant information, all while protecting personal information, system integration, and national security and defense
    5. provide sufficient training so that government employees developing and using AI solutions have the responsible design, function, and implementation skills needed to make AI-based public services better
  • The Algorithmic Impact Assessment tool (Canada) is used to determine the impact level of an automated decision-system. It defines 48 risk and 33 mitigation questions. Assessment scores consider factors such as systems design, algorithm, decision type, impact, and data.
  • The National AI Initiative Act of 2020 (DIVISION E, SEC. 5001) (US) became law on January 1, 2021. This is a program across the entire Federal government to accelerate AI research and application.
  • Bill C-27, Artificial Intelligence and Data Act (AIDA) (Canada), when passed, would be the first law in Canada regulating the use of artificial intelligence systems.
  • The EU Artificial Intelligence Act (EU) assigns applications of AI to three risk categories: applications and systems that create an unacceptable risk, such as government-run social scoring; high-risk applications, such as a CV-scanning tool that ranks job applicants; and lastly, applications not explicitly listed as high-risk.
  • The FEAT Principles Assessment Methodology was created by the Monetary Authority of Singapore (MAS) in collaboration with other 27 industry partners for financial institutions to promote fairness, ethics, accountability, and transparency (FEAT) in the use of artificial intelligence and data analytics (AIDA).

AI policies around the world

Map of AI policies around the world, marked by circles of varying color and size. The legend on the right indicates '# of AI Policies (2019-2021)' by color.
Source of data: OECD.AI (2021), powered by EC/OECD (2021), database of national AI policies, accessed on 7/09/2022, https://oecd.ai.

The need for AI governance

“To adopt AI, organizations will need to review and enhance their processes and governance frameworks to address new and evolving risks.” (Canadian RegTech Association, Safeguarding AI Use Through Human-Centric Design, 2020)

To ensure responsible, transparent, and ethical AI systems, organizations will need to review existing risk control frameworks and update them to include AI risk management and impact assessment frameworks and processes.

As ML and AI technologies are constantly evolving, the AI governance and AI risk management frameworks will need to evolve to ensure the appropriate safeguards and controls are in place.

This applies not only to the machine learning models and AI system custom built by the organization’s data science and AI team, but it also includes AI-powered vendor tools and technologies. The vendors should be able to explain how AI is used in their products, how the model was trained, and what data was used to train the model.

AI governance enables management, monitoring, and control of all AI activities within an organization.

Stock image of a chip o a circuitboard labelled 'AI'.

Key concepts

Info-Tech Research Group defines the key terms used in this document as follows:

Machine learning systems learn from experience and without explicit instructions. They learn patterns from data, then analyze and make predictions based on past behavior and the patterns learned.

Artificial intelligence is a combination of technologies and can include machine learning. AI systems perform tasks that mimic human intelligence, such as learning from experience and problem solving. Most importantly, AI makes its own decisions without human intervention.

We use the definition of data ethics by Open Data Institute: “Data ethics is a branch of ethics that considers the impact of data practices on people, society and the environment. The purpose of data ethics is to guide the values and conduct of data practitioners in data collection, sharing and use.”

Algorithmic or machine bias is systematic and repeatable errors in a computer system that create unfair outcomes, such as privileging one arbitrary group of users over others. Algorithmic bias is not a technical problem. It’s a social and political problem, and in the context of implementing AI for business benefits, it’s a business problem.

Download the blueprint Mitigate Machine Bias blueprint for detailed discussion on bias, fairness, and transparency in AI systems

Key concepts – explainable, transparent and trustworthy

Responsible AI is the practice of designing, building and deploying AI in a manner that empowers people and businesses and fairly impacts customers and society – allowing companies to engender trust and scale AI with confidence” (CIFAR).

The AI system is considered trustworthy when people understand how the technology works and when we can assess that it’s safe and reliable. We must be able to trust the output of the system and understand how the system was designed, what data was used to train it, and how it was implemented.

Explainable AI, sometimes abbreviated as XAI, refers to the ability to explain how an AI model makes predictions, its anticipated impact, and its potential biases.

Transparency means communicating with and empowering users by sharing information internally and with external stakeholders, including beneficiaries and people impacted by the AI-powered product or service.

68% [of Canadians] are concerned they don’t understand the technology well enough to know the risks.

77% say they are concerned about the risks AI poses to society (TD, 2019)

AI Governance Framework

Monitoring
Monitoring compliance and risk of AI/ML systems/models in production

Tools & Technologies
Tools and technologies to support AI governance framework implementation

Model Governance
Ensures accountability and traceability for AI/ML models

AI Governance Framework with the surrounding 7 headlines and an adjective between each pair: 'Accountable', 'Trustworthy', 'Responsible', 'Ethical', 'Fair', 'Explainable', 'Transparent'. Organization
Structure, roles, and responsibilities of the AI governance organization

Operating Model
How AI governance operates and works with other organizational structures to deliver value

Risk and Compliance
Alignment with corporate risk management and ensuring compliance with regulations and assessment frameworks

Policies/Procedures/ Standards
Policies and procedures to support implementation of AI governance

Structure the Role of the DBA

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}273|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
  • The traditional role of Database Administrators (DBAs) is shifting due to a variety of changes such as cloud databases, increased automation, close relations with development, and the need for more integration with the business at large. All this means that organizations will have to adapt to integrate a new type of DBA into IT.
  • Organizations often have difficulty establishing a refined and effective DBA structure based on repeatable and well-grounded processes.
  • The relationship between DBAs and the rest of IT (especially development) can often be problematic due to a lack of mutual co-operation and clear communication.
  • There is often confusion in organizations as how to approach staffing DBAs.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • An organization’s relative focus on operations or development is essential in determining many DBA related decisions. This focus can determine what kinds of DBAs to hire, what staffing ratios to use, the viability of outsourcing, and the appropriate reporting structure for DBAs.
  • Utilizing technological strategies such as database automation, effective auditing, and database consolidation to bolster the DBA team helps make efficient use of DBA staff and can turn a reactive environment into a proactive one.
  • Ensuring refined and regularly assessed processes are in place for change and incident management is essential for maintaining effective and structured database administration.

Impact and Result

  • Right-size, support, and structure your DBA team for increased cost effectiveness and optimal productivity.
  • Develop a superior level of co-operation between DBAs and the rest of IT as well as the business at large.
  • Build an environment in which DBAs will be motivated and flourish.

Structure the Role of the DBA Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Understand how Database Administrators are evolving

Develop an effective structure for managing and supporting Database Administrators.

  • Storyboard: Structure the Role of the DBA

2. Create the right Database Administrator roles to meet organizational needs

Build a team that is relevant to the focus of the organization.

  • System Database Administrator
  • Application Database Administrator
[infographic]

Contact Tymans Group

We're here to get your IT Operations performant and resilient

We have the highest respect for your person. We contact you only with responses to your questions. Our company ethics insist on transparency and honesty.

Continue reading

Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}136|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.9/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $85,754 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Licensing
  • Parent Category Link: /licensing
  • License keys are not needed with optional features accessible upon install. Conducting quarterly checks of the Oracle environment is critical because if products or features are installed, even if they are not actively in use, it constitutes use by Oracle and requires a license.
  • Ambiguous license models and definitions abound: terminology and licensing rules can be vague, making it difficult to purchase licensing even with the best of intentions to keep compliant.
  • Oracle has aggressively started to force new Oracle License and Service Agreements (OLSA) on customers that slightly modify language and remove pre-existing allowances to tilt the contract terms in Oracle's favor.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating Oracle licensing and negotiating your agreement.
  • Communicate effectively. Be aware that Oracle will reach out to employees at your organization at various levels. Having your executives on the same page will help send a strong message.
  • Manage the relationship. If Oracle is managing you, there is a high probability you are over paying or providing information that may result in an audit.

Impact and Result

  • Conducting business with Oracle is not typical compared to other vendors. To emerge successfully from a commercial transaction with Oracle, customers must learn the "Oracle way" of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, highly unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function.
  • Map out the process of how to negotiate from a position of strength, examining terms and conditions, discount percentages, and agreement pitfalls.
  • Develop a strategy that leverages and utilizes an experienced Oracle DBA to gather accurate information, and then optimizes it to mitigate and meet the top challenges.

Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your Oracle licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Establish licensing requirements

Begin your proactive Oracle licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

  • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
  • Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide
  • Oracle Database Inventory Tool
  • Effective Licensing Position Tool
  • RASCI Chart

2. Evaluate licensing options

Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

  • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

3. Evaluate agreement options

Review Oracle’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

  • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options
  • Oracle TCO Calculator

4. Purchase and manage licenses

Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

  • Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
  • Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool
  • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
  • Vendor Communication Management Plan
[infographic]

Workshop: Demystify Oracle Licensing and Optimize Spend

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Establish Licensing Requirements

The Purpose

Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback

Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers

Key Benefits Achieved

Have a baseline for requirements

Assess the current state

Determine licensing position

Examine cloud options

Activities

1.1 Gather software licensing data

1.2 Conduct a software inventory

1.3 Perform manual checks

1.4 Reconcile licenses

1.5 Create your Oracle licensing team

1.6 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

Outputs

Copy of your Oracle License Statement

Software inventory report from software asset management (SAM) tool

Oracle Database Inventory Tool

RASCI Chart

Oracle Licensing Effective License Position (ELP) Template

Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

2 Evaluate Licensing Options

The Purpose

Review licensing options

Review licensing rules

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand how licensing works

Determine if you need software assurance

Discuss licensing rules, application to current environment.

Examine cloud licensing

Understand the importance of documenting changes

Meet with desktop product owners to determine product strategies

Activities

2.1 Review full, limited, restricted, and AST use licenses

2.2 Calculate license costs

2.3 Determine which database platform to use

2.4 Evaluate moving to the cloud

2.5 Examine disaster recovery strategies

2.6 Understand purchasing support

2.7 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

Outputs

Oracle TCO Calculator

Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

3 Evaluate Agreement Options

The Purpose

Review contract option types

Review vendors

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand why a type of contract is best for you

Determine if ULA or term agreement is best

The benefits of other types and when you should change

Activities

3.1 Prepare to sign or renew your ULA

3.2 Decide on an agreement type that nets the maximum benefit

Outputs

Type of contract to be used

Oracle TCO Calculator

Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

4 Purchase and Manage Licenses

The Purpose

Finalize the contract

Prepare negotiation points

Discuss license management

Evaluate and develop a roadmap for future licensing

Key Benefits Achieved

Negotiation strategies

Licensing management

Introduction of SAM

Leverage the work done on Oracle licensing to get started on SAM

Activities

4.1 Control the flow of communication terms and conditions

4.2 Use Info-Tech’s readiness assessment in preparation for the audit

4.3 Assign the right people to manage the environment

4.4 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing position, cloud offerings, and budget allocation

Outputs

Controlled Vendor Communications Letter

Vendor Communication Management Plan

Oracle Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool

RASCI Chart

Oracle Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

Asset Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}1|cart{/j2store}
  • Related Products: {j2store}1|crosssells{/j2store}
  • Up-Sell: {j2store}1|upsells{/j2store}
  • Download01-Title: Asset Management Executive Brief
  • Download-01: Visit Link
  • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10
  • member rating average dollars saved: $16,518
  • member rating average days saved: 19
  • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
  • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
Asset management has a clear impact on the financials of your company. Clear insights are essential to keep your spending at the right level.

Asset Management

Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK®

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}252|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
  • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
  • To effectively protect your business interests, you need to be able to address what the most pressing vulnerabilities in your network are. Which attack vectors should you model first? How do you adequately understand your threat vectors when attacks continually change and adapt?
  • Security can often be asked the world but given a minimal budget with which to accomplish it.
  • Security decisions are always under pressure from varying demands that pull even the most well-balanced security team in every direction.
  • Adequately modeling any and every possible scenario is ineffective and haphazard at best. Hoping that you have chosen the most pressing attack vectors to model will not work in the modern day of threat tactics.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Precision is critical to being able to successfully defend against threats.
    • Traditional threat modeling such as STRIDE or PASTA is based on a spray-and-pray approach to identifying your next potential threat vector. Instead, take a structured risk-based approach to understanding both an attacker’s tactics and how they may be used against your enterprise. Threat preparedness requires precision, not guesswork.
  • Knowing is half the battle.
    • You may be doing better than you think. Undoubtedly, there is a large surface area to cover with threat modeling. By preparing beforehand, you can separate what’s important from what’s not and identify which attack vectors are the most pressing for your business.
  • Be realistic and measured.
    • Do not try to remediate everything. Some attack vectors and approaches are nearly impossible to account for. Take control of the areas that have reasonable mitigation methods and act on those.
  • Identify blind spots.
    • Understand what is out there and how other enterprises are being attacked and breached. See how you stack up to the myriad of attack tactics that have been used in real-life breaches and how prepared you are. Know what you’re ready for and what you’re not ready for.
  • Analyze the most pressing vectors.
    • Prioritize the attack vectors that are relevant to you. If an attack vector is an area of concern for your business, start there. Do not cover the entire tactics list if certain areas are not relevant.
  • Detection and mitigation lead to better remediation.
    • For each relevant tactic and techniques, there are actionable detection and mitigation methods to add to your list of remediation efforts.

Impact and Result

Using the MITRE ATT&CK® framework, Info-Tech’s approach helps you understand your preparedness and effective detection and mitigation actions.

  • Learn about potential attack vectors and the techniques that hostile actors will use to breach and maintain a presence on your network.
  • Analyze your current protocols versus the impact of an attack technique on your network.
  • Discover detection and mitigation actions.
  • Create a prioritized series of security considerations, with basic actionable remediation items. Plan your next threat model by knowing what you’re vulnerable to.
  • Ensure business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
  • Maintain privacy of data and other information.
  • Secure the network connection points.
  • Mitigate risks with the appropriate services.

This blueprint and associated tool are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors, allowing them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are recommended to mitigate those risks.

Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why threat preparedness is a crucial first step in defending your network against any attack type. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Attack tactics and techniques

Review a breakdown of each of the various attack vectors and their techniques for additional context and insight into the most prevalent attack tactics.

  • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 1: Attack Tactics and Techniques

2. Threat Preparedness Workbook mapping

Map your current security protocols against the impacts of various techniques on your network to determine your risk preparedness.

  • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 2: Threat Preparedness Workbook Mapping
  • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

3. Execute remediation and detective measures

Use your prioritized attack vectors to plan your next threat modeling session with confidence that the most pressing security concerns are being addressed with substantive remediation actions.

  • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 3: Execute Remediation and Detective Measures
[infographic]

Architect Your Big Data Environment

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}202|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Big Data
  • Parent Category Link: /big-data
  • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but they struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
  • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of it may cause paralysis for organizations.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Don’t panic, and make use of the resources you already have. The skills, tools, and infrastructure for big data can break any budget quickly, but before making rash decisions, start with the resources you have in-house.
  • Big data as a service (BDaaS) is making big waves. BDaaS removes many of the hurdles associated with implementing a big data strategy and vastly lowers the barrier of entry.

Impact and Result

  • Follow Info-Tech’s methodology for understanding the types of modern approaches to big data tools, and then determining which approach style makes the most sense for your organization.
  • Based on your big data use case, create a plan for getting started with big data tools that takes into account the backing of the use case, the organization’s priorities, and resourcing available.
  • Put a repeatable framework in place for creating a comprehensive big data tool environment that will help you decide on the necessary tools to help you realize the value from your big data use case and scale for the future.

Architect Your Big Data Environment Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should find your optimal approach to big data tools, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Plant the foundations of your big data tool architecture

Identify your big data use case and your current data-related capabilities.

  • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 1: Plant the Foundations of Your Big Data Tool Architecture
  • Big Data Execution Plan Presentation
  • Big Data Architecture Planning Tool

2. Weigh your big data architecture decision criteria

Determine your capacity for big data tools, as well as the level of customizability and security needed for your solution to help justify your implementation style decision.

  • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 2: Weigh Your Big Data Architecture Decision Criteria

3. Determine your approach to implementing big data tools

Analyze the three big data implementation styles, select your approach, and complete the execution plan for your big data initiative.

  • Architect Your Big Data Environment – Phase 3: Determine Your Approach To Implementing Big Data Tools
[infographic]

CIO Priorities 2022

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}328|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $31,499 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Innovation
  • Parent Category Link: /innovation
  • Understand how to respond to trends affecting your organization.
  • Determine your priorities based on current state and relevant internal factors.
  • Assign the right amount of resources to accomplish your vision.
  • Consider what new challenges outside of your control will demand a response.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

A priority is created when external factors hold strong synergy with internal goals and an organization responds by committing resources to either avert risk or seize opportunity. These are the priorities identified in the report:

  1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
  2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
  3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
  4. Design an Automation Platform
  5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

Impact and Result

Update your strategic roadmap to include priorities that are critical and relevant for your organization based on a balance of external and internal factors.

CIO Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. CIO Priorities 2022 – A report on the key priorities for competing in the digital economy.

Discover Info-Tech’s five priorities for CIOs in 2022.

  • CIO Priorities Report for 2022

2. Listen to the podcast series

Hear directly from our contributing experts as they discuss their case studies with Brian Jackson.

  • Frictionless hybrid working: How the Harvard Business School did it
  • Close call with ransomware: A CIO recounts a near security nightmare
  • How a financial services company dodged "The Great Resignation"
  • How Allianz took a blockchain platform from pilot to 1 million transactions
  • CVS Health chairman David Dorman on healthcare's hybrid future

Infographic

Further reading

CIO Priorities 2022

A jumble of business-related words. Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey asked CIOs for their top three priorities. Cluster analysis of their open-ended responses shows four key themes:
  1. Business process improvements
  2. Digital transformation or modernization
  3. Security
  4. Supporting revenue growth or recovery

Info-Tech’s annual CIO priorities are formed from proprietary primary data and consultation with our internal experts with CIO stature

2022 Tech Trends Survey CIO Demographic N=123

Info-Tech’s Tech Trends 2022 survey was conducted between August and September 2021 and collected a total of 475 responses from IT decision makers, 123 of which were at the C-level. Fourteen countries and 16 industries are represented in the survey.

2022 IT Talent Trends Survey CIO Demographic N=44

Info-Tech’s IT Talent Trends 2022 survey was conducted between September and October 2021 and collected a total of 245 responses from IT decision makers, 44 of which were at the C-level. A broad range of countries from around the world are represented in the survey.

Internal CIO Panels’ 125 Years Of Combined C-Level IT Experience

Panels of former CIOs at Info-Tech focused on interpreting tech trends data and relating it to client experiences. Panels were conducted between November 2021 and January 2022.

CEO-CIO Alignment Survey Benchmark Completed By 107 Different Organizations

Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment program helps CIOs align with their supervisors by asking the right questions to ensure that IT stays on the right path. It determines how IT can best support the business’ top priorities and address the gaps in your strategy. In 2021, the benchmark was formed by 107 different organizations.

Build IT alignment

IT Management & Governance Diagnostic Benchmark Completed By 320 Different Organizations

Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic helps IT departments assess their strengths and weaknesses, prioritize their processes and build an improvement roadmap, and establish clear ownership of IT processes. In 2021, the benchmark was formed by data from 320 different organizations.

Assess your IT processes

The CIO priorities are informed by Info-Tech’s trends research reports and surveys

Priority: “The fact or condition of being regarded or treated as more important than others.” (Lexico/Oxford)

Trend: “A general direction in which something is developing or changing.” (Lexico/Oxford)

A sequence of processes beginning with 'Sensing', 'Hypothesis', 'Validation', and ending with 'Trends, 'Priorities'. Under Sensing is Technology Research, Interviews & Insights, Gathering, and PESTLE. Under Hypothesis is Near-Future Probabilities, Identify Patterns, Identify Uncertainties, and Identify Human Benefits. Under Validation is Test Hypothesis, Case Studies, and Data-Driven Insights. Under Trends is Technology, Talent, and Industry. Under Priorities is CIO, Applications, Infrastructure, and Security.

Visit Info-Tech’s Trends & Priorities Research Center

Image called 'Defining the CIO Priorities for 2022'. Image shows 4 columns, Implications, Resource Investment, Amplifiers, and Actions and Outcomes, with 2 dotted lines, labeled External Context and Internal Context, running through all 4 columns and leading to bottom-right label called CIO Priorities Formed

The Five Priorities

Priorities to compete in the digital economy

  1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
  2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
  3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
  4. Design an Automation Platform
  5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

Reduce friction in the hybrid operating model

Priority 01 | APO07 Human Resources Management

Deliver solutions that create equity between remote workers and office workers and make collaboration a joy.

Hybrid work is here to stay

CIOs must deal with new pain points related to friction of collaboration

In 2020, CIOs adapted to the pandemic’s disruption to offices by investing in capabilities to enable remote work. With restrictions on gathering in offices, even digital laggards had to shift to an all-remote work model for non-essential workers.

Most popular technologies already invested in to facilitate better collaboration

  • 24% Web Conferencing
  • 23% Instant Messaging
  • 20% Document Collaboration

In 2022, the focus shifts to solving problems created by the new hybrid operating model where some employees are in the office and some are working remotely. Without the ease of collaborating in a central hub, technology can play a role in reducing friction in several areas:

  • Foster more connections between employees. Remote workers are less likely to collaborate with people outside of their department and less likely to spontaneously collaborate with their peers. CIOs should provide a digital employee experience that fosters collaboration habits and keeps workers engaged.
  • Prevent employee attrition. With more workers reevaluating their careers and leaving their jobs, CIOs can help employees feel connected to the overall purpose of the organization. Finding a way to maintain culture in the new context will require new solutions. While conference room technology can be a bane to IT departments, making hybrid meetings effortless to facilitate will be more important.
  • Provide new standards for mediated collaboration. Meeting isn’t as easy as simply gathering around the same table anymore. CIOs need to provide structure around how hybrid meetings are conducted to create equity between all participants. Business continuity processes must also consider potential outages for collaboration services so employees can continue the work despite a major outage.

Three in four organizations have a “hybrid” approach to work. (Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

In most organizations, a hybrid model is being implemented. Only 14.9% of organizations are planning for almost everyone to return to the office, and only 9.9% for almost everyone to work remotely.

Elizabeth Clark

CIO, Harvard Business School

"I want to create experiences that are sticky. That keep people coming back and engaging with their colleagues."

Photo of Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School.

Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
Frictionless hybrid working: How the Harvard Business School did it

Internal interpretation: Harvard Business School

  • March 2020
    The pandemic disrupts in-class education at Harvard Business School. Their case study method of instruction that depends on in-person, high-quality student engagement is at risk. While students and faculty completed the winter semester remotely, the Dean and administration make the goal to restore the integrity of the classroom experience with equity for both remote and in-person students.
  • May 2020
    A cross-functional task force of about 100 people work intensively, conducting seven formal experiments, 80 smaller tests, and hundreds of polling data points, and a technology and facilities solution is designed: two 4K video cameras capturing both the faculty and the in-class students, new ceiling mics, three 85-inch TV screens, and students joining the videoconference from their laptops. A custom Zoom room, combining three separate rooms, integrated all the elements in one place and integrated with the lecture capture system and learning management system.
  • October 2020
    Sixteen classrooms are renovated to install the new solution. Students return to the classroom but in lower numbers due to limits on in-room capacity, but students rotate between the in-person and remote experience.
  • September 2021
    Renovations for the hybrid solution are complete in 26 classrooms and HBS has determined this will be its standard model for the classroom. The case method of teaching is kept alive and faculty and students are thrilled with the results.
  • November 2021
    HBS is adapting its solution for the classroom to its conference rooms and has built out eight different rooms for a hybrid experience. The 4K cameras and TV screens capture all participants in high fidelity as well as the blackboard.

Photo of a renovated classroom with Zoom participants integrated with the in-person students.
The renovated classrooms integrate all students, whether they are participating remotely or in person. (Image courtesy of Harvard Business School.)

Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

External

  • Organization – About half of IT practitioners in the Tech Trends 2022 survey feel that IT leaders, infrastructure and operations teams, and security teams were “very busy” in 2021. Capacity to adapt to hybrid work could be constrained by these factors.
  • Process – Organizations that want employees to benefit from being back in the office will have to rethink how workers can get more value out of in-person meetings that also require videoconference participation with remote workers.
  • Technology – Fifty-four percent of surveyed IT practitioners say the pandemic raised IT spending compared to the projections they made in 2020. Much of that investment went into adapting to a remote work environment.

Internal

  • Organization – HBS added 30 people to its IT staff on term appointments to develop and implement its hybrid classroom solutions. Hires included instructional designers, support technicians, coordinators, and project managers.
  • Process – Only 25 students out of the full capacity of 95 could be in the classroom due to COVID-19 regulations. On-campus students rotated through the classroom seats. An app was created to post last-minute seat availability to keep the class full.
  • Technology – A Zoom room was created that combines three rooms to provide the full classroom experience: a view of the instructor, a clear view of each student that enlarges when they are speaking, and a view of the blackboard.

Resources Applied

Appetite for Technology

CIOs and their direct supervisors both ranked internal collaboration tools as being a “critical need to adopt” in 2021, according to Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark Report.

Intent to Invest

Ninety-seven percent of IT practitioners plan to invest in technology to facilitate better collaboration between employees in the office and outside the office by the end of 2022, according to Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey.

“We got so many nice compliments, which you don’t get in IT all the time. You get all the complaints, but it’s a rare case when people are enthusiastic about something that was delivered.” (Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School)

Harvard Business School

  • IT staff were reassigned from other projects to prioritize building a hybrid classroom solution. A cloud migration and other portfolio projects were put on pause.
  • The annual capital A/V investment was doubled. The amount of spend on conference rooms was tripled.
  • Employees were hired to the media services team at a time when other areas of the organization were frozen.

Outcomes at Harvard Business School

The new normal at Harvard Business School

New normal: HBS has found its new default operating model for the classroom and is extending its solution to its operating environment.

Improved CX: The high-quality experience for students has helped avoid attrition despite the challenges of the pandemic.

Engaged employees: The IT team is also engaged and feels connected to the mission of the school.

Photo of a custom Zoom room bringing together multiple view of the classroom as well as all remote students.
A custom Zoom room brings together multiple different views of the classroom into one single experience for remote students. (Image courtesy of Harvard Business School.)

From Priorities to Action

Make hybrid collaboration a joy

Align with your organization’s goals for collaboration and customer interaction, with the target of high satisfaction for both customers and employees. Invest in capital projects to improve the fidelity of conference rooms, develop and test a new way of working, and increase IT capacity to alleviate pressure points.

Foster both asynchronous and synchronous collaboration approaches to avoid calendars filling up with videoconference meetings to get things done and to accommodate workers contributing from across different time zones.

“We’ll always have hybrid now. It’s opened people’s eyes and now we’re thinking about the future state. What new markets could we explore?” (Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School)

Take the next step

Run Better Meetings
Hybrid, virtual, or in person – set meeting best practices that support your desired meeting norms.

Prepare People Leaders for the Hybrid Work Environment
Set hybrid work up for success by providing people leaders with the tools they need to lead within the new model.

Hoteling and Hot-Desking: A Primer
What you need to know regarding facilities, IT infrastructure, maintenance, security, and vendor solutions for desk hoteling and hot-desking.

“Human Resources Management” gap between importance and effectiveness
Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

A bar chart illustrating the Human Resources Management gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.3.

Improve your ransomware readiness

Priority 02 | APO13 Security Strategy

Mitigate the damage of successful ransomware intrusions and make recovery as painless as possible.

The ransomware crisis threatens every organization

Prevention alone won’t be enough against the forces behind ransomware.

Cybersecurity is always top of mind for CIOs but tends to be deprioritized due to other demands related to digital transformation or due to cost pressures. That’s the case when we examine our data for this report.

Cybersecurity ranked as the fourth-most important priority by CIOs in Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey, behind business process improvement, digital transformation, and modernization. Popular ways to prepare for a successful attack include creating offline backups, purchasing insurance, and deploying new solutions to eradicate ransomware.

CIOs and their direct supervisors ranked “Manage IT-Related Security” as the third-most important top IT priority on Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark for 2021, in support of business goals to manage risk, comply with external regulation, and ensure service continuity.

Most popular ways for organizations to prepare for the event of a successful ransomware attack:

  • 25% Created offline backups
  • 18% Purchased cyberinsurance
  • 19% New tech to eradicate ransomware

Whatever priority an organization places on cybersecurity, when ransomware strikes, it quickly becomes a red alert scenario that disrupts normal operations and requires all hands on deck to respond. Sophisticated attacks executed at wide scale demonstrate that security can be bypassed without creating an alert. After that’s accomplished, the perpetrators build their leverage by exfiltrating data and encrypting critical systems.

CIOs can plan to mitigate ransomware attacks in several constructive ways:

  • Business impact analysis. Determine the costs of an outage for specific periods and the system and data recovery points in time.
  • Engage a partner for 24/7 monitoring. Gain real-time awareness of your critical systems.
  • Review your identity access management (IAM) policies. Use of multi-factor authentication and limiting access to only the roles that need it reduces ransomware risk.

50% of all organizations spent time and money specifically to prevent ransomware in the past year. (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

John Doe

CIO, mid-sized manufacturing firm in the US

"I want to create experiences that are sticky. That keep people coming back and engaging with their colleagues."

Blank photo.

Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
Close call with ransomware: a CIO recounts a near security nightmare

Internal interpretation: US-based, mid-sized manufacturing firm

  • May 1, 2021
    A mid-sized manufacturing firm (“The Firm”) CIO gets a call from his head of security about odd things happening on the network. A call is made to Microsoft for support. Later that night, the report is that an unwanted crypto-mining application is the culprit. But a couple of hours later, that assessment is proven wrong when it’s realized that hundreds of systems are staged for a ransomware attack. All the attacker has to do is push the button.
  • May 2, 2021
    The Firm disconnects all its global sites to cut off new pathways for the malware to infect. All normal operations cease for 24 hours. It launches its cybersecurity insurance process. The CIO engages a new security vendor, CrowdStrike, to help respond. Employees begin working from home if they can so they can make use of their own internet service. The Firm has cut off its public internet connectivity and is severed from cloud services such as Azure storage and collaboration software.
  • May 4, 2021
    The hackers behind the attack are revealed by security forensics experts. A state-sponsored agency in Russia set up the ransomware and left it ready to execute. It sold the staged attack to a cybercriminal group, Doppel Spider. According to CrowdStrike, the group uses malware to run “big game hunting operations” and targets 18 different countries including the US and multiple industries, including manufacturing.
  • May 10, 2021
    The Firm has totally recovered from the ransomware incident and avoided any serious breach or paying a ransom. The CIO worked more hours than at any other point in his career, logging an estimated 130 hours over the two weeks.
  • November 2021
    The Firm never previously considered itself a ransomware target but has now reevaluated that stance. It has hired a service provider to run a security operations center on a 24/7 basis. It's implemented a more sophisticated detection and response model and implemented multi-factor authentication. It’s doubled its security spend in 2021 and will invest more in 2022.

“Now we take the approach that if someone does get in, we're going to find them out.” (John Doe, CIO, “The Firm”)

Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

External

  • Organization – Organizations must consider how their employees play a role in preventing ransomware and plan for training to recognize phishing and other common traps. They must make plans for employees to continue their work if systems are disrupted by ransomware.
  • Process – Backup processes across multiple systems should be harmonized to have both recent and common points to recover from. Work with the understanding IT will have to take systems offline if ransomware is discovered and there is no time to ask for permission.
  • Technology – Organizations can benefit from security services provided by a forensics-focused vendor. Putting cybersecurity insurance in place not only provides financial protection but also guidance in what to do and which vendors to work with to prevent and recover from ransomware.

Internal

  • Organization – The Firm was prepared with a business continuity plan to allow many of its employees to work remotely, which was necessary because the office network was incapacitated for ten days during recovery.
  • Process – Executives didn’t seek to assign blame for the security incident but took it as a signal there were some new costs involved to stay in business. It initiated new outsource relationships and hired one more full-time employee to shore up security resources.
  • Technology – New ransomware eradication software was deployed to 2,000 computers. Scripted processes automated much of the work, but in some cases full system rebuilds were required. Backup systems were disconnected from the network as soon as the malware was discovered.

Resources Applied

Consider the Alternative

Organizations should consider how much a ransomware attack on critical systems would cost them if they were down for a minimum of 24-48 hours. Plan to invest an amount at least equal to the costs of that downtime.

Ask for ID

Implementing across-the-board multi-factor authentication reduces chances of infection and is cheap, with enterprise solutions ranging from $2 to $5 per user on average. Be strict and deny access when connections don’t authenticate.

“You'll never stop everything from getting into the network. You can still focus on stopping the bad actors, but then if they do make it in, make sure they don't get far.” (John Doe, CIO, “The Firm”)

“The Firm” (Mid-Sized Manufacturer)

  • During the crisis, The Firm paused all activities and focused solely on isolating and eliminating the ransomware threat.
  • New outsourcing relationship with a vendor provides a 24/7 Security Operations Center.
  • One more full-time employee on the security team.
  • Doubled investment in security in 2021 and will spend more in 2022.

Outcomes at “The Firm” (Mid-Sized Manufacturer)

The new cost of doing business

Real-time security: While The Firm is still investing in prevention-based security, it is also developing its real-time detection and response capabilities. When ransomware makes it through the cracks, it wants to know as soon as possible and stop it.

Leadership commitment: The C-suite is taking the experience as a wake-up call that more investment is required in today’s threat landscape. The Firm rates security more highly as an overall organizational goal, not just something for IT to worry about.

Stock photo of someone using their phone while sitting at a computer, implying multi-factor authentication.
The Firm now uses multi-factor authentication as part of its employee sign-on process. For employees, authenticating is commonly achieved by using a mobile app that receives a secret code from the issuer.

From Priorities to Action

Cybersecurity is everyone’s responsibility

In Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Benchmark for 2021, the business goal of “Manage Risk” was the single biggest point of disagreement between CIOs and their direct supervisors. CIOs rank it as the second-most important business goal, while CEOs rank it as sixth-most important.

Organizations should align on managing risk as a top priority given the severity of the ransomware threat. The threat actors and nature of the attacks are such that top leadership must prepare for when ransomware hits. This includes halting operations quickly to contain damage, engaging third-party security forensics experts, and coordinating with government regulators.

Cybersecurity strategies may be challenged to be effective without creating some friction for users. Organizations should look beyond multi-layer prevention strategies and lean toward quick detection and response, spending evenly across prevention, detection, and response solutions.

Take the next step

Create a Ransomware Incident Response Plan
Don’t be the next headline. Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

Simplify Identity and Access Management
Select and implement IAM and produce vendor RFPs that will contain the capabilities you need, including multi-factor authentication.

Cybersecurity Series Featuring Sandy Silk
More from Info-Tech’s Senior Workshop Director Sandy Silk in this video series created while she was still at Harvard University.

Gap between CIOs and CEOs in points allocated to “Manage risk” as a top business goal

A bar chart illustrating the gap between CIOs and CEOs in points allocated to 'Manage risk' as a top business goal. The difference is marked as Delta 1.5.

Support an employee-centric retention strategy

Priority 03 | ITRG02 Leadership, Culture & Values

Avoid being a victim of “The Great Resignation” by putting employees at the center of an experience that will engage them with clear career path development, purposeful work, and transparent feedback.

Defining an employee-first culture that improves retention

The Great resignation isn’t good for firms

In 2021, many workers decided to leave their jobs. Working contexts were disrupted by the pandemic and that saw non-essential workers sent home to work, while essential workers were asked to continue to come into work despite the risks of COVID-19. These disruptions may have contributed to many workers reevaluating their professional goals and weighing their values differently. At the same time, 2021 saw a surging economy and many new job opportunities to create a talent-hungry market. Many workers could have been motivated to take a new opportunity to increase their salary or receive other benefits such as more flexibility.

Annual turnover rate for all us employees on the rise

  • 20% – Jan.-Aug. 2020, Dipped from 22% in 2019
  • 25% Jan.-Aug. 2021, New record high
  • Data from Visier Inc.

When you can’t pay them, develop them

IT may be less affected than other departments by this trend. Info-Tech’s 2022 IT Talent Trends Report shows that on average, estimated turnover rate in IT is lower than the rest of the organization. Almost half of respondents estimated their organization’s voluntary turnover rate was 10% or higher. Only 30% of respondents estimate that IT’s voluntary turnover rate is in the same range. However, CIOs working in industries with the highest turnover rates will have to work to keep their workers engaged and satisfied, as IT skills are easily transferred to other industries.

49% ranked “enabling learning & development within IT” as high priority, more than any other single challenge. (IT Talent Trends 2022 Survey, N=227)

A bar chart of 'Industries with highest turnover rates (%)' with 'Leisure and Hospitality' at 6.4%, 'Trade, Transportation & Utilities' at 3.6%, 'Professional and Business' at 3.3%, and 'Other Services' at 3.1%. U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2022.

Jeff Previte

Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage

“We have to get to know the individual at a personal level … Not just talking about the business, but getting to know the person."

Photo of Jeff Previte, Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage.

Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
How a financial services company dodged ‘The Great Resignation’

Internal interpretation: CrossCountry Mortgage

  • May 2019
    Jeff Previte joins Cleveland, Ohio-based CrossCountry Mortgage in the CIO role. The company faces a challenge with employee turnover, particularly in IT. The firm is a sales-focused organization and saw its turnover rate reach as high as 60%. Yet Previte recognized that IT had some meaningful goals to achieve and would need to attract – and retain – some higher caliber talent. His first objective in his new role was to meet with IT employees and business leadership to set priorities.
  • July 2019
    Previte takes a “people-first” approach to leadership and meets his staff face-to-face to understand their personal situations. He sets to work on defining roles and responsibilities in the organization, spending about a fifth of his time on defining the strategy.
  • June 2020
    Previte assigned his leadership team to McLean & Company’s Design an Impactful Employee Development Program. From there, the team developed a Salesforce tool called the Career Development Workbook. “We had some very passionate developers and admins that wanted to build a home-grown tool,” he says. It turns McLean & Company’s process into a digital tool employees can use to reflect on their careers and explore their next steps. It helps facilitate development conversations with managers.
  • January 2021
    CrossCountry Mortgage changes its approach to career development activities. Going to external conferences and training courses is reduced to just 30% of that effort. The rest is by doing hands-on work at the company. Previte aligned with his executives and road-mapped IT projects annually. Based on employee’s interests, opportunities are found to carve out time from usual day-to-day activities to spend time on a project in a new area. When there’s a business need, someone internally can be ready to transition roles.
  • June 2021
    In the two years since joining the company, Previte has reduced the turnover rate to just 12%. The IT department has grown to more adequately meet the needs of the business and employees are engaged with more opportunities to develop their careers. Instead of focusing on compensation, Previte focused more on engaging employees with a developmentally dedicated environment and continuous hands-on learning.

“It’s come down to a culture shift. Folks have an idea of where we’re headed as an organization, where we’re headed as an IT team, and how their role contributes to that.” (Jeff Previte, EVP of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage)

Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

External

  • Organization – A high priority is being placed on improving IT’s maturity through its talent. Enabling learning and development in IT, enabling departmental innovation, and recruiting are the top three highest priorities according to IT Talent Trends 2022 survey responses.
  • Process – Recruiting is more challenging for industries that operate primarily onsite, according to McLean & Company's 2022 HR Trends Report. They face more challenges attracting applications, more rejected offers, and more candidate ghosting compared to remote-capable industries.
  • Technology – Providing a great employee experience through digital tools is more important as many organizations see a mix of workers in the office and at home. These tools can help connect colleagues, foster professional development, and improve the candidate experience.

Internal

  • Organization – CrossCountry Mortgage faced a situation where IT employees did not have clarity on their roles and responsibilities. In terms of salary, it wasn’t offering at the high end compared to other employers in Cleveland.
  • Process – To foster a culture of growth and development, CrossCountry Mortgage put in place a performance assessment system that encouraged reflection and goal setting, aided by collaboration with a manager.
  • Technology – The high turnover rate was limiting CrossCountry Mortgage from achieving the level of maturity it needed to support the company’s goals. It ingrained its new PA process with a custom build of a Salesforce tool.

Resources Applied

Show me the money

Almost six in ten Talent Trends survey respondents identified salary and compensation as the reason that employees resigned in the past year. Organizations looking to engage employees must first pay a fair salary according to market and industry conditions.

Build me up

Professional development and opportunity for innovative work are the next two most common reasons for resignations. Organizations must ensure they create enough capacity to allow workers time to spend on development.

“Building our own solution created an element of engagement. There was a sense of ownership that the team had in thinking through this.” (Jeff Previte, CrossCountry Mortgage)

CrossCountry Mortgage

  • Executive time: CIO spends 10-20% of his time on activities related to designing the approach.
  • Leveraged memberships with Info-Tech Research Group and McLean & Company to define professional development process.
  • Internal IT develops automated workflow in Salesforce.
  • Hired additional IT staff to build out overall capacity and create time for development activities.

Outcomes at CrossCountry Mortgage

Engaged IT workforce

The Great Maturation: IT staff turnover rate dropped to 10-12% and IT talent is developing on the job to improve the department’s overall skill level. More IT staff on hand and more engaged workers mean IT can deliver higher maturity level results.

Alignment achieved: Connecting IT’s initiatives to the vision of the C-suite creates a clear purpose for IT in its initiatives. Staff understand what they need to achieve to progress their careers and can grow while they work.

Photo of employees from CrossCountry Mortgage assisting with a distribution event.
Employees from CrossCountry Mortgage headquarters assist with a drive-thru distribution event for the Cleveland Food Bank on Dec. 17, 2021. (Image courtesy of CrossCountry Mortgage.)

From Priorities to Action

Staff retention is a leadership priority

The Great Resignation trend is bringing attention to employee engagement and staff retention. IT departments are busier than ever during the pandemic as they work overtime to keep up with a remote workforce and new security threats. At the same time, IT talent is among the most coveted on the market.

CIOs need to develop a people-first approach to improve the employee experience. Beyond compensation, IT workers need clarity in terms of their career paths, a direct connection between their work and the goals of the organization, and time set aside for professional development.

Info-Tech’s 2021 benchmark for “Leadership, Culture & Values” shows that most organizations rate this capability very highly (9) but see room to improve on their effectiveness (6.9).

Take the next step

IT Talent Trends 2022
See how IT talent trends are shifting through the pandemic and understand how themes like The Great Resignation has impacted IT.

McLean & Company’s Modernize Performance Management
Customize the building blocks of performance management to best fit organizational needs to impact individual and organizational performance, productivity, and engagement.

Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure
Define future-state work units, roles, and responsibilities that will enable the IT organization to complete the work that needs to be done.

“Leadership, Culture & Values” gap between importance and effectiveness
Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

A bar chart illustrating the 'Leadership, Culture & Values' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.1.

Design an automation platform

Priority 04 | APO04 Innovation

Position yourself to buy or build a platform that will enable new automation opportunities through seamless integration.

Build it or buy it, but platform integration can yield great benefits

Necessity is the mother of innovation

When it’s said that digital transformation accelerated during the pandemic, what’s really meant is that processes that were formerly done manually became automated through software. In responses to the Tech Trends survey, CIOs say digital transformation was more of a focus during the pandemic, and eight in ten CIOs also say they shifted more than 20% of their organization’s processes to digital during the pandemic. Automating tasks through software can be called digitalization.

Most organizations became more digitalized during the pandemic. But how they pursued it depends on their IT maturity. For digital laggards, partnering with a technology services platform is the path of least resistance. For sophisticated innovators, they can consider building a platform to address the specific needs of their business process. Doing so requires the foundation of an existing “digital factory” or innovation arm where new technologies can be tested, proofs of concept developed, and external partnerships formed. Patience is key with these efforts, as not every investment will yield immediate returns and some will fail outright.

Build it or buy it, platform participants integrate with their existing systems through application programming interfaces (APIs). Organizations should determine their platform strategies based on maturity, then look to integrate the business processes that will yield the most gains.

What role should you play in the platform ecosystem?

A table with levels on the maturity ladder laid out as a sprint. Column headers are maturity levels 'Struggle', 'Support', 'Optimize', 'Expand', and 'Transform', row headers are 'Maturity' and 'Role'. Roles are assigned to one or many levels. 'Improve' is solely under Struggle. 'Integrate' spans from Support to Transform. 'Buy' spans Support to Expand. 'Build' begins midway through Expand and all of Transform. 'Partner' spans from Optimize to halfway through Transform.

68% of CIOs say digital transformation became much more of a focus for their organization during the pandemic (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

Bob Crozier

Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE

"Smart contracts are really just workflows between counterparties."

Photo of Bob Crozier, Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE.

Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
How Allianz took a blockchain platform from pilot to 1 million transactions

Internal interpretation: Allianz Technology

  • 2015
    After smart contracts are demonstrated on the Ethereum blockchain, Allianz and other insurers recognize the business value. There is potential to use the capability to administer a complex, multi-party contract where the presence of the reinsurer in the risk transfer ecosystem is required. Manual contracts could be turned into code and automated. Allianz organized an early proof of concept around a theoretical pandemic excessive loss contract.
  • 2018
    Allianz Chief Architect Bob Crozier is leading the Global Blockchain Center of Competence for Allianz. They educate Allianz on the value of blockchain for business. They also partner with a joint venture between the Technology University of Munich and the state of Bavaria. A cohort of Masters students is looking for real business problems to solve with open-source distributed ledger technology. Allianz puts its problem statement in front of the group. A student team presents a proof of concept for an international motor insurance claims settlement and it comes in second place at a pitch day competition.
  • 2019
    Allianz brings the concept back in-house, and its business leaders return to the concept. Startup Luther Systems is engaged to build a minimum-viable product for the solution, with the goal being a pilot involving three or four subsidiaries in different countries. The Blockchain Center begins communicating with 25 Allianz subsidiaries that will eventually deploy the platform.
  • 2020
    Allianz is in build mode on its international motor insurance claims platform. It leverages its internal Dev/SecOps teams based in Munich and in India.
  • May 2021
    Allianz goes live with its new platform on May 17, decommissioning its old system and migrating all live claims data onto the new blockchain platform. It sees 400 concurrent users go live across Europe.
  • January 2022
    Allianz mines its one-millionth block to its ledger on Jan. 19, with each block representing a peer-to-peer transaction across its 25 subsidiaries in different countries. The platform has settled hundreds of millions of dollars.

Stock photo of two people arguing over a car crash.

Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

External

  • Organization – To explore emerging technologies like blockchain, organizations need staff that are accountable for innovation and have leeway to develop proofs of concept. External partners are often required to bring in fresh ideas and move quickly towards an MVP.
  • Process – According to the Tech Trends 2022 survey, 84% of CIOs consider automation a high-value digital capability, and 77% say identity verification is a high-value capability. A blockchain platform using smart contracts can deliver those.
  • Technology – The Linux Foundation’s Hyperledger Fabric is an open-source blockchain technology that’s become popular in the financial industry for its method of forming consensus and its modular architecture. It’s been adopted by USAA, MasterCard, and PayPal. It also underpins the IBM Blockchain Platform and is supported by Azure Blockchain.

Internal

  • Organization – Allianz is a holding company that owns Allianz Technology and 25 operating entities across Europe. It uses the technology arm to innovate on the business process and creates shared platforms that its entities can integrate with to automate across the value chain.
  • Process – Initial interest in smart contracts on blockchain were funneled into a student competition, where a proof of concept was developed. Allianz partnered with a startup to develop an MVP, then developed the platform while aligning with its business units ahead of launch.
  • Technology – Allianz built its blockchain platform on Hyperledger Fabric because it was a permissioned system, unlike other public permissionless blockchains such as Ethereum, and because its mining mechanism was much more energy efficient compared to other blockchains using Proof of Work consensus models.

Resources Applied

Time to innovate

Exploring emerging technology for potential use cases is difficult for staff tasked with running day-to-day operations. Organizations serious about innovation create a separate team that can focus on “moonshot” projects and connect with external partners.

Long-term ROI

Automation of new business processes often requires a high upfront initial investment for a long-term efficiency gain. A proof of concept should demonstrate clear business value that can be repeated often and for a long period.

“My next project has to deliver in the tens of millions of value in return. The bar is high and that’s what it should be for a business of our size.” (Bob Crozier, Allianz)

Allianz

  • Several operating entities from different countries supplied subject matter expertise and helped with the testing process.
  • Allianz Technology team has eight staff members. It is augmented by Luther Systems and the team at industry group B3i.
  • Funding of less than $5 million to develop. Dev team continues to add improvements.
  • Operating requires just one full-time employee plus infrastructure costs, mostly for public cloud hosting.

Outcomes at Allianz

From insurer to platform provider

Deliver your own SaaS: Allianz Technology built its blockchain-based claims settlement platform and its subsidiaries consume it as software as a service. The platform runs on a distributed architecture across Europe, with each node running the same version of the software. Operating entities can also integrate their own systems to the platform via APIs and further automate business processes such as billing.

Ready to scale: After processing one million transactions, the international claims settlement platform is proven and ready to add more participants. Crozier sees auto repair shops and auto manufacturers as the next logical users.

Stock photo of Blockchain.
Allianz is a shareholder of the Blockchain Insurance Industry Initiative (B3i). It is providing a platform used by a group of insurance companies in the commercial and reinsurance space.

When should we use blockchain? THREE key criteria:

  • Redundant processes
    Different entities follow the same process to achieve the desired outcome.
  • Audit trail
    Accountability in the decision making must be documented.
  • Reconciliation
    Parties need to be able to resolve disputes by tracing back to the truth.

From Priorities to Action

It’s a build vs. buy question for platforms

Allianz was able to build a platform for its group of European subsidiaries because of its established digital factory and commitment to innovation. Allianz Technology is at the “innovate” level of IT maturity, allowing it to create a platform that subsidiaries can integrate with via APIs. For firms that are lower on the IT maturity scale, buying a platform solution is the better path to automation. These firms will be concerned with integrating their legacy systems to platforms that can reduce the friction of their operating environments and introduce modern new capabilities.

From Info-Tech’s Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

An infographic comparing pros and cons of Build versus Buy. On the 'Build: High Delivery Capacity & Capability' side is 'Custom Development', 'Data Integration', 'AI/ML', 'Configuration', 'Native Workflow', and 'Low & No Code'. On the 'Buy: Low Delivery Capacity & Capability' side is 'Outsource Development', 'iPaaS', 'Chatbots', 'iBPMS & Rules Engines', 'RPA', and 'Point Solutions'.

Take the next step

Accelerate Your Automation Processes
Integrate automation solutions and take the first steps to building an automation suite.

Build Effective Enterprise Integration on the Back of Business Process
From the backend to the frontlines – let enterprise integration help your business processes fly.

Evolve Your Business Through Innovation
Innovation teams are tasked with the responsibility of ensuring that their organizations are in the best position to succeed while the world is in a period of turmoil, chaos, and uncertainty.

“Innovation” gap between importance and effectiveness Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

A bar chart illustrating the 'Innovation' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.1.

Prepare to report on new environmental, social, and governance (ESG) metrics

Priority 05 | ITRG06 Business Intelligence and Reporting

Be ready to either lead or support initiatives to meet the criteria of new ESG reporting mandates and work toward disclosure reporting solutions.

Time to get serious about ESG

What does CSR or ESG mean to a CIO?

Humans are putting increasing pressure on the planet’s natural environment and creating catastrophic risks as a result. Efforts to mitigate these risks have been underway for the past 30 years, but in the decade ahead regulators are likely to impose more strict requirements that will be linked to the financial value of an organization. Various voluntary frameworks exist for reporting on environmental, social, and governance (ESG) or corporate social responsibility (CSR) metrics. But now there are efforts underway to unify and clarify those standards.

The most advanced effort toward a global set of standards is in the environmental area. At the United Nations’ COP26 summit in Scotland last November, the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) announced its headquarters (Frankfurt) and three other international office locations (Montreal, San Francisco, and London) and its roadmap for public consultations. It is working with an array of voluntary standards groups toward a consensus.

In Info-Tech’s 2022 Tech Trends survey, two-thirds of CIOs say their organization is committed to reducing greenhouse gas emissions, yet only 40% say their organizational leadership is very concerned with reducing those emissions. CIOs will need to consider how to align organizational concern with internal commitments and new regulatory pressures. They may investigate new real-time reporting solutions that could serve as a competitive differentiator on ESG.

Standards informing the ISSB’s global set of climate standards

A row of logos of organizations that inform ISSB's global set of climate standards.

67% of CIOs say their organization is committed to reducing greenhouse gases, with one-third saying that commitment is public. (Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey)

40% of CIOs say their organizational leadership is very concerned with reducing greenhouse gas emissions.

David W. Dorman

Chairman of the board, CVS Health

“ESG is a question of what you do in the microcosm of your company to make sure there is a clear, level playing field – that there is a color-blind, gender-blind meritocracy available – that you are aware that not in every case can you achieve that without really focusing on it. It’s not going to happen on its own. That’s why our commitments have real dollars behind them and real focus behind them because we want to be the very best at doing them.”

Photo of David W. Dorman, Chairman of the Board, CVS Health.

Listen to the Tech Insights podcast:
CVS Health chairman David Dorman on healthcare's hybrid future

Internal interpretation: CVS Health

CVS Health established a new steering committee of senior leaders in 2020 to oversee ESG commitments. It designs its corporate social responsibility strategy, Transform Health 2030, by aligning company activities in four key areas: healthy people, healthy business, healthy planet, and healthy community. The strategy aligns with the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals. In alignment with these goals, CVS identifies material topics where the company has the most ability to make an impact. In 2020, its top three topics were:

  1. Access to quality health care
  2. Patient and customer safety
  3. Data protection and privacy
Material Topic
Access to quality health care
Material Topic
Patient and customer safety
Material Topic
Data protection and privacy
Technology Initiative
MinuteClinic’s Virtual Collaboration for Nurses

CVS provided Apple iPads compliant with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) to clinics in a phased approach, providing training to more than 700 providers in 26 states by February 2021. Nurses could use the iPads to attend virtual morning huddles and access clinical education. Nurses could connect virtually with other healthcare experts to collaborate on delivering patient care in real-time. The project was able to scale across the country through a $50,000 American Nurses Credentialing Center Pathway Award. (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.)

Technology Initiative
MinuteClinic’s E-Clinic

MinuteClinics launched this telehealth solution in response to the pandemic, rolling it out in three weeks. The solution complemented video visits delivered in partnership with the Teladoc platform. Visits cost $59 and are covered by Aetna insurance plans, a subsidiary of CVS Health. It hosted more than 20,000 E-Clinic visits through the end of 2020. CVS connected its HealthHUBs to the solution to increase capacity in place of walk-in appointments and managed patients via phone for medication adherence and care plans. CVS also helped behavioral health providers transition patients to virtual visits. (CVS Health)

Technology Initiative
Next Generation Authentication Platform

CVS patented this solution to authenticate customers accessing digital channels. It makes use of the available biometrics data and contextual information to validate identity without the need for a password. CVS planned to extend the platform to voice channels as well, using voiceprint technology. The solution prevents unauthorized access to sensitive health data while providing seamless access for customers. (LinkedIn)

Implications: Organization, Process, Technology

External

  • Organization – Since the mid-2010s, younger investors have demonstrated reliance on ESG data when making investment decisions, resulting in the creation of voluntary standards that offered varied approaches. Organizations in ESG exchange-traded funds are outperforming the overall S&P 500 (S&P Global Market Intelligence).
  • Process – Organizations are issuing ESG reports today despite the absence of clear rules to follow for reporting results. With regulators expected to step in to establish more rigid guidelines, many organizations will need to revisit their approach to ESG reports.
  • Technology – Real-time reporting of ESG metrics will become a competitive advantage before 2030. Engineering a solution that can alert organizations to poor performance on ESG measures and allow them to respond could avert losing market value.

Internal

  • Organization – CVS Health established an ESG Steering Committee in 2020 composed of senior leaders including its chief governance officers, chief sustainability officer, chief risk officer, and controller and SVP of investor relations. It is supported by the ESG Operating Committee.
  • Process – CVS conducts a materiality assessment in accordance with Global Reporting Initiative standards to determine the most significant ESG impacts it can make and what topics most influence the decisions of stakeholders. It engages with various stakeholder groups on CSR topics.
  • Technology – CVS technology initiatives during the pandemic focused on supporting patients and employees in collaborating on health care delivery using virtual solutions, providing rich digital experiences that are easily accessible while upholding high security and privacy standards.

Resources Applied

Lack of commitment

While 83% of businesses state support for the Sustainable Development Goals outlined by the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), only 40% make measurable commitments to their goals.

Show your work

The GRI recommends organizations not only align their activities with sustainable development goals but also demonstrate contributions to specific targets in reporting on the positive actions they carry out. (GRI, “State of Progress: Business Contributions to the SDGS.”)

“We end up with a longstanding commitment to diversity because that’s what our customer base looks like.” (David Dorman, CVS Health)

CVS Health

  • The MinuteClinic Virtual Collaboration solution was piloted in Houston, demonstrated success, and won additional $50,000 funding from the Pathway to Excellence Award to scale the program across the country (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.).
  • The Next-Gen Authentication solution is provided by the vendor HYPR. It is deployed to ten million users and looking to scale to 30 million more. Pricing for enterprises is quoted at $1 per user, but volume pricing would apply to CVS (HYPR).

Outcomes at CVS Health

Delivering on hybrid healthcare solutions

iPads for collaboration: Healthcare practitioners in the MinuteClinic Virtual Collaboration initiative agreed that it improved the use of interprofessional teams, working well virtually with others, and improved access to professional resources (Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc.)

Remote healthcare: Saw a 400% increase in MinuteClinic virtual visits in 2020 (CVS Health).

Verified ID: The Next Generation Authentication platform allowed customers to register for a COVID-19 vaccination appointment. CVS has delivered more than 50 million vaccines (LinkedIn).

Stock photo of a doctor with an iPad.
CVS Health is making use of digital channels to connect its customers and health practitioners to a services platform that can supplement visits to a retail or clinic location to receive diagnostics and first-hand care.

From Priorities to Action

Become your organization’s ESG Expert

The risks posed to organizations and wider society are becoming more severe, driving a transition from voluntary frameworks for ESG goals to a mandatory one that’s enforced by investors and governments. Organizations will be expected to tie their core activities to a defined set of ESG goals and maintain a balance sheet of their positive and negative impacts. CIOs should become experts in ESG disclosure requirements and recommend the steps needed to meet or exceed competitors’ efforts. If a leadership vacuum for ESG accountability exists, CIOs can either seek to support their peers that are likely to become accountable or take a leadership role in overseeing the area. CIOs should start working toward solutions that deliver real-time reporting on ESG goals to make reporting frictionless.

“If you don’t have ESG oversight at the highest levels of the company, it won’t wind up getting the focus. That’s why we review it at the Board multiple times per year. We have an annual report, we compare how we did, what we intended to do, where did we fall short, where did we exceed, and where we can run for daylight to do more.” (David Dorman, CVS Health)

Take the next step

ESG Disclosures: How Will We Record Status Updates on the World We Are Creating?
Prepare for the era of mandated environmental, social, and governance disclosures.

Private Equity and Venture Capital Growing Impact of ESG Report
Learn about how the growing impact of ESG affects both your organization and IT specifically, including challenges and opportunities, with expert assistance.

“Business Intelligence and Reporting” gap between importance and effectiveness
Info-Tech Research Group Management and Governance Diagnostic Benchmark 2021

A bar chart illustrating the 'BI and Reporting' gap between importance and effectiveness. The difference is marked as Delta 2.4.

The Five Priorities

Priorities to compete in the digital economy

  1. Reduce Friction in the Hybrid Operating Model
  2. Improve Your Ransomware Readiness
  3. Support an Employee-Centric Retention Strategy
  4. Design an Automation Platform
  5. Prepare to Report on New Environmental, Social, and Governance Metrics

Contributing Experts

Elizabeth Clark

CIO, Harvard Business School
Photo of Elizabeth Clark, CIO, Harvard Business School.

Jeff Previte

Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage
Photo of Jeff Previte, Executive Vice-President of IT, CrossCountry Mortgage.

Bob Crozier

Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE
Photo of Bob Crozier, Chief Architect, Allianz Technology & Global Head of Blockchain, Allianz Technology SE.

David W. Dorman

Chairman of the Board, CVS Health
Photo of David W. Dorman, Chairman of the Board, CVS Health.

Info-Tech’s internal CIO panel contributors

  • Bryan Tutor
  • John Kemp
  • Mike Schembri
  • Janice Clatterbuck
  • Sandy Silk
  • Sallie Wright
  • David Wallace
  • Ken McGee
  • Mike Tweedie
  • Cole Cioran
  • Kevin Tucker
  • Angelina Atkins
  • Yakov Kofner
Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor. Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.
Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.
Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.Photo of an internal CIO panel contributor.

Thank you for your support

Logo for the Blockchain Research Institute.
Blockchain Research Institute

Bibliography – CIO Priorities 2022

“2020 Corporate Social Responsibility Report.” CVS Health, 2020, p. 127. Web.

“Adversary: Doppel Spider - Threat Actor.” Crowdstrike Adversary Universe, 2021. Accessed 29 Dec. 2021.

“Aetna CVS Health Success Story.” HYPR, n.d. Accessed 6 Feb. 2022.

Baig, Aamer. “The CIO agenda for the next 12 months: Six make-or-break priorities.” McKinsey Digital, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

Ball, Sarah, Kristene Diggins, Nairobi Martindale, Angela Patterson, Anne M. Pohnert, Jacinta Thomas, Tammy Todd, and Melissa Bates. “2020 ANCC Pathway Award® winner.” Wolters Kluwer Health, Inc., 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2022.

“Canadian Universities Propose Designs for a Central Bank Digital Currency.” Bank of Canada, 11 Feb. 2021. Accessed 14 Dec. 2021.

“Carbon Sequestration in Wetlands.” MN Board of Water and Soil Resources, n.d. Accessed 15 Nov. 2021.

“CCM Honored as a NorthCoast 99 Award Winner.” CrossCountry Mortgage, 1 Dec. 2021. Web.

Cheek, Catherine. “Four Things We Learned About the Resignation Wave–and What to Do Next.” Visier Inc. (blog), 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

“Companies Using Hyperledger Fabric, Market Share, Customers and Competitors.” HG Insights, 2022. Accessed 25 Jan. 2022.

“IFRS Foundation Announces International Sustainability Standards Board, Consolidation with CDSB and VRF, and Publication of Prototype Disclosure Requirements.” IFRS, 3 Nov. 2021. Web.

“IT Priorities for 2022: A CIO Report.” Mindsight, 28 Oct. 2021. Web.

“Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey.” Databases, Tables & Calculators by Subject, U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2022. Accessed 9 Feb. 2022.

Kumar, Rashmi, and Michael Krigsman. “CIO Planning and Investment Strategy 2022.” CXOTalk, 13 Sept. 2021. Web.

Leonhardt, Megan. “The Great Resignation Is Hitting These Industries Hardest.” Fortune, 16 Nov. 2021. Accessed 7 Jan. 2022.

“Most companies align with SDGs – but more to do on assessing progress.” Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), 17 Jan. 2022. Web.

Navagamuwa, Roshan. “Beyond Passwords: Enhancing Data Protection and Consumer Experience.” LinkedIn, 15 Dec. 2020.

Ojo, Oluwaseyi. “Achieving Digital Business Transformation Using COBIT 2019.” ISACA, 19 Aug. 2019. Web.

“Priority.” Lexico.com, Oxford University Press, 2021. Web.

Riebold, Jan, and Yannick Bartens. “Reinventing the Digital IT Operating Model for the ‘New Normal.’” Capgemini Worldwide, 3 Nov. 2020. Web.

Samuels, Mark. “The CIO’s next priority: Using the tech budget for growth.” ZDNet, 1 Sept. 2021. Accessed 1 Nov. 2021.

Sayer, Peter. “Exclusive Survey: CIOs Outline Tech Priorities for 2021-22.” CIO, 5 Oct. 2021. Web.

Shacklett, Mary E. “Where IT Leaders Are Likely to Spend Budget in 2022.” InformationWeek, 10 Aug. 2021. Web.

“Table 4. Quits Levels and Rates by Industry and Region, Seasonally Adjusted - 2021 M11 Results.” U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Economic News Release, 1 Jan. 2022. Accessed 7 Jan. 2022.

“Technology Priorities CIOs Must Address in 2022.” Gartner, 19 Oct. 2021. Accessed 1 Nov. 2021.

Thomson, Joel. Technology, Talent, and the Future Workplace: Canadian CIO Outlook 2021. The Conference Board of Canada, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

“Trend.” Lexico.com, Oxford University Press, 2021. Web.

Vellante, Dave. “CIOs signal hybrid work will power tech spending through 2022.” SiliconANGLE, 25 Sept. 2021. Web.

Whieldon, Esther, and Robert Clark. “ESG funds beat out S&P 500 in 1st year of COVID-19; how 1 fund shot to the top.” S&P Global Market Intelligence, April 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

Do you believe in absolute efficiency?

Weekend read. Hence I post this a bit later on Friday.
Lately, I've been fascinated by infinity. And in infinity, some weird algebra pops up. Yet that weirdness is very much akin to what our business stakeholders want, driven by what our clients demand, and hence our KPIs drive us. Do more with less. And that is what absolute efficiency means.

Register to read more …

Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}158|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Development
  • Parent Category Link: /development
  • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, this brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
  • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
  • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality otherwise they will look elsewhere.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

Impact and Result

  • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
  • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
  • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to develop and implement a release management framework that takes advantage of continuous delivery.

This presentation documents the Info-Tech approach to defining your application release management framework.

  • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value – Phases 1-4

2. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template – Use this template to help you define, detail, and make a reality your strategy in support of your application release management framework.

The template gives the user a guide to the development of their application release management framework.

  • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Template

3. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook – This workbook documents the results of the exercises contained in the blueprint and offers the user a guide to development of their release management framework.

This workbook is designed to capture the results of your exercises from the Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value blueprint.

  • Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value Workbook
[infographic]

Workshop: Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Define the Current Situation

The Purpose

Document the existing release management process and current pain points and use this to define the future-state framework.

Key Benefits Achieved

Gain an understanding of the current process to confirm potential areas of opportunity.

Understand current pain points so that we can build resolution into the new process.

Activities

1.1 Identify current pain points with your release management process. If appropriate, rank them in order of most to least disruptive.

1.2 Use the statement of quality and current pain points (in addition to other considerations) and outline the guiding principles for your application release management framework.

1.3 Brainstorm a set of metrics that will be used to assess the success of your aspired-to application release management framework.

Outputs

Understanding of pain points, their root causes, and ranking.

Built guiding principles for application release management framework.

Created set of metrics to measure the effectiveness of the application release management framework.

2 Define Standard Release Criteria

The Purpose

Build sample release criteria, release contents, and standards for how it will be integrated in production.

Key Benefits Achieved

Define a map to what success will look like once a new process is defined.

Develop standards that the new process must meet to ensure benefits are realized.

Activities

2.1 Using an example of a product known to the team, list its criteria for release.

2.2 Using an example of a product known to the team, develop a list of features and tasks that are directly and indirectly important for either a real or hypothetical upcoming release.

2.3 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its integration into the release-approved code in production. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

Outputs

Completed Workbook example highlighting releasability.

Completed Workbook example defining and detailing feature and task selection.

Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the integration step.

3 Define Acceptance and Deployment Standards

The Purpose

Define criteria for the critical acceptance and deployment phases of the release.

Key Benefits Achieved

Ensure that releases will meet or exceed expectations and meet user quality standards.

Ensure release standards for no / low risk deployments are recognized and implemented.

Activities

3.1 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its acceptance. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

3.2 Using an example of product known to the team, map out the process for its deployment. For each step in the process, think about how it satisfies guiding principles, releasability and principles of continuous anything.

Outputs

Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the acceptance step.

Completed Workbook example defining and detailing the deployment step.

4 Implement the Strategy

The Purpose

Define your future application release management process and the plan to make the required changes to implement.

Key Benefits Achieved

Build a repeatable process that meets the standards defined in phases 2 and 3.

Ensure the pain points defined in Phase 1 are resolved.

Show how the new process will be implemented.

Activities

4.1 Develop a plan and roadmap to enhance the integration, acceptance, and deployment processes.

Outputs

List of initiatives to reach the target state

Application release management implementation roadmap

Further reading

Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

Analyst Perspective

Improving your release management strategy and practices is a key step to fully unlock the value of your portfolio.

As firms invest in modern delivery practices based around product ownership, Agile, and DevOps, organizations assume that’s all that is necessary to consistently deliver value. As organizations continue to release, they continue to see challenges delivering applications of sufficient and consistent quality.

Delivering value doesn’t only require good vision, requirements, and technology. It requires a consistent and reliable approach to releasing and delivering products and services to your customer. Reaching this goal requires the definition of standards and criteria to govern release readiness, testing, and deployment.

This will ensure that when you deploy a release it meets the high standards expected by your clients and delivers the value you have intended.

Dr. Suneel Ghei

Principal Research Director, Application Development

Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

  • Your software platforms are a key enabler of your brand. When there are issues releasing, the brand suffers. Client confidence and satisfaction erode.
  • Your organization has invested significant capital in creating a culture of product ownership, Agile, and DevOps. Yet the benefits from these investments are not yet fully realized.
  • Customers have more choices than ever when it comes to products and services. They require features and capabilities delivered quickly, consistently, and of sufficient quality, otherwise they will look elsewhere.

Common Obstacles

  • Development teams are moving faster but then face delays waiting for testing and deployment due to a lack of defined release cycle and process.
  • Individual stages in your software development life cycle (SDLC), such as code collaboration, testing, and deployment, have become leaner, but the overall complexity has increased since many products and services are composed of many applications, platforms, and processes.
  • The specifics of releasing products is (wrongly) classified as a technical concern and not a business concern, hindering the ability to prioritize improved release practices.

Info-Tech's Approach

  • Develop a release management framework that efficiently and effectively orchestrates the different functions supporting a software’s release.
  • Use the release management framework and turn release-related activities into non-events.
  • Use principles of continuous delivery for converting your release processes from an overarching concern to a feature of a high-performing software practice.

Executive Summary

Info-Tech Insights

Turn release-related activities into non-events.

Eliminate the need for dedicating time for off-hour or weekend release activities. Use a release management framework for optimizing release-related tasks, making them predictable and of high quality.

Release management is NOT a part of the software delivery life cycle.

The release cycle runs parallel to the software delivery life cycle but is not tightly coupled with it. The act of releasing begins at the point requirements are confirmed and ends when user satisfaction is measurable. In contrast, the software delivery life cycle is focused on activities such as building, architecting, and testing.

All releases are NOT created equal.

Barring standard guiding principles, each release may have specific nuances that need to be considered as part of release planning.

Your release management journey

  1. Optimize Applications Release Management - Set a baseline release management process and organization.
  2. Modernize Your SDLC - Move your organization to Agile and increase throughput to feed releases.
  3. Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision - Understand the practices that go into delivering products, including articulating your release plans.
  4. Automate Testing to Get More Done - Create the ability to do more testing quickly and ensure test coverage.
  5. Implement DevOps Practices That Work - Build in tools and techniques necessary for release deployment automation.
  6. Define a Release Management Process to Deliver Lasting Value (We Are Here)

Define a Release Management Process for Your Applications to Deliver Lasting Value

Use your releases to drive business value and enhance the benefits delivered by your move to Agile.

Executive Brief

Your software delivery teams are expected to deliver value to stakeholders in a timely manner and with high quality

Software delivery teams must enable the organization to react to market needs and competitive changes to improve the business’ bottom line. Otherwise, the business will question the team’s competencies.

The business is constantly looking for innovative ways to do their jobs better and they need support from your technical teams.

The increased stress from the business is widening the inefficiencies that already exist in application release management, risking poor product quality and delayed releases.

Being detached from the release process, business stakeholders do not fully understand the complexities and challenges of completing a release, which complicates the team’s communication with them when issues occur.

IT Stakeholders Are Also Not Satisfied With Their Own Throughput

  • Only 29% of IT employees find application development throughput highly effective.
  • Only 9% of organizations were classified as having highly effective application development throughput.
  • Application development throughput ranked 37th out of 45 core IT processes in terms of effectiveness.

(Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Diagnostic, N=3,930)

Your teams, however, struggle with core release issues, resulting in delayed delivery (and disappointed stakeholders)

Implementing tools on top of an inefficient pipeline can significantly magnify the existing release issues. This can lead to missed deadlines, poor product quality, and business distrust with software delivery teams.

COMMON RELEASE ISSUES

  1. Local Thinking: Release decisions and changes are made and approved without consideration of the holistic system, process, and organization.
  2. No Release Cadence: Lack of process governance and oversight generates unpredictable bottlenecks and load and ill-prepared downstream teams.
  3. Mismanagement of Releases: Program management does not accommodate the various integrated releases completed by multiple delivery teams.
  4. Poor Scope Management: Teams are struggling to effectively accommodate changes during the project.

The bottom line: The business’ ability to operate is dictated by the software delivery team’s ability to successfully complete releases. If the team performs poorly, then the business will do poorly as well. Application release management is critical to ensure business expectations are within the team’s constraints.

As software becomes more embedded in the business, firms are discovering that the velocity of business change is now limited by how quickly they can deploy.” – Five Ways To Streamline Release Management, J.S. Hammond

Historically, managing releases has been difficult and complicated…

Typically, application release management has been hard to coordinate because…

  • Software has multiple dependencies and coordinating their inclusion into a deployable whole was not planned.
  • Teams many be spending too much time on features that are not needed any longer.
  • Software development functions (such as application architecture, test-first or test-driven design, source code integration, and functional testing) are not optimized.
  • There are no agreed upon service-level contracts (e.g. expected details in requirements, adequate testing, source control strategy) between development functions.
  • The different development functions are not integrated in a holistic style.
  • The different deployment environments have variability in their configuration, reducing the reliability of testing done in different environments.
  • Minimum thresholds for acceptable quality of development functions are either too low (leading to adverse outcomes down stream) or too high (leading to unnecessary delays).

…but research shows being effective at application release management increases your throughput

Research conducted on Info-Tech's members shows overwhelming evidence that application throughput is strongly tied to an effective application release management approach.

The image shows a scatter plot, with Release Management Effectiveness on the x-axis and Application Development Throughput Effectiveness on the Y-axis. The graph shows a steady increase.

(Info-Tech Management & Governance Diagnostic, since 2019; N=684 organizations)

An application release management framework is critical for effective and timely delivery of software

A well-developed application release management framework is transformative and changes...

From To
Short-lived projects Ongoing enhancements supporting a product strategy
Aiming for mandated targets Flexible roadmaps
Manual execution of release processes Automating a release pipeline as much as possible and reasonable
Manual quality assurance Automated assessment of quality
Centralized decision making Small, independent release teams, orchestrated through an optimized value stream

Info-Tech Insight: Your application release management framework should turn a system release into a non-event. This is only possible through the development of a holistic, low-risk and standardized approach to releasing software, irrespective of their size or complexity.

Robust continuous “anything” requires proficiency in five core practices

A continuous anything evaluation should not be a “one-and-done” event. As part of ongoing improvements, keep evolving it to make it a fundamental component of a strong operational strategy.

Continuous Anything

  • Automate where appropriate
    • Automation is not a silver bullet. All processes are not created equal; and therefore, some are not worthy of being automated.
  • Control system variables
    • Deploying and testing in environments that are apple to apple in comparison reduces the risk of unintended outcomes from production release.
  • Measure process outcomes
    • A process not open to being measured is a process bound to fail. If it can be measured, it should be, and insights found should be used for improving the system.
  • Select smaller features batches
    • Smaller release packages reduce the chances of cognitive load associated with finding root causes for defects and issues that may result as post-production incidents.
  • Reduction of cycle time
    • Identification of waste in each stage of the continuous anything process helps in lowering cost of operations and results in quicker generation of value for stakeholders.

Invest time in developing an application release management framework for your development team(s) with a continuous anything mindset

An application release management framework converts a set of features and make them ready for releasability in a low-risk, standardized, and high-quality process.

The image shows a diagram titled Application Release Engineering From Idea to Product, which illustrates the process.

A continuous anything (integration, delivery, and deployment) mindset is based on a growth and improvement philosophy, where every event is considered a valid data point for investigation of process efficiency.

Diagram adapted from Continuous Delivery in the Wild, Pete Hodgson, Published by O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2020

Related Info-Tech Research

Streamline Application Maintenance

  • Justify the necessity of streamlined maintenance. Gain a grounded understanding of stakeholder objectives and concerns and validate their achievability against the current state of the people, process, and technologies involved in application maintenance.
  • Strengthen triaging and prioritization practices. Obtain a holistic picture of the business and technical impacts, risks, and urgencies of each accepted maintenance request to justify its prioritization and relevance within your backlog. Identify opportunities to bundle requests together or integrate them within project commitments to ensure completion.
  • Establish and govern a repeatable process. Develop a maintenance process with well-defined stage gates, quality controls, and roles and responsibilities, and instill development best practices to improve the success of delivery.

“Releasability” (or release criteria) of a system depends upon the inclusion of necessary building blocks and proof that they were worked on

There is no standard definition of a system’s releasability. However, there are common themes around completions or assessments that should be investigated as part of a release:

  • The range of performance, technical, or compliance standards that need to be assessed.
  • The full range of test types required for business approval: unit tests, acceptance tests, security test, data migration tests, etc.
  • The volume-criticality mix of defects the organization is willing to accept as a risk.
  • The best source and version control strategy for the development team. This is mostly a function of the team's skill with using release branches and coordinating their work artifacts.
  • The addition of monitoring points and measures required for evaluations and impact analysis.
  • The documentation required for audit and compliance.
  • External and internal dependencies and integrations.
  • Validations, approvals, and sign-offs required as part of the business’ operating procedure.
  • Processes that are currently carried out outside and should be moved into the pipeline.
  • Manual processes that may be automated.
  • Any waste activities that do not directly contribute to releasability that can be eliminated from the development process.
  • Knowledge the team has regarding challenges and successes with similar software releases in the past.

Releasability of a system is different than governing principles for application release management

Governing principles are fundamental ways of doing something, which in this case is application release management, while releasability will generally have governing principles in addition to specific needs for a successful release.

Example of Governing Principles

  • Approval from Senior Director is necessary before releasing to production
  • Production deployments can only be done in off-hours
  • We will try to automate processes whenever it is possible for us to do so
  • We will use a collaborative set of metrics to measure our processes

Examples of Releasability Criteria

  • For the upcoming release, add performance testing for Finance and Budget Teams’ APIs
  • Audit and compliance documentation is required for this release
  • Automation of manual deployment
  • Use trunk-based source code management instead of feature-based

Regulated industries are not more stable despite being less nimble

A pervasive myth in industry revolves around the misperception that continuous anything and nimble and non-event application release management is not possible in large bureaucratic and regulated organizations because they are risk-averse.

"We found that external approvals were negatively correlated with lead-time, deployment frequency and restore time, and had no correlation with change failure rate. In short, approval by an external body (such as a manager or Change Approval Board) simply doesn’t work to increase the stability of production systems…However, it certainly slows things down. It is in fact worse than having no change approval process at all." – Accelerate by Gene Kim, Jez Humble, and Nicole Forsgren

Many organizations reduce risk in their product release by adopting a paternalistic stance by:

  • Requiring manual sign-offs from senior personnel who are external to the organization.
  • Increasing the number and level of authorization gates.
  • Staying away from change and preferring to stick with what has worked in the past.

Despite the prevalence of these types of responses to risk, the evidence is that they do not work and are in fact counter-productive because they:

  • Create blocks to frequent releases.
  • Introduce procedural complexity to each release and in effect make them “bigger.”
  • Prefer process over people (and trusting them). Increase non-value-add scrutiny and reporting.

There is a persistent misunderstanding about continuous anything being only an IT engineering practice

01

At the enterprise level, continuous anything focuses on:

  • Visibility of final value being provided in a high-quality and expedited manner
  • Ensuring efficiency in the organization’s delivery framework
  • Ensuring adherence to established governance and risk mitigation strategy

02

Focus of this blueprint

At the product level, continuous anything focuses on:

  • Reliability of the product delivery system
  • Use of scientific evidence for continuous improvement of the product’s delivery system
  • Orchestration of different artifacts into a single whole

03

At the functional level, continuous anything focuses on*:

  • Local functional optimization (functions = software engineering, testing, application design)
  • Automation of local functions
  • Use of patterns for standardizing inputs and functional areas

*Where necessary, practices at this level have been mentioned.

Related Info-Tech Research

Implement DevOps Practices That Work

  • Be DevOps, rather than do DevOps. DevOps is a philosophy, not an industry framework. Your organization’s culture must shift toward system-wide thinking, cross-function collaboration, and empathy.
  • Culture, learning, automation, integrated teams, and metrics and governance (CLAIM) are all critical components of effective DevOps.

Automate Testing to Get More Done

  • Optimize and automate SDLC stages to recover team capacity. Recognize that automation without optimization is a recipe for long-term pain. Do it right the first time.
  • Optimization and automation are not one-hit wonders. Technical debt is a part of software systems and never goes away. The only remedy is constant vigilance and enhancements to the processes.

The seeds of a good release are sown even before work on it begins

Pre-release practices such as requirements intake and product backlog management are important because:

  • A standard process for documentation of features and requirements helps reduce “cognitive dissonance” between business and technology teams. Clearly articulated and well-understood business needs are fundamental ingredients of a high-quality product.
  • Product backlog management done right ensures the prioritized delivery of value to stakeholders. Features can become stale or get a bump in importance, depending upon evolving circumstances. Prioritizing the backlog is, therefore, critical for ensuring time, effort, and budget are spent on things that matter.

ChatGPT Beyond the hype. What can it do for you?

Summary of the deck.

ChatGPT is a generative AI tool developed by OpenAI, a non-profit founded by Silicon Valley titans, including Elon Musk and Sam Altman. It is designed to interact with users in a way that mimics human dialogue. The tool became available via a research release on November 30, 2022, and was an immediate hit – within a week; it attracted more than a million users. Functionally, ChatGPT is designed to answer questions, but it is not the first one. The concept has existed for decades. While it is very powerful, it has also attracted criticism. 

IT Operations, strategy

Register to read more …

Explore the Secrets of IBM Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}141|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Licensing
  • Parent Category Link: /licensing
  • IBM customers want to make effective use of their paid-up licenses to avoid overspending and stay compliant with agreements.
  • Each IBM software product is subject to different rules.
  • Clients control and have responsibility for aligning usage and payments. Over time, the usage of the software may be out of sync with what the client has paid for, resulting in either overspending or violation of the licensing agreement.
  • IBM audits software usage in order to generate revenue from non-compliant customers.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • You have a lot of work to do if you haven’t been paying attention to your IBM software.
  • Focus on needs first. Conduct and document a thorough requirements assessment. Well-documented needs will be your core asset in negotiation.
  • Know what’s in IBM’s terms and conditions. Failure to understand these can lead to major penalties after an audit.
  • Review your agreements and entitlements quarterly. IBM may have changed the rules, and you have almost certainly changed your usage.

Impact and Result

  • Establish clear licensing requirements.
  • Maintain an effective process for managing your IBM license usage and compliance.
  • Identify any cost-reduction opportunities.
  • Prepare for penalty-free IBM audits.

Explore the Secrets of IBM Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read this Executive Brief to understand why you need to invest effort in managing usage and licensing of your IBM software.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Review terms and conditions for your IT contract

Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid the common mistakes of overspending on IBM licensing or failing an IBM audit.

  • IBM Passport Advantage Software RFQ Template
  • IBM 3-Year Bundled Price Analysis Tool
[infographic]

Maintain an Organized Portfolio

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}432|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $3,059 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • All too often, the portfolio of programs and projects looks more like a random heap than a strategically organized and balanced collection of investments that will drive the business forward.
  • Portfolio managers know that with the right kind of information and the right level of process maturity they can get better results through the portfolio; however, organizations often assume (falsely) that the required level of maturity is out of reach from their current state and perpetually delay improvements.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • The information needed to define clear and usable criteria for organizing the portfolio of programs and projects already exists. Portfolio managers only need to identify the sources of that information and institute processes for regularly reviewing that information in order to define those criteria.
  • Once a portfolio manager has a clear idea of the goals and constraints that shape what ought to be included (or removed) from the portfolio and once these have been translated into clear and usable portfolio criteria, basic portfolio management processes can be instituted to ensure that these criteria are used consistently throughout the various stages of the project lifecycle.
  • Portfolio management frameworks and processes do not need to be built from scratch. Well-known frameworks – such as the one outlined in COBIT 5 APO05 – can be instituted in a way that will allow even low-maturity organizations to start organizing their portfolio.
  • Organizations do not need to grow into portfolio management frameworks to get the benefits of an organized portfolio; instead, they can grow within such frameworks.

Impact and Result

  • An organized portfolio will ensure that the projects and programs included in it are strategically aligned and can actually be executed within the finite constraints of budgetary and human resource capacity.
  • Portfolio managers are better empowered to make decisions about which projects should be included in the portfolio (and when) and are better empowered to make the very tough decisions about which projects should be removed from the portfolio (i.e. cancelled).
  • Building and maturing a portfolio management framework will more fully integrate the PMO into the broader IT management and governance frameworks, making it a more integral part of strategic decisions and a better business partner in the long run.

Maintain an Organized Portfolio Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should maintain an organized portfolio of programs and projects, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Assess the current state of the portfolio and PPM processes

Analyze the current mix of programs and projects in your portfolio and assess the maturity of your current PPM processes.

  • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 1: Assess the Current State of the Portfolio and PPM Processes
  • Project Portfolio Organizer
  • COBIT APO05 (Manage Portfolio) Alignment Workbook

2. Enhance portfolio organization through improved PPM criteria and processes

Enhance and optimize your portfolio management processes to ensure portfolio criteria are clearly defined and consistently applied across the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

  • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 2: Enhance Portfolio Organization Through Improved PPM Criteria and Processes
  • Portfolio Management Standard Operating Procedures

3. Implement improved portfolio management practices

Implement your portfolio management improvement initiatives to ensure long-term sustainable adoption of new PPM practices.

  • Maintain an Organized Portfolio – Phase 3: Implement Improved Portfolio Management Practices
  • Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap Tool
[infographic]

Workshop: Maintain an Organized Portfolio

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Assess Portfolio Mix and Portfolio Process Current State

The Purpose

Analyze the current mix of the portfolio to determine how to better organize it according to organizational goals and constraints.

Assess which PPM processes need to be enhanced to better organize the portfolio.

Key Benefits Achieved

An analysis of the existing portfolio of projects (highlighting areas of concern).

An analysis of the maturity of current PPM processes and their ability to support the maintenance of an organized portfolio.

Activities

1.1 Pre-work: Prepare a complete project list.

1.2 Define existing portfolio categories, criteria, and targets.

1.3 Analyze the current portfolio mix.

1.4 Identify areas of concern with current portfolio mix.

1.5 Review the six COBIT sub-processes for portfolio management (APO05.01-06).

1.6 Assess the degree to which these sub-processes have been currently achieved at the organization.

1.7 Assess the degree to which portfolio-supporting IT governance and management processes exist.

1.8 Perform a gap analysis.

Outputs

Analysis of the current portfolio mix

Assessment of COBIT alignment and gap analysis.

2 Define Portfolio Target Mix, Criteria, and Roadmap

The Purpose

Define clear and usable portfolio criteria.

Record/design portfolio management processes that will support the consistent use of portfolio criteria at all stages of the project lifecycle.

Key Benefits Achieved

Clearly defined and usable portfolio criteria.

A portfolio management framework that supports the consistent use of the portfolio criteria across all stages of the project lifecycle.

Activities

2.1 Identify determinants of the portfolio mix, criteria, and constraints.

2.2 Define the target mix, portfolio criteria, and portfolio metrics.

2.3 Identify sources of funding and resourcing.

2.4 Review and record the portfolio criteria based upon the goals and constraints.

2.5 Create a PPM improvement roadmap.

Outputs

Portfolio criteria

Portfolio metrics for intake, monitoring, closure, termination, reprioritization, and benefits tracking

Portfolio Management Improvement Roadmap

3 Design Improved Portfolio Sub-Processes

The Purpose

Ensure that the portfolio criteria are used to guide decision making at each stage of the project lifecycle when making decisions about which projects to include or remove from the portfolio.

Key Benefits Achieved

Processes that support decision making based upon the portfolio criteria.

Processes that ensure the portfolio remains consistently organized according to the portfolio criteria.

Activities

3.1 Ensure that the metrics used for each sub-process are based upon the standard portfolio criteria.

3.2 Establish the roles, accountabilities, and responsibilities for each sub-process needing improvement.

3.3 Outline the workflow for each sub-process needing improvement.

Outputs

A RACI chart for each sub-process

A workflow for each sub-process

4 Change Impact Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement Plan

The Purpose

Ensure that the portfolio management improvement initiatives are sustainably adopted in the long term.

Key Benefits Achieved

Stakeholder engagement.

Sustainable long-term adoption of the improved portfolio management practices.

Activities

4.1 Conduct a change impact analysis.

4.2 Create a stakeholder engagement plan.

Outputs

Change Impact Analysis

Stakeholder Engagement Plan

Completed Portfolio Management SOP

Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}216|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $25,860 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
  • Most IT organizations do not have standard RFP templates and tools.
  • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements.
  • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
  • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time that is required to perform an effective RFP.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Vendors generally do not like RFPs
    Vendors view RFPs as time consuming and costly to respond to and believe that the decision is already made.
  • Dont ignore the benefits of an RFI
    An RFI is too often overlooked as a tool for collecting information from vendors about their product offerings and services.
  • Leverage a pre-proposal conference to maintain an equal and level playing field
    Pre-proposal conference is a convenient and effective way to respond to vendors’ questions ensuring all vendors have the same information to provide a quality response.

Impact and Result

  • A bad or incomplete RFP results in confusing and incomplete vendor RFP responses which consume time and resources.
  • Incomplete or misunderstood requirements add cost to your project due to the change orders required to complete the project.

Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Storyboard – Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results

Discover a proven process for your RFPs. Review Info-Tech’s process and understand how you can prevent your organization from leaking negotiation leverage while preventing vendors from taking control of your RFP. Our 7-phase process prevents a bad RFP from taking your time, money, and resources.

  • Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process Storyboard

2. Define your RFP Requirements Tool – A convenient tool to gather your requirements and align them to your negotiation strategy.

Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.

  • RFP Requirements Worksheet

3. RFP Development Suite of Tools – Use Info-Tech’s RFP, pricing, and vendor response tools and templates to increase your efficiency in your RFP process.

Configure this time-saving suite of tools to your organizational culture, needs, and most importantly the desired outcome of your RFP initiative. This suite contains four unique RFP templates. Evaluate which template is appropriate for your RFP. Also included in this suite are a response evaluation guidebook and several evaluation scoring tools along with a template to report the RFP results to stakeholders.

  • RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
  • Vendor Pricing Tool
  • Lean RFP Template
  • Short-Form RFP Template
  • Long-Form RFP Template
  • Excel Form RFP Tool
  • RFP Evaluation Guidebook
  • RFP Evaluation Tool
  • Vendor TCO Tool
  • Consolidated Vendor RFP Response Evaluation Summary
  • Vendor Recommendation Presentation

Infographic

Workshop: Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Foundation for Creating Requirements

The Purpose

Problem Identification

Key Benefits Achieved

Current process mapped and requirements template configured

Activities

1.1 Overview and level-setting

1.2 Identify needs and drivers

1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

Outputs

Map Your Process With Gap Identification

Requirements Template

Map Your Process With Gap Identification

Requirements Template

Map Your Process With Gap Identification

Requirements Template

Map Your Process With Gap Identification

Requirements Template

2 Creating a Sourcing Process

The Purpose

Define Success Target

Key Benefits Achieved

Baseline RFP and evaluation templates

Activities

2.1 Create and issue RFP

2.2 Evaluate responses/proposals and negotiate the agreement

2.3 Purchase goods and services

Outputs

RFP Calendar Tool

RFP Evaluation Guidebook

RFP Respondent Evaluation Tool

3 Configure Templates

The Purpose

Configure Templates

Key Benefits Achieved

Configured Templates

Activities

3.1 Assess and measure

3.2 Review templates

Outputs

Long-Form RFP Template

Short-Form RFP Template

Excel-Based RFP Template

Further reading

Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process

Lack of RFP Process Causes...
  • Stress
  • Confusion
  • Frustration
  • Directionless
  • Exhaustion
  • Uncertainty
  • Disappointment
Solution: RFP Process
Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.
  • Best value solutions
  • Right-sized solutions
  • Competitive Negotiations
  • Better requirements that feed negotiations
  • Internal alignment on requirements and solutions
  • Vendor Management Governance Plan
Requirements
  • Risk
  • Legal
  • Support
  • Security
  • Technical
  • Commercial
  • Operational
  • Vendor Management Governance
Templates, Tools, Governance
  • RFP Template
  • Your Contracts
  • RFP Procedures
  • Pricing Template
  • Evaluation Guide
  • Evaluation Matrix
Vendor Management
  • Scorecards
  • Classification
  • Business Review Meetings
  • Key Performance Indicators
  • Contract Management
  • Satisfaction Survey

Analyst Perspective

Consequences of a bad RFP

Photo of Steven Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group

“A bad request for proposal (RFP) is the gift that keeps on taking – your time, your resources, your energy, and your ability to accomplish your goal. A bad RFP is ineffective and incomplete, it creates more questions than it answers, and, perhaps most importantly, it does not meet your organization’s expectations.”

Steven Jeffery
Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

  • Most IT organizations are absent of standard RFP templates, tools, and processes.
  • Many RFPs lack sufficient requirements from across the business (Legal, Finance, Security, Risk, Procurement, VMO).
  • Most RFP team members are not adequately trained on RFP best practices.
  • Most IT departments underestimate the amount of time required to perform an effective RFP.
  • An ad hoc sourcing process is a common recipe for vendor performance failure.

Common Obstacles

  • Lack of time
  • Lack of resources
  • Right team members not engaged
  • Poorly defined requirements
  • Too difficult to change supplier
  • Lack of a process
  • Lack of adequate tools/processes
  • Lack of a vendor communications plan that includes all business stakeholders.
  • Lack of consensus as to what the ideal result should look like.

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Establish a repeatable, consistent RFP process that maintains negotiation leverage and includes all key components.
  • Create reusable templates to expedite the RFP evaluation and selection process.
  • Maximize the competition by creating an equal and level playing field that encourages all the vendors to respond to your RFP.
  • Create a process that is clear and understandable for both the business unit and the vendor to follow.
  • Include Vendor Management concepts in the process.

Info-Tech Insight

A well planned and executed sourcing strategy that focuses on solid requirements, evaluation criteria, and vendor management will improve vendor performance.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Your challenge is to determine the best sourcing tool to obtain vendor information on capabilities, solution(s), pricing and contracting: RFI, RFP, eRFX.

Depending on your organization’s knowledge of the market, your available funding, and where you are in the sourcing process, there are several approaches to getting the information you need.

An additional challenge is to answer the question “What is the purpose of our RFX?”

If you do not have in-depth knowledge of the market, available solutions, and viable vendors, you may want to perform an RFI to provide available market information to guide your RFP strategy.

If you have defined requirements, approved funding, and enough time, you can issue a detailed, concise RFP.

If you have “the basics” about the solution to be acquired and are on a tight timeframe, an “enhanced RFI” may fit your needs.

This blueprint will provide you with the tools and processes and insights to affect the best possible outcome.

Executive Summary

Common Obstacles

  • Lack of process/tools
  • Lack of input from stakeholders
  • Stakeholders circumventing the process to vendors
  • Vendors circumventing the process to key stakeholders
  • Lack of clear, concise, and thoroughly articulated requirements
  • Waiting until the vendor is selected to start contract negotiations
  • Waiting until the RFP responses are back to consider vendor management requirements
  • Lack of clear communication strategy to the vendor community that the team adheres to

Many organizations underestimate the time commitment for an RFP

70 Days is the average duration of an IT RFP.

The average number of evaluators is 5-6

4 Is the average number of vendor submissions, each requiring an average of two to three hours to review. (Source: Bonfire, 2019. Note: The 2019 Bonfire report on the “State of the RFP” is the most recent published.)

“IT RFPs take the longest from posting to award and have the most evaluators. This may be because IT is regarded as a complex subject requiring complex evaluation. Certainly, of all categories, IT offers the most alternative solutions. The technology is also changing rapidly, as are the requirements of IT users – the half-life of an IT requirement is less than six months (half the requirements specified now will be invalid six months from now). And when the RFP process takes up two of those months, vendors may be unable to meet changed requirements when the time to implement arrives. This is why IT RFPs should specify the problem to be resolved rather than the solution to be provided. If the problem resolution is the goal, vendors are free to implement the latest technologies to meet that need.” (Bonfire, “2019 State of the RFP”)

Why Vendors Don’t Like RFPs

Vendors’ win rate

44%

Vendors only win an average of 44% of the RFPs they respond to (Loopio, 2022).
High cost to respond

3-5%

Vendors budget 3-5% of the anticipated contract value to respond (LinkedIn, 2017, Note: LinkedIn source is the latest information available).
Time spent writing response

23.8 hours

Vendors spend on average 23.8 hours to write or respond to your RFP (Marketingprofs, 2021).

Negative effects on your organization from a lack of RFP process

Visualization titled 'Lack of RFP Process Causes' with the following seven items listed.

Stress, because roles and responsibilities aren’t clearly defined and communication is haphazard, resulting in strained relationships.

Confusion, because you don’t know what the expected or desired results are.

Directionless, because you don’t know where the team is going.

Uncertainty, with many questions of your own and many more from other team members.

Frustration, because of all the questions the vendors ask as a result of unclear or incomplete requirements.

Exhaustion, because reviewing RFP responses of insufficient quality is tedious.

Disappointment in the results your company realizes.

(Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP)

Info-Tech’s approach

Develop an inclusive and thorough approach to the RFP Process

Steps in an RFP Process, 'Identify Need', 'Define Business Requirements', 'Gain Business Authorization', 'Perform RFI/RFP', 'Negotiate Agreement', 'Purchase Good and Services', and 'Assess and Measure Performance'.

The Info-Tech difference:

  1. The secret to managing an RFP is to make it as manageable and as thorough as possible. The RFP process should be like any other aspect of business – by developing a standard process. With a process in place, you are better able to handle whatever comes your way, because you know the steps you need to follow to produce a top-notch RFP.
  2. The business then identifies the need for more information about a product/service or determines that a purchase is required.
  3. A team of stakeholders from each area impacted gather all business, technical, legal, and risk requirements. What are the expectations of the vendor relationship post-RFP? How will the vendors be evaluated?
  4. Based on the predetermined requirements, either an RFI or an RFP is issued to vendors with a predetermined due date.

Insight Summary

Overarching insight

Without a well defined, consistent RFP process, with input from all key stakeholders, the organization will not achieve the best possible results from its sourcing efforts.

Phase 1 insight

Vendors are choosing to not respond to RFPs due to their length and lack of complete requirements.

Phase 2 insight

Be clear and concise in stating your requirements and include, in addition to IT requirements, procurement, security, legal, and risk requirements.

Phase 3 insight

Consider adding vendor management requirements to manage the ongoing relationship post contract.

Tactical insight

Consider the RFP Evaluation Process as you draft the RFP, including weighting the RFP components. Don’t underestimate the level of effort required to effectively evaluate responses – write the RFP with this in mind.

Tactical insight

Provide strict, prescriptive instructions detailing how the vendor should submit their responses. Controlling vendor responses will increase your team’s efficiency in evaluations while providing ease of reference responses across multiple vendors.

Key deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Key deliverables:

Info-Tech provides you with the tools you need to go to market in the most efficient manner possible, with guidance on how to achieve your goals.

Sample of

Long-Form RFP Template
For when you have complete requirements and time to develop a thorough RFP.
Sample of the Long-Form RFP Template deliverable. Short-Form RFP Template
When the requirements are not as extensive, time is short, and you are familiar with the market.
Sample of the Short-Form RFP Template deliverable.
Lean RFP Template
When you have limited time and some knowledge of the market and wish to include only a few vendors.
Sample of the Lean RFP Template deliverable. Excel-Form RFP Template
When there are many requirements, many options, multiple vendors, and a broad evaluation team.
Sample of the Excel-Form RFP Template deliverable.

Blueprint benefits

IT Benefits
  • Side-by-side comparison of vendor capabilities
  • Pricing alternatives
  • No surprises
  • Competitive solutions to deliver the best results
Mutual IT and Business Benefits
  • Reduced time to implement
  • Improved alignment between IT /Business
  • Improved vendor performance
  • Improved vendor relations
Business Benefits
  • Budget alignment, reduced cost
  • Best value
  • Risk mitigation
  • Legal and risk protections

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

A typical GI is seven to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Phase 6

Phase 7

Call #1: Identify the need Call #3: Gain business authorization Call #5: Negotiate agreement strategy Call #7: Assess and measure performance
Call #2: Define business requirements Call #4: Review and perform the RFX or RFP Call #6: Purchase goods and services

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3
Activities
Answer “What problem do we need to solve?”

1.1 Overview and level-setting

1.2 Identify needs and drivers

1.3 Define and prioritize requirements

1.4 Gain business authorization and ensure internal alignment

Define what success looks like?

2.1 Create and issue RFP

2.2 Evaluate responses/ proposals and negotiate the agreement.

2.3 Purchase goods and services

Configure Templates

3.1 Assess and measure

3.2 Review tools

Deliverables
  1. Map your process with gap identification
  2. RFP Requirements Worksheet
  1. RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool
  2. RFP Evaluation Guidebook
  3. RFP Evaluation Tool
  1. Long-form RFP Template
  2. Short-form RFP Template
  3. Excel-based RFP Tool
  4. Lean RFP Template

Phase 1

Identify Need

Steps

1.1 Establish the need to either purchase goods/services (RFP) or acquire additional information from the market (RFI).

Steps in an RFP Process with the first step, 'Identify Need', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Business stakeholders
  • IT
  • Sourcing/Procurement
  • Finance

Identify the need based on business requirements, changing technology, increasing vendor costs, expiring contracts, and changing regulatory requirements.

Outcomes of this phase

Agreement on the need to go to market to make a purchase (RFP) or to acquire additional information (RFI) along with a high-level agreement on requirements, rough schedule (is there time to do a full blown RFP or are you time constrained, which may result in an eRFP) and the RFP team is identified.

Identify Need
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Identify the Need for Your RFP

  • An RFP is issued to the market when you are certain that you intend to purchase a product/service and have identified an adequate vendor base from which to choose as a result of:

    • IT Strategy
    • Changes in technology
    • Marketplace assessment
    • Contract expiration/renewal
    • Changes in regulatory requirements
    • Changes in the business’ requirements
  • An RFI is issued to the market when you are uncertain as to available technologies or supplier capabilities and need budgetary costs for planning purposes.
  • Be sure to choose the right RFx tool for your situation!
Stock photo of a pen circling the word 'needs' on a printed document.

Phase 2

Define Your RFP Requirements

Steps

2.1 Define and classify the technical, business, financial, legal, and support and security requirements for your business.

Steps in an RFP Process with the second step, 'Define Business Requirements', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • IT
  • Legal
  • Finance
  • Risk management
  • Sourcing/Procurement
  • Business stakeholders

Outcomes of this phase

A detailed list of required business, technical, legal and procurement requirements classified as to absolute need(s), bargaining and concession need(s), and “nice to haves.”

Define Business Requirements

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Define RFP Requirements

Key things to consider when defining requirements

  • Must be inclusive of the needs of all stakeholders: business, technical, financial, and legal
  • Strive for clarity and completeness in each area of consideration.
  • Begin defining your “absolute,” “bargaining,” “concession,” and ‘”dropped/out of scope” requirements to streamline the evaluation process.
  • Keep the requirements identified as “absolute” to a minimum, because vendors that do not meet absolute requirements will be removed from consideration.
  • Do you have a standard contract that can be included or do you want to review the vendor’s contract?
  • Don’t forget Data Security!
  • Begin defining your vendor selection criteria.
  • What do you want the end result to look like?
  • How will you manage the selected vendor after the contract? Include key VM requirements.
  • Defining requirements can’t be rushed or you’ll find yourself answering many questions, which may create confusion.
  • Collect all your current spend and budget considerations regarding the needed product(s) and service(s).

“Concentrate on the needs of the organization and not the wants of the individuals when creating requirements to avoid scope creep.” (Donna Glidden, ITRG Research Director)

Leverage the “ABCD” approach found in our Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively blueprint:
https://tymansgrpup.com/research/ss/prepare-for-negotiations-more-effectively

2.1 Prioritize your requirements

1 hr to several days

Input: List of all requirements from IT and IT Security, Business, Sourcing/Procurement, Risk Management, and Legal

Output: Prioritized list of RFP requirements approved by the stakeholder team

Materials: The RFP Requirements Worksheet

Participants: All stakeholders impacted by the RFP: IT, IT Security, the Business, Sourcing/ Procurement, Risk Management, Legal

  1. Use this tool to assist you and your team in documenting the requirements for your RFP. Leverage it to collect and categorize your requirements in preparation for negotiations. Use the results of this tool to populate the requirements section of your RFP.
  2. As a group, review each of the requirements and determine their priority as they will ultimately relate to the negotiations.
    • Prioritizing your requirements will set up your negotiation strategy and streamline the process.
    • By establishing the priority of each requirement upfront, you will save time and effort in the selection process.
  3. Review RFP requirements with stakeholders for approval.

Download the RFP Requirements Worksheet

Phase 3

Gain Business Authorization

Steps

3.1 Obtain business authorization from the business, technology, finance and Sourcing/Procurement

Steps in an RFP Process with the third step, 'Gain Business Authorization', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Business stakeholders
  • Technology and finance (depending upon the business)
  • Sourcing/Procurement

Outcomes of this phase

Approval by all key stakeholders to proceed with the issuing of the RFP and to make a purchase as a result.

Gain Business Authorization

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Gain Business Authorization

Gain authorization for your RFP from all relevant stakeholders
  • Alignment of stakeholders
  • Agreement on final requirements
  • Financial authorization
  • Commitment of resources
  • Agreement on what constitutes vendor qualification
  • Finalization of selection criteria and their prioritization

Obtaining cross-function alignment will clear the way for contract, SOW, and budget approvals and not waste any of your and your vendor’s resources in performing an RFP that your organization is not ready to implement or invest financial and human resources in.

Stock photo of the word 'AUTHORIZED' stamped onto a white background with a much smaller stamp laying beside it.

Phase 4

Create and Issue

Steps

4.1 Build your RFP

4.2 Decide RFI or not

4.3 Create your RFP

4.4 Receive & answer questions

4.5 Perform Pre-Proposal Conference

4.6 Evaluate responses

Steps in an RFP Process with the fourth step, 'Perform RFI/RFP', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • The RFP owner
  • IT
  • Business SMEs/stakeholders

Outcomes of this phase

RFP package is issued to vendors and includes the date of the Pre-Proposal Conference, which should be held shortly after RFP release and includes all parties.

SME’s/stakeholders participate in providing answers to RFP contact for response to vendors.

Create and Issue Your RFP/RFI

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

Build your RFP with evaluation in mind

Easing evaluation frustrations

At the beginning of your RFP creation process consider how your requirements will impact the vendor’s response. Concentrate on the instructions you provide the vendors and how you wish to receive their responses. View the RFP through the lens of the vendors and envision how they are going to respond to the proposal.

Limiting the number of requirements included in the RFP will increase the evaluation team’s speed when reviewing vendors’ responses. This is accomplished by not asking questions for common features and functionality that all vendors provide. Don’t ask multiple questions within a question. Avoid “lifting” vendor-specific language to copy into the RFP as this will signal to vendors who their competition might be and may deter their participation. Concentrate your requirement questions to those areas that are unique to your solution to reduce the amount of time required to evaluate the vendors’ response.

Things to Consider When Creating Your RFP:

  • Consistency is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
  • Provide templates, such as an Excel worksheet, for the vendor’s pricing submissions and for its responses to close-ended questions.
  • Give detailed instructions on how the vendor should organize their response.
  • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response to must-have requirements.
  • Organize your requirements and objectives in a numerical outline and have the vendor respond in the same manner, such as the following:
    • 1
    • 1.1
    • 1.1.1

Increase your response quality

Inconsistent formatting of vendor responses prevents an apples-to-apples evaluation between vendor responses. Evaluation teams are frequently challenged and are unable to evaluate vendors’ responses equally against each other for the following reasons:

Challenges
  • Vendor responses are submitted with different and confusing nomenclature
  • Inconsistent format in response
  • Disparate order of sections in the vendors responses
  • Different style of outlining their responses, e.g. 1.1 vs. I.(i)
  • Pricing proposal included throughout their response
  • Responses are comingled with marketing messages
  • Vendor answers to requirements or objectives are not consolidated in a uniform manner
  • Disparate descriptions for response subsections
Prevention
  • Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their response:
    • How to format and outline the response
    • No marketing material
    • No pricing in the body of the response
  • Provide templates for pricing, technical, operational, and legal aspects.

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

Perform Request for Information

Don’t underestimate the importance of the RFI

As the name implies, a request for information (RFI) is a tool for collecting information from vendors about the companies, their products, and their services. We find RFIs useful when faced with a lot of vendors that we don’t know much about, when we want to benchmark the marketplace for products and services, including budgetary information, and when we have identified more potential vendors than we care to commit a full RFP to.

RFIs are simpler and less time-consuming than RFPs to prepare and evaluate, so it can make a lot of sense to start with an RFI. Eliminating unqualified vendors from further consideration will save your team from weeding through RFP responses that do not meet your objectives. For their part, your vendors will appreciate your efforts to determine up-front which of them are the best bets before asking them to spend resources and money producing a costly proposal.

While many organizations rarely use RFIs, they can be an effective tool in the vendor manager’s toolbox when used at the right time in the right way. RFIs can be deployed in competitive targeted negotiations.

A Lean RFP is a two-stage strategy that speeds up the typical RFP process. The first stage is like an RFI on steroids, and the second stage is targeted competitive negotiation.

Don’t rely solely on the internet to qualify vendors; use an RFI to acquire additional information before finalizing an RFP.

4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP

Several days
  1. Create an RFI with all of the normal and customary components. Next, add a few additional RFP-like requirements (e.g. operational, technical, and legal requirements). Make sure you include a request for budgetary pricing and provide any significant features and functionality requirements so that the vendors have enough information to propose solutions. In addition, allow the vendors to ask questions through your single point of coordination and share answers with all of the vendors. Finally, notify the vendors that you will not be doing an RFP.
  2. Review the vendors’ proposals and evaluate their proposals against your requirements along with their notional or budgetary pricing.
  3. Have the evaluators utilize the Lean RFP Template to record their scores accordingly.
  4. After collecting the scores from the evaluators, consolidate the scores together to discuss which vendors – we recommend two or three – you want to present demos.
  5. Based on the vendors’ demos, the team selects at least two vendors to negotiate contract and pricing terms with intent of selecting the best-value vendor.
  6. The Lean RFP shortens the typical RFP process, maintains leverage for your organization, and works great with low- to medium-spend items (however your organization defines them). You’ll get clarification on vendors’ competencies and capabilities, obtain a fair market price, and meet your internal clients’ aggressive timelines while still taking steps to protect your organization.

Download the Lean RFP Template

Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

4.2.1 In a hurry? Consider a Lean RFP instead of an RFP continued

Input

  • List of technical, operational, business, and legal requirements
  • Budgetary pricing ask

Output

  • A Lean RFP document that includes the primary components of an RFP
  • Lean RFP vendors response evaluation

Materials

  • Lean RFP Template
  • RFP Evaluation Tool
  • Contracting requirements
  • Pricing

Participants

  • IT
  • Business
  • Finance
  • Sourcing/Procurement

Case Study

A Lean RFP saves time
INDUSTRY: Pharmaceutical
SOURCE: Guided Implementation
Challenge
  • The vendor manager (VM) was experiencing pressure to shorten the expected five-month duration to perform an RFP for software that planned, coordinated, and submitted regulatory documents to the US Food and Drug Administration.
  • The VM team was not completely familiar with the qualified vendors and their solutions.
  • The organization wanted to capitalize on this opportunity to enhance its current processes with the intent of improving efficiencies in documentation submissions.
Solution
  • Leveraging the Lean RFP process, the team reduced the 200+ RFP questionnaire into a more manageable list of 34 significant questions to evaluate vendor responses.
  • The team issued the Lean RFP and requested the vendors’ responses in three weeks instead of the five weeks planned for the RFP process.
  • The team modified the scoring process to utilize a simple weighted-scoring methodology, using a scale of 1-5.
Results
  • The Lean RFP scaled back the complexity of a large RFP.
  • The customer received three vendor responses ranging from 19 to 43 pages and 60-80% shorter than expected if the RFP had been used. This allowed the team to reduce the evaluation period by three weeks.
  • The duration of the RFx process was reduced by more than two months – from five months to just under three months.

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

4.3.1 RFP Calendar

1 hour

Input: List duration in days of key activities, RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool, For all vendor-inclusive meetings, include the dates on your RFP calendar and reference them in the RFP

Output: A timeline to complete the RFP that has the support of each stakeholder involved in the process and that allows for a complete and thorough vendor response.

Materials: RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  1. As a group, identify the key activities to be accomplished and the amount of time estimated to complete each task:
    1. Identify who is ultimately accountable for the completion of each task
    2. Determine the length of time required to complete each task
  2. Use the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool to build the calendar specific to your needs.
  3. Include vendor-related dates in the RFP, i.e., Pre-Proposal Conference, deadline for RFP questions as well as response.

Download the RFP Calendar and Key Date Tool

Draft your RFP

Create and issue your RFP, which should contain at least the following:
  • The ability for the vendors to ask clarifying questions (in writing, sent to the predetermined RFP contact)
  • Pre-Proposal/Pre-Bid Conference schedule where vendors can receive the same answer to all clarifying written questions
  • A calendar of events (block the time on stakeholder calendars – see template).
  • Instructions to potential vendors on how they should construct and return their response to enable effective and timely evaluation of each offer.
  • Requirements; for example: Functional, Operational, Technical, and Legal.
  • Specification drawings as if applicable.
  • Consider adding vendor management requirements – how do you want to manage the relationship after the deal is done?
  • A pricing template for vendors to complete that facilitates comparison across multiple vendors.
  • Contract terms required by your legal team (or your standard contract for vendors to redline as part of their response and rated/ranked accordingly).
  • Create your RFP with the evaluation process and team in mind to ensure efficiency and timeliness in the process. Be clear, concise, and complete in the document.
  • Consistency and completeness is the foundation for ease of evaluation.
  • Give vendors detailed instruction on how to structure and organize their response.
  • Limit the number of open-ended questions requiring a long narrative response.
  • Be sure to leverage Info-Tech’s proven and field-tested Short-Form, Long-Form, and Lean RFP Templates provided in this blueprint.

Create a template for the vendors’ response

Dictating to the vendors the format of their response will increase your evaluation efficiency
Narrative Response:

Create either a Word or Excel document that provides the vendor with an easy vehicle for their response. This template should include the question identifier that ties the response back to the requirement in the RFP. Instruct vendors to include the question number on any ancillary materials they wish to include.

Pricing Response:

Create a separate Excel template that the vendors must use to provide their financial offer. This template should include pricing for hardware, software, training, implementation, and professional services, as well as placeholders for any additional fees.

Always be flexible in accepting alternative proposals after the vendor has responded with the information you requested in the format you require.

Stock image of a paper checklist in front of a laptop computer's screen.

4.3.2 Vendor Pricing Tool

1 hour

Input: Identify pricing components for hardware, software, training, consulting/services, support, and additional licenses (if needed)

Output: Vendor Pricing Tool

Materials: RFP Requirements Worksheet, Pricing template

Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  1. Using a good pricing template will prevent vendors from providing pricing offers that create a strategic advantage designed to prevent you from performing an apples-to-apples comparison.
  2. Provide specific instructions as to how the vendor is to organize their pricing response, which should be submitted separate from the RFP response.
  3. Configure and tailor pricing templates that are specific to the product and/or services.
  4. Upon receipt of all the vendor’s responses, simply cut and paste their total response to your base template for an easy side-by-side pricing comparison.
  5. Do not allow vendors to submit financial proposals outside of your template.

Download the Vendor Pricing Tool

Three RFP Templates

Choose the right template for the right sourcing initiative

  • Short-Form
  • Use the Short-Form RFP Template for simple, non-complex solutions that are medium to low dollar amounts that do not require numerous requirements.

  • Long-Form
  • We recommend the Long-Form RFP Template for highly technical and complex solutions that are high dollar and have long implementation duration.

  • Excel-Form
  • Leverage the Excel-Form RFP Tool for requirements that are more specific in nature to evaluate a vendor’s capability for their solution. This template is designed to be complete and inclusive of the RFP process, e.g., requirements, vendor response, and vendor response evaluation scoring.

Like tools in a carpenters’ tool box or truck, there is no right or wrong template for any job. Take into account your organization culture, resources available, time frame, policies, and procedures to pick the right tool for the job. (Steve Jeffery, Principal Research Director, Vendor Management, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

4.3.3 Short-Form RFP Template

1-2 hours

Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all participants agree to

Materials: Short-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  • This is a less complex RFP that has relatively basic requirements and perhaps a small window in which the vendors can respond. As with the long-form RFP, exhibits are placed at the end of the RFP, an arrangement that saves both your team and the vendors time. Of course, the short-form RFP contains less-specific instructions, guidelines, and rules for vendors’ proposal submissions.
  • We find that short-form RFPs are a good choice when you need to use something more than a request for quote (RFQ) but less than an RFP running 20 or more pages. It’s ideal, for example, when you want to send an RFP to only one vendor or to acquire items such as office supplies, contingent labor, or commodity items that don’t require significant vendor risk assessment.

Download the Short-Form RFP Template

4.3.4 Long-Form RFP Template

1-3 hours

Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

Materials: Long-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  • A long-form or major RFP is an excellent tool for more complex and complicated requirements. This template is for a baseline RFP.
  • It starts with best-in-class RFP terms and conditions that are essential to maintaining your control throughout the RFP process. The specific requirements for the business, functional, technical, legal, and pricing areas should be included in the exhibits at the end of the template. That makes it easier to tailor the RFP for each deal, since you and your team can quickly identify specific areas that need modification. Grouping the exhibits together also makes it convenient for both your team to review and the vendors to respond.
  • You can use this sample RFP as the basis for your template RFP, taking it all as is or picking and choosing the sections that best meet the mission and objectives of the RFP and your organization.

Download the Long-Form RFP Template

4.3.5 Excel-Form RFP Tool

Several weeks

Input: List of technical, legal, business, and data security requirements

Output: Full set of requirements, prioritized, that all stakeholders agree to

Materials: Excel-Form RFP Template, Vendor Pricing Tool, Supporting exhibits

Participants: IT management, Business stakeholder(s), Legal (as required), Risk management (as required), Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  • The Excel-Form RFP Tool is used as an alternative to the other RFP toolsets if you have multiple requirements and have multiple vendors to choose from.
  • Requirements are written as a “statement” and the vendor can select from five answers as to their ability to meet the requirements, with the ability to provide additional context and materials to augment their answers, as needed.
  • Requirements are listed separately in each tab, for example, Business, Legal, Technical, Security, Support, Professional Services, etc.

Download the Excel-Form RFP Template

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

Answer Vendor Questions

Maintaining your equal and level playing field among vendors

  • Provide an adequate amount of time from the RFP issue date to the deadline for vendor questions. There may be multiple vendor staff/departments that need to read the RFP and then discuss their response approach and gather any clarifying questions, so we generally recommend three to five business days.
  • There should be one point of contact for all Q&A, which should be submitted in writing via email only. Be sure to plan for enough time to get the answers back from the RFP stakeholders.
  • After the deadline, collect all Q&A and begin the process of consolidating into one document.
Large silver question mark.
  • Be sure to anonymize both vendor questions and your responses, so as not to reveal who asked or answered the question.
  • Send the document to all RFP respondents via your sourcing tool or BCC in an email to the point of contact, with read receipt requested. That way, you can track who has received and opened the correspondence.
  • Provide the answers a few days prior to the Pre-Proposal Conference to allow all respondents time to review the document and prepare any additional questions.
  • Begin the preparation for the Pre-Proposal Conference.

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

Conduct Pre-Proposal Conference

Maintain an equal and level playing field

  • Consolidate all Q&A to be presented to all vendors during the Pre-Proposal Conference.
  • If the Pre-Proposal Conference is conducted via conference call, be sure to record the session and advise all participants at the beginning of the call.
  • Be sure to have key stakeholders present on the call to answer questions.
  • Read each question and answer, after which ask if there are any follow up questions. Be sure to capture them and then add them to the Q&A document.
  • Remind respondents that no further questions will be entertained during the remainder of the RFP response period.
  • Send the updated and completed document to all vendors (even if circumstances prevented their attending the Pre-Proposal Conference). Use the same process as when you sent out the initial answers: via email, blind copy the respondents and request read/receipt.

“Using a Pre-Proposal Conference allows you to reinforce that there is a level playing field for all of the vendors…that each vendor has an equal chance to earn your business. This encourages and maximizes competition, and when that happens, the customer wins.” (Phil Bode, Principal Research Director, Co-Author: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Info-Tech Research Group)

Pre-Proposal Conference Agenda

Modify this agenda for your specific organization’s culture
  1. Opening Remarks & Welcome – RFP Manager
    1. Agenda review
    2. Purpose of the Pre-Proposal Conference
  2. Review Agenda
    1. Introduction of your (customer) attendees
  3. Participating Vendor Introduction (company name)
  4. Executive or Sr. Leadership Comments (limit to five minutes)
    1. Importance of the RFP
    2. High-level business objective or definition of success
  5. Review Key Dates in the RFP

(Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)
  1. Review of any Technical Drawings or Information
    1. Key technical requirements and constraints
    2. Key infrastructure requirements and constraints
  2. Review of any complex RFP Issues
    1. Project scope/out of scope
  3. Question &Answer
    1. Vendors’ questions in alphabetical order
  4. Review of Any Specific Instructions for the Respondents
  5. Conclusion/Closing
    1. Review how to submit additional questions
    2. Remind vendors of the single point of contact

Allow your executive or leadership sponsor to leave the Pre-Proposal Conference after they provide their comments to allow them to continue their day while demonstrating to the vendors the importance of the project.

Six Steps to Perform RFI/RFP

Step 1

  • Build your RFP with evaluation in mind.

Step 2

  • RFI or no RFI
  • Consider a Lean RFP

Step 3

  • Create your RFP
  • Establish your RFP dates
  • Decide on RFP template
    • Short
    • Long
    • Excel
  • Create a template for vendors’ response
  • Create your Pricing Template

Step 4

  • Receive RFP questions from vendors
  • Review and prepare answers to questions for the Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 5

  • Conduct a Pre-Proposal Conference

Step 6

  • Receive vendors’ proposals
  • Review for compliance and completion
  • Team evaluates vendors’ proposals.
  • Prepare TCO
  • Draft executive recommendation report

Evaluate Responses

Other important information

  • Consider separating the pricing component from the RFP responses before sending them to reviewers to maintain objectivity until after you have received all ratings on the proposals themselves.
  • Each reviewer should set aside focused time to carefully read each vendor’s response
  • Read the entire vendor proposal – they spent a lot time and money responding to your request, so please read everything.
  • Remind reviewers that they should route any questions to the vendor through the RFP manager.
  • Using the predetermined ranking system for each section, rate each section of the response, capturing any notes, questions, or concerns as you proceed through the document(s).
Stock photo of a 'Rating' meter with values 'Very Bad to 'Excellent'.

Use a proven evaluation method

Two proven methods to reviewing vendors’ proposals are by response and by objective

The first, by response, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response in its entirety.

The second, reviewing by objective, is when the evaluator reviews each vendor’s response to a single objective before moving on to the next.

By Response

Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

By Objective

Two-way arrow with '+ Pros' in green on the left and 'Cons -' in red on the right.

  • Each response is thoroughly read all the way through.
  • Response inconsistencies are easily noticed.
  • Evaluators obtain a good feel for the vendor's response.
  • Evaluators will lose interest as they move from one response to another.
  • Evaluation will be biased if the beginning of response is subpar, influencing the rest of the evaluation.
  • Deficiencies of the perceived favorite vendor are overlooked.
  • Evaluators concentrate on how each objective is addressed.
  • Evaluators better understand the responses, resulting in identifying the best response for the objective.
  • Evaluators are less susceptible to supplier bias.
  • Electronic format of the response hampers response review per objective.
  • If a hard copy is necessary, converting electronic responses to hard copy is costly and cumbersome.
  • Discipline is required to score each vendor's response as they go.

Maintain evaluation objectivity by reducing response evaluation biases

Evaluation teams can be naturally biased during their review of the vendors’ responses.

You cannot eliminate bias completely – the best you can do is manage it by identifying these biases with the team and mitigating their influence in the evaluation process.

Vendor

The evaluator only trusts a certain vendor and is uncomfortable with any other vendor.
  • Evaluate the responses blind of vendor names, if possible.
Centerpiece for this table, titled 'BIAS' and surrounding by iconized representations of the four types listed.

Account Representatives

Relationships extend beyond business, and an evaluator doesn't want to jeopardize them.
  • Craft RFP objectives that are vendor neutral.

Technical

A vendor is the only technical solution the evaluator is looking for, and they will not consider anything else.
  • Conduct fair and open solution demonstrations.

Price

As humans, we can justify anything at a good price.
  • Evaluate proposals without awareness of price.

Additional insights when evaluating RFPs

When your evaluation team includes a member of the C-suite or senior leadership, ensure you give them extra time to sufficiently review the vendor's responses. When your questions require a definitive “Yes”/“True” or “No”/“False” responses, we recommend giving the maximum score for “Yes”/“True” and the minimum score for “No”/“False”.
Increase your efficiency and speed of evaluation by evaluating the mandatory requirements first. If a vendor's response doesn't meet the minimum requirements, save time by not reviewing the remainder of the response. Group your RFP questions with a high-level qualifying question, then the supporting detailed requirements. The evaluation team can save time by not evaluating a response that does not meet a high-level qualifying requirement.

Establish your evaluation scoring scale

Define your ranking scale to ensure consistency in ratings

Within each section of your RFP are objectives, each of which should be given its own score. Our recommended approach is to award on a scale of 0 to 5. With such a scale, you need to define every level. Below are the recommended definitions for a 0 to 5 scoring scale.

Score Criteria for Rating
5 Outstanding – Complete understanding of current and future needs; solution addresses current and future needs
4 Competent – Complete understanding and adequate solution
3 Average – Average understanding and adequate solution
2 Questionable – Average understanding; proposal questionable
1 Poor – Minimal understanding
0 Not acceptable – Lacks understanding
Stock photo of judges holding up their ratings.

Weigh the sections of your RFP on how important or critical they are to the RFP

Obtain Alignment on Weighting the Scores of Each Section
  • There are many ways to score responses, ranging from extremely simple to highly complicated. The most important thing is that everyone responsible for completing scorecards is in total agreement about how the scoring system should work. Otherwise, the scorecards will lose their value, since different weighting and scoring templates were used to arrive at their scores.
  • You can start by weighting the scores by section, with all sections adding up to 100%.
Example RFP Section Weights
Pie chart of example RFP section weights, 'Operational, 20%', 'Service-Level Agreements, 20%', 'Financial, 20%', 'Legal/Contractual, 15%', 'Technical, 10%' 'Functional, 15%'.
(Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, Jeffery et al., 2019)

Protect your negotiation leverage with these best practices

Protect your organization's reputation within the vendor community with a fair and balanced process.
  • Unless you regularly have the evaluators on your evaluation team, always assume that the team members are not familiar nor experienced with your process and procedures.
  • Do not underestimate the amount of preparations required to ensure that your evaluation team has everything they need to evaluate vendors’ responses without bias.
  • Be very specific about the expectations and time commitment required for the evaluation team to evaluate the responses.
  • Explain to the team members the importance of evaluating responses without conflicts of interest, including the fact that information contained within the responses and all discussions within the team are considered company owned and confidential.
  • Include examples of the evaluation and scoring processes to help the evaluators understand what they should be doing.
  • Finally – don’t forget to the thank the evaluation team and their managers for their time and commitment in contributing to this essential decision.
Stock photo of a cork board with 'best practice' spelled out by tacked bits of paper, each with a letter in a different font.

Evaluation teams must balance commercial vs. technical requirements

Do not alter the evaluation weights after responses are submitted.
  • Evaluation teams are always challenged by weighing the importance of price, budget, and value against the technical requirements of “must-haves” and super cool “nice-to-haves.”
  • Encouraging the evaluation team not to inadvertently convert the nice-to-haves to must-haves will prevent scope creep and budget pressure. The evaluation team must concentrate on the vendors’ responses that drive the best value when balancing both commercial and technical requirements.
Two blocks labelled 'Commercial Requirements' and 'Technical Requirements' balancing on either end of a flat sheet, which is balancing on a silver ball.

4.6.1 Evaluation Guidebook

1 hour

Input: RFP responses, Weighted Scoring Matrix, Vendor Response Scorecard

Output: One or two finalists for which negotiations will proceed

Materials: RFP Evaluation Guidebook

Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  1. Info-Tech provides an excellent resource for your evaluation team to better understand the process of evaluating vendor response. The guidebook is designed to be configured to the specifics of your RFP, with guidance and instructions to the team.
  2. Use this guidebook to provide instruction to the evaluation team as to how best to score and rate the RFP responses.
  3. Specific definitions are provided for applying the numerical scores to the RFP objectives will ensure consistency among the appropriate numerical score.

Download the RFP Evaluation Guidebook

4.6.2 RFP Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

1-4 hours

Input: Each vendor’s RFP response, A copy of the RFP (less pricing), A list of the weighted criteria incorporated into a vendor response scorecard

Output: A consolidated ranked and weighted comparison of the vendor responses with pricing

Materials: Vendor responses, RFP Evaluation Tool

Participants: Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  1. Using the RFP outline as a base, develop a scorecard to evaluate and rate each section of the vendor response, based on the criteria predetermined by the team.
  2. Provide each stakeholder with the scorecard when you provide the vendor responses for them to review and provide the team with adequate time to review each response thoroughly and completely.
  3. Do not, at this stage, provide the pricing. Allow stakeholders to review the responses based on the technical, business, operational criteria without prejudice as to pricing.
  4. Evaluators should always be reminded that they are evaluating each vendor’s response against the objectives and requirements of the RFP. The evaluators should not be evaluating each vendor’s response against one another.
  5. While the team is reviewing and scoring responses, review and consolidate the vendor pricing submissions into one document for a side-by-side comparison.

Download the RFP Evaluation Tool

4.6.3 Total Cost of Owners (TCO)

1-2 hours

Input: Consolidated vendor pricing responses, Consolidated vendor RFP responses, Current spend within your organization for the product/service, if available, Budget

Output: A completed TCO model summarizing the financial results of the RFP showing the anticipated costs over the term of the agreement, taking into consideration the impact of renewals.

Materials: Vendor TCO Tool, Vendor pricing responses

Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement

  • Use Info-Tech’s Vendor TCO Tool to normalize each vendor’s pricing proposal and account for the lifetime cost of the product.
  • Fill in pricing information (the total of all annual costs) from each vendor's returned Pricing Proposal.
  • The tool will summarize the net present value of the TCO for each vendor proposal.
  • The tool will also provide the rank of each pricing proposal.

Download the Vendor TCO Tool

Conduct an evaluation team results meeting

Follow the checklist below to ensure an effective evaluation results meeting

  • Schedule the evaluation team’s review meeting well in advance to ensure there are no scheduling conflicts.
  • Collect the evaluation team’s scores in advance.
  • Collate scores and provide an initial ranking.
  • Do not reveal the pricing evaluation results until after initial discussions and review of the scoring results.
  • Examine both high and low scores to understand why the team members scored the response as they did.
  • Allow the team to discuss, debate, and arrive at consensus on the ranking.
  • After consensus, reveal the pricing to examine if or how it changes the ranking.
  • Align the team on the next steps with the applicable vendors.

4.6.4 Consolidated RFP Response Scoring

1-2 hours

Input: Vendor Response Scorecard from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing, Any follow up questions or items requiring further vendor clarification.

Output: An RFP Response Evaluation Summary that identifies the finalists based on pre-determined criteria.

Materials: RFP Evaluation Tool from each stakeholder, Consolidated RFP responses and pricing.

Participants: IT, Finance, Business stakeholders, Sourcing/Procurement, Vendor management

  1. Collect from the evaluation team all scorecards and any associated questions requiring further clarification from the vendor(s). Consolidate the scorecards into one for presentation to the team and key decision makers.
  2. Present the final scores to the team, with the pricing evaluation, to determine, based on your needs, two or three finalists that will move forward to the next steps of negotiations.
  3. Discuss any scores that are have large gaps, e.g., a requirement with a score of one from one evaluator and the same requirement with a score five from different evaluator.
  4. Arrive at a consensus of your top one or two potential vendors.
  5. Determine any required follow-up actions with the vendors and include them in the Evaluation Summary.

Download the Consolidated Vender RFP Response Evaluation Summary

4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

1-3 hours
  1. Use the Vendor Recommendation Presentation to present your finalist and obtain final approval to negotiate and execute any agreements.
  2. The Vendor Recommendation Presentation provides leadership with:
    1. An overview of the RFP, its primary goals, and key requirements
    2. A summary of the vendors invited to participate and why
    3. A summary of each component of the RFP
    4. A side-by-side comparison of key vendor responses to each of the key/primary requirements, with ranking/weighting results
    5. A summary of the vendor’s responses to key legal terms
    6. A consolidated summary of the vendors’ pricing, augmented by the TCO calculations for the finalist(s).
    7. The RFP team’s vendor recommendations based on its findings
    8. A summary of next steps with dates
    9. Request approval to proceed to next steps of negotiations with the primary and secondary vendor

Download the Vendor Recommendation Presentation

4.6.5 Vendor Recommendation Presentation

Input

  • Consolidated RFP responses, with a focus on key RFP goals
  • Consolidated pricing responses
  • TCO Model completed, approved by Finance, stakeholders

Output

  • Presentation deck summarizing the key findings of the RFP results, cost estimates and TCO and the recommendation for approval to move to contract negotiations with the finalists

Materials

  • Consolidated RFP responses, including legal requirements
  • Consolidated pricing
  • TCO Model
  • Evaluators scoring results

Participants

  • IT
  • Finance
  • Business stakeholders
  • Legal
  • Sourcing/Procurement

Caution: Configure templates and tools to align with RFP objectives

Templates and tools are invaluable assets to any RFP process

  • Leveraging templates and tools saves time and provides consistency to your vendors.
  • Maintain a common repository of your templates and tools with different versions and variations. Include a few sentences with instructions on how to use the template and tools for team members who might not be familiar with them.

Templates/Tools

RFP templates and tools are found in a variety of places, such as previous projects, your favorite search engine, or by asking a colleague.

Sourcing

Regardless of the source of these documents, you must take great care and consideration to sanitize any reference to another vendor, company, or name of the deal.

Review

Then you must carefully examine the components of the deal before creating your final documents.

Popular RFP templates include:

  • RFP documents
  • Pricing templates
  • Evaluation and scoring templates
  • RFP requirements
  • Info-Tech research

Phase 5

Negotiate Agreement(s)

Steps

5.1 Perform negotiation process

Steps in an RFP Process with the fifth step, 'Negotiate Agreement', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Procurement
  • Vendor management
  • Legal
  • IT stakeholders
  • Finance

Outcomes of this phase

A negotiated agreement or agreements that are a result of competitive negotiations.

Negotiate Agreement(s)

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Negotiate Agreement

You should evaluate your RFP responses first to see if they are complete and the vendor followed your instructions.


Then you should:

  • Plan negotiation(s) with one or more vendors based on your questions and opportunities identified during evaluation.
  • Select finalist(s).
  • Apply selection criteria.
  • Resolve vendors’ exceptions.

Info-Tech Insight

Be certain to include any commitments made in the RFP, presentations, and proposals in the agreement – dovetails to underperforming vendor.

Centerpiece of the table, titled 'Negotiation Process'.

Leverage Info-Tech's negotiation process research for additional information

Negotiate before you select your vendor:
  • Negotiating with two or more vendors will maintain your competitive leverage while decreasing the time it takes to negotiate the deal.
  • Perform legal reviews as necessary.
  • Use sound competitive negotiations principles.

Info-Tech Insight

Providing contract terms in an RFP can dramatically reduce time for this step by understanding the vendor’s initial contractual position for negotiation.

Phase 6

Purchase Goods and Services

Steps

6.1 Purchase Goods & Services

Steps in an RFP Process with the sixth step, 'Purchase Goods and Services', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Procurement
  • Vendor management
  • IT stakeholders

Outcomes of this phase

A purchase order that completes the RFP process.

The beginning of the vendor management process.

Purchase Goods and Services

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Purchase Goods and Services

Prepare to purchase goods and services

Prepare to purchase goods and services by completing all items on your organization’s onboarding checklist.
  • Have the vendor complete applicable tax forms.
  • Set up the vendor in accounts payable for electronic payment (ACH) set-up.
Then transact day-to-day business:
  • Provide purchasing forecasts.
  • Complete applicable purchase requisition and purchase orders. Be sure to reference the agreement in the PO.
Stock image of a computer monitor with a full grocery cart shown on the screen.

Info-Tech Insight

As a customer, honoring your contractual obligations and commitments will ensure that your organization is not only well respected but considered a customer of choice.

Phase 7

Assess and Measure Performance

Steps

7.1 Assess and measure performance against the agreement

Steps in an RFP Process with the seventh step, 'Assess and Measure Performance', highlighted.

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Vendor management
  • Business stakeholders
  • Senior leadership (as needed)
  • IT stakeholders
  • Vendor representatives & senior management

Outcomes of this phase

A list of what went well during the period – it’s important to recognize successes

A list of areas needing improvement that includes:

  • A timeline for each item to be completed
  • The team member(s) responsible

Purchase Goods and Services

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7

Assess and Measure Performance

Measure to manage: the job doesn’t end when the contract is signed.

  • Classify vendor
  • Assess vendor performance
  • Manage improvement
  • Conduct periodic vendor performance reviews or quarterly business reviews
  • Ensure contract compliance for both the vendor and your organization
  • Build knowledgebase for future
  • Re-evaluate and improve appropriately your RFP processes

Info-Tech Insight

To be an objective vendor manager, you should also assess and measure your company’s performance along with the vendor’s performance.

Summary of Accomplishment

Problem Solved

Upon completion of this blueprint, guided implementation, or workshop, your team should have a comprehensive, well-defined end-to-end approach to performing a quality sourcing event. Leverage Info-Tech’s industry-proven tools and templates to provide your organization with an effective approach to maintain your negotiation leverage, improve the ease with which you evaluate vendor proposals, and reduce your risk while obtaining the best market value for your goods and services.

Additionally, your team will have a foundation to execute your vendor management principles. These principles will assist your organization in ensuring you receive the perceived value from the vendor as a result of your competitive negotiations.

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Final Thoughts: RFP Do’s and Don’ts

DO

  • Leverage your team’s knowledge
  • Document and explain your RFP process to stakeholders and vendors
  • Include contract terms in your RFP
  • Consider vendor management requirements up front
  • Plan to measure and manage performance after contract award leveraging RFP objectives
  • Seek feedback from the RFP team for process improvements

DON'T

  • Reveal your budget
  • Do an RFP in a vacuum
  • Send an RFP to a vendor your team is not willing to award the business to
  • Hold separate conversations with candidate vendors during your RFP process
  • Skimp on the requirements definition to speed the process
  • Tell the vendor they are selected before negotiating

Bibliography

“2022 RFP Response Trends & Benchmarks.” Loopio, 2022. Web.

Corrigan, Tony. “How Much Does it Cost to Respond to an RFP?” LinkedIn, March 2017. Accessed 10 Dec. 2019

“Death by RFP:7 Reasons Not to Respond.” Inc. Magazine, 2013. Web.

Jeffery, Steven, George Bordon, and Phil Bode. The Art of Creating a Quality RFP, 3rd ed. Info-Tech Research Group, 2019.

“RFP Benchmarks: How Much Time and Staff Firms Devote to Proposals.” MarketingProfs, 2020. Web.

“State of the RFP 2019.” Bonfire, 2019. Web.

“What Vendors Want (in RFPs).” Vendorful, 2020. Web.

Related Info-Tech Research

Stock photo of two people looking at a tablet. Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively
  • Negotiations are about allocating risk and money – how much risk is a party willing to accept at what price point?
  • Using a cross-functional/cross-insight team structure for negotiation preparation yields better results.
  • Soft skills aren’t enough and theatrical negotiation tactics aren’t effective.
Stock photo of two people in suits shaking hands. Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively
  • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
  • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.
Stock photo of three people gathered around a computer. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
  • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service-level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
  • Visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}386|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
  • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
  • Security remains a large impediment to realizing cloud benefits. Numerous concerns still exist around the ability for data privacy, confidentiality, and integrity to be maintained in a cloud environment.
  • Even if adoption is agreed upon, it becomes hard to evaluate vendors that have strong security offerings and even harder to utilize security controls that are internally deployed in the cloud environment.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • The cloud can be secure despite unique security threats.
  • Securing a cloud environment is a balancing act of who is responsible for meeting specific security requirements.
  • Most security challenges and concerns can be minimized through our structured process (CAGI) of selecting a trusted cloud security provider (CSP) partner.

Impact and Result

  • The business is adopting a cloud environment and it must be secured, which includes:
    • Ensuring business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
    • Maintaining privacy of data and other information.
    • Securing the network connection points.
  • Determine your balancing act between yourself and your CSP; through contractual and configuration requirements, determine what security requirements your CSP can meet and cover the rest through internal deployment.
  • This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors.

Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should prioritize security in the cloud, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Determine your cloud risk profile

Determine your organization’s rationale for cloud adoption and what that means for your security obligations.

  • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 1: Determine Your Cloud Risk Profile
  • Secure Cloud Usage Policy

2. Identify your cloud security requirements

Use the Cloud Security CAGI Tool to perform four unique assessments that will be used to identify secure cloud vendors.

  • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 2: Identify Your Cloud Security Requirements
  • Cloud Security CAGI Tool

3. Evaluate vendors from a security perspective

Learn how to assess and communicate with cloud vendors with security in mind.

  • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 3: Evaluate Vendors From a Security Perspective
  • IaaS and PaaS Service Level Agreement Template
  • SaaS Service Level Agreement Template
  • Cloud Security Communication Deck

4. Implement your secure cloud program

Turn your security requirements into specific tasks and develop your implementation roadmap.

  • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 4: Implement Your Secure Cloud Program
  • Cloud Security Roadmap Tool

5. Build a cloud security governance program

Build the organizational structure of your cloud security governance program.

  • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 5: Build a Cloud Security Governance Program
  • Cloud Security Governance Program Template
[infographic]

Develop a Security Operations Strategy

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}264|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $79,249 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Security Processes & Operations
  • Parent Category Link: /security-processes-and-operations
  • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
  • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
  • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of security technology investments.
  • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
  • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
  2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
  3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

Impact and Result

  • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
  • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

Develop a Security Operations Strategy Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should enhance your security operations program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Assess your current state

Assess current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

  • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Operational Requirements
  • Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

2. Develop maturity initiatives

Design your optimized state of operations.

  • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives
  • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
  • Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

3. Define operational interdependencies

Identify opportunities for collaboration within your security program.

  • Develop a Security Operations Strategy – Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies
  • Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan
  • Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template
  • Security Operations Collaboration Plan
  • Security Operations Metrics Summary Document
[infographic]

Workshop: Develop a Security Operations Strategy

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Assess Operational Requirements

The Purpose

Determine current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities, operational inefficiencies, and opportunities for improvement.

Key Benefits Achieved

Determine why you need a sound security operations program.

Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.

Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

Activities

1.1 Understand the benefits of refining your security operations program.

1.2 Gauge your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.

Outputs

Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool

2 Develop Maturity Initiatives

The Purpose

Begin developing and prioritizing gap initiatives in order to achieve the optimal state of operations.

Key Benefits Achieved

Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.

Assess your current state and define a target state.

Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.

Define the cost, effort, alignment, and security benefits of each initiative.

Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

Activities

2.1 Assess your current security goals, obligations, and scope.

2.2 Design your ideal target state.

2.3 Prioritize gap initiatives.

Outputs

Information Security Strategy Requirements Gathering Tool

Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool

3 Define Operational Interdependencies

The Purpose

Identify opportunities for collaboration.

Formalize your operational process flows.

Develop a comprehensive and actionable measurement program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the current security operations process flow.

Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.

Formalize an internal information-sharing and collaboration plan.

Activities

3.1 Identify opportunities for collaboration.

3.2 Formalize a security operations collaboration plan.

3.3 Define operational roles and responsibilities.

3.4 Develop a comprehensive measurement program.

Outputs

Security Operations RACI & Program Plan Tool

Security Operations Collaboration Plan

Security Operations Cadence Schedule Template

Security Operations Metrics Summary

Further reading

INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

Develop a Security Operations Strategy

Transition from a security operations center to a threat collaboration environment.

Info-Tech Research Group, Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.
© 1997-2017 Info-Tech Research Group Inc.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

“A reactive security operations program is no longer an option. The increasing sophistication of threats demands a streamlined yet adaptable mitigation and remediation process. Protect your assets by preparing for the inevitable; unify your prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts and provide assurance to your stakeholders that you are making information security a top priority.”

Phot of Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group.

Edward Gray,
Consulting Analyst, Security, Risk & Compliance
Info-Tech Research Group



Our understanding of the problem

This Research Is Designed For:
  • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
  • Chief Information Security Officer (CISO)
  • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
  • Security / IT Management
  • Security Operations Director / Security Operations Center (SOC)
  • Network Operations Director / Network Operations Center (NOC)
  • Systems Administrator
  • Threat Intelligence Staff
  • Security Operations Staff
  • Security Incident Responders
  • Vulnerability Management Staff
  • Patch Management
This Research Will Help You:
  • Enhance your security program by implementing and streamlining next-generation security operations processes.
  • Increase organizational situational awareness through active collaboration between core threat teams, enriching internal security events with external threat intelligence and enhancing security controls.
  • Develop a comprehensive threat analysis and dissemination process: align people, process, and technology to scale security to threats.
  • Identify the appropriate technological and infrastructure-based sourcing decisions.
  • Design a step-by-step security operations implementation process.
  • Pursue continuous improvement: build a measurement program that actively evaluates program effectiveness.
This Research Will Also Assist:
  • Board / Chief Executive Officer
  • Information Owners (Business Directors/VP)
  • Security Governance and Risk Management
  • Fraud Operations
  • Human Resources
  • Legal and Public Relations
This Research Will Help Them
  • Aid decision making by staying abreast of cyberthreats that could impact the business.
  • Increase visibility into the organization’s threat landscape to identify likely targets or identify exposed vulnerabilities.
  • Ensure the business is compliant with regularity, legal, and/or compliance requirements.
  • Understand the value and return on investment of security operations offerings.

Executive summary

Situation

  • Current security practices are disjointed, operating independently with a wide variety of processes and tools to conduct incident response, network defense, and threat analysis. These disparate mitigations leave organizations vulnerable to the increasing number of malicious events.
  • Threat management has become resource intensive, requiring continuous monitoring, collection, and analysis of massive volumes of security event data, while juggling business, compliance, and consumer obligations.

Complication

  • There is an onslaught of security data – generating information in different formats, storing it in different places, and forwarding it to different locations.
  • The organization lacks a dedicated enterprise security team. There is limited resourcing available to begin or mature a security operations center.
  • Many organizations are developing ad hoc security capabilities that result in operational inefficiencies, the misalignment of resources, and the misuse of their security technology investments.
  • It is difficult to communicate the value of a security operations program when trying to secure organizational buy-in to gain the appropriate resourcing.
  • There is limited communication between security functions due to a centralized security operations organizational structure.

Resolution

  • A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.
  • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

Info-Tech Insight

  1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
  2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives.
  3. If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

Horizontal bar chart of 'Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies', with the highest cost attributed to 'Health', 'Pharmaceutical', 'Financial', 'Energy', and 'Transportation'.

Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $217 (in 2015); $74 is direct cost (e.g. legal fees, technology investment) and $143 is indirect cost (e.g. abnormal customer churn). (Source: Ponemon Institute, “2015 Cost of Data Breach Study: United States”)

'% of systems impacted by a data breach', '1% No Impact', '19% 1-10% impacted', '41% 11-30% impacted', '24% 31-50% impacted', '15% more than 50% impacted
Divider line.
'% of customers lost from a data breach', '61% Lost <20%', '21% Lost 20-40%', '8% Lost 40-60%', '6% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
Divider line.
'% of business opportunity lost from a data breach', '58% Lost <20%', '25% Lost 20-40%', '9% Lost, 40-60%', '5% Lost 60-80%', '4% Lost 80-100%'.
(Source: The Network, “ Cisco 2017 Security Capabilities Benchmark Study”)

Persistent issues

  • Organizational barriers separating prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    Siloed operations limit collaboration and internal knowledge sharing.
  • Lack of knowledgeable security staff.
    Human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and must be cross-trained to wear multiple hats.
  • Failure to evaluate and improve security operations.
    The effectiveness of operations must be frequently measured and (re)assessed through an iterative system of continuous improvement.
  • Lack of standardization.
    Pre-established use cases and policies outlining tier-1 operational efforts will eliminate ad hoc remediation efforts and streamline operations.
  • Failure to acknowledge the auditor as a customer.
    Many compliance and regulatory obligations require organizations to have comprehensive documentation of their security operations practices.

60% Of organizations say security operation teams have little understanding of each other’s requirements.

40% Of executives report that poor coordination leads to excessive labor and IT operational costs.

38-100% Increase in efficiency after closing operational gaps with collaboration.
(Source: Forbes, “The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap”)

The solution

Bar chart of the 'Benefits of Internal Collaboration' with 'Increased Operational Efficiency' and 'Increased Problem Solving' having the highest percentage.

“Empower a few administrators with the best information to enable fast, automated responses.”
– Ismael Valenzuela, IR/Forensics Technical Practice Manager, Foundstone® Services, Intel Security)

Insufficient security personnel resourcing has been identified as the most prevalent challenge in security operations…

When an emergency security incident strikes, weak collaboration and poor coordination among critical business functions will magnify inefficiencies in the incident response (IR) process, impacting the organization’s ability to minimize damage and downtime.

The solution: optimize your SOC. Info-Tech has seen SOCs with five analysts outperform SOCs with 25 analysts through tools and process optimization.

Sources:
Ponemon. "2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).”
Syngress. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center.

Maintain a holistic security operations program

Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.
Venn diagram of 'Next-Gen Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.

Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operations, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs
Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook in order to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

Info-Tech’s security operations blueprint ties together various initiatives

Stock image 1.

Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

Vulnerability Management
Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
Deliverables
  • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
  • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
  • Penetration Test RFP Template
  • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
Stock image 2.

Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

Threat Intelligence
Threat intelligence addresses the collection, analysis, and dissemination of external threat data. Analysts act as liaisons to their peers, publishing actionable threat alerts, reports, and briefings. Threat intelligence proactively monitors and identifies whether threat indicators are impacting your organization.
  • Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
  • Management Plan Template
  • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
  • Alert Template
  • Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule
Stock image 3.

Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

Operations
Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. Analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
  • Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Event Prioritization Tool
  • Efficiency Calculator
  • SecOps Policy Template
  • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
  • SecOps RACI Tool
  • TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
Stock image 4.

Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

Incident Response
Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. IR teams coordinate root-cause analysis and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
  • Incident Management Policy
  • Maturity Assessment Tool
  • Incident Management RACI Tool
  • Incident Management Plan
  • Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
  • Various Incident Management Runbooks

This blueprint will…

…better protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

Phase 01

Assess your operational requirements.

Phase 02

Optimize and further mature your security operations processes

Phase 3a

Develop the process flow and specific interaction points between functions

Phase 3b

Test your current capabilities with a table top exercise
Briefly assess your current prevention, detection, analysis, and response capabilities.
Highlight operational weak spots that should be addressed before progressing.
Develop a prioritized list of security-focused operational initiatives.
Conduct a holistic analysis of your operational capabilities.
Define the operational interaction points between security-focused operational departments.
Document the results in comprehensive operational interaction agreement.
Test your operational processes with Info-Tech’s security operations table-top exercise.

Info-Tech integrates several best practices to create a best-of-breed security framework

Legend for the 'Information Security Framework' identifying blue best practices as 'In Scope' and white best practices as 'Out of Scope'. Info-Tech's 'Information Security Framework' of best practices with two main categories 'Governance' and 'Management', each with subcategories such as 'Context & Leadership' and 'Prevention', each with a group of best practices color-coded to the associated legend identifying them as 'In Scope' or 'Out of Scope'.

Benefits of a collaborative and integrated operations program

Effective security operations management will help you do the following:

  • Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to automate activities and increase process consistency across the security program. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to an innovator role.
  • Improve threat protection
    Enhance network controls through the hardening of perimeter defenses, an intelligence-driven analysis process, and a streamlined incident remediation process.
  • Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.
  • Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Security operations management practices will set a clear level of accountability throughout the security program and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.
  • Control security costs
    Security operations management is concerned with delivering promised services in the most efficient way possible. Good security operations management practices will provide insight into current costs across the organization and present opportunities for cost savings.
  • Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increased visibility into current performance levels and the ability to accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement.

Impact

Short term:

  • Streamlined security operations program development process.
  • Completed comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
  • Formalized and structured implementation process.
  • Standardized operational use cases that predefine necessary operational protocol.

Long term:

  • Enhanced visibility into immediate threat environment.
  • Improved effectiveness of internal defensive controls.
  • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
  • Enhanced security pressure posture.
  • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.

Understand the cost of not having a suitable security operations program

A practical approach, justifying the value of security operations, is to identify the assets at risk and calculate the cost to the company should the information assets be compromised (i.e. assess the damage an attacker could do to the business).

Cost Structure Cost Estimation ($) for SMB
(Small and medium-sized business)
Cost Estimation ($) for LE
(Large enterprise)
Security controls Technology investment: software, hardware, facility, maintenance, etc.
Cost of process implementation: incident response, CMBD, problem management, etc.
Cost of resource: salary, training, recruiting, etc.
$0-300K/year $200K-2M/year
Security incidents
(if no security control is in place)
Explicit cost:
  1. Incident response cost:
    • Remediation costs
    • Productivity: (number of employees impacted) × (hours out) × (burdened hourly rate)
    • Extra professional services
    • Equipment rental, travel expenses, etc.
    • Compliance fine
    • Cost of notifying clients
  2. Revenue loss: direct loss, the impact of permanent loss of data, lost future revenues
  3. Financial performance: credit rating, stock price
    Hidden cost:
    • Reputation, customer loyalty, etc.
$15K-650K/year $270K-11M/year

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
Activities
  • Kick-off and introductions.
  • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
  • Activity: Define workshop objectives and current state of knowledge.
  • Understand the threat collaboration environment.
  • Understand the benefits of an optimized security operations.
  • Activity: Review preliminary maturity level.
  • Activity: Assess current people, processes, and technology capabilities.
  • Activity: Assess workflow capabilities.
  • Activity: Begin deep-dive into maturity assessment tool.
  • Discuss strategies to enhance the analysis process (ticketing, automation, visualization, use cases, etc.).
  • Activity: Design ideal target state.
  • Activity: Identify security gaps.
  • Build initiatives to bridge the gaps.
  • Activity: Estimate the resources needed.
  • Activity: Prioritize gap initiatives.
  • Activity: Develop dashboarding and visualization metrics.
  • Activity: Plan for a transition with the security roadmap and action plan.
  • Activity: Define and assign tier 1, 2 & 3 SOC roles and responsibilities.
  • Activity: Assign roles and responsibilities for each security operations initiative.
  • Activity: Develop a comprehensive measurement program.
  • Activity: Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
    • Detect the incident.
    • Analyze the incident.
    • Contain the incident.
    • Eradicate the root cause.
    • Recover from the incident.
    • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
  • Activity:Conduct attack campaign simulation.
  • Finalize main deliverables.
  • Schedule feedback call.
Deliverables
  1. Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
  1. Target State and Gap Analysis (Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool)
  1. Security Operations Role & Process Design
  2. Security Operations RACI Chart
  3. Security Operations Metrics Summary
  4. Security Operations Phishing Process Runbook
  5. Attack Campaign Simulation PowerPoint

All Final Deliverables

Develop a Security Operations Strategy

PHASE 1

Assess Operational Requirements

1

Assess Operational Requirements

2

Develop Maturity Initiatives

3

Define Interdependencies

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Determine why you need a sound security operations program.
  • Understand Info-Tech’s threat collaboration environment.
  • Evaluate your current security operation’s functions and capabilities.

Outcomes of this step

  • A defined scope and motive for completing this project.
  • Insight into your current security operations capabilities.
  • A prioritized list of security operations initiatives based on maturity level.

Info-Tech Insight

Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.

Warm-up exercise: Why build a security operations program?

Estimated time to completion: 30 minutes

Discussion: Why are we pursuing this project?

What are the objectives for optimizing and developing sound security operations?

Stakeholders Required:

  • Key business executives
  • IT leaders
  • Security operations team members

Resources Required

  • Sticky notes
  • Whiteboard
  • Dry-erase markers
  1. Briefly define the scope of security operations
    What people, processes, and technology fall within the security operations umbrella?
  2. Brainstorm the implications of not acting
    What does the status quo have in store? What are the potential risks?
  3. Define the goals of the project
    Clarify from the outset: what exactly do you want to accomplish from this project?
  4. Prioritize all brainstormed goals
    Classify the goals based on relevant prioritization criteria, e.g. urgency, impact, cost.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.

Decentralizing the SOC: Security as a function

Before you begin, remember that no two security operation programs are the same. While the end goal may be similar, the threat landscape, risk tolerance, and organizational requirements will differ from any other SOC. Determine what your DNA looks like before you begin to protect it.

Security operations must provide several fundamental functions:
  • Real-time monitoring, detecting, and triaging of data from both internal and external sources.
  • In-depth analysis of indicators and incidents, leveraging malware analysis, correlation and rule tweaking, and forensics and eDiscovery techniques.
  • Network/host scanning and vulnerability patch management.
  • Incident response, remediation, and reporting. Security operations must disseminate appropriate information/intelligence to relevant stakeholders.
  • Comprehensive logging and ticketing capabilities that document and communicate events throughout the threat collaboration environment.
  • Tuning and tweaking of technologies to ingest collected data and enhance the analysis process.
  • Enhance overall organizational situational awareness by reporting on security trends, escalating incidents, and sharing adversary tools, tactics, and procedures.
Venn diagram of 'Security Operations' with four intersecting circles: 'Prevent', 'Detect', 'Analyze', and 'Respond'.
At its core, a security operations program is responsible for the prevention, detection, analysis, and response of security events.

Optimized security operations can seamlessly integrate threat and incident management processes with monitoring and compliance workflows and resources. This integration unlocks efficiency.

Understand the levels of security operations

Take the time to map out what you need and where you should go. Security operations has to be more than just monitoring events – there must be a structured program.

Foundational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Operational Arrow with a plus sign pointing right. Strategic
  • Intrusion Detection Management
  • Active Device and Event Monitoring
  • Log Collection and Retention
  • Reporting and Escalation Management
  • Incident Management
  • Audit Compliance
  • Vendor Management
  • Ticketing Processes
  • Packet Capture and Analysis
  • SIEM
  • Firewall
  • Antivirus
  • Patch Management
  • Event Analysis and Incident Triage
  • Security Log Management
  • Vulnerability Management
  • Host Hardening
  • Static Malware Analysis
  • Identity and Access Management
  • Change Management
  • Endpoint Management
  • Business Continuity Management
  • Encryption Management
  • Cloud Security (if applicable)
  • SIEM with Defined Use Cases
  • Big Data Security Analytics
  • Threat Intelligence
  • Network Flow Analysis
  • VPN Anomaly Detection
  • Dynamic Malware Analysis
  • Use-Case Management
  • Feedback and Continuous Improvement Management
  • Visualization and Dashboarding
  • Knowledge Portal Ticket Documentation
  • Advanced Threat Hunting
  • Control and Process Automation
  • eDiscovery and Forensics
  • Risk Management
——Security Operations Capabilities—–›

Understand security operations: Establish a unified threat collaboration environment

Stock image 1.

Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address threats impacting the organization’s brand, operations, and technology infrastructure.
  • Managing incident escalation and response.
  • Coordinating root-cause analysis and incident gathering.
  • Facilitating post-incident lessons learned.
  • Managing system patching and risk acceptance.
  • Conducting vulnerability assessment and penetration testing.
  • Monitoring in real-time and triaging of events.
  • Escalating events to incident management team.
  • Tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds.
  • Gathering and analyzing external threat data.
  • Liaising with peers, industry, and government.
  • Publishing threat alerts, reports, and briefings.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.

Stock image 2.

Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

Stock image 3.

Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

Stock image 4.

Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

The threat collaboration environment is comprised of three core elements

Info-Tech Insight

The value of a SOC can be achieved with fewer prerequisites than you think. While it is difficult to cut back on process and technology requirements, human capital is transferrable between roles and functions and can be cross-trained to satisfy operational gaps.

Three hexes fitting together with the words 'People', 'Process', and 'Technology'. People. Effective human capital is fundamental to establishing an efficient security operations program, and if enabled correctly, can be the driving factor behind successful process optimization. Ensure you address several critical human capital components:
  • Who is responsible for each respective threat collaboration environment function?
  • What are the required operational roles, responsibilities, and competencies for each employee?
  • Are there formalized training procedures to onboard new employees?
  • Is there an established knowledge transfer and management program?
Processes. Formal and informal mechanisms that bridge security throughout the collaboration environment and organization at large. Ask yourself:
  • Are there defined runbooks that clearly outline critical operational procedures and guidelines?
  • Is there a defined escalation protocol to transfer knowledge and share threats internally?
  • Is there a defined reporting procedure to share intelligence externally?
  • Are there formal and accessible policies for each respective security operations function?
  • Is there a defined measurement program to report on the performance of security operations?
  • Is there a continuous improvement program in place for all security operations functions?
  • Is there a defined operational vendor management program?
Technology. The composition of all infrastructure, systems, controls, and tools that enable processes and people to operate and collaborate more efficiently. Determine:
  • Are the appropriate controls implemented to effectively prevent, detect, analyze, and remediate threats? Is each control documented with an assigned asset owner?
  • Can a solution integrate with existing controls? If so, to what extent?
  • Is there a centralized log aggregation tool such as a SIEM?
  • What is the operational cost to effectively manage each control?
  • Is the control the most up-to-date version? Have the most recent patches and configuration changes been applied? Can it be consolidated with or replaced by another control?

Conduct a preliminary maturity assessment before tackling this project

Stock image 1.

Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program

Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment

At a high level, assess your organization’s operational maturity in each of the threat collaboration environment functions. Determine whether the foundational processes exist in order to mature and streamline your security operations.

Stock image 2.

Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations

Stock image 3.

Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes

Stock image 4.

Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

Assess the current maturity of your security operations program

Prioritize the component most important to the development of your security operations program.

Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment presenting the 'Impact Sub-Weightings' of 'People', 'Process', 'Technology', and 'Policy'.
Screenshot of a table from the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment assessing the 'Current State' and 'Target State' of different 'Security Capabilities'.
Each “security capability” covers a component of the overarching “security function.” Assign a current and target maturity score to each respective security capability. (Note: The CMMI maturity scores are further explained on the following slide.) Document any/all comments for future Info-Tech analyst discussions.

Assign each security capability a reflective and desired maturity score.

Your current and target state maturity will be determined using the capability maturity model integration (CMMI) scale. Ensure that all participants understand the 1-5 scale.
Two-way vertical arrow colored blue at the top and green at the bottom. Ad Hoc
1 Arrow pointing right. Initial/Ad Hoc: Activity is not well defined and is ad hoc, e.g. no formal roles or responsibilities exist, de facto standards are followed on an individual-by-individual basis.
2 Arrow pointing right. Developing: Activity is established and there is moderate adherence to its execution, e.g. while no formal policies have been documented, content management is occurring implicitly or on an individual-by-individual basis.
3 Arrow pointing right. Defined: Activity is formally established, documented, repeatable, and integrated with other phases of the process, e.g. roles and responsibilities have been defined and documented in an accessible policy, however, metrics are not actively monitored and managed.
4 Arrow pointing right. Managed and Measurable: Activity execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback, e.g. metrics have been established to monitor the effectiveness of tier-1 SOC analysts.
5 Arrow pointing right. Optimized: Qualitative and quantitative feedback is used to continually improve the execution of the activity, e.g. the organization is an industry leader in the respective field; research and development efforts are allocated in order to continuously explore more efficient methods of accomplishing the task at hand.
Optimized

Notes: Info-Tech seldom sees a client achieve a CMMI score of 4 or 5. To achieve a state of optimization there must be a subsequent trade-off elsewhere. As such, we recommend that organizations strive for a CMMI score of 3 or 4.

Ensure that your threat collaboration environment is of a sufficient maturity before progressing

Example report card from the maturity assessment. Functions are color-coded green, yellow, and red. Review the report cards for each of the respective threat collaboration environment functions.
  • A green function indicates that you have exceeded the operational requirements to proceed with the security operations initiative.
  • A yellow function indicates that your maturity score is below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech advises revisiting the attached blueprint. In the instance of a one-off case, the client can proceed with this security operations initiative.
  • A red function indicates that your maturity score is well below the recommended threshold; Info-Tech strongly advises to not proceed with the security operations initiative. Revisit the recommended blueprint and further mature the specific function.

Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

Self-Assessment Questions

  • Have you clearly defined the rationale for refining your security operations program?
  • Have you clearly defined and prioritized the goals and outcomes of optimizing your security operations program?
  • Have you assessed your respective people, process, and technological capabilities?
  • Have you completed the Security Operations Preliminary Maturity Assessment Tool?
  • Were all threat collaboration environment functions of a sufficient maturity level?

If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 2: Develop Maturity Initiatives

Develop a Security Operations Strategy

PHASE 2

Develop Maturity Initiatives

1

Assess Operational Requirements

2

Develop Maturity Initiatives

3

Define Interdependencies

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Establish your goals, obligations, scope, and boundaries.
  • Assess your current state and define a target state.
  • Develop and prioritize gap initiatives.
  • Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit of each initiative.
  • Develop a security strategy operational roadmap.

Outcomes of this step

  • A formalized understanding of your business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
  • A comprehensive current and target state assessment.
  • A succinct and consolidated list of gap initiatives that will collectively achieve your target state.
  • A formally documented set of estimated priority variables (cost, effort, business alignment).
  • A fully prioritized security roadmap that is in alignment with business goals and informed by the organization’s needs and limitations.

Info-Tech Insight

Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives

Align your security operations program with corporate goals and obligations

A common challenge for security leaders is learning to express their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives.

Frame the importance of your security operations program to
align with that of the decision makers’ over-arching strategy.

Oftentimes resourcing and funding is dependent on the
alignment of security initiatives to business objectives.

Corporate goals and objectives can be categorized into three major buckets:
  1. BUSINESS OBLIGATIONS
    The primary goals and functions of the organization at large. Examples include customer retention, growth, innovation, customer experience, etc.
  2. CONSUMER OBLIGATIONS
    The needs and demands of internal and external stakeholders. Examples include ease of use (external), data protection (external), offsite access (internal), etc.
  3. COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS
    The requirements of the organization to comply with mandatory and/or voluntary standards. Examples include HIPAA, PIPEDA, ISO 27001, etc.
*Do not approach the above list with a security mindset – take a business perspective and align your security efforts accordingly.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Developing a security operations strategy is a proactive activity that enables you to get in front of any upcoming business projects or industry trends rather than having to respond reactively later on. Consider as many foreseeable variables as possible!

Determine your security operations program scope and boundaries

It is important to define all security-related areas of responsibility. Upon completion you should clearly understand what you are trying to secure.

Ask yourself:
Where does the onus of responsibility stop?

The organizational scope and boundaries and can be categorized into four major buckets:
  1. PHYSICAL SCOPE
    The physical locations that the security operations program is responsible for. Examples include office locations, remote access, clients/vendors, etc.
  2. IT SYSTEMS
    The network systems that must be protected by the security operations program. Examples include fully owned systems, IaaS, PaaS, remotely hosted SaaS, etc.
  3. ORGANIZATIONAL SCOPE
    The business units, departments, or divisions that will be affected by the security operations program. Examples include user groups, departments, subsidiaries, etc.
  4. DATA SCOPE
    The data types that the business handles and the privacy/criticality level of each. Examples include top secret, confidential, private, public, etc.

This also includes what is not within scope. For some outsourced services or locations you may not be responsible for security. For some business departments you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset, what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

Reference Info-Tech’s security strategy: goals, obligations, and scope activities

Explicitly understanding how security aligns with the core business mission is critical for having a strategic plan and fulfilling the role of business enabler.

Download and complete the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication. If previously completed, take the time to review your results.

GOALS and OBLIGATIONS
Proceed through each slide and brainstorm the ways that security operations supports business, customer, and compliance needs.

Goals & Obligations
Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

PROGRAM SCOPE & BOUNDARIES
Assess your current organizational environment. Document current IT systems, critical data, physical environments, and departmental divisions.

If a well-defined corporate strategy does not exist, these questions can help pinpoint objectives:

  • What is the message being delivered by the CEO?
  • What are the main themes of investments and projects?
  • What are the senior leaders measured on?
Program Scope & Boundaries
Screenshots of slides from the information security goals, obligations and scope activities (Section 1.3) within the Info-Tech security strategy research publication.

INFO-TECH OPPORTUNITY

For more information on how to complete the goals & obligations activity please reference Section 1.3 of Info-Tech’s Build an Information Security Strategy blueprint.

Complete the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

On tab 1. Goals and Obligations:
  • Document all business, customer, and compliance obligations. Ensure that each item is reflective of the over-arching business strategy and is not security focused.
  • In the second column, identify the corresponding security initiative that supports the obligation.
Screenshot from tab 1 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Columns are 'Business obligations', 'Security obligations to support the business (optional)', and 'Notes'.
On tab 2. Scope and Boundaries:
  • Record all details for what is in and out of scope from physical, IT, organizational, and data perspectives.
  • Complete the affiliated columns for a comprehensive scope assessment.
  • As a discussion guide, refer to the considerations slides prior to this in phase 1.3.
Screenshot from tab 2 of Info-Tech's Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. Title is 'Physical Scope', Columns are 'Environment Name', 'Highest data criticality here', 'Is this in scope of the security strategy?', 'Are we accountable for security here?', and 'Notes'.
For the purpose of this security operations initiative please IGNORE the risk tolerance activities on tab 3.

Info-Tech Best Practice

A common challenge for security leaders is expressing their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives. This exercise helps make explicit the link between what the business cares about and what security is trying to do.

Conduct a comprehensive security operations maturity assessment

The following slides will walk you through the process below.

Define your current and target state

Self-assess your current security operations capabilities and determine your intended state.

Create your gap initiatives

Determine the operational processes that must be completed in order to achieve the target state.

Prioritize your initiatives

Define your prioritization criteria (cost, effort, alignment, security benefit) based on your organization

Build a Gantt chart for your upcoming initiatives
The final output will be a Gantt to action your prioritized initiatives

Info-Tech Insight

Progressive improvements provide the most value to IT and your organization. Leaping from pre-foundation to complete optimization is an ineffective goal. Systematic improvements to your security performance delivers value to your organization, each step along the way.

Optimize your security operations workflow

Info-Tech consulted various industry experts and consolidated their optimization advice.

Dashboards: Centralized visibility, threat analytics, and orchestration enable faster threat detection with fewer resources.

Adding more controls to a network never increases resiliency. Identify technological overlaps and eliminate unnecessary costs.

Automation: There is shortfall in human capital in contrast to the required tools and processes. Automate the more trivial processes.

SOCs with 900 employees are just as efficient as those with 35-40. There is an evident tipping point in marginal value.

There are no plug-and-play technological solutions – each is accompanied by a growing pain and an affiliated human capital cost.

Planning: Narrow the scope of operations to focus on protecting assets of value.

Cross-train employees throughout different silos. Enable them to wear multiple hats.

Practice: None of the processes happen in a vacuum. Make the most of tabletop exercises and other training exercises.

Define appropriate use cases and explicitly state threat escalation protocol. Focus on automating the tier-1 analyst role.

Self-assess your current-state capabilities and determine the appropriate target state

1. Review:
The heading in blue is the security domain, light blue is the subdomain and white is the specific control.
2. Determine and Record:
Ask participants to identify your organization’s current maturity level for each control. Next, determine a target maturity level that meets the requirements of the area (requirements should reflect the goals and obligations defined earlier).
3.
In small groups, have participants answer “what is required to achieve the target state?” Not all current/target state gaps will require additional description, explanation, or an associated imitative. You can generate one initiative that may apply to multiple line items.

Screenshot of a table for assessing the current and target states of capabilities.

Info-Tech Best Practice

When customizing your gap initiatives consider your organizational requirements and scope while remaining realistic. Below is an example of lofty vs. realistic initiatives:
Lofty: Perform thorough, manual security analysis. Realistic: Leverage our SIEM platform to perform more automated security analysis through the use of log information.

Consolidate related gap initiatives to simplify and streamline your roadmap

Identify areas of commonality between gap initiative in order to effectively and efficiently implement your new initiatives.

Steps:
  1. After reviewing and documenting initiatives for each security control, begin sorting controls by commonality, where resources can be shared, or similar end goals and actions. Begin by copying all initiatives from tab 2. Current State Assessment into tab 5. Initiative List of the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool and then consolidating them.
  2. Initiatives Consolidated Initiatives
    Document data classification and handling in AUP —› Document data classification and handling in AUP Keep urgent or exceptional initiatives separate so they can be addressed appropriately.
    Document removable media in AUP —› Define and document an Acceptable Use Policy Other similar or related initiatives can be consolidated into one item.
    Document BYOD and mobile devices in AUP —›
    Document company assets in Acceptable Use Policy (AUP) —›

  3. Review grouped initiatives and identify specific initiatives should be broken out and defined separately.
  4. Record your consolidated gap initiatives in the Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool, tab 6. Initiative Prioritization.

Understand your organizational maturity gap

After inputting your current and target scores and defining your gap initiatives in tab 2, review tab 3. Current Maturity and tab 4. Maturity Gap in Info-Tech’s Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool.

Automatically built charts and tables provide a clear visualization of your current maturity.

Presenting these figures to stakeholders and management can help visually draw attention to high-priority areas and contextualize the gap initiatives for which you will be seeking support.

Screenshot of tabs 3 and 4 from Info-Tech's Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. Bar charts titled 'Planning and Direction', 'Vulnerability Management', 'Threat Intelligence', and 'Security Maturity Level Gap Analysis'.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Communicate the value of future security projects to stakeholders by copying relevant charts and tables into an executive stakeholder communication presentation (ask an Info-Tech representative for further information).

Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

Define low, medium, and high resource allocation, and other variables for your gap initiatives in the Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool. These variables include:
  1. Define initial cost. One-time, upfront capital investments. The low cut-off would be a project that can be approved with little to no oversight. Whereas the high cut-off would be a project that requires a major approval or a formal capital investment request. Initial cost covers items such as appliance cost, installation, project based consulting fees, etc.
  2. Define ongoing cost. This includes any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs, e.g. licensing or rental costs. Do not account for FTE employee costs. Generally speaking you can take 20-25% of initial cost as ongoing cost for maintenance and service.
  3. Define initial staffing in hours. This is total time in hours required to complete a project. Note: It is not total elapsed time, but dedicated time. Consider time required to research, document, implement, review, set up, fine tune, etc. Consider all staff hours required (2 staff at 8 hours means 16 hours total).
  4. Define ongoing staffing in hours. This is the ongoing average hours per week required to support that initiative. This covers all operations, maintenance, review, and support for the initiative. Some initiatives will have a week time commitment (e.g. perform a vulnerability scan using our tool once a week) versus others that may have monthly, quarterly, or annual time commitments that need to averaged out per week (e.g. perform annual security review requiring 0.4 hours/week (20 hours total based on 50 working weeks per year).
Table relating the four definitions on the left, 'Initial Cost', 'Ongoing Cost (annual)', 'Initial Staffing in Hours', and 'Ongoing Staffing in Hours/Week'. Each row header is a definition and has four sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Zero'.

Info-Tech Best Practice

When considering these parameters, aim to use already existing resource allocations.

For example, if there is a dollar value that would require you to seek approval for an expense, this might be the difference between a medium and a high cost category.

Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit

  1. Define Alignment with Business. This variable is meant to capture how well the gap initiative aligns with organizational goals and objectives. For example, something with high alignment usually can be tied to a specific organization initiative and will receive senior management support. You can either:
    • Set low, medium, and high based on levels of support the organization will provide (e.g. High – senior management support, Medium – VP/business unit head support, IT support only)
    • Attribute specific corporate goals or initiatives to the gap initiative (e.g. High – directly supports a customer requirement/key contract requirement; Medium – indirectly support customer requirement/key contract OR enables remote workforce; Low – security best practice).
  2. Define Security Benefit. This variable is meant to capture the relative security benefit or risk reduction being provided by the gap initiative. This can be represented through a variety of factors, such as:
    • Reduces compliance or regulatory risk by meeting a control requirement
    • Reduces availability and operational risk
    • Implements a non-existent control
    • Secures high-criticality data
    • Secures at-risk end users
Table relating the two definitions on the left, 'Alignment with Business', and 'Security Benefit'. Each row header is a definition and has three sub-rows 'High', 'Medium', and 'Low'.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Make sure you consider the value of AND/OR. For either alignment with business or security benefit, the use of AND/OR can become useful thresholds to rank similar importance but different value initiatives.

Example: with alignment with business, an initiative can indirectly support a key compliance requirement OR meet a key corporate goal.

Info-Tech Insight

You cannot do everything – and you probably wouldn’t want to. Make educated decisions about which projects are most important and why.

Apply your variable criteria to your initiatives

Identify easy-win tasks and high-value projects worth fighting for.
Categorize the Initiative
Select the gap initiative type from the down list. Each category (Must, Should, Could, and Won’t) is considered to be an “execution wave.” There is also a specific order of operations within each wave. Based on dependencies and order of importance, you will execute on some “must-do” items before others.
Assign Criteria
For each gap initiative, evaluate it based on your previously defined parameters for each variable.
  • Cost – initial and ongoing
  • Staffing – initial and ongoing
  • Alignment with business
  • Security benefit
Overall Cost/Effort Rating
An automatically generated score between 0 and 12. The higher the score attached to the initiative, the more effort required. The must-do, low-scoring items are quick wins and must be prioritized first.
Screenshot of a table from Info-Tech's Concept of Operations Maturity Assessment Tool with all of the previous table row headers as column headers.

A financial services organization defined its target security state and created an execution plan

CASE STUDY
Industry: Financial Services | Source: Info-Tech Research Group
Framework Components
Security Domains & Accompanied Initiatives
(A portion of completed domains and initiatives)
CSC began by creating over 100 gap initiatives across Info-Tech’s seven security domains.
Current-State Assessment Context & Leadership Compliance, Audit & Review Security Prevention
Gap Initiatives Created 12
Initiatives
14
Initiatives
45
Initiatives
Gap Initiative Prioritization
Planned Initiative(s)* Initial Cost Ongoing Cost Initial Staffing Ongoing Staffing
Document Charter Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
Document RACI Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Low - ‹1d Low - ‹2 Hour
Expand IR processes Medium - $5K-$50K Low - ‹$1K High - ›2w Low - ‹2 Hour
Investigate Threat Intel Low - ‹$5K Low - ‹$1K Medium - 1-10d Low - ‹2 Hour
CSC’s defined low, medium, and high for cost and staffing are specific to the organization.

CSC then consolidated its initiatives to create less than 60 concise tasks.

*Initiatives and variables have been changed or modified to maintain anonymity

Review your prioritized security roadmap

Review the final Gantt chart to review the expected start and end dates for your security initiatives as part of your roadmap.

In the Gantt chart, go through each wave in sequence and determine the planned start date and planned duration for each gap initiative. As you populate the planned start dates, take into consideration the resource constraints or dependencies for each project. Go back and revise the granular execution wave to resolve any conflicts you find.

Screenshot of a 'Gantt Chart for Initiatives', a table with planned and actual start times and durations for each initiative, and beside it a roadmap with the dates from the Gantt chart plugged in.
Review considerations
  • Does this roadmap make sense for our organization?
  • Do we focus too much on one quarter over others?
  • Will the business be going through any significant changes during the upcoming years that will directly impact this project?
This is a living management document
  • You can use the same process on a per-case basis to decide where this new project falls in the priority list, and then add it to your Gantt chart.
  • As you make progress, check items off of the list, and periodically use this chart to retroactively update your progress towards achieving your overall target state.

Consult an Info-Tech Analyst

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
Onsite workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If a Guided Implementation isn’t enough, we offer low-cost onsite delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to successfully complete your project.
Photo of TJ Minichillo, Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. TJ Minichillo
Senior Director – Security, Risk & Compliance
Info-Tech Research Group
Edward Gray, Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Edward Gray
Consulting Analyst – Security, Risk & Compliance
Info-Tech Research Group
Photo of Celine Gravelines, Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance, Info-Tech Research Group. Celine Gravelines
Research Manager – Security, Risk & Compliance
Info-Tech Research Group
If you are not communicating, then you are not secure.

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email workshops@infotech.com for more information.

Are you ready to move on to the next phase?

Self-Assessment Questions

  • Have you identified your organization’s corporate goals along with your obligations?
  • Have you defined the scope and boundaries of your security program?
  • Have you determined your organization’s risk tolerance level?
  • Have you considered threat types your organization may face?
  • Are the above answers documented in the Security Requirements Gathering Tool?
  • Have you defined your maturity for both your current and target state?
  • Do you have clearly defined initiatives that would bridge the gap between your current and target state?
  • Are each of the initiatives independent, specific, and relevant to the associated control?
  • Have you indicated any dependencies between your initiatives?
  • Have you consolidated your gap initiatives?
  • Have you defined the parameters for each of the prioritization variables (cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit)?
  • Have you applied prioritization parameters to each consolidated initiative?
  • Have you recorded your final prioritized roadmap in the Gantt chart tab?
  • Have you reviewed your final Gantt chart to ensure it aligns to your security requirements?

If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to move on to Phase 3: Define Operational Interdependencies

Develop a Security Operations Strategy

PHASE 3

Define Operational Interdependencies

1

Assess Operational Requirements

2

Develop Maturity Initiatives

3

Define Interdependencies

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understand the current security operations process flow.
  • Define the security operations stakeholders and their respective deliverables.
  • Formalize an internal information sharing and collaboration plan.

Outcomes of this step

  • A formalized security operations interaction agreement.
  • A security operations service and product catalog.
  • A structured operations collection plan.

Info-Tech Insight

If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

Tie everything together with collaboration

If you are not communicating, you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

Define Strategic Needs and Requirements Participate in Information Sharing Communicate Clearly
  • Establish a channel to communicate management needs and requirements and define important workflow activities. Focus on operationalizing those components.
  • Establish a feedback loop to ensure your actions satisfied management’s criteria.
  • Consolidate critical security data within a centralized portal that is accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment, reducing the human capital resources required to manage that data.
  • Participate in external information sharing groups such as ISACs. Intelligence collaboration allows organizations to band together to decrease risk and protect one another from threat actors.
  • Disseminate relevant information in clear and succinct alerts, reports, or briefings.
  • Security operations analysts must be able to translate important technical security issues and provide in-depth strategic insights.
  • Define your audience before presenting information; various stakeholders will interpret information differently. You must present it in a format that appeals to their interests.
  • Be transparent in your communications. Holding back information will only serve to alienate groups and hinder critical business decisions.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Simple collaborative activities, such as a biweekly meeting, can unite prevention, detection, analysis, and response teams to help prevent siloed decision making.

Understand the security operations process flow

Process standardization and automation is critical to the effectiveness of security operations.

Process flow for security operations with column headers 'Monitoring', 'Preliminary Analysis (Tier 1)', 'Triage', 'Investigation & Analysis (Tier 2)', 'Response', and 'Advanced Threat Detection (Tier 3)'. All processes begin with elements in the 'Monitoring' column and end up at 'Visualization & Dashboarding'.

Document your security operations’ capabilities and tasks

Table of capabilities and tasks for security operations.
Document your security operations’ functional capabilities and operational tasks to satisfy each capability. What resources will you leverage to complete the specific task/capability? Identify your internal and external collection sources to satisfy the individual requirement. Identify the affiliated product, service, or output generated from the task/capability. Determine your escalation protocol. Who are the stakeholders you will be sharing this information with?
Capabilities

The major responsibilities of a specific function. These are the high-level processes that are expected to be completed by the affiliated employees and/or stakeholders.

Tasks

The specific and granular tasks that need to be completed in order to satisfy a portion of or the entire capability.

Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

Convert your results into actionable process flowcharts

Map each functional task or capability into a visual process-flow diagram.

  • The title should reflect the respective capability and product output.
  • List all involved stakeholders (inputs and threat escalation protocol) along the left side.
  • Ensure all relevant security control inputs are documented within the body of the process-flow diagram.
  • Map out the respective processes in order to achieve the desired outcome.
  • Segment each process within its own icon and tie that back to the respective input.
Example of a process flow made with sticky notes.

Title: Output #1 Example of a process flow diagram with columns 'Stakeholders', 'Input Processes', 'Output Processes', and 'Threat Escalation Protocol'. Processes are mapped by which stakeholder and column they fall to.

Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

Formalize the opportunities for collaboration within your security operations program

Security Operations Collaboration Plan

Security operations provides a single pane of glass through which the threat collaboration environment can manage its operations.

How to customize

The security operations interaction agreement identifies opportunities for optimization through collaboration and cross-training. The document is composed of several components:

  • Security operations program scope and objectives
  • Operational capabilities and outputs on a per function basis
  • A needs and requirements collection plan
  • Escalation protocol and respective information-sharing guidance (i.e. a detailed cadence schedule)
  • A security operations RACI chart
Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.

Assign responsibilities for the threat management process

Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan

Formally documenting roles and responsibilities helps to hold those accountable and creates awareness as to everyone’s involvement in various tasks.

How to customize
  • Customize the header fields with applicable stakeholders.
  • Identify stakeholders that are:
    • Responsible: The person(s) who does the work to accomplish the activity; they have been tasked with completing the activity and/or getting a decision made.
    • Accountable: The person(s) who is accountable for the completion of the activity. Ideally, this is a single person and is often an executive or program sponsor.
    • Consulted: The person(s) who provides information. This is usually several people, typically called subject matter experts (SMEs).
    • Informed: The person(s) who is updated on progress. These are resources that are affected by the outcome of the activities and need to be kept up to date.
Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Collaboration Plan.

Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations RACI Chart & Program Plan.

Identify security operations consumers and their respective needs and requirements

Ensure your security operations program is constantly working toward satisfying a consumer need or requirement.

Internal Consumers External Consumers
  • Business Executives & Management (CIO, CISO, COO):
    • Inform business decisions regarding threats and their association with future financial risk, reputational risk, and continuity of operations.
  • Human Resources:
    • Security operations must directly work with HR to enforce tight device controls, develop processes, and set expectations.
  • Legal:
    • Security operations is responsible to notify the legal department of data breaches and the appropriate course of action.
  • Audit and Compliance:
    • Work with the auditing department to define additional audits or controls that must be measured.
  • Public Relations/Marketing Employees:
    • Employees must be educated on prevalent threats and how to avoid or mitigate them.

Note: Your organization might not be the final target, but it could be a primary path for attackers. If you exist as a third-party partner to another organization, your responsibility in your technology ecosystem extends beyond your own product or service offerings.

  • Third-Party Contractors:
    • Identify relevant threats across industries – security operations is responsible for protecting more than just itself.
  • Commercial Vendors:
    • Identify commercial vendors of control failures and opportunities for operational improvement.
  • Suppliers:
    • Provide or maintain a certain level of security delivery.
    • Meet the same level of security that is expected of business units.
  • All End Users:
    • Be notified of any data breaches and potential violations of privacy.

Info-Tech Best Practice

“In order to support a healthy constituency, network operations and security operations should be viewed as equal partners, rather than one subordinate to the other.” (Mitre world-class CISO)

Define the stakeholders, their respective outputs, and the underlying need

Security Operations Program Service & Product Catalog

Create an informal security operations program service and product catalog. Work your way backwards – map each deliverable to the respective stakeholders and functions.

Action/Output Arrow pointing right. Frequency Arrow pointing right. Stakeholders/Function
Document the key services and outputs produced by the security operations program. For example:
  • Real-time monitoring
  • Event analysis and incident coordination
  • Malware analysis
  • External information sharing
  • Published alerts, reports, and briefings
  • Metrics
Define the frequency for which each deliverable or service is produced or conducted. Leverage this activity to establish a state of accountability within your threat collaboration environment. Identify the stakeholders or groups affiliated with each output. Remember to include potential MSSPs.
  • Vulnerability Management
  • Threat Intelligence
  • Tier 1, 2, and 3 Analysts
  • Incident Response
  • MSSP
  • Network Operations
Remember to include any target-state outputs or services identified in the maturity assessment. Use this exercise as an opportunity to organize your security operations outputs and services.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment.

Internal information sharing helps to focus operational efforts

Organizations must share information internally and through secure external information sharing and analysis centers (ISACs).

Ensure information is shared in a format that relates to the particular end user. Internal consumers fall into two categories:

  • Strategic Users — Intelligence enables strategic stakeholders to better understand security trends, minimize risk, and make more educated and informed decisions. The strategic intelligence user often lacks technical security knowledge; bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers by clearly communicating the underlying value and benefits.
  • Operational Users — Operational users integrate information and indicators directly into their daily operations and as a result have more in-depth knowledge of the technical terms. Reports help to identify escalated alerts that are part of a bigger campaign, provide attribution and context to attacks, identify systems that have been compromised, block malicious URLs or malware signatures in firewalls, IDPS systems, and other gateway products, identify patches, reduce the number of incidents, etc.
Collaboration includes the exchange of:
  • Contextualized threat indicators, threat actors, TTPs, and campaigns.
  • Attribution of the attack, motives of the attacker, victim profiles, and frequent exploits.
  • Defensive and mitigation strategies.
  • Best-practice incident response procedures.
  • Technical tools to help normalize threat intelligence formats or decode malicious network traffic.
Collaboration can be achieved through:
  • Manual unstructured exchanges such as alerts, reports, briefings, knowledge portals, or emails.
  • Automated centralized platforms that allow users to privately upload, aggregate, and vet threat intelligence. Current players include commercial, government, and open-source information-sharing and analysis centers.
Isolation prevents businesses from learning from each others’ mistakes and/or successes.

Define the routine of your security operations program in a detailed cadence schedule

Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template

Design your meetings around your security operations program’s outputs and capabilities

How to customize

Don’t operate in a silo. Formalize a cadence schedule to develop a state of accountability, share information across the organization, and discuss relevant trends. A detailed cadence schedule should include the following:

  • Activity, output, or topic being discussed.
  • Participants and stakeholders involved.
  • Value and purpose of meeting.
  • Duration and frequency of each meeting.
  • Investment per participant per meeting.
Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Program Cadence Schedule Template.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Schedule regular meetings composed of key members from different working groups to discuss concerns, share goals, and communicate operational processes pertaining to their specific roles.

Apply a strategic lens to your security operations program

Frame the importance of optimizing the security operations program to align with that of the decision makers’ overarching strategy.

Strategies
  1. Bridge the communication gap between security and non-technical decision makers. Communicate concisely in business-friendly terms.
  2. Quantify the ROI for the given project.
  3. Educate stakeholders – if stakeholders do not understand what a security operations program encompasses, it will be hard for them to champion the initiative.
  4. Communicate the implications, value, and benefits of a security operations program.
  5. Frame the opportunity as a competitive advantage, e.g. proactive security measures as a client acquisition strategy.
  6. Address the increasing prevalence of threat actors. Use objective data to demonstrate the impact, e.g. through case studies, recent media headlines, or statistics.

Defensive Strategy diagram with columns 'Adversaries', 'Defenses', 'Assets', and priority level.
(Source: iSIGHT, “ Definitive Guide to Threat Intelligence”)

Info-Tech Best Practice

Refrain from using scare tactics such as fear, uncertainty, and doubt (FUD). While this may be a short-term solution, it limits the longevity of your operations as senior management is not truly invested in the initiative.

Example: Align your strategic needs with that of management.

Identify assets of value, current weak security measures, and potential adversaries. Demonstrate how an optimized security operations program can mitigate those threats.

Develop a comprehensive measurement program to evaluate the effectiveness of your security operations

There are three types of metrics pertaining to security operations:

1) Operations-focused

Operations-focused metrics are typically communicated through a centralized visualization such as a dashboard. These metrics guide operational efforts, identifying operational and control weak points while ensuring the appropriate actions are taken to fix them.

Examples include, but are not limited to:

  • Ticketing metrics (e.g. average ticket resolution rate, ticketing status, number of tickets per queue/analyst).
  • False positive percentage per control.
  • Incident response metrics (e.g. mean time to recovery).
  • CVSS scores per vulnerability.

2) Business-focused

The evaluation of operational success from a business perspective.

Example metrics include:

  • Return on investment.
  • Total cost of ownership (can be segregated by function: prevent, detect, analyze, and respond).
  • Saved costs from mitigated breaches.
  • Security operations budget as a percentage of the IT budget.

3) Initiative-focused

The measurement of security operations project progress. These are frequently represented as time, resource, or cost-based metrics.

Note: Remember to measure end-user feedback. Asking stakeholders about their current expectations via a formal survey is the most effective way to kick-start the continuous improvement process.

Info-Tech Best Practice

Operational metrics have limited value beyond security operations – when communicating to management, focus on metrics that are actionable from a business perspective.

Download Info-Tech’s Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Metrics Summary Document.

Identify the triggers for continual improvement

Continual Improvement

  • Audits: Check for performance requirements in order to pass major audits.
  • Assessments: Variances in efficiency or effectiveness of metrics when compared to the industry standard.
  • Process maturity: Opportunity to increase efficiency of services and processes.
  • Management reviews: Routine reviews that reveal gaps.
  • Technology advances: For example, new security architecture/controls have been released.
  • Regulations: Compliance to new or changed regulations.
  • New staff or technology: Disruptive technology or new skills that allow for improvement.

Conduct tabletop exercises with Info-Tech’s onsite workshop

Assess your security operations capabilities

Leverage Info-Tech’s Security Operations Tabletop Exercise to guide simulations to validate your operational procedures.

How to customize
  • Use the templates to document actions and actors.
  • For each new injection, spend three minutes discussing the response as a group. Then spend two minutes documenting each role’s contribution to the response. After the time limit, proceed to the following injection scenario.
  • Review the responses only after completing the entire exercise.
Sample of Info-Tech's Security Operations Tabletop Exercise.

This tabletop exercise is available through an onsite workshop as we can help establish and design a tabletop capability for your organization.

Are you ready to implement your security operations program?

Self-Assessment Questions

  • Is there a formalized security operations collaboration plan?
  • Are all key stakeholders documented and acknowledged?
  • Have you defined your strategic needs and requirements in a formalized collection plan?
  • Is there an established channel for management to communicate needs and requirements to the security operation leaders?
  • Are all program outputs documented and communicated?
  • Is there an accessible, centralized portal or dashboard that actively aggregates and communicates key information?
  • Is there a formalized threat escalation protocol in order to facilitate both internal and external information sharing?
  • Does your organization actively participate in external information sharing through the use of ISACs?
  • Does your organization actively produce reports, alerts, products, etc. that feed into and influence the output of other functions’ operations?
  • Have you assigned program responsibilities in a detailed RACI chart?
  • Is there a structured cadence schedule for key stakeholders to actively communicate and share information?
  • Have you developed a structured measurement program on a per function basis?
  • Now that you have constructed your ideal security operations program strategy, revisit the question “Are you answering all of your objectives?”

If you answered “yes” to the questions, then you are ready to implement your security operations program.

Summary

Insights

  1. Security operations is no longer a center, but a process. The need for a physical security hub has evolved into the virtual fusion of prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts. When all four functions operate as a unified process, your organization will be able to proactively combat changes in the threat landscape.
  2. Functional threat intelligence is a prerequisite for effective security operations – without it, security operations will be inefficient and redundant. Eliminate false positives by contextualizing threat data, aligning intelligence with business objectives, and building processes to satisfy those objectives
  3. If you are not communicating, then you are not secure. Collaboration eliminates siloed decisions by connecting people, processes, and technologies. You leave less room for error, consume fewer resources, and improve operational efficiency with a transparent security operations process.

Best Practices

  • Have a structured plan of attack. Define your unique threat landscape, as well as business, regulatory, and consumer obligations.
  • Foster both internal and external collaboration.
  • Understand the operational cut-off points. While collaboration is encouraged, understand when the onus shifts to the rest of the threat collaboration environment.
  • Do not bite off more than you can chew. Identify current people, processes, and technologies that satisfy immediate problems and enable future expansion.
  • Leverage threat intelligence to create a predictive and proactive security operations analysis process.
  • Formalize escalation procedures with logic and incident management flow.
  • Don’t develop a security operations program with the objective of zero incidents. This reliance on prevention results in over-engineered security solutions that cost more than the assets being protected.
  • Ensure that information flows freely throughout the threat collaboration environment – each function should serve to feed and enhance the next.
  • Develop a central web/knowledge portal that is easily accessible throughout the threat collaboration environment
Protect your organization with an interdependent and collaborative security operations program.

Bibliography

“2016 State of Cybersecurity in Small & Medium-Sized Businesses (SMB).” Ponemon Institute, June 2016. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

Ahmad, Shakeel et al. “10 Tips to Improve Your Security Incident Readiness and Response.” RSA, n.d. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

Anderson, Brandie. “ Building, Maturing & Rocking a Security Operations Center.” Hewlett Packard, n.d. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

Barnum, Sean. “Standardizing cyber threat intelligence information with the structured threat information expression.” STIX, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

Bidou, Renaud. “Security Operation Center Concepts & Implementation.” IV2-Technologies, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

Bradley, Susan. “Cyber threat intelligence summit.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Building a Security Operations Center.” DEF CON Communications, Inc., 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

“Building a Successful Security Operations Center.” ArcSight, 2015. Web. 21 Nov. 2016.

“Building an Intelligence-Driven Security Operations Center.” RSA, June 2014. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

Caltagirone, Sergio, Andrew Pendergast, and Christopher Betz. “Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis,” Center for Cyber Threat Intelligence and Threat Research, 5 July 2013. Web. 25 Aug. 2016.

“Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report: Chief Security Officers Reveal True Cost of Breaches and the Actions Organizations Are Taking.” The Network. Cisco, 31 Jan. 2017. Web. 11 Nov. 2017.

“CITP Training and Education.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Creating and Maintaining a SOC.” Intel Security, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

“Cyber Defense.” Mandiant, 2015. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

“Cyber Security Operations Center (CSOC).” Northrop Grumman, 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Danyliw, Roman. “Observations of Successful Cyber Security Operations.” Carnegie Mellon, 12 Dec. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

“Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

EY. “Managed SOC.” EY, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Fishbach, Nicholas. “How to Build and Run a Security Operations Center.” Securite.org, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

“Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 12 Feb. 2014. Web.

Friedman, John, and Mark Bouchard. “Definitive Guide to Cyber Threat Intelligence.” iSIGHT, 2015. Web. 1 June 2015.

Goldfarb, Joshua. “The Security Operations Hierarchy of Needs.” Securityweek.com, 10 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

“How Collaboration Can Optimize Security Operations.” Intel, n.d. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

Hslatman. “Awesome threat intelligence.” GitHub, 16 Aug. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Implementation Framework – Collection Management.” Carnegie Mellon University, 2015. Web.

“Implementation Framework – Cyber Threat Prioritization.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Intelligent Security Operations Center.” IBM, 25 Feb. 2015. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

Joshi Follow , Abhishek. “Best Practices for Security Operations Center.” LinkedIn, 01 Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Joshi. “Best Practices for a Security Operations Center.” Cybrary, 18 Sept. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Kelley, Diana and Ron Moritz. “Best Practices for Building a Security Operations Center.” Information Security Today, 2006. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

Killcrece, Georgia, Klaus-Peter Kossakowski, Robin Ruefle, and Mark Zajicek. ”Organizational Models for Computer Security Incident Response Teams (CSIRTs).” Carnegie Mellon Software Engineering Institute, Dec. 2003. Carnegie Mellon. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

Kindervag , John. “SOC 2.0: Three Key Steps toward the Next-generation Security Operations Center.” SearchSecurity. TechTarget, Dec. 2010. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Kvochko, Elena. “Designing the Next Generation Cyber Security Operations Center.” Forbes Magazine, 14 Mar. 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Lambert, P. “ Security Operations Center: Not Just for Huge Enterprises.” TechRepublic, 31 Jan. 2013. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

Lecky, M. and D. Millier. “Re-Thinking Security Operations.” SecTor Security Education Conference. Toronto, 2014.

Lee, Michael. “Three Elements That Every Advanced Security Operations Center Needs.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 16 Nov. 2016.

Linch, David and Jason Bergstrom. “Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement in an Age of Disruption.” Deloitte LLP, 2014.

Lynch, Steve. “Security Operations Center.” InfoSec Institute, 14 May 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Macgregor, Rob. “Diamonds or chains – cyber security updates.” PwC, n.d. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Make Your Security Operations Center (SOC) More Efficient.” Making Your Data Center Energy Efficient (2011): 213-48. Intel Security. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

Makryllos, Gordon. “The Six Pillars of Security Operations.” CSO | The Resource for Data Security Executives, n.d. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Marchany, R. “ Building a Security Operations Center.” Virginia Tech, 2015. Web. 8 Nov. 2016.

Marty, Raffael. “Dashboards in the Security Operations Center (SOC).” Security Bloggers Network, 15 Jan. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Minu, Adolphus. “Discovering the Value of Knowledge Portal.” IBM, n.d. Web. 1 Nov. 2016.

Muniz, J., G. McIntyre, and N. AlFardan. “Introduction to Security Operations and the SOC.” Security Operations Center: Building, Operating, and Maintaining your SOC. Cisco Press, 29 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Muniz, Joseph and Gary McIntyre. “ Security Operations Center.” Cisco, Nov. 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Muniz, Joseph. “5 Steps to Building and Operating an Effective Security Operations Center (SOC).” Cisco, 15 Dec. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Nathans, David. Designing and Building a Security Operations Center. Syngress, 2015. Print.

National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-61 Revision 2: Computer Security Incident Handling Guide.” 2012. Web.

National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-83 Revision 1.” 2013. Web.

National Institute of Standards and Technology. “SP 800-86: Guide to Integrating Forensic Techniques into Incident Response.” 2006. Web.

F5 Networks. “F5 Security Operations Center.” F5 Networks, 2014. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

“Next Generation Security Operations Center.” DTS Solution, n.d. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

“Optimizing Security Operations.” Intel, 2015. Web. 4 Nov. 2016.

Paganini, Pierluigi. “What Is a SOC ( Security Operations Center)?” Security Affairs, 24 May 2016. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Ponemon Institute LLC. “Cyber Security Incident Response: Are we as prepared as we think?” Ponemon, 2014. Web.

Ponemon Institute LLC. “The Importance of Cyber Threat Intelligence to a Strong Security Posture.” Ponemon, Mar. 2015. Web. 17 Aug. 2016.

Poputa-Clean, Paul. “Automated defense – using threat intelligence to augment.” SANS Institute InfoSec Reading Room, 15 Jan. 2015. Web.

Quintagroup. “Knowledge Management Portal Solution.” Quintagroup, n.d. Web.

Rasche, G. “Guidelines for Planning an Integrated Security Operations Center.” EPRI, Dec. 2013. Web. 25 Nov. 2016.

Rehman, R. “What It Really Takes to Stand up a SOC.” Rafeeq Rehman – Personal Blog, 27 Aug. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

Rothke, Ben. “Designing and Building Security Operations Center.” RSA Conference, 2015. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Ruks, Martyn and David Chismon. “Threat Intelligence: Collecting, Analysing, Evaluating.” MWR Infosecurity, 2015. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

Sadamatsu, Takayoshi. “Practice within Fujitsu of Security Operations Center.” Fujitsu, July 2016. Web. 15 Nov. 2016.

Sanders, Chris. “Three Useful SOC Dashboards.” Chris Sanders, 24 Oct. 2016. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

SANS Institute. “Incident Handler's Handbook.” 2011. Web.

Schilling, Jeff. “5 Pitfalls to Avoid When Running Your SOC.” Dark Reading, 18 Dec. 2014. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

Schinagl, Stef, Keith Schoon, and Ronald Paans. “A Framework for Designing a Security Operations Centre (SOC).” 2015 48th Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences. Computer.org, 2015. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

“Security – Next Gen SOC or SOF.” InfoSecAlways.com, 31 Dec. 2013. Web. 14 Nov. 2016.

“Security Operations Center Dashboard.” Enterprise Dashboard Digest, n.d. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

“Security Operations Center Optimization Services.” AT&T, 2015. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

“Security Operations Centers — Helping You Get Ahead of Cybercrime Contents.” EY, 2014. Web. 6 Nov. 2016.

Sheikh, Shah. “DTS Solution - Building a SOC (Security Operations Center).” LinkedIn, 4 May 2013. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

Soto, Carlos. “ Security Operations Center (SOC) 101.” Tom's IT Pro, 28 Oct. 2015. Web. 14 Dec. 2016.

“Standardizing and Automating Security Operations.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 3 Sept. 2006. Web.

“Strategy Considerations for Building a Security Operations Center.” IBM, Dec. 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

“Summary of Key Findings.” Carnegie Mellon University, 03 Oct. 2016. Web. 03 Oct. 2016.

“Sustainable Security Operations.” Intel, 2016. Web. 20 Nov. 2016.

“The Cost of Malware Containment.” Ponemon Institute, Jan. 2015. Web.

“The Game Plan for Closing the SecOps Gap.” BMC. Forbes Magazine, Jan. 2016. Web. 10 Jan. 2017.

Veerappa Srinivas, Babu. “Security Operations Centre (SOC) in a Utility Organization.” GIAC, 17 Sept. 2014. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

Wang, John. “Anatomy of a Security Operations Center.” NASA, 2015. Web. 2 Nov. 2016.

Weiss, Errol. “Statement for the Record.” House Financial Services Committee, 1 June 2012. Web. 12 Nov. 2016.

Wilson, Tim. “SOC 2.0: A Crystal-Ball Glimpse of the Next-Generation Security Operations Center.” Dark Reading, 22 Nov. 2010. Web. 10 Nov. 2016.

Zimmerman, Carson. “Ten Strategies of a World-Class Cybersecurity Operations Center.” Mitre, 2014. Web. 24 Aug. 2016.

Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}447|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • As an IT leader, you’re responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in and responsible stewardship of assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
  • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes across business units. You’re aware of a tool space called Strategic Portfolio Management, and it looks like it could help, but you’re unsure of how it’s different from some of the existing tools you already pay for and don’t use to their full functionality.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. In the same way that it took many years for project portfolio management to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. Unpacking what’s truly new and valuable in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what’s just repackaged as SPM is an important first step, but it's not an easy undertaking.

Impact and Result

In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is, and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities. We’ll help to situate you in the space and assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering.

Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard – A guide to help you drive strategic outcomes.

In this concise publication we introduce you to strategic portfolio management and consider the extent to which your organization can leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

  • Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management Storyboard

2. Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment Tool – Use this tool to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach.

Use this Excel workbook to determine if your organization can benefit from the features and functionality of an SPM approach or whether you need something more like a traditional project portfolio management tool.

  • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment
[infographic]

Further reading

Make Sense of Strategic Portfolio Management

Separate what's new and valuable from bloated claims on the hype cycle.

Analyst Perspective

Do you need strategic portfolio management, or do you need to do portfolio management more strategically?

Travis Duncan, Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy

Travis Duncan
Research Director, PPM and CIO Strategy
Info-Tech Research Group

While the market is eager to get users into what they're calling "strategic portfolio management," there's a lot of uncertainty out there about what this market is and how it's different from other, more established portfolio disciplines – most significantly, project portfolio management.

Indeed, if you look at how the space is covered within the industry, you'll encounter a dog's breakfast of players, a comparison of apples and oranges: Jira in the same quadrants as Planisware, Smartsheets in the same profiles as Planview and ServiceNow. While each of the individual players is impressive, their areas of focus are unique and the extent to which they should be compared together under the category of strategic portfolio management is questionable.

It speaks to some of the grey area within the SPM space more generally, which is at a bit of a crossroads: Will it formally shed the guardrails of its antecedents to become its own space, or will it devolve into a bait and switch through which capabilities that struggled to gain much traction beyond IT settings seek to infiltrate the business and grow their market share under a different name?

Part of it is up to the rest of us as users and potential customers. Clarifying what we need before we jump into something simply because our prior attempts failed will help determine whether we need a unique space for strategic portfolio management or whether we simply need to do portfolio management more strategically.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
  • As an IT leader, you're responsible for steering the realization of business strategy through wise investments in/ and responsible stewardship of: assets, applications, portfolios, programs, products, and projects.
  • You need a tool to help align goals and facilitate processes and communications across business units. You're aware of a tool space called strategic portfolio management, and it looks like it could help, but you're unsure of how it's different from some of the existing tools you already license.
  • As a software space, strategic portfolio management lacks a unified definition. Unpacking what's truly new in helping to define strategy and drive strategic outcomes versus what's just repackaged as SPM is no small undertaking.
  • Because SPM can span different business units, ways of working, and roles, getting buy-in, alignment, and adoption can be even more precarious than it is when implementing other types of solutions.
  • In this concise publication, we will cut through the marketing to unpack what strategic portfolio management is and what makes it distinct from similar capabilities.
  • Assess the extent to which your tooling needs can be met by a strategic portfolio management offering or the extent to which you may need to look at other software categories.
  • With a better understanding of the space, we hope to help facilitate better internal discussions around the value of SPM for your business needs.

Info-Tech Insight
In the same way that it took many years for PPM to stabilize as a concept distinct from traditional enterprise project management, strategic portfolio management is experiencing a similar period of formational uncertainty. In a space that can be all things to all users, clarify your actual needs before jumping onto a bandwagon and ending up with something that you don't need, and that the organization can't adopt.

Strategic portfolio management is enterprise portfolio management

Evolved from various other capabilities and vendor solutions, strategic portfolio management (SPM) seeks to connect strategy to execution.

While the concept of 'strategic portfolio management' has been written about within project portfolio management circles for nearly 20 years, SPM, as a distinct organizational competence and software category, is a relatively new and largely vendor-driven capability.

First emerging in the discourse during the mid-to-late 2010s, SPM has evolved from its roots in traditional enterprise project portfolio management. Though, as we will discuss, it has other antecedents not limited to PPM.

In this publication, we'll unpack what SPM is, how it is distinct (and, in turn, how it is not distinct) from PPM and other capabilities, and we will consider the extent to which your organization can and should leverage an SPM application to help drive strategic outcomes.

–The increasing need to deliver value from digital initiatives is giving rise to strategic portfolio management, a digital investment management discipline that enables strategy realization in complex dynamic environments."
– OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?"

Only 2% of business leaders are confident that they will achieve 80% to 100% of their strategic objectives.
Source: Smith, 2022

Put strategic portfolio management in context

SPM is a new stage in the history of project portfolio management more generally. While it's emerging as a distinct capability, and it borrows from capabilities beyond PPM, unpacking its distinctiveness is best done by first understanding its source.

Understand the recent triggers for strategic portfolio management

Triggers for the emergence of strategic portfolio management in the discourse include the pace of technology-introduced change, the waning of enterprise project management, and challenges around enterprise PPM tool adoption.

Spot the difference?

Scope, focus, and audience are just a few of the factors distinguishing what the market calls "SPM" from traditional PPM.

Project Portfolio Management Differentiator Strategic Portfolio Management
Work-Level (Tactical) Primary Orientation High-Level (Strategic)
CIO Accountable for Outcomes CxO
Project Manager Responsible for Outcomes Product Management Organization
Project Managers, PMO Staff Targeted Users Business Leaders, ePMO Staff
Project Portfolio(s) Essential Scope Multi-Portfolio (Project, Application, Product, Program, etc.)
IT Project Delivery and Business Results Delivery Core Focus Business Strategy and Change Delivery
Project Scope Change Impact Sensitivity Enterprise Scope
IT and/or Business Benefit Language of Value Value Stream
Project Timelines Main View Strategy Roadmaps
Resource Capacity Primary Currency Money
Work-Assignment Details Modalities of Planning Value Milestones & OKRs
Work Management Modalities of Execution Governance (Project, Product, Strategy, Program, etc.)
Project Completion Definitions of "Done" Business Capability Realization

Info-Tech Insight
The distinction between the two capabilities is not necessarily as black and white as the table above would have it (some "PPM" tools offer what we're identifying above as "SPM" capabilities), but it can be helpful to think in these binaries when trying to distinguish the two capabilities. At the very least, SPM broadens its scope to target more executive and business users, and functions best when it's speaking at a higher level, to a business audience.

Strategic portfolio management offers a more holistic view of the enterprise

At its best, strategic portfolio management can accommodate various paradigms of work management and incorporate different types of portfolio management.

Perhaps the biggest evolution from traditional PPM that strategic portfolio management promises is that it casts a wider net in terms of the types of work it tracks (and how it tracks that work) and the types of portfolios it accommodates.

Not bound to the concepts of "projects" and a "project portfolio" specifically, SPM broadens its scope to encompass capabilities like product and product portfolio management, enterprise architecture management, security and risk management, and more.

  • Where a PPM solution only shows one piece of the puzzle, SPM looks at the entire investment ecosystem, tracking strategic goals, the ideas generated to help achieve those goals, and all the various kinds of investments made in the service of those goals.
  • what's more, where traditional PPM tools required users to adhere to a certain way of working and managing tasks, SPM is more flexible, relying on integrations across various ways of working to provide higher-level insight on the progress of work and the achievement of goals.

Deliver business strategy and change effectively

Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Framework

"An SPM tool will capture business strategy, business capabilities, operating models, the enterprise architecture and the project portfolio with unmatched visibility into how they all relate. This will give...a robust understanding of the impact of a proposed IT change " and enable IT and business to act like cocreators driving innovation."
– Paula Ziehr

You might need a strategic portfolio management tool if–

If you find yourself facing any of these situations, it might be time to step away from your PPM tool and into an SPM approach:

  • Your organization is facing a large implementation that will cross multiple departmental units and requires alignment across senior leadership (e.g. a digital transformation initiative).
  • You currently have disparate systems tracking different portfolios (project, product, applications, etc.) and types of investments, but lack insight into the whole in terms of how work efforts and investments tie back to strategy realization.
  • You are an ePMO or a strategy realization office that doesn't manage work necessarily, but that rather ensures that the work, assets, and capabilities that are funded connect to strategy and drive the realization of strategy.

Sixty one percent of leaders acknowledge their companies struggle to bridge the gap between creating a strategy and executing on that strategy.
Source: StrategyBlocks, 2020

Get to know your strategic portfolio management stakeholders

In terms of users, SPM's focus is further up the org chart than most applications, relying on high-level but usable outputs to help drive decision making.

ePMO or Strategy Realization Office Senior Leadership and Executive Stakeholders Business Leads and IT Directors and Managers
SPM tools are best facilitated through enterprise PMOs or strategy realization offices. After all, in enterprises, these are the entities charged with the planning, execution, and tracking of strategy.

Their roles within the tool typically entail:

  • Helping to facilitate processes and collect data.
  • Data quality and curation.
  • Report distribution and consumption.
As those with the accountability and authority to drive the organization's strategy, you could argue that these stakeholders are the primary stakeholders for an SPM tool.

Their roles within the tool typically entail:

  • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
  • Using reports to steward strategy realization.
SPM targets more business users as well as senior IT managers and directors.

Their roles within the tool typically entail:

  • Using strategy map and ideation functionalities.
  • Providing updates to ePMOs on progress.

What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (1 of 2)

Standard features for SPM include:

Name Description
Analytics and Reporting SPM should provide access to real-time dashboards and data interpretation, which can be exported as reports in a range of formats.
Strategy Mapping and Road Mapping SPM should provide access to up-to-date timeline views of strategies and initiatives, including the ability to map such things as dependencies, market needs, funding, priorities, governance, and accountabilities.
Value Tracking and Measurement SPM should include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments. This includes accommodations for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
Ideation and Innovation Management SPM should include the ability to facilitate innovation management processes across the organization, including the ability to support stage gates from ideation through to approval; to articulate, socialize, and test ideas; perform impact assessments; create value canvas and OKR maps; and prioritize.
Multi-Portfolio Management SPM should include the ability to perform various modalities of portfolio management and portfolio optimization, including project portfolio management, applications portfolio management, asset portfolio management, etc.
Interoperability/APIs An SPM tool should enable seamless integration with other applications for data interoperability.

What should you look for in a strategic portfolio management tool? (2 of 2)

Advanced features for SPM can include:

Name Description
Product Management SPM can include product-management-specific functionality, including the ability to connect product families, roadmaps, and backlogs to enterprise goals and priorities, and track team-level activities at the sprint, release, and campaign levels.
Enterprise Architecture Management SPM can include the ability to define and map the structure and operation of an organization in order to effectively coordinate various domains of architecture and governance (e.g. business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, security architecture, etc.) in order to effectively plan and introduce change.
Security and Risk Management SPM can include the ability to identify and track enterprise risks and ensure compliance controls are met.
Lean Portfolio Management SPM can include the ability to plan and report on portfolio performance independent from task level details of product, program, or project delivery.
Investment and Financial Management SPM can include the ability to forecast, track, and report on financials at various levels (strategy, product, program, project, etc.).
Multi-Methodology Delivery SPM can include the ability to plan and execute work in a way that accommodates various planning and delivery paradigms (predictive, iterative, Kanban, lean, etc.).

What's promising within the space?

As this space continues to stabilize, the following are some promising associations for business and IT enablement.

1. SPM accommodates various ways of working.
  • Where traditional PPM and work management tools required that users change their processes and tasking paradigms to fit within the tool's rigid task management and data structures, the best SPM tools are those that are adaptable to various ways of working and can accommodate many tasking and work management models.
  • Sometimes this is done through extensive integrations and APIs that pull data from existing work management applications into a single view within the SPM tool, and other times, this is done by abstracting the task-level details into a higher-level reporting structure (it can depend on the solution). In any event, the best SPMs are bound to one work management model.
2. SPM puts the focus on value and change.
  • With its focus on the planning and execution of strategy, SPM can't avoid putting a spotlight on value and value realization. The best SPM tools include the ability to forecast, track, and measure return on investment for strategic investments, and they accommodate for various paradigms of value delivery (e.g. traditional value delivery and measurement, OKRs, as well as value mapping and value streams).
  • Of course, you can't realize value without successfully fostering change. And while SPM tools don't necessarily offer functionality explicitly identifiable as organizational change management, they can act as agents of change in putting the spotlight on the execution of change at the executive level.
3. SPM fosters a coherent approach to demand management.
  • With its goal of ensuring that strategy informs the organization of portfolios and guides the selection of projects and delivery of products, SPM can potentially bring some order to what is often a chaotic demand-management landscape, ensuring that planned and in-progress work is well justified from an ROI perspective.

What's of concern within the space?

As a progeny from other capabilities, SPM has some risks and connotations potential users should be wary of.

1. The space is rife with IT buzzwords and, as a concept, is sometimes used as a repackaging of failing concepts.
  • You don't need to spend too much time engaging with the literature around SPM before you notice the marketing appeals heavily to concepts like "digitalization," "digital transformation," "continual innovation," "agility/Agile," and the like. While these are all important concepts, and the pursuit of them is worthwhile in many cases, there's no denying they're used as consultant and vendor buzzwords, deployed to excite our imaginations, without necessarily providing much meat around what they mean or how they're deployed and successfully sustained.
  • Indeed, many concepts and capabilities that appear in relation to SPM are on the downward swing of industry hype cycles, suggesting that SPM may be being used by vendors and consultants as another attempt to repackage and capitalize on these concepts even as practitioners grow weary and suspicious of the marketing claims built up around them.
2. Some solutions that identify as SPM are not.
  • Because it's on the upward swing of its place in the hype cycle, many established PPM and service management vendors are applying the 'strategic portfolio management" label to their products without necessarily doing anything different from a functionality perspective to fit within the space. As a result, SPM vendor landscapes can compare work management, project management, demand management tools, and more. Users who want SPM functionality need to stay frosty to ensure they get what they pay for.
3. SPM tools may have a capacity blind spot.
  • The biggest barrier to getting things done and done well in modern enterprises is approving more work than you have the capacity to deliver. While SPM offerings can help with better demand management, not many of them cover the capacity side with the same level of improvement.

Does your organization need a strategic portfolio management tool?

Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to gauge your readiness for SPM.

  • As noted in previous places in this deck, there is often a grey area in the market between project portfolio management tools and strategic portfolio management tools.
  • Some PPM tools offer SPM functionality, while some SPM tools avoid traditional PPM outcomes and stay at a higher, strategic level.
  • Depending on the scope of your PMO or portfolio optimization needs, you may need a tool that has just one, or both, of these capabilities.
  • Use Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment to help you assess whether you require a high-level strategy management tool, a more low-level project portfolio management tool, or a mix of both.

Download Info-Tech's Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment

1.1 Assess your needs

10 to 20 minutes

  1. The Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment is a 41-question survey broken up into three parts: (1) PMO Type, (2) Features and Functionality, (3) Roles.
  2. Go through each section using the provided dropdowns to help identify the orientation of your PMO, the feature and functionality needs of your office, as well as the roles whose needs will need to be serviced through the potential tool implementation.

This screenshot shows a sample output from the assessment. Based upon your inputs, you'll be grouped within three ranges:

  1. Green: Based upon your inputs, you will benefit from an SPM tool.
  2. Yellow: You may benefit from an SPM tool, but you may also require something more traditional. Clarify your requirements before proceeding.
  3. Red: you're unlikely to leverage many of the benefits of an SPM tool at this time. Look for a more tactical solution.

Sample Output from the assessment tool

Input Output
  • Understanding of existing project management, project portfolio management, and work management applications.
  • Recommendation on PPM/SPM tool type
Materials Participants
  • Strategic Portfolio Management Needs Assessment tool
  • Portfolio managers and/or ePMO directors
  • Project managers and product managers
  • Business stakeholders

Explore the SPM vendor landscape

Use Info-Tech's application selection resources to help find the right solution for your organization.

If the analysis in the previous slides suggested you can benefit from an SPM tool, you can quick-start your vendor evaluation process with SoftwareReviews.

SoftwareReviews has extensive coverage of not just the SPM space, but of the project portfolio management (pictured to the top right) and project management spaces as well. So, from the tactical to the strategic, SoftwareReviews can help you find the right tools.

Further, as you settle in on a shortlist, you can begin your vendor analysis using our rapid application selection methodology (see framework on bottom right). For more information see our The Rapid Application Selection Framework blueprint.

Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework

Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF)

Related Info-Tech Research

Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

Prepare an Actionable Roadmap for your PMO
Turn planning into action with a realistic PMO timeline.

Maintain an Organized Portfolio
Align portfolio management practices with COBIT (APO05: Manage Portfolio)

Bibliography

Angliss, Katy, and Pete Harpum. Strategic Portfolio Management: In the Multi-Project and Program Organization. Book. Routledge. 30 Dec. 2022.

Anthony, James. "95 Essential Project Management Statistics: 2022 Market Share & Data Analysis." Finance Online. 2022. Web. Accessed 21 March 2022

Banham, Craig. "Integrating strategic planning with portfolio management." Sopheon. Webinar. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Garfein, Stephen J. "Executive Guide to Strategic Portfolio Management: roadmap for closing the gap between strategy and results." PMI. Conference Paper. Oct. 2007. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Garfein, Stephen J. "Strategic Portfolio Management: A smart, realistic and relatively fast way to gain sustainable competitive advantage." PMI. Conference Paper. 2 March 2005. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Hontar, Yulia. "Strategic Portfolio Management." PPM Express. Blog 16 June 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Milsom, James. "6 Strategic Portfolio Management Trends for 2023." i-nexus. Blog. 25 Jan. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Milsom, James. "Strategic Portfolio Management 101." i-nexus. 8 Dec. 2021. Blog . Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

OnePlan, "Is Strategic Portfolio Management the Future of PPM?" YouTube. 17 Nov. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

OnePlan. "Strategic Portfolio Management for Enterprise Agile." YouTube. 27 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Piechota, Frank. "Strategic Portfolio Management: Enabling Successful Business Outcomes." Shibumi. Blog . 31 May 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

ServiceNow. "Strategic Portfolio Management—The Thing You've Been Missing." ServiceNow. Whitepaper. 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Smith, Shepherd, "50+ Eye-Opening Strategic Planning Statistics" ClearPoint Strategy. Blog. 13 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

SoftwareAG. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management (SPM)?" SoftwareAG. Blog. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Stickel, Robert. "What It Means to be Adaptive." OnePlan. Blog. 24 May 2021. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

UMT360. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management?" YouTube. Webinar. 22 Oct. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Wall, Caroline. "Elevating Strategy Planning through Strategic Portfolio Management." StrategyBlocks. Blog. 26 Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Westmoreland, Heather. "What is Strategic Portfolio Management." Planview. Blog. 19 Oct 2002. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Wiltshire, Andrew. "Shibumi Included in Gartner Magic Quadrant for Strategic Portfolio Management for the 2nd Straight Year." Shibumi. Blog. 20 Apr. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Ziehr, Paula. "Keep your eye on the prize: Align your IT investments with business strategy." SoftwareAG. Blog. 5 Jul. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023.

Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}51|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 7.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
  • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
  • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications
  • Organizations collaboration toolsets are increasingly disordered and overburdened. Not only do organizations waste money by purchasing tools that overlap with their current toolset, but also employees’ productivity is destroyed by having to spend time switching between multiple tools.
  • Shadow IT is easier than ever. Without suitable onboarding and agreed-upon practices, employees will seek out their own solutions for collaboration. No transparency of what tools are being used means that information shared through shadow IT cannot be coordinated, monitored, or regulated effectively.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Best-of-breed approaches create more confusion than productivity. Collaboration toolsets should be as streamlined as possible.
  • Employee-led initiatives to implement new toolsets are more successful. Focus on what is a suitable fit for employees’ needs.
  • Strategizing toolsets enhances security. File transfers and communication through unmonitored, unapproved tools increases phishing and hacking risks.

Impact and Result

  • Categorize your current collaboration toolset, identifying genuine overlaps and gaps in your collaboration capabilities.
  • Work through our best-practice recommendations to decide which redundant overlapping tools should be phased out.
  • Build business requirements to fill toolset gaps and create an adoption plan for onboarding new tools.
  • Create a collaboration strategy that documents collaboration capabilities, rationalizes them, and states which capability to use when.

Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to create a collaboration strategy that will improve employee efficiency and save the organization time and money.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Evaluate current toolset

Identify and categorize current collaboration toolset usage to recognize unnecessary overlaps and legitimate gaps.

  • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools – Phase 1: Evaluate Current Toolset
  • Identifying and Categorizing Shadow Collaboration Tools Survey
  • Overlaps and Gaps in Current Collaboration Toolset Template

2. Strategize toolset overlaps

Evaluate overlaps to determine which redundant tools should be phased out and explore best practices for how to do so.

  • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools – Phase 2: Strategize Toolset Overlaps
  • Phase-Out Plan Gantt Chart Template
  • Phase-Out Plan Marketing Materials

3. Fill toolset gaps

Fill your collaboration toolset gaps with best-fit tools, build business requirements for those tools, and create an adoption plan for onboarding.

  • Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools – Phase 3: Fill Toolset Gaps
  • Adoption Plan Gantt Chart Template
  • Adoption Plan Marketing Materials
  • Collaboration Tools Business Requirements Document Template
  • Collaboration Platform Evaluation Tool
[infographic]

Workshop: Rationalize Your Collaboration Tools

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Categorize the Toolset

The Purpose

Create a collaboration vision.

Acknowledge the current state of the collaboration toolset.

Key Benefits Achieved

A clear framework to structure the collaboration strategy

Activities

1.1 Set the vision for the Collaboration Strategy.

1.2 Identify your collaboration tools with use cases.

1.3 Learn what collaboration tools are used and why, including shadow IT.

1.4 Begin categorizing the toolset.

Outputs

Beginnings of the Collaboration Strategy

At least five archetypical use cases, detailing the collaboration capabilities required for these cases

Use cases updated with shadow IT currently used within the organization

Overlaps and Gaps in Current Capabilities Toolset Template

2 Strategize Overlaps

The Purpose

Identify redundant overlapping tools and develop a phase-out plan.

Key Benefits Achieved

Communication and phase-out plans for redundant tools, streamlining the collaboration toolset.

Activities

2.1 Identify legitimate overlaps and gaps.

2.2 Explore business and user strategies for identifying redundant tools.

2.3 Create a Gantt chart and communication plan and outline post-phase-out strategies.

Outputs

Overlaps and Gaps in Current Capabilities Toolset Template

A shortlist of redundant overlapping tools to be phased out

Phase-out plan

3 Build Business Requirements

The Purpose

Gather business requirements for finding best-fit tools to fill toolset gaps.

Key Benefits Achieved

A business requirements document

Activities

3.1 Use SoftwareReviews and the Collaboration Platform Evaluation Tool to shortlist best-fit collaboration tool.

3.2 Build SMART objectives and goals cascade.

3.3 Walk through the Collaboration Tools Business Requirements Document Template.

Outputs

A shortlist of collaboration tools

A list of SMART goals and a goals cascade

Completed Business Requirements Document

4 Create an Adoption Plan

The Purpose

Create an adoption plan for successfully onboarding new collaboration tools.

Key Benefits Achieved

An adoption plan

Activities

4.1 Fill out the Adoption Plan Gantt Chart Template.

4.2 Create the communication plan.

4.3 Explore best practices to socialize the new tools.

Outputs

Completed Gantt chart

Adoption plan marketing materials

Long-term strategy for engaging employees with onboarded tools

Tame the Project Backlog

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}439|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • Unmanaged project backlogs can become the bane of IT departments, tying IT leaders and PMO staff down to an ever-growing receptacle of project ideas that provides little by way of strategic value and that typically represents a lack of project intake and approval discipline.
  • Decision makers frequently use the backlog to keep the peace. Lacking the time to assess the bulk of requests, or simply wanting to avoid difficult conversations with stakeholders, they “approve” everything and leave it to IT to figure it out.
  • As IT has increasing difficulty assessing – let alone starting – any of the projects in the backlog, stakeholder relations suffer. Requestors view inclusion in the backlog as a euphemism for “declined,” and often characterize the backlog as the place where good project ideas go to die.
  • Faced with these challenges, you need to make your project backlog more useful and reliable. The backlog may contain projects worth doing, but in its current untamed state, you have difficulty discerning, let alone capitalizing upon, those instances of value.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Project backlogs are an investment and need to be treated as such. Incurring a cost impact that can be measured in terms of time and money, the backlog needs to be actively managed to ensure that you’re investing wisely and getting a good return in terms of strategic value and project throughput.
  • Unmanageable project backlogs are rooted in bad habits and poorly-defined processes. Identifying the sources that fuel backlog growth is key to long-term success. Unless the problem is addressed at the root, any gains made in the near-term will simply fade away as old, unhealthy habits re-emerge and take hold.
  • Backlog management should facilitate executive awareness about the status of backlog items as new work is being approved. In the long run, this ongoing executive engagement will not only help to keep the backlog manageable, but it will also help to bring more even workloads to IT project staff.

Impact and Result

  • Keep the best, forget the rest. Develop a near-term approach to limit the role of the backlog to include only those items that add value to the business.
  • Shine a light. Improve executive visibility into the health and status of the backlog so that the backlog is taken into account when decision makers approve new work.
  • Evolve the organizational culture. Effectively employ organizational change management practices to evolve the culture that currently exists around the project backlog in order to ensure customer-service needs are more effectively addressed.
  • Ensure long-term sustainability. Institute processes to make sure that your list of pending projects – should you still require one after implementing this blueprint – remains minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

Tame the Project Backlog Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a more disciplined approach to managing your project backlog can help you realize increased value and project throughput.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Create a project backlog battle plan

Calculate the cost of the project backlog and assess the root causes of its unmanageability.

  • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 1: Create a Backlog Battle Plan
  • Project Backlog ROI Calculator

2. Execute a near-term backlog cleanse

Increase the manageability of the backlog by updating stale requests and removing dead weight.

  • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 2: Execute a Near-Term Backlog Cleanse
  • Project Backlog Management Tool
  • Project Backlog Stakeholder Communications Template

3. Ensure long-term backlog manageability

Develop and maintain a manageable backlog growth rate by establishing disciplined backlog management processes.

  • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 3: Ensure Long-Term Backlog Manageability
  • Project Backlog Operating Plan Template
  • Project Backlog Manager
[infographic]

Workshop: Tame the Project Backlog

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Create a Project Backlog Battle Plan

The Purpose

Gauge the manageability of your project backlog in its current state.

Calculate the total cost of your project backlog investments.

Determine the root causes that contribute to the unmanageability of your project backlog.

Key Benefits Achieved

An understanding of the organizational need for more disciplined backlog management.

Visibility into the costs incurred by the project backlog.

An awareness of the sources that feed the growth of the project backlog and make it a challenge to maintain.

Activities

1.1 Calculate the sunk and marginal costs that have gone into your project backlog.

1.2 Estimate the throughput of backlog items.

1.3 Survey the root causes of your project backlog.

Outputs

The total estimated cost of the project backlog.

A project backlog return-on-investment score.

A project backlog root cause analysis.

2 Execute a Near-Term Project Backlog Cleanse

The Purpose

Identify the most organizationally appropriate goals for your backlog cleanse.

Pinpoint those items that warrant immediate removal from the backlog and establish a game plan for putting a bullet in them.

Communicate backlog decisions with stakeholders in a way that minimizes friction and resistance. 

Key Benefits Achieved

An effective, achievable, and organizationally right-sized approach to cleansing the backlog.

Criteria for cleanse outcomes and a protocol for carrying out the near-term cleanse.

A project sponsor outreach plan to help ensure that decisions made during your near-term cleanse stick. 

Activities

2.1 Establish roles and responsibilities for the near-term cleanse.

2.2 Determine cleanse scope.

2.3 Develop backlog prioritization criteria.

2.4 Prepare a communication strategy.

Outputs

Clear accountabilities to ensure the backlog is effectively minimized and outcomes are communicated effectively.

Clearly defined and achievable goals.

Effective criteria for cleansing the backlog of zombie projects and maintaining projects that are of strategic and operational value.

A communication strategy to minimize stakeholder friction and resistance.

3 Ensure Long-Term Project Backlog Manageability

The Purpose

Ensure ongoing backlog manageability.

Make sure the executive layer is aware of the ongoing status of the backlog when making project decisions.

Customize a best-practice toolkit to help keep the project backlog useful. 

Key Benefits Achieved

A list of pending projects that is minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

Executive engagement with the backlog to ensure intake and approval decisions are made with a view of the backlog in mind.

A backlog management tool and processes for ongoing manageability. 

Activities

3.1 Develop a project backlog management operating model.

3.2 Configure a project backlog management solution.

3.3 Assign roles and responsibilities for your long-term project backlog management processes.

3.4 Customize a project backlog management operating plan.

Outputs

An operating model to structure your long-term strategy around.

A right-sized management tool to help enable your processes and executive visibility into the backlog.

Defined accountabilities for executing project backlog management responsibilities.

Clearly established processes for how items get in and out of the backlog, as well as for ongoing backlog review.

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}414|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity

You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

  • Improve your DR capabilities.
  • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
  • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience.
  • Focus on identifying gaps and risks, and addressing them, before a real disaster hits.
  • Take a realistic, iterative approach to resilience testing that starts with small, low-risk tests and builds on lessons learned.

Impact and Result

  • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
  • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
  • Demonstrate value from testing to gain buy-in for additional tests.

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard – A guide to establishing a right-sized approach to DR testing that delivers durable value to your organization.

Use this research to understand the different types of tests, prioritize and plan tests for your organization, review the results, and establish a cadence for testing.

  • Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing Storyboard

2. Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template – A template to document your organization's DR test plan.

Use this template to document scope and goals, participants, key pre-test milestones, the test-day schedule, and your findings from the testing exercise.

  • Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

3. Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary – A template to outline your organization's DR testing program.

Identify the tests you will run over the next year and the expertise, governance, process, and funding required to support testing.

  • Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary

[infographic]

 

Further reading

Take a Realistic Approach to Disaster Recovery Testing

Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

Analyst Perspective

Reduce costly downtime with a right-sized testing program that improves IT resilience.

Andrew Sharp

Most businesses make significant investments in disaster recovery and technology resilience. Redundant sites and systems, monitoring, intrusion prevention, backups, training, documentation: it all costs time and money.

But does this investment deliver expected value? Specifically, can you deliver service continuity in a way that meets business requirements?

You can’t know the answer without regularly testing recovery processes and systems. And more than just validation, testing helps you deliver service continuity by finding and addressing gaps in your plans and training your staff on recovery procedures.

Use the insights, tools, and templates in this research to create a streamlined and effective resilience testing program that helps validate recovery capabilities and enhance service reliability, availability, and continuity.

Andrew Sharp

Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

You have made significant investments in availability and disaster recovery (DR) – but your ability to recover hasn’t been tested in years. Testing will:

  • Improve your DR capabilities.
  • Identify required changes to planning documentation and procedures.
  • Validate DR capabilities for interested customers and auditors.

Common Obstacles

Despite the value testing can offer, actually executing on DR tests is difficult because:

  • Testing is often an IT-driven initiative, and it can be difficult to secure business buy-in to redirect resources away from other urgent projects or accept risks that come with testing.
  • Previous tests have been overly complex and challenging to coordinate and leave a hangover so bad that no one wants to do them again.

Info-Tech's Approach

Take a realistic approach to resilience testing by starting with small, low-risk tests, then iterating with the lessons you’ve learned:

  • Identify testing scenarios and scope that can deliver value to your organization.
  • Create practical test plans with Info-Tech’s template.
  • Get buy-in for regular DR testing from key stakeholders with a testing program summary.

Info-Tech Insight

If you treat testing as a pass/fail exercise, you aren’t meeting the end goal of improving organizational resilience. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

Process and Outputs

This research is accompanied by templates to help you achieve your goals faster.

1 - Establish the business rationale for DR testing.
2 - Review a range of options for testing.
3 - Prioritize tests that are most valuable to your business.
4 - Create a disaster recovery test plan.
5 - Establish a Test Program to support a regular testing cycle.

Outputs:

DR Test Plan
DR Testing Program Summary

Example Orange Activity slide.
Orange activity slides like the one on the left provide directions to help you make key decisions.

Key Deliverable:

Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

Build a plan for your first disaster recovery test.

This document provides a complete example you can use to quickly build your own plan, including goals, milestones, participants, the test-day schedule, and findings from the after-action review.

Why test?

Testing helps you avoid costly downtime

  • In a disaster scenario, speed matters. Immediately after an outage, the impact on the organization is small, but impact increases rapidly the longer the outage continues.
  • A quick and reliable response and recovery can protect the organization from significant losses.
  • A DRP testing and maintenance program helps ensure you’re ready to recover when you need to, rather than figuring it out as you go.

“Routine testing is vital to survive a disaster… that’s when muscle memory sets in. If you don’t test your DR plan it falls [in importance], and you never see how routine changes impact it.”

– Jennifer Goshorn
Chief Administrative Officer
Gunderson Dettmer LLP

Info-Tech members estimated even one day of system downtime could lead to significant revenue losses. Estimated loss of revenue over 24 hours. Core Infrastructure has the highest potential for lost revenue.

Average estimated potential loss* in thousands of USD due to a 24-hour outage (N=41)

*Data aggregated from 41 business impact analyses (BIAs) conducted with Info-Tech advisory assistance. BIAs evaluate potential revenue loss due to a full day of system downtime, at the worst possible time.

Run tests to enhance disaster recovery plans

Testing improves organizational resilience

  • Identify and address gaps in your plans before a real disaster strikes.
  • Cross-train staff on systems recovery.
  • Go beyond testing technology to test recovery processes.
  • Establish a culture that centers resilience in everyday decision-making.

Testing keeps DR documentation ready for action

  • Update documentation ahead of tests to prepare for the testing exercise.
  • Update documentation after testing to incorporate any lessons learned.

Testing validates that investments in resilience deliver value

  • Confirm your organization can meet defined recovery time objectives (RTOs) and recovery point objectives (RPOs).
  • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications

Overcome testing challenges

Despite the value of effective recovery testing, most IT organizations struggle to test recovery plans

Common challenges

  • Key resources don’t have time for testing exercises.
  • You don’t have the technology to support live recovery testing.
  • Tests are done ad hoc and lessons learned are lost.
  • A lack of business support for test exercises as the value isn’t understood.
  • Tests are always artificially simple because RTOs and RPOs must be met to satisfy customer or auditor inquiries

Overcome challenges with a realistic approach:

  • Start small with tabletop and recovery tests for specific systems.
  • Include recovery tests in operational tasks (e.g. restore systems when you have a maintenance window).
  • Create testing plans for larger testing exercises.
  • Build on successful tests to streamline testing exercises in the future.
  • Don’t make testing a pass-fail exercise. Focus on identifying gaps and risks so you can address them before a real disaster hits.

Go beyond traditional testing

Different test techniques help validate recovery against different threats

  • There are many threats to service continuity, including ransomware, severe weather events, geopolitical conflict, legacy systems, staff turnover, and day-to-day outages caused by human error, software updates, hardware failures, or network outages.
  • At its core, disaster recovery planning is about recovery. A plan for service recovery will help you mitigate against many threats at once. The testing approaches on the right will help you validate different aspects of that recovery process.
  • This research will provide an overview of the approaches outlined on the right and help you prioritize tests that are most valuable to your organization.
Different test techniques for disaster recover training: System Failover tests, tabletop exercises, ransomware recovery tests, etc.

00 Identify a working group

30 minutes

Identify a group of participants who can fill the following roles and inform the discussions around testing in this research. A single person could fill multiple roles and some roles could be filled by multiple people. Many participants will be drawn from the larger DRP team.

Roles and expectations for Disaster Recovery Planning. DRP sponsor, Testing coordinator, System testers, business liaisons, executive team.

Input

  • Organizational context

Output

  • A list of key participants for test planning and execution

Participants

  • Typically, start by identifying the sponsor and coordinator and have them identify the other members of the working group.

Start by updating your disaster recovery plan (DRP)

Use Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan research to identify recovery objectives based on business impact and outline recovery processes. Both are tremendously valuable inputs to your test plans.

Overall Business Continuity Plan

IT Disaster Recovery Plan

A plan to restore IT services (e.g. applications and infrastructure) following a disruption. A DRP:

  • Identifies critical applications and dependencies.
  • Defines appropriate recovery objectives based on a business impact analysis (BIA).
  • Creates a step-by-step incident response plan.

BCP for Each Business Unit

A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit. A business continuity plan (BCP) is also sometimes called a continuity of operations plan (COOP).

BCPs are created and owned by each business unit, and creating a BCP requires deep involvement from the leadership of each business unit.

Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

Crisis Management Plan

A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

01 Confirm: why test at all?

15-30 minutes

Identify the value recovery testing for your organization. Use language appropriate for a nontechnical audience. Start with the list below and add, modify, or delete bullet points to reflect your own organization.

 

Drivers for testing – Examples:

 

  • Improve service continuity.
  • Identify and address gaps in recovery plans before a real disaster strikes.
  • Cross-train staff on systems recovery to minimize single points of failure.
  • Identify how we coordinate across teams during a major systems outage.
  • Exercise both recovery processes and technology.
  • Support a culture that centers system resilience in everyday decision-making.
  • Keep recovery documentation up-to-date and ready for action.
  • Confirm that our stated recovery objectives can be met.
  • Provide proof of testing for auditors, prospective customers, and insurance applications.
  • We require proof of testing to pass audits and renew cybersecurity insurance.

Info-Tech Insight

Time-strapped technical staff will sometimes push back on planning and testing, objecting that the team will “figure it out” in a disaster. But the question isn’t whether recovery is possible – it’s whether the recovery aligns with business needs. If your plan is to “MacGyver” a solution on the fly, you can’t know if it’s the right solution for your organization.

Input

  • Business drivers and context for testing

Output

  • Specific goals that are driving testing

Participants

  • DR sponsor
  • Test coordinator

Think about what and how you test

Different layers of the stack to test: Network, Authentication, compute and storage, visualization platforms, database services, middleware, app servers, web servers.

Find gaps and risks with tabletop testing

Tabletop planning had the greatest impact on meeting recovery objectives (RTOs/RPOs).

In a tabletop planning exercise, the team walks through a disaster scenario to outline the recovery workflow, and risks or gaps that could disrupt that workflow.

Tabletops are particularly effective because:

  • It enables you to play out a wider range of scenarios than technology-based testing (e.g. full-scale, parallel) due to cost and complexity factors.
  • It is non-intrusive, so it can be executed more easily than other testing methodologies.
  • The exercise translates into recovery documentation: you create a workflow as you go.
  • A major site or service recovery scenario will review all aspects of the recovery process and create the backbone of your recovery plan.

02 Run a tabletop exercise

2 hours

Tabletop testing is part of our core DRP methodology, Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan. This exercise can be run using cue cards, sticky notes, or on a whiteboard; many of our facilitators find building the workflow directly in flowchart software to be very effective.

Use our Recovery Workflow Template as a starting point.

Some tips for running your first tabletop exercise:

Do

  • Review the complete workflow from notification all the way to user acceptance testing.
  • Keep focused; stay on task and on time.
  • Revisit each step and record gaps and risks (and known solutions, but don’t dwell on this).
  • Revise and improve the plan with task owners.

Don't

  • Get weighed down by tools.
  • Try to find solutions to every gap/risk as you go. Save in-depth research/discussion for later.
  • Document the details right away – stick to the high-level plan for the first exercise.
  1. Ahead of the exercise, decide on a scenario, identify participants, and book a meeting time.
    • For your first walkthrough of a DR scenario, we often recommend a scenario that considers a site failure requiring failover to a DR site.
    • For the first exercise, focus on technical aspects of recovery before bringing in members of the business. The technical team may need space to discuss the appropriate steps in the recovery process before you bring in business liaisons to discuss user acceptance testing (UAT).
    • A complete failover considers all systems, the viability of your second site, and can help identify parts of the process that require additional exercises.
  2. Review the scenario with participants. Then, discuss and document the recovery process, starting with initial notification of an event.
    • Record steps in the process on white cards or boxes.
    • On yellow and red cards, document gaps and risks in people process and technology requirements.
  3. Once you’ve walked through the process, return to the start.
    • Record the time required to complete each step. Consider identifying who is responsible for key steps. Identify any additional gaps and risks.
  4. Clean up and record the results of the workflow. Save a copy with your DRP documentation.

Input

  • Expert knowledge on systems recovery

Output

  • Recovery workflow, including gaps and risks

Participants

  • Test coordinator
  • Technical SMEs

Move from tabletop testing to functional exercises

See how your plans fare in the real world

In live exercises, some portion of your recovery plans are executed in a way that mimics a real recovery scenario. Some advantages of live testing:

  • See how standby systems behave. A tabletop exercise can miss small issues that can make or break the recovery process. For example, connectivity or integration issues on a new subnet might be difficult to predict prior to actually running services in that environment.
  • Hands-on practice: Familiarize the team with the steps, commands, and interfaces of your recovery toolset.
  • Manage the pressure of the DR scenario: Nothing’s quite like the real thing, but a live exercise may be the closest your team can get to a disaster situation without experiencing it firsthand.

Examples of live exercises

Boot and smoke test Turn on a standby system and confirm it boots up correctly.
Restore and validate data Restore data or servers from backup. Confirm data integrity.
Parallel testing Send familiar transactions to production and standby systems. Confirm both systems produce the same result.
Failover systems Shut down the production system and use the standby system in production.

Run local tests ahead of releases

Think small

Most unacceptable downtime is caused by localized issues, such as hardware or software failures, rather than widespread destructive events. Regular local testing can help validate the recovery plan for local issues and improve overall service continuity.

Make local testing a standard step in maintenance work and new deployments to embed resilience considerations in day-to-day activities. Run the same tests in both your primary and your DR environment.

Some examples of localized tests:

  • Review backup logs and check for errors.
  • Restore files or whole systems from backup.
  • Run application-based tests as part of release management, including unit, regression, and performance tests.
    • Ensure application tests are run for both the primary and DR environment.
    • For a deep-dive on application testing, see Info-Tech’s research Automate Testing to Get More Done.

Info-Tech Insight

Local tests will vary between different services, and local test design is usually best left to the system SMEs. At the same time, centralize reporting to understand where tests are being done.

Investigate whether your IT Service Management or ticketing system can create recurring tasks or work orders to schedule, document, and track test exercises. Tasks can be pre-populated with checklists and documentation to support the test and provide a record of completed tests to support oversight and reporting.

Have the business validate recovery

If your business doesn’t think a system’s recovered, it’s not recovered.

User acceptance testing (UAT) after system recovery is a key step in the recovery process. Like any step in the process, there’s value in testing it before it actually needs to be done. Assign responsibility for building UATs to the person who will be responsible for executing them.

An acceptance test script might look something like the checklist below.

  • Does the application open?
  • Does the interface look right?
  • Do you see any unusual notifications or warnings?
  • Can you conduct a key transaction with dummy data?
  • Can you run key reports?

“I cannot stress how important it is to assign ownership of responsibilities in a test; this is the only way to truly mitigate against issues in a test.”

– Robert Nardella
IT Service Management
Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional

Info-Tech Insight

Build test scripts and test transactions ahead of time to minimize the amount of new work required during a recovery scenario.

Beyond the Basics: Full Failover Testing

  • A failover test – a full failover of your production environment to a secondary environment – is what many IT and businesspeople think about when they think of disaster recovery testing.
  • A full test can validate previous local or tabletop tests, identify additional gaps and risks, and provide hands-on training experience with recovery processes and technologies.
  • Setting a date for failover testing can also inject some urgency into otherwise low-priority (but high importance) disaster recovery planning and documentation exercises, which need to be completed prior to the test.
  • Despite these benefits, full failover tests carry significant risk and require a great deal of effort and cost. Typically, only businesses that already have an active-active environment capable of supporting in-scope production systems are able to run a full environment failover.
  • This is especially true the first time you test. While in theory a DR plan should be ready to go at any time, there will be documents to update, gaps to address, and risks to mitigate before you go ahead with the test.

Full Failover Testing

What you get:

  • Provide hands-on experience with recovery processes and technology.
  • Confirm that site failover works in practice as you assumed in tabletop or local testing exercises.
  • Identify critical gaps you might have missed without a full failover test.

What you need:

  • An active-active secondary site, with sufficient standby equipment, data, and licensed standby software to support production.
  • A completed tabletop exercise and documented recovery workflow.
  • A documented test plan, backout plan, and formal sign-off.
  • An off-hours downtime window.
  • Time from technical SMEs and business resources, both for creating the plan and executing the test.

Beyond the Basics: Site Reliability Engineering

  • Site reliability engineering (SRE) is an application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system resilience.
  • SRE is focused on “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning” across a set portfolio of services (Sloss, 2017).
  • In many organizations, SRE is implemented as a team that supports separate applications teams.
  • Applications must have defined and granular resilience requirements, translated into service objectives. The SRE team and applications teams will work together to meet these objectives.
  • Site reliability engineers (the folks that do SRE, and often also abbreviated as SREs) are expected to build solutions and processes to ensure services remain stable and performant, not just respond when they fail. For example, Google allows their SREs to spend just half their time on incident response, with the rest of their time focused on development and automation tasks.

Site Reliability Testing

What you get:

  • Improved reliability and reduced frequency and impact of downtime.
  • Increased use of automation to address problems before they cause an incident.
  • Granular resilience objectives.

What you need:

  • Systems running on software-defined infrastructure.
  • Specialized skills in programming, infrastructure-as-code.
  • Business & product owners able to define and fund acceptable and appropriate resilience objectives.
  • Technical experts able to translate product requirements into technical design requirements.

Beyond the Basics: Chaos Engineering

  • Chaos engineering, a term and approach first popularized by the team at Netflix, aims to improve the resilience of particularly large and distributed systems by simulating system failures and evaluating performance against a baseline.
  • Experiments simulate a variety of real-world events that could cause outages (e.g. network slowdowns or server failures). Experiments run continuously, and the recommendation is to run them in production where feasible while minimizing the impact on customers.
  • Tools to help you run chaos testing exist, including open-source toolkits like Chaos Monkey or Mangle and paid software as a service (SaaS) solutions like Gremlin.
  • Deciding whether the long-term benefits of tests that can degrade production are worth the potential risk of system slowdowns or outages is a business or product decision. Technical considerations aside, if the business owner of a particular system doesn’t see the value of continuous testing outweighing the introduced risk, this approach to testing isn’t going to happen.

Chaos Engineering

What you get:

  • Confidence that systems can weather volatile and unpredictable conditions in a production environment.
  • An embedded resilience culture.

What you need:

  • High-maturity IT incident, monitoring and event practices.
  • Standby/resilient systems to minimize downtime impact.
  • Business buy-in for introducing risk into the production environment.
  • Specialized skills to identify, develop, and run tests that degrade production performance in a controlled way.
  • Budget and time to act on issues identified through testing.

Beyond the Basics: Security Event Simulations

  • Ransomware is driving demands for proof of recovery testing from customers, executives, auditors, and insurance companies. Systems recovery is part of ransomware recovery, but recovering from a breach includes detection, analysis, containment, and eradication of the attack vector before systems recovery can begin.
  • Beyond technical recovery, internal legal and communications teams will have a role, as will your insurance provider, consultants specialized in ransomware recovery, or professional ransom negotiators.
  • A tabletop exercise focused on ransomware incident response is a key first step. You can find Info-Tech’s methodology for a ransomware tabletop in Phase 3 of Build Resilience Against Ransomware Attacks.
  • Live testing approaches can offer hands-on experience and further insight into how your systems are vulnerable to malware. A variety of open source and proprietary tools can simulate ransomware and help you identify problems, though it’s important to understand the limitations of different simulators (Allon, 2022).
  • A “red team” exercise simulates an adversarial attack against your processes and systems. A specialized penetration tester will often take on the role of the red team and provide a report of identified gaps and risks after the engagement.

Security Event Simulation

What you get:

  • Hands-on experience managing and recovering from a ransomware attack in a controlled environment.
  • A better understanding of gaps in your response process.

What you need:

  • A completed ransomware tabletop exercise and mature security incident response processes.
  • For Ransomware Simulators: An air-gapped sandbox environment hosting a copy of your production systems and security tools, and time from your technical SMEs.
  • For Red Team Exercises: A trusted provider, scope for your testing plans, and time from your security incident response team.

Prioritize tests by asking these three questions

1. Will the scope of this test deliver sufficient value?

  • Yes, these are critical systems with low tolerance for downtime or data loss.
  • Yes, major changes or new systems require validation of DR capabilities.
  • Yes, there’s high probability of an outage, or recent experience of an outage.
  • •Yes, we have audit requirements or customer demands for testing.

2. Are we ready for this test?

  • Yes, recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented.
  • Yes, key technical and business resources have time to commit to testing exercises.
  • Yes, technology is currently able to support proposed tests.

3. Is it easy to do?

  • Yes, effort required to complete the test is low (i.e. minimal work, few participants).
  • Yes, the risks related to testing are low.
  • Yes, it won’t cost much.

Info-Tech Insight

More complex, challenging, risky, or costly tests, such as full failover tests, can deliver value. But do the high-value, low-effort stuff first!

03 Brainstorm and prioritize test ideas

30-60 minutes

Even if you have an idea of what you need to test and how you want to run those tests, this brainstorming exercise can generate useful ideas for testing that might otherwise have been missed.

    1. Review the slides above to develop ideas on how and what you want to test. These slides may be enough to kickstart a brainstorming process. Don’t debate or discount ideas at this point. Write down these ideas in a space where all participants can see them (e.g. whiteboard or shared screen).

The next steps will help you prioritize the list – if needed – to tests that are highest value and lowest effort.

  1. Discuss where you have the greatest need to test. Assign a score of 0 – 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being high-need and a score of zero being low-need. Consider whether:
    • These applications have a low tolerance for downtime.
    • There’s a high chance of an outage, or recent experience with an outage.
    • There’s a need to train or cross-train staff on recovery for the system(s) in question.
    • Major changes require a review or validation of DR capabilities.
    • Audit requirements or customer/executive demands can be met via testing.
  2. Discuss which tests will require the least effort to complete – where readiness is high and tests are easier to do. Assign a score between 0 and 3 for each test, with a score of 3 being least effort and a score of 0 being high effort. Consider whether:
    • Recovery plans and recovery objectives are documented for these systems.
    • Technical experts are available to work on testing exercises.
    • For active testing, standby/sandbox systems are available and capable of supporting proposed tests.
    • The effort required to complete the test is low (e.g. minimal new work, few participants).
    • The risks related to testing are low.
    • You will need to secure additional funding.
  3. Sum together the assigned scores for each test. Higher scores should be the highest priority, but of course use your judgement to validate the results and select one or two tests to execute in the coming year.

“There are different levels of testing and it is very progressive. I do not recommend my clients to do anything, unless they do it in a progressive fashion. Don’t try to do a live failover test with your users, right out of the box.”

– Steve Tower
Principal Consultant
Prompta Consulting Group

Input

  • Organizational and technical context

Output

  • Prioritize list of DR testing ideas

Participants

  • DR sponsor
  • Test coordinator

04 Build a test plan

3-5 days

Building a test plan helps the test run smoothly and can uncover issues with the underlying DRP as you dig into the details.

The test coordinator will own the plan document but will rely on the sponsor to confirm scope and goals, technical SMEs to develop system recovery plans, and business liaisons to create UAT scripts.

Download Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template. Use the structure of the template to build your own document, deleting example data as you go. Consider saving a separate copy of this document as an example and working from a second copy.

Key sections of the document include:

  • Goals, scenario, and scope of the test.
  • Assumptions, constraints, risks, and mitigation strategies.
  • Test participants.
  • Key pre-test milestones, and test-day schedule.
  • After-action review.

Download the Disaster Recovery Test Plan Template

Input

  • Scope
  • High-level goals

Output

  • Test plan, including goals, scope, key milestones, risks and mitigations, and test-day schedule

Participants

  • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
    • Technical SMEs
    • Business liaisons
    • DR sponsor

05 Run an after-action review

30-60 minutes

Take time after test exercises – especially large-scale tests with many participants – to consider what went well, what didn’t, and where you can improve future testing exercises. Track lessons learned and next steps at the bottom of your test plan.

  1. Start with a short (5-10 minute) debrief of the test and allow participants to ask questions. Confirm:
    • Did we meet the goals we set for the exercise, including RTOs and RPOs?
    • What was done well? What issues, gaps, and risks were identified?
  2. Work through variations of the following questions:
    • Was the test plan effective, and was the test well organized?
    • Was the documentation effective? Where did we follow the plan as documented, and where did we deviate from the plan?
    • Was our communication/collaboration during the test effective?
    • Have gaps and issues found during the test been reported to the testing coordinator? Could some of the issues uncovered apply more broadly to other IT services as well?
    • What could we test next, based on what was discovered?
    • Are there other tools or approaches that could be useful?

Input

  • Insights and experience from a recent testing exercise

Output

  • Identified gaps and risks, and action items to address them
  • Ideas to improve future test exercises

Participants

  • Test coordinator develops the plan with support from:
    • Test coordinator
    • Test participants

Follow a testing cycle

All tests are expected to drive actions to improve resilience, as appropriate. Experience from previous tests will be applied to future testing exercises.

The testing cycle: 1. Plan a test, 2. Run test, 3. Take action.

Use your experience to simplify testing

The fifth testing exercise should be easier than the first

Outputs and lessons learned from testing should help you run future tests.

  • With past experience under their belt, participants should have a better understanding of their role, and of their peers’ roles, and the goal of the exercise.
  • Facilitators will be more comfortable facilitating the exercise, and everyone should be more confident in the steps required to recover their systems.
  • Gather feedback from participants through after-action reviews to identify what worked and what didn’t.
  • Documentation from previous tests can provide a template for future tests.
  • Gaps identified in previous tests can provide ideas for future tests.

Experience, lessons learned, improved process, new test targets, repeat.

Info-Tech Insight

Testing should get easier over time. But if you’re easily passing every test, it’s a sign that you’re ready to run more challenging tests.

06 Create a test program summary

2-4 hours

Regular testing allows you to build on prior tests and helps keep plans current despite changes to your environment.

Keeping a regular testing schedule requires expertise, a process to coordinate your efforts, and a level of governance to provide oversight and ensure testing continues to deliver value. Create a call to action using Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Testing Program Summary Template.

The result is a summary document that:

  • Identifies key takeaways and testing goals
  • Presents key elements of the testing program
  • Outlines the testing cycle
  • Lists expected milestones for the next year
  • Identifies participants
  • Recommends next steps

“It is extremely important in the early stages of development to concentrate the focus on actual recoverability and data protection, enhancing these capabilities over time into a fully matured program that can truly test the recovery, and not simply focusing on the testing process itself.”

– Joe Starzyk
Senior Business Development Executive
IBM Global Services

Research Contributors and Experts

  • Bernard A. Jones, Business Continuity & Disaster Recovery Expert
  • Robert Nardella, IT Service Management, Certified z/OS Mainframe Professional
  • Larry Liss, Chief Technology Officer, Blank Rome LLP
  • Jennifer Goshorn, Chief Administrative and Chief Compliance Officer, Gunderson Dettmer LLP
  • Paul Kirvan, FBCI, CISA, Independent IT Consultant/Auditor, Paul Kirvan Associates
  • Steve Tower, Principal Consultant, Prompta Consulting Group
  • Joe Starzyk, Senior Business Development Executive, IBM Global Services
  • Thomas Bronack, Enterprise Resiliency and Corporate Certification Consultant, DCAG
  • Paul S. Randal, CEO & Owner, SQLskills.com
  • Tom Baumgartner, Disaster Recovery Analyst, Catholic Health

Bibliography

Alton, Yoni. “Ransomware simulators – reality or a bluff?” Palo Alto Blog, 2 May 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.paloaltonetworks.com/blog/security-operations/ransomware-simulators-reality-or-a-bluff/

Brathwaite, Shimon. “How to Test your Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan,” Security Made Simple, 13 Nov 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.securitymadesimple.org/cybersecurity-blog/how-to-test-your-business-continuity-and-disaster-recovery-plan

The Business Continuity Institute. Good Practice Guidelines: 2018 Edition. The Business Continuity Institute, 2017.

Emigh, Jacqueline. “Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works,” Enterprise Storage Forum, 28 May 2019. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
Disaster Recovery Testing: Ensuring Your DR Plan Works | Enterprise Storage Forum

Gardner, Dana. "Case Study: Strategic Approach to Disaster Recovery and Data Lifecycle Management Pays off for Australia's SAI Global." ZDNet. BriefingsDirect, 26 Apr 2012. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
http://www.zdnet.com/article/case-study-strategic-approach-to-disaster-recovery-and-data-lifecycle-management-pays-off-for-australias-sai-global/.

IBM. “Section 11. Testing the Disaster Recovery Plan.” IBM, 2 Aug 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023. Section 11. Testing the disaster recovery plan - IBM Documentation Lutkevich, Ben and Alexander Gillis. “Chaos Engineering”. TechTarget, Jun 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://www.techtarget.com/searchitoperations/definition/chaos-engineering

Monperrus, Martin. “Principles of Antifragility.” Arxiv Forum, 7 June 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://arxiv.org/ftp/arxiv/papers/1404/1404.3056.pdf

“Principles of Chaos Engineering.” Principles of Chaos Engineering, 2019 March. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://principlesofchaos.org/

Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. “Introduction.” Site Reliability Engineering. Ed. Betsy Beyer. O’Reilly Media, 2017. Accessed 31 Jan 2023.
https://sre.google/sre-book/introduction/

Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}203|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Big Data
  • Parent Category Link: /big-data
  • The immaturity of the big data market means that organizations lack examples and best practices to follow, and they are often left trailblazing their own paths.
  • Experienced and knowledgeable big data professionals are limited and without creative resourcing; IT might struggle to fill big data positions.
  • The term NoSQL has become a catch-all phrase for big data technologies; however, the technologies falling under the umbrella of NoSQL are disparate and often misunderstood. Organizations are at risk of adopting incorrect technologies if they don’t take the time to learn the jargon.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • NoSQL plays a key role in the emergence of the big data market, but it has not made relational databases outdated. Successful big data strategies can be conducted using SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of the two.
  • Assign a Data Architect to oversee your initiative. Hire or dedicate someone who has the ability to develop both a short-term and long-term vision and that has hands-on experience with data management, mining and modeling. You will still need someone (like a database administrator) who understands the database, the schemas, and the structure.
  • Understand your data before you attempt to use it. Take a master data management approach to ensure there are rules and standards for managing your enterprise’s data, and take extra caution when integrating external sources.

Impact and Result

  • Assess whether SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of both technologies will provide you with the appropriate capabilities to achieve your business objectives and gain value from your data.
  • Form a Big Data Team to bring together IT and the business in order to leave a successful initiative.
  • Conduct ongoing training with your personnel to ensure up-to-date skills and end-user understanding.
  • Frequently scan the big data market space to identify new technologies and opportunities to help optimize your big data strategy.

Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Develop a big data strategy

Know where to start and where to focus attention in the implementation of a big data strategy.

  • Storyboard: Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

2. Assess the appropriateness of big data technologies

Decide the most correct tools to use in order to solve enterprise data management problems.

  • Big Data Diagnostic Tool

3. Determine the TCO of a scale out implementation

Compare the TCO of a SQL (scale up) with a NoSQL (scale out) deployment to determine whether NoSQL will save costs.

  • Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool
[infographic]

Terms of use

 These Terms of Use state the terms and conditions under which you may use this website and the Services, which are the property of Tymans Group BV. ("TY"). Your use of this site and the Services constitutes acceptance of these Terms of Use.
  1. General Use Restrictions

TY services, advice, materials, products, websites, and networks (collectively the "Services") are to be used for the User (meaning a named individual user that uses the publicly available Services or is authorized by TY in a service agreement to use the Services that require paid access) use and benefit only pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription and may not be disclosed, disseminated or distributed to any other party, except as TY otherwise agrees in writing. The User will not circumvent any encryption or otherwise gain access to Services for which the User has not been expressly granted the appropriate rights of access.

The User will not use the Services for or knowingly transmit to TY or upload to any TY site or network any illegal, improper, or unacceptable material or use them for illegal, improper, or unacceptable practices, including without limitation the dissemination of any defamatory, fraudulent, infringing, abusive, lewd, obscene or pornographic material, viruses, trojan horses, time bombs, worms, or other harmful code designed to interrupt, destroy, or limit the functionality of any software, hardware or communications equipment, unsolicited mass email or other internet-based advertising campaigns, privacy breaches, denial of use attacks, spoofing, or impersonation.

  1. Copyright

The Services are © Tymans Group BV. All rights reserved.

The Services are owned by and copyrighted by TY and other parties and may contain trademarks of TY or others. They are protected by Canadian, US, and international copyright and trademark laws and conventions.

User may use the Services solely for his or their own information purposes pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription. The User may download any of the Service's tools or templates for his or her individual use but may not distribute any articles, tools, templates, or blueprints internally, subject to the exceptions below. The User may create derivative works from the Service's tools or templates and distribute these for internal use but may not distribute these derivative works externally for any commercial or resale purposes.

Any other reproduction or dissemination of the Services in any form or by any means is forbidden without TY's written permission, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the User will not:

  • A. record and re-transmit the Service over any network (including any local area network), except as otherwise stated above;
  • B. use any Service in any timesharing, service bureau, bulletin board, or similar arrangement or public display;
  • C. post any Service to any other online service (including bulletin boards or the internet);
  • D. sublicense, lease, sell, offer for sale or assign the Service; or
  • E. use TY's name or any excerpts from the Services in the promotion of its products or services.
  1. Users

Users must be authorized to use the Services by TY. Users must maintain and protect the confidentiality of any password(s) and are responsible for ensuring that the passwords are effective. Users shall advise TY immediately if they discover that their password has been compromised at the following number: 1-888-670-8889. If you are an organization that is party to a service agreement with TY, references in these Terms of Use to "User(s)" include you, and you are responsible for compliance by named individual Users within your organization with these Terms of Use.

  1. User Perspective

For the benefit of all Users, TY's research services include the ability for Users to (i) participate in the creation of research by contributing User perspectives for publication on TY's websites and (ii) participate in industry-specific community groups and other forums by contributing discussion posts. All such contributions are voluntary with the full consent of the User. If your account is used to contribute content to TY's websites (collectively, "User Contributions"), you agree to accept sole responsibility for those User Contributions, including the information, statements, facts, and material contained in any form or medium (e.g., text, audio, video, and photographic) therein. To the extent Users contribute any feedback to TY (as User Contributions or otherwise), TY may use that feedback to assess, improve, and market its products. To the extent Users contribute to research, TY may incorporate those contributions within the research Services without the necessity of attribution. You grant us and our affiliates a worldwide, irrevocable, royalty-free, nonexclusive license to use, reproduce, create derivative works of, distribute publicly display, and publish User Contributions. You agree you will not attempt to enforce any so-called "moral rights" in User Contributions against us or our affiliates.

By using TY's research services, you agree that none of your User Contributions will:

  • Infringe on the intellectual property, trade secret, privacy, publicity, or other rights of others;
  • Contain false statements or misrepresentations that could damage TY or any third party;
  • Include obscene, libelous, defamatory, threatening, harassing, abusive, hateful, sexually explicit, sexually-oriented, profane, or embarrassing material, as determined by TY in its sole discretion;
  • Be illegal or otherwise objectionable;
  • Contain the personal information of any third party, including, without limitation, addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, Social Security numbers, and credit card numbers;
  • Encourage or facilitate insider trading or anti-competitive behavior;
  • Include commercial advertisements or solicitations; or
  • Purport to or actually provide legal or professional advice.

BecauseTY's Web sites are available to the public, User Contributions on TY's Web sites are not Confidential Information.

Although you are solely responsible for the content you provide, and we do not have a policy of reviewing or monitoring all User Contributions, we reserve the right to pre-screen and/or monitor User Contributions. If we become aware of User Contributions that violate these Terms of Service or that we believe to be otherwise objectionable, we may reject or delete them or take other action without notice to you and at our sole discretion.

If you believe that any User Contributions appear to violate these Terms of Service, or if you believe any other user is engaged in illegal, harassing, or objectionable behavior, please contact us.

  1. Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information

In these Terms of Use, "Confidential Information" means information of a commercially sensitive or proprietary character that is marked as confidential or that a reasonable person would understand to be confidential. The "Disclosing Party" is the party disclosing Confidential Information, and the "Receiving Party" is the party receiving Confidential Information. However, Confidential Information does not include information that:

  • was in the public domain at the time of communication to the Receiving Party or is later placed in the public domain by the Disclosing Party;
  • entered the public domain through no fault of the Receiving Party subsequent to the time of disclosure hereunder to the Receiving Party;
  • was in the Receiving Party's possession free of any obligation of confidence prior to disclosure hereunder; or
  • was developed by employees or agents of the Receiving Party independently of and without reference to any Confidential Information.

The Receiving Party shall not disclose, publish or communicate the Confidential Information to any third party without the prior written consent of the Disclosing Party. However, the Receiving Party may disclose the Confidential Information to a third party who has a need to know the Confidential Information and (i) is an accountant, attorney, underwriter, or advisor under a duty of confidentiality; or (ii) is under a written obligation of confidentiality at least as restrictive as this Agreement and to the extent required by law.

TY may create or use anonymized data for purposes such as benchmarking, analytics, and other good-faith business purposes. Anonymized data is not the Confidential Information of Users.

  1. Term

Many of the Services are "subscription" services that have a fixed Term and must be renewed in writing at the end of the term for services to continue. The contractual term of membership is generally one (1) to three (3) years in length and is agreed to by the parties in writing. Workshops purchased as part of membership expire without refund or credit at the end of the membership period covered by the purchase. Workshops purchased outside membership expire without refund or credit one (1) year after purchase. TY may terminate a User's access at any time if the User or the entity paying for the User's access violates the terms of use or subscription or any other agreement with TY.

  1. Cancellation

As the Services are paid in advance for a committed membership term, a service agreement or membership cannot be terminated by a User for convenience during a contractual term.

  1. Changes

TY strives to innovate. TY may update, upgrade or otherwise change or discontinue content, features, or other aspects of its Services. TY will not make changes that cumulatively degrade the quality of a paid subscription to the Services. TY also reserves the right to change the terms and conditions applicable to your use of the Services unless TY has otherwise agreed in a service agreement. Use of the Services after such changes shall be deemed to be acceptance by the User of such changes. These terms were last revised on June 8, 2022.

  1. Accuracy of Information and Warranty

The information contained in the Services has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but TY does not warrant the completeness, timeliness, or accuracy of any information contained in the Services. The Services are intended to: help identify business risks; provide insights based on industry research; and help you focus on certain matters which may be affecting your business. TY does not provide legal, accounting, or other professional advice, nor should any advice from TY be construed as such. We encourage you to seek professional advice whenever necessary.

TY expressly excludes and disclaims all express or implied conditions, representations, and warranties, including, without limitation, any implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, to the extent allowable by law.

Although TY takes reasonable steps to screen Services for infection by viruses, worms, Trojan horses, or other code manifesting contaminating or destructive properties before making the Services available, TY cannot guarantee that any Service will be free of infection.

User assumes sole responsibility for the selection of the Services to achieve its intended results. The opinions expressed in the Services are subject to change without notice.

TY does not endorse third-party products or services. TY assesses and analyzes the effectiveness and appropriateness of information technology in the context of a general business environment only unless specifically hired by a User to assess in the context of their own environment.

  1. Limitation of Liability

In no event is TY liable for any special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or other damages however caused, whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability, operation of law, or otherwise (including without limitation damages for lost profits, business interruption or loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the Services, or any information provided in the Services, or claims attributable to errors, omissions or other inaccuracies in the Service or interpretations thereof), even if TY has been advised of the possibility of such damages. TY's total liability shall in no event exceed the amount paid by the User for the Service in question.

The User acknowledges that TY has set its prices and sold the Services to it in reliance on the limitations of liability and disclaimers of warranties and damages set forth herein and that the same form a fundamental and essential basis of the bargain between the parties. They shall apply even if the contract between the User and TY is found to have failed in its fundamental or essential purpose or has been fundamentally breached.

  1. Links to Third-Party Sites

Any third-party sites that are linked to the Services are not under TY's control. TY is not responsible for anything on the linked sites, including without limitation any content, links to other sites, any changes to those sites, or any policies those sites may have. TY provides links as a convenience only, and such links do not imply any endorsement by TY of those sites.

  1. Investment Advice

The Services are not intended to be used for the purpose of, or as a basis for, making investment decisions or recommendations with respect to securities of any company or industry, and TY assumes no liability for decisions made, in whole or in part, on the basis of any information contained in the Services.

  1. Governing Law

This site and any service agreement are governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, excluding any conflicts of law provisions and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. Any legal action against TY shall take place in the courts of the province of Antwerp, Belgium. The parties attorn to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Ontario.

  1. Entire Agreement

These standard terms of use, together with any service agreements and statements of work signed by the parties, contains the complete and exclusive statement of Agreement between the parties and supersedes all purchase order terms and conditions, understandings, proposals, negotiations, representations, or warranties of any kind whether written or oral.

  1. Privacy

A User's right to privacy is of paramount importance to TY. See our Privacy Policy for more detail. The identity of our research clients is not considered personal or confidential information, and we may disclose that information for promotion and marketing purposes.

  1. Contact Information

Attn: General Counsel

legal@tymansgroup.com

(US): 1-917-473-8669

(BE): 32-468-142-754

Design Your Cloud Operations

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}462|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: 20 Average Days Saved
  • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
  • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
  • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
  • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
  • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

Impact and Result

  • Assess your key workflows’ maturity for life in the cloud and evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working
  • Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services
  • Design your cloud operations framework and communicate it clearly and succinctly to secure buy-in

Design Your Cloud Operations Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Design Your Cloud Operations Deck – A step-by-step storyboard to help guide you through the activities and tools in this project.

This storyboard will help you assess your cloud maturity, understand relevant ways of working, and create a meaningful design of your cloud operations that helps align team members and stakeholders.

  • Design Your Cloud Operations – Storyboard
  • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
  • Roadmap Tool

2. Planning and design tools.

Use these templates and tools to assess your current state, design the cloud operations organizing framework, and create a roadmap.

  • Cloud Maturity Assessment

3. Communication tools.

Use these templates and tools to plan how you will communicate changes to key stakeholders and communicate the new cloud operations organizing framework in an executive presentation.

  • Cloud Operations Communication Plan
  • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework: Executive Brief

Infographic

Workshop: Design Your Cloud Operations

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Day 1

The Purpose

Establish Context

Key Benefits Achieved

Alignment on target state

Activities

1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

1.4 Develop organization design principles

Outputs

Cloud maturity assessment

Project drivers

Cloud challenges and objectives

Organization design principles

2 Day 2

The Purpose

Establish Context

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of cloud workstreams

Activities

2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

2.3 Identify cloud work

Outputs

Workstream target statement

Cloud operations workflow diagrams

3 Day 3

The Purpose

Design the Organization

Key Benefits Achieved

Visualization of the cloud operations future state

Activities

3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

3.2 Create a current-state cloud operations diagram

3.3 Define success indicators

Outputs

Future-state cloud operations diagram

Current-state cloud operations diagram

Success indicators

4 Day 4

The Purpose

Communicate the Changes

Key Benefits Achieved

Alignment and buy-in from stakeholders

Activities

4.1 Create a roadmap

4.2 Create a communication plan

Outputs

Roadmap

Communication plan

Further reading

It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analysts’ Perspective

The image contains a picture of Andrew Sharp.

Andrew Sharp

Research Director

Infrastructure & Operations Practice

It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

Just because you’re in the cloud doesn’t mean everyone is on the same page about how cloud operations work – or should work.

You have an opportunity to implement new ways of working. But if people can’t see the bigger picture – the organizing framework of your cloud operations – it will be harder to get buy-in to realize value from your cloud services.

Use Info-Tech’s methodology to build out and visualize a cloud operations organizing framework that defines cloud work and aligns it to the right areas.

The image contains a picture of Nabeel Sherif.

Nabeel Sherif

Principal Research Director

Infrastructure & Operations Practice

The image contains a picture of Emily Sugerman.

Emily Sugerman

Research Analyst

Infrastructure & Operations Practice

Scott Young

Principal Research Director

Infrastructure & Operations Practice

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

Info-Tech’s Approach

Widespread cloud adoption has created new opportunities and challenges:

  • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
  • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist, leading to a lack of direction, employee frustration, missed work, inefficiency, and unacceptable risk.
  • Many organizations have bought their way into a SaaS portfolio. Now, as key applications leave their network, I&O leaders still have accountability for these apps, but little visibility and control over them.
  • Few organizations are, or will ever be, cloud only. Your operations will be both on-prem and in-cloud for the foreseeable future and you must be able to accommodate both.
  • Traditional infrastructure siloes no longer work for cloud operations, but key stakeholders are wary of significant change.

Clearly communicate the need for operations changes:

  • Identify current challenges with cloud operations. Assess your readiness and fit for new ways of working involved in cloud operations: DevOps, SRE, Platform Engineering, and more.
  • Use Info-Tech’s templates to design a cloud operations organizing framework. Define cloud work, and align work to the right work areas.
  • Communicate the design. Gain buy-in from your key stakeholders for the considerable organizational change management required to achieve durable change.

Info-Tech Insight

Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

Your Challenge

Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.

  • As key applications leave for the cloud, I&O teams are still expected to manage access, spend, and security but may have little or no visibility or control over the applications themselves.
  • The automation and self-service capabilities of cloud aren’t delivering the speed the business expected because teams don’t work together effectively.
  • Business leaders purchase their own cloud solutions because, from their point of view, IT’s processes are cumbersome and ineffective.
  • Accounting practices and governance mechanisms haven’t adjusted to enable new development practices and technologies.
  • Security and cost management requirements may not be accounted for by teams acquiring or developing solutions.
  • All of this contributes to frustration, missed work, wasteful spending, and unacceptable risk.

Obstacles, by the numbers:

85% of respondents reported security in the cloud was a serious concern.

73% reported balancing responsibilities between a central cloud team and business units was a top concern.

The average organization spent 13% more than they’d budgeted on cloud – even when budgets were expected to increase by 29% in the next year.

32% of all cloud spend was estimated to be wasted spend.

56% of operations professionals said their primary focus is cloud services.

81% of security professionals thought it was difficult to get developers to prioritize bug fixes.

42% of security professionals felt bugs were being caught too late in the development process.

1. Flexera 2022 State of the Cloud Report. 2. GitLab DevSecOps 2021 Survey

Cloud operations are different, but IT departments struggle to change

  • There’s no sense of urgency in the organization that change is needed, particularly from teams that aren’t directly involved in operations. It can be challenging to make the case that change is needed.
  • Beware “analysis paralysis”! With so many options, philosophies, approaches, and methodologies, it’s easy to be overwhelmed by choice and fail to make needed changes.
  • The solution to the problem requires organizational changes beyond the operations team, but you don’t have the authority to make those changes directly. Operations can influence the solution, but they likely can’t direct it.
  • Behavior, culture, and organizations take time and work to change. Progress is usually evolutionary – but this can also mean it feels like it’s happening too slowly.
  • It’s not just cloud, and it probably never will be. You’ll need to account for operating both on-premises and cloud technologies for the foreseeable future.

Follow Info-Tech’s Methodology

1. Ensure alignment with the risks and drivers of the business and understand your organization’s strengths and gaps for a cloud operations world.

2. Understand the balance of different types of deliveries you’re responsible for in the cloud.

3. Reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations to your workstreams.

4. Identify “work areas,” decide which area is responsible for what tasks and how work areas should interact in order to best facilitate desired business outcomes.

The image contains a screenshot of a diagram demonstrating Info-Tech's Methodology, as described in the text above.

Info-Tech Insight

Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services; i.e. If you mostly build or host in cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

Operating Framework Elements

Proper design of roles and responsibilities for each cloud workflow category will help reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations.

We base this on a composite of the well-architected frameworks established by the top global cloud providers today.

Workflow Categories

  • Build
  • Host
  • Consume

Key Pillars

  • Performance
  • Reliability
  • Cost Effectiveness
  • Security
  • Operational Excellence

Risks to Mitigate

  • Changes to Support Model
  • Changes to Security & Governance
  • Changes to Skills & Roles
  • Replicating Old Habits
  • Misaligned Stakeholders

Cloud Operations Design

Info-Tech’s Methodology

Assess Maturity and Ways of Working

Define Cloud Work

Design Cloud Operations

Communicate and Secure Buy-in

Assess your key workflows’ maturity for “life in the cloud,” related to Key Operational Pillars. Evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working.

Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services.

Define key cloud work areas, the work they do, and how they should share information and interact.

Outline the change you recommend to a range of stakeholders. Gain buy-in for the plan.

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

Cloud Maturity Assessment

Assess the intensity and cloud maturity of your IT operations for each of the key cloud workstreams: Consume, Host, and Build

The image contains screenshots of the Cloud Maturity Assessment.

Communication Plan

Identify stakeholders, what’s in it for them, what the impact will be, and how you will communicate over the course of the change.

The image contains a screenshot of the Communcation Plan.

Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook

Capture the diagram as you build it.

The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.

Roadmap Tool

Build a roadmap to put the design into action.

The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap Tool.

Key deliverable:

Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

The Cloud Operations Organizing Framework is a communication tool that introduces the cloud operations diagram and establishes its context and justification.

The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

Project Outline

Phase 1: Establish Context

1.1: Identify challenges, opportunities, and cloud maturity

1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

1.3: Define cloud work

Phase 2: Design the organization and communicate changes

2.1: Design a draft cloud operations diagram

2.2: Communicate changes

Outputs

Cloud Services Objectives and Obstacles

Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams

Cloud Maturity Assessment

Draft Cloud Operations Diagram

Communication Plan

Roadmap Tool

Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

Project benefits

Benefits for IT

Benefits for the business

  • Define the work required to effectively deliver cloud services to deliver business value.
  • Define key roles for operating cloud services.
  • Outline an operations diagram that visually communicates what key work areas do and how they interact.
  • Communicate needed changes to key stakeholders.
  • Receive more value from cloud services when the organization is structured to deliver value including:
    • Avoiding cost overruns
    • Securing services
    • Providing faster, more effective delivery
    • Increasing predictability
    • Reducing error rates

Calculate the value of Info-Tech’s Methodology

The value of the project is the delivery of organizational change that improves the way you manage cloud services

Example Goal

How this blueprint can help

How you might measure success/value

Streamline Responsibilities

The operations team is spending too much time fighting applications fires, which is distracting it from needed platform improvements.

  • Identify shared and separate responsibilities for development and platform operations teams.
  • Focus the operations team on securing and automating cloud platform(s).
  • Reduce time wasted on back and forth between development and operations teams (20 hrs. per employee per year x 50 staff = 1000 hrs.).
  • Deliver automation features that reduces development lead time by one hour per sprint (40 devs x 20 sprints per yr. x 1 hr. = 800 hrs.).

Improve Cost Visibility

The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

  • Ensure operations contributes to visibility and execution of cost governance.
  • $1,000,000 annual spend on cloud services.
  • Of this, assume 32% is wasted spend ($320k).1
  • New cost management function has a target to cut waste by half next year saving ~$160k.
  • Cost visibility and capture metrics (e.g. accurate tagging metrics, right-sizing execution).
1. Average wasted cloud spend across all organizations, from the 2022 Flexera State of the Cloud Report

Understand your cloud vision and strategy before you redesign operations

Guide your operations redesign with an overarching cloud vision and strategy that aligns to and enables the business’s goals.

Cloud Vision

The image contains a screenshot of the Define Your Cloud Vision.

Cloud Strategy

It is difficult to get or maintain buy-in for changes to operations without everyone on the same page about the basic value proposition cloud offers your organization.

Do the workload and risk analysis to create a defensible cloud vision statement that boils down into a single statement: “This is how we want to use the cloud.”

Once you have your basic cloud vision, take the next step by documenting a cloud strategy.

Establish your steering committee with stakeholders from IT, business, and leadership to work through the essential decisions around vision and alignment, people, governance, and technology.

Your cloud operations design should align to a cloud strategy document that provides guidelines on establishing a cloud council, preparing staff for changing skills, mitigating risks through proper governance, and setting a direction for migration, provisioning, and monitoring decisions.

Key Insights

Focus on the future, not the present

Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

Responsibilities change in the cloud

Understand what you mean by cloud work

Focus where it matters

Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and it requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring

Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but is required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services. If you mostly build or host in the cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

Design principles will often change over time as the organization’s strategy evolves.

Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

Phase 1

Phase 2

Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges

Calls #2&3: Assess cloud maturity and drivers for org. redesign

Call #4: Review cloud objectives and obstacles

Call #5: Evaluate new ways of working and identify cloud work

Calls #6&7: Create your Cloud Operations diagram

Call #8: Create your communication plan and build roadmap

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

Workshop Overview

Contact your account representative for more information.
workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1

Day 2

Day 3

Day 4

Day 5

Establish Context

Design the Organization and Communicate Changes

Next Steps and
Wrap-Up (offsite)

Activities

1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

1.4 Develop organization design principles

2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

2.3 Identify cloud work

3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

3.2 Create a current state cloud operations diagram

3.3 Define success indicators

4.1 Create a roadmap

4.2 Create a communication plan

5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Deliverables

  1. Cloud Maturity Assessment
  2. Cloud Challenges and Objectives
  1. Workstream target statement
  2. Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams
  1. Future and current state cloud operations diagrams
  1. Roadmap
  2. Communication Plan

Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

Phase 1:

Establish context

Phase 1

Phase 2

1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

1.3 Identify cloud work

2.1 Draft an operating model

2.2 Communicate proposed changes

Phase Outcomes:

Define current maturity and which workstreams are important to your organization.

Understand new operating approaches and which apply to your workstream balance.

Identify a new target state for IT operations.

Before you get started

Set yourself up for success with these three steps:

  • This methodology and the related slides are intended to be executed via intensive, collaborative working sessions using the rest of this slide deck.
  • Ensure the working sessions are successful by working through these steps before you start work on defining your cloud operations.

1. Identify an operations design working group

2. Review cloud vision and strategy

3. Create a working folder

This should be a group with insight into current cloud challenges, and with the authority to drive change. This group is the main audience for the activities in this blueprint.

Review your established planning work and documentation.

Create a repository to house your notes and any work in progress.

Create a working folder

15 minutes

Create a central repository to support transparency and collaboration. It’s an obvious step, but one that’s often forgotten.

  1. Download all the documents associated with this blueprint to a shared repository accessible to all participants. Keep separate folders for templates and work-in-progress.
  2. Share the link to the repository with all attendees. Include links to the repository in any meeting invites you set up as working sessions for the project.
  3. Use the repository for all the work you do in the activities listed in this blueprint.

Step 1.1: Identify goals and challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

Participants

  • Operations Design Working Group, which may include:
    • Cloud owners
    • Platform/Applications Team leads
    • Infra & Ops managers

Outcomes

  • Identify your current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement.
  • Define the advantages you expect to realize from cloud services and any obstacles you have to overcome to meet those objectives.
  • Identify the reasons why redesigning cloud operations is necessary.
  • Develop organization design principles.

“Start small: Begin with a couple services. Then, based on the feedback you receive from Operations and the business, modify your approach and keep increasing your footprint.” – Nenad Begovic

Cloud changes operational activities, tactics, and goals

As you adopt cloud services, the operations core mission remains . . .

  • IT operations are expected to deliver stable, efficient, and secure IT services.

. . . but operational activities are evolving.

  • Core IT operational processes remain relevant, such as incident or capacity management, but opportunities to automate or outsource operations tasks will change how that work is done.
  • As you rely more on automation and outsourcing, the team may see less direct execution in its day-to-day work and more solution design and validation.
  • Outsourcing frees the team from operational toil but reduces the direct control over your end-to-end solution and increases your reliance on your vendor.
  • Pay-as-you-go pricing models present opportunities for streamlined delivery and cost rationalization but require you to rethink how you do cost and asset management.
  • It’s very easy for the business to buy a SaaS solution without consulting IT, which can lead to duplicated functionality, integration challenges, security threats, and more.

Design a model for cloud operations that helps you achieve value from your cloud environment.

“As operating models shift to the cloud, you still need the same people and processes. However, the shift is focused on a higher level of operations. If your people no longer focus on server uptime, then their success metrics will change. When security is no longer protected by the four walls of a datacenter, your threat profile changes.

(Microsoft, “Understand Cloud Operating Models,” 2022)

Operational responsibilities are shared with a range of stakeholders

When using a vendor-operated public cloud, IT exists in a shared responsibility model with the cloud service provider, one that is further differentiated by the type of cloud service model in use: broadly, software-as a service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), or infrastructure-as-a-service (IaaS).

Your IT operations organization may still reflect a structure where IT retains control over the entire infrastructure stack from facilities to application and defines their operational roles and processes accordingly.

If the organization chooses a co-location facility, they outsource facility responsibility to a third-party provider, but much of the rest of the traditional IT operating model remains the same. The operations model that worked for an entirely premises-based environment is very different from one that is made up of, for instance, a portfolio of SaaS applications, where your control is limited to the top of the infrastructure stack at the application layer.

Once an organization migrates workloads to the cloud, IT gives up an increasing amount of control to the vendor, and its traditional operational roles & responsibilities necessarily change.

The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates what the cloud service models are.

Align operations with customer value

  • Decisions about operational design should be made with customer value in mind. Remember that cloud adoption should be an enabler of adaptability in the face of changing business needs!
  • Think about how the operations team is indispensable to the value received by your customer. Think about the types of changes that can add to the value your customers receive.
  • A focus on value will help you establish and explain the rationale and urgency required to deliver on needed changes. If you can’t explain how the changes you propose will help deliver value, your proposal will come across as change for the sake of change.
The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how operational design decisions need to be made with customer value in mind.

Info-Tech Insight

Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

A new consumption model means a different mix of activities

Evolving to cloud-optimal operations also means re-assessing and adapting your team’s approach to achieving cloud maturity, especially with respect to how automation and standardization can be leveraged to best achieve optimization in cloud.

Traditional ITDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor
CloudDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor

Info-Tech Insight

Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring.

The Service Models in cloud correspond to the way your organization delivers IT

Service Model

Example

Function

Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

Salesforce.com

Office 365

Workday

Consume

Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS)

Azure Stack

AWS SageMaker

WordPress

Build

Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

Microsoft Azure

Amazon EC2

Google Cloud Platform

Host

Define how you plan to use cloud services

Your cloud operations will include different tasks, teams, and workflows, depending on whether you consume cloud services, build them, or host on them.

Function

Business Need

Service Model

Example Tasks

Consume

“I need a commodity, off-the-shelf service that we can configure to our organization’s needs.

Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

Onboard and add users to a new SaaS offering. Vendor management of SaaS providers. Configure/integrate the SaaS offering to meet business needs.

Build

“I need to create significantly customized or net-new products and services.”

Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) & Infrastructure as-a-Service (IaaS)

Create custom applications. Build and maintain a container platform. Manage CI/CD pipelines and tools. Share infrastructure and applications patterns.

Host

“I need compute, storage, and networking components that reflect key cloud characteristics (on-demand self-service, metered usage, etc.).”

Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

Stand up compute, networking, and storage resources to host a COTS application. Plan to increase storage capacity to support future demand.

Align to the well-architected framework

  • Each cloud provider has defined a well-architected framework (WAF) that defines effective deployment and operations for their services.
  • WAFs embody a set of best practices and design principles to leverage the cloud in a more efficient, secure, and cost-effective manner.
  • While each vendor’s WAF has its own definitions and nuances, they collectively share a set of key principles, or “pillars,” that define the desired outcome of any cloud deployment.
  • These pillars address the key areas of risk when migrating to a public cloud platform.

“In order to accelerate public cloud adoption, you need to focus on infrastructure-as-code and script everything you can. Unlike traditional operations, CloudOps focuses on creating scripts: a script for task A, a script for task B, etc.”

– Nenad Begovic

Pillars

  • Reliability
  • Security
  • Cost Optimization
  • Operational Excellence
  • Performance Efficiency

General Best Practice Capability Areas

  • Host
  • Network
  • Data
  • Identity Management
  • Cost/Subscription Management

Assess cloud maturity

2 hours

  1. Download a copy of the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool.
  2. As a group, work through:
    • The balance of your operations activities from a Host/Build/Consume perspective. What are you responsible for delivering now? How do you expect things will change in the future?
    • Which workstreams to focus on. Are there activity categories that are critical or non-critical or that don’t represent a significant portion of overall work? Conversely, are there workstreams that you feel are subject to particular risk when moving to cloud?
  3. Fill out the Maturity Quiz tab in the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool for the workstreams you have chosen to focus on.
InputOutput
  • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
  • Maturity scoring for key workload streams as they align to the pillars of a general well-architected cloud framework
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip chart
  • Operating model template
  • Cloud platform SMEs

Download theCloud Maturity Assessment Tool

Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

Whiteboard Activity

An absolute must-have in any successful redesign is a shared understanding and commitment to changing the status quo.

Without a clear and urgent call to action, the design changes will be seen as change for the sake of change and therefore entirely safe to ignore.

Take up the following questions as a group:

  1. What kind of organizational change is needed?
  2. Why do we think the need for this change is urgent?
  3. What do we think will happen if no change occurs? What’s the worst-case scenario?

Record your answers so you can reference and use them in the communication materials you’ll create in Phase 2.

InputOutput
  • Cloud maturity assessment
  • Objectives and obstacles
  • Insight into existing challenges stemming from organizational design challenges
  • A list of reasons that form a compelling argument for organizational change
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip chart
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

“We know, for example, that 70 percent of change programs fail to achieve their goals, largely due to employee resistance and lack of management support. We also know that when people are truly invested in change it is 30 percent more likely to stick.”

– Ewenstein, Smith, Sologar

McKinsey (2015)

Consider the value of change from advantage and obstacle perspectives

Consider what you intend to achieve and the obstacles to overcome to help identify the changes required to achieve your desired future state.

Advantage Perspective

Ideas for Change

Obstacle Perspective

What advantages do cloud services offer us as an organization?

For example:

  • Enhance service features.
  • Enhance user experience.
  • Provide ubiquitous access.
  • Scalability to align with demand.
  • Automate or outsource routine tasks.

What obstacles prevent us from realizing value in cloud services?

For example:

  • Inadequate stability and reliability
  • Difficult to observe or monitor workloads
  • Challenges ensuring cloud security
  • Insufficient access to relevant skills

Review risks and challenges

Changes to Support Model

  • Have we identified who is on the cloud ops team?
  • Do we know where we are procuring skills (internal IT vs. third party) and for how long?
  • Do we know where we are in the migration process?

Changes to security & governance

  • Have we identified how our attack surface changes in the cloud?
  • Do we have guardrails in place to govern self-provisioning users?
  • Are we managing cost overage risks?

Replicating old habits

  • Have we made concrete plans to leverage cloud capabilities to standardize and automate outputs?
  • Are we simply reproducing existing systems in the cloud?

Changes to Skills & Roles

  • Is our staff excited to learn new skills and technologies? Are our specialists prepared to acquire generalist skills to support cloud services?
  • Do we have training plans created and aligned to our technology roadmap?
  • Do we know what head count we need?

Misaligned stakeholders

  • Have we identified our key stakeholders and teams? Have we considered what changes will impact them and how?
  • Are we meeting regularly and collaborating effectively with our peers, or are we siloed?

Review cloud objectives and obstacles

Whiteboard Activity

1 hour

  1. With your working group, review why you’re using cloud in the first place. What advantages do you expect to realize by adopting cloud services? If we achieve what we’ve set out to do, what should that look and feel like to us, our organization, and our organization’s customers?
    • You should have identified cloud drivers and objectives in your cloud vision and strategy – leverage and validate what you already have!
  2. Next, identify obstacles that are preventing you from fully realizing the value of cloud services.
  3. Finally, brainstorm initial ideas for change. What could we start doing that could help us better use cloud in the future? Are there changes to how we need to organize ourselves to collaborate more effectively?
InputOutput
  • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment
  • Identified key business outcomes you expect to realize by adopting cloud services
  • Identified challenges and obstacles that are preventing you from realizing key outcomes
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip chart
  • Cloud operations design working group.

Commonly cited advantages and obstacles

Cloud Advantages/Objectives

  • Deliver faster on commitments to the business by removing infrastructure provisioning as a bottleneck.
  • Simplify capacity management on flexible cloud-based infrastructure.
  • Reduce capital spending on IT infrastructure.
  • Create sandboxes/innovation practices to experiment with and develop new functionality on cloud platforms.
  • Easily enable ubiquitous access to key corporate services.
  • Minimize the expense and effort required to maintain a data center – power & cooling, cabling, or physical hardware.
  • Leverage existing automation tools from cloud vendors to speed up integration and deployment.
  • Direct costs for specific services can improve transparency and cost allocation, allowing IT to directly “show-back” or charge-back cloud costs to specific cost centers.

Obstacles

Need to speed up provisioning of PaaS/IaaS/data resources to development and project teams.

No time to develop and improve platform services and standards due to other responsibilities.

We constantly run up unexpected cloud costs.

Not enough time for continuous learning and development.

The business will buy SaaS apps and only let us know after they’ve been purchased, leading to overlapping functionality; gaps in compliance, security, or data protection requirements; integration challenges; cost inefficiencies; and more.

Role descriptions haven’t kept up with tech changes.

Obvious opportunities to rationalize costs aren’t surfaced (e.g. failing to make use of existing volume licensing agreements).

Skills needed to properly operate cloud solutions aren’t identified until breakdowns happen.

Establish organization design principles

You’ve established a need for organizational change. What will that change look like?

Design principles are concise, direct statements that describe how you will design your organization to achieve key objectives and address key challenges.

This is a critically important step for several reasons:

  • A set of clear, concise statements that describe what the design should achieve provides parameters that will help you create and evaluate different design options.
  • A focused, facilitated discussion to create those statements will help uncover conflicting assumptions between key stakeholders.
  • A comprehensive description of the various ways the organization should change makes it easier to identify misaligned or incompatible objectives.
  • A description of what your organization should look like in the future will help you identify where changes will be required .

Examples of design principles:

  1. We will create a path to review and publish effective application/platform patterns.
  2. A single governing body should have oversight into all cloud costs.
  3. Development must happen only on approved cloud platforms.
  4. Application teams must address operational issues that derive from the applications they’ve created.
  5. Security practices should be embedded into approved cloud platforms and be automatically applied wherever possible.
  6. Focus is on improving developer experience on cloud platforms.

Info-Tech Insight

Design principles will often change as the organization’s strategy evolves.

Align design principles to your objectives

Developing design principles starts with your key objectives. What do we absolutely have to get right to deliver value through cloud services?

Once you have your direction set, work through the points in the star model to establish how you will meet your objectives and deliver value. Each point in the star is an important element in your design – taken together, it paints a holistic picture of your future-state organization.

The changes you choose to implement that affect capabilities, structure, processes, rewards, and people should be self-reinforcing. Each point in the star is connected to, and should support, the other points.

“There is no one-size-fits-all organization design that all companies – regardless of their particular strategy needs – should subscribe to.”

– Jay Galbraith, “The Star Model”

The image contains a screenshot of a modified versio of Jay Galbraith's Star Model of Organizational Design.

Establish design principles

Track your findings in the table on the next slide.

  1. Review the cloud objectives and challenges from the previous activity. As a group, decide from that list: what are the key objectives you are trying to achieve? What are the things you absolutely must get right to get value from cloud services?
  2. Work through the following questions as a group:
    • What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?
    • How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?
    • Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?
    • How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?
    • What new skills or knowledge is required? How will we acquire those skills or knowledge?
InputOutput
  • Cloud objectives and challenges
  • Different viewpoints into how your organization must change to realize objectives and overcome challenges
  • Organizational design principles for cloud operations
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip charts
  • Cloud operations design working group

Design principles (example)

What is our key objective?

  • Rapidly develop innovative cloud services aligned to business value.

What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?

  • We will adopt more agile development techniques to make smaller changes, faster.
  • We will standardize and automate tasks that are routine and repeatable.

How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?

  • Embed development teams within business units to better align to business unit needs.
  • Create a focused cloud platform team to develop infrastructure services.

Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?

  • Development teams will take on responsibility for application support.
  • Platform teams will be deeply embedded with development teams on new projects to build new infrastructure functionality.

How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?

  • We will highlight innovative work across the company.
  • We will encourage experimentation and risk-taking.

What new skills or knowledge is required, and how will we acquire it?

  • We will focus on acquiring skills most closely aligned to our technology roadmap.
  • We will ensure budget is available for training employees who ask for it.
  • We will contract to find skills we cannot develop in-house and use engagements as an opportunity to learn internally.

Step 1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

Participants

Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Outcomes

Shared understanding of the horizon of work possibilities:

  • Ways to work
  • Ways to govern and learn

Consider the different approaches on the following slides, how they change operational work, and decide which approaches are the right fit for you.

Evaluate new ways of working

Cut through the hype

  • There are new approaches/ways of working that deal head on with the persistent breakdowns and headaches that come with operations management – work thrown over the wall from development, manual and repetitive work, siloed teams, and more.
  • Many of these approaches emphasize an operations-aware approach to solutions development and apply techniques traditionally associated with AppDev to Operations.
  • Cloud services present opportunities to outsource/automate away routine tasks.

“DevOps is a set of practices, tools, and a cultural philosophy that automates and integrates the processes between software development and IT teams. It emphasizes team empowerment, cross-team communication and collaboration, and technology automation.”

– Atlassian, “DevOps”

“ITIL 4 brings ITIL up to date by…embracing new ways of working, such as Lean, Agile, and DevOps.”

– ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition

“Over time, left to their own devices, the SRE team should end up with very little operational load and almost entirely engage in development tasks, because the service basically runs and repairs itself.”

– Ben Treynor Sloss, “Site Reliability Engineering”

The more things change, the more they stay the same:

  • Core processes remain, but they may be done differently, and new technologies and services create new challenges.
  • Not all approaches are right for all organizations, and what’s right for you depends on how you use cloud services.
  • The best solution draws from these management ideas to build an approach to operations that is right for you.

Leverage patterns to think about new ways of approaching operations work

Patterns are strategies, approaches, and philosophies that can help you imagine new ways of working in your own organization.

  • The following slides provide an overview of organizing patterns that are applicable to cloud operations.
  • These are strategies that have been applied successfully elsewhere. Review what they can and cannot do and decide whether they are something you can use in your own organizational design.
  • Not every pattern will apply to every organization. For example, an organization which typically consumes SaaS applications will likely have very little need for SRE approaches and techniques.

Ways to work

  • What work do we do? What skills do we need?
  • How do we create and support systems?

Ways to govern and learn

  • How do we set and enforce rules?
  • How do we create and share knowledge?

Explore Applicable Patterns

Ways to work

Ways to govern and learn

1. DevOps

2. Site Reliability Engineering

3. Platform Engineering

4. Cloud Centre of Excellence

5. Cloud Community of Practice

What is DevOps?

“Look for obstacles constantly and treat them as opportunities to experiment and learn.” – Jez Humble, et al. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale

What it is NOT

What it IS

Why Use It

  • Another word for automation or CI/CD tools.
  • A specific role.
  • A fix-all to address friction between existing siloed application and development teams.
  • An approach that will be successful without getting the basics right first.
  • The right fit for every IT organization or every team.

An operational philosophy that seeks to:

  • Converge accountability for development and operations to align all teams to the goal of delivering customer value.
  • Improve the relationship between Development and Operations teams.
  • Increase the rate of deployment of valuable functionality into production.
  • “A cultural shift giving development teams more control over shipping code to production.” 1
  • You’re doing a lot of custom development.
  • There are opportunities for operations and development teams to work more closely.
  • You want to improve coding quality and throughput.
  • You want to shift the culture of the team to focus on customer value rather than exclusively uptime or new features.
1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

What is Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)?

“Hope is not a strategy” – Benjamin Treynor Sloss, Site Reliability Engineering: How Google Runs Production Systems

What it is NOT

What it IS

Why Use It

  • Deeply focussed on a specific technical domain; SRE work “does not discriminate between infrastructure, software, networking, or platforms.” 2
  • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
  • A programming framework or a specific set of technologies.
  • A way to manage COTS software. SRE is less useful when you’re using applications out-of-the-box with minimal customization, integration, or development.
  • An application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system reliability.
  • A team responsible for “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning.”3
  • A team responsible for building systems that become “a platform and workflow that encompasses monitoring, incident management, eliminating single points of failure, [and] failure mitigation.”1
  • You are building services and providing them at scale.
  • You want to improve reliability and reduce “the frequency and impact of failures that can impact the overall reliability of a cloud application.”1
  • You need to define related service metrics and SLOs.
  • To increase the use of automation in operations to avoid mistakes and minimize toil. 3
1 SRE vs Platform Engineering
2. Lakhani, Usman. “ISite Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?,” 2020.
3. Sloss, “Introduction,” 2017

What4 is Platform Engineering?

“Platform engineers can act as a shield between developers and the infrastructure”

– Carlos Schults, “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term”

What it is NOT

What it IS

Why Use It

  • A team that manages every aspect of each application on a particular platform.
  • Focussed solely on platform reliability and availability.
  • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
  • Needed for all cloud service deployments. Platform engineers are most useful when you’re building extensively on a particular platform (e.g. AWS, Azure, or your internal cloud).
  • Platform engineers design, build, and manage the infrastructure that supports and hosts work done by developers.
  • The work done by platform engineering allows developers to avoid the repetitive work of setting everything up anew each time.
  • Requires engineers with a deep understanding of cloud services and other platform technologies (e.g. Kubernetes).
  • The big public cloud platforms are built for everyone. You need platform engineering when you need to extensively adapt or manage standard cloud services to support your own requirements.
  • Platform engineers are responsible for creating a secure, stable, maintainable environment that enables developers to do their work faster and without having to manage the underlying technology infrastructure.
1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

What is a Cloud Center of Excellence?

You need a strong core to grow a cloud culture.

What it is NOT

What it IS

Why Use It

  • A project management office (PMO) for cloud services.
  • An easy, quick, or temporary fix to cloud governance problems. The CCoE requires champions who provide ongoing support to realize value over time.
  • An approach that’s only for enterprise-sized IT organizations.
  • A standing meeting – members of the CCoE may meet regularly to review progress on their mandate, but work and collaboration need to happen outside of meetings.
  • A cross-functional team responsible for oversight of all cloud initiatives, including architectural, technical, security, financial, contractual, and operational aspects of planned and deployed solutions.
  • The CCoE’s responsibilities typically include governance and continuous improvement; alignment between technical and accounting practices; documentation, training, best practices and standards development; and vendor management.
  • CCoE duties are often part of an existing role rather than a full-time responsibility.
  • You want to enable a core group of cloud experts to promote collaboration and accelerate adoption of cloud services, including members from infrastructure, applications, and security.
  • You need to manage cloud risks, set guidelines and policies, and govern costs across cloud environments.
  • There is an unmet need for training, knowledge sharing, and best practice development across the organization.

What is a Cloud Community of Practice?

“We have to stop optimizing for programmers and start optimizing for users”

– Jeff Atwood

What it is NOT

What it IS

Why Use It

  • A replacement for effective oversight and governance practices, though they may help users navigate and understand governance requirements.
  • A way to advertise cloud to potential new practitioners – engaged members of a CoP are typically already using a particular service.
  • Always exclusively composed of internal staff; in certain cases, a CoP could have external members as well.
  • A network of engaged users and experts who share knowledge and best practices for related technologies, crowdsource solutions to problems, and suggest improvements.
  • Often supported by communication and collaboration tools (e.g. chat channels, knowledge base, forums). May use a range of techniques (e.g. drop-ins, vendor-led training, lunch and learns).
  • Communities of practice may be deliberately created by the organization or develop organically.
  • Communities of practice are an effective way for practitioners to support one another and share ideas and solutions.
  • A CoP can help “shift left” work and help practitioners help themselves.
  • An engaged CoP can help IT to identify improvement opportunities and can also be a channel to communicate updates or changes to practitioners.

Reinforce what we mean by patterns

Patterns are . . .

Ways of Working

  • Sets of habits, processes, and methodologies you want to adopt as part of your operational guidelines and commonly agreed upon definitions.

Patterns are also . . .

Ways to Govern and Learn

  • The formal and informal practices and groups that focus on enabling governance, risk management, and adoption.

Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

Ways of Working

DevOps

Development teams take on operational work to support the services they create after they are launched to production.

Some DevOps teams may be aligned around a particular function or product rather than a technology – there are individuals with skills on a number of technologies that are part of the same team.

Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)

In the beginning, you can start to adopt SRE practices within existing teams. As demand grows for SRE skills and services, you may decide to create focused SRE roles or teams.

SRE teams may work across applications or be aligned to just infrastructure services or a particular application, or they may focus on tools that help developers manage reliability. SREs may also be embedded long-term with other teams or take on an internal consulting roles with multiple teams.1

Platform Engineering

Platform engineering will often, though not always, be the responsibility of a dedicated team. This team must work very closely with, and tuned into the needs of, its internal customers. There is a constant need to find ways to add value that aren’t already part and parcel of the platform – or its external roadmap.

This team will take on responsibility for the platform, in terms of feature development, automation, availability and reliability, security, and more. They may also be internal consultants or advisors on the platform to developers.

1. Gustavo Franco and Matt Brown, “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.”

Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

Ways to Govern and Learn

Cloud Center of Excellence

  • A CCoE is a cross-functional group with technical experts from security, infrastructure, applications, and more.
  • There should, ideally, be someone focused on leading the CCoE full-time – often someone with an architecture background. Team members may work on the CCoE part-time alongside their main role, and dedicate more of their time to the CCoE as needed.
  • As the CCoE is a governance function, it will typically bridge and sit above teams working on cloud services, reporting to the CIO, CTO, or to an architecture function.

Cloud Community of Practice

  • Participation in a community of practice is often above and beyond a core role – it’s a leadership activity taken on by technologically adept experts with a drive to help others.
  • Some organizations will create a role to foster community collaboration, run events, raise opportunities and issues identified by the community with product or technology teams, manage collaboration tools, and more.

Evolve your organization to meet the needs of increased adoption

Your operating model should evolve as you increase adoption of cloud services.

Least Adoption Greatest Adoption

Initial Adoption

Early Centralization

Scaling Up

Full Steam Ahead

  • One or more small agile teams design, build, manage, and operate individual solutions on cloud resources. Solutions provide early value, and identify new opportunities using small, safe-to-fail experiments.
  • Governance is likely done locally to each team. Knowledge sharing, guidelines, and standards are likely informal.
  • Early experience with cloud services help the organization identify where to invest in cloud services to best meet business demands.
  • Accountability and governance over the platform are more clearly defined, possibly still separate from core IT governance processes. Best practices may be shared across teams through a Community of Practice.
  • Operations may be centralized, where valuable, to support monitoring and incident response.
  • Additional product/service-aligned development teams are created to keep up with demand.
  • There is a focused effort to consolidate best practices and platform knowledge, which can be supported through a culture of learning, effective automation, and appropriate tools.
  • The CCoE takes on additional roles in cloud governance, security, operations, and administration.
  • The organization has reached a relatively steady-state for cloud adoption. Innovation and new service development takes place on a stable platform.
  • A Cloud Center of Excellence is accountable for cloud governance across the organization.
Adapted from Microsoft, “Get Started: Align your organization,” 2021

Choose new ways of working that make sense for your team

1 hour

Consider if, and how, the approaches to management and governance you’ve just reviewed can offer value to your organization.

  1. List the organizing/managing ideas listed in the previous slides in the table below.
  2. Define why it’s for you. What benefits do you expect to realize? What challenges do you expect this will help you overcome? How does this align with your key benefits and drivers for moving to cloud?
  3. List risks or challenges to adoption. Why will it be hard to do? What could get in the way of adoption? Why might it not be a good fit?
  4. Identify next steps to adopt proposed practices.

Why it’s for us (drivers)

Risks or challenges to adoption

Next steps to build/adopt it

CCoE

DevOps

InputOutput
  • Related Info-Tech slides on new ways of working.
  • Opportunities and challenges in your own cloud deployment that may be addressed through new ways of working.
  • Identify new ways of working aligned to your goals.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip chart
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Step 1.3: Identify cloud work

Participants

  • Operations Design Working Group

Outcomes

  • Identify core work required to deliver value in key cloud workstreams.

“At first, for many people, the cloud seems vast. But what you actually do is carve out space.”

–DevOps Manager

Identify work

Before you can identify roles and responsibilities, you have to confirm what work you do as an organization and how that work enables you to meet your goals.

  • A comprehensive approach that connects the work you do to your organizational goals will help you identify work that’s falling through the cracks.
  • Identifying work is an opportunity to look at the tasks you regularly execute and ensure they actually drive value.
  • Working through the exercise as a group will help you develop a common language around the work you do.
  • To make the evident obvious: you can’t decide who should be responsible for something if you don’t know about it in the first place.

Defining work can be a lot of … work! We recommend you start by identifying work for the workstream you do most – Build, Consume, or Host – to focus your efforts. You can repeat the exercise as needed.

Map work in workstream diagrams

The image contains a screenshot of the map work in workstream diagrams.

The five Well-Architected Framework pillars. These are principles/directions/guideposts that should inform all cloud work.

The work being done to achieve the workstream target. These are roughly aligned with the three streams on the right.

Workstream Target: A concise statement of the value you aim to achieve through this workstream. All work should help deliver value (directly or indirectly).

Define the scope of the exercise

Whiteboard Activity

20 minutes

Over the next few exercises, you’ll do a deep dive into the work you do in one specific workstream. In this exercise, we’ll decide on a workstream to focus on first.

  1. Are you primarily building, hosting on, or consuming cloud services? Start with the workstream where you’re doing the most work.
  2. If this isn’t sufficient to narrow your focus, look at the workstream that is most closely tied to mission critical applications, or that is most in need of review in terms of what work is done and who does it.
  3. You can narrow the scope further if there’s a very specific sub-area that differs from the rest (e.g. managing your O365 environment vs. managing all SaaS applications).
InputOutput
  • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
  • Your completed cloud maturity assessment.
  • Identify one workstream where you’ll define work first.
MaterialsParticipants
  • None
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Create a workstream target statement

Whiteboard Activity

30 minutes

In this activity, come up with a short sentence to describe what all this work you do is building toward. The target statement helps align participants on why work is being done and helps focus the activity on work that is most important to achieving the target statement.

Start with this common workstream target statement:

“Deliver valuable, secure, available, reliable, and efficient cloud services.”

Now, review and adjust the target statement by working through the questions below:

  1. Return to the earlier exercises in Phase 1.1 where you reviewed your key objectives for cloud services. Does the target statement align with what you’d identified previously?
  2. Who is the customer for the work you do? Would they see the target differently than you’ve described it?
  3. Can you be more specific? Are there value drivers that are more specific to your industry, organization, business functions, or products that are key to the value your customers receive from this workstream?
InputOutput
  • Previous exercises.
  • Workstream target statement.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip chart
  • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Identify cloud work

1-2 hours

  1. Use the workstream diagram template in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, or draw the template out on a whiteboard and use sticky notes to identify work.
  2. Identify the workstream at the top of the slide. Update the template value statement on the right with the value statement you created in the previous exercise.
  3. Review one or more of the examples in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook to get a sense of the level of detail required for this exercise.

Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

Some notes to the facilitator:

  • Working directly from the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook will save you time with transcription. Sharing the document with participants (e.g. via OneDrive) will allow you to collaborate and edit the document together in real-time.
  • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment, just get the information written down and you can clean up the diagram later.
InputOutput
  • Previously identified design principles.
  • An understanding of the work done, and that needs to be done, in your cloud environment.
  • Identify the work that needs to be done to support your key cloud services workstream in the future.
MaterialsParticipants
  • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
  • Whiteboard and sticky notes (optional)
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Identify cloud work (cont’d)

4. Work together to identify work, documenting one work item per box. This should focus on future state, so record work whether it’s actually done today or not. Your space is limited on the sheet, so focus on work that is indispensable to delivering the value statement. Use the lists on the right as a reminder of key IT practice areas.

5. As much as possible, align the work items to the appropriate row (Govern & Align, Design & Execute, or Validate, Support & Monitor). You can overlap boxes between rows if needed.

Have you captured work related to:

ITIL practices, such as:

  • Request management
  • Incident & problem management
  • Service catalog
  • Service level management
  • Configuration management

Security-aligned practices, such as:

  • Identity & access management
  • Vulnerability management
  • Security incident management

Financial practices, such as:

  • IT asset management
  • Cost management & budgeting
  • Vendor management
  • Portfolio management

Data-aligned practices, such as:

  • Data integrations
  • Data governance

Technology-specific tasks, such as:

  • Network, Server & Storage
  • Structured/unstructured DBs
  • Composite services
  • IDEs and compilers

Other key practices:

  • Monitoring & observability
  • Continuous improvement
  • Testing & quality assurance
  • Training and knowledge management
  • Manage shadow IT

Info-Tech Insight

Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

Identify cloud work (cont’d)

6. If you have decided to adopt any of the new ways of working outlined in Step 1.2 (e.g. DevOps, SRE, etc.) review the next slide for examples of the type of work that frequently needs to be done in each of those work models. Add any additional work items as needed.

7. Consolidate boxes and clean up the diagram (e.g. remove duplicate work items, align boxes, clarify language).

8. Do a final review. Is all the work in the diagram truly aligned with the value statement? Is the work identified aligned with the design principles from Step 1.1?

If you used a whiteboard for this exercise, transcribe the output to a copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, and repeat the exercise for other key workstreams. You will use this diagram in Phase 2.

Examples of work

Examples of work in the "Host" workstream:

  • Bulk patch servers
  • Add a server
  • Add capacity
  • Develop a new server template
  • Incident management

Examples of work in the "Build" workstream:

  • Provision a production server
  • Provision a test environment
  • Test recovery procedures
  • Add capacity for a service
  • Publish a new pattern
  • Manage capacity/performance for a service
  • Identify wasted spend across services
  • Identify performance bottlenecks
  • Review and shut down idle/unneeded services

Examples of work in the "Consume" workstream:

  • Conduct vendor risk assessments
  • Develop a standard evaluation matrix to compare solutions to existing or potential in-house offerings
  • Onboard a solution
  • Offboard a solution
  • Conduct a renewal
  • Review and negotiate a contract
  • Rationalize software titles

Phase 2:

Design the organization and communicate changes

Phase 1

Phase 2

1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

1.3 Identify cloud work

2.1 Draft an operating model

2.2 Communicate proposed changes

Phase Outcomes:

Draft your cloud operations diagram, identify key messages and impacts to communicate to your stakeholders, and build out the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework communication deck.

Step 2.1: Identify groups and responsibilities

Participants

  • Operations Design Working Group

Outcomes

  • Cloud Operations Diagram
  • Success Indicators
  • Roadmap

“No-one ever solved a problem by restructuring.”

– Anonymous

Visualize your cloud operations

Create a visual to help you abstract, analyze, and clarify your vision for the future state of your organization in order to align and instruct stakeholders.

Create a visual, high-level view of your organization to help you answer questions such as:

  • “What work do we do? What are the roles and responsibilities of different teams?”
  • “How do we interact between work areas?”
  • “How has our organization changed already, and what additional changes may be needed?”
  • “How do we make technology decisions?”
  • “How do we provide services?”
  • “How might this change be received by people on the ground?”
The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Diagram Example.

Decide whether to centralize or decentralize

Specialization & Focus: A group or work unit developing a focused concentration of skills, expertise, and activities aligned with an area of focus (such as the ones at right).

Decentralization: Operational teams that report to a decentralized IT or business function, either directly or via a “dotted line” relationship.

Decentralization and Specialization can:

  • Duplicate work.
  • Localize decision-making authority, which can increase agility and responsiveness.
  • Transfer authority and accountability to local and typically smaller teams, clarifying responsibilities and encouraging staff to take ownership for service delivery.
  • Enable the team to focus on complex and rapidly changing technologies or processes.
  • Create islands of expertise, which can get in the way of collaboration, innovation, and decision making across groups and work units and make oversight difficult.
  • Complicate the transfer of resources and knowledge between groups.

Examples: Areas of Focus

Business unit

  • Manufacturing
  • R&D
  • Sales & Marketing

Region

  • Americas
  • EMEA
  • APAC

Service

  • ERP
  • Commercial website

Technology

  • On-premises servers/storage
  • Network
  • Cloud services

Operational process focus

  • Capacity management & planning
  • Incident management
  • Problem management

“The concept of organization design is simple in theory but highly complex in practice. Like any strategic decision, it involves making multiple trade-offs before choosing what is best suited to a business context.”

– Nitin Razdan & Arvind Pandit

Identify key work areas

Balance specialization with effective collaboration

  • Much is said about breaking down organizational silos. But at some level, silos are inevitable – any company with more than one employee will have to divide work up somehow.
  • Dividing up work is a delicate balancing act – ensuring individuals and groups are able to do work that is related, meaningful, and that allows autonomy while allowing for effective collaboration between groups that need to work together to achieve business goals.

Why “work areas”?

Why don’t we just use teams, groups, squads, or departments, or some other more common term for groups of people working together?

  • We are not yet at the point of deciding who in the organization should be aligned to which areas in the design.
  • Describing work areas as teams can shift the conversation to the organizational chart – to who does the work, rather than what needs to be done.

That’s not the goal of this exercise. If the conversation gets stuck on what you do today, it can get in the way of thinking about what you need to do in the future.

Create a future-state cloud operations diagram

1-3 hours

  1. Review the example cloud operations diagram example in your copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.
  2. Identify key work areas (e.g. applications, infrastructure, platform engineering, DevOps, security). Add the name of each work area in one of the larger boxes.
    • Go back to your design principles. Did you define any work areas in your design principles that should be represented here?
    • If you have several groups or teams with similar responsibilities, consider lumping them together in one box (e.g. applications teams, 3x DevOps teams).
  3. Copy the tasks from any workstream diagrams you’ve created to the same slide as the organization design diagram. Keep the workstream diagram intact, as you’ll want to be able to refer back to it later.

Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

InputOutput
  • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
  • Cloud Operations Diagram
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip charts
  • Cloud Operations
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Cloud operations diagram (cont’d)

1-3 hours

4. As a group, move the work boxes from the workstream diagram into the appropriate work area.

  • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment – clean up the diagram when the exercise is done.
  • Make adjustments to the wording of the work boxes if needed.

5. Use the space between work areas to describe how work areas must interact to achieve organizational goals. For example:

  • What information should be shared between groups?
  • What information sharing channels may be used?
  • What processes will be handed-off between groups and how?
  • How often will teams interact?
  • Will interactions be formal or informal?

Create a current-state operations diagram

1 -2 hours

This exercise can be done by one person, then reviewed with the working group at a later time.

This current state diagram helps clarify the changes that may need to happen to get to your future state.

  1. Color code the work boxes for each work area. For example, if you have a “DevOps” work area, make all the work boxes assigned to “DevOps” the same color.
  2. On a separate slide, sketch your existing organization indicating your current teams.
  3. Copy the tasks from the future-state diagram to this current-state chart. Align the tasks to the appropriate groups.
  4. Review the chart with the working group. Discuss: are there teams that are doing work today that will also be done by different teams? Are there groups that may merge into one team? What types of changes may be required?
InputOutput
  • Future-state cloud operations diagram
  • Current-state cloud operations diagram
MaterialsParticipants
  • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
  • Projector/screen/virtual meeting
  • Project lead
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Check for biases to make better choices

Use the strategies below to spot and address flaws in your team’s thinking about your future-state design.

Biases

What’s the risk?

Mitigation strategies

Is the team making mistakes due to self-interest, love of a single idea, or groupthink?

Important information may be ignored or left unspoken.

Rigorously check for the other biases, below. Tactfully seek dissenting opinions.

Do recommendations use unreasonable analogies to other successes or failures?

Opportunities or challenges in the current situation may not be sufficiently understood.

Ask for other examples, and check whether the analogies are still valid.

Is the team blinkered by the weight of past decisions?

Doubling-down on bad decisions (sunk costs) or ignoring new opportunities.

Ask yourself what you'd do if you were new to the position or organization.

Does the data support the recommendations?

Data used to make the case isn't a good fit for the challenge, is based on faulty assumptions, or is incomplete.

If you had a year to make the decision, what data would you want? How much can you get?

Are there realistic alternative recommendations?

Alternatives don't exist or are "strawman" options.

Ask for additional options.

Is the recommendation too risk averse or cautious?

Recommendations that may be too risky are ignored, leading to missed opportunities.

Review options to accept, transfer, distribute, or mitigate the risk of the decision.

Framework above adapted from Kahneman, Lovallo, and Sibony (2011)

Be specific with metrics

Thinking of ways you could measure success can help uncover what success actually means to you.

Work collectively to generate success indicators for each key cloud initiative. Success indicators are metrics, with targets, aligned to goals, and if you are able to measure them accurately, they should help you report your progress toward your objectives.

For example, if your driver is “faster access to resources” you might consider indicators like developer satisfaction, project completion time, average time to provision, etc.

There are several reasons you may not publicize these metrics. They may be difficult to calculate or misconstrued as targets, warping behavior in unexpected ways. But managed properly, they have value in measuring operational success!

Examples: Operations redesign project metrics

Key stakeholder satisfaction scores

IT staff engagement scores

Support Delivery of New Functionality

Double number of accepted releases per cycle

80% of key cloud initiatives completed on time, on budget, and in scope

Improve Operational Effectiveness

<1% of servers have more than two major versions out of date

No more than one capacity-related incident per Q

Define success indicators

Whiteboard Activity

45 minutes

  1. On a whiteboard, draw a table with key objectives for the design across the top.
    • What cloud objectives should the redesign help you achieve? Refer back to the design principles from Phase 1.
    • Think about the redesign itself. How will you measure whether the project itself is proceeding according to plan? Consider metrics such as employee engagement scores and satisfaction scores from key stakeholders.
  2. Consider whether the metrics are feasible to track. Record your decisions in your copy of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework deck.
InputOutput
  • Key design goals
  • Success indicators for your design
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard
  • Markers
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Populate a roadmap

Tool Activity

45 minutes

  1. In the Roadmap Tool, populate the data entry tab with the initiatives you will take to support changes toward the new cloud operations organizing framework.
  2. Input each of the tasks in the data entry tab and provide a description and rationale behind the task (as needed).
  3. Assign an effort, priority, and cost level to each task (high, medium, low).
  4. Assign an owner to each task – someone who can take points and shepherd the task to completion.
  5. Identify the timeline for each task based on the priority, effort, and cost (short, medium, and long term).
  6. Highlight risk for each task if it will be deferred.
  7. Track the progress of each task with the status column.
InputOutput
  • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
  • Roadmap/ implementation plan
MaterialsParticipants
  • Roadmap Tool
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Download the Roadmap Tool

Step 2.2: Communicate changes

Participants

  • Operations Design Working Group

Outcomes

  • Build a communication plan for key stakeholders
  • Complete the communication deck Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
  • Build a roadmap

“Words, words, words.”

– Shakespeare

Communicate changes

Which stakeholders will be affected by the changes?

Decision makers: Who do you ultimately need to convince to proceed with any changes you’ve outlined?

Peers: How will managers of other areas be affected by the changes you’re proposing? If you are you suggesting changes to the way that they, or their teams, do their work, you will have to present a compelling case that there’s value in it for them.

Staff: Are you dictating changes or looking for feedback on the path forward?

The image contains a screenshot of the Five Elements of Change that is displayed in a cycle. The five elements are: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us? What is the role of each team and individual.

Source: The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change

Follow these guidelines for good communication

Be relevant

  • Talk about what matters to each stakeholder group.
  • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
  • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
  • IT wants to be “understood” but this does not matter to stakeholders; think “what’s in it for them?”
  • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
  • If you expect objections, create a plan to handle them.

Be clear

  • Lead with the point you’re trying to make.
  • Don’t use jargon.
  • Avoid idiomatic language and clichés.
  • Have a third party review draft communications and ask them to tell you the key messages in their own words. If they’re missing the main points, there’s a good chance the draft isn’t clear.

Be consistent

  • Ensure the core message is consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
  • Changing the core message from one group to another can be interpreted as incompetence or an attempt at deception. This will damage your credibility and can lead to a loss of trust.

Be concise

  • Get to the point.
  • Minimize word count wherever possible.

“We tend to use a lot of jargon in our discussions, and that is a sure fire way to turn people away. We realized the message wasn’t getting out because the audience wasn’t speaking the same language. You have to take it down to the next level and help them understand where the needs are.”

– Jeremy Clement, Director of Finance, College of Charleston

Create a communication plan

1 hour

Fill out the table below.

Stakeholder group: Identify key stakeholders who may be impacted by changes to the operations team. This might include IT leadership, management, and staff.

Benefits: What’s in it for them?

Impact: What are we asking in return?

How: What mechanisms or channels will you use to communicate?

When: When (and how often) will you get the message out?

Benefits

Impact

How

When

IT Mgrs.

  • Improve agility, stability
  • Deliver faster against business goals
  • Respond to identified needs
  • Improve confidence in IT
  • Must support the process
  • Change and engagement issues during restructuring may affect staff engagement and productivity
  • Training budget required
  • Present at leadership meeting
  • Kick-off email
  • Sept. leadership meeting
  • Weekly touchpoints
  • Informally throughout project

Ops Staff

  • Clearer direction and clear priorities (Operations mission statement and RACI)
  • Higher-value work – address problems, contribute to plans
  • New skills and training
  • More personal accountability
  • Push toward process consistency
  • Must make time and plan for training during work hours
  • Present at operations team’s offsite meeting
  • AMA channel on Slack
  • 1:1 meetings
  • Add RACI, org. sketch to shared folder
  • Operations offsite
  • Sept. all-hands meeting
  • Ongoing coaching and informal conversations
InputOutput
  • Discussion
  • Communication Plan
MaterialsParticipants
  • Whiteboard/Flip Chart
  • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

Download the Communication Plan Template

Support the transition with a plan to acquire skills

Identify the preferred way to acquire needed skill sets: contracting, outsourcing, training, or hiring.

  • Some cloud projects will change the demand for some skills in the organization, and not all skills should be cultivated internally. Uncertainty about future skills and jobs will cause anxiety for your team and can lead to employee exit.
  • Use Info-Tech’s research to conduct a demand analysis to identify which new and critical skills should be acquired via training or hiring (rather than outsourcing or contracting).
  • Create a roadmap to clarify when training needs to be completed, a budget plan that accounts for training costs, and role descriptions that paint a picture of future work.
  • Within the confines of a collective agreement, managers may be required to retrain staff into new roles before those staff are required to do work in their new jobs. Failing to plan can be more consequential.
  • Remember that in cloud, a wealth of automation opportunities present a great option for offloading tasks as well!

Info-Tech Insight

Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time. Use Info-Tech’s methodology to address skills gaps in a prioritized and rational way.

Involve HR for implementation

Your HR team should help you work through:

  • Which staff and managers will move to which roles, and any headcount changes.
  • Job descriptions, performance metrics, career paths, compensation, and succession planning.
  • Organizational change management and implementation plans.

When do you need to involve HR?

Role changes will result in job description changes.

  • New or changed job descriptions need to be evaluated for impact on pay, title, exempt status, career pathing, and more.
  • This is especially true in more traditional or unionized organizations that require specific and granular job descriptions of responsibilities.
  • Changed jobs will likely require union review and approval.

You anticipate changes to the reporting structure.

  • Work with HR to develop a transition plan including communications, training to new managers, and support to new teams.

You anticipate redundancies.

  • Your HR department can prepare you for difficult discussions, help you navigate labor laws, and support the offboarding process.

You anticipate new positions.

  • Recruitment and hiring takes time. Give HR advance notice to support recruitment, hiring, and onboarding to ensure you hire the right people, with the right skills, at the right time.

Training and development budget is required.

  • If training is a critical part of the onboarding process, don’t just assume funding is available. Work with HR to build your case.

Related Info-Tech Research

Define Your Cloud Vision

Define your cloud vision before it defines you.

Document Your Cloud Strategy

Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

Be practical and proactive – identify needed technical skills for your future-state environment and the most efficient way to acquire them.

Bibliography

“2021 GitLab DevSecOps Survey.” Gitlab, 2021.
“2022 State of the Cloud Report.” Flexera, 2022.
“DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
Atwood, Jeff. “The 2030 Self-Driving Car Bet.” Coding Horror, 4 Mar 2022. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
Campbell, Andrew. “What is an operating model?” Operational Excellence Society, 12 May 2016. Web. 13 July 2022.
“DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, Ashvin Sologar. “Changing change management” McKinsey, 1 July 2015. Web. 8 April 2022.
Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized, and how to get started.” Google Cloud Blog, 26 June 2019. Web. July 13 2022.
“Get started: Build a cloud operations team.” Microsoft, 10 May 2021.
ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition. Axelos, 2019.
Humble, Jez, Joanne Molesky, and Barry O’Reilly. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale. O’Reilly Media, 2015.
Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.” 26 June 2019. Web. 21 July 2022.
Galbraith, Jay. “The Star Model”. ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
Kahnemanm Daniel, Dan Lovallo, and Olivier Sibony. “Before you make that big decision.” Harv Bus Rev. 2011 Jun; 89(6): 50-60, 137. PMID: 21714386.
Kesler, Greg. “Star Model of Organizational Design.” YouTube, 1 Oct 2018. Web Video. 21 Jul 2022.
Lakhani, Usman. “Site Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?” Info-Tech. Web. 25 May 2020.
Mansour, Sherif. “Product Management: The role and best practices for beginners.” Atlassian Agile Coach, n.d.
Murphy, Annie, Jamie Kirwin, Khalid Abdul Razak. “Operating Models: Delivering on strategy and optimizing processes.” EY, 2016.
Shults, Carlos. “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term.” liatrio, 3 Aug 2021. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. Site Reliability Engineering Part I: Introduction. O’Reilly Media, 2017.
“SRE vs. Platform Engineering.” Ambassador Labs, 8 Feb 2021.
“The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.
“Understand cloud operating models.” Microsoft, 02 Sept. 2022.
Velichko, Ivan. “DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering.” 15 Mar 2022.

Research Contributors and Experts

Nenad Begovic

Executive Director, Head of IT Operations

MUFG Investor Services

Desmond Durham

Manager, ICT Planning & Infrastructure

Trinidad & Tobago Unit Trust Corporation

Virginia Roberts

Director, Enterprise IT

Denver Water

Denis Sharp

IT/LEAN Consultant

Three anonymous contributors

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}582|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
  • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
  • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
  • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
  • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Enterprise architecture is not a technical function – it should be business-value driven and forward looking, positioning organizational assets in favor of long-term strategy rather than short-term tactics.

Impact and Result

  • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
  • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
  • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
  • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our Executive Brief to find out how implementing a successful enterprise architecture governance framework can benefit your organization.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Current State of EA Governance

Identify the organization’s standing in terms of the enterprise architecture practice, and know the gaps and what the EA practice needs to fulfill to create a good governance framework.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 1: Current State of EA Governance
  • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

2. EA Fundamentals

Understand the EA fundamentals and then refresh them to better align the EA practice with the organization and create business benefit.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 2: EA Fundamentals
  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template
  • EA Principles Template

3. Engagement Model

Analyze the IT operating model and identify EA’s role at each stage; refine it to promote effective EA engagement upfront in the early stages of the IT operating model.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 3: Engagement Model
  • EA Engagement Model Template

4. EA Governing Bodies

Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies, and creating an architecture review process.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 4: EA Governing Bodies
  • Architecture Board Charter Template
  • Architecture Review Process Template

5. EA Policy

Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 5: EA Policy
  • EA Policy Template
  • EA Assessment Checklist Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

6. Architectural Standards

Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability. Develop a process to update the architectural standards to ensure relevancy and promote process transparency.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 6: Architectural Standards
  • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

7. Communication Plan

Craft a plan to engage the relevant stakeholders, ascertain the benefits of the initiative, and identify the various communication methods in order to maximize the chances of success.

  • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 7: Communication Plan
  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Current State of EA governance (Pre-workshop)

The Purpose

Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand current state of EA practice and prioritize gaps for EA governance based on organizational complexity.

Key Benefits Achieved

Prioritized list of actions to arrive at the target state based on the complexity of the organization

Activities

1.1 Determine organizational complexity.

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps.

1.4 Conduct senior management interviews.

Outputs

Organizational complexity score

EA governance current state and prioritized list of EA governance component gaps

Stakeholder perception of the EA practice

2 EA Fundamentals and Engagement Model

The Purpose

Refine EA fundamentals to align the EA practice with the organization and identify EA touchpoints to provide guidance for projects.

Key Benefits Achieved

Alignment of EA goals and objectives with the goals and objectives of the organization

Early involvement of EA in the IT operating model

Activities

2.1 Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools.

2.2 Craft the EA vision and mission.

2.3 Develop the EA principles.

2.4 Identify the EA goals.

2.5 Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

Outputs

EA vision and mission statement

EA principles

EA goals and measures

Identified EA engagement touchpoints and EA level of involvement

3 EA Governing Bodies

The Purpose

Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies and creating an architecture review process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models while no additional layers of bureaucracy are introduced

Activities

3.1 Identify the number of governing bodies.

3.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.

3.3 Define the architecture review process.

Outputs

Architecture board structure and coverage

Identified architecture review template

4 EA Policy

The Purpose

Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

Key Benefits Achieved

Improved architecture compliance, which ties investments to business value and provides guidance to architecture practitioners

Activities

4.1 Define the scope.

4.2 Identify the target audience.

4.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.

4.4 Craft an assessment checklist.

Outputs

Defined scope

Inclusion and exclusion criteria for project review

Architecture assessment checklist

5 Architectural Standards and Communication Plan

The Purpose

Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability.

Craft a communication plan to implement the new EA governance framework in order to maximize the chances of success.

Key Benefits Achieved

Consistent development of architecture, increased information exchange between stakeholders

Improved process transparency

Improved stakeholder engagement

Activities

5.1 Identify and standardize EA work products.

5.2 Classifying the architectural standards.

5.3 Identifying the custodian of standards.

5.4 Update the standards.

5.5 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

5.6 Create a communication plan.

Outputs

Identified set of EA work products to standardize

Architecture information taxonomy

Identified set of custodian of standards

Standard update process

List of EA governance initiatives

Communication plan for EA governance initiatives

Further reading

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Focus on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

"Enterprise architecture is not a technology concept, rather it is the foundation on which businesses orient themselves to create and capture value in the marketplace. Designing architecture is not a simple task and creating organizations for the future requires forward thinking and rigorous planning.

Architecture processes that are supposed to help facilitate discussions and drive option analysis are often seen as an unnecessary overhead. The negative perception is due to enterprise architecture groups being overly prescriptive rather than providing a set of options that guide and constrain solutions at the same time.

EA groups should do away with the direct and control mindset and change to a collaborate and mentor mindset. As part of the architecture governance, EA teams should provide an option set that constrains design choices, and also be open to changes to standards or best practices. "

Gopi Bheemavarapu, Sr. Manager, CIO Advisory Info-Tech Research Group

Our understanding of the problem

This Research Is Designed For:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

This Research Will Help You:

  • Understand the importance of enterprise architecture (EA) governance and how to apply it to guide architectural decisions.
  • Enhance your understanding of the organization’s current EA governance and identify areas for improvement.
  • Optimize your EA engagement model to maximize value creation.
  • Learn how to set up the optimal number of governance bodies in order to avoid bureaucratizing the organization.

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • Business Relationship Managers
  • Business Analysts
  • IT Managers
  • Project Managers
  • IT Analysts
  • Quality Assurance Leads
  • Software Developers

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Give an overview of enterprise architecture governance
  • Clarity on the role of enterprise architecture team

Executive summary

Situation

  • Deployed solutions do not meet business objectives resulting in expensive and extensive rework.
  • Each department acts independently without any regular EA touchpoints.
  • Organizations practice project-level architecture as opposed to enterprise architecture.

Complication

  • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
  • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
  • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

Resolution

  • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
  • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints, rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
  • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
  • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology imperatives.

Info-Tech Insight

Enterprise architecture is critical to ensuring that an organization has the solid IT foundation it needs to efficiently enable the achievement of its current and future strategic goals rather than focusing on short-term tactical gains.

What is enterprise architecture governance?

An architecture governance process is the set of activities an organization executes to ensure that decisions are made and accountability is enforced during the execution of its architecture strategy. (Hopkins, “The Essential EA Toolkit.”)

EA governance includes the following:

  • Implement a system of controls over the creation and monitoring of all architectural components.
  • Ensure effective introduction, implementation, and evolution of architectures within the organization.
  • Implement a system to ensure compliance with internal and external standards and regulatory obligations.
  • Develop practices that ensure accountability to a clearly identified stakeholder community, both inside and outside the organization.

(TOGAF)

IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

The image shows a circle set within a larger circle. The inner circle is connected to the bottom of the larger circle. The inner circle is labelled EA Governance and the larger circle is labelled IT Governance.

EA governance ensures that optimal architectural design choices are being made that focus on long-term value creation.

Harness the benefits of an optimized EA governance

Core benefits of EA governance are seen through:

Value creation

Effective EA governance ensures alignment between organizational investments and corporate strategic goals and objectives.

Cost reduction

Architecture standards provide guidance to identify opportunities for reuse and eliminate redundancies in an organization.

Risk optimization

Architecture review processes and assessment checklists ensure that solutions are within the acceptable risk levels of the organization.

EA governance is difficult to structure appropriately, but having an effective structure will allow you to:

  • Achieve business strategy through faster time-to-market innovations and capabilities.
  • Reduced transaction costs with more consistent business processes and information across business units.
  • Lower IT costs due to better traceability, faster design, and lower risk.
  • Link IT investments to organizational strategies and objectives
  • Integrate and institutionalizes IT best practices.
  • Enable the organization to take full advantage of its information, infrastructure, and hardware and software assets.
  • Support regulatory as well as best practice requirements such as auditability, security, responsibility, and accountability.

Organizations that have implemented EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA programs

Modern day CIOs of high-performing organizations use EA as a strategic planning discipline to improve business-IT alignment, enable innovation, and link business and IT strategies to execution.

Recent Info-Tech research found that organizations that establish EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA initiatives.

The image shows a bar graph, with Impact from EA on the Y-axis, and different initiatives listed on the X-axis. Each initiative has two bars connected to it, with a blue bar representing answers of No and the grey bar representing answers of Yes.

(Info-Tech Research Group, N=89)

Measure EA governance implementation effectiveness

Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an “enabler” of business outcomes to senior executives.

EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

Enterprise Architecture Management

  • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

IT Investment Portfolio Management

  • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

Solution Development

  • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
  • Number of building blocks reused.

Operations Management

  • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

Business Value

  • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
  • Decreased time to production.
  • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

An insurance provider adopts a value-focused, right-sized EA governance program

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The insurance sector has been undergoing major changes, and as a reaction, businesses within the sector have been embracing technology to provide innovative solutions.

The head of EA in a major insurance provider (henceforth to be referred to as “INSPRO01”) was given the mandate to ensure that solutions are architected right the first time to maximize reuse and reduce technology debt. The EA group was at a critical point – to demonstrate business value or become irrelevant.

Complication

The project management office had been accountable for solution architecture and had placed emphasis on short-term project cost savings at the expense of long term durability.

There was a lack of awareness of the Enterprise Architecture group within INSPRO01, and people misunderstood the roles and responsibilities of the EA team.

Result

Info-Tech helped define the responsibilities of the EA team and clarify the differences between the role of a Solution Architect vs. Enterprise Architect.

The EA team was able to make the case for change in the project management practices to ensure architectures are reviewed and approved prior to implementation.

As a result, INSPRO01 saw substantial increases in reuse opportunities and thereby derived more value from its technology investments.

Success factors for EA governance

The success of any EA governance initiative revolves around adopting best practices, setting up repeatable processes, and establishing appropriate controls.

  1. Develop best practices for managing architecture policies, procedures, roles, skills, and organizational structures.
  2. Establish organizational responsibilities and structures to support the architecture governance processes.
  3. Management of criteria for the control of the architecture governance processes, dispensations, compliance assessments, and SLAs.

Info-Tech’s approach to EA governance

Our best-practice approach is grounded in TOGAF and enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.

Right-sized. Insert EA governance into existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.

Measured. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance, and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.

Balanced. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

Info-Tech’s EA governance framework

Info-Tech’s architectural governance framework provides a value-focused, right-sized approach with a strong emphasis on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

Use Info-Tech’s templates to complete this project

  1. Current state of EA governance
    • EA Capability - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool
  2. EA fundamentals
    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template
    • EA Principles Template
  3. Engagement model
    • EA Engagement Model Template
  4. EA governing bodies
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • Architecture Review Process Template
  5. EA policy
    • EA Policy Template
    • Architecture Assessment Checklist Template
    • Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • Compliance Waiver Form Template
  6. Architectural standards
    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template
  7. Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

As you move through the project, capture your progress with a summary in the EA Governance Framework Template.

Download the EA Governance Framework Template document for use throughout this project.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

Guided Implementation

“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

Workshop

“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

Consulting

“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (1/2)

Current state of EA governance EA Fundamentals Engagement Model EA Governing Bodies
Best-Practice Toolkit

1.1 Determine organizational complexity

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

2.1 Craft the EA vision and mission

2.2 Develop the EA principles

2.3 Identify the EA goals

3.1 Build the case for EA engagement

3.2 Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

4.1 Identify the number of governing bodies

4.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies

4.3 Define the architecture review process

Guided Implementations
  • Determine organizational complexity
  • Assess current state of EA governance
  • Develop the EA fundamentals
  • Review the EA fundamentals
  • Review the current IT operating model
  • Determine the target engagement model
  • Identify architecture boards and develop charters
  • Develop an architecture review process

Phase 1 Results:

  • EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment
  • EA governance assessment

Phase 2 Results:

  • EA vision and mission
  • EA goals and measures
  • EA principles

Phase 3 Results:

  • EA engagement model

Phase 4 Results:

  • Architecture board charter
  • Architecture review process

EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (2/2)

EA Policy Architectural Standards Communication Plan
Best-Practice Toolkit

5.1 Define the scope of EA policy

5.2 Identify the target audience

5.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria

5.4 Craft an assessment checklist

6.1 Identify and standardize EA work products

6.2 Classify the architectural standards

6.3 Identify the custodian of standards

6.4 Update the standards

7.1 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

7.2 Identify stakeholders

7.3 Create a communication plan

Guided Implementations
  • EA policy, assessment checklists, and decision types
  • Compliance waivers
  • Understand architectural standards
  • EA repository and updating the standards
  • Create a communication plan
  • Review the communication plan

Phase 5 Results:

  • EA policy
  • Architecture assessment checklist
  • Compliance waiver process
  • Compliance waiver form

Phase 6 Results:

  • Architecture standards update process

Phase 7 Results:

  • Communication plan
  • EA governance framework

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

Pre-workshopWorkshop Day 1Workshop Day 2Workshop Day 3Workshop Day 4
ActivitiesCurrent state of EA governance EA fundamentals and engagement model EA governing bodies EA policy Architectural standards and

communication plan

1.1 Determine organizational complexity

1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

1.4 Senior management interviews

  1. Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools
  2. Craft the EA vision and mission
  3. Develop the EA principles.
  4. Identify the EA goals
  5. Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model
  1. Identify the number of governing bodies
  2. Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
  3. Define the architecture review process
  1. Define the scope
  2. Identify the target audience
  3. Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
  4. Craft an assessment checklist
  1. Identify and standardize EA work products
  2. Classifying the architectural standards
  3. Identifying the custodian of standards
  4. Updating the standards
  5. List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
  6. Identify stakeholders
  7. Create a communication plan
Deliverables
  1. EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment tool
  2. EA governance assessment tool
  1. EA vision and mission template
  2. EA goals and measures template
  3. EA principles template
  4. EA engagement model template
  1. Architecture board charter template
  2. Architecture review process template
  1. EA policy template
  2. Architecture assessment checklist template
  3. Compliance waiver process template
  4. Compliance waiver form template
  1. Architecture standards update process template
  2. Communication plan template

Phase 1

Current State of EA Governance

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Current State of EA Governance

  1. Current State of EA Governance
  2. EA Fundamentals
  3. Engagement Model
  4. EA Governing Bodies
  5. EA Policy
  6. Architectural Standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Determine organizational complexity
  • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components
  • Identify and prioritize gaps

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Prioritized list of gaps

Info-Tech Insight

Correlation is not causation – an apparent problem might be a symptom rather than a cause. Assess the organization’s current EA governance to discover the root cause and go beyond the symptoms.

Phase 1 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 1: Current State of EA Governance

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 1.1: Determine organizational complexity

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss how to use Info-Tech’s EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool.
  • Discuss how to complete the inputs on the EA Governance Assessment Tool.

Then complete these activities…

  • Conduct an assessment of your organization to determine its complexity.
  • Assess the state of EA governance within your organization.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

Step 1.2: Assess current state of EA governance

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review the output of the EA governance assessment and gather feedback on your goals for the EA practice.

Then complete these activities…

  • Discuss whether you are ready to proceed with the project.
  • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Assessment Tool

Right-size EA governance based on organizational complexity

Determining organizational complexity is not rocket science. Use Info-Tech’s tool to quantify the complexity and use it, along with common sense, to determine the appropriate level of architecture governance.

Info-Tech’s methodology uses six factors to determine the complexity of the organization:

  1. The size of the organization, which can often be denoted by the revenue, headcount, number of applications in use, and geographical diversity.
  2. The solution alignment factor helps indicate the degree to which various projects map to the organization’s strategy.
  3. The size and complexity of the IT infrastructure and networks.
  4. The portfolio of applications maintained by the IT organization.
  5. Key changes within the organization such as M&A, regulatory changes, or a change in business or technology leadership.
  6. Other negative influences that can adversely affect the organization.

Determine your organization’s level of complexity

1.1 2 hours

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Capability section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool to facilitate a session on determining your organization’s complexity.

Download EA Organizational - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the results in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Understand the components of effective EA governance

EA governance is multi-faceted and it facilitates effective use of resources to meet organizational strategic objectives through well-defined structural elements.

EA Governance

  • Fundamentals
  • Engagement Model
  • Policy
  • Governing Bodies
  • Architectural Standards

Components of architecture governance

  1. EA vision, mission, goals, metrics, and principles that provide a direction for the EA practice.
  2. An engagement model showing where and in what fashion EA is engaged in the IT operating model.
  3. An architecture policy formulated and enforced by the architectural governing bodies to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.
  4. Governing bodies to assess projects for compliance and provide feedback.
  5. Architectural standards that codify the EA work products to ensure consistent development of architecture.

Next Step: Based on the organization’s complexity, conduct a current state assessment of EA governance using Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool.

Assess the components of EA governance in your organization

1.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Governance section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the “EA Governance Assessment Tool” to facilitate a session on identifying the best practices to be applied in your organization.

Download Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the identified best practices in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Conduct a current state assessment to identify limitations of the existing EA governance framework

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 was planning a major transformation initiative. The organization determined that EA is a strategic function.

The CIO had pledged support to the EA group and had given them a mandate to deliver long-term strategic architecture.

The business leaders did not trust the EA team and believed that lack of business skills in the group put the business transformation at risk.

Complication

The EA group had been traditionally seen as a technology organization that helps with software design.

The EA team lacked understanding of the business and hence there had been no common language between business and technology.

Result

Info-Tech helped the EA team create a set of 10 architectural principles that are business-value driven rather than technical statements.

The team socialized the principles with the business and technology stakeholders and got their approvals.

By applying the business focused architectural principles, the EA team was able to connect with the business leaders and gain their support.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Determine organizational complexity.
  • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.
  • Identify and prioritize gaps.

Outcomes

  • Organizational complexity assessment
  • EA governance capability assessment
  • A prioritized list of capability gaps

Phase 2

EA Fundamentals

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Fundamentals

  1. Current State of EA Governance
  2. EA Fundamentals
  3. Engagement Model
  4. EA Governing Bodies
  5. EA Policy
  6. Architectural Standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Craft the EA vision and mission
  • Develop the EA principles.
  • Identify the EA goals

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance

Info-Tech Insight

A house divided against itself cannot stand – ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned with the organization’s goals and objectives.

Phase 2 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 2: EA Fundamentals

Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

Step 2.1: Develop the EA fundamentals

Review findings with analyst:

  • Discuss the importance of the EA fundamentals – vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
  • Understand how to align the EA vision, mission, goals, and measures to your organization’s vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.

Then complete these activities…

  • Develop the EA vision statements.
  • Craft the EA mission statements.
  • Define EA goals and measures.
  • Adopt EA principles.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Principles Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template

Step 2.2: Review the EA fundamentals

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review the EA fundamentals in conjunction with the results of the EA governance assessment tool and gather feedback.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the EA vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
  • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Vision and Mission Template
  • EA Principles Template
  • EA Goals and Measures Template

Fundamentals of an EA organization

Vision, mission, goals and measures, and principles form the foundation of the EA function.

Factors to consider when developing the vision and mission statements

The vision and mission statements provide strategic direction to the EA team. These statements should be created based on the business and technology drivers in the organization.

Business Drivers

  • Business drivers are factors that determine, or cause, an increase in value or major improvement of a business.
  • Examples of business drivers include:
    • Increased revenue
    • Customer retention
    • Salesforce effectiveness
    • Innovation

Technology Drivers

  • Technology drivers are factors that are vital for the continued success and growth of a business using effective technologies.
  • Examples of technology drivers include:
    • Enterprise integration
    • Information security
    • Portability
    • Interoperability

"The very essence of leadership is [that] you have a vision. It's got to be a vision you articulate clearly and forcefully on every occasion. You can't blow an uncertain trumpet." – Theodore Hesburgh

Develop vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles to define the EA capability direction and purpose

EA capability vision statement

Articulates the desired future state of EA capability expressed in the present tense.

  • What will be the role of EA capability?
  • How will EA capability be perceived?

Example: To be recognized by both the business and IT as a trusted partner that drives [Company Name]’s effectiveness, efficiency, and agility.

EA capability mission statement

Articulates the fundamental purpose of the EA capability.

  • Why does EA capability exist?
  • What does EA capability do to realize its vision?
  • Who are the key customers of the EA capability?

Example: Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.

EA capability goals and measures

EA capability goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. EA capability measures define how to validate the achievement of the EA capability goals.

Example:

Goal: Improve reuse of IT assets at [Company Name].

Measures:

  • The number of building blocks available for reuse.
  • Percent of projects that utilized existing building blocks.
  • Estimated efficiency gain (= effort to create a building block * reuse count).

EA principles

EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, solution development, and procurement decisions.

Example:

  • EA principle name: Reuse.
  • Statement: Maximize reuse of existing assets.
  • Rationale: Reuse prevents duplication of development and support efforts, increasing efficiency, and agility.
  • Implications: Define architecture and solution building blocks and ensure their consistent application.

EA principles guide decision making

Policies can be seen as “the letter of the law,” whereas EA principles summarize “the spirit of the law.”

The image shows a graphic with EA Principles listed at the top, with an arrow pointing down to Decisions on the use of IT. At the bottom are domain-specific policies, with two arrows pointing upwards: the arrow on the left is labelled direct, and the arrow on the right is labelled control. The arrow points up to the label Decisions on the use of IT. On the left, there is an arrow pointing both up and down. At the top it is labelled The spirit of the law, and at the bottom, The letter of the law. On the right, there is another arrow pointing both up and down, labelled How should decisions be made at the top and labelled Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions? at the bottom.

Define EA capability goals and related measures that resonate with EA capability stakeholders

EA capability goals, i.e. specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. Use COBIT 5, APO03 process goals, and metrics as a starting point.

The image shows a chart titled Manage Enterprise Architecture.

Define relevant business value measures to collect indirect evidence of EA’s contribution to business benefits

Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an enabler of business outcomes to senior executives.

EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

Enterprise Architecture Management

  • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

IT Investment Portfolio Management

  • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

Solution Development

  • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
  • Number of building blocks reused.

Operations Management

  • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

Business Value

  • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
  • Decreased time to production.
  • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

Refine the organization’s EA fundamentals

2.1 2 hrs

Input

  • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

Output

  • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

Materials

  • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents with four sections highlighted, beginning with EA Vision Statement and ending with EA Goals and Measures.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the three templates and hold a working session to facilitate a session on creating EA fundamentals.

Download the EA Vision and Mission Template, the EA Principles Template, and the EA Goals and Measures Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Document the final vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures within the EA Governance Framework.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned to the organizational needs

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The EA group at INSPRO01 was being pulled in multiple directions with requests ranging from architecture review to solution design to code reviews.

Project level architecture was being practiced with no clarity on the end goal. This led to EA being viewed as just another IT function without any added benefits.

Info-Tech recommended that the EA team ensure that the fundamentals (vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures) reflect what the team aspired to achieve before fixing any of the process concerns.

Complication

The EA team was mostly comprised of technical people and hence the best practices outlined were not driven by business value.

The team had no documented vision and mission statements in place. In addition, the existing goals and measures were not tied to the business strategic objectives.

The team had architectural principles documented, but there were too many and they were very technical in nature.

Result

With Info-Tech’s guidance, the team developed a vision and mission statement to succinctly communicate the purpose of the EA function.

The team also reduced and simplified the EA principles to make sure they were value driven and communicated in business terms.

Finally, the team proposed goals and measures to track the performance of the EA team.

With the fundamentals in place, the team was able to show the value of EA and gain organization-wide acceptance.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Craft the EA vision and mission.
  • Develop the EA principles.
  • Identify the EA goals.

Outcomes

  • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance.

Phase 3

Engagement Model

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Engagement Model

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Build the case for EA engagement
  • Engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
  • Target EA engagement model

Info-Tech Insight

Perform due diligence prior to decision making. Use the EA Engagement Model to promote conversations between stage gate meetings as opposed to having the conversation during the stage gate meetings.

Phase 3 guided implementation outline

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 3: EA engagement model

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 3.1 Review the current IT operating model

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review Info-Tech’s IT operating model.
  • Understand how to document your organization’s IT operating model.
  • Document EA’s current role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.

Then complete these activities…

  • Document your organization’s IT operating model.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Engagement Model Template

Step 3.2: Determine the target engagement model

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review your organization’s current state IT operating model.
  • Review your EA’s role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.
  • Document the role and responsibility of EA in the future state.

Then complete these activities…

  • Document EA’s future role within each stage of your organization’s IT operating model.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Engagement Model Template.

The three pillars of EA Engagement

Effective EA engagement revolves around three basic principles – generating business benefits, creating adaptable models, and being able to replicate the process across the organization.

Business Value Driven

Focus on generating business value from organizational investments.

Repeatable

Process should be standardized, transparent, and repeatable so that it can be consistently applied across the organization.

Flexible

Accommodate the varying needs of projects of different sizes.

Where these pillars meet: Advocates long-term strategic vs. short-term tactical solutions.

EA interaction points within the IT operating model

EA’s engagement in each stage within the plan, build, and run phases should be clearly defined and communicated.

Plan Strategy Development Business Planning Conceptualization Portfolio Management
Build Requirements Solution Design Application Development/ Procurement Quality Assurance
Run Deploy Operate

Document the organization’s current IT operating model

3.1 2-3 hr

Input

  • IT project lifecycle

Output

  • Organization’s current IT operating model.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, IT department leads, business leaders.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to document the current IT operating model. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

1. Map out the IT operating model.

  1. Find a project that was just deployed within the organization and backtrack every step of the way to the strategy development that resulted in the conception of the project.
  2. Interview the personnel involved with each step of the process to get a sense of whether or not projects usually move to deployment going through these steps.
  3. Review Info-Tech’s best-practice IT operating model presented in the EA Engagement Model Template, and add or remove any steps to the existing organization’s IT operating model as necessary. Document the finalized steps of the IT operating model.

2. Determine EA’s current role in the operating model.

  1. Interview EA personnel through each step of the process and ask them their role. This is to get a sense of the type of input that EA is having into each step of the process.
  2. Using the EA Engagement Model Template, document the current role of EA in each step of the organization’s IT operation as you complete the interviews.

Download the EA Engagement Model Template to document the organization’s current IT operating model.

Define RACI in every stage of the IT operating model (e.g. EA role in strategy development phase of the IT operating model is presented below)

Strategy Development

Also known as strategic planning, strategy development is fundamental to creating and running a business. It involves the creation of a longer-term game plan or vision that sets specific goals and objectives for a business.

R Those in charge of performing the task. These are the people actively involved in the completion of the required work. Business VPs, EA, IT directors R
A The one ultimately answerable for the correct and thorough completion of the deliverable or task, and the one who delegates the work to those responsible. CEO A
C Those whose opinions are sought before a decision is made, and with whom there is two-way communication. PMO, Line managers, etc. C
I Those who are kept up to date on progress, and with whom there is one-way communication. Development managers, etc. I

Next Step: Similarly define the RACI for each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

Best practices on the role of EA within the IT operating model

Plan

Strategy Development

C

Business Planning

C

Conceptualization

A

Portfolio Management

C

Build

Requirements

C

Solution Design

R

Application Development/ Procurement

R

Quality Assurance

I

Run

Deploy

I

Operate

I

Next Step: Define the role of EA in each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

3.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Organization’s IT operating model.

Output

  • Organization’s EA engagement model.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business leaders, IT department leaders.

The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Engagement Model Template with the EA Engagement Summary section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Engagement Model Template and hold a working session to define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model.

Download the EA Engagement Model Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Document the target state role of EA within the EA Governance Framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template


Design an EA engagement model to formalize EA’s role within the IT operating model

CASE STUDY

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 had a high IT cost structure with looming technology debt due to a preference for short-term tactical gains over long-term solutions.

The business satisfaction with IT was at an all-time low due to expensive solutions that did not meet business needs.

INSPRO01’s technology landscape was in disarray with many overlapping systems and interoperability issues.

Complication

No single team within the organization had an end-to-end perspective all the way from strategy to project execution. A lot of information was being lost in handoffs between different teams.

This led to inconsistent design/solution patterns being applied. Investment decisions had not been grounded in reality and this often led to cost overruns.

Result

Info-Tech helped INSPRO01 identify opportunities for EA team engagement at different stages of the IT operating model. EA’s role within each stage was clearly defined and documented.

With Info-Tech’s help, the EA team successfully made the case for engagement upfront during strategy development rather than during project execution.

The increased transparency enabled the EA team to ensure that investments were aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Build the case for EA engagement.
  • Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

Outcomes

  • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
  • Target EA engagement model

Phase 4

EA Governing Bodies

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Governing Bodies

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identify the number of governing bodies
  • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
  • Define the architecture review process

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Charter definition for each EA governance board

Info-Tech Insight

Use architecture governance like a scalpel rather than a hatchet. Implement governing bodies to provide guidance rather than act as a police force.

Phase 4 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 4: Create or identify EA governing bodies

Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

Step 4.1: Identify architecture boards and develop charters

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Understand the factors influencing the number of governing bodies required for an organization.
  • Understand the components of a governing body charter.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify how many governing bodies are needed.
  • Define EA governing body composition, meeting frequency, and domain of coverage.
  • Define the inputs and outputs of each EA governing body.
  • Identify mandatory inclusion criteria.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Board Charter Template

Step 4.2: Develop an architecture review process

Follow-up with an analyst call:

  • Review the number of boards identified for your organization and gather feedback.
  • Review the charters developed for each governing body and gather feedback.
  • Understand the various factors that impact the architecture review process.
  • Review Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the charters for governing bodies.
  • Develop the architecture review process for your organization.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Review Process Template

Factors that determine the number of architectural boards required

The primary purpose of architecture boards is to ensure that business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models without introducing additional layers of bureaucracy.

The optimal number of architecture boards required in an organization is a function of the following factors:

  • EA organization model
    • Distributed
    • Federated
    • Centralized
  • Architecture domains Maturity of architecture domains
  • Project throughput

Commonly observed architecture boards:

  • Architecture Review Board
  • Technical Architecture Committee
  • Data Architecture Review Board
  • Infrastructure Architecture Review Board
  • Security Architecture Review Board

Info-Tech Insight

Before building out a new governance board, start small by repurposing existing forums by adding architecture as an agenda item. As the items for review increase consider introducing dedicated governing bodies.

EA organization model drives the architecture governance structure

EA teams can be organized in three ways – distributed, federated, and centralized. Each model has its own strengths and weaknesses. EA governance must be structured in a way such that the strengths are harvested and the weaknesses are mitigated.

Distributed Federated Centralized
EA org. structure
  • No overarching EA team exists and segment architects report to line of business (LOB) executives.
  • A centralized EA team exists with segment architects reporting to LOB executives and dotted-line to head of (centralized) EA.
  • A centralized EA capability exists with enterprise architects reporting to the head of EA.
Implications
  • Produces a fragmented and disjointed collection of architectures.
  • Economies of scale are not realized.
  • High cross-silo integration effort.
  • LOB-specific approach to EA.
  • Requires dual reporting relationships.
  • Additional effort is required to coordinate centralized EA policies and blueprints with segment EA policies and blueprints.
  • Accountabilities may be unclear.
  • Can be less responsive to individual LOB needs, because the centralized EA capability must analyze needs of multiple LOBs and various trade-off options to avoid specialized, one-off solutions.
  • May impede innovation.
Architectural boards
  • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and common services.
  • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB-specific needs.
  • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns and common services.
  • Cross-enterprise boards to ensure adherence to enterprise standards and reduce integration costs.
  • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB specific needs.
  • Enterprise working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and all services.
  • Central board to ensure adherence to enterprise standards.

Architecture domains influences the number of architecture boards required

  • An architecture review board (ARB) provides direction for domain-specific boards and acts as an escalation point. The ARB must have the right mix of both business and technology stakeholders.
  • Domain-specific boards provide a platform to have focused discussions on items specific to that domain.
  • Based on project throughput and the maturity of each domain, organizations would have to pick the optimal number of boards.
  • Architecture working groups provide a platform for cross-domain conversations to establish organization wide standards.
Level 1 Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
Level 2 Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
Level 3 Architecture Working Groups Architects

Create a game plan for the architecture boards

  • Start with a single board for each level – an architecture review board (ARB), a technical architecture committee (TAC), and architecture working groups.
  • As the organization matures and the number of requests to the TAC increase, consider creating domain-specific boards – such as business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, etc. – to handle architecture decisions pertaining to that domain.

Start with this:

Level 1 Architecture Review Board
Level 2 Technical Architecture Committee
Level 3 Architecture Working Groups

Change to this:

Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
Architecture Working Groups Architects

Architecture boards have different objectives and activities

The boards at each level should be set up with the correct agenda – ensure that the boards’ composition and activities reflect their objective. Use the entry criteria to communicate the agenda for their meetings.

Architecture Review Board Technical Architecture Committee
Objective
  • Evaluates business strategy, needs, and priorities, sets direction and acts as a decision making authority of the EA capability.
  • Directs the development of target state architecture.
  • Monitors performance and compliance of the architectural standards.
  • Monitor project solution architecture compliance to standards, regulations, EA principles, and target state EA blueprints.
  • Review EA compliance waiver requests, make recommendations, and escalate to the architecture review board (ARB).
Composition
  • Business Leadership
  • IT Leadership
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Business Managers
  • IT Managers
  • Architects
Activities
  • Review compliance of conceptual solution to standards.
  • Discuss the enterprise implications of the proposed solution.
  • Select and approve vendors.
  • Review detailed solution design.
  • Discuss the risks of the proposed solution.
  • Discuss the cost of the proposed solution.
  • Review and recommend vendors.
Entry Criteria
  • Changes to IT Enterprise Technology Policy.
  • Changes to the technology management plan.
  • Approve changes to enterprise technology inventory/portfolio.
  • Ongoing operational cost impacts.
  • Detailed estimates for the solution are ready for review.
  • There are significant changes to protocols or technologies responsible for solution.
  • When the project is deviating from baselined architectures.

Identify the number of governing bodies

4.1 2 hrs

Input

  • EA Vision and Mission
  • EA Engagement Model

Output

  • A list of EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to identify the number of governing bodies. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

  1. Examine the EA organization models mentioned previously. Assess how your organization is structured, and identify whether your organization has a federated, distributed or centralized EA organization model.
  2. Reference the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide. Assess the architecture domains, and define how many there are in the organization.
  3. Architecture domains:
    1. If no defined architecture domains exist, model the number of governing bodies in the organization based on the “Start with this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
    2. If defined architecture domains do exist, model the number of governing bodies based on the “Change to this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
  4. Name each governing body you have defined in the previous step. Download Info-Tech’s Architecture Board Charter Template for each domain you have named. Input the names into the title of each downloaded template.

Download the Architecture Board Charter Template to document this activity.

Defining the governing body charter

The charter represents the agreement between the governing body and its stakeholders about the value proposition and obligations to the organization.

  1. Purpose: The reason for the existence of the governing body and its goals and objectives.
  2. Composition: The members who make up the committee and their roles and responsibilities in it.
  3. Frequency of meetings: The frequency at which the committee gathers to discuss items and make decisions.
  4. Entry/Exit Criteria: The criteria by which the committee selects items for review and items for which decisions can be taken.
  5. Inputs: Materials that are provided as inputs for review and decision making by the committee.
  6. Outputs: Materials that are provided by the committee after an item has been reviewed and the decision made.
  7. Activities: Actions undertaken by the committee to arrive at its decision.

Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

4.2 3 hrs

Input

  • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

Output

  • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Governance Framework document, with the Architecture Board Charters highlighted.

Step 1 Facilitate

Hold a working session with the stakeholders to define the charter for each of the identified architecture boards.

Download Architecture Board Charter Template

Step 2 Summarize

  • Summarize the objectives of each board and reference the charter document within the EA Governance Framework.
  • Upload the final charter document to the team’s common repository.

Update the EA Governance Framework document


Considerations when creating an architecture review process

  • Ensure that architecture review happens at major milestones within the organization’s IT Operating Model such as the plan, build, and run phases.
  • In order to provide continuous engagement, make the EA group accountable for solution architecture in the plan phase. In the build phase, the EA group will be consulted while the solution architect will be responsible for the project solution architecture.

Plan

  • Strategy Development
  • Business Planning
  • A - Conceptualization
  • Portfolio Management

Build

  • Requirements
  • R - Solution Design
  • Application Development/ Procurement
  • Quality Assurance

Run

  • Deploy
  • Operate

Best-practice project architecture review process

The best-practice model presented facilitates the creation of sound solution architecture through continuous engagement with the EA team and well-defined governance checkpoints.

The image shows a graphic of the best-practice model. At the left, four categories are listed: Committees; EA; Project Team; LOB. At the top, three categories are listed: Plan; Build; Run. Within the area between these categories is a flow chart demonstrating the best-practice model and specific checkpoints throughout.

Develop the architecture review process

4.3 2 hours

Input

  • A list of all EA governing bodies.
  • Info-Tech’s best practice architecture review process.

Output

  • The new architecture review process.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

Hold a working session with the participants to develop the architecture review process. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

  1. Reference Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process embedded within the “Architecture Review Process Template” to gain an understanding of an ideal architecture review process.
  2. Identify the stages within the plan, build, and run phases where solution architecture reviews should occur, and identify the governing bodies involved in these reviews.
  3. As you go through these stages, record your findings in the Architecture Review Process Template.
  4. Connect the various activities leading to and from the architecture creation points to outline the review process.

Download the Architecture Review Process Template for additional guidance regarding developing an architecture review process.

Develop the architecture review process

4.3 2 hrs

Input

  • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

Output

  • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents, with the Architecture Review Process highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download Architecture Review Process Template and facilitate a session to customize the best-practice model presented in the template.

Download the Architecture Review Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the process changes and document the process flow in the EA Governance Framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Right-size EA governing bodies to reduce the perception of red tape

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

At INSPRO01, architecture governance boards were a bottleneck. The boards fielded all project requests, ranging from simple screen label changes to complex initiatives spanning multiple applications.

These boards were designed as forums for technology discussions without any business stakeholder involvement.

Complication

INSPRO01’s management never gave buy-in to the architecture governance boards since their value was uncertain.

Additionally, architectural reviews were perceived as an item to be checked off rather than a forum for getting feedback.

Architectural exceptions were not being followed through due to the lack of a dispensation process.

Result

Info-Tech has helped the team define adaptable inclusion/exclusion criteria (based on project complexity) for each of the architectural governing boards.

The EA team was able to make the case for business participation in the architecture forums to better align business and technology investment.

An architecture dispensation process was created and operationalized. As a result architecture reviews became more transparent with well-defined next steps.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Identify the number of governing bodies.
  • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.
  • Define the architecture review process.

Outcomes

  • Charter definition for each EA governance board

Phase 5

EA Policy

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

EA Policy

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Define the EA policy scope
  • Identify the target audience
  • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
  • Create an assessment checklist

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Leaders
  • Business Leaders
  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • The completed EA policy
  • Project assessment checklist
  • Defined assessment outcomes
  • Completed compliance waiver process

Info-Tech Insight

Use the EA policy to promote EA’s commitment to deliver value to business stakeholders through process transparency, stakeholder engagement, and compliance.

Phase 5 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 5: EA Policy

Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

Step 5.1–5.3: EA Policy, Assessment Checklists, and Decision Types

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss the three pillars of EA policy and its purpose.
  • Review the components of an effective EA policy.
  • Understand how to develop architecture assessment checklists.
  • Understand the assessment decision types.

Then complete these activities…

  • Define purpose, scope, and audience of the EA policy.
  • Create a project assessment checklist.
  • Define the organization’s assessment decision type.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Policy Template
  • EA Assessment Checklist Template

Step 5.4: Compliance Waivers

Review findings with analyst:

  • Review your draft EA policy and gather feedback.
  • Review your project assessment checklists and the assessment decision types.
  • Discuss the best-practice architecture compliance waiver process and how to tailor it to your organizational needs.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine the EA policy based on feedback gathered.
  • Create the compliance waiver process.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
  • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

Three pillars of architecture policy

Architecture policy is a set of guidelines, formulated and enforced by the governing bodies of an organization, to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.

Architecture compliance – promotes compliance to organizational standards through well-defined assessment checklists across architectural domains.

Business value – ensures that investments are tied to business value by enforcing traceability to business capabilities.

Architectural guidance – provides guidance to architecture practitioners on the application of the business and technology standards.

Components of EA policy

An enterprise architecture policy is an actionable document that can be applied to projects of varying complexity across the organization.

  1. Purpose and Scope: This EA policy document clearly defines the scope and the objectives of architecture reviews within an organization.
  2. Target Audience: The intended audience of the policy such as employees and partners.
  3. Architecture Assessment Checklist: A wide range of typical questions that may be used in conducting Architecture Compliance reviews, relating to various aspects of the architecture.
  4. Assessment Outcomes: The outcome of the architecture review process that determines the conformance of a project solution to the enterprise architecture standards.
  5. Compliance Waiver: Used when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

Draft the purpose and scope of the EA policy

5.1 2.5 hrs

Input

  • A consensus on the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

Output

  • Documented version of the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Policy section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Policy Template and hold a working session to draft the EA policy.

Download the EA Policy Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize purpose, scope, and intended audience of the policy in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the purpose, scope and intended audience.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Architecture assessment checklist

Architecture assessment checklist is a list of future-looking criteria that a project will be assessed against. It provides a set of standards against which projects can be assessed in order to render a decision on whether or not the project can be greenlighted.

Architecture checklists should be created for each EA domain since each domain provides guidance on specific aspects of the project.

Sample Checklist Questions

Business Architecture:

  • Is the project aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives?
  • What are the business capabilities that the project supports? Is it creating new capabilities or supporting an existing one?

Data Architecture:

  • What processes are in place to support data referential integrity and/or normalization?
  • What is the physical data model definition (derived from logical data models) used to design the database?

Application Architecture:

  • Can this application be placed on an application server independent of all other applications? If not, explain the dependencies.
  • Can additional parallel application servers be easily added? If so, what is the load balancing mechanism?

Infrastructure Architecture:

  • Does the solution provide high-availability and fault-tolerance that can recover from events within a datacenter?

Security Architecture:

  • Have you ensured that the corporate security policies and guidelines to which you are designing are the latest versions?

Create architectural assessment checklists

5.2 2 hrs

Input

  • Reference architecture models.

Output

  • Architecture assessment checklist.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Assessment Checklist section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template and hold a working session to create the architectural assessment checklists.

Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize the major points of the checklists in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the detailed architecture assessment checklists.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Architecture assessment decision types

  • As a part of the proposed solution review, the governing bodies produce a decision indicating the compliance of the solution architecture with the enterprise standards.
  • Go, No Go, or Conditional are a sample set of decision outcomes available to the governing bodies.
  • On a conditional approval, the project team must file for a compliance waiver.

Approved

  • The solution demonstrates substantial compliance with standards.
  • Negligible risk to the organization or minimal risks with sound plans of how to mitigate them.
  • Architectural approval to proceed with delivery type of work.

Conditional Approval

  • The significant aspects of the solution have been addressed in a satisfactory manner.
  • Yet, there are some aspects of the solution that are not compliant with standards.
  • The architectural approval is conditional upon presenting the missing evidence within a minimal period of time determined.
  • The risk level may be acceptable to the organization from an overall IT governance perspective.

Not Approved

  • The solution is not compliant with the standards.
  • Scheduled for a follow-up review.
  • Not recommended to proceed until the solution is more compliant with the standards.

Best-practice architecture compliance waiver process

Waivers are not permanent. Waiver terms must be documented for each waiver specifying:

  • Time period after which the architecture in question will be compliant with the enterprise architecture.
  • The modifications necessary to the enterprise architecture to accommodate the solution.

The image shows a flow chart, split into 4 sections: Enterprise Architect; Solution Architect; TAC; ARB. To the right of these section labels, there is a flow chart that documents the waiver process.

Create compliance waiver process

5.4 3-4 hrs

Input

  • A consensus on the compliance waiver process.

Output

  • Documented compliance waiver process and form.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the Table of Contents with the Compliance Waiver Form section highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the EA compliance waiver template and hold a working session to customize the best-practice process to your organization’s needs.

Download the EA Compliance Waiver Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

  • Summarize the objectives and high-level process in the EA Governance Framework document.
  • Update the EA policy document with the compliance waiver process.
  • Upload the final policy document to the team’s common repository.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Creates an enterprise architecture policy to drive adoption

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

EA program adoption across INSPRO01 was at its lowest point due to a lack of transparency into the activities performed by the EA group.

Often, projects ignored EA entirely as it was viewed as a nebulous and non-value-added activity that produced no measurable results.

Complication

There was very little documented information about the architecture assessment process and the standards against which project solution architectures were evaluated.

Additionally, there were no well-defined outcomes for the assessment.

Project groups were left speculating about the next steps and with little guidance on what to do after completing an assessment.

Result

Info-Tech helped the EA team create an EA policy containing architecture significance criteria, assessment checklists, and reference to the architecture review process.

Additionally, the team also identified guidelines and detailed next steps for projects based on the outcome of the architecture assessment.

These actions brought clarity to EA processes and fostered better engagement with the EA group.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Define the scope.
  • Identify the target audience.
  • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
  • Create an assessment checklist.

Outcomes

  • The completed EA policy
  • Project assessment checklist
  • Defined assessment outcomes
  • Completed compliance waiver process

Phase 6

Architectural Standards

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Architectural Standards

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Identify and standardize EA work products
  • Classify the architectural standards
  • Identify the custodian of standards
  • Update the standards

This step involves the following participants:

  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • A standardized set of EA work products
  • A way to categorize and store EA work products
  • A defined method of updating standards

Info-Tech Insight

The architecture standard is the currency that facilitates information exchange between stakeholders. The primary purpose is to minimize transaction costs by providing a balance between stability and relevancy.

Phase 6 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 6: Architectural standards

Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

Step 6.1: Understand Architectural Standards

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss architectural standards.
  • Know how to identify and define EA work products.
  • Understand the standard content of work products.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify and standardize EA work products.

Step 6.2–6.3: EA Repository and Updating the Standards

Review with analyst:

  • Review the standardized EA work products.
  • Discuss the principles of EA repository.
  • Discuss the Info-Tech best-practice model for updating architecture standards and how to tailor them to your organizational context.

Then complete these activities…

  • Build a folder structure for storing EA work products.
  • Use the Info-Tech best-practice architecture standards update process to develop your organization’s process for updating architecture standards.

With these tools & templates:

  • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

Recommended list of EA work products to standardize

  • EA work products listed below are typically produced as a part of the architecture lifecycle.
  • To ensure consistent development of architecture, the work products need to be standardized.
  • Consider standardizing both the naming conventions and the content of the work products.
  1. EA vision: A document containing the vision that provides the high-level aspiration of the capabilities and business value that EA will deliver.
  2. Statement of EA Work: The Statement of Architecture Work defines the scope and approach that will be used to complete an architecture project.
  3. Reference architectures: A reference architecture is a set of best-practice taxonomy that describes components and the conceptual structure of the model, as well as graphics, which provide a visual representation of the taxonomy to aid understanding. Reference architectures are created for each of the architecture domains.
  4. Solution proposal: The proposed project solution based on the EA guidelines and standards.
  5. Compliance assessment request: The document that contains the project solution architecture assessment details.
  6. Architecture change request: The request that initiates a change to architecture standards when existing standards can no longer meet the needs of the enterprise.
  7. Transition architecture: A transition architecture shows the enterprise at incremental states that reflect periods of transition that sit between the baseline and target architectures.
  8. Architectural roadmap: A roadmap that lists individual increments of change and lays them out on a timeline to show progression from the baseline architecture to the target architecture.
  9. EA compliance waiver request: A compliance waiver request that must be made when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

Standardize the content of each work product

  1. Purpose - The reason for the existence of the work product.
  2. Owner - The owner of this EA work product.
  3. Target Audience - The intended audience of the work product such as employees and partners.
  4. Naming Pattern - The pattern for the name of the work product as well as its file name.
  5. Table of Contents - The various sections of the work product.
  6. Review & Sign-Off Authority - The stakeholders who will review the work product and approve it.
  7. Repository Folder Location - The location where the work product will be stored.

Identify and standardize work products

6.1 3 hrs

Input

  • List of various documents being produced by projects currently.

Output

  • Standardized list of work products.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to identify and standardize work products. Facilitate the activity using the steps below.

  1. Identifying EA work products:
    1. Start by reviewing the list of all architecture-related documents presently produced in the organization. Any such deliverable with the following characteristics can be standardized:
      1. If it can be broken out and made into a standalone document.
      2. If it can be made into a fill-in form completed by others.
      3. If it is repetitive and requires iterative changes.
    2. Create a list of work products that your organization would like to standardize based on the characteristics above.
  2. The content and format of standardized EA work products:
    1. For each work product your organization wishes to standardize, look at its purpose and brainstorm the content needed to fulfill that purpose.
    2. After identifying the elements that need to be included in the work product to fulfill its purpose, order them logically for presentation purposes.
    3. In each section of the work product that need to be completed, include instructions on how to complete the section.
    4. Review the seven elements presented in the previous slide and include them in the work products.

EA repository - information taxonomy

As the EA function begins to grow and accumulates EA work products, having a well-designed folder structure helps you find the necessary information efficiently.

Architecture meta-model

Describes the organizationally tailored architecture framework.

Architecture capability

Defines the parameters, structures, and processes that support the enterprise architecture group.

Architecture landscape

An architectural presentation of assets in use by the enterprise at particular points in time.

Standards information base

Captures the standards with which new architectures and deployed services must comply.

Reference library

Provides guidelines, templates, patterns, and other forms of reference material to accelerate the creation of new architectures for the enterprise.

Governance log

Provides a record of governance activity across the enterprise.

Create repository folder structure

6.2 5-6 hrs

Input

  • List of standardized work products.

Output

  • EA work products mapped to a repository folder.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to create a repository structure. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

  1. Start with the taxonomy on the previous slide, and sort the existing work products into these six categories.
  2. Assess that the work products are sorted in a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive fashion. This means that a certain work product that appears in one category should not appear in another category. As well, make sure these six categories capture all the existing work products.
  3. Based on the categorization of the work products, build a folder structure that follows these categories, which will allow for the work products to be accessed quickly and easily.

Create a process to update EA work products

  • Architectural standards are not set in stone and should be reviewed and updated periodically.
  • The Architecture Review Board is the custodian for standards.
  • Any change to the standards need to be assessed thoroughly and must be communicated to all the impacted stakeholders.

Architectural standards update process

Identify

  • Identify changes to the standards

Assess

  • Review and assess the impacts of the change

Document

  • Document the change and update the standard

Approve

  • Distribute the updated standards to key stakeholders for approval

Communicate

  • Communicate the approved changes to impacted stakeholders

Create a process to continually update standards

6.3 1.5 hrs

Input

  • The list of work products and its owners.

Output

  • A documented work product update process.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

The image shows the screenshot of the Table of Contents with the Standards Update Process highlighted.

Step 1 - Facilitate

Download the standards update process template and hold a working session to customize the best practice process to your organization’s needs.

Download the Architecture Standards Update Process Template

Step 2 - Summarize

Summarize the objectives and the process flow in the EA governance framework document.

Update the EA Governance Framework Template

Create architectural standards to minimize transaction costs

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

INSPRO01 didn’t maintain any centralized standards and each project had its own solution/design work products based on the preference of the architect on the project. This led to multiple standards across the organization.

Lack of consistency in architectural deliverables made the information hand-offs expensive.

Complication

INSPRO01 didn’t maintain the architectural documents in a central repository and the information was scattered across multiple project folders.

This caused key stakeholders to make decisions based on incomplete information and resulted in constant revisions as new information became available.

Result

Info-Tech recommended that the EA team identify and standardize the various EA work products so that information was collected in a consistent manner across the organization.

The team also recommended an information taxonomy to store the architectural deliverables and other collateral.

This resulted in increased consistency and standardization leading to efficiency gains.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • Identify and standardize EA work products.
  • Classify the architectural standards.
  • Identify the custodian of standards.
  • Update the standards.

Outcomes

  • A standardized set of EA work products
  • A way to categorize and store EA work products
  • A defined method of updating standards

Phase 7

Communication Plan

Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

Communication Plan

  1. Current state of EA governance
  2. EA fundamentals
  3. Engagement model
  4. EA governing bodies
  5. EA policy
  6. Architectural standards
  7. Communication Plan

This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
  • Identify stakeholders
  • Create a communication plan

This step involves the following participants:

  • Head of Enterprise Architecture
  • Enterprise Architects
  • Domain Architects
  • Solution Architects

Outcomes of this step

  • Communication Plan
  • EA Governance Framework

Info-Tech Insight

By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail – maximize the likelihood of success for EA governance by engaging the relevant stakeholders and communicating the changes.

Phase 7 guided implementation

Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

Guided Implementation 6: Operationalize the EA governance framework

Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

Step 7.1: Create a Communication Plan

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Discuss how to communicate changes to stakeholders.
  • Discuss the purposes and benefits of the EA governance framework.

Then complete these activities…

  • Identify the stakeholders affected by the EA governance transformations.
  • List the benefits of the proposed EA governance initiative.
  • Create a plan to communicate the changes to impacted stakeholders.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template

Step 7.2: Review the Communication Plan

Start with an analyst kick-off call:

  • Review the communication plan and gather feedback on the proposed stakeholders.
  • Confer about the various methods of communicating change in an organization.
  • Discuss the uses of the EA Governance Framework.

Then complete these activities…

  • Refine your communication plan and use it to engage with stakeholders to better serve customers.
  • Create the EA Governance Framework to accompany the communication plan in engaging stakeholders to better understand the value of EA.

With these tools & templates:

  • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
  • EA Governance Framework Template

Communicate changes to stakeholders

The changes made to the EA governance components need to be reviewed, approved, and communicated to all of the impacted stakeholders.

Deliverables to be reviewed:

  • Fundamentals
    • Vision and Mission
    • Goals and Measures
    • Principles
  • Architecture review process
  • Assessment checklists
  • Policy Governing body charters
  • Architectural standards

Deliverable Review Process:

Step 1: Hold a meeting with stakeholders to review, refine, and agree on the changes.

Step 2: Obtain an official approval from the stakeholders.

Step 3: Communicate the changes to the impacted stakeholders.

Communicate the changes by creating an EA governance framework and communication plan

7.1 3 hrs

Input

  • EA governance deliverables.

Output

  • EA Governance Framework
  • Communication Plan.

Materials

  • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

Participants

  • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

Instructions:

Hold a working session with the participants to create the EA governance framework as well as the communication plan. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

  1. EA Governance Framework:
    1. The EA Governance Framework is a document that will help reference and cite all the materials created from this blueprint. Follow the instructions on the framework to complete.
  2. Communication Plan:
    1. Identify the stakeholders based on the EA governance deliverables.
    2. For each stakeholder identified, complete the “Communication Matrix” section in the EA Governance Communication Plan Template. Fill out the section based on the instructions in the template.
    3. As the stakeholders are identified based on the “Communication Matrix,” use the EA Governance Framework document to communicate the changes.

Download the EA Governance Communication Plan Template and EA Governance Framework Template for additional instructions and to document your activities in this phase.

Maximize the likelihood of success by communicating changes

Case Study

Industry Insurance

Source Info-Tech

Situation

The EA group followed Info-Tech’s methodology to assess the current state and has identified areas for improvement.

Best practices were adopted to fill the gaps identified.

The team planned to communicate the changes to the technology leadership team and get approvals.

As the EA team tried to roll out changes, they encountered resistance from various IT teams.

Complication

The team was not sure of how to communicate the changes to the business stakeholders.

Result

Info-Tech has helped the team conduct a thorough stakeholder analysis to identify all the stakeholders who would be impacted by the changes to the architecture governance framework.

A comprehensive communication plan was developed that leveraged traditional email blasts, town hall meetings, and non-traditional methods such as team blogs.

The team executed the communication plan and was able to manage the change effectively.

If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

  • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
  • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
  • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Key Activities

  • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative.
  • Identify stakeholders.
  • Create a communication plan.
  • Compile the materials created in the blueprint to better communicate the value of EA governance.

Outcomes

  • Communication plan
  • EA governance framework

Bibliography

Government of British Columbia. “Architecture and Standards Review Board.” Government of British Columbia. 2015. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.gov.bc.ca/cio/standards/asrb.page >

Hopkins, Brian. “The Essential EA Toolkit Part 3 – An Architecture Governance Process.” Cio.com. Oct 2010. Web. April 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2372450/enterprise-architecture/the-essential-ea-toolkit-part-3---an-architecture-governance-process.html >

Kantor, Bill. “How to Design a Successful RACI Project Plan.” CIO.com. May 2012. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2395825/project-management/how-to-design-a-successful-raci-project-plan.html >

Sapient. “MIT Enterprise Architecture Guide.” Sapient. Sep 2004. Web. Jan 2016. < http://web.mit.edu/itag/eag/FullEnterpriseArchitectureGuide0.1.pdf >

TOGAF. “Chapter 41: Architecture Repository.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap41.html >

TOGAF. “Chapter 48: Architecture Compliance.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap48.html >

TOGAF. “Version 9.1.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/

United States Secret Service. “Enterprise Architecture Review Board.” United States Secret Service. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/toolkit/pdf/ID191.pdf >

Virginia Information Technologies Agency. “Enterprise Architecture Policy.” Commonwealth of Virginia. Jul 2006. Web. Jan 2016. < https://www.vita.virginia.gov/uploadedfiles/vita_main_public/library/eapolicy200-00.pdf >

Research contributors and experts

Alan Mitchell, Senior Manager, Global Cities Centre of Excellence, KPMG

Alan Mitchell has held numerous consulting positions before his role in Global Cities Centre of Excellence for KPMG. As a Consultant, he has had over 10 years of experience working with enterprise architecture related engagements. Further, he worked extensively with the public sector and prides himself on his knowledge of governance and how governance can generate value for an organization.

Ian Gilmour, Associate Partner, EA advisory services, KPMG

Ian Gilmour is the global lead for KPMG’s enterprise architecture method and Chief Architect for the KPMG Enterprise Reference Architecture for Health and Human Services. He has over 20 years of business design experience using enterprise architecture techniques. The key service areas that Ian focuses on are business architecture, IT-enabled business transformation, application portfolio rationalization, and the development of an enterprise architecture capability within client organizations.

Djamel Djemaoun Hamidson, Senior Enterprise Architect, CBC/Radio-Canada

Djamel Djemaoun is the Senior Enterprise Architect for CBC/Radio-Canada. He has over 15 years of Enterprise Architecture experience. Djamel’s areas of special include service-oriented architecture, enterprise architecture integration, business process management, business analytics, data modeling and analysis, and security and risk management.

Sterling Bjorndahl, Director of Operations, eHealth Saskatchewan

Sterling Bjorndahl is now the Action CIO for the Sun Country Regional Health Authority, and also assisting eHealth Saskatchewan grow its customer relationship management program. Sterling’s areas of expertise include IT strategy, enterprise architecture, ITIL, and business process management. He serves as the Chair on the Board of Directors for Gardiner Park Child Care.

Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect

Huw Morgan has 10+ years experience as a Vice President or Chief Technology Officer in Canadian internet companies. As well, he possesses 20+ years experience in general IT management. Huw’s areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, integration, e-commerce, and business intelligence.

Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture at Canada Mortgage Housing Corporation

Serge Parisien is a seasoned IT leader with over 25 years of experience in the field of information technology governance and systems development in both the private and public sectors. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, strategy, and project management.

Alex Coleman, Chief Information Officer at Saskatchewan Workers’ Compensation Board

Alex Coleman is a strategic, innovative, and results-driven business leader with a proven track record of 20+ years’ experience planning, developing, and implementing global business and technology solutions across multiple industries in the private, public, and not-for-profit sectors. Alex’s expertise includes program management, integration, and project management.

L.C. (Skip) Lumley , Student of Enterprise and Business Architecture

Skip Lumley was formerly a Senior Principle at KPMG Canada. He is now post-career and spends his time helping move enterprise business architecture practices forward. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture program implementation and public sector enterprise architecture business development.

Additional contributors

  • Tim Gangwish, Enterprise Architect at Elavon
  • Darryl Garmon, Senior Vice President at Elavon
  • Steve Ranaghan, EMEIA business engagement at Fujitsu

Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}524|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $10,399 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Users are demanding more valuable web functionalities and improved access to your website services. They are expecting development teams to keep up with their changing needs.
  • The criteria of user acceptance and satisfaction involves more than an aesthetically pleasing user interface (UI). It also includes how emotionally attached the user is to the website and how it accommodates user behaviors.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Complication

  • Organizations are focusing too much on the UI when they optimize the user experience of their websites. The UI is only one of many components involved in successful websites with good user experience.
  • User experience (UX) is often an afterthought in development, risking late and costly fixes to improve end-user reception after deployment.

Insights

  • Organizations often misinterpret UX as UI. In fact, UX incorporates both the functional and emotional needs of the user, going beyond the website’s UI.
  • Human behaviors and tendencies are commonly left out of the define and design phases of website development, putting user satisfaction and adoption at risk.

Impact and Result

  • Gain a deep understanding of user needs and behaviors. Become familiar with the human behaviors, emotions, and pain points of your users in order to shortlist the design elements and website functions that will receive the highest user satisfaction.
  • Perform a comprehensive website review. Leverage satisfaction surveys, user feedback, and user monitoring tools (e.g. heat maps) to reveal high-level UX issues. Use these insights to drill down into the execution and composition of your website to identify the root causes of issues.
  • Incorporate modern UX trends in your design. New web technologies are continuously emerging in the industry to enhance user experience. Stay updated on today’s UX trends and validate their fit for the specific needs of your target audience.

Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your website, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and discover the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Define UX requirements

Reveal the opportunities to heighten the user experience of your website through a deep understanding of the behaviors, emotions, and needs of your end users in order to design a receptive and valuable website.

  • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 1: Define UX Requirements
  • Website Design Document Template

2. Design UX-driven website

Design a satisfying and receptive website by leveraging industry best practices and modern UX trends and ensuring the website is supported with reliable and scalable data and infrastructure.

  • Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value – Phase 2: Design UX-Driven Website
[infographic]

Workshop: Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Define Your UX Requirements

The Purpose

List the business objectives of your website.

Describe your user personas, use cases, and user workflow.

Identify current UX issues through simulations, website design, and system reviews.

Key Benefits Achieved

Strong understanding of the business goals of your website.

Knowledge of the behaviors and needs of your website’s users.

Realization of the root causes behind the UX issues of your website.

Activities

1.1 Define the business objectives for the website you want to optimize

1.2 Define your end-user personas and map them to use cases

1.3 Build your website user workflow

1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis of your website to drive out UX issues

1.5 Gauge the UX competencies of your web development team

1.6 Simulate your user workflow to identify the steps driving down UX

1.7 Assess the composition and construction of your website

1.8 Understand the execution of your website with a system architecture

1.9 Pinpoint the technical reason behind your UX issues

1.10 Clarify and prioritize your UX issues

Outputs

Business objectives

End-user personas and use cases

User workflows

Website SWOT analysis

UX competency assessment

User workflow simulation

Website design assessment

Current state of web system architecture

Gap analysis of web system architecture

Prioritized UX issues

2 Design Your UX-Driven Website

The Purpose

Design wireframes and storyboards to be aligned to high priority use cases.

Design a web system architecture that can sufficiently support the website.

Identify UX metrics to gauge the success of the website.

Establish a website design process flow.

Key Benefits Achieved

Implementation of key design elements and website functions that users will find stimulating and valuable.

Optimized web system architecture to better support the website.

Website design process aligned to your current context.

Rollout plan for your UX optimization initiatives.

Activities

2.1 Define the roles of your UX development team

2.2 Build your wireframes and user storyboards

2.3 Design the target state of your web environment

2.4 List your UX metrics

2.5 Draw your website design process flow

2.6 Define your UX optimization roadmap

2.7 Identify and engage your stakeholders

Outputs

Roles of UX development team

Wireframes and user storyboards

Target state of web system architecture

List of UX metrics

List of your suppliers, inputs, processes, outputs, and customers

Website design process flow

UX optimization rollout roadmap

Safety as a secondary consideration

  • Large vertical image:
  • member rating overall impact: Very High
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A

This is a story that should make you perk up.

I know of a department that was eager to launch their new product. The strain was severe. The board was breathing down their necks. Rivals were catching up (or so they thought).

What did they do?

"Let's get this thing live, prove the market wants it, then we'll circle back and handle all the security and stability backlog items." For the product owner, at the time, that seemed the right thing to do.

They were hacked 48 hours after going live.

Customer information was stolen. The brand's reputation suffered. The decision led to a months-long legal nightmare. And they still had to completely rebuild the system. Making stability and security bolt-on items is never a good idea.

The true price of "fix it later"

See, I understand. When the product owner is pressing for user experience enhancements and you're running out of time for launch, it's easy to overlook those "non-functional requirements." Yet, we should avoid blaming the product owner. The PO is under pressure from many stakeholders, and a delayed launch may also come with significant costs.

Load balancing isn't visible to customers, after all. Penetration testing doesn't excite them. Failure mechanisms don't matter to them. This statement is true until a malfunction impacts a client. Then it suddenly becomes the most important thing in the world.

However, I know that ignoring non-functional requirements (NFRs) can lead to failed businesses (or business lines). This elevates these issues beyond mere technical inconveniences. NFRs are designed with the client in mind.

Look at it this way. When your system crashes during periods of high traffic, how does the user experience change? How satisfied are customers when their personal information is stolen? When it takes 30 seconds for your website to load, how does that conversion rate look?

Let me expose you to some consultant figures. The average cost of IT outages is $5,600 per minute, according to a 2014 Gartner study. That figure can rise to $300,000 per hour for larger businesses. The reality is that in your department, you will rarely reach these numbers. When we look at current (2020-2025) and expected (2026) trends, the typical operational loss numbers in international commercial banking or insurance are closer to 100K for high-impact incidents that are handled within 2–3 hours.

Obviously, your numbers will vary. And if you don't know what your costs are, now would be a good time to discover that. This does not imply that you should simply accept the risks associated with such situations. You must fix or mitigate such opportunities for hackers to get in. Do so at the appropriate cost for your business.

Data breaches are a unique phenomenon. According to IBM's Cost of a Data Breach Report 2025, a data breach typically costs $4.44 million, and detecting and containing it takes an average of 241 days. Some preview data from the 2025 report include that 97% of organizations that reported on the study indicated that they lacked access controls for their AI systems. That means that many companies don't even have the basics in order. And AI-related breaches are just going to accelerate. AI security defenses will help lower the cost of such breaches.

Despite the decreasing cost of these breaches, I anticipate an increase in their frequency in the upcoming years.

This means that non-functional requirements in terms of security and resilience should take a more prominent place in the prioritizations. Your client depends on your systems being safe, resilient, and performant.

The blind spot in leadership

And yet, this is where some leaders make mistakes. I have the impression they believe that client-focused design means more functionality and elegant interfaces. They prioritize user experience enhancements over system reliability.

I want to share a key fact that distinguishes successful businesses: customers desire more than just a good product. It must always function for them. And that means following certain procedures. They are not there to hamper you; they are there to retain customers.

88% of online shoppers are less likely to visit a website again after a negative experience, according to research from Forrester. Amazon found that they lose 1% of sales for every 100 ms of latency. That 100 milliseconds adds up to millions of lost profits when billions of dollars are at stake.

You run the risk of more than just technical difficulties when you deprioritize safety. Customer trust, revenue stability, competitive advantage, adherence to the law, costs, and team morale are all at stake.

The "happy flow" trap is costing you revenue.

Allow me to illustrate what I see happening during development cycles.

The team tests the happy flow. The user successfully logs in. The user navigates with ease. The user makes the purchase without any problems. The user logs off without incident.

"Excellent! Publish it!"

However, what occurs if 1000 users attempt to log in at once? What occurs if an attempt is made to insert malicious code into your contact form? During a transaction, what happens if your database connection fails?

These are not extreme situations. These are real-life occurrences.

Fifty percent of data center managers and operators reported having an impactful outage in the previous three years, according to the Uptime Institute's 2025 Global Data Center Survey. Note that this is at the infra level. The biggest contributor is power outages. What role does power play in ensuring a smooth flow? Power will not always flow as you want it, so plan for lack of power and for spikes.

With regard to software failures, the spread of possible causes widens. AI is a big contributor. AI is typically brought in to accelerate development and assist in coding. But it tends to introduce subtle bugs and vulnerabilities that a seasoned developer has to review and solve.

Another upcoming article will discuss how faster release cycles often lead to a rush in testing. This should not be the case; by spending some time automating your (non-)regression test bank, you will gain speed. But you have to invest time in building the test suite.

Can your system handle success? This question should keep every executive awake at night.

I've witnessed businesses invest millions in advertising campaigns to drive traffic to systems that fail due to their success. Consider describing to your board how your greatest marketing victory became your worst operational mishap.

Managing traffic spikes is only one aspect of load balancing. It is about ensuring that your business can handle opportunities without being overwhelmed.

The mindset that transforms everything

Let's now address the most pressing issue: security.

The majority of leaders consider security to be like insurance, something you hope you never need. The fact that security is more than just protection, however, will alter the way you approach every project. It's approval to develop.

According to the Ponemon Institute's 2025 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report, the average annualized cost of insider threats, defined as employee negligence, criminal insiders, and credential thieves, has risen to $17.4 million per incident, up from $15.4 million in 2022. The number of discovered and analyzed incidents increased from 3,269 in 2018 to 7,868 in 2025 research studies. 

Cybersecurity Ventures predicts that cybercrime will cost the global economy $10.5 trillion annually by 2025.

The most fascinating thing, though, is that companies that invest in proactive security see measurable outcomes. Organizations that allocate over 10% of their IT budget to cybersecurity have a 2.5-fold higher chance of experiencing no security incidents than those that allocate less than 1%, per Deloitte's Future of Cyber Survey.

By hardening your systems against common attack vectors, you can scale quickly without worrying about the future. You can handle sensitive data with confidence, enter new markets without fear, establish partnerships that require trust, and focus on innovation instead of crisis management.

The non-functional needs that genuinely generate income

Allow me to explain this in a way that will satisfy your CFO.

Retention is equal to reliability. Customers return when a system functions reliably (given you sell items they want). The Harvard Business Review claims that a 5% increase in customer retention rates boosts profits by 25% to 95%. It is five to twenty-five times less expensive to retain customers than to acquire new ones.

Scalability is equal to security. Secure systems can handle larger client volumes, more sensitive data, and higher-value transactions. 69% of board members and C-suite executives think that privacy and cyber risks could affect their company's ability to grow, according to PwC.

Profit is equal to performance. You lose conversions for every second of load time. Google discovered that the likelihood of a bounce rises by 32% as page load time increases from 1 to 3 seconds. It increases by 90% from 1 second to 5 seconds. Walmart discovered that every second improvement in page load time led to a 2% increase in conversions.

Reputation is equal to resilience. Guess which company benefits when your system works while your competitors' systems fail? Failures reduce trust. 71% of consumers will actively advocate against companies they don't trust, and 67% of consumers will stop purchasing from them, according to Edelman's 2023 Trust Barometer. While the 2025 report does not present comparative numbers, distrust impacting consumer behavior is likely to be even more prevalent. 

The structure that reverses the script

Reframe this discussion with your executives and team

  • The question we should not ask is, "Can we afford to build this right?" but rather, "Can we afford not to?" This consideration is crucial because we risk losing customers at every obstacle they encounter. 
  • Non-functional requirements should be viewed as competitive advantages rather than obstructions. If it suddenly does not work, the customer walks away.
  • Consider viewing system reliability as a profit center instead of a cost center. When a customer knows it will work, they will order again and refer a friend.

The numbers support this point. Businesses that invest in operational resilience see three times higher profit margins and 2.5 times higher revenue growth than their counterparts, according to McKinsey's 2023 State of Organizations report. In 2025 we see a focus on AI, but the point remains.

These metrics will grab the attention when you're presenting them.

Although the average cost of downtime varies by industry, it is always high. 

The impact of a security breach on customer lifetime value is equally uncomfortable. Following a data breach, 78% of consumers will cease interacting with a brand online, and 36% will never do so again, according to Ping Identity's 2023 Consumer Identity Breach Report.

Every second that the system is unavailable results in a rapidly mounting loss of money. That's about $3,170 per minute of full downtime for a business that makes $100 million a year. We're talking about $31,700 per minute for billion-dollar businesses. Again, your experience may differ, but it's important to note that this cost is often unseen yet undeniable. If you want to calculate this more granularly, then I have a calculation method for you that is easy to implement.

There is a discernible trend in the cost of rebuilding versus building correctly the first time. Resolving a problem in production can cost four to five times as much as fixing it during design, and it can cost up to 100 times as much as fixing it during the requirements and design phase, according to IBM's Systems Sciences Institute.

The plan of action that truly works

This is what you should do right away.

Please begin by reviewing your current primary systems. When they're under stress, what happens? What occurs if they are attacked? What occurs if they don't work? 40% of businesses that suffer a significant system failure never reopen, although only 23% of organizations have tested their disaster recovery plans in the previous year, according to Gartner. Companies we work with test their systems at least once per year. If the results are unsatisfactory, we conduct a retest to ensure they meet our standards.

Next, please determine the actual cost of addressing issues at a later stage. Add in the costs of customer attrition, security breaches, downtime, and reconstruction. To lend credibility to your calculations, try to work out exact numbers for your company. Industry standards (like in this article) will give you indicators, but you need to know your figures.

Third, recast your non-functional needs as business needs. Consider focusing on strategies for managing success rather than solely discussing load balancing. Instead of discussing security testing, focus on revenue protection.

Fourth, consider safety when defining "done." Until a feature is dependable, secure, and scalable, it isn't considered complete. Projects that incorporate non-functional requirements from the outset have a threefold higher chance of success, per the Standish Group's 2023 Chaos Report.

Fifth, use system dependability as a differentiator in the marketplace. You're up when your rivals are down. You're safe when they're compromised.

The bottom line

I understand that resilience isn't sexy. I am aware that UI enhancements are more exciting than infrastructure resilience.

And yet, I know that businesses that prioritize safety will survive and lead after seeing others thrive and fail based on this one choice. Customers trust them. They are capable of scaling without breaking. Because they are confident that their systems can manage whatever comes next, they are the ones who get a good night's sleep.

Resilient organizations are twice as likely to surpass customer satisfaction goals and are 2.5 times more likely to achieve revenue growth of 10% or more.

Resilience represents the most significant competitive advantage. You have a choice. Just keep in mind that your clients are depending on you to do the job correctly.

Always happy to engage in a conversation.

Looking at Risk in a New Light: The Six Pillars of Vendor Risk Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}209|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

  • Moreso than at any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.
  • It is increasingly likely that one of an organization's vendors, or their n-party support vendors, will cause an incident. Organizations must protect themselves by creating better mechanisms to hold their n-party vendors accountable and validate that they comply.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential risk impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect your organization.
  • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware by changes, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant regulatory upheavals.

Impact and Result

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
  • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks with our Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool to manage potential impacts.

Looking at Risk in a New Light: The Six Pillars of Vendor Risk Management Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Looking at Risk in a New Light: The Six Pillars of Vendor Risk Management – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions to your organization

Use this research to identify and quantify the potential risk impacts caused by vendors. Utilize Info-Tech's approach to look at the impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

  • Looking at Risk in a New Light: The Six Pillars of Vendor Risk Management Storyboard

2. Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the impacts of negative vendor actions.

By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  • Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool
[infographic]

Further reading

Looking at Risk in a New Light: The Six Pillars of Vendor Risk Management

Approach vendor risk impact assessments from all perspectives.

Analyst Perspective

Organizations must comprehensively understand the impacts vendors may cause through different potential actions.

Frank Sewell

The risks from the vendor market have become more prevalent as the technologies and organizational strategies shift to a global direction. With this shift in risk comes a necessary perspective change to align with the greater likelihood of an incident occurring from vendors' (or one of their downstream support vendor's) negative actions.

Organizational leadership must become more aware of the increasing risks that engaging vendors impose. To do so, they need to make informed decisions, which can only be provided by engaging expert resources in their organizations to compile a comprehensive look at potential risk impacts.

Frank Sewell

Research Director, Vendor Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

More so than at any other time, our world is changing. As a result organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

It is increasingly likely that one of your vendors, or their n-party support vendors, will cause an incident. Organizations must protect themselves by creating better mechanisms to hold their n-party vendors accountable and validate that they comply.

Common Obstacles

Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential risk impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect your organization.

Organizational leadership is often taken unaware by changes, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant regulatory upheavals.

Info-Tech's Approach

Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks with our Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool to manage potential impacts.

Info-Tech Insight

Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to changes in the global market. Ongoing monitoring and continual assessment of vendors’ risks is crucial to avoiding negative impacts.

Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.`

6 components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.  Financial, Reputational, Operational, Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance.

This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

Out of Scope:
This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

The world is constantly changing

The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them.

When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities ensures continued long-term business success.

Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

62%

of IT professionals are more concerned about being a victim of ransomware than they were a year ago.

Info-Tech Tech Trends Survey 2022

82%

of Microsoft non-essential employees shifted to working from home in 2020, joining the 18% already remote.

Info-Tech Tech Trends Survey 2022

89%

of organizations invested in web conferencing technology to facilitate collaboration.

Info-Tech Tech Trends Survey 2022

Looking at Risk in a New Light:

the 6 Pillars of Vendor Risk Management

Vendor Risk

  • Financial

  • Strategic

  • Operational

  • Security

  • Reputational

  • Regulatory

  • Organizations must review their risk appetite and tolerance levels, considering their complete landscape.
  • Changing regulations, acquisitions, and events that affect global supply chains are current realities, not unlikely scenarios.
  • Prepare your vendor risk management for success using due diligence and scenario- based “What If” discussions to bring all the relevant parties to the table and educate your whole organization on risk factors.
Assessing Financial Risk Impacts

Strategic risks on a global scale

Odds are at least one of these is currently affecting your strategic plans

  • Vendor Acquisitions
  • Global Pandemic
  • Global Shortages
  • Gas Prices
  • Poor Vendor Performance
  • Travel Bans
  • War
  • Natural Disasters
  • Supply Chain Disruptions
  • Security Incidents

Make sure you have the right people at the table to identify and plan to manage impacts.

Assess internal and external operational risk impacts

Two sides of the same coin

Internal

  • Poorly vetted supplemental staff
  • Bad system configurations
  • Lack of relevant skills
  • Poor vendor performance
  • Failure to follow established processes
  • Weak contractual accountability
  • Unsupportable or end-of-life system components

External

  • Cyberattacks
  • Supply Chain Issues
  • Geo-Political Disruptions
  • Vendor Acquisitions
  • N-Party Non-Compliance
  • Vendor Fraud

Operational risk is the risk of losses caused by flawed or failed processes, policies, systems, or events that disrupt business operations.

Identify and manage security risk impacts on your organization

Due diligence will enable successful outcomes

  • Poor vendor performance
  • Vendor acquisition
  • Supply chain disruptions and shortages
  • N-party risk
  • Third-party risk

What your vendor associations say about you

Reputations that affect your brand: Bad customer reviews, breach of data, poor security posture, negative news articles, public lawsuits, poor performance.

Regulatory compliance

Consider implementing vendor management initiatives and practices in your organization to help gain compliance with your expanding vendor landscape.

Your organizational risks may be monitored but are your n-party vendors?

6 components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.  Financial, Reputational, Operational, Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance.

Review your expectations with your vendors and hold them accountable

Regulatory entities are looking beyond your organization’s internal compliance these days. Instead, they are more and more diving into your third-party and downstream relationships, particularly as awareness of downstream breaches increases globally.

  • Are you assessing your vendors regularly?
  • Are you validating those assessments?
  • Do your vendors have a map of their downstream support vendors?
  • Do they have the mechanisms to hold those downstream vendors accountable to your standards?

Identify and manage risks

Regulatory

Regulatory agencies are putting more enforcement around ESG practices across the globe. As a result, organizations will need to monitor the changing regulations and validate that their vendors and n-party support vendors are adhering to these regulations or face penalties for non-compliance.

Security-Data protection

Data protection remains an issue. Organizations should ensure that the data their vendors obtain remains protected throughout the vendor’s lifecycle, including post-termination. Otherwise, they could be monitoring for a data breach in perpetuity.

Mergers and acquisitions

More prominent vendors continuously buy smaller companies to control the market in the IT industry. Organizations should put protections in their contracts to ensure that an IT vendor’s acquisition does not put them in a relationship with someone that could cause them an issue.

Identify and manage risks

Poor vendor performance

Consider the impact of a vendor that fails to perform midway through the implementation. Organizations need to be able to manage the impact of replacing that vendor and cutting their losses rather than continuing to throw good money away after bad performance.

Supply chain disruptions and global shortages

Geopolitical disruptions and natural disasters have caused unprecedented interruptions to business. Incorporate forecasting of product and ongoing business continuity planning into your strategic plans to adapt as events unfold.

Poorly configured systems

Failing to ensure that your vendor-supported systems are properly configured and that your vendors are meeting your IT change control and configuration standards is more commonplace than expected. Proper oversight and management of your support vendors is crucial to ensure they are meeting expectations in this regard.

What to look for

Identify potential risk impacts

  • Is there a record of complaints against the vendor from their employees or customers?
  • Is the vendor financially sound, with the resources to support your needs?
  • Has the vendor been cited for regulatory compliance issues in the past?
  • Does the vendor have a comprehensive list of their n-party vendor partners?
    • Are they willing to accept appropriate contractual protections regarding them?
  • Does the vendor self-audit, or do they use a vetted third-party audit firm to issue a SOC report annually?
  • Does the vendor operate in regions known for instability?
  • Is the vendor willing to make concessions on contractual protections, or are they only offering one-sided agreements with as-is warranties?

Prepare your vendor risk management for success

Due diligence will enable successful outcomes.

  1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
  2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
  3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
  4. Use existing resources.
  5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
  6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy-in.
  7. Normalize the process long term with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.
  8. (Adapted from COSO)

How to assess third-party risk

  1. Review organizational risks

    Understand the organizations risks to prepare for the “What If” game exercise.
  2. Identify and understand potential risks

    Play the “What If” game with the right people at the table.
  3. Create a risk profile packet for leadership

    Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
  4. Validate the risks

    Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
  5. Plan to manage the risks

    Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
  6. Communicate the plan

    It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
  7. Enact the plan

    Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

Adapted from Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance

Insight summary

Risk impacts often come from unexpected places and have significant consequences.

Knowing who your vendors are using for their support and supply chain could be crucial in eliminating the risk of non-compliance for your organization.

Having a plan to identify and validate the regulatory compliance of your vendors is a must for any organization to avoid penalties.

Insight 1

Organizations’ strategic plans need to be adaptable to avoid vendors’ negative actions causing an expedited shift in priorities.

For example, Philips’ recall of ventilators impacted its products and the availability of its competitors’ products as demand overwhelmed the market.

Insight 2

Organizations often fail to understand how n-party vendors could place them in non-compliance.

Even if you know your complete third-party vendor landscape, you may not be aware of the downstream vendors in play. Ensure that you get visibility into this space as well, and hold your direct vendors accountable for the actions of their vendors.

Insight 3

Organizations need to know where their data lives and ensure it is protected.

Make sure you know which vendors are accessing/storing your data, where they are keeping it, and that you can get it back and have the vendors destroy it when the relationship is over. Without adequate protections throughout the lifecycle of the vendor, you could be monitoring for breaches in perpetuity.

Insight summary

Assessing financial impacts is an ongoing, educative, and collaborative multidisciplinary process that vendor management initiatives are uniquely designed to coordinate and manage for organizations.

Operational risk impacts often come from unexpected places and have unforeseen impacts. Knowing where your vendors place in critical business processes and those vendors' business continuity plans concerning your organization should be a priority for those managing the vendors.

Insight 4

Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the rapidly changing online environments and recognize how their partnerships and subcontractors’ actions can affect their brand.

For example, do you understand how a simple news article raises your profile for short-term and long-term adverse events?

Insight 5

Organizations fail to plan for vendor acquisitions appropriately.

Vendors routinely get acquired in the IT space. Does your organization have appropriate safeguards from inadvertently entering a negative relationship? Do you have plans for replacing critical vendors purchased in such a manner?

Insight 6

Vendors are becoming more and more crucial to organizations’ overall operations, and most organizations have a poor understanding of the potential impacts they represent.

Is your vendor solvent? Do they have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has their long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Are they unique in their space?

Identifying vendor risk

Who should be included in the discussion?

  • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
  • Getting input from operational experts at your organization will enhance your business's long-term potential for success.
  • Involving those who directly manage vendors and understand the market will aid operational experts in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying emerging potential strategic partners.
  • Make sure security, risk, and compliance are all at the table. These departments all look at risk from different angles for the business and give valuable insight collectively.
  • Organizations have a wealth of experience in their marketing departments that can help identify real-world scenarios of negative actions.

See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

Review your risk management plans for new risks on a regular basis.

Keep in mind Risk =
Likelihood x Impact

(R=L*I).

Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is becoming closer to 100% as threat actors become more prevalent.

Managing vendor risk impacts

How could your vendors impact your organization?

  • Review vendors’ downstream connections to understand thoroughly who you are in business with
  • Institute continuous vendor lifecycle management
  • Develop IT risk governance and change control
  • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets
  • Monitor and schedule contract renewals and new service/module negotiations
  • Perform business alignment meetings to reassess relationships
  • Ensure strategic alignment in contracts
  • Review vendors’ business continuity plans and disaster recovery testing
  • Re-evaluate corporate policies frequently
  • Monitor your company’s and associated vendors’ online presence
  • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs
    • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time, and adjust your plans accordingly

Organizations must review their risk appetite and tolerance levels, considering their complete landscape.

Changing regulations, acquisitions, new security issues, and events that affect global supply chains are current realities, not unlikely scenarios.

Ongoing Improvement

Incorporating lessons learned.

  • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
  • When that happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
  • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
  • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and improve our plans going forward.

The "what if" game

1-3 hours

Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  1. Break into smaller groups (if too small, continue as a single group).
  2. Use the Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
  3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

Download the Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool

Input

  • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by impact
  • List of potential mitigations of the scenarios to reduce the risk

Output

  • Comprehensive risk profile on the specific vendor solution

Materials

  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Comprehensive Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

Participants

  • Vendor Management – Coordinator
  • Organizational Leadership
  • Operations Experts (SMEs)
  • Business Process Experts
  • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

High risk example from tool

High risk example from Tool.  Shows sample questions to ask to identify impacts, their associated score, weight, and comments or notes.

Note: Even though a few items are “scored” they have not been added to the overall weight, signaling that the company has noted but does not necessarily hold them against the vendor.

How to mitigate:

  • Contractually insist that the vendor have a third-party security audit performed annually with the stipulation that they will not denigrate below your acceptable standards.
  • At renewal negotiate better contractual terms and protections for your organization.

Low risk example from tool

Low risk example from Tool.  Shows sample questions to ask to identify impacts, their associated score, weight, and comments or notes.

Summary

Seek to understand all potential risk impacts to better prepare your organization for success.

  • Organizations need to understand and map out their entire vendor landscape.
  • Understand where all your data lives and how you can control it throughout the vendor lifecycle.
  • Organizations need to be realistic about the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global world.
  • Those organizations that consistently follow their established risk-assessment and due-diligence processes are better positioned to avoid penalties.
  • Understand how your vendors prioritize your organization in their business continuity processes.
  • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market and your organization.
  • Socialize the third-party vendor risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the organization.
  • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global markets and recognize how their partnerships and subcontracts affect their brand.
  • Incorporate lessons learned from prior incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more meaningful to respond to global changes in the market.

Organizations should increase the resources dedicated to monitoring the market as regulatory agencies continue to hold them more and more accountable.

Bibliography

Olaganathan, Rajee. “Impact of COVID-19 on airline industry and strategic plan for its recovery with special reference to data analytics technology.” Global Journal of Engineering and Technology Advances, vol 7, no 1, 2021, pp. 033-046.

Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012.

Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

Weak Cybersecurity is taking a toll on Small Businesses (tripwire.com)

SecureLink 2022 White Paper SL_Page_EA+PAM (rocketcdn.me)

Shared Assessments Member Poll March 2021 "Guide: Evolving Work Environments Impact of Covid-19 on Profile and Management of Third Parties“

“Cybersecurity only the tip of the iceberg for third-party risk management”. Help Net Security, April 21, 2021. Accessed: 2022-07-29.

“Third-Party Risk Management (TPRM) Managed Services”. Deloitte, 2022. Accessed: 2022-07-29.

“The Future of TPRM: Third Party Risk Management Predictions for 2022”. OneTrust, December 20th2021. Accessed 2022-07-29.

“Third Party Vendor definition”. Law Insider, Accessed 2022-07-29.

“Third Party Risk”. AWAKE Security, Accessed 2022-07-29.

Glidden, Donna. "Don't Underestimate the Need to Protect Your Brand in Publicity Clauses", Info-Tech Research Group, June 2022.

Greenaway, Jordan. "Managing Reputation Risk: A start-to-finish guide", Transmission Private, July 2022. Accessed June 2022.

Jagiello, Robert D, and Thomas T Hills. “Bad News Has Wings: Dread Risk Mediates Social Amplification in Risk Communication. ”Risk analysis : an official publication of the Society for Risk Analysis vol. 38,10 (2018): 2193-2207.doi:10.1111/risa.13117

Kenton, Will. "Brand Recognition", Investopedia, August 2021. Accessed June 2022. Lischer, Brian. "How Much Does it Cost to Rebrand Your Company?", Ignyte, October 2017. Accessed June 2022.

"Powerful Examples of How to Respond to Negative Reviews", Review Trackers, February 2022. Accessed June 2022.

"The CEO Reputation Premium: Gaining Advantage in the Engagement Era", Weber Shadwick, March 2015. Accessed on June 2022.

"Valuation of Trademarks: Everything You Need to Know",UpCounsel, 2022. Accessed June 2022.

Related Info-Tech Research

Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

Regulatory guidance and industry standards

Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}219|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

Moreso than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their strategic plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

A new global change will impact your organizational strategy at any given time. So, make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.
  • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.

Impact and Result

  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
  • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
  • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts to Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions on your strategic plans.

Use this research to identify and quantify the potential strategic impacts caused by vendors. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the strategic impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

  • Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

2. What If Vendor Strategic Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the strategic impacts of negative vendor actions

By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  • Strategic Risk Impact Tool
[infographic]

Further reading

Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

The world is in a perpetual state of change. Organizations need to build adaptive resiliency into their strategic plans to adjust to ever-changing market dynamics.

Analyst perspective

Organizations need to build flexible resiliency into their strategic plans to be able to adjust to ever-changing market dynamics.

This is a picture of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group

Like most people, organizations are poor at assessing the likelihood of risk. If the past few years have taught us anything, it is that the probability of a risk occurring is far more flexible in the formula Risk = Likelihood * Impact than we ever thought possible. The impacts of these risks have been catastrophic, and organizations need to be more adaptive in managing them to strengthen their strategic plans.

Frank Sewell,
Research Director, Vendor Management
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Moreso than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their strategic plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

A new global change will impact your organizational strategy at any given time. So, make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences.

Common Obstacles

Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential strategic impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes affect strategic plans.

Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility needed to adjust to significant market upheavals.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Impacts Tool.

Info-Tech Insight

Organizations must evolve their strategic risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global changes in the market. Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company strategies is imperative to achieving success.

Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

This image depicts a cube divided into six different coloured sections. The sections are labeled: Financial; Reputational; Operational; Strategic; Security; Regulatory & Compliance.

This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

Out of Scope:

This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

Strategic risk impacts

Potential losses to the organization due to risks to the strategic plan

  • In this blueprint, we’ll explore strategic risks (risks to the Strategic Plans of the organization) and their impacts.
  • Identify potentially disruptive events to assess the overall impact on organizations and implement adaptive measures to correct strategic plans.
This image depicts a cube divided into six different coloured sections. The section labeled Strategic is highlighted.

The world is constantly changing

The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them.

When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities ensures continued long-term business success.

Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

62%

of IT professionals are more concerned about being a victim of ransomware than they were a year ago.

82%

of Microsoft’s non-essential employees shifted to working from home in 2020, joining the 18% already remote.

89%

of organizations invested in web conferencing technology to facilitate collaboration.

Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends Survey 2022

Strategic risks on a global scale

Odds are at least one of these is currently affecting your strategic plans

  • Vendor Acquisitions
  • Global Pandemic
  • Global Shortages
  • Gas Prices
  • Poor Vendor Performance
  • Travel Bans
  • War
  • Natural Disasters
  • Supply Chain Disruptions
  • Security Incidents

Make sure you have the right people at the table to identify and plan to manage impacts.

Identify & manage strategic risks

Global Pandemic

Very few people could have predicted that a global pandemic would interrupt business on the scale experienced today. Organizations should look at their lessons learned and incorporate adaptable preparations into their strategic planning moving forward.

Vendor Acquisitions

The IT market is an ever-shifting environment. Larger companies often gobble up smaller ones to control their sectors. Incorporating plans to manage those shifts in ownership will be key to many strategic plans that depend on niche vendor solutions for success. Be sure to monitor the potentially affected markets on an ongoing cadence.

Global Shortages

Organizations need to accept that shortages will recur periodically and that preparing for them will significantly increase the success potential of long-term strategic plans. Understand what your business needs to stock for project needs and where those supplies are located, and plan how to rapidly access and distribute them as required if supply chain disruptions occur.

What to look for in vendors

Identify strategic risk impacts

  • A vendor acquires many smaller, seemingly irrelevant IT products. Suddenly their revenue model includes aggressive license compliance audits.
    • Ensure that your installed software meets license compliance requirements with good asset management practices.
    • Monitor the market for such acquisitions or news of audits hitting companies.
  • A vendor changes their primary business model from storage and hardware to becoming a self-proclaimed “professional services guru,” relying almost entirely on their name recognition to build their marketing.
    • Be wary of self-proclaimed experts and review their successes and failures with other organizations before adopting them into your business strategy.
    • Review the backgrounds their “experts” have and make sure they have the industry and technical skill sets to perform the services to the required level.

Not preparing for your growth can delay your goals

Why can’t I get a new laptop?

For example:

  • An IT professional services organization plans to take advantage of the growing work-from-home trend to expand its staff by 30% over the coming year.
  • Logically, this should include a review of the necessary tasks involved, including onboarding.
    • Suppose the company does not order enough equipment in preparation to cover the new staff plus routine replacement. In that case, this will delay the output of the new team members immeasurably as they wait for their company equipment and will delay existing staff whose equipment breaks, preventing them from getting back to work efficiently.

Sometimes an organization has the right mindset to take advantage of the changes in the market but can fail to plan for the particulars.

When your strategic plan changes, you need to revisit all the steps in the processes to ensure a successful outcome.

Strategic risks

Poor or uninformed business decisions can lead to organizational strategic failures

  • Supply chain disruptions and global shortages
    • Geopolitical disruptions and natural disasters have caused unprecedented interruptions to business. Incorporate forecasting of product and ongoing business continuity planning into your strategic plans to adapt as events unfold.
  • Poor vendor performance
    • Consider the impact of a vendor that fails to perform midway through the implementation. Organizations need to be able to manage the impact of replacing that vendor and cutting their losses rather than continuing to throw good money away after bad performance.
  • Vendor acquisitions
    • A lot of acquisition is going on in the market today. Large companies are buying competitors and either imposing new terms on customers or removing the competing products from the market. Prepare options for any strategy tied to a niche product.

It is important to identify potential risks to strategic plans to manage the risk and be agile enough in planning to adapt to the changing environments.

Info-Tech Insight
Few organizations are good at identifying risks to their strategic plan. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their strategies to those risks.

Prepare your strategic risk management for success

Due diligence will enable successful outcomes

  1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
  2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
  3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
  4. Use existing resources.
  5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
  6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy‑in.
  7. Normalize the process long term with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.

(Adapted from COSO)

How to assess strategic risk

  1. Review Organizational Strategy
    Understand the organizational strategy to prepare for the “What If” game exercise.
  2. Identify & Understand Potential Strategic Risks
    Play the “What If” game with the right people at the table.
  3. Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership
    Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
  4. Validate the Risks
    Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
  5. Plan to Manage the Risks
    Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
  6. Communicate the Plan
    It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
  7. Enact the Plan
    Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

Insight summary

Insight 1

Organizations build portions of their strategies around chosen vendors and should protect those plans against the risks of unforeseen acquisitions in the market.
Is your vendor solvent? Does it have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has its long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Is it unique in its space?

Insight 2

Organizations’ strategic plans need to be adaptable to avoid vendors’ negative actions causing an expedited shift in priorities.
For example, Philip's recall of ventilators impacted its products and the availability of its competitor’s products as demand overwhelmed the market.

Insight 3

Organizations need to become better at risk assessment and actively manage the identified risks to their strategic plans.
Few organizations are good at identifying risks to their strategic plan. As a result, almost none realistically plan to monitor, manage, and adapt their strategies to those risks.

Strategic risk impacts are often unanticipated, causing unforeseen downstream effects. Anticipating the potential changes in the global IT market and continuously monitoring vendors’ risk levels can help organizations modify their strategic alignment with the new norms.

Identifying strategic risk

Who should be included in the discussion

  • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
  • Getting input from operational experts at your organization will enhance the long-term potential for success of your strategies.
  • Involving those who directly manage vendors and understand the market will aid operational experts in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential strategic partners.

Review your strategic plans for new risks and evolving likelihood on a regular basis.

Keep in mind Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).

Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is a very flexible variable.

See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

Managing strategic risk impacts

What can we realistically do about the risks?

  • Review business continuity plans and disaster recovery testing.
  • Institute proper contract lifecycle management.
  • Re-evaluate corporate policies frequently.
  • Develop IT governance and change control.
  • Ensure strategic alignment in contracts.
  • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
    • Regularly review your strategic plans for new risks and evolving likelihood.
    • Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I)
      • Impact (I) tends to remain the same and be well understood, while Likelihood (L) turns out to be highly variable.
  • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
    • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time, and adjust your strategy based on the lessons.

Organizations need to be reviewing their strategic risk plans considering the likelihood of incidents in the global market.

Pandemics, extreme weather, and wars that affect global supply chains are a current reality, not unlikely scenarios.

Ongoing Improvement

Incorporating lessons learned

  • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
  • When it happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
  • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
  • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and improve our plans going forward.

The “what if” game

1-3 hours

Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

  1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
  2. Use the Strategic Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
  3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

Download the Strategic Risk Impact Tool

Input Output
  • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact
  • List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk
  • Comprehensive strategic risk profile on the specific vendor solution
Materials Participants
  • Whiteboard/flip charts
  • Strategic Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion
  • Vendor Management – Coordinator
  • Organizational Leadership
  • Operations Experts (SMEs)
  • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

Case Study

Airline Industry Strategic Adaptation

Industry: Airline

Impact categories: Pandemic, Lockdowns, Travel Bans, Increased Fuel Prices

  • In 2019 the airline industry yielded record profits of $35.5 billion.
  • In 2020 the pandemic devastated the industry with losses around $371 billion.
  • The industry leaders engaged experts to conduct a study on how the pandemic impacted them and propose measures to ensure the survival of their industry in the future after the pandemic.
  • They determined that “[p]recise decision-making based on data analytics is essential and crucial for an effective Covid-19 airline recovery plan.”

Results

The pandemic prompted systemic change to the overall strategic planning of the airline industry.

Summary

Be vigilant and adaptable to change

  • Organizations need to learn how to assess the likelihood of potential risks in the changing global world.
  • Those organizations that incorporate adaptive risk management processes can prepare their strategic plans for greater success.
  • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market.
  • Socialize the risk management process throughout the organization to heighten awareness and enable employees to help protect the strategic plan.
  • Incorporate lessons learned from incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

Organizations must evolve their strategic risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to global changes in the market.

Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company strategies is imperative to achieving success.

Related Info-Tech Research

Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization.
  • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
  • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
  • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
  • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk

This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
  • Customer maturity levels with Agile are low, with 67% of organizations using Agile for less than five years.
  • Customer competency levels with Agile are also low, with 84% of organizations stating they are below a high level of competency.
  • Contract disputes are the number one or two types of disputes faced by organizations across all industries.

Build an IT Risk Management Program

This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Build an IT Risk Management Program
  • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program, and increase risk management success.
  • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
  • Involve key stakeholders including the business senior management team to gain buy-in and to focus on IT risks most critical to the organization.

Bibliography

Olaganathan, Rajee. “Impact of COVID-19 on airline industry and strategic plan for its recovery with special reference to data analytics technology.” Global Journal of Engineering and Technology Advances, vol 7, no 1, 2021, pp. 033-046.

Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, 23 Aug. 2012.

Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

Research Contributors and Experts

  • Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Steven Jeffery
    Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Donna Glidden
    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
  • David Espinosa
    Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Rick Pittman
    Vice President, Research, Info-Tech Research Group
  • Patrick Philpot
    CISSP
  • Gaylon Stockman
    Vice President, Information Security
  • Jennifer Smith
    Senior Director

Measure IT Project Value

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}431|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $5,549 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
  • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
  • People treat benefits as a box to tick on the business case, deflating or inflating them to facilitate project approval.
  • Even if benefits are properly defined, they are usually forgotten once the project is underway.
  • Subsequent changes to project scope may impact the viability of the project’s business benefits, resulting in solutions that do not deliver expected value.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • It is rare for project teams or sponsors to be held accountable for managing and/or measuring benefits. The assumption is often that no one will ask if benefits have been realized after the project is closed.
  • The focus is largely on the project’s schedule, budget, and scope, with little attention paid to the value that the project is meant to deliver to the organization.
  • Without an objective stakeholder to hold people accountable for defining benefits and demonstrating their delivery, benefits will continue to be treated as red tape.
  • Sponsors will not take the time to define benefits properly, if at all. The project team will not take the time to ensure they are still achievable as the project progresses. When the project is complete, no one will investigate actual project success.

Impact and Result

  • The project sponsor and business unit leaders must own project benefits; IT is only accountable for delivering the solution.
  • IT can play a key role in this process by establishing and supporting a benefits realization process. They can help business unit leaders and sponsors define benefits properly, identify meaningful metrics, and report on benefits realization effectively.
  • The project management office is ideally suited to facilitate this process by providing tools and templates, and a consistent and comparable view across projects.
  • Project managers are accountable for delivering the project, not for delivering the benefits of the project itself. However, they must ensure that changes to project scope are assessed for impact on benefits viability.

Measure IT Project Value Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a benefits legitimacy practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Establish benefits legitimacy during portfolio Intake

This phase will help you define a benefits management process to help support effective benefits definition during portfolio intake.

  • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 1: Establish Benefits Legitimacy During Portfolio Intake
  • Project Sponsor Role Description Template
  • Benefits Commitment Form Template
  • Right-Sized Business Case Template

2. Maintain benefits legitimacy throughout project planning and execution

This phase will help you define a process for effective benefits management during project planning and the execution intake phase.

  • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 2: Maintain Benefits Legitimacy Throughout Project Planning and Execution
  • Project Benefits Documentation Workbook
  • Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template (PDF)
  • Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template (Visio)

3. Close the deal on project benefits

This phase will help you define a process for effectively tracking and reporting on benefits realization post-project.

  • Deliver Project Value With a Benefits Legitimacy Initiative – Phase 3: Close the Deal on Project Benefits
  • Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool
  • Benefits Lag Report Template
  • Benefits Legitimacy Handbook Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Measure IT Project Value

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Analyze the Current State of Benefits Management

The Purpose

Assess the current state of benefits management at your organization and establish a realistic target state.

Establish project and portfolio baselines for benefits management.

Key Benefits Achieved

Set achievable workshop goals and align stakeholder expectations.

Establish a solid foundation for benefits management success.

Activities

1.1 Introductions and overview.

1.2 Discuss attendee expectations and goals.

1.3 Complete Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard.

1.4 Perform right-wrong-confusing-missing analysis.

1.5 Define target state for benefits management.

1.6 Refine project levels.

Outputs

Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard report

Right-wrong-confusing-missing analysis

Stakeholder alignment around workshop goals and target state

Info-Tech’s Project Intake Classification Matrix

2 Establish Benefits Legitimacy During Portfolio Intake

The Purpose

Establish organizationally specific benefit metrics and KPIs.

Develop clear roles and accountabilities for benefits management.

Key Benefits Achieved

An articulation of project benefits and measurements.

Clear checkpoints for benefits communication during the project are defined.

Activities

2.1 Map the current portfolio intake process.

2.2 Establish project sponsor responsibilities and accountabilities for benefits management.

2.3 Develop organizationally specific benefit metrics and KPIs.

2.4 Integrate intake legitimacy into portfolio intake processes.

Outputs

Info-Tech’s Project Sponsor Role Description Template

Info-Tech’s Benefits Commitment Form Template

Intake legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

Intake legitimacy SOP

3 Maintain Benefits Legitimacy Throughout Project Planning and Execution

The Purpose

Develop a customized SOP for benefits management during project planning and execution.

Key Benefits Achieved

Ensure that all changes to the project have been recorded and benefits have been updated in preparation for deployment.

Updated benefits expectations are included in the final sign-off package.

Activities

3.1 Map current project management process and audit project management documentation.

3.2 Identify appropriate benefits control points.

3.3 Customize project management documentation to integrate benefits.

3.4 Develop a deployment legitimacy process flow.

Outputs

Customized project management toolkit

Info-Tech’s Project Benefits Documentation Workbook

Deployment of legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

Deployment of legitimacy SOP

4 Close the Deal on Project Benefits

The Purpose

Develop a post-project benefits realization process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Clear project sponsorship accountabilities for post-project benefits tracking and reporting.

A portfolio level benefits tracking tool for reporting on benefits attainment.

Activities

4.1 Identify appropriate benefits control points in the post-project process.

4.2 Configure Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool.

4.3 Define a post-project benefits reporting process.

4.4 Formalize protocol for reporting on, and course correcting, benefit lags.

4.5 Develop a post-project legitimacy process flow.

Outputs

Info-Tech’s Portfolio Benefits Tracking Tool

Post-Project legitimacy process flow and RASCI chart

Post-Project Legitimacy SOP

Info-Tech’s Benefits Legitimacy Handbook

Info-Tech’s Benefits Legitimacy Workflow Template

Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}321|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $2,339 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
  • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
  • When a significant security incident is discovered, usually very few details are known for certain. Nevertheless, the organization will need to say something to affected stakeholders.
  • Security incidents tend to be ongoing situations that last considerably longer than other types of crises, making communications a process rather than a one-time event.
  • Effective incident response communications require collaboration from: IT, Legal, PR, and HR – groups that often speak “different languages.”

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • There’s no such thing as successful incident response communications; strive instead for effective communications. There will always be some fallout after a security incident, but it can be effectively mitigated through honesty, transparency, and accountability.
  • Effective external communications begin with effective internal communications. Security Incident Response Team members come from departments that don’t usually work closely with each other. This means they often have different ways of thinking and speaking about issues. Be sure they are familiar with each other before a crisis occurs.
  • You won’t save face by withholding embarrassing details. Lying only makes a bad situation worse, but coming clean and acknowledging shortcomings (and how you’ve fixed them) can go a long way towards restoring stakeholders’ trust.

Impact and Result

  • Effective and efficient management of security incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities: communications must be integrated into each of these phases.
  • Understand that prior planning helps to take the guesswork out of incident response communications. By preparing for several different types of security incidents, the communications team will get used to working with each other, as well as learning what strategies are and are not effective. Remember, the communications team contains diverse members from various departments, and each may have different ideas about what information is important to release.

Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a security incident response communications plan, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Dive into communications planning

This phase addresses the benefits and challenges of incident response communications and offers advice on how to assemble a communications team and develop a threat escalation protocol.

  • Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program – Phase 1: Dive Into Communications Planning
  • Security Incident Management Plan

2. Develop your communications plan

This phase focuses on creating an internal and external communications plan, managing incident fallout, and conducting a post-incident review.

  • Master Your Security Incident Response Communications Program – Phase 2: Develop Your Communications Plan
  • Security Incident Response Interdepartmental Communications Template
  • Security Incident Communications Policy Template
  • Security Incident Communications Guidelines and Templates
  • Security Incident Metrics Tool
  • Tabletop Exercises Package
[infographic]

IT Risk management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}40|cart{/j2store}
  • Related Products: {j2store}40|crosssells{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
  • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
Mitigation is about balance: take a cost-focused approach to risk management.

Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}282|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
  • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
  • IT managers don’t know where to start when initiating a mobile program.
  • IT has tried mobile development in the past but didn't achieve success.
  • IT must initiate a mobile program quickly based on business priorities and needs a roadmap based on best practices.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Form factors and mobile devices won't drive success – business alignment and user experience will. Don't get caught up with the latest features in mobile devices.
  • Software emulation testing is not true testing. Get on the device and run your tests.
  • Cross form-factor testing cannot be optimized to run in parallel. Therefore, anticipate longer testing cycles for cross form-factor testing.

Impact and Result

  • Prepare your development, testing, and deployment teams for mobile development.
  • Get a realistic assessment of ROI for the launch of a mobile program.

Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Make the Case for a Mobile Program

Understand the current mobile ecosystem. Use this toolkit to help you initiate a mobile development program.

  • Storyboard: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

2. Assess Your Dev Process for Readiness

Review and evaluate your current application development process.

3. Prepare to Execute Your Mobile Program

Prioritize your mobile program based on your organization’s prioritization profile.

  • Mobile Program Tool

4. Communicate with Stakeholders

Summarize the execution of the mobile program.

  • Project Status Communication Worksheet
[infographic]

Workshop: Enter Into Mobile Development Without Confusion and Frustration

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Build your Future Mobile Development State

The Purpose

Understand the alignment of stakeholder objectives and priorities to mobile dev IT drivers.

Assess readiness of your organization for mobile dev.

Understand how to build your ideal mobile dev process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Identify and address the gaps in your existing app dev process.

Build your future mobile dev state.

Activities

1.1 Getting started

1.2 Assess your current state

1.3 Establish your future state

Outputs

List of key stakeholders

Stakeholder and IT driver mapping and assessment of current app dev process

List of practices to accommodate mobile dev

2 Prepare and Execute your Mobile Program

The Purpose

Assess the impact of mobile dev on your existing app dev process.

Prioritize your mobile program.

Understand the dev practice metrics to gauge success.

Key Benefits Achieved

Properly prepare for the execution of your mobile program.

Calculate the ROI of your mobile program.

Prioritize your mobile program with dependencies in mind.

Build a communication plan with stakeholders.

Activities

2.1 Conduct an impact analysis

2.2 Prepare to execute

2.3 Communicate with stakeholders

Outputs

Impact analysis of your mobile program and expected ROI

Mobile program order of execution and project dependencies mapping

List of dev practice metrics

Leadership Workshop Overview

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}475|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $69,299 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
  • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs

Leadership has evolved over time. The velocity of change has increased and leadership for the future looks different than the past.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Development of the leadership mind should never stop. This program will help IT leaders continue to craft their leadership competencies to navigate the ever-changing world in which we operate.

Impact and Result

  • Embrace and lead change through active sharing, transparency, and partnerships.
  • Encourage growth mindset to enhance innovative ideas and go past what has always been done.
  • Actively delegate responsibilities and opportunities that engage and develop team members to build on current skills and prepare for the future.

Leadership Workshop Overview Research & Tools

Start here – read the Workshop Overview

Read our concise Workshop Overview to find out how this program can support the development needs of your IT leadership teams.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Info-Tech Leadership Workshop Overview
[infographic]

Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
  • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
  • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
  • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
  • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
  • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

Impact and Result

  • Define roles and responsibilities.
  • Establish visibility.
  • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build a cost accountability framework

Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

  • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
  • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
  • Cloud Cost Management Policy
  • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

2. Establish visibility

Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

  • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

3. Define processes and procedures

Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

  • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
  • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
  • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
  • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

4. Build an implementation plan

Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

  • Cloud Cost Management Task List
[infographic]

Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

The Purpose

Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

Activities

1.1 Assess current state

1.2 Determine cloud cost model

1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

Outputs

Cloud cost management capability assessment

Cloud cost model

Roles & responsibilities

2 Establish Visibility

The Purpose

Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

Activities

2.1 Develop architectural patterns

2.2 Define dashboards and reports

2.3 Define account structure

2.4 Document tagging requirements

Outputs

Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

Dashboards and reports

Account structure

Tagging scheme

3 Define Processes & Procedures

The Purpose

Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

Key Benefits Achieved

Improved capability of reducing costs.

Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

Activities

3.1 Establish governance for tagging

3.2 Establish governance for costs

3.3 Define right-sizing process

3.4 Define purchasing process

3.5 Define notification and alerts

Outputs

Tagging policy

Cost control policy

Right-sizing process

Commitment purchasing process

Notifications and alerts

4 Build an Implementation Plan

The Purpose

Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

Activities

4.1 Document process interaction changes

4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

4.3 Build implementation roadmap

4.4 Build communication plan

Outputs

Changes to process interactions

Cloud cost program KPIs

Implementation roadmap

Communication plan

Manage End-User Devices

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}307|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $45,499 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Devices
  • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-devices
  • Desktop and mobile device management teams use separate tools and different processes.
  • People at all levels of IT are involved in device management.
  • Vendors are pushing unified endpoint management (UEM) products, and teams struggling with device management are hoping that UEM is their savior.
  • The number and variety of devices will only increase with the continued advance of mobility and emergence of the Internet of Things (IoT).

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Many problems can be solved by fixing roles, responsibilities, and process. Standardize so you can optimize.
  • UEM is not a silver bullet. Your current solution can image computers in less than 4 hours if you use lean images.
  • Done with, not done to. Getting input from the business will improve adoption, avoid frustration, and save everyone time.

Impact and Result

  • Define the benefits that you want to achieve and optimize based on those benefits.
  • Take an evolutionary, rather than revolutionary, approach to merging end-user support teams. Process and tool unity comes first.
  • Define the roles and responsibilities involved in end-user device management, and create a training plan to ensure everyone can execute their responsibilities.
  • Stop using device management practices from the era of Windows XP. Create a plan for lean images and app packages.

Manage End-User Devices Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize end-user device management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Identify the business and IT benefits of optimizing endpoint management

Get your desktop and mobile device support teams out of firefighting mode by identifying the real problem.

  • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 1: Identify the Business and IT Benefits
  • End-User Device Management Standard Operating Procedure
  • End-User Device Management Executive Presentation

2. Improve supporting teams and processes

Improve the day-to-day operations of your desktop and mobile device support teams through role definition, training, and process standardization.

  • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 2: Improve Supporting Teams and Processes
  • End-User Device Management Workflow Library (Visio)
  • End-User Device Management Workflow Library (PDF)

3. Improve supporting technologies

Stop using management tools and techniques from the Windows XP era. Save yourself, and your technicians, from needless pain.

  • Manage End-User Devices – Phase 3: Improve Supporting Technologies
[infographic]

Workshop: Manage End-User Devices

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Identify the Business and IT Benefits of Optimizing End-User Device Management

The Purpose

Identify how unified endpoint management (UEM) can improve the lives of the end user and of IT.

Key Benefits Achieved

Cutting through the vendor hype and aligning with business needs.

Activities

1.1 Identify benefits you can provide to stakeholders.

1.2 Identify business and IT goals in order to prioritize benefits.

1.3 Identify how to achieve benefits.

1.4 Define goals based on desired benefits.

Outputs

Executive presentation

2 Improve the Teams and Processes That Support End-User Device Management

The Purpose

Ensure that your teams have a consistent approach to end-user device management.

Key Benefits Achieved

Developed a standard approach to roles and responsibilities, to training, and to device management processes.

Activities

2.1 Align roles to your environment.

2.2 Assign architect-, engineer-, and administrator-level responsibilities.

2.3 Rationalize your responsibility matrix.

2.4 Ensure you have the necessary skills.

2.5 Define Tier 2 processes, including patch deployment, emergency patch deployment, device deployment, app deployment, and app packaging.

Outputs

List of roles involved in end-user device management

Responsibility matrix for end-user device management

End-user device management training plan

End-user device management standard operating procedure

Workflows and checklists of end-user device management processes

3 Improve the Technologies That Support End-User Device Management

The Purpose

Modernize the toolset used by IT to manage end-user devices.

Key Benefits Achieved

Saving time and resources for many standard device management processes.

Activities

3.1 Define the core image for each device/OS.

3.2 Define app packages.

3.3 Gather action items for improving the support technologies.

3.4 Create a roadmap for improving end-user device management.

3.5 Create a communication plan for improving end-user device management.

Outputs

Core image outline

Application package outline

End-user device management roadmap

End-user device management communication plan

Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}318|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $17,501 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
  • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
  • Vendor security risk management is a growing concern for many organizations. Whether suppliers or business partners, we often trust them with our most sensitive data and processes.
  • More and more regulations require vendor security risk management, and regulator expectations in this area are growing.
  • However, traditional approaches to vendor security assessments are seen by business partners and vendors as too onerous and are unsustainable for information security departments.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
  • Security assessments are time-consuming for both you and your vendors. Maximize the returns on your effort with a risk-based approach.
  • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic re-assessments.

Impact and Result

  • Develop an end-to-end security risk management process that includes assessments, risk treatment through contracts and monitoring, and periodic re-assessments.
  • Base your vendor assessments on the actual risks to your organization to ensure that your vendors are committed to the process and you have the internal resources to fully evaluate assessment results.
  • Understand your stakeholder needs and goals to foster support for vendor security risk management efforts.

Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a vendor security assessment service, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Define governance and process

Determine your business requirements and build your process to meet them.

  • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 1: Define Governance and Process
  • Vendor Security Policy Template
  • Vendor Security Process Template
  • Vendor Security Process Diagram (Visio)
  • Vendor Security Process Diagram (PDF)

2. Develop assessment methodology

Develop the specific procedures and tools required to assess vendor risk.

  • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 2: Develop Assessment Methodology
  • Service Risk Assessment Questionnaire
  • Vendor Security Questionnaire
  • Vendor Security Assessment Inventory

3. Deploy and monitor process

Implement the process and develop metrics to measure effectiveness.

  • Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service – Phase 3: Deploy and Monitor Process
  • Vendor Security Requirements Template
[infographic]

Workshop: Build a Vendor Security Assessment Service

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Define Governance and Process

The Purpose

Understand business and compliance requirements.

Identify roles and responsibilities.

Define the process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of key goals for process outcomes.

Documented service that leverages existing processes.

Activities

1.1 Review current processes and pain points.

1.2 Identify key stakeholders.

1.3 Define policy.

1.4 Develop process.

Outputs

RACI Matrix

Vendor Security Policy

Defined process

2 Define Methodology

The Purpose

Determine methodology for assessing procurement risk.

Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

Key Benefits Achieved

Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

Activities

2.1 Identify organizational security risk tolerance.

2.2 Develop risk treatment action plans.

2.3 Define schedule for re-assessments.

2.4 Develop methodology for assessing service risk.

Outputs

Security risk tolerance statement

Risk treatment matrix

Service Risk Questionnaire

3 Continue Methodology

The Purpose

Develop procedures for performing vendor security assessments.

Establish vendor inventory.

Key Benefits Achieved

Standardized, repeatable methodologies for supply chain security risk assessment.

Activities

3.1 Develop vendor security questionnaire.

3.2 Define procedures for vendor security assessments.

3.3 Customize the vendor security inventory.

Outputs

Vendor security questionnaire

Vendor security inventory

4 Deploy Process

The Purpose

Define risk treatment actions.

Deploy the process.

Monitor the process.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of how to treat different risks according to the risk tolerance.

Defined implementation strategy.

Activities

4.1 Define risk treatment action plans.

4.2 Develop implementation strategy.

4.3 Identify process metrics.

Outputs

Vendor security requirements

Understanding of required implementation plans

Metrics inventory

Assess the Viability of M365-O365 Security Add-Ons

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}251|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
  • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting

The technical side of IT security demands the best security possible, but the business side of running IT demands that you determine what is cost-effective and can still do the job. You likely shrugged off the early iterations of Microsoft’s security efforts, but you may have heard that things have changed. Where do you start in evaluating Microsoft’s security products in terms of effectiveness? The value proposition sounds tremendous to the CFO, “free” security as part of your corporate license, but how does it truly measure up and how do you articulate your findings to the business?

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Microsoft’s security products have improved to the point where they are often ranked competitively with mainstream security products. Depending on your organization’s licensing of Office 365/Microsoft 365, some of these products are included in what you’re already paying for. That value proposition is hard to deny.

Impact and Result

Determine what is important to the business, and in what order of priority.

Take a close look at your current solution and determine what are table stakes, what features you would like to have in its replacement, and what your current solution is missing.

Consider Microsoft’s security solutions using an objective methodology. Sentiment will still be a factor, but it shouldn’t dictate the decision you make for the good of the business.

Assess the Viability of M365/O365 Security Add-Ons Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to assess the viability of M365/O365 security add-ons. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four key steps to completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Review your current state

Examine what you are licensed for, what you are paying, what you need, and what your constraints are.

  • Microsoft 365/Office 365 Security Add-Ons Assessment Tool

2. Assess your needs

Determine what is “good enough” security and assess the needs of your organization.

3. Select your path

Decide what you will go with and start planning your next steps.

[infographic]

Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}563|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Organizations are unaware of the capabilities of web analytics tools and unsure how to leverage these new technologies to enhance their web experience.
  • Traditional solutions offer only information and data about the activity on the website. It is difficult for organizations to understand the customer motivations and behavioral patterns using the data.
  • In addition, there is an overwhelming number of vendors offering various solutions. Understanding which solution best fits your business needs is crucial to avoid overspending.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Understanding organizational goals and business objectives is essential in effectively leveraging web analytics.
  • It is easy to get lost in a sea of expensive web analytical tools. Choosing tools that align with the business objectives will keep the costs of customer acquisition and retention to a minimum.
  • Beyond selection and implementation, leveraging web analytic tools requires commitment from the organization to continuously monitor key KPIs to ensure good customer web experience.

Impact and Result

  • Understand what web analytic tools are and some key trends in the market space. Learn about top advanced analytic tools that help understand user behavior.
  • Discover top vendors in the market space and some of the top-level features they offer.
  • Understand how to use the metrics to gather critical insights about the website’s use and key initiatives for successful implementation.

Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Research & Tools

Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Storyboard – A deck outlining the importance of web analytic tools and how they can be leveraged to meet your business needs.

This research offers insight into web analytic tools, key trends in the market space, and an introduction to advanced web analytics techniques. Follow our five-step initiative to successfully select and implement web analytics tools and identify which baseline metrics to measure and continuously monitor for best results.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

  • Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy

Web analytics tools are the gateway to understanding customer behavior.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst Perspective

In today’s world, users want to consume concise content and information quickly. Websites have a limited time to prove their usefulness to a new user. Content needs to be as few clicks away from the user as possible. Analyzing user behavior using advanced analytics techniques can help website designers better understand their audience.

Organizations need to implement sophisticated analytics tools to track user data from their website. However, simply extracting data is not enough to understand the user motivation. A successful implementation of a web analytics tool will comprise both understanding what a customer does on the website and why the customer does what they do.

This research will introduce some fundamental and advanced analytics tools and provide insight into some of the vendors in the market space.

Photo of Sai Krishna Rajaramagopalan, Research Specialist, Applications − Enterprise Applications, Info-Tech Research Group. Sai Krishna Rajaramagopalan
Research Specialist, Applications − Enterprise Applications
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge
  • Web analytics solutions have emerged as applications that provide extensive information and data about users visiting your webpage. However, many organizations are unaware of the capabilities of these tools and unsure how to leverage these new technologies to enhance user experience.
Common Obstacles
  • Traditional solutions offer information and data about customers’ activity on the website but no insight into their motivations and behavioral patterns.
  • In addition, an overwhelming number of vendors are offering various solutions. Understanding which solution best fits your business needs is crucial to avoid overspending.
Info-Tech’s Approach
  • This research is aimed to help you understand what web analytic tools are and some key trends in the market space. Learn about top advanced analytic tools that help you understand user behavior. Discover top vendors in the market space and some of the high-level features offered.
  • This research also explains techniques and metrics to gather critical insights about your website’s use and will aid in understanding users’ motivations and patterns and better predict their behavior on the website.

Info-Tech Insight

It is easy to get lost in a sea of expensive web analytics tools. Choose tools that align with your business objectives to keep the costs of customer acquisition and retention to a minimum.

Ensure the success of your web analytics programs by following five simple steps

1. ORGANIZATIONAL GOALS

The first key step in implementing and succeeding with web analytics tools is to set clearly defined organizational goals, e.g. improving product sales.

3. KPI METRICS

Define key performance indicators (KPIs) that help track the organization’s performance, e.g. number of page visits, conversion rates, bounce rates.

5. REVIEW

Continuous improvement is essential to succeed in understanding customers. The world is a dynamic place, and you must constantly revise your organizational goals, business objectives, and KPIs to remain competitive.

Centerpiece representing the five surrounding steps.

2. BUSINESS OBJECTIVES

The next step is to lay out business objectives that help to achieve the organization’s goals, e.g. to increase customer leads, increase customer transactions, increase web traffic.

4. APPLICATION SELECTION

Understand the web analytics tool space and which combination of tools and vendors best fits the organization’s goals.

Web Analytics Introduction

Understand traditional and advanced tools and their capabilities.

Understanding web analytics

  • Web analytics is the branch of analytics that deals with the collection, reporting, and analysis of data generated by users visiting and interacting with a website.
  • The purpose of web analytics is to measure user behavior, optimize the website’s user experience and flow, and gain insights that help meet business objectives like increasing conversions and sales.
  • Web analytics allows you to see how your website is performing and how people are acting while on your website. What’s important is what you can do with this knowledge.
  • Data collected through web analytics may include traffic sources, referring sites, page views, paths taken, and conversion rates. The compiled data often forms a part of customer relationship management analytics to facilitate and streamline better business decisions.
  • Having strong web analytics is important in understanding customer behavior and fine-tuning marketing and product development approaches accordingly.
Example of a web analytics dashboard.

Why you should leverage web analytics

Leveraging web analytics allows organizations to better understand their customers and achieve their business goals.

The global web analytics market size is projected to reach US$5,156.3 million by 2026, from US$2,564 million in 2019, at a CAGR of 10.4% during 2021-2026. (Source: 360 Research Reports, 2021) Of the top 1 million websites with the highest traffic, there are over 3 million analytics technologies used. Google Analytics has the highest market share, with 50.3%. (Source: “Top 1 Million Sites,” BuiltWith, 2022)
Of the 200 million active websites, 57.3% employ some form of web analytics tool. This trend is expected to grow as more sophisticated tools are readily available at a cheaper cost. (Source: “On the Entire Internet,” BuiltWith, 2022; Siteefy, 2022) A three-month study by Contentsquare showed a 6.9% increase in traffic, 11.8% increase in page views, 12.4% increase in transactions, and 3.6% increase in conversion rates through leveraging web analytics. (Source: Mordor Intelligence, 2022)

Case Study

Logo for Ryanair.
INDUSTRY
Aviation
SOURCE
AT Internet
Web analytics

Ryanair is a low-fare airline in Europe that receives nearly all of its bookings via its website. Unhappy with its current web analytics platform, which was difficult to understand and use, Ryanair was looking for a solution that could adapt to its requirements and provide continuous support and long-term collaboration.

Ryanair chose AT Internet for its intuitive user interface that could effectively and easily manage all the online activity. AT was the ideal partner to work closely with the airline to strengthen strategic decision making over the long term, increase conversions in an increasingly competitive market, and increase transactions on the website.

Results

By using AT Internet Web Analytics to improve email campaigns and understand the behavior of website visitors, Ryanair was able to triple click-through rates, increase visitor traffic by 16%, and decrease bounce rate by 18%.

Arrows denoting increases or decreases in certain metrics: '3x increase in click-through rates', '16% increase in visitor traffic', '18% decrease in bounce rate'.

Use traditional web analytics tools to understand your consumer

What does the customer do?
  • Traditional web analytics allows organizations to understand what is happening on their website and what customers are doing. These tools deliver hard data to measure the performance of a website. Some of the data measured through traditional web analytics are:
  • Visit count: The number of visits received by a webpage.
  • Bounce rate: The percentage of visitors that leave the website after only viewing the first page compared to total visitors.
  • Referrer: The previous website that sent the user traffic to a specific website.
  • CTA clicks: The number of times a user clicks on a call to action (CTA) button.
  • Conversion rate: Proportion of users that reach the final outcome of the website.
Example of a traditional web analytics dashboard.

Use advanced web analytics techniques to understand your consumer

Why does the customer do what they do?
  • Traditional web analytic tools fail to explain the motivation of users. Advanced analytic techniques help organizations understand user behavior and measure user satisfaction. The techniques help answer questions like: Why did a user come to a webpage? Why did they leave? Did they find what they were looking for? Some of the advanced tools include:
  • Heatmapping: A visual representation of where the users click, scroll, and move on a webpage.
  • Recordings: A recording of the mouse movement and clicks for the entire duration of a user’s visit.
  • Feedback forms and surveys: Voice of the customer tools allowing users to give direct feedback about websites.
  • Funnel exploration: The ability to visualize the steps users take to complete tasks on your site or app.
Example of an advanced web analytics dashboard.

Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

Heatmapping
  • Heatmaps are used to visualize where users move their mouse, click, and scroll in a webpage.
  • Website heatmaps use a warm-to-cold color scheme to indicate user activity, with the warmest color indicating the highest visitor engagement and the coolest indicating the lowest visitor engagement.
  • Organizations can use this tool to evaluate the elements of the website that attract users and identify which sections require improvement to increase user engagement.
  • Website designers can make changes and compare the difference in user interaction to measure the effectiveness of the changes.
  • Scrollmaps help designers understand what the most popular scroll-depth of your webpage is – and that’s usually a prime spot for an important call to action.
Example of a website with heatmapping overlaid.
(Source: An example of a heatmap layered with a scrollmap from Crazy Egg, 2020)

Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

Funneling

  • Funnels are graphical representations of a customer’s journey while navigating through the website.
  • Funnels help organizations identify which webpage users land on and where users drop off.
  • Organizations can capture every user step to find the unique challenges between entry and completion. Identifying what friction stands between browsing product grids and completing a transaction allows web designers to then eliminate it.
  • Designers can use A/B testing to experiment with different design philosophies to compare conversion statistics.
  • Funneling can be expanded to cross-channel analytics by incorporating referral data, cookies, and social media analytics.
Example of a bar chart created through funneling.

Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

Session recordings

  • Session recordings are playbacks of users’ interaction with the website on a single session. User interaction can vary between mouse clicks, keyboard input, and mouse scroll.
  • Recordings help organizations understand user motivation and help identify why users undertake certain tasks or actions on the webpage.
  • Playbacks can also be used to see if users are confused anywhere between the landing page and final transaction phase. This way, playbacks further help ensure visitors complete the funneling seamlessly.
Example of a session recording featuring a line created by the mouse's journey.

Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

Feedback and microsurveys

  • Feedback can be received directly from end users to help organizations improve the website.
  • Receiving feedback from users can be difficult, since not every user is willing to spend time to submit constructive and detailed feedback. Microsurveys are an excellent alternative.
  • Users can submit short feedback forms consisting of a single line or emojis or thumbs up or down.
  • Users can directly highlight sections of the page about which to submit feedback. This allows designers to quickly pinpoint areas for improvement. Additionally, web designers can play back recordings when feedback is submitted to get a clear idea about the challenges users face.
Example of a website with a microsurvey in the corner.

Market Overview

Choose vendors and tools that best match your business needs.

Top-level traditional features

Feature Name

Description

Visitor Count Tracking Counts the number of visits received by a website or webpage.
Geographic Analytics Uses location information to enable the organization to provide location-based services for various demographics.
Conversion Tracking Measures the proportion of users that complete a certain task compared to total number of users.
Device and Browser Analytics Captures and summarizes device and browser information.
Bounce and Exit Tracking Calculates exit rate and bounce rate on a webpage.
CTA Tracking Measures the number of times users click on a call to action (CTA) button.
Audience Demographics Captures, analyzes, and displays customer demographic/firmographic data from different channels.
Aggregate Traffic Reporting Works backward from a conversion or other key event to analyze the differences, trends, or patterns in the paths users took to get there.
Social Media Analytics Captures information on social signals from popular services (Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, etc.).

Top-level advanced features

Feature Name

Description

HeatmappingShows where users have clicked on a page and how far they have scrolled down a page or displays the results of eye-tracking tests through the graphical representation of heatmaps.
Funnel ExplorationVisualizes the steps users take to complete tasks on your site or app.
A/B TestingEnables you to test the success of various website features.
Customer Journey ModellingEffectively models and displays customer behaviors or journeys through multiple channels and touchpoints.
Audience SegmentationCreates and analyzes discrete customer audience segments based on user-defined criteria or variables.
Feedback and SurveysEnables users to give feedback and share their satisfaction and experience with website designers.
Paid Search IntegrationIntegrates with popular search advertising services (i.e. AdWords) and can make predictive recommendations around areas like keywords.
Search Engine OptimizationProvides targeted recommendations for improving and optimizing a page for organic search rankings (i.e. via A/B testing or multivariate testing).
Session RecordingRecords playbacks of users scrolling, moving, u-turning, and rage clicking on your site.

Evaluate software category leaders using SoftwareReviews’ vendor rankings and awards

Logo for SoftwareReviews.
Sample of SoftwareReviews' The Data Quadrant. The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

Sample of SoftwareReviews' The Emotional Footprint. The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

Logo for SoftwareReviews.
Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals. Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process. CLICK HERE to ACCESS

Comprehensive software reviews
to make better IT decisions

We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization. User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech

Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. Combined with the insight of our expert analysts, our members receive unparalleled support in their buying journey.

Top vendors in the web analytics space

Logo for Google Analytics. Google Analytics provides comprehensive traditional analytics tools, free of charge, to understand the customer journey and improve marketing ROI. Twenty-four percent of all web analytical tools used on the internet are provided by Google analytics.
Logo for Hotjar. Hotjar is a behavior analytics and product experience insights service that helps you empathize with and understand your users through their feedback via tools like heatmaps, session recordings, and surveys. Hotjar complements the data and insights you get from traditional web analytics tools like Google Analytics.
Logo for Crazy Egg. Crazy Egg is a website analytics tool that helps you optimize your site to make it more user-friendly, more engaging, and more conversion-oriented. It does this through heatmaps and A/B testing, which allow you to see how people are interacting with your site.
Logo for Amplitude Analytics. Amplitude Analytics provides intelligent insight into customer behavior. It offers basic functionalities like measuring conversion rate and engagement metrics and also provides more advanced tools like customer journey maps and predictive analytics capabilities through AI.

Case Study

Logo for Miller & Smith.
INDUSTRY
Real Estate
SOURCE
Crazy Egg

Heatmaps and playback recordings

Challenge

Miller & Smith had just redesigned their website, but the organization wanted to make sure it was user-friendly as well as visually appealing. They needed an analytics platform that could provide information about where visitors were coming from and measure the effectiveness of the marketing campaigns.

Solution

Miller & Smith turned to Crazy Egg to obtain visual insights and track user behavior. They used heatmaps and playback recordings to see user activity within webpages and pinpoint any issues with user interface. In just a few weeks, Miller & Smith gained valuable data to work with: the session recordings helped them understand how users were navigating the site, and the heatmaps allowed them to see where users were clicking – and what they were skipping.

Results

Detailed reports generated by the solution allowed Miller & Smith team to convince key stakeholders and implement the changes easily. They were able to pinpoint what changes needed to be made and why these changes would improve their experience.

Within few weeks, the bounce rate improved by 7.5% and goal conversion increased by 8.5% over a similar period the previous year.

Operationalizing Web Analytics Tools

Execute initiatives for successful implementation.

Ensure success of your web analytics programs by following five simple steps

1. ORGANIZATIONAL GOALS

The first key step in implementing and succeeding with web analytics tools is to set clearly defined organizational goals, e.g. improving product sales.

3. KPI METRICS

Define key performance indicators (KPIs) that help track the organization’s performance, e.g. number of page visits, conversion rates, bounce rates.

5. REVIEW

Continuous improvement is essential to succeed in understanding customers. The world is a dynamic place, and you must constantly revise your organizational goals, business objectives, and KPIs to remain competitive.

Centerpiece representing the five surrounding steps.

2. BUSINESS OBJECTIVES

The next step is to lay out business objectives that help to achieve the organization’s goals, e.g. to increase customer leads, increase customer transactions, increase web traffic.

4. APPLICATION SELECTION

Understand the web analytics tool space and which combination of tools and vendors best fits the organization’s goals.

1.1 Understand your organization’s goals

30 minutes

Output: Organization’s goal list

Materials: Whiteboard, Markers

Participants: Core project team

  1. Identify the key organizational goals for both the short term and the long term.
  2. Arrange the goals in descending order of priority.

Example table of goals ranked by priority and labeled short or long term.

1.2 Align business objectives with organizational goals

30 minutes

Output: Business objectives

Materials: Whiteboard, Markers

Participants: Core project team

  1. Identify the key business objectives that help attain organization goals.
  2. Match each business objective with the corresponding organizational goals it helps achieve.
  3. Arrange the objectives in descending order of priority.

Example table of business objectives ranked by priority and which organization goal they're linked to.

Establish baseline metrics

Baseline metrics will be improved through:

  1. Efficiently using website elements and CTA button placement
  2. Reducing friction between the landing page and end point
  3. Leveraging direct feedback from users to continuously improve customer experience

1.3 Establish baseline metrics that you intend to improve via your web analytics tools

30 minutes

Example table with metrics, each with a current state and goal state.

Accelerate your software selection project

Vendor selection projects often demand extensive and unnecessary documentation.

Software Selection Insight

Balance the effort-to-information ratio required for a business impact assessment to keep stakeholders engaged. Use documentation that captures the key data points and critical requirements without taking days to complete. Stakeholders are more receptive to formal selection processes that are friction free.

The Software Selection Workbook

Work through the straightforward templates that tie to each phase of the Rapid Application Selection Framework, from assessing the business impact to requirements gathering.

Sample of the Software Selection Workbook deliverable.

The Vendor Evaluation Workbook

Consolidate the vendor evaluation process into a single document. Easily compare vendors as you narrow the field to finalists.

Sample of the Vendor Evaluation Workbook deliverable.

The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

Quickly explain the Rapid Application Selection Framework to your team while also highlighting its benefits to stakeholders.

Sample of the Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual deliverable.

Revisit the metrics you identified and revise your goals

Track the post-deployment results, compare the metrics, and set new targets for the next fiscal year.

Example table of 'Baseline Website Performance Metrics' with the column 'Revised Target' highlighted.

Related Info-Tech Research

Stock image of two people going over a contract. Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

Drive higher user satisfaction and value through UX-driven websites.

Stock image of a person using the cloud on their smartphone. Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

Your website is your company’s face to the world: select a best-of-breed platform to ensure you make a rock-star impression with your prospects and customers!

Stock image of people studying analytics. Create an Effective Web Redesign Strategy

Ninety percent of web redesign projects, executed without an effective strategy, fail to accomplish their goals.

Bibliography

"11 Essential Website Data Factors and What They Mean." CivicPlus, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“Analytics Usage Distribution in the Top 1 Million Sites.” BuiltWith, 1 Nov. 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Analytics Usage Distribution on the Entire Internet." BuiltWith, 1 Nov. 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Bell, Erica. “How Miller and Smith Used Crazy Egg to Create an Actionable Plan to Improve Website Usability.” Crazy Egg, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Brannon, Jordan. "User Behavior Analytics | Enhance The Customer Journey." Coalition Technologies, 8 Nov 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Cardona, Mercedes. "7 Consumer Trends That Will Define The Digital Economy In 2021." Adobe Blog, 7 Dec 2020. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“The Finer Points.“ Analytics Features. Google Marketing Platform, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Fitzgerald, Anna. "A Beginner’s Guide to Web Analytics." HubSpot, 21 Sept 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Form Abandonment: How to Avoid It and Increase Your Conversion Rates." Fullstory Blog, 7 April 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Fries, Dan. "Plug Sales Funnel Gaps by Identifying and Tracking Micro-Conversions." Clicky Blog, 9 Dec 2019. Accessed 7 July 2022.

"Funnel Metrics in Saas: What to Track and How to Improve Them?" Userpilot Blog, 23 May 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Garg, Neha. "Digital Experimentation: 3 Key Steps to Building a Culture of Testing." Contentsquare, 21 June 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“Global Web Analytics Market Size, Status and Forecast 2021-2027.” 360 Research Reports, 25 Jan. 2021. Web.

Hamilton, Stephanie. "5 Components of Successful Web Analytics." The Daily Egg, 2011. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Hammond, Patrick. "Step-by-Step Guide to Cohort Analysis & Reducing Churn Rate." Amplitude, 15 July 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Hawes, Carry. "What Is Session Replay? Discover User Pain Points With Session Recordings." Dynatrace, 20 Dec 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Huss, Nick. “How Many Websites Are There in the World?” Siteefy, 8 Oct. 2022. Web.

Nelson, Hunter. "Establish Web Analytics and Conversion Tracking Foundations Using the Google Marketing Platform.” Tortoise & Hare Software, 29 Oct 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Product Analytics Vs Product Experience Insights: What’s the Difference?" Hotjar, 14 Sept 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“Record and watch everything your visitors do." Inspectlet, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“Ryanair: Using Web Analytics to Manage the Site’s Performance More Effectively and Improve Profitability." AT Internet, 1 April 2020. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Sibor, Vojtech. "Introducing Cross-Platform Analytics.” Smartlook Blog, 5 Nov 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Visualize Visitor Journeys Through Funnels.” VWO, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

"Web Analytics Market Share – Growth, Trends, COVID-19 Impact, and Forecasts (2022-2027)." Mordor Intelligence, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

“What is the Best Heatmap Tool for Real Results?” Crazy Egg, 27 April 2020. Web.

"What Is Visitor Behavior Analysis?" VWO, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Zheng, Jack G., and Svetlana Peltsverger. “Web Analytics Overview.” IGI Global, 2015. Accessed 26 July 2022.

Next-Generation InfraOps

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}457|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
  • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
  • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
  • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

Impact and Result

  • Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches benefit your organization.
  • Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
  • Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

Next-Generation InfraOps Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard – A deck that will help you use Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

This storyboard will help you understand the spectrum of different Agile xOps working modes and how best to leverage them and build an architecture and toolset that support rapid continuous IT operations

  • Next-Generation InfraOps Storyboard
[infographic]

Further reading

Next-Generation InfraOps

Embrace the spectrum of Ops methodologies to build a virtuous cycle.

Executive summary

Your Challenge

IT Operations continue to be challenged by increasing needs for scale and speed, often in the face of constrained resources and time. For most, Agile methodologies have become a foundational part of tackling this problem. Since then, we've seen Agile evolve into DevOps, which started a trend into different categories of "xOps" that are too many to count. How does one make sense of the xOps spectrum? What is InfraOps and where does it fit in?

Common Obstacles

Ultimately, all these methodologies and approaches are there to serve the same purpose: increase effectiveness through automation and improve governance through visibility. The key is to understand what tools and methodologies will deliver actual benefits to your IT operation and to the organization as a whole.

Info-Tech's Approach

By defining your end goals and framing solutions based on the type of visibility and features you need, you can enable speed and reliability without losing control of the work.

  1. Understand the xOps spectrum and what approaches will benefit your organization.
  2. Make sense of the architectural approaches and enablement tools available to you.
  3. Evolve from just improving your current operations to a continuous virtuous cycle of development and deployment.

Info-Tech Insight

InfraOps, when applied well, should be the embodiment of the governance policies as expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

Project overview

Understand the xOps spectrum

There are as many different types of "xOps" as there are business models and IT teams. To pick the approaches that deliver the best value to your organization and that align to your way of operating, it's important to understand the different major categories in the spectrum and how they do or don't apply to your IT approach.

How to optimize the Ops in DevOps

InfraOps is one of the major methodologies to address a key problem in IT at cloud scale: eliminating friction and error from your deliveries and outputs. The good news is there are architectures, tools, and frameworks you can easily leverage to make adopting this approach easier.

Evolve to integration and build a virtuous cycle

Ultimately your DevOps and InfraOps approaches should embody your governance needs via architecture and process. As time goes on, however, both your IT footprint and your business environment will shift. Build your tools, telemetry, and governance to anticipate and adapt to change and build a virtuous cycle between development needs and IT Operations tools and governance.

The xOps spectrum

This is an image of the xOps spectrum. The three main parts are: Code Acceleration (left), Governance(middle), and Infrastructure Acceleration (right)

xOps categories

There is no definitive list of x's in the xOps spectrum. Different organizations and teams will divide and define these in different ways. In many cases, the definitions and domains of various xOps will overlap.

Some of the commonly adopted and defined xOps models are listed here.

Shift left? Shift right?

Cutting through the jargon

  • Shifting left is about focusing on the code and development aspects of a delivery cycle.
  • Shifting right is about remembering that infrastructure and tools still do matter.

Info-Tech Insight

Shifting left or right isn't an either/or choice. They're more like opposite sides of the same coin. Like the different xOps approaches, usually more than one shift approach will apply to your IT Operations.

IT Operations in the left-right spectrum

Shifting from executing and deploying to defining the guardrails and standards

This is an image of the left-right spectrum for your XOps position

Take a middle-out approach

InfraOps and DevOps aren't enemies; they're opposite sides of the same coin.

  • InfraOps is about the automation and standardization of execution. It's an essential element in any fully automated CI/CD pipeline.
  • Like DevOps, InfraOps is built on similar values (the pillars of DevOps).
  • It builds on the principle of Lean to focus on removing friction, or turn-and-type activities, from the pipeline/process.
  • In InfraOps, one of the key methods for removing friction is through automation of the interstitia between different phases of a DevOps or CI/CD cycle.

Optimize the Ops in DevOps

Focus on eliminating friction

This is an image of an approach to optimizing the ops in DevOps.

With the shift from execution to governing and validating, the role of deployment falls downstream of IT Operations.

IT Operations needs to move to a mindset that focuses on creating the guardrails, enforced standards, and compliance rules that need to be used downstream, then apply those standards using automation and tooling to remove friction and error from the interstitia (the white spaces between chevrons) of the various phases.

InfraOps tools

Four quadrants in the shape of a human head, in the boxes are the following: Hyperconverged Infrastructure; Composable Infrastructure; Infrastructure as code and; Automation and Orchestration

Info-Tech Insight

Your tools can be broken into two categories:

  • Infrastructure Architecture
    • HCI vs. CI
  • Automation Tooling
    • IaC and A&O

Keep in mind that while your infrastructure architecture is usually an either/or choice, your automation approach should use any and all tooling that helps.

Infrastructure approach

  • Hyperconverged

  • Composable

Hyperconverged Infrastructure (HCI)

Hyperconvergence is the next phase of convergence, virtualizing servers, networks, and storage on a single server/storage appliance. Capacity scales as more appliances are added to a cluster or stack.
The disruptive departure:

  • Even though servers, networks, and storage were each on their own convergence paths, the three remained separate management domains (or silos). Even single-SKU converged infrastructures like VCE Vblocks are still composed of distinct server, network, and storage devices.
  • In hyperconvergence, the silos collapse into single-software managed devices. This has been disruptive for both the vendors of technology solutions (especially storage) and for infrastructure management.
  • Large storage array vendors are challenged by hyperconvergence alternatives. IT departments need to adapt IT skills and roles away from individual management silos and to more holistic service management.

A comparison between converged and hyperconverged systems.

Info-Tech Insight

HCI follows convergence trends of the past ten years but is also a departure from how IT infrastructure has traditionally been provisioned and managed.

HCI is at the same time a logical progression of infrastructure convergence and a disruptive departure.

Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

HCI can be the foundation block for a fully software defined data center, a prerequisite for private cloud.

Strengths

  • Potentially lower TCO through further infrastructure consolidation, reducing CapEx and OpEx expenditures through facilities optimization and cost consolidation.
  • Operations in particular can be streamlined, since storage, network connections, and processors/memory are all managed as abstractions via a single control pane.
  • HCI comes with built-in automation and analytics that lead to quicker issue resolution.

Opportunities

  • Increased business agility by paving the way for a fully software defined infrastructure stack and cloud automation.
  • Shift IT human assets from hardware asset maintainers and controllers to service delivery managers.
  • Better able to compete with external IT service alternatives.
  • Move toward a hybrid cloud service offering where the service catalog contains both internal and external offerings.

Key attributes of a cloud are automation, resource elasticity, and self-service. This kind of agility is impossible if physical infrastructure needs intervention.

Info-Tech Insight

Virtualization alone does not a private cloud make, but complete stack virtualization (software defined) running on a hands-off preconfigured HCI appliance (or group of appliances) provides a solid foundation for building cloud services.

Hyperconverged (HCI) – SWOT

Silo-busting and private cloud sound great, but are your people and processes able to manage the change?

Weaknesses

  • HCI typically scales out linearly (CPU & storage). This does not suit traditional scale-up applications such as high-performance databases and large-capacity data warehouses.
  • Infrastructure stacks are perceived as more flexible for variable growth across segments. For example, if storage is growing but processing is not, storage can scale separately from processing.

Threats

  • HCI will be disruptive to roles within IT. Internal pushback is a real threat if necessary changes in skills and roles are not addressed.
  • HCI is not a simple component replacement but an adoption of a different kind of infrastructure. Different places in the lifecycles for each of storage, network, and processing devices could make HCI a solution where there is no immediate problem.

In traditional infrastructure, performance and capacity are managed as distinct though complementary jobs. An all-in-one approach may not work.

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

  • Composable infrastructure in many ways represents the opposite of an HCI approach. Its focus is on further disaggregating resources and components used to build systems.
    • Unlike traditional cloud virtual systems, composable infrastructure provides virtual bare metal resources, allowing tightly coupled resources like CPU, RAM, and GPU – or any device/card/module – to be released back and forth into the resource pool as required by a given workload.
    • This is enabled by the use of high-speed, low-latency PCI Express (PCI-e) and Compute Express Link (CXL) fabrics that allow these resources to be decoupled.
    • It also supports the ability to present other fabric types critical for building out enterprise systems (e.g. Ethernet, InfiniBand).
  • Accordingly, CI systems are also based on next-generation network architecture that supports moving critical functions to the network layer, which enables more efficient use of the application-layer resources.

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

  • CI may also leverage network-resident data/infrastructure processing units (DPUs/IPUs), which offload many network, security, and storage functions.
    • As new devices and functions become available, they can be added into the catalog of resources/functions available in a CI pool.

Use Case Example: Composable AI flow

Data Ingestion > Data Cleaning/Tagging > Training > Conclusion

  • At each phase of the process, resources, including specialized hardware like memory and GPU cores, can be dynamically allocated and reallocated to the workload on demand

Composable Infrastructure (CI)

Use cases and considerations

Where it's useful

  • Enable even more efficient allocation/utilization of resources for workloads.
  • Very large memory or shared memory requirements can benefit greatly.
  • Decouple purchasing decisions for underlying resources.
  • Leverage the fabric to make it easier to incrementally upgrade underlying resources as required.
  • Build "the Impossible Server."

Considerations

  • Requires significant footprint/scale to justify in many cases
  • Not necessarily good value for environments that aren't very volatile and heterogeneous in terms of deployment requirements
  • May not be best value for environments where resource-stranding is not a significant issue

Info-Tech Insight

Many organizations using a traditional approach report resource stranding as having an impact of 20% or more on efficiency. When focusing specifically on the stranding of memory in workloads, the number can often approach 40%.

The CI ecosystem

This is an image of the CI ecosystem.

  • The CI ecosystem has many players, large and small!
  • Note that the CI ecosystem is dependent on a large ecosystem of underlying enablers and component builders to support the required technologies.

Understanding the differences

This image shows the similarities and differences between traditional, cloud, hyperconverged, and composable.

Automation approach

  • Infrastructure as Code
  • Automation & Orchestration
  • Metaorchestration

Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

Infrastructure as code (IaC) is the process of managing and provisioning computer data centers through machine-readable definition files rather than physical hardware configuration or interactive configuration tools.

Before IaC, IT personnel would have to manually change configurations to manage their infrastructure. Maybe they would use throwaway scripts to automate some tasks, but that was the extent of it.

With IaC, your infrastructure's configuration takes the form of a code file, making it easy to edit, copy, and distribute.

Info-Tech Insight
IaC is a critical tool in enabling key benefits!

  • Reduced costs
  • Increased scalability, flexibility, and speed
  • Better consistency and version control
  • Reduced deployment errors

Infrastructure as Code (IaC)

  1. IaC uses a high-level descriptive coding language to automate the provisioning of IT infrastructure. This eliminates the need to manually provision and manage servers, OS, database connections, storage, and other elements every time we want to develop, test, or deploy an application.
  2. IaC allows us to define the computer systems on which code needs to run. Most commonly, we use a framework like Chef, Ansible, Puppet, etc., to define their infrastructure. These automation and orchestration tools focus on the provisioning and configuring of base compute infrastructure.
  3. IaC is also an essential DevOps practice. It enables teams to rapidly create and version infrastructure in the same way they version source code and to track these versions so as to avoid inconsistency among IT environments that can lead to serious issues during deployment.
  • Idempotence is a principle of IaC. This means a deployment command always sets the target environment into the same configuration, regardless of the environment's starting state.
    • Idempotency is achieved by either automatically configuring an existing target or discarding the existing target and recreating a fresh environment.

Automation/Orchestration

Orchestration describes the automated arrangement, coordination, and management of complex computer systems, middleware, and services.

This usage of orchestration is often discussed in the context of service-oriented architecture, virtualization, provisioning, converged infrastructure, and dynamic data center topics. Orchestration in this sense is about aligning the business request with the applications, data, and infrastructure.

It defines the policies and service levels through automated workflows,
provisioning, and change management. This creates an application-aligned infrastructure that can be scaled up or down based on the needs of each application.

As the requirement for more resources or a new application is triggered, automated tools now can perform tasks that previously could only be done by multiple administrators operating on their individual pieces of the physical stack.

Orchestration also provides centralized management of the resource pool, including billing, metering, and chargeback for consumption. For example, orchestration reduces the time and effort for deploying multiple instances of a single application.

Info-Tech Insight

Automation and orchestration tools can be key components of an effective governance toolkit too! Remember to understand what data can be pulled from your various tools and leveraged for other purposes such as cost management and portfolio roadmapping.

Automation/Orchestration

There are a wide variety of orchestration and automation tools and technologies.

Configuration Management

Configuration Management

The logos for companies which fall in each of the categories in the column to the left of the image.

CI/CD
Orchestration

Container
Orchestration

Cloud-Specific
Orchestration

PaaS
Orchestration

Info-Tech Insight

Automation and orchestration tools and software offerings are plentiful, and many of them have a different focus on where in the application delivery ecosystem they provide automation functionality.

Often there are different tools for different deployment and service models as well as for different functional phases for each service model.

Automation/Orchestration

Every tool focuses on different aspects or functions of the deployment of resources and applications.

  • Resources
    • Compute
    • Storage
    • Network
  • Extended Services
    • Platforms
    • Infrastructure Services
    • Web Services
  • Application Assets
    • Images
    • Templates
    • Containers
    • Code

Info-Tech Insight

Let the large ecosystem of tools be your ally. Leverage the right tools where needed and then address the complexity of tools using a master orchestration scheme.

Metaorchestration

A Flow chart for the approach to metaorchestration.

Additionally, most tools do not cover all aspects required for most automation implementations, especially in hybrid cloud scenarios.

As such, often multiple tools must be deployed, which can lead to fragmentation and loss of unified controls.

Many enterprises address this fragmentation using a cloud management platform approach.

One method of achieving this is to establish a higher layer of orchestration – an "orchestrator of orchestrators," or metaorchestration.

In complex scenarios, this can be a challenge that requires customization and development.

InfraOps tools ecosystem

Toolkit Pros Cons Tips
HCI Easy scale out Shift in skills required Good for enabling automation and hybridization with current-gen public cloud services
CI Maximal workload resource efficiency Investment in new fabrics and technologies Useful for very dynamic or highly scalable workloads like AI
IaC Error reduction and standardization Managing drift in standards and requirements Leverage a standards and exception process to keep track of drift
A&O Key enabler of DevOps automation within phases Usually requires multiple toolsets/frameworks Use the right tools and stitch together at the metaorchestration layer
Metaorchestration Reduces the complexity of a diverse A&O and IaC toolkit Requires understanding of the entire ecosystems of tools used Key layer of visibility and control for governance

Build a virtuous cycle

Remember, the goal is to increase speed AND reliability. That's why we focus on removing friction from our delivery pipelines.

  • The first step is to identify the points of friction in your cycle and understand the intensity and frequency of these friction points.
  • Depending on your delivery and project management methodology, you'll have a different posture of the different tools that make sense for your pipeline.
  • For example, if you are focused on delivering raw resources for sysadmins and/or you're in a Waterfall methodology where the friction points are large but infrequent, hyperconverged is likely to delivery good value, whereas tools like IaC and orchestration may not be as necessary.

Info-Tech Insight

Remember that, especially in modern and rapid methodologies, your IT footprint can drift unexpectedly. This means you need a real feedback mechanism on where the friction moves to next.

This is particularly important in more Agile methodologies.

Activity: Map your IT operations delivery

Identify your high-friction interstitial points

  • Using the table below, or a table modified to your delivery phases, map out the activities and tasks that are not standardized and automated.
  • For the incoming and outgoing sections, think about what resources and activities need to be (or could be) created, destroyed, or repurposed to efficiently manage each cycle and the spaces between cycles.
Plan Code Test Deploy Monitor
Incoming Friction
In-Cycle Friction
Outgoing Friction

Info-Tech Insight

Map your ops groups to the delivery cycles in your pipeline. How many delivery cycles do you have or need?

Good InfraOps is a reflection of governance policies, expressed by standards in architecture and automation.

Related Info-Tech Research

Evaluate Hyperconverged Infrastructure for Your Infrastructure Roadmap

  • This Info-Tech note covers evaluation of HCI platforms.

Design Your Cloud Operations

  • This Info-Tech blueprint covers organization of operations teams for various deployment and Agile modes.

Bibliography

Banks, Ethan, host. "Choosing Your Next Infrastructure." Datanauts, episode 094, Packet Pushers, 26 July 2017. Podcast.
"Composable Infrastructure Solutions." Hewlett Packard Canada, n.d. Web.
"Composable Infrastructure Technology." Liqid Inc., n.d. Web.
"DataOps architecture design." Azure Architecture Center, Microsoft Learn, n.d. Web.
Tan, Pei Send. "Differences: DevOps, ITOps, MLOps, DataOps, ModelOps, AIOps, SecOps, DevSecOps." Medium, 5 July 2021. Web.

IT Operations Consulting

Operations... make sure that the services and products you offer your clients are delivered in the most efficient way possible. IT Operations makes sure that the applications and infrastructure that your delivery depends on is solid.

Gert Taeymans has over 20 years experience in directing the implementation and management of mission-critical services for businesses in high-volume international markets. Strong track record in risk management, crisis management including disaster recovery, service delivery and change & config management.

Register to read more …

Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most

  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
  • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
  • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
  • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
  • Lack of clarity on what to improve and how resources should be allocated.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.
  • Obstacles:
    • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
    • Lack of a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions and/or standard methods of measurement, and a consistent monitoring cadence.

Impact and Result

  • Understanding of who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Understanding of the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
  • Establishment of a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
  • Development of an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
  • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately increase retention.

Measure and Manage Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most Deck – An overview of how to understand what drives customer satisfaction and how to measure and manage it for improved business outcomes.

Understand the true drivers of customer satisfaction and build a process for managing and improving customer satisfaction.

[infographic]

Further reading

Measure and Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics that Matter the Most

Understand what truly keeps your customer satisfied. Start to measure what matters to improve customer experience and increase satisfaction and advocacy. 

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst perspective

Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

The image contains a picture of Emily Wright.

“Healthy customer relationships are the paramount to long-term growth. When customers are satisfied, they remain loyal, spend more, and promote your company to others in their network. The key to high satisfaction is understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction to enable the delivery of real customer value.

Most companies believe they know who their satisfied customers are and what keeps them satisfied, and 76% of B2B buyers expect that providers understand their unique needs (Salesforce Research, 2020). However, on average B2B companies have customer experience scores of less than 50% (McKinsey, 2016). This disconnect between customer expectations and provider experience indicates that businesses are not effectively measuring and monitoring satisfaction and therefore are not making meaningful enhancements to their service, offerings, and overall experience.

By focusing on the underlying drivers of customer satisfaction, organizations develop a truly accurate picture of what is driving deep satisfaction and loyalty, ensuring that their company will achieve sustainable growth and stay competitive in a highly competitive market.”

Emily Wright

Senior Research Analyst, Advisory

SoftwareReviews

Executive summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

SoftwareReviews’ Approach

Getting a truly accurate picture of satisfaction levels among customers, and where to focus efforts to improve satisfaction, is challenging. Providers often find themselves reacting to customer challenges and being blindsided when customers leave. More effective customer satisfaction measurement is possible when providers self-assess for the following challenges:

  • Lack of understanding of what is truly driving customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction.
  • Lack of insight into who our satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Lack of a system for early detection of declines in satisfaction.
  • Lack of clarity of what needs to be improved and how resources should be allocated.
  • Lack of reliable internal data for effective customer satisfaction monitoring.

What separates customer success leaders from developing a full view of their customers are several nagging obstacles:

  • Use of metrics that don’t provide the insight needed to make impactful changes that will boost satisfaction and ultimately, retention and profit.
  • Friction from customers participating in customer satisfaction studies.
  • Lack of data, or integrated databases from which to track, pull, and analyze customer satisfaction data.
  • Lack a clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers, metric definitions, and/or standard methods of measurement and a consistent monitoring cadence.
  • Lack of time, resources, or technology to uncover and effectively measure and monitor satisfaction drivers.

Through the SoftwareReviews’ approach, customer success leaders will:

  • Understand who your satisfied and dissatisfied customers are.
  • Understand the true drivers of satisfaction and dissatisfaction among your customer segments.
  • Establish a repeatable process and cadence for effective satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
  • Develop an executable customer satisfaction improvement plan that identifies customer journey pain points and areas of dissatisfaction, and outlines how to improve them.
  • Know where money, time, and resources are needed most to improve satisfaction levels and ultimately retention.

Overarching SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

All companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about. This will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

Healthy Customer Relationships are vital for long-term success and growth

Measuring customer satisfaction is critical to understanding the overall health of your customer relationships and driving growth.

Through effective customer satisfaction measurement, organizations can:

Improve Customer Experience

Increase Retention and CLV

Increase Profitability

Reduce Costs

  • Provide insight into where and how to improve.
  • Enhance experience, increase loyalty.
  • By providing strong CX, organizations can increase revenue by 10-15% (McKinsey, 2014).
  • Far easier to retain existing customers than to acquire new ones.
  • Ensuring high satisfaction among customers increases Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) through longer tenure and higher spending.
  • NPS Promoter score has a customer lifetime value that's 600%-1,400% higher than a Detractor (Bain & Company, 2015).
  • Highly satisfied customers spend more through expansions and add-ons, as well as through their long tenure with your company.
  • They also spread positive word of mouth, which brings in new customers.
  • “Studies demonstrate a strong correlation between customer satisfaction and increased profits — with companies with high customer satisfaction reporting 5.7 times more revenue than competitors.” (Matthew Loper, CEO and Co-Founder of WELLTH, 2022)
  • Measuring, monitoring, and maintaining high satisfaction levels reduces costs across the board.
  • “Providing a high-quality customer experience can save up to 33% of customer service costs” (Deloitte, 2018).
  • Satisfied customers are more likely to spread positive word of mouth which reduces acquisition / marketing costs for your company.

“Measuring customer satisfaction is vital for growth in any organization; it provides insights into what works and offers opportunities for optimization. Customer satisfaction is essential for improving loyalty rate, reducing costs and retaining your customers.”

-Ken Brisco, NICE, 2019

Poor customer satisfaction measurement is costly

Virtually all companies measure customer satisfaction, but few truly do it well. All too often, customer satisfaction measurement consists of a set of vanity metrics that do not result in actionable insight for product/service improvement. Improper measurement can result in numerous consequences:

Direct and Indirect Costs

Being unaware of true drivers of satisfaction that are never remedied costs your business directly through customer churn, service costs, etc.

Tarnished Brand

Tarnished brand through not resolving issues drives dissatisfaction; dissatisfied customers share their negative experiences, which can damage brand image and reputation.

Waste Limited Resources

Putting limited resources towards vanity programs and/or fixes that have little to no bearing on core satisfaction drivers wastes time and money.

“When customer dissatisfaction goes unnoticed, it can slowly kill a company. Because of the intangible nature of customer dissatisfaction, managers regularly underestimate the magnitude of customer dissatisfaction and its impact on the bottom line.”

- Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, 2013

SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

Most companies struggle to understand what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true satisfaction drivers, tech providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, avoiding the numerous harmful consequences that result from average customer satisfaction measurement.

Does your customer satisfaction measurement process need improvement?

Getting an accurate picture of customer satisfaction is no easy task. Struggling with any of the following means you are ready for a detailed review of your customer satisfaction measurement efforts:

  • Not knowing who your most satisfied customers are.
  • Lacking early detection for declining satisfaction – either reactive, or unaware of dissatisfaction as it’s occurring.
  • Lacking a process for monitoring changes in satisfaction and lack ability to be proactive; you feel blindsided when customers leave.
  • Inability to fix the problem and wasting money on the wrong areas, like vanity metrics that don’t bring value to customers.
  • Spending money and other resources towards fixes based on a gut feeling, without quantifying the real root cause drivers and investing in their improvement.
  • Having metrics and data but lacking context; don’t know what contributed to the metrics/results, why people are dissatisfied or what contributes to satisfaction.
  • Lacking clear definition of what satisfaction means to customers / customer segments.
  • Difficulty tying satisfaction back to financial results.

Customers are more satisfied with software vendors who understand the difference between surface level and short-term satisfaction, and deep or long-term satisfaction

Surface-level satisfaction

Surface-level satisfaction has immediate effects, but they are usually short-term or limited to certain groups of users. There are several factors that contribute to satisfaction including:

  • Novelty of new software
  • Ease of implementation
  • Financial savings
  • Breadth of features

Software Leaders Drive Deep Satisfaction

Deep satisfaction has long-term and meaningful impacts on the way that organizations work. Deep satisfaction has staying power and increases or maintains satisfaction over time, by reducing complexity and delivering exceptional quality for end-users and IT alike. This report found that the following capabilities provided the deepest levels of satisfaction:

  • Usability and intuitiveness
  • Quality of features
  • Ease of customization
  • Vendor-specific capabilities

The above solve issues that are part of everyday problems, and each drives satisfaction in deep and meaningful ways. While surface-level satisfaction is important, deep and impactful capabilities can sustain satisfaction for a longer time.

Deep Customer Satisfaction Among Software Buyers Correlates Highly to “Emotional Attributes”

Vendor Capabilities and Product Features remain significant but are not the primary drivers

The image contains a graph to demonstrate a correlation to Satisfaction, all Software Categories.
Source: SoftwareReviews buyer reviews (based on 82,560 unique reviews).

Driving deep satisfaction among software customers vs. surface-level measures is key

Vendor capabilities and product features correlate significantly to buyer satisfaction

Yet, it’s the emotional attributes – what we call the “Emotional Footprint”, that correlate more strongly

Business-Value Created and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction the most

The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate Software Buyer Satisfaction Drivers and Emotional Attributes are what drives software customer satisfaction.

Software companies looking to improve customer satisfaction will focus on business value created and the Emotional Footprint attributes outlined here.

The essential ingredient is understanding how each is defined by your customers.

Leaders focus on driving improvements as described by customers.

SoftwareReviews Insight:

These true drivers of satisfaction should be considered in your customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring efforts. The experience customers have with your product and brand is what will differentiate your brand from competitors, and ultimately, power business growth. Talk to a SoftwareReviews Advisor to learn how users rate your product on these satisfaction drivers in the SoftwareReviews Emotional Footprint Report.

Benefits of Effective Customer Satisfaction Measurement

Our research provides Customer Success leaders with the following key benefits:

  • Ability to know who is satisfied, dissatisfied, and why.
  • Confidence in how to understand or uncover the factors behind customer satisfaction; understand and identify factors driving satisfaction, dissatisfaction.
  • Ability to develop a clear plan for improving customer satisfaction.
  • Knowledge of how to establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.
  • Understanding of what metrics to use, how to measure them, and where to find the right information/data.
  • Knowledge of where money, time, and other resources are needed most to drive tangible customer value.

“81% of organizations cite CX as a competitive differentiator. The top factor driving digital transformation is improving CX […] with companies reporting benefits associated with improving CX including:

  • Increased customer loyalty (92%)
  • An uplift in revenue (84%)
  • Cost savings (79%).”

– Dan Cote, “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage”, Influitive, 2021

The image contains a screenshot of a thought model that focuses on Measure & Manage the Customer Satisfaction Metrics That Matter the Most.

Who benefits from improving the measurement and monitoring of customer satisfaction?

This Research Is Designed for:

  • Customer Success leaders and marketers who are:
    • Responsible for understanding how to benchmark, measure, and understand customer satisfaction to improve satisfaction, NPS, and ROI.
    • Looking to take a more proactive and structured approach to customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring.
    • Looking for a more effective and accurate way to measure and understand how to improve customer satisfaction around products and services.

This Research Will Help You:

  • Understand the factors driving satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
  • Know which customers are satisfied/dissatisfied.
  • Know where time, money, and resources are needed the most in order to improve or maintain satisfaction levels.
  • Develop a formal plan to improve customer satisfaction.
  • Establish a repeatable process for customer satisfaction measurement and monitoring that allows for proactivity when declines in satisfaction are detected.

This Research Will Also Assist:

  • Customer Success Leaders, Marketing and Sales Directors and Managers, Product Marketing Managers, and Advocacy Managers/Coordinators who are responsible for:
    • Product improvements and enhancements
    • Customer service and onboarding
    • Customer advocacy programs
    • Referral/VoC programs

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Coordinate and align on customer experience efforts and actions.
  • Gather and make use of customer feedback to improve products, solutions, and services provided.
  • Provide an amazing customer experience throughout the entirety of the customer journey.

SoftwareReviews’ methodology for measuring the customer satisfaction metrics that matter the most

1. Identify true customer satisfaction drivers

2. Develop metrics dashboard

3. Develop customer satisfaction measurement and management plan

Phase Steps

  1. Identify data sources, documenting any gaps in data
  2. Analyze all relevant data on customer experiences and outcomes
  3. Document top satisfaction drivers
  1. Identify business goals, problems to be solved / define business challenges and marketing/customer success goals
  2. Use SR diagnostic to assess current state of satisfaction measurement, assessing metric alignment to satisfaction drivers
  3. Define your metrics dashboard
  4. Develop common metric definitions, language for discussing, and standards for measuring customer satisfaction
  1. Determine committee structure to measure performance metrics over time
  2. Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey/common points in journey where customers are least dissatisfied
  3. Build plan that identifies weak areas and shows how to fix using SR’s emotional footprint, other measures
  4. Create plan and roadmap for CSat improvement
  5. Create communication deck

Phase Outcomes

  1. Documented satisfaction drivers
  2. Documented data sources and gaps in data
  1. Current state customer satisfaction measurement analysis
  2. Common metric definitions and measurement standards
  3. Metrics dashboard
  1. Customer satisfaction measurement plan
  2. Customer satisfaction improvement plan
  3. Customer journey maps
  4. Customer satisfaction improvement communication deck
  5. Customer Satisfaction Committee created

Insight summary

Understanding and measuring the true drivers of satisfaction enable the delivery of real customer value

All software companies measure satisfaction in some way, but many lack understanding of what’s truly driving customers to stay or leave. By understanding the true drivers of satisfaction, solution providers can measure and monitor satisfaction more effectively, pull actionable insights and feedback, and make changes to products and services that customers really care about and which will keep them coming back to you to have their needs met.

Positive experiences drive satisfaction more so than features and cost

According to our analysis of software buyer reviews data*, the biggest drivers of satisfaction and likeliness to recommend are the positive experiences customers have with vendors and their products. Customers want to feel that:

  1. Their productivity and performance is enhanced, and the vendor is helping them innovate and grow as a company.
  2. Their vendor inspires them and helps them to continually improve.
  3. They can rely on the vendor and the product they purchased.
  4. They are respected by the vendor.
  5. They can trust that the vendor will be on their side and save them time.
*8 million data points across all software categories

Measure Key Relationship KPIs to gauge satisfaction

Key metrics to track include the Business Value Created score, Net Emotional Footprint, and the Love/Hate score (the strength of emotional connection).

Orient the organization around customer experience excellence

  1. Arrange staff incentives around customer value instead of metrics that are unrelated to satisfaction.
  2. Embed customer experience as a core company value and integrate it into all functions.
  3. Make working with your organization easy and seamless for customers.

Have a designated committee for customer satisfaction measurement

Best in class organizations create customer satisfaction committees that meet regularly to measure and monitor customer satisfaction, resolve issues quickly, and work towards improved customer experience and profit outcomes.

Use metrics that align to top satisfaction drivers

This will give you a more accurate and fulsome view of customer satisfaction than standard satisfaction metrics alone will.

Guided Implementation

What is our GI on measuring and managing the customer satisfaction metrics that matter most?

Identify True Customer Satisfaction Drivers

Develop Metrics Dashboard Develop Customer Satisfaction Measurement and Management Plan

Call #1: Discuss current pain points and barriers to successful customer satisfaction measurement, monitoring and maintenance. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #2: Discuss all available data, noting any gaps. Develop plan to fill gaps, discuss feasibility and timelines. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #3: Walk through SoftwareReviews reports to understand EF and satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 3 days.

Call #4: Segment customers and document key satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 week.

Call #5: Document business goals and align them to metrics. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #6: Complete the SoftwareReviews satisfaction measurement diagnostic. Plan next call – 3 days.

Call #7: Score list of metrics that align to satisfaction drivers. Plan next call – 2 days.

Call #8: Develop metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

Call #9: Finalize metrics dashboard and definitions. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #10: Discuss committee and determine governance. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

Call #11: Map out gaps in satisfaction along customer journey as they relate to top satisfaction drivers. Plan next call –2 weeks.

Call #12: Develop plan and roadmap for satisfaction improvement. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call #13: Finalize plan and roadmap. Plan next call – 1 week.

Call # 14: Review and coach on communication deck.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

Software Reviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

Guided Implementation

Workshop

Consulting

“Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”
Included within Advisory Membership Optional add-ons

Bibliography

“Are you experienced?” Bain & Company, Apr. 2015. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

Brisco, Ken. “Measuring Customer Satisfaction and Why It’s So Important.” NICE, Feb. 2019. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

CMO.com Team. “The Customer Experience Management Mandate.” Adobe Experience Cloud Blog, July 2019. Accessed 14 June. 2022.

Cote, Dan. “Advocacy Blooms and Business Booms When Customers and Employees Engage.” Influitive, Dec. 2021. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Fanderl, Harald and Perrey, Jesko. “Best of both worlds: Customer experience for more revenues and lower costs.” McKinsey & Company, Apr. 2014. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Gallemard, Jeremy. “Why – And How – Should Customer Satisfaction Be Measured?” Smart Tribune, Feb. 2020. Accessed 6 June. 2022.

Kumar, Swagata. “Customer Success Statistics in 2021.” Customer Success Box, 2021. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Lakshmiu Tatikonda, “The Hidden Costs of Customer Dissatisfaction”, Management Accounting Quarterly, vol. 14, no. 3, 2013, pp 38. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Loper, Matthew. “Why ‘Customer Satisfaction’ Misses the Mark – And What to Measure Instead.” Newsweek, Jan. 2022. Accessed 16 June. 2022.

Maechler, Nicolas, et al. “Improving the business-to-business customer experience.” McKinsey & Company, Mar. 2016. Accessed 16 June.

“New Research from Dimension Data Reveals Uncomfortable CX Truths.” CISION PR Newswire, Apr. 2017. Accessed 7 June. 2022.

Sheth, Rohan. 75 Must-Know Customer Experience Statistics to move Your Business Forward in 2022.” SmartKarrot, Feb. 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

Smith, Mercer. “111 Customer Service Statistics and Facts You Shouldn’t Ignore.” HelpScout, May 2022. Accessed 17 June. 2022.

“State of the Connected Customer.” Salesforce, 2020. Accessed 14 June. 2022

“The true value of customer experiences.” Deloitte, 2018. Accessed 15 June. 2022.

Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}310|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $5,199 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
  • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy

Provide better end-user device support to a remote workforce:

  • Remain compliant while purchasing, deploying, supporting, and decommissioning devices.
  • Save time and resources during device deployment while providing a high-quality experience to remote end users.
  • Build a set of capabilities that will let you support different use cases.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Zero-touch is more than just deployment. This is more difficult than turning on a tool and provisioning new devices to end users.
  • Consider the entire user experience and device lifecycle to show value to the organization. Don’t forget that you will eventually need to touch the device.

Impact and Result

Approach zero-touch provisioning and patching from the end user’s experience:

  • Align your zero-touch approach with stakeholder priorities and larger IT strategies.
  • Build your zero-touch provisioning and patching plan from both the asset lifecycle and the end-user perspective to take a holistic approach that emphasizes customer service.
  • Tailor deployment plans to more easily scope and resource deployment projects.

Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt zero-touch provisioning, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Design the zero-touch experience

Design the user’s experience and build a vision to direct your zero-touch provisioning project. Update your ITAM practices to reflect the new experience.

  • Zero-Touch Provisioning and Support Plan
  • HAM Process Workflows (Visio)
  • HAM Process Workflows (PDF)
  • End-User Device Management Standard Operating Procedure

2. Update device management, provisioning, and patching

Leverage new tools to manage remote endpoints, keep those devices patched, and allow users to get the apps they need to work.

  • End-User Device Build Book Template

3. Build a roadmap and communication plan

Create a roadmap for migrating to zero-touch provisioning.

  • Roadmap Tool
  • Communication Plan Template
[infographic]

Portfolio Management

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}47|cart{/j2store}
  • Related Products: {j2store}47|crosssells{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10
  • member rating average dollars saved: $40,234
  • member rating average days saved: 30
  • Parent Category Name: Applications
  • Parent Category Link: /applications

The challenge

  • Typically your business wants much more than your IT development organization can deliver with the available resources at the requested quality levels.
  • Over-damnd has a negative influence on delivery throughput. IT starts many projects (or features) but has trouble delivering most of them within the set parameters of scope, time, budget, and quality. Some requested deliverables may even be of questionable value to the business.
  • You may not have the right project portfolio management (PPM) strategy to bring order in IT's delivery activities and to maximize business value.

Our advice

Insight

  • Many in IT mix PPM and project management. Your project management playbook does not equate to the holistic view a real PPM practice gives you.
  • Some organizations also mistake PPM for a set of processes. Processes are needed, but a real strategy works towards tangible goals.
  • PPM works at the strategic level of the company; hence executive buy-in is critical. Without executive support, any effort to reconcile supply and demand will be tough to achieve.

Impact and results 

  • PPM is a coherent business-aligned strategy that maximizes business value creation across the entire portfolio, rather than in each project.
  • Our methodology tackles the most pressing challenge upfront: get executive buy-in before you start defining your goals. With senior management behind the plan, implementation will become easier.
  • Create PPM processes that are a cultural fit for your company. Define your short and long-term goals for your strategy and support them with fully embedded portfolio management processes.

The roadmap

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

Get started.

Read our executive brief to understand why you should develop a PPM strategy and understand how our methodology can help you. We show you how we can support you.

Obtain executive buy-in for your strategy

Ensure your strategy is a cultural fit or cultural-add for your company.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 1: Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy (ppt)
  • PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator (xls)
  • PPM Strategic Plan Template (ppt)
  • PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template (xls)

Align the PPM processes to your company's strategic goals

Use the advice and tools in this stage to align the PPM processes.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 2: Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals (ppt)
  • PPM Strategy Development Tool (xls)

Refine and complete your plan

Use the inputs from the previous stages and add a cost-benefit analysis and tool recommendation.

  • Streamline Application Maintenance – Phase 3: Optimize Maintenance Capabilities (ppt)

Streamline your maintenance delivery

Define quality standards in maintenance practices. Enforce these in alignment with the governance you have set up. Show a high degree of transparency and open discussions on development challenges.

  • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 3: Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan (ppt)
  • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst (doc)

 

 

IT Service Management Selection Guide

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}488|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $29,187 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
  • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
  • Your ITSM solution that was once good enough is no longer adequate for a rapidly evolving services culture.
  • Processes and data are disconnected with multiple workarounds and don’t allow the operations team to mature processes.
  • The workarounds, disparate systems, and integrations you’ve implemented to solve IT operations issues are no longer adequate.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Accessing funding for IT solutions can be challenging when the solution isn’t obviously aligned to the business need.
  • To maximize value and stakeholder satisfaction, determine use cases early, engage the right stakeholders, and define success.
  • Choosing a solution for a single purpose and then expanding it to cover other use cases can be a very effective use of technology dollars. However, spending the time up front to determine which use cases should be included and which will need a separate best-of-breed solution will make the best use of your investment.

Impact and Result

  • Create a business case that defines use cases and requirements.
  • Shorten the list of viable vendors by matching vendors to use cases.
  • Determine which features are most important to reach your goals and select the best-matched vendor.

IT Service Management Selection Guide Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how Info-Tech’s methodology will provide a quick solution to selecting ITSM vendors and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build a business case

Create a light business case to gain buy-in and define goals, milestones, and use cases.

  • IT Service Management Business Case Template

2. Define requirements

Create your list of requirements and shortlist vendors.

  • The ITSM Vendor Evaluation Workbook
[infographic]

Establish Data Governance

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}123|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $48,494 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Data Management
  • Parent Category Link: /data-management
  • Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, as well as changing and maturing user landscapes and demands for data.
  • Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations often miss the mark.
  • Your data governance efforts should be directly aligned to delivering measurable business value by supporting key strategic initiatives, value streams, and underlying business capabilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Your organization’s value streams and their associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you may experience elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.
  • Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture.
  • Data governance must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It should not be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

Impact and Result

Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Info-Tech's approach will help you:

  • Align your data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy, and the organizational value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
  • Understand your current data governance capabilities and build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
  • Define data governance leadership, accountability, and responsibility.
  • Ensure data governance is supported by an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

Establish Data Governance Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Data Governance Research – A step-by-step document to ensure that the people handling the data are involved in the decisions surrounding data usage, data quality, business processes, and change implementation.

Data governance is a strategic program that will help your organization control data by managing the people, processes, and information technology needed to ensure that accurate and consistent data policies exist across varying lines of the business, enabling data-driven insight. This research will provide an overview of data governance and its importance to your organization, assist in making the case and securing buy-in for data governance, identify data governance best practices and the challenges associated with them, and provide guidance on how to implement data governance best practices for a successful launch.

  • Establish Data Governance – Phases 1-3

2. Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook – A structured tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

This workbook will help your organization understand the business and user context by leveraging your business capability map and value streams, develop data use cases using Info-Tech's framework for building data use cases, and gauge the current state of your organization's data culture.

  • Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

3. Data Use Case Framework Template – An exemplar template to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization. This template provides a framework for data requirements and a mapping methodology for creating use cases.

  • Data Use Case Framework Template

4. Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool – A visual roadmapping tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

This tool will help your organization plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organization.

  • Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool

5. Business Data Catalog – A comprehensive template to help you to document the key data assets that are to be governed based on in-depth business unit interviews, data risk/value assessments, and a data flow diagram for the organization.

Use this template to document information about key data assets such as data definition, source system, possible values, data sensitivity, data steward, and usage of the data.

  • Business Data Catalog

6. Data Governance Program Charter Template – A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

  • Data Governance Program Charter Template

7. Data Governance Policy

This policy establishes uniform data governance standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of your organization.

  • Data Governance Policy

8. Data Governance Exemplar – An exemplar showing how you can plan and document your data governance outputs.

Use this exemplar to understand how to establish data governance in your organization. Follow along with the sections of the blueprint Establish Data Governance and complete the document as you progress.

  • Data Governance Exemplar
[infographic]

Workshop: Establish Data Governance

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Establish Business Context and Value

The Purpose

Identify key business data assets that need to be governed.

Create a unifying vision for the data governance program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand the value of data governance and how it can help the organization better leverage its data.

Gain knowledge of how data governance can benefit both IT and the business.

Activities

1.1 Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization

1.2 Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework

1.3 Discuss vision and mission for data governance

1.4 Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams

1.5 Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities

Outputs

Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework

Vision and mission for data governance

2 Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels

The Purpose

Assess which data contains value and/or risk and determine metrics that will determine how valuable the data is to the organization.

Assess where the organization currently stands in data governance initiatives.

Determine gaps between the current and future states of the data governance program.

Key Benefits Achieved

Gain a holistic understanding of organizational data and how it flows through business units and systems.

Identify which data should fall under the governance umbrella.

Determine a practical starting point for the program.

Activities

2.1 Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity

2.2 Set target-state data governance capabilities

Outputs

Current state of data governance maturity

Definition of target state

3 Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping

The Purpose

Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organization to start enabling data-driven insights.

Determine timing of the initiatives.

Key Benefits Achieved

Establish clear direction for the data governance program.

Step-by-step outline of how to create effective data governance, with true business-IT collaboration.

Activities

3.1 Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps

3.2 Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives

3.3 Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping

Outputs

Target-state data governance initiatives

Data domain to data governance role mapping

4 Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

The Purpose

Consolidate the roadmap and other strategies to determine the plan of action from Day One.

Create the required policies, procedures, and positions for data governance to be sustainable and effective.

Key Benefits Achieved

Prioritized initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

A clearly communicated plan for data governance that will have full business backing.

Activities

4.1 Identify and prioritize next steps

4.2 Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI

4.3 Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support

Outputs

Initialized roadmap

Initialized RACI

Further reading

Establish Data Governance

Deliver measurable business value.

Executive Brief

Analyst Perspective

Establish a data governance program that brings value to your organization.

Picture of analyst

Data governance does not sit as an island on its own in the organization – it must align with and be driven by your enterprise governance. As you build out data governance in your organization, it’s important to keep in mind that this program is meant to be an enabling framework of oversight and accountabilities for managing, handling, and protecting your company’s data assets. It should never be perceived as bureaucratic or inhibiting to your data users. It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organization’s operating culture, offering clarity on who can do what with the data and via what means. Data governance is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organization. Promote and drive the responsible and ethical use of data while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of data excellence.

Crystal Singh

Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice

Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

The amount of data within organizations is growing at an exponential rate, creating a need to adopt a formal approach to governing data. However, many organizations remain uninformed on how to effectively govern their data. Comprehensive data governance should define leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling and be supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures. This will help ensure the right data gets to the right people at the right time, using the right mechanisms.

Common Obstacles

Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, and changing and maturing user landscape and demand for data. Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations miss the mark when their data governance efforts are not directly aligned to delivering measurable business value. Initiatives should support key strategic initiatives, as well as value streams and their underlying business capabilities.

Info-Tech’s Approach

Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Organizations should:

  • Align their data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy and value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
  • Understand their current data governance capabilities so as to build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
  • Define data leadership, accountability, and responsibility. Support these with an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operating costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and increased business risk.

Your challenge

This research is designed to help organizations build and sustain an effective data governance program.

  • Your organization has recognized the need to treat data as a corporate asset for generating business value and/or managing and mitigating risk.
  • This has brought data governance to the forefront and highlighted the need to build a performance-driven enterprise program for delivering quality, trusted, and readily consumable data to users.
  • An effective data governance program is one that defines leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling. It’s supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures, all of which help build and foster a culture of data excellence where the right users get access to the right data at the right time via the right mechanisms.

As you embark on establishing data governance in your organization, it’s vital to ensure from the get-go that you define the drivers and business context for the program. Data governance should never be attempted without direction on how the program will yield measurable business value.

“Data processing and cleanup can consume more than half of an analytics team’s time, including that of highly paid data scientists, which limits scalability and frustrates employees.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Image is a circle graph and 30% of it is coloured with the number 30% in the middle of the graph

“The productivity of employees across the organization can suffer.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Respondents to McKinsey’s 2019 Global Data Transformation Survey reported that an average of 30% of their total enterprise time was spent on non-value-added tasks because of poor data quality and availability. – Petzold, et al., 2020

Common obstacles

Some of the barriers that make data governance difficult to address for many organizations include:

  • Gaps in communicating the strategic value of data and data governance to the organization. This is vital for securing senior leadership buy-in and support, which, in turn, is crucial for sustained success of the data governance program.
  • Misinterpretation or a lack of understanding about data governance, including what it means for the organization and the individual data user.
  • A perception that data governance is inhibiting or an added layer of bureaucracy or complication rather than an enabling and empowering framework for stakeholders in their use and handling of data.
  • Embarking on data governance without firmly substantiating and understanding the organizational drivers for doing so. How is data governance going to support the organization’s value streams and their various business capabilities?
  • Neglecting to define and measure success and performance. Just as in any other enterprise initiative, you have to be able to demonstrate an ROI for time, resources and funding. These metrics must demonstrate the measurable business value that data governance brings to the organization.
  • Failure to align data governance with enterprise governance.
Image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

78% of companies (and 92% of top-tier companies) have a corporate initiative to become more data-driven. – Alation, 2020

Image is a circle graph and 58% of it is coloured with the number 58% in the middle of the graph

But despite these ambitions, there appears to be a “data culture disconnect” – 58% of leaders overestimate the current data culture of their enterprises, giving a grade higher than the one produced by the study. – Fregoni, 2020

The strategic value of data

Power intelligent and transformative organizational performance through leveraging data.

Respond to industry disruptors

Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

Manage operations and mitigate risk

Harness the value of your data

The journey to being data-driven

The journey to declaring that you are a data-driven organization requires a pit stop at data enablement.

The Data Economy

Data Disengaged

You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.

Data Enabled

Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimized and supported by data governance.

Data Driven

You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics; described as a “data first” organization. You’re collaborating through data. Data is an asset.

Data governance is essential for any organization that makes decisions about how it uses its data.

Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.

Data governance is:

  • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (Olavsrud, 2021).
  • True business-IT collaboration that will lead to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making. This, in turn, helps fuel innovation and growth.

If done correctly, data governance is not:

  • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done.
  • Meant to solve all data-related business or IT problems in an organization.
  • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data.

Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Create impactful data governance by embedding it within enterprise governance

A model is depicted to show the relationship between enterprise governance and data governance.

Organizational drivers for data governance

Data governance personas:

Conformance: Establishing data governance to meet regulations and compliance requirements.

Performance: Establishing data governance to fuel data-driven decision making for driving business value and managing and mitigating business risk.

Two images are depicted that show the difference between conformance and performance.

Data Governance is not a one-person show

  • Data governance needs a leader and a home. Define who is going to be leading, driving, and steering data governance in your organization.
  • Senior executive leaders play a crucial role in championing and bringing visibility to the value of data and data governance. This is vital for building and fostering a culture of data excellence.
  • Effective data governance comes with business and IT alignment, collaboration, and formally defined roles around data leadership, ownership, and stewardship.
Four circles are depicted. There is one person in the circle on the left and is labelled: Data Governance Leadership. The circle beside it has two people in it and labelled: Organizational Champions. The circle beside it has three people in it and labelled: Data Owners, Stewards & Custodians. The last circle has four people in it and labelled: The Organization & Data Storytellers.

Traditional data governance organizational structure

A traditional structure includes committees and roles that span across strategic, tactical, and operational duties. There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program, such as the focus of the data governance project and the maturity and size of the organization.

A triangular model is depicted and is split into three tiers to show the traditional data governance organizational structure.

A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data.

“Albert Einstein is said to have remarked, ‘The world cannot be changed without changing our thinking.’ What is clear is that the greatest barrier to data success today is business culture, not lagging technology. “– Randy Bean, 2020

What does it look like?

  • Everybody knows the data.
  • Everybody trusts the data.
  • Everybody talks about the data.

“It is not enough for companies to embrace modern data architectures, agile methodologies, and integrated business-data teams, or to establish centers of excellence to accelerate data initiatives, when only about 1 in 4 executives reported that their organization has successfully forged a data culture.”– Randy Bean, 2020

Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture

  • In a data-driven culture, decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.
  • Data often has untapped potential. A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the condition and sources of data, and raises the data skills and understanding among their people on the front lines.
  • Building a data culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money. This investment will not achieve the transformation you want without data literacy at the grassroots level.

Data-driven culture = “data matters to our company”

Despite investments in data initiative, organizations are carrying high levels of data debt

Data debt is “the accumulated cost that is associated with the sub-optimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.”

Data debt is a problem for 78% of organizations.

40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

66% of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

33% of organizations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

30% of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

Source: Experian, 2020

Absent or sub-optimal data governance leads to data debt

Only 3% of companies’ data meets basic quality standards. (Source: Nagle, et al., 2017)

Organizations suspect 28% of their customer and prospect data is inaccurate in some way. (Source: Experian, 2020)

Only 51% of organizations consider the current state of their CRM or ERP data to be clean, allowing them to fully leverage it. (Source: Experian, 2020)

35% of organizations say they’re not able to see a ROI for data management initiatives. (Source: Experian, 2020)

Embrace the technology

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

  • Data catalog
  • Business data glossary
  • Data lineage
  • Metadata management

While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.

Logos of data governance tools and technology.

Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

Put data governance into the context of the business:

  • Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
  • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

Don’t let measurement be an afterthought:

Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data governance program evolves.

Build a right-sized roadmap

Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organization.

Key considerations:

  • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
  • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
  • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

Sample milestones:

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

Data Governance Charter and Policies

Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

Data Culture Diagnostic

Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

Use Case Build and Prioritization

Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

Business Data Glossary

Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

Tools & Technology

Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

Key takeaways for effective business-driven data governance

Data governance leadership and sponsorship is key.

Ensure strategic business alignment.

Build and foster a culture of data excellence.

Evolve along the data journey.

Make data governance an enabler, not a hindrance.

Insight summary

Overarching insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the impact of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Insight 1

Data governance should not sit as an island in your organization. It must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It shouldn’t be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

Insight 2

Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture. Leverage the measures of success or KPIs of the underlying business capabilities to demonstrate the value data governance has yielded for the organization.

Insight 3

Data governance remains the foundation of all forms of reporting and analytics. Advanced capabilities such as AI and machine learning require effectively governed data to fuel their success.

Tactical insight

Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to your different levels of stakeholders. When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to fill the knowledge gaps about data, as they exist in your organization. It should be targeted across the board – from your executive leadership and management through to the subject matter experts across different lines of the business in your organization.

Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing data governance

1. Build Business and User Context 2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities 3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
Phase Steps
  1. Substantiate Business Drivers
  2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
  1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
  1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
Phase Outcomes
  • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
  • A business capability map for your organization
  • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
  • A strategy map tied to data governance
  • High-value use cases for data governance
  • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
  • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Blueprint deliverables

Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook data-verified=

Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Use the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook as you plan, build, roll-out, and scale data governance in your organization.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

Data Use Case Framework Template

This template takes you through a business needs gathering activity to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Business Data Glossary data-verified=

Business Data Glossary

Use this template to document the key data assets that are to be governed and create a data flow diagram for your organization.

Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard data-verified=

Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organization scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

Key deliverable:

Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Measure the value of this blueprint

Leverage this blueprint’s approach to ensure your data governance initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.

  • Aligning your data governance program and its initiatives to your organization’s business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
  • This alignment of data governance with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.
Screenshot from this blueprint on the Measurable Business Value

In phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data governance capabilities and strengths.

In phase 3, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data governance capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit

"Our team, has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

Guided Implementation

"Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

Workshop

"We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

Consulting

"Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

Establish Data Governance project overview

Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

1. Build Business and User context2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
Best-Practice Toolkit
  1. Substantiate Business Drivers
  2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
  1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
  1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
Guided Implementation
  • Call 1
  • Call 2
  • Call 3
  • Call 4
  • Call 5
  • Call 6
  • Call 7
  • Call 8
  • Call 9
Phase Outcomes
  • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
  • A business capability map for your organization
  • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
  • A strategy map tied to data governance
  • High-value use cases for data governance
  • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
  • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Guided Implementation

What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

An outline of what guided implementation looks like.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

Workshop overview

Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
Establish Business Context and Value Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State
Activities
  • Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization
  • Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework
  • Discuss vision and mission for data governance
  • Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams
  • Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities
  • Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity
  • Set target state data governance capabilities
  • Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps
  • Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives
  • Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping
  • Identify and prioritize next steps
  • Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI
  • Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support
Deliverables
  1. Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework
  2. Vision and mission for data governance
  1. Current state of data governance maturity
  2. Definition of target state
  1. Target-state data governance initiatives
  2. Data domain to data governance role mapping
  1. Initialized roadmap
  2. Initialized RACI

Phase 1

Build Business and User Context

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 1 is highlighted.

“When business users are invited to participate in the conversation around data with data users and IT, it adds a fundamental dimension — business context. Without a real understanding of how data ties back to the business, the value of analysis and insights can get lost.” – Jason Lim, Alation

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Identify Your Business Capabilities
  • Define your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities
  • Develop a Strategy Map that Aligns Business Capabilities to Your Strategic Focus

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Governance Leader/Data Leader (CDO)
  • Senior Business Leaders
  • Business SMEs
  • Data Leadership, Data Owners, Data Stewards and Custodians

Step 1.1

Substantiate Business Drivers

Activities

1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities

1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by info-Tech’s approach
  • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization
  • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Info-Tech Insight

Gaining a sound understanding of your business architecture (value streams and business capabilities) is a critical foundation for establishing and sustaining a data governance program that delivers measurable business value.

1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

Confirm your organization's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

  • If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organization creates and captures value) and their business capabilities are reflective of the organization’s current business environment.
  • If you do not have an existing business capability map, follow this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
    1. Define the organization’s value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organization creates and captures value.
    2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Input

  • List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

Output

  • Business capability map with value streams for your organization

Materials

  • Your existing business capability map or the template provided in the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook accompanying this blueprint

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Define or validate the organization’s value streams

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. These value realization activities, in turn, depend on data.

If the organization does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.1.1, you can leverage the following approach:

  • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
  • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organization?
  • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organization creates value.
  • Consider:
    • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
    • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
    • How does your organization’s products and/or services help them accomplish that?
    • What are the benefits your organization delivers to them and how does your organization deliver those benefits?
    • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the possibilities of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

Example of value streams – Retail Banking

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for retail banking.

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example of value streams – Higher Education

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for higher education

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example of value streams – Local Government

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for local government

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example of value streams – Manufacturing

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

Model example of value streams for manufacturing

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Example of value streams – Retail

Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

Example value stream descriptions for: Retail

Model example of value streams for retail

Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

Define the organization’s business capabilities in a business capability map

A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.”

If your organization doesn’t already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

Working with the stakeholders as described above:

  • Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them.
  • Consider: What is the objective of your value stream? (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
  • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don’t start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
  • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organization, remove the ones that don’t, and add any needed.

Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

Info-Tech Insight

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Example business capability map – Retail Banking

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

Model example business capability map for retail banking

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

Example business capability map – Higher Education

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Higher Education

Model example business capability map for higher education

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

Example business capability map – Local Government

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Local Government

Model example business capability map for local government

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

Example business capability map – Manufacturing

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

Model example business capability map for manufacturing

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

Example business capability map - Retail

A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

Info-Tech Tip:

Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

Example business capability map for: Retail

Model example business capability map for retail

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Capabilities

Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organization.

  1. Categorize or heatmap the organization’s key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorize and prioritize the business’ capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritizing capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
  2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organization. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize programs that support them.
  3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organization an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

This categorization/prioritization exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritization, and the overall optimization of data and data governance.

Input

  • Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organization

Output

  • Business capabilities categorized and prioritized (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk)

Materials

  • Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in the previous activity

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

  • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
  • The business’ priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organization’s competitive advantage creators.

Example: Retail

Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business-data governance alignment. It’s important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organization have been identified and are well understood.

  1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
  2. Leverage their knowledge of the organization’s business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organization.
  3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

Guide to creating your map: Starting with strategic objectives, map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance to initiatives that support those capabilities. This is one approach to help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

Input

  • Strategic objectives as outlined by the organization’s business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

Output

  • A strategy map that maps your organizational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data program

Materials

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

Download Info-Tech’s Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

Example of a strategy map tied to data governance

  • Strategic objectives are the outcomes that the organization is looking to achieve.
  • Value streams enable an organization to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
  • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
  • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap and which will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

Info-Tech Tip:

Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

Example: Retail

Example of a strategy map tied to data governance for retail

For this strategy map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

Step 1.2

Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance

Activities

1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Leveraging your categorized business capability map to conduct deep-dive sessions with key business stakeholders for creating high-value uses cases
  • Discussing current challenges, risks, and opportunities associated with the use of data across the lines of business
  • Exploring which other business capabilities, stakeholder groups, and business units will be impacted

Outcomes of this step

  • Relevant use cases that articulate the data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed ,will deliver value to the organization

Info-Tech Tip

One of the most important aspects when building use cases is to ensure you include KPIs or measures of success. You have to be able to demonstrate how the use case ties back to the organizational priorities or delivers measurable business value. Leverage the KPIs and success factors of the business capabilities tied to each particular use case.

1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

  1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well as the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
  2. Leverage Info-Tech’s framework for data requirements and methodology for creating use cases, as outlined in the Data Use Case Framework Template and seen on the next slide.
  3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the Use Case Worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
  4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template
  5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

Tip: Don’t conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

Input

  • Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders
  • Business stakeholders’ subject area expertise
  • Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

Output

  • Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence if addressed will deliver measurable value to the organization.

Materials

  • Your business capability map from activity 1.1.1
  • Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template
  • Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
  • Markers/pens

Participants

  • Key business stakeholders
  • Data stewards and business SMEs
  • Data custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group

Download Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

Info-Tech’s Framework for Building Use Cases

Objective: This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

Leveraging your business capability map, build use cases that align with the organization’s key business capabilities.

Consider:

  • Is the business capability a cost advantage creator or an industry differentiator?
  • Is the business capability currently underserved by data?
  • Does this need to be addressed? If so, is this risk- or value-driven?

Info-Tech’s Data Requirements and Mapping Methodology for Creating Use Cases

  1. What business capability (or capabilities) is this use case tied to for your business area(s)?
  2. What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?
  3. What are the steps in this process/activity today?
  4. What are the applications/systems used at each step today?
  5. What data domains are involved, created, used, and/or transformed at each step today?
  6. What does an ideal or improved state look like?
  7. What other business units, business capabilities, activities, and/or processes will be impacted or improved if this issue was solved?
  8. Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?
  9. What are the risks to the organization (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?
  10. What compliance, regulatory, and/or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
  11. What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (such as KPIs, ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

The resulting use cases are to be prioritized and leveraged for informing the business case and the data governance capabilities optimization plan.

Taken from Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

Phase 2

Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 2 is highlighted.

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
  • Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Leadership
  • Data Ownership & Stewardship
  • Policies & Procedures
  • Data Literacy & Culture
  • Operating Model
  • Data Management
  • Data Privacy & Security
  • Enterprise Projects & Services

Step 2.1

Understand the Key Components of Data Governance

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Understanding the core components of an effective data governance program and determining your organization’s current capabilities in these areas:
    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Operating Model
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

Outcomes of this step

  • An understanding the core components of an effective data governance program
  • An understanding your organization’s current data governance capabilities

Review: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Key components of data governance

A well-defined data governance program will deliver:

  • Defined accountability and responsibility for data.
  • Improved knowledge and common understanding of the organization’s data assets.
  • Elevated trust and confidence in traceable data.
  • Improved data ROI and reduced data debt.
  • An enabling framework for supporting the ethical use and handling of data.
  • A foundation for building and fostering a data-driven and data-literate organizational culture.

The key components of establishing sustainable enterprise data governance, taken from Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework:

  • Data Leadership
  • Data Ownership & Stewardship
  • Operating Model
  • Policies & Procedures
  • Data Literacy & Culture
  • Data Management
  • Data Privacy & Security
  • Enterprise Projects & Services

Data Leadership

  • Data governance needs a dedicated head or leader to steer the organization’s data governance program.
  • For organizations that do have a chief data officer (CDO), their office is the ideal and effective home for data governance.
  • Heads of data governance also have titles such as director of data governance, director of data quality, and director of analytics.
  • The head of your data governance program works with all stakeholders and partners to ensure there is continuous enterprise governance alignment and oversight and to drive the program’s direction.
  • While key stakeholders from the business and IT will play vital data governance roles, the head of data governance steers the various components, stakeholders, and initiatives, and provides oversight of the overall program.
  • Vital data governance roles include: data owners, data stewards, data custodians, data governance steering committee (or your organization’s equivalent), and any data governance working group(s).

The role of the CDO: the voice of data

The office of the chief data officer (CDO):

  • Has a cross-organizational vision and strategy for data.
  • Owns and drives the data strategy; ensures it supports the overall organizational strategic direction and business goals.
  • Leads the organizational data initiatives, including data governance
  • Is accountable for the policy, strategy, data standards, and data literacy necessary for the organization to operate effectively.
  • Educates users and leaders about what it means to be “data-driven.”
  • Builds and fosters a culture of data excellence.

“Compared to most of their C-suite colleagues, the CDO is faced with a unique set of problems. The role is still being defined. The chief data officer is bringing a new dimension and focus to the organization: ‘data.’ ”

– Carruthers and Jackson, 2020

Who does the CDO report to?

Example reporting structure.
  • The CDO should be a true C- level executive.
  • Where the organization places the CDO role in the structure sends an important signal to the business about how much it values data.

“The title matters. In my opinion, you can’t have a CDO without executive authority. Otherwise no one will listen.”

– Anonymous European CDO

“The reporting structure depends on who’s the ‘glue’ that ties together all these uniquely skilled individuals.”

– John Kemp, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

Data Ownership & Stewardship

Who are best suited to be data owners?

  • Wherever they may sit in your organization, data owners will typically have the highest stake in that data.
  • Data owners need to be suitably senior and have the necessary decision-making power.
  • They have the highest interest in the related business data domain, whether they are the head of a business unit or the head of a line of business that produces data or consumes data (or both).
  • If they are neither of these, it’s unlikely they will have the interest in the data (in terms of its quality, protection, ethical use, and handling, for instance) necessary to undertake and adopt the role effectively.

Data owners are typically senior business leaders with the following characteristics:

  • Positioned to accept accountability for their data domain.
  • Hold authority and influence to affect change, including across business processes and systems, needed to improve data quality, use, handling, integration, etc.
  • Have access to a budget and resources for data initiatives such as resolving data quality issues, data cleansing initiatives, business data catalog build, related tools and technology, policy management, etc.
  • Hold the influence needed to drive change in behavior and culture.
  • Act as ambassadors of data and its value as an organizational strategic asset.

Right-size your data governance organizational structure

  • Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program such as the focus of the data governance project as well as the maturity and size of the organization.
  • Your data governance structure has to work for your organization, and it has to evolve as the organization evolves.
  • Formulate your blend of data governance roles, committees, councils, and cross-functional groups, that make sense for your organization.
  • Your data governance organizational structure should not add complexity or bureaucracy to your organization’s data landscape; it should support and enable your principle of treating data as an asset.

There is no one-size-fits-all data governance organizational structure.

Example of a Data Governance Organizational Structure

Critical roles and responsibilities for data governance

Data Governance Working Groups

Data governance working groups:

  • Are cross-functional teams
  • Deliver on data governance projects, initiatives, and ad hoc review committees.

Data Stewards

Traditionally, data stewards:

  • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to adherence to standards/procedures, monitoring data quality, raising issues identified, etc.
  • Are responsible for managing access, quality, escalating issues, etc.

Data Custodians

  • Traditionally, data custodians:
  • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to data and database administration.
  • Support the management of access, data quality, escalating issues, etc.
  • Are SMEs from IT and database administration.

Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Enabling business capabilities with data governance role definitions

Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Operating Model

Your operating model is the key to designing and operationalizing a form of data governance that delivers measurable business value to your organization.

“Generate excitement for data: When people are excited and committed to the vision of data enablement, they’re more likely to help ensure that data is high quality and safe.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Operating Model

Defining your data governance operating model will help create a well-oiled program that sustainably delivers value to the organization and manages risks while building and fostering a culture of data excellence along the way. Some organizations are able to establish a formal data governance office, whether independent or attached to the office of the chief data officer. Regardless of how you are organized, data governance requires a home, a leader, and an operating model to ensure its sustainability and evolution.

Examples of focus areas for your operating model:

  • Delivery: While there are core tenets to every data governance program, there is a level of variability in the implementation of data governance programs across organizations, sectors, and industries. Every organization has its own particular drivers and mandates, so the level and rigor applied will also vary.
  • The key is to determine what style will work best in your organization, taking into consideration your organizational culture, executive leadership support (present and ongoing), catalysts such as other enterprise-wide transformative and modernization initiatives, and/or regulatory and compliances drivers.

  • Communication: Communication is vital across all levels and stakeholder groups. For instance, there needs to be communication from the data governance office up to senior leadership, as well as communication within the data governance organization, which is typically made up of the data governance steering committee, data governance council, executive sponsor/champion, data stewards, and data custodians and working groups.
  • Furthermore, communication with the wider organization of data producers, users, and consumers is one of the core elements of the overall data governance communications plan.

Communication is vital for ensuring acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users as well as for sharing success stories of the program.

Operating Model

Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.

“Leading organizations invest in change management to build data supporters and convert the skeptics. This can be the most difficult part of the program, as it requires motivating employees to use data and encouraging producers to share it (and ideally improve its quality at the source)[.]” – Petzold, et al., 2020

Operating Model

Examples of focus areas for your operating model (continued):

  • Change management and issue resolution: Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption, with governance recommendations and future state requiring potentially significant business change. This may include a redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units, which will require tweaking the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data.
  • Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the steps necessary to adapt and reduce potential confrontation. By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

  • Performance measuring, monitoring and reporting: Measuring and reporting on performance, successes, and realization of tangible business value are a must for sustaining, growing, and scaling your data governance program.
  • Aligning your data governance to the organization's value realization activities enables you to leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with your senior business leadership.

Info-Tech Tip:

Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Policies, Procedures & Standards

“Data standards are the rules by which data are described and recorded. In order to share, exchange, and understand data, we must standardize the format as well as the meaning.” – U.S. Geological Survey

Policies, Procedures & Standards

  • When defining, updating, or refreshing your data policies, procedures, and standards, ensure they are relevant, serve a purpose, and/or support the use of data in the organization.
  • Avoid the common pitfall of building out a host of policies, procedures, and standards that are never used or followed by users and therefore don’t bring value or serve to mitigate risk for the organization.
  • Data policies can be thought of as formal statements and are typically created, approved, and updated by the organization’s data decision-making body (such as a data governance steering committee).
  • Data standards and procedures function as actions, or rules, that support the policies and their statements.
  • Standards and procedures are designed to standardize the processes during the overall data lifecycle. Procedures are instructions to achieve the objectives of the policies. The procedures are iterative and will be updated with approval from your data governance committee as needed.
  • Your organization’s data policies, standards, and procedures should not bog down or inhibit users; rather, they should enable confident data use and handling across the overall data lifecycle. They should support more effective and seamless data capture, integration, aggregation, sharing, and retention of data in the organization.

Examples of data policies:

  • Data Classification Policy
  • Data Retention Policy
  • Data Entry Policy
  • Data Backup Policy
  • Data Provenance Policy
  • Data Management Policy

Data Domain Documentation

Select the correct granularity for your business need

Diagram of data domain documentation
Sources: Dataversity; Atlan; Analytics8

Data Domain Documentation Examples

Data Domain Documentation Examples

Data Culture

“Organizational culture can accelerate the application of analytics, amplify its power, and steer companies away from risky outcomes.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data and to building and sustaining an effective data governance program.

What does a healthy data culture look like?

  • Everybody knows the data.
  • Everybody trusts the data.
  • Everybody talks about the data.

Building a culture of data excellence.

Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand your organization’s culture around data.

Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for more information on the Data Culture Diagnostic

Cultivating a data-driven culture is not easy

“People are at the heart of every culture, and one of the biggest challenges to creating a data culture is bringing everyone into the fold.” – Lim, Alation

It cannot be purchased or manufactured,

It must be nurtured and developed,

And it must evolve as the business, user, and data landscapes evolve.

“Companies that have succeeded in their data-driven efforts understand that forging a data culture is a relentless pursuit, and magic bullets and bromides do not deliver results.” – Randy Bean, 2020

Hallmarks of a data-driven culture

There is a trusted, single source of data the whole company can draw from.

There’s a business glossary and data catalog and users know what the data fields mean.

Users have access to data and analytics tools. Employees can leverage data immediately to resolve a situation, perform an activity, or make a decision – including frontline workers.

Data literacy, the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner, is high.

Data is used for decision making. The company encourages decisions based on objective data and the intelligent application of it.

A data-driven culture requires a number of elements:

  • High-quality data
  • Broad access and data literacy
  • Data-driven decision-making processes
  • Effective communication

Data Literacy

Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture.

  • Building a data-driven culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money.
  • This investment will not realize its full return without building up the organization’s data literacy.
  • Data literacy is about filling data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.
  • It’s about ensuring all users – senior leadership right through to core users – are equipped with appropriate levels of training, skills, understanding, and awareness around the organization’s data and the use of associated tools and technologies. Data literacy ensures users have the data they need and they know how to interpret and leverage it.
  • Data literacy drives the appetite, demand, and consumption for data.
  • A data-literate culture is one where the users feel confident and skilled in their use of data, leveraging it for making informed or evidence-based decisions and generating insights for the organization.

Data Management

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to all of the core components that make up data management:
    • Data quality management
    • Data architecture management
    • Data platform
    • Data integration
    • Data operations management
    • Data risk management
    • Reference and master data management (MDM)
    • Document and content management
    • Metadata management
    • Business intelligence (BI), reporting, analytics and advanced analytics, artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML)
  • Key tools such as the business data glossary and data catalog are vital for operationalizing data governance and in supporting data management disciplines such as data quality management, metadata management, and MDM as well as BI, reporting, and analytics.

Enterprise Projects & Services

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to enterprise projects and services that require, use, share, sell, and/or rely on data for their viability and, ultimately, their success.
  • Folding or embedding data governance into the organization’s project management function or project management office (PMO) serves to ensure that, for any initiative, suitable consideration is given to how data is treated.
  • This may include defining parameters, following standards and procedures around bringing in new sources of data, integrating that data into the organization’s data ecosystem, using and sharing that data, and retaining that data post-project completion.
  • The data governance function helps to identify and manage any ethical issues, whether at the start of the project and/or throughout.
  • It provides a foundation for asking relevant questions as it relates to the use or incorporation of data in delivering the specific project or service. Do we know where the data obtained from? Do we have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used? What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with our intended use of that data? Are we positioned to mitigate those risks?
  • Mature data governance creates organizations where the above considerations around data management and the ethical use and handling of data is routinely implemented across the business and in the rollout and delivery of projects and services.

Data Privacy & Security

  • Data governance supports the organization’s data privacy and security functions.
  • Key tools include the data classification policy and standards and defined roles around data ownership and data stewardship. These are vital for operationalizing data governance and supporting data privacy, security, and the ethical use and handling of data.
  • While some organizations may have a dedicated data security and privacy group, data governance provides an added level of oversight in this regard.
  • Some of the typical checks and balances include ensuring:
    • There are policies and procedures in place to restrict and monitor staff’s access to data (one common way this is done is according to job descriptions and responsibilities) and that these comply with relevant laws and regulations.
    • There’s a data classification scheme in place where data has been classified on a hierarchy of sensitivity (e.g. top secret, confidential, internal, limited, public).
    • The organization has a comprehensive data security framework, including administrative, physical, and technical procedures for addressing data security issues (e.g. password management and regular training).
    • Risk assessments are conducted, including an evaluation of risks and vulnerabilities related to intentional and unintentional misuse of data.
    • Policies and procedures are in place to mitigate the risks associated with incidents such as data breaches.
    • The organization regularly audits and monitors its data security.

Ethical Use & Handling of Data

Data governance will support your organization’s ethical use and handling of data by facilitating definition around important factors, such as:

  • What are the various data assets in the organization and what purpose(s) can they be used for? Are there any limitations?
  • Who is the related data owner? Who holds accountability for that data? Who will be answerable?
  • Where was the data obtained from? What is the intended use of that data? Do you have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used?
  • What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with the use of that data?

Ethical Use & Handling of Data

  • Data governance serves as an enabler to the ethical use and handling of an organization’s data.
  • The Open Data Institute (ODI) defines data ethics as: “A branch of ethics that evaluates data practices with the potential to adversely impact on people and society – in data collection, sharing and use.”
  • Data ethics relates to good practice around how data is collected, used and shared. It’s especially relevant when data activities have the potential to impact people and society, whether directly or indirectly (Open Data Institute, 2019).
  • A failure to handle and use data ethically can negatively impact an organization’s direct stakeholders and/or the public at large, lead to a loss of trust and confidence in the organization's products and services, lead to financial loss, and impact the organization’s brand, reputation, and legal standing.
  • Data governance plays a vital role in building and managing your data assets, knowing what data you have, and knowing the limitations of that data. Data ownership, data stewardship, and your data governance decision-making body are key tenets and foundational components of your data governance. They enable an organization to define, categorize, and confidently make decisions about its data.

Step 2.2

Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

Activities

2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Conduct a data culture survey or leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to increase your understanding of your organization’s data culture

Outcomes of this step

  • An understanding of your organizational data culture

2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

Conduct a Data Culture Survey or Diagnostic

The objectives of conducting a data culture survey are to increase the understanding of the organization's data culture, your users’ appetite for data, and their appreciation for data in terms of governance, quality, accessibility, ownership, and stewardship. To perform a data culture survey:

  1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
  2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
  3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
  4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

Input

  • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

Output

  • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
  • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

Materials

Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

Participants

  • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
  • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
  • Core data users and consumers

Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

Phase 3

Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan

Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 3 is highlighted.

“Achieving data success is a journey, not a sprint.” Companies that set a clear course, with reasonable expectations and phased results over a period of time, get to the destination faster.” – Randy Bean, 2020

This phase will guide you through the following activities:

  • Build your Data Governance Roadmap
  • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

This phase involves the following participants:

  • Data Governance Leadership
  • Data Owners/Data Stewards
  • Data Custodians
  • Data Governance Working Group(s)

Step 3.1

Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan

This step will guide you through the following activities:

  • Build your data governance roadmap
  • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

Outcomes of this step

  • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

Build a right-sized roadmap

Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right sized to deliver value in your organization.

Key considerations:

  • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
  • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
  • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

Sample milestones:

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

Data Governance Charter and Policies

Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

Data Culture Diagnostic

Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

Use Case Build and Prioritization

Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

Business Data Glossary/Catalog

Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

Tools & Technology

Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

Recall: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

Build an actionable roadmap

Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Division

Define key roles for getting started.

Use Case Build & Prioritization

Start small and then scale – deliver early wins.

Literacy Program

Start understanding data knowledge gaps, building the program, and delivering.

Tools & Technology

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you.

Key components of your data governance roadmap

By now, you have assessed current data governance environment and capabilities. Use this assessment, coupled with the driving needs of your business, to plot your data Governance roadmap accordingly.

Sample data governance roadmap milestones:

  • Define data governance leadership.
  • Define and formalize data ownership and stewardship (as well as the role IT/data management will play as data custodians).
  • Build/confirm your business capability map and data domains.
  • Build business data use cases specific to business capabilities.
  • Define business measures/KPIs for the data governance program (i.e. metrics by use case that are relevant to business capabilities).
  • Data management:
    • Build your data glossary or catalog starting with identified and prioritized terms.
    • Define data domains.
  • Design and define the data governance operating model (oversight model definition, communication plan, internal marketing such as townhalls, formulate change management plan, RFP of data governance tool and technology options for supporting data governance and its administration).
  • Data policies and procedures:
    • Formulate, update, refresh, consolidate, rationalize, and/or retire data policies and procedures.
    • Define policy management and administration framework (i.e. roll-out, maintenance, updates, adherence, system to be used).
  • Conduct Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic or survey (across all levels of the organization).
  • Define and formalize the data literacy program (build modules, incorporate into LMS, plan lunch and learn sessions).
  • Data privacy and security: build data classification policy, define classification standards.
  • Enterprise projects and services: embed data governance in the organization’s PMO, conduct “Data Governance 101” for the PMO.

Defining data governance roles and organizational structure at Organization

The approach employed for defining the data governance roles and supporting organizational structure for .

Key Considerations:

  • The data owner and data steward roles are formally defined and documented within the organization. Their involvement is clear, well-defined, and repeatable.
  • There are data owners and data stewards for each data domain within the organization. The data steward role is given to someone with a high degree of subject matter expertise.
  • Data owners and data stewards are effective in their roles by ensuring that their data domain is clean and free of errors and that they protect the organization against data loss.
  • Data owners and data stewards have the authority to make final decisions on data definitions, formats, and standard processes that apply to their respective data sets. Data owners and data stewards have authority regarding who has access to certain data.
  • Data owners and data stewards are not from the IT side of the organization. They understand the lifecycle of the data (how it is created, curated, retrieved, used, archived, and destroyed) and they are well-versed in any compliance requirements as it relates to their data.
  • The data custodian role is formally defined and is given to the relevant IT expert. This is an individual with technical administrative and/or operational responsibility over data (e.g. a DBA).
  • A data governance steering committee exists and is comprised of well-defined roles, responsibilities, executive sponsors, business representatives, and IT experts.
  • The data governance steering committee works to provide oversight and enforce policies, procedures, and standards for governing data.
  • The data governance working group has cross-functional representation. This comprises business and IT representation, as well as project management and change management where applicable: data stewards, data custodians, business subject matter experts, PM, etc.).
  • Data governance meetings are coordinated and communicated about. The meeting agenda is always clear and concise, and meetings review pressing data-related issues. Meeting minutes are consistently documented and communicated.

Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Info-Tech Insight

Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

Enable business capabilities with data governance role definitions.

Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

Consider your technology options:

Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

  • Data catalog
  • Business data glossary
  • Data lineage
  • Metadata management

Logos of data governance tools and technology.

These are some of the data governance tools and technology players. Check out SoftwareReviews for help making better software decisions.

Make the data steward the catalyst for organizational change and driving data culture

The data steward must be empowered and backed politically with decision-making authority, or the role becomes stale and powerless.

Ensuring compliance can be difficult. Data stewards may experience pushback from stakeholders who must deliver on the policies, procedures, and processes that the data steward enforces.

Because the data steward must enforce data processes and liaise with so many different people and departments within the organization, the data steward role should be their primary full-time job function – where possible.

However, in circumstances where budget doesn’t allow a full-time data steward role, develop these skills within the organization by adding data steward responsibilities to individuals who are already managing data sets for their department or line of business.

Info-Tech Tip

A stewardship role is generally more about managing the cultural change that data governance brings. This requires the steward to have exceptional interpersonal skills that will assist in building relationships across departmental boundaries and ensuring that all stakeholders within the organization believe in the initiative, understand the anticipated outcomes, and take some level of responsibility for its success.

Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communication plan in place to manage change

Create awareness of your data governance program. Use knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

Data governance initiatives must contain a strong organizational disruption component. A clear and concise communication strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

Attempting to implement change without an effective communication plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

Info-Tech Insight

Launching a data governance initiative is guaranteed to disrupt the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Create a common data governance vision that is consistently communicated to the organization

A data governance program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

To create a strong vision for data governance, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organization wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.

Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.

The data governance program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organization continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organization grows and data needs evolve.

Info-Tech Tips

  • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
  • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data governance.
  • Brainstorm guiding principles for data and understand the overall value to the organization.

Develop a compelling data governance communications plan to get all departmental lines of business on board

A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

A successful data governance communications plan involves making the initiative visible and promoting staff awareness. Educate the team on how data is collected, distributed, and used, what internal processes use data, and how that data is used across departmental boundaries.

By demonstrating how data governance will affect staff directly, you create a deeper level of understanding across lines of business, and ultimately, a higher level of acceptance for new processes, rules, and guidelines.

A clear and concise communications strategy will raise the profile of data governance within the organization, and staff will understand how the program will benefit them and how they can share in the success of the initiative. This will end up providing support for the initiative across the board.

A proactive communications plan will:

  • Assist in overcoming issues with data control, stalemates between stakeholder units, and staff resistance.
  • Provide a formalized process for implementing new policies, rules, guidelines, and technologies, and managing organizational data.
  • Detail data ownership and accountability for decision making, and identify and resolve data issues throughout the organization.
  • Encourage acceptance and support of the initiative.

Info-Tech Tip

Focus on literacy and communication: include training in the communication plan. Providing training for data users on the correct procedures for updating and verifying the accuracy of data, data quality, and standardized data policies will help validate how data governance will benefit them and the organization.

Leverage the data governance program to communicate and promote the value of data within the organization

The data governance program is responsible for continuously promoting the value of data to the organization. The data governance program should seek a variety of ways to educate the organization and data stakeholders on the benefit of data management.

Even if data policies and procedures are created, they will be highly ineffective if they are not properly communicated to the data producers and users alike.

There needs to be a communication plan that highlights how the data producer and user will be affected, what their new responsibilities are, and the value of that change.

To learn how to manage organizational change, refer to Info-Tech’s Master Organizational Change Management Practices.

Understand what makes for an effective policy for data governance

It can be difficult to understand what a policy is, and what it is not. Start by identifying the differences between a policy and standards, guidelines, and procedures.

Diagram of an effective policy for data governance

The following are key elements of a good policy:

Heading Descriptions
Purpose Describes the factors or circumstances that mandate the existence of the policy. Also states the policy’s basic objectives and what the policy is meant to achieve.
Scope Defines to whom and to what systems this policy applies. Lists the employees required to comply or simply indicates “all” if all must comply. Also indicates any exclusions or exceptions, i.e. those people, elements, or situations that are not covered by this policy or where special consideration may be made.
Definitions Define any key terms, acronyms, or concepts that will be used in the policy. A standard glossary approach is sufficient.
Policy Statements Describe the rules that comprise the policy. This typically takes the form of a series of short prescriptive and proscriptive statements. Sub-dividing this section into sub-sections may be required depending on the length or complexity of the policy.
Non-Compliance Clearly describe consequences (legal and/or disciplinary) for employee non-compliance with the policy. It may be pertinent to describe the escalation process for repeated non-compliance.
Agreement Confirms understanding of the policy and provides a designated space to attest to the document.

Leverage myPolicies, Info-Tech’s web-based application for managing your policies and procedures

Most organizations have problems with policy management. These include:

  1. Policies are absent or out of date
  2. Employees largely unaware of policies in effect
  3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced
  4. Policies are in multiple locations
  5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist
  6. Policies managed inconsistently across different silos
  7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors
  8. Inadequate policy training program
  9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum
  10. Weak policy support from senior management

Technology should be used as a means to solve these problems and effectively monitor, enforce, and communicate policies.

Product Overview

myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms. Our solution provides policy managers with the tools they need to mitigate the risk of sanctions and reduce the administrative burden of policy management. It also enables employees to find the documents relevant to them and build a culture of compliance.

Some key success factors for policy management include:

  • Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.
  • Link this repository to other policies’ taxonomies of your organization. E.g. HR policies to provide a single interface for employees to access guidance across the organization.
  • Reassess policies annually at a minimum. myPolicies can remind you to update the organization’s policies at the appropriate time.
  • Make the repository searchable and easily navigable.
  • myPolicies helps you do all this and more.
myPolicies logo myPolicies

Enforce data policies to promote consistency of business processes

Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

  • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
  • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
  • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

Examples of Data Policies

Trust

  • Data Cleansing and Quality Policy
  • Data Entry Policy

Availability

  • Acceptable Use Policy
  • Data Backup Policy

Security

  • Data Security Policy
  • Password Policy Template
  • User Authorization, Identification, and Authentication Policy Template
  • Data Protection Policy

Compliance

  • Archiving Policy
  • Data Classification Policy
  • Data Retention Policy

Leverage data management-related policies to standardize your data management practices

Info-Tech’s Data Management Policy:

This policy establishes uniform data management standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of the organization. This policy applies to all critical data and to all staff who may be creators and/or users of such data.

Info-Tech’s Data Entry Policy:

The integrity and quality of data and evidence used to inform decision making is central to both the short-term and long-term health of an organization. It is essential that required data be sourced appropriately and entered into databases and applications in an accurate and complete manner to ensure the reliability and validity of the data and decisions made based on the data.

Info-Tech’s Data Provenance Policy:

Create policies to keep your data's value, such as:

  • Only allow entry of data from reliable sources.
  • Employees entering and accessing data must observe requirements for capturing/maintaining provenance metadata.
  • Provenance metadata will be used to track the lifecycle of data from creation through to disposal.

Info-Tech’s Data Integration and Virtualization Policy:

This policy aims to assure the organization, staff, and other interested parties that data integration, replication, and virtualization risks are taken seriously. Staff must use the policy (and supporting guidelines) when deciding whether to integrate, replicate, or virtualize data sets.

Select the right mix of metrics to successfully supervise data policies and processes

Policies are only as good as your level of compliance. Ensure supervision controls exist to oversee adherence to policies and procedures.

Although they can be highly subjective, metrics are extremely important to data governance success.

  • Establishing metrics that measure the performance of a specific process or data set will:
    • Create a greater degree of ownership from data stewards and data owners.
    • Help identify underperforming individuals.
    • Allow the steering committee to easily communicate tailored objectives to individual data stewards and owners.
  • Be cautious when establishing metrics. The wrong metrics can have negative repercussions.
    • They will likely draw attention to an aspect of the process that doesn’t align with the initial strategy.
    • Employees will work hard and grow frustrated as their successes aren’t accurately captured.

Policies are great to have from a legal perspective, but unless they are followed, they will not benefit the organization.

  • One of the most useful metrics for policies is currency. This tracks how up to date the policy is and how often employees are informed about the policy. Often, a policy will be introduced and then ignored. Policies must be continuously reviewed by management and employees.
  • Some other metrics include adherence (including performance in tests for adherence) and impacts from non-adherence.

Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

Establish data standards and procedures for use across all organizational lines of business

A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

  • Data management procedures are the methods, techniques, and steps to accomplish a specific data objective. Creating standard data definitions should be one of the first tasks for a data governance steering committee.
  • Data moves across all departmental boundaries and lines of business within the organization. These definitions must be developed as a common set of standards that can be accepted and used enterprise wide.
  • Consistent data standards and definitions will improve data flow across departmental boundaries and between lines of business.
  • Ensure these standards and definitions are used uniformly throughout the organization to maintain reliable and useful data.

Data standards and procedural guidelines will vary from company to company.

Examples include:

  • Data modeling and architecture standards.
  • Metadata integration and usage procedures.
  • Data security standards and procedures.
  • Business intelligence standards and procedures.

Info-Tech Tip

Have a fundamental data definition model for the entire business to adhere to. Those in the positions that generate and produce data must follow the common set of standards developed by the steering committee and be accountable for the creation of valid, clean data.

Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communications plan in place to manage change

Create awareness of your data governance program, using knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption. A clear and concise communications strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

Info-Tech Tip

Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

Additional Support

If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

Picture of analyst

Contact your account representative for more information.

workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

Screenshot of example data governance strategy map.

Build Your Business and User Context

Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data governance strategy map, aligning data governance initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.

Screenshot of Data governance roadmap

Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

Develop a data governance future state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

Related Info-Tech Research

Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

Create a Data Management Roadmap

Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

The First 100 Days as CDO

Be the voice of data in a time of transformation.

Research Contributors

Name Position Company
David N. Weber Executive Director - Planning, Research and Effectiveness Palm Beach State College
Izabela Edmunds Information Architect Mott MacDonald
Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group
Valence Howden Principal Research Director, CIO Info-Tech Research Group

Bibliography

Alation. “The Alation State of Data Culture Report – Q3 2020.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Allott, Joseph, et al. “Data: The next wave in forestry productivity.” McKinsey & Company, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Bean, Randy. “Why Culture Is the Greatest Barrier to Data Success.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 30 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Brence, Thomas. “Overcoming the Operationalization Challenge with Data Governance at New York Life.” Informatica, 18 March 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Bullmore, Simon, and Stuart Coleman. “ODI Inside Business – a checklist for leaders.” Open Data Institute, 19 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Canadian Institute for Health Information. “Developing and implementing accurate national standards for Canadian health care information.” Canadian Institute for Health Information. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Carruthers, Caroline, and Peter Jackson. “The Secret Ingredients of the Successful CDO.” IRM UK Connects, 23 Feb. 2017.

Dashboards. “Useful KPIs for Healthy Hospital Quality Management.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Dashboards. “Why (and How) You Should Improve Data Literacy in Your Organization Today.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Datapine. “Healthcare Key Performance Indicators and Metrics.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Datapine. “KPI Examples & Templates: Measure what matters the most and really impacts your success.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Diaz, Alejandro, et al. “Why data culture matters.” McKinsey Quarterly, Sept. 2018. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Everett, Dan. “Chief Data Officer (CDO): One Job, Four Roles.” Informatica, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Fregoni, Silvia. “New Research Reveals Why Some Business Leaders Still Ignore the Data.” Silicon Angle, 1 Oct. 2020.

Informatica. Holistic Data Governance: A Framework for Competitive Advantage. Informatica, 2017. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Knight, Michelle. “What Is a Data Catalog?” Dataversity, 28 Dec. 2017. Web.

Lim, Jason. “Alation 2020.3: Getting Business Users in the Game.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

McDonagh, Mariann. “Automating Data Governance.” Erwin, 29 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

NewVantage Partners. Data-Driven Business Transformation: Connecting Data/AI Investment to Business Outcomes. NewVantage Partners, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Olavsrud, Thor. “What is data governance? A best practices framework for managing data assets.” CIO.com, 18 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “Introduction to data ethics and the data ethics canvas.” Open Data Institute, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “The UK National Data Strategy 2020: doing data ethically.” Open Data Institute, 17 Nov. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Open Data Institute. “What is the Data Ethics Canvas?” Open Data Institute, 3 July 2019. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Pathak, Rahul. “Becoming a Data-Driven Enterprise: Meeting the Challenges, Changing the Culture.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 28 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Redman, Thomas, et al. “Only 3% of Companies’ Data Meets Basic Quality Standards.” Harvard Business Review. 11 Sept 2017.

Petzold, Bryan, et al. “Designing data governance that delivers value.” McKinsey & Company, 26 June 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Smaje, Kate. “How six companies are using technology and data to transform themselves.” McKinsey & Company, 12 Aug. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Talend. “The Definitive Guide to Data Governance.” Talend. Accessed 25 June 2021.

“The Powerfully Simple Modern Data Catalog.” Atlan, 2021. Web.

U.S. Geological Survey. “Data Management: Data Standards.” U.S. Geological Survey. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Waller, David. “10 Steps to Creating a Data-Driven Culture.” Harvard Business Review, 6 Feb. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

“What is the Difference Between A Business Glossary, A Data Dictionary, and A Data Catalog, and How Do They Play A Role In Modern Data Management?” Analytics8, 23 June 2021. Web.

Wikipedia. “RFM (market research).” Wikipedia. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Windheuser, Christoph, and Nina Wainwright. “Data in a Modern Digital Business.” Thoughtworks, 12 May 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Wright, Tom. “Digital Marketing KPIs - The 12 Key Metrics You Should Be Tracking.” Cascade, 3 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}412|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
  • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
  • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. Yet they are on the hot seat when cloud services go down.
  • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more-common SaaS solutions, it is not the case for all cloud services.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • No control over the software does not mean no recovery options. Solutions range from designing an IT workaround using alternate technologies to pre-defined third-party service continuity options (e.g. see options for O365) to business workarounds.
  • Even where there is limited control, you can at least define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.
  • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA issues and overall resilience gaps.

Impact and Result

  • Follow a structured process to assess cloud resilience risk.
  • Identify opportunities to mitigate risk – at the very least, ensure critical data is protected.
  • Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss – Step-by-step guide to assess risk, identify risk mitigation options, and create an incident response plan.

Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds.

  • Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss Storyboard

2. Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review – Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy.

At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.

  • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

3. SaaS Incident Response Workflows – Use these examples to guide your efforts to create cloud incident response workflows.

The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.

  • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (Visio)
  • SaaS Incident Response Workflows (PDF)

4. Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Use this template to capture your results.

Summarize cloud services risk, mitigation options, and incident response for senior leadership.

  • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
[infographic]

Further reading

Mitigate the Risk of Cloud Downtime and Data Loss

Resilience and disaster recovery in an increasingly Cloudy and SaaSy world.

Analyst Perspective

If you think cloud means you don’t need a response plan, then get your resume ready.

Frank Trovato

Most organizations are now recognizing that they can’t ignore the risk of a cloud outage or data loss, and the challenge is “what can I do about it?” since there is limited control.

If you still think “it’s in the cloud, so I don’t need to worry about it,” then get your resume ready. When O365 goes down, your executives are calling IT, not Microsoft, for an answer of what’s being done and what can they do in the meantime to get the business up and running again.

The key is to recognize what you can control and what actions you can take to evaluate and mitigate risk. At a minimum, you can ensure senior leadership is aware of the risk and define a plan for how you will respond to an incident, even if that is limited to monitoring and communicating status.

Often you can do more, including defining IT workarounds, backing up your SaaS data for additional protection, and using business process workarounds to bridge the gap, as illustrated in the case studies in this blueprint.

Frank Trovato
Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

Info-Tech Research Group

Use this blueprint to expand your DRP and BCP to account for cloud services

As more applications are migrated to cloud-based services, disaster recovery (DR) and business continuity plans (BCP) must include an understanding of cloud risks and actions to mitigate those risks. This includes evaluating vendor and service reliability and resilience, security measures, data protection capabilities, and technology and business workarounds if there is a cloud outage or incident.

Use the risk assessments and cloud service incident response plans developed through this blueprint to supplement your DRP and BCP as well as further inform your crisis management plans (e.g. account for cloud risks in your crisis communication planning).

Overall Business Continuity Plan

IT Disaster Recovery Plan

A plan to restore IT application and infrastructure services following a disruption.

Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Planning blueprint provides a methodology for creating the IT DRP. Leverage this blueprint to validate and provide inputs for your IT DRP.

BCP for Each Business Unit

A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit.

Info-Tech’s Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint provides a methodology for creating business unit BCPs as part of an overall BCP for the organization.

Crisis Management Plan

A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

Info-Tech’s Approach

  • Senior leadership is asking difficult questions about the organization’s dependency on third-party cloud services and the risk that poses.
  • Migrating to cloud services transfers much of the responsibility for day-to-day platform maintenance but not accountability for resilience.
  • IT leaders are often responsible for not just the organization’s IT DRP but also BCP and other elements of overall resilience. Cloud risk adds another element IT leaders need to consider.
  • IT leaders have limited control over third-party incidents and that includes cloud services. With SaaS services in particular, recovery or continuity options may be limited.
  • While vendors have swooped in to provide resilience options for the more common SaaS solutions, that is not the case for all cloud services.
  • Part of the solution is defining business process workarounds and that depends on cooperation from business leaders.
  • At a minimum, IT’s responsibility is to identify and communicate risk to senior leadership. That starts with a vendor review to identify SLA and overall resilience gaps.
  • Adapt how you approach downtime and data loss risk, particularly for SaaS solutions where there is limited or no control over the system.
  • Even where there is limited control, you can define an incident response plan to streamline notification, assessment, and implementation of workarounds. Leadership wants more options than simply waiting for the service to come back online.

Info-Tech Insight

Asking vendors about their DRP, BCP, and overall resilience has become commonplace. Expect your vendors to provide answers so you can assess risk. Furthermore, your vendor may have additional offerings to increase resilience or recommendations for third parties who can further assist your goals of improving cloud service resilience.

Key deliverable

Cloud Services Resilience Summary

Provide leadership with a summary of cloud risk, downtime workarounds implemented, and additional data protection.

The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Resilience Summary.

Additional tools and templates in this blueprint

Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool

Use this tool to gather vendor input, evaluate vendor SLAs and overall resilience, and track your own risk mitigation efforts.

The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

SaaS Incident Response Workflows

Use the examples in this document as a model to develop your own incident response workflows for cloud outages or data loss.

The image contains a screenshot of the SaaS Incident Response Workflows.

This blueprint will step you through the following actions to evaluate and mitigate cloud services risk

  1. Assess your cloud risk
  • Review your cloud services to determine potential impact of downtime/data loss, vendor SLA gaps, and vendor’s current resilience.
  • Identify options to mitigate risk
    • Explore your cloud vendor’s resilience offerings, third-party solutions, DIY recovery options, and business workarounds.
  • Create an incident response plan
    • Document your cloud risk mitigation strategy and incident response plan, which might include a failover strategy, data protection, and/or business continuity.

    Cloud Risk Mitigation

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Assess risk

    Phase 1: Assess your cloud risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Cloud does not guarantee uptime

    Public cloud services (e.g. Azure, GCP, AWS) and popular SaaS solutions experience downtime every year.

    A few cloud outage examples:

    • Microsoft Azure AD outage, March 15, 2022:
      Many users could not log into O365, Dynamics, or the Azure Portal.
      Cause: software change.
    • Three AWS outages in December 2021: December 7 (Netflix and others impacted), December 15 (Duo, Zoom, Slack, others), December 20 (Slack, Epic Games, others). Cause: network issues, power outage.
    • Salesforce outage, May 12, 2022: Users could not access the Lightning platform. Cause: expired certificate.

    Cloud availability

    • Migrating to cloud services can improve availability, as they typically offer more resilience than most organizations can afford to implement themselves.
    • However, having multiple data centers, zones, and regions doesn’t prevent all outages, as we see every year with even the largest cloud vendors.

    DR challenges for IaaS, PaaS, and cloud-native

    While there are limits to what you control, often traditional “failover” DR strategy can apply.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • IaaS: No control over the hardware, but you can failover to another region. This is fairly similar to traditional DR.
    • PaaS: No control over the software platform (e.g. SQL server as a service), but you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.
    • Cloud-native applications: As with PaaS, you can back up your data and explore vendor options to replicate your environment.

    Plan for resilience

    • Include DR requirements when designing cloud service implementation. For example, for IaaS solutions, identify what data would need to be replicated and what services may need to be “always on” (e.g. database services where high-availability is demanded).
    • Similarly, for PaaS and cloud-native solutions, consult your vendor regarding options to build in resilience options (e.g. ability to failover to another environment).

    DR challenges for SaaS solutions

    SaaS is the biggest challenge because you have no control over any part of the base application stack.

    High-level challenges and resilience options:

    • No control over the hardware (or the facility, maintenance processes, and so on).
    • No control over the base application (control is limited to configuration settings and add-on customizations or integrations).
    • Options to back up your data will depend on the service.

    Note: The rest of this blueprint is focused primarily on SaaS resilience due to the challenges listed here. For other cloud services, leverage traditional DR strategies and vendor management to mitigate risk (as summarized on the previous slides).

    Focus on what you can control

    • For SaaS solutions in particular, you must toss out traditional DR. If Salesforce has an outage, you won’t be involved in recovering the system.
    • Instead, DR for SaaS needs to focus on improving resilience where you do have control and implementing business workarounds to bridge the gap.

    Evaluate your cloud services to clarify your specific risks

    Time and money is limited, so focus first on cloud services that are most critical and evaluate the vendors’ SLA and existing resilience capabilities.

    The activities on the next two slides will evaluate risk through two approaches:

    Activity 1: Estimate potential impact of downtime and data loss to quantify the risk and determine which cloud services are most critical and need to be prioritized. This is done through a business impact analysis that assesses:

    • Impact on revenue or costs (if applicable).
    • Impact on reputation (e.g. customer impact).
    • Impact on regulatory compliance and health and safety (if applicable).

    Activity 2: Review the vendor to identify risks and gaps. Specifically, evaluate the following:

    • Incident Management SLAs (e.g. does the SLA include RTO/RPO commitments? Do they meet your requirements?)
    • Incident Response Preparedness (e.g. does the vendor have a DRP, BCP, and security incident response plan?)
    • Data Protection (e.g. does their backup strategy and data security meet your standards?)

    Activity 1: Quantify potential impact and prioritize cloud services using a business impact analysis (BIA)

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the latest version of our DRP BIA: DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool. The tool includes instructions.
    2. Include the cloud services you want to assess in the list of applications/systems (see the tool excerpt below), and follow the BIA methodology outlined in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    3. Use the results to quantify potential impact and prioritize your efforts on the most-critical cloud services.

    The image contains a screenshot of the DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Materials
    • DRP BIA Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff who can provide a well-rounded perspective on potential impact. They will create the first draft of the BIA.
    • Review the draft BIA with relevant business leaders to refine and validate the results.

    Activity 2: Review your key cloud vendors’ SLAs, incident preparedness, and data protection strategy

    1-3 hours

    Use the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool as follows:

    1. Send the Vendor Questionnaire tab to your cloud vendors to gather input, and review your existing agreements.
    2. Copy the vendor responses into the tool (see the instructions in the tool) and evaluate. See the example excerpt below.
    3. Identify action items to clarify gaps or address risks. Some action items might not be defined yet and will need to wait until you have had a chance to further explore risk mitigation options.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool.

    Materials
    • Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.

    Phase 2: Identify options to mitigate risk

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Consult your vendor to identify options to improve resilience, as a starting point

    Your vendor might also be able to suggest third parties that offer additional support, backup, or service continuity options.

    • The Vendor Questionnaire tab in the Cloud Services Incident Risk and Mitigation Review Tool includes a section at the bottom where your vendor can name additional options to improve resilience (e.g. premium support packages, potentially their own DR services).
    • If your vendor has not completed that part of the questionnaire, meet with them to discuss this. Asking service vendors about resilience has become commonplace, so they should be prepared to answer questions about their own offerings and potentially can name trusted third-party vendors who can further assist you.
    • Leverage Info-Tech’s advisory services to evaluate options outlined by your vendor and potential third-party options (e.g. enterprise backup solutions that support backing up SaaS data).

    Some SaaS solutions have plenty of resilience options; others not so much

    • The pervasiveness of O365 has led vendors to close the service continuity gap, with options to send and receive email during an outage and back up your data.
    • With many SaaS solutions, there isn’t going to be a third-party service continuity option, but you might still be able to at least back up your data and implement business process workarounds to close the service gap.

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: O365

    Risk

    • Several outages every year (e.g. MS Teams July 20, 2022).
    • SLA exceptions include “Scheduled Downtime,” which can occur with just five days’ notice.
    • The Recycling Bin is your data backup, depending on your setup.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Third-party solutions for email service continuity.
    • Several backup vendors (e.g. Veeam, Rubrik) can protect most of your O365 suite.
    • Business continuity workarounds leveraging synced OneDrive, SharePoint, and Outlook (access to calendar invites).

    Example SaaS risk and mitigation: Salesforce

    Risk

    • Downtime has been infrequent, but Salesforce did have a major outage in May 2021 (DNS issue) and May 2022 (expired certificate).
    • At the time of this writing, the Main Services Agreement does not commit to a specific uptime value and specifies the usual exclusions.
    • Similarly, there are limited commitments regarding data protection.

    Options to mitigate risk (not an exhaustive list):

    • Salesforce provides a backup and restore service offering.
    • In addition, some third-party vendors support backing up Salesforce data for additional protection against data corruption or data loss.
    • Business continuity workarounds can further reduce the impact of downtime (e.g. record updates in MS Word and leverage Outlook for contact info until Salesforce is recovered).

    Establish a baseline standard for risk mitigation, regardless of cloud service

    At a minimum, set a goal to review vendor risk at least annually, define standard processes for monitoring outages, and review options to back up your SaaS data.

    Example baseline standard for cloud risk mitigation

    • Review vendor risk at least annually. This includes reviewing SLAs, vendor’s incident preparedness (e.g. do they have a current DRP, BCP, and Security IRP?), and the vendor’s data protection strategy.
    • Incident response plans must include, at a minimum, steps to monitor vendor outage and communicate status to relevant stakeholders. Where possible, business process workarounds are defined to bridge the service gap.
    • For critical data (based on your BIA and an evaluation of risk), maintain your own backups of SaaS data for additional protection.

    Embed risk mitigation standards into existing IT operations

    • Include specific SLA requirements, including incident management processes, in your RFP process and annual vendor review.
    • Define cloud incident response in your incident management procedures.
    • Include cloud data considerations in your backup strategy reviews.

    Phase 3: Create an incident response plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Assess your cloud risk

    Identify options to mitigate risk

    Create an incident response plan

    Activity 1: Review the example incident response workflows and case studies as a starting point

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples. The examples illustrate different approaches to incident response depending on the criticality of the service and options available.
    2. Review the case studies on the next few slides, which further illustrate the resilience and incident response solutions implemented.
    3. Note the key elements:
    • Detection
    • Assessment
    • Monitoring status / contacting the vendor
    • Communication with key stakeholders
    • Invoking workarounds, if applicable

    Example SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of the SaaS Incident Response Workflow Excerpt.
    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds, where applicable.

    Case Study 1: Recovery plan for critical fundraising event

    If either critical SaaS dependency fails, the following plan is executed:

    1. Donors are redirected to a predefined alternate donation page hosted by a different service. The alternate page connects to the backup payment processing service (with predefined integrations).
    2. Marketing communications support the redirect.
    3. While the backup solution doesn’t gather as much data, the payment details provide enough information to follow up with donors where necessary.

    Criticality justified a failover option

    The Annual Day of Giving generates over 50% of fundraising for the year. It’s critically dependent on two SaaS solutions that host the donation page and payment processing.

    To mitigate the risk, the organization implemented the ability to failover to an alternate “environment” – much like a traditional DR solution – supported by workarounds to manage data collection.

    Case Study 2: Protecting customer data

    Daily exports from a SaaS-hosted donations site reduce potential data loss:

    1. Daily exports to a CRM support donor profile updates and follow-ups (tax receipts, thank-you letters, etc.).
    2. The exports also mitigate the risk of data loss due to an incident with the SaaS-hosted donation site.
    3. This company is exploring more-frequent exports to further reduce the risk of data loss.

    Protecting your data gives you options

    For critical data, do you want to rely solely on the vendor’s default backup strategy?

    If your SaaS vendor is hit by ransomware or if their backup frequency doesn’t meet your needs, having your own data backup gives you options.

    It can also support business process workarounds that need to access that data while waiting for SaaS recovery.

    Case Study 3: Recovery plan for payroll

    To enable a more accurate payroll workaround, the following is done:

    1. After each payroll run, export the payroll data from the SaaS solution to a secure location.
    2. If there is a SaaS outage when payroll must be submitted, the exported data can be modified and converted to an ACH file.
    3. The ACH file is submitted to the bank, which has preapproved this workaround.

    BCP can bridge the gap

    When leadership looks to IT to mitigate cloud risk, include BCP in the discussion.

    Payroll is a good example where the best recovery option might be a business continuity workaround.

    IT often still has a role in business continuity workarounds, as in this case study: specifically, providing a solution to modify and convert the payroll data to an ACH file.

    Activity 2: Run tabletop planning exercises as a starting point to build your incident response plan

    1-3 hours

    1. Follow the tabletop planning instructions provided in the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint.
    2. Run the exercise for each cloud service. Keep the scenario generic at first (e.g. cloud service is down with no reported root cause) so you can focus on your response. Capture response steps and gaps.
    3. Add complexity in subsequent exercises (e.g. data loss plus downtime), and use that to expand and refine the workflow as needed.
    4. Use the resulting workflows as the core piece of your incident response plan.
    5. Supplement the workflow with relevant checklists or procedures. At this point you can choose to incorporate this into your DRP or BCP or maintain these documents as supplements to those plans.
      See the DRP Case Study and BCP Case Study for an example of DRP-BCP documentation.

    Example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified

    The image contains an example tabletop planning results excerpt with gaps identified.

    Materials
    • SaaS Incident Response Workflows examples
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Activity 3: Summarize cloud services resilience to inform senior leadership of current risks and mitigation efforts

    1-3 hours

    1. Use the Cloud Services Resilience Summary example as a template to capture the following:
    • The results of your vendor review (i.e. incident management SLAs, incident response preparedness, data protections strategy).
    • The current state of your downtime workarounds and additional data loss protection.
    • Your baseline standard for cloud services risk mitigation.
    • Summary of resilience, risks, workarounds, and data loss protection for each individual cloud service that you have reviewed.
  • Present the results to senior leadership to:
    • Highlight risks to inform business decisions to mitigate or accept those risks.
    • Summarize actions already taken to mitigate risks.
    • Communicate next steps (e.g. action items to address remaining risks).

    Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents

    The image contains a screenshot of Cloud Services Resilience Summary – Table of Contents.
    Materials
    • Cloud Services Resilience Summary
    Participants
    • Core group of IT management and staff tasked with evaluating and improving cloud services’ resilience.
    • Review results with relevant business process owners to provide input and define business workarounds where applicable.

    Summary: For cloud services, after evaluating risk, IT must adapt how they approach risk mitigation

    1. Identify failover options where possible
    • A failover strategy is possible for many cloud services (e.g. IaaS replication to another region, or failing over SaaS to an alternate solution as in case study 1).
  • At least protect your data
    • Explore supplementary backup options to protect against ransomware, data corruption, or data loss and support business continuity workarounds (see case study 2).
  • Leverage BCP to close the gap
    • This doesn’t absolve IT of its role in mitigating cloud incident risk, but business process workarounds can bridge the gap where IT options are limited (see case study 3).

    Related Info-Tech Research

    IT DRP Maturity Assessment

    Get an objective assessment of your DRP program and recommendations for improvement.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Streamline the traditional approach to make BCP development manageable and repeatable.

    Implement Crisis Management Best Practices

    Don’t be another example of what not to do. Implement an effective crisis response plan to minimize the impact on business continuity, reputation, and profitability.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}256|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,953 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 19 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Data breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.
    • Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. If the policy items don’t meet these requirements, users can’t be expected to adhere to them. Focus on developing policies to be quantified and qualified for them to be relevant.

    Impact and Result

    • Save time and money using the templates provided to create your own customized security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop and Deploy Security Policies Deck – A step-by-step guide to help you build, implement, and assess your security policy program.

    Our systematic approach will ensure that all identified areas of security have an associated policy.

  • Develop the security policy program.
  • Develop and implement the policy suite.
  • Communicate the security policy program.
  • Measure the security policy program.
    • Develop and Deploy Security Policies – Phases 1-4

    2. Security Policy Prioritization Tool – A structured tool to help your organization prioritize your policy suite to ensure that you are addressing the most important policies first.

    The Security Policy Prioritization Tool assesses the policy suite on policy importance, ease to implement, and ease to enforce. The output of this tool is your prioritized list of policies based on our policy framework.

    • Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool – A structured tool to assess the effectiveness of policies within your organization and determine recommended actions for remediation.

    The Security Policy Assessment Tool assesses the policy suite on policy coverage, communication, adherence, alignment, and overlap. The output of this tool is a checklist of remediation actions for each individual policy.

    • Security Policy Assessment Tool

    4. Security Policy Lifecycle Template – A customizable lifecycle template to manage your security policy initiatives.

    The Lifecycle Template includes sections on security vision, security mission, strategic security and policy objectives, policy design, roles and responsibilities for developing security policies, and organizational responsibilities.

    • Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    5. Policy Suite Templates – A best-of-breed templates suite mapped to the Info-Tech framework you can customize to reflect your organizational requirements and acquire approval.

    Use Info-Tech's security policy templates, which incorporate multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA), to ensure that your policies are clear, concise, and consistent.

    • Acceptable Use of Technology Policy Template
    • Application Security Policy Template
    • Asset Management Policy Template
    • Backup and Recovery Policy Template
    • Cloud Security Policy Template
    • Compliance and Audit Management Policy Template
    • Data Security Policy Template
    • Endpoint Security Policy Template
    • Human Resource Security Policy Template
    • Identity and Access Management Policy Template
    • Information Security Policy Template
    • Network and Communications Security Policy Template
    • Physical and Environmental Security Policy Template
    • Security Awareness and Training Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Risk Management Policy Template
    • Security Threat Detection Policy Template
    • System Configuration and Change Management Policy Template
    • Vulnerability Management Policy Template

    6. Policy Communication Plan Template – A template to help you plan your approach for publishing and communicating your policy updates across the entire organization.

    This template helps you consider the budget time for communications, identify all stakeholders, and avoid scheduling communications in competition with one another.

    • Policy Communication Plan Template

    7. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool – A tool to help you identify initiatives to develop your security awareness and training program.

    Use this tool to first identify the initiatives that can grow your program, then as a roadmap tool for tracking progress of completion for those initiatives.

    • Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Define the security policy development program.

    Formalize a governing security policy lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding the current state of policies within your organization.

    Prioritizing list of security policies for your organization.

    Being able to defend policies written based on business requirements and overarching security needs.

    Leveraging an executive champion to help policy adoption across the organization.

    Formalizing the roles, responsibilities, and overall mission of the program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    Outputs

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    Security Policy Lifecycle Template

    2 Develop the Security Policy Suite

    The Purpose

    Develop a comprehensive suite of security policies that are relevant to the needs of the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Time, effort, and money saved by developing formally documented security policies with input from Info-Tech’s subject-matter experts.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the risks and drivers that will influence policy development.

    Up to 14 customized security policies (dependent on need and time).

    3 Implement Security Policy Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure policies and requirements are communicated with end users, along with steps to comply with the new security policies.

    Improve compliance and accountability with security policies.

    Plan for regular review and maintenance of the security policy program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Streamlined communication of the policies to users.

    Improved end user compliance with policy guidelines and be better prepared for audits.

    Incorporate security policies into daily schedule, eliminating disturbances to productivity and efficiency.

    Activities

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy of new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies and processes into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of security policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    Outputs

    Policy Communication Plan Template

    Understanding of how myPolicies can help policy management and implementation.

    Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Action plan to regularly review and update the policies.

    Further reading

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Analyst Perspective

    A policy lifecycle can be the secret sauce to managing your policies.

    A policy for policy’s sake is useless if it isn’t being used to ensure proper processes are followed. A policy should exist for more than just checking a requirement box. Policies need to be quantified, qualified, and enforced for them to be relevant.

    Policies should be developed based on the use cases that enable the business to run securely and smoothly. Ensure they are aligned with the corporate culture. Rather than introducing hindrances to daily operations, policies should reflect security practices that support business goals and protection.

    No published framework is going to be a perfect fit for any organization, so take the time to compare business operations and culture with security requirements to determine which ones apply to keep your organization secure.

    Photo of Danny Hammond, Research Analyst, Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Danny Hammond
    Research Analyst
    Security, Risk, Privacy & Compliance Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Security breaches are damaging and costly. Trying to prevent and respond to them without robust, enforceable policies makes a difficult situation even harder to handle.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies are ineffective because they do not explicitly outline responsibilities and compliance requirements, and they are rarely comprehensive.
    • Without a strong lifecycle to keep policies up to date and easy to use, end users will ignore or work around poorly understood policies.
    • Time and money is wasted dealing with preventable security issues that should be pre-emptively addressed in a comprehensive corporate security policy program.
    Common Obstacles

    InfoSec leaders will struggle to craft the right set of policies without knowing what the organization actually needs, such as:

    • The security policies needed to safeguard infrastructure and resources.
    • The scope the security policies will cover within the organization.
    • The current compliance and regulatory obligations based on location and industry.
    InfoSec leaders must understand the business environment and end-user needs before they can select security policies that fit.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s Develop and Deploy Security Policies takes a multi-faceted approach to the problem that incorporates foundational technical elements, compliance considerations, and supporting processes:

    • Assess what security policies currently exist within the organization and consider additional secure policies.
    • Develop a policy lifecycle that will define the needs, develop required documentation, and implement, communicate, and measure your policy program.
    • Draft a set of security policies mapped to the Info-Tech framework, which incorporates multiple industry best-practice frameworks (NIST, ISO, SOC2SEC, CIS, PCI, HIPAA).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Creating good policies is only half the solution. Having a great policy management lifecycle will keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.

    Your Challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations design a program to develop and deploy security policies

    • A security policy is a formal document that outlines the required behavior and security controls in place to protect corporate assets.
    • The development of policy documents is an ambitious task, but the real challenge comes with communication and enforcement.
    • A good security policy allows employees to know what is required of them and allows management to monitor and audit security practices against a standard policy.
    • Unless the policies are effectively communicated, enforced, and updated, employees won’t know what’s required of them and will not comply with essential standards, making the policies powerless.
    • Without a good policy lifecycle in place, it can be challenging to illustrate the key steps and decisions involved in creating and managing a policy.

    The problem with security policies

    29% Of IT workers say it's just too hard and time consuming to track and enforce.

    25% Of IT workers say they don’t enforce security policies universally.

    20% Of workers don’t follow company security policies all the time.

    (Source: Security Magazine, 2020)

    Common obstacles

    The problem with security policies isn’t development; rather, it’s the communication, enforcement, and maintenance of them.

    • Employees are not paying attention to policies. Awareness and understanding of what the security policy’s purpose is, how it benefits the organization, and the importance of compliance are overlooked when policies are distributed.
    • Informal, un-rationalized, ad hoc policies do not explicitly outline responsibilities, are rarely comprehensive, and are difficult to implement, revise, and maintain.
    • Date breaches are still on the rise and security policies are not shaping good employee behavior or security-conscious practices.
    • Adhering to security policies is rarely a priority to users as compliance often feels like an interference to daily workflow. For a lot of organizations, security policies are not having the desired effect.
    Bar chart of the 'Average cost of a data breach' in years '2019-20', '20-21', and '21-22'.
    (Source: IBM, 2022 Cost of a Data Breach; n=537)

    Reaching an all-time high, the cost of a data breach averaged US$4.35 million in 2022. This figure represents a 2.6% increase from last year, when the average cost of a breach was US$4.24 million. The average cost has climbed 12.7% since 2020.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    The right policy for the right audience. Generate a roadmap to guide the order of policy development based on organizational policy requirements and the target audience.

    Actions

    1. Develop policy lifecycle
    2. Identify compliance requirements
    3. Understand which policies need to be developed, maintained, or decommissioned
    I. Define Security Policy Program

    a) Security policy program lifecycle template

    b) Policy prioritization tool
    Clockwise cycle arrows at the centre of the table. II. Develop & Implement Policy Suite

    a) Policy template set

    Policies must be reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable. Policy items that meet these requirements will have a higher level of adherence. Focus on efficiently creating policies using pre-developed templates that are mapped to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Actions

    1. Differentiate between policies, procedures, standards, and guidelines
    2. Draft policies from templates
    3. Review policies, including completeness
    4. Approve policies
    Gaining feedback on policy compliance is important for updates and adaptation, where necessary, as well as monitoring policy alignment to business objectives.

    Actions

    1. Enforce policies
    2. Measure policy effectiveness
    IV. Measure Policy Program

    a) Security policy tracking tool

    III. Communicate Policy Program

    a) Security policy awareness & training tool

    b) Policy communication plan template
    Awareness and training on security policies should be targeted and must be relevant to the employees’ jobs. Employees will be more attentive and willing to incorporate what they learn if they feel that awareness and training material was specifically designed to help them.

    Actions

    1. Identify any changes in the regulatory and compliance environment
    2. Include policy awareness in awareness and training programs
    3. Disseminate policies
    Build trust in your policy program by involving stakeholder participation through the entire policy lifecycle.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT/InfoSec Benefits

    • Reduces complexity within the policy creation process by using a single framework to align multiple compliance regimes.
    • Introduces a roadmap to clearly educate employees on the do’s and don’ts of IT usage within the organization.
    • Reduces costs and efforts related to managing IT security and other IT-related threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Identifies and develops security policies that are essential to your organization’s objectives.
    • Integrates security into corporate culture while maximizing compliance and effectiveness of security policies.
    • Reduces security policy compliance risk.

    Key deliverable:

    Security Policy Templates

    Templates for policies that can be used to map policy statements to multiple compliance frameworks.

    Sample of Security Policy Templates.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.
    Sample of the Security Policy Assessment Tool.

    Security Policy Assessment Tool

    Info-Tech's Security Policy Assessment Tool helps ensure that your policies provide adequate coverage for your organization's security requirements.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Phase

    Purpose

    Measured Value

    Define Security Policy Program Understand the value in formal security policies and determine which policies to prepare to update, eliminate, or add to your current suite. Time, value, and resources saved with guidance and templates:
    1 FTE*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,152
    Time, value, and resources saved using our recommendations and tools:
    1 FTE*2 days*$80,000/year = $768
    Develop and Implement the Policy Suite Select from an extensive policy template offering and customize the policies you need to optimize or add to your own policy program. Time, value, and resources saved using our templates:
    1 consultant*15 days*$150/hour = $21,600 (if starting from scratch)
    Communicate Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s methodology and best practices to ensure proper communication, training, and awareness. Time, value, and resources saved using our training and awareness resources:
    1 FTE*1.5 days*$80,000/year = $408
    Measure Security Policy Program Use Info-Tech’s custom toolkits for continuous tracking and review of your policy suite. Time, value, and resources saved by using our enforcement recommendations:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$160,000/year combined = $3,840
    Time, value, and resources saved by using our recommendations rather than an external consultant:
    1 consultant*5 days*$150/hour = $7,200

    After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.

    Overall Impact

    9.5 /10

    Overall Average $ Saved

    $29,015

    Overall Average Days Saved

    25

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of two to four months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope security policy requirements, objectives, and any specific challenges.

    Call #2: Review policy lifecycle; prioritize policy development.

    Call #3: Customize the policy templates.

    Call #4: Gather feedback on policies and get approval.

    Call #5: Communicate the security policy program.

    Call #6: Develop policy training and awareness programs.

    Call #7: Track policies and exceptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define the security policy program
    Develop the security policy suite
    Develop the security policy suite
    Implement security policy program
    Finalize deliverables and next steps
    Activities

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.

    1.3 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents.

    1.4 Prioritize the development of security policies.

    1.5 Discuss strategies to leverage stakeholder support.

    1.6 Plan to communicate with all stakeholders.

    1.7 Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies.

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies.

    2.1 Discuss the risks and drivers your organization faces that must be addressed by policies (continued).

    2.2 Develop and customize security policies (continued).

    2.3 Develop a plan to gather feedback from users.

    2.4 Discuss a plan to submit policies for approval.

    3.1 Plan the communication strategy for new policies.

    3.2 Discuss myPolicies to automate management and implementation.

    3.3 Incorporate policies into your security awareness and training program.

    3.4 Assess the effectiveness of policies.

    3.5 Understand the need for regular review and update.

    4.1 Review customized lifecycle and policy templates.

    4.2 Discuss the plan for policy roll out.

    4.3 Schedule follow-up Guided Implementation calls.

    Deliverables
    1. Security Policy Prioritization Tool
    2. Security Policy Lifecycle
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Security Policies (approx. 9)
    1. Policy Communication Plan
    2. Security Awareness and Training Program Development Tool
    3. Security Policy Assessment Tool
    1. All deliverables finalized

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Phase 1

    Define the Security Policy Program

    Phase 1

    1.1 Understand the current state

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders

    1.6 Develop the policy lifecycle

    Phase 2

    2.1 Customize policy templates

    2.2 Gather feedback from users on policy feasibility

    2.3 Submit policies to upper management for approval

    Phase 3

    3.1 Understand the need for communicating policies

    3.2 Use myPolicies to automate the management of your security policies

    3.3 Design, build, and implement your communications plan

    3.4 Incorporate policies and processes into your training and awareness programs

    Phase 4

    4.1 Assess the state of security policies

    4.2 Identify triggers for regular policy review and update

    4.3 Develop an action plan to update policies

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the current state of your organization’s security policies.
    • Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance.
    • Prioritize the development of your security policies.
    • Leverage key stakeholders to champion the policy initiative.
    • Inform all relevant stakeholders of the upcoming policy program.
    • Develop the security policy lifecycle.

    1.1 Understand the current state of policies

    Scenario 1: You have existing policies

    1. Use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify any gaps between the policies you already have and those recommended based on your changing business needs.
    2. As your organization undergoes changes, be sure to incorporate new requirements in the existing policies.
    3. Sometimes, you may have more specific procedures for a domain’s individual security aspects instead of high-level policies.
    4. Group current policies into the domains and use the policy templates to create overarching policies where there are none and improve upon existing high-level policies.

    Scenario 2: You are starting from scratch

    1. To get started on new policies, use the Security Policy Prioritization Tool to identify the policies Info-Tech recommends based on your business needs. See the full list of templates in the Appendix to ensure that all relevant topics are addressed.
    2. Whether you’re starting from scratch or have incomplete/ad hoc policies, use Info-Tech’s policy templates to formalize and standardize security requirements for end users.
    Info-Tech Insight

    Policies are living, evolving documents that require regular review and update, so even if you have policies already written, you’re not done with them.

    1.2 Align your security policies to the Info-Tech framework for compliance

    You have an opportunity to improve your employee alignment and satisfaction, improve organizational agility, and obtain high policy adherence. This is achieved by translating your corporate culture into a policy-based compliance culture.

    Align your security policies to the Info-Tech Security Framework by using Info-Tech’s policy templates.

    Info-Tech’s security framework uses a best-of-breed approach to leverage and align with most major security standards, including:
    • ISO 27001/27002
    • COBIT
    • Center for Internet Security (CIS) Critical Controls
    • NIST Cybersecurity Framework
    • NIST SP 800-53
    • NIST SP 800-171

    Info-Tech Security Framework

    Info-Tech Security Framework with policies grouped into categories which are then grouped into 'Governance' and 'Management'.

    1.3 Document your policy hierarchy

    Structuring policy components at different levels allows for efficient changes and direct communication depending on what information is needed.

    Policy hierarchy pyramid with 'Security Policy Lifecycle' on top, then 'Security Policies', then 'IT and/or Supporting Documentation'.

    Defines the cycle for the security policy program and what must be done but not how to do it. Aligns the business, security program, and policies.
    Addresses the “what,” “who,” “when,” and “where.”

    Defines high-level overarching concepts of security within the organization, including the scope, purpose, and objectives of policies.
    Addresses the high-level “what” and “why.”
    Changes when business objectives change.

    Defines enterprise/technology – specific, detailed guidelines on how to adhere to policies.
    Addresses the “how.”
    Changes when technology and processes change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design separate policies for different areas of focus. Policies that are written as single, monolithic documents are resistant to change. A hierarchical top-level document supported by subordinate policies and/or procedures can be more rapidly revised as circumstances change.

    1.3.1 Understand the relationship between policies and other documents

    Policy:
    • Provides emphasis and sets direction.
    • Standards, guidelines, and procedures must be developed to support an overarching policy.
    Arrows stemming from the above list, connecting to the three lists below.

    Standard:

    • Specifies uniform method of support for policy.
    • Compliance is mandatory.
    • Includes process, frameworks, methodologies, and technology.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Procedure:

    • Step-by-step instructions to perform desired actions.
    Two-way horizontal arrow.

    Guideline:

    Recommended actions to consider in absence of an applicable standard, to support a policy.
    This model is adapted from a framework developed by CISA (Certified Information Systems Auditor).

    Supporting Documentation

    Considerations for standards

    Standards. These support policies by being much more specific and outlining key steps or processes that are necessary to meet certain requirements within a policy document. Ideally standards should be based on policy statements with a target of detailing the requirements that show how the organization will implement developed policies.

    If policies describe what needs to happen, then standards explain how it will happen.

    A good example is an email policy that states that emails must be encrypted; this policy can be supported by a standard such as Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption that specifically ensures that all email communication is encrypted for messages “in transit” from one secure email server that has TLS enabled to another.

    There are numerous security standards available that support security policies/programs based on the kind of systems and controls that an organization would like to put in place. A good selection of supporting standards can go a long way to further protect users, data, and other organizational assets
    Key Policies Example Associated Standards
    Access Control Policy
    • Password Management User Standard
    • Account Auditing Standard
    Data Security Policy
    • Cryptography Standard
    • Data Classification Standard
    • Data Handling Standard
    • Data Retention Standard
    Incident Response Policy
    • Incident Response Plan
    Network Security Policy
    • Wireless Connectivity Standard
    • Firewall Configuration Standard
    • Network Monitoring Standard
    Vendor Management Policy
    • Vendor Risk Management Standard
    • Third-Party Access Control Standard
    Application Security Policy
    • Application Security Standard

    1.4 Prioritize development of security policies

    The Info-Tech Security Policy Prioritization Tool will help you determine which security policies to work on first.
    • The tool allows you to prioritize your policies based on:
      • Importance: How relevant is this policy to organizational security?
      • Ease to implement: What is the effort, time, and resources required to write, review, approve, and distribute the policy?
      • Ease to enforce: How much effort, time, and resources are required to enforce the policy?
    • Additionally, the weighting or priority of each variable of prioritization can be adjusted.

    Align policies to recent security concerns. If your organization has recently experienced a breach, it may be crucial to highlight corresponding policies as immediately necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you have an existing policy that aligns with one of the Info-Tech recommended templates weight Ease to Implement and Ease to Enforce as HIGH (4-5). This will decrease the priority of these policies.

    Sample of the Security Policy Prioritization Tool.

    Download the Security Policy Prioritization Tool

    1.5 Leverage stakeholders to champion policies

    Info-Tech Insight

    While management support is essential to initiating a strong security posture, allow employees to provide input on the development of security policies. This cooperation will lead to easier incorporation of the policies into the daily routines of workers, with less resistance. The security team will be less of a police force and more of a partner.

    Executive champion

    Identify an executive champion who will ensure that the security program and the security policies are supported.

    Focus on risk and protection

    Security can be viewed as an interference, but the business is likely more responsive to the concepts of risk and protection because it can apply to overall business operations and a revenue-generating mandate.

    Communicate policy initiatives

    Inform stakeholders of the policy initiative as security policies are only effective if they support the business requirements and user input is crucial for developing a strong security culture.

    Current security landscape

    Leveraging the current security landscape can be a useful mechanism to drive policy buy-in from stakeholders.

    Management buy-in

    This is key to policy acceptance; it indicates that policies are accurate, align with the business, and are to be upheld, that funds will be made available, and that all employees will be equally accountable.

    Understand and Apply Internet-of-Things Use Cases to Drive Organizational Success

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}535|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • The Internet of Things (IoT) is a rapidly proliferating technology – connected devices have experienced unabated growth over the last ten years.
    • The business wants to capitalize on the IoT and move the needle forward for proactive customer service and operational efficiency.
    • Moreover, IT wants to maintain its reputation as forward-thinking, and the business wants to be innovative.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Leverage Info-Tech’s comprehensive three-phase approach to IoT projects: understand the fundamentals of IoT capabilities, assess where the IoT will drive value within the organization, and present findings to stakeholders.
    • Conduct a foundational IoT discussion with stakeholders to level set expectations about the technology’s capabilities.
    • Determine your organization’s approach to the IoT in terms of both hardware and software.
    • Determine which use case your organization fits into: three of the use cases highlighted in this report include predictive customer service, smart offices, and supply chain applications.

    Impact and Result

    • Our methodology addresses the possible issues by using a case-study approach to demonstrate the “Art of the Possible” for the IoT.
    • With an understanding of the IoT, it is possible to find applicable use cases for this emerging technology and get a leg up on competitors.

    Understand and Apply Internet-of-Things Use Cases to Drive Organizational Success Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should care about the IoT’s potential to transform the service and the workplace, and how Info-Tech will support you as you identify and build your IoT use cases.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand core IoT use cases

    Analyze the scope of the IoT and the three most prominent enterprise use cases.

    • Understand and Apply Internet-of-Things Use Cases to Drive Organizational Success – Phase 1: Understand Core IoT Use Cases

    2. Build the business case for IoT applications

    Develop and prioritize use cases for the IoT using Info-Tech’s IoT Initiative Framework.

    • Understand and Apply Internet-of-Things Use Cases to Drive Organizational Success – Phase 2: Build the Business Case for IoT Initiatives

    3. Present IoT initiatives to stakeholders

    Present the IoT initiative to stakeholders and understand the way forward for the IoT initiative.

    • Understand and Apply Internet-of-Things Use Cases to Drive Organizational Success – Phase 3: Present IoT Initiatives to Stakeholders
    • Internet of Things Stakeholder Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}160|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s realities are driving organizations to digitize faster and become more Agile.
    • Agile transformations are difficult and frequently fail for a variety of reasons.
    • To achieve the benefits of Agile, organizations need to be ready for the significant changes that Agile demands.
    • Challenges to your Agile transformation can come from a variety of sources.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Use Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model to examine potential roadblocks to Agile on six different organizational dimensions.
    • Use survey results to identify and address the issues that are most likely to derail your Agile transformation.

    Impact and Result

    • Better understand where and how your organization needs to change to support your Agile transformation.
    • Focus your attention on your organization’s biggest roadblocks to Agile.
    • Improve your organization’s chances of a successful Agile transformation.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Agile Readiness Assessment Deck – A guide to help your organization survey its Agile readiness.

    Read this deck to see how an Agile Readiness Assessment can help your organization understand its readiness for Agile transformation. The storyboard guides you through how to collect, consolidate, and examine survey responses and create an actionable list of improvements to make your organization more Agile ready.

    • Agile Readiness Assessment Storyboard

    2. Survey Templates (Excel or MS Forms, available in English and French) – Use these templates to create and distribute the survey broadly within your organization.

    The Agile Readiness Assessment template is available in either Excel or Microsoft Forms (both English and French versions are available). Download the Excel templates here or use the links in the above deck to access the online versions of the survey.

    • Agile Readiness Survey – English
    • Agile Readiness Survey – French

    3. Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool – Use this tool to consolidate and analyze survey responses.

    The Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool allows you to consolidate survey responses by team/role and produces your heatmap for analysis.

    • Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Agile Readiness Assessment

    Understand how ready your organization is for an Agile transformation.

    Info-Tech Research Group Inc. is a global leader in providing IT research and advice. Info-Tech’s products and services combine actionable insight and relevant advice with ready-to-use tools and templates that cover the full spectrum of IT concerns.

    Analyst Perspective

    Use the wisdom of crowds to understand how ready you are for Agile transformation.

    Photo of Alex Ciraco, Principal Research Director, Application Delivery and Management, Info-Tech Research Group

    Agile transformations can be difficult and complex to implement. That’s because they require fundamental changes in the way an organization thinks and behaves (and many organizations are not ready for these changes).

    Use Info-Tech’s Agile Readiness Assessment to broadly survey the organization’s readiness for Agile along six dimensions:

    • Culture
    • Learning
    • Automation
    • Integrated teams
    • Metrics
    • Governance

    The survey results will help you to examine and address those areas that are most likely to hinder your move to Agile.

    Alex Ciraco
    Principal Research Director, Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Your organization wants to shorten delivery time and improve quality by adopting Agile practices.
    • Your organization has not yet used Agile successfully.
    • You know that Agile transformations are complex and difficult to implement.
    • You want to maximize your Agile transformation’s chances of success.

    Common Obstacles

    • Risks to your Agile transformation can come from a variety of sources, including:
      • Organizational culture
      • Learning practices
      • Use of automation
      • Ability to create integrated teams
      • Use of metrics
      • Governance practices

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Use Info-Tech’s Agile Readiness Assessment to broadly survey your organization’s readiness for Agile.
    • Examine the consolidated results of this survey to identify challenges that are most likely to hinder Agile success.
    • Discuss and address these challenges to increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By first understanding the numerous challenges to Agile transformations and then broadly surveying your organization to identify and address the challenges that are at play, you are more likely to have a successful Agile transformation.

    Info-Tech’s methodology

    1. Distribute Survey 2. Consolidate Survey Results 3. Examine Results and Problem Solve
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify the teams/roles you will survey.

    1.2 Configure the survey to reflect your teams/roles.

    1.3 Distribute the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey broadly in the organization.

    2.1 Collect survey responses from all participants.

    2.2 Consolidate the results using the template provided.

    3.1 Examine the consolidated results (both OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps)

    3.2 Identify key challenge areas (those which are most “red”) and discuss these challenges with participants

    3.3 Brainstorm, select and refine potential solutions to these challenges

    Phase Outcomes An appreciation for the numerous challenges associated with Agile transformations Identified challenges to Agile within your organization (both team-specific and organization-wide challenges) An actionable list of solutions/actions to address your organization’s Agile challenges.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Survey

    Survey the organization to understand your readiness for an Agile transformation on six dimensions.

    Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Survey blueprint deliverable.

    Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results

    Examine your readiness for Agile and identify team-specific and organization-wide challenges.

    Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results blueprint deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1: Distribute Survey

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges (identify potential participants).
    • Call #2: First call with participants (introduce Phase 1 and assign survey for completion).
    • Call #3: Gather survey responses (prep for Phase 2 calls).
    • Phase 2: Consolidate Survey Results

    • Call #4: Consolidate all survey responses using the template.
    • Call #5: Conduct initial review of consolidated results (prep for Phase 3 calls).
    • Phase 3: Examine Results and Problem Solve

    • Call #6: Present consolidated results to participants and agree on most pressing challenges.
    • Call #7: Brainstorm, identify, and refine potential solutions to most pressing challenges.
    • Call #8: Conduct closing and communication call.

    Phase 1 — Phase 1 of 3, 'Distribute Survey'.

    Customize and distribute the survey

    Decide which teams/roles will participate in the survey.

    Decide which format and language(s) you will use for your Agile Readiness Assessment Survey.

    Configure the survey templates to reflect your selected teams/roles.

    Distribute the survey for participants to complete.

    • 1.1 The Agile Readiness Assessment Survey will help you to identify both team-specific and organization-wide challenges to your Agile transformation. It is best to distribute the survey broadly across the organization and include several teams and roles. Identify and make note of the teams/roles that will be participating in the survey.
    • 1.2 Select which format of survey you will be using (Excel or online), along with the language(s) you will use (links to the survey templates can be found in the table below). Then configure the survey templates to reflect your list of teams/roles from Step 1.1.
    • Format Language Download Survey Template
      Excel English Agile Readiness Assessment Excel Survey Template – EN and FR
      Excel French
      Online English Agile Readiness Assessment Online Survey Template – EN
      Online French Agile Readiness Assessment Online Survey Template – FR

    • 1.3 Distribute your Agile Readiness Assessment Survey broadly in the organization. Give all participants a deadline date for completion of the survey.

    Phase 2 — Phase 2 of 3, 'Consolidate Results'.

    Consolidate Survey Results

    Collect and consolidate all survey responses using the template provided.

    Review the OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps generated by the template.

    • 2.1 Collect the survey responses from all participants. All responses completed using the online form will be anonymous (for responses returned using the Excel form, assign each a unique identifier so that anonymity of responses is maintained).
    • 2.2 Consolidate the survey responses using the template below. Follow the instructions in the template to incorporate all survey responses.
    • Download the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool

      Sample of the Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool, ranking maturity scores in 'Culture', 'Learning', 'Automation', 'Integrated Teams', 'Metrics', and 'Governance'.

    Phase 3 — Phase 3 of 3, 'Examine Results'.

    Examine Survey Results and Problem Solve

    Review the consolidated survey results as a team.

    Identify the challenges that need the most attention.

    Brainstorm potential solutions. Decide which are most promising and create a plan to implement them.

    • 3.1 Examine the consolidated results (both OVERALL and DETAILED Heatmaps) and look at both team-specific and organization-wide challenge areas.
    • 3.2 Identify which challenge areas need the most attention (typically those that are most red in the heatmap) and discuss these challenges with survey participants.
    • 3.3 As a team, brainstorm potential solutions to these challenges. Select from and refine the solutions that are most promising, then create a plan to implement them.

    3.1 Exercise: Collaborative Problem Solving — Phase 3 of 3, 'Examine Results'.

    60 Mins

    Input: Consolidated survey results

    Output: List of actions to address your most pressing challenges along with a timeline to implement them

    Materials: Agile Readiness Assessment Consolidated Results Tool, Whiteboard and markers

    Participants: Survey participants, Other interested parties

    This exercise will create a plan for addressing your most pressing Agile-related challenges.

    • As a team, agree on which survey challenges are most important to address (typically the most red in the heatmap).
    • Brainstorm potential solutions/actions to address these challenges.
    • Assign solutions/actions to individuals and set a timeline for completion.
    Challenge Proposed Solution Owner Timeline
    Enrichment
    lack of a CoE
    Establish a service-oriented Agile Center of Excellence (CoE) staffed with experienced Agile practitioners who can directly help new-to-Agile teams be successful. Bill W. 6 Months
    Tool Chain
    (lack of Agile tools)
    Select a standard Agile work management tool (e.g. Jira, Rally, ADO) that will be used by all Agile teams. Cindy K. 2 Months

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Modernize Your SDLC
    • Strategically adopt today’s SDLC good practices to streamline value delivery.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Implement Agile Practices That Work
    • Guide your organization through its Agile transformation journey.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Implement DevOps Practices That Work
    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.
    Sample of an Info-Tech blueprint. Mentoring for Agile Teams
    • Leverage an experience Agile Mentor to give your in-flight Agile project a helping hand.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    • Columbus Brown, Senior Principal – Practice Lead – Business Alignment, Daugherty Business Solutions
    • Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs
    • Brenda Peshak, Product Owner/Scrum Master/Program Manager, John Deere/Source Allies/Widget Industries LLC
    • Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group
    • Len O'Neill, Sr. Vice President and Chief Information Officer, The Suddath Companies
    • Shameka A. Jones, MPM, CSM, Lead Business Management Consultant, Mainspring Business Group, LLC
    • Ryland Leyton, Lead Business Analyst, Aptos Retail
    • Ashish Nangia, Lead Business System Analyst, Ashley Furniture Industries
    • Barbara Carkenord, CBAP, IIBA-AAC, PMI-PBA, PMP, SAFe POPM, President, Carkenord Consulting
    • Danelkis Serra, CBAP, Chapter Operations Manager, Regions & Chapters, IIBA (International Institute of Business Analysis)
    • Lorrie Staples-Ellis, CyberSecurity Integration Strategist, Wealth Management, Truist Bank
    • Ginger Sundberg, Independent Consultant
    • Kham Raven, Project Manager, Fraud Strategy & Execution, Truist Bank
    • Sarah Vollett, PMP, Business Analyst, Operations, College of Physicians and Surgeons of British Columbia
    • Nicole J Coyle, ICP-ACC, CEAC, SPC4, SASM, POPM, CSM, ECM, CCMP, CAPM, Team Agile Coach and Team Facilitator, HCQIS Foundational Components
    • Joe Glower, IT Director, Jet Support Services, Inc. (JSSI)
    • Harsh Daharwal, Senior Director, Application Delivery, J.R. Simplot
    • Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group
    • Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}89|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,772 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • Business satisfaction with IT is low.
    • IT and the business have independently evolving strategy, initiatives, and objectives.
    • IT often exceeds their predicted project costs and has difficulty meeting the business’ expectations of project quality and time-to-market.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Business needs are unclear or ambiguous.
    • IT and the business do not know how to leverage each other’s talent and resources to meet their common goals.
    • Not enough steps are taken to fully understand and validate problems.
    • IT can’t pivot fast enough when the business’s needs change.

    Impact and Result

    Product, service, and process design should always start with an intimate understanding of what the business is trying to accomplish and why it is important.

    Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should apply experience design to partner with the business, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Research

    Identify goals and objectives for experience design, establish targeted stakeholders, and conduct discovery interviews.

    • Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business – Phase 1: Research
    • Stakeholder Discovery Interview Template

    2. Map and iterate

    Create the journey map, design a research study to validate your hypotheses, and iterate and ideate around a refined, data-driven understanding of stakeholder problems.

    • Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business – Phase 2: Map and Iterate
    • Journey Map Template
    • Research Study Log Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Apply Design Thinking to Build Empathy With the Business

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Introduction to Journey Mapping

    The Purpose

    Understand the method and purpose of journey mapping.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initial understanding of the journey mapping process and the concept of end-user empathy.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduce team and discuss workshop motivations and goals.

    1.2 Discuss overview of journey mapping process.

    1.3 Perform journey mapping case study activity.

    Outputs

    Case Study Deliverables – Journey Map and Empathy Maps

    2 Persona Creation

    The Purpose

    Begin to understand the goals and motivations of your stakeholders using customer segmentation and an empathy mapping exercise.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the demographic and psychographic factors driving stakeholder behavior.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss psychographic stakeholder segmentation.

    2.2 Create empathy maps for four segments.

    2.3 Generate problem statements.

    2.4 Identify target market.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder personas

    Target market of IT

    3 Interview Stakeholders and Start a Journey Map

    The Purpose

    Get first-hand knowledge of stakeholder needs and start to capture their perspective with a first-iteration journey map.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Capture the process stakeholders use to solve problems and empathize with their perspectives, pains, and gains.

    Activities

    3.1 Review discovery interviewing techniques.

    3.2 Review and modify the discovery questionnaire

    3.3 Demonstrate stakeholder interview.

    3.4 Synthesize learnings and begin creating a journey map.

    Outputs

    Customized discovery interview template

    Results of discovery interviewing

    4 Complete the Journey Map and Create a Research Study

    The Purpose

    Hypothesize the stakeholder journey, identify assumptions, plan a research study to validate your understanding, and ideate around critical junctures in the journey.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the stakeholder journey and ideate solutions with the intention of improving their experience with IT.

    Activities

    4.1 Finish the journey map.

    4.2 Identify assumptions and create hypotheses.

    4.3 Discuss field research and hypothesis testing.

    4.4 Design the research study.

    4.5 Discuss concluding remarks and next steps.

    Outputs

    Completed journey map for one IT process, product, or service

    Research study design and action plan

    Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}149|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • While teams are used to optimizing their own respective areas of responsibility, there is lack of clarity on the overall core SDLC process resulting in applications being released that are of poor quality.
    • Software development teams are struggling to release on time and within budget.
    • Teams do not understand the overall process, are not communicating well, and traceability is hard to achieve.
    • Each team claims to be optimized yet the final deliverable doesn’t reflect the expected quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Optimizing can make you worse. One cannot just optimize locally – the SDLC must be optimized in its entirety to ensure traceability across the process.
    • Separate process from framework.
      You don’t need to “Go Agile” or follow other industry jargon to effectively optimize your SDLC.
    • SDLC process improvement is ongoing.
      Start with your team’s current capabilities and optimize. You should set expectations that new improvements will always come in the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Use a systematic framework to bring out local optimizations as potential candidates for SDLC optimization.
    • Prioritize those candidates that will aid in optimizing the overall core SDLC process.
    • Create the necessary governance and control structures to sustain the changes.
    • Use Info-Tech tools and templates to accelerate your process optimization.

    Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand Info-Tech's approach to SDLC optimization and why the SDLC must be optimized in its entirety to ensure traceability across the process.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Document the current state of the SDLC

    This phase of the blueprint will help in understanding the organization's business priorities, documenting the current SDLC process, and identifing current SDLC challenges.

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 1: Document the Current State of the SDLC
    • SDLC Optimization Playbook

    2. Define root causes, determine optimization initiatives, and define target state

    This phase of the blueprint, will help with defining root causes, determining potential optimization initiatives, and defining the target state of the SDLC.

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 2: Define Root Causes, Determine Optimization Initiatives, and Define Target State

    3. Develop a rollout strategy for SDLC optimization

    This phase of the blueprint will help with prioritizing initiatives in order to develop a rollout strategy, roadmap, and communication plan for the SDLC optimization.

    • Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands – Phase 3: Develop a Rollout Strategy for SDLC Optimization
    • SDLC Communication Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Horizontally Optimized SDLC to Better Meet Business Demands

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Document Your Current SDLC

    The Purpose

    Understand SDLC current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of your current SDLC state and metrics to measure the success of your SDLC optimization initiative.

    Activities

    1.1 Document the key business objectives that your SDLC delivers upon.

    1.2 Document your current SDLC process using a SIPOC process map.

    1.3 Identify appropriate metrics in order to track the effectiveness of your SDLC optimization.

    1.4 Document the current state process flow of each SDLC phase.

    1.5 Document the control points and tools used within each phase.

    Outputs

    Documented business objectives

    Documented SIPOC process map

    Identified metrics to measure the effectiveness of your SDLC optimization

    Documented current state process flows of each SDLC phase

    Documented control points and tools used within each SDLC phase

    2 Assess Challenges and Define Root Causes

    The Purpose

    Understand current SDLC challenges and root causes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the core areas of your SDLC that require optimization.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify the current challenges that exist within each SDLC phase.

    2.2 Determine the root cause of the challenges that exist within each SDLC phase.

    Outputs

    Identified current challenges

    Identified root causes of your SDLC challenges

    3 Determine Your SDLC Optimization Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Understand common best practices and the best possible optimization initiatives to help optimize your current SDLC.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the best ways to address your SDLC challenges.

    Activities

    3.1 Define optimization initiatives to address the challenges in each SDLC phase.

    Outputs

    Defined list of potential optimization initiatives to address SDLC challenges

    4 Define SDLC Target State

    The Purpose

    Define your SDLC target state while maintaining traceability across your overall SDLC process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what will be required to reach your optimized SDLC.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine the target state of your SDLC.

    4.2 Determine the people, tools, and control points necessary to achieve your target state.

    4.3 Assess the traceability between phases to ensure a seamlessly optimized SDLC.

    Outputs

    Determined SDLC target state

    Identified people, processes, and tools necessary to achieve target state

    Completed traceability alignment map and prioritized list of initiatives

    5 Prioritize Initiatives and Develop Rollout Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define how you will reach your target state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a plan of action to achieve your desired target state.

    Activities

    5.1 Gain the full scope of effort required to implement your SDLC optimization initiatives.Gain the full scope of effort required to implement your SDLC optimization initiatives.

    5.2 Identify the enablers and blockers of your SDLC optimization.

    5.3 Define your SDLC optimization roadmap.

    5.4 Create a communication plan to share initiatives with the business.

    Outputs

    Level of effort required to implement your SDLC optimization initiatives

    Identified enablers and blockers of your SDLC optimization

    Defined optimization roadmap

    Completed communication plan to present your optimization strategy to stakeholders

    Availability and Capacity Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}10|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}10|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}10|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10.0
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,950
    • member rating average days saved: 10
    • Parent Category Name: Resilient IT Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /resilience/resilient-operations-and-it
    Develop your availability and capacity management plant and align it with exactly what the business expects.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}558|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Contacts fail to convert to leads because messaging fails to resonate with buyers.
    • Products fail to reach targets given shallow understanding of buyer needs.
    • Sellers' emails go unopened and attempts at discovery fail due to no understanding of buyer challenges, pain points, and needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Marketing leaders in possession of well-researched and up-to-date buyer personas and journeys dramatically improve product market fit, lead gen, and sales results.
    • Success starts with product, marketing, and sales alignment on targeted personas.
    • Speed to deploy is enabled via initial buyer persona attribute discovery internally.
    • However, ultimate success requires buyer interviews, especially for the buyer journey.
    • Leading marketers update journey maps every six months as disruptive events such as COVID-19 and new media and tech platform advancements require continual innovation.

    Impact and Result

    • Reduce time and treasure wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
    • Improve product-market fit.
    • Increase open and click-through rates in your lead gen engine.
    • Perform more effective sales discovery and increase eventual win rates.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Our Executive Brief summarizes the challenges faced when buyer persona and journeys are ill-defined. It describes the attributes of, and the benefits that accrue from, a well-defined persona and journey and the key steps to take to achieve success.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Drive an aligned initial draft of buyer persona

    Define and align your team on target persona, outline steps to capture and document a robust buyer persona and journey, and capture current team buyer knowledge.

    • Buyer Persona Creation Template
    • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    2. Interview buyers and validate persona and journey

    Hold initial buyer interviews, test initial results, and continue with interviews.

    3. Prepare communications and educate stakeholders

    Consolidate interview findings, present to product, marketing, and sales teams. Work with them to apply to product design, marketing launch/campaigning, and sales and customer success enablement.

    • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Align Team, Identify Persona, and Document Current Knowledge

    The Purpose

    Organize, drive alignment on target persona, and capture initial views.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Steering committee and project team roles and responsibilities clarified.

    Product, marketing, and sales aligned on target persona.

    Build initial team understanding of persona.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.

    1.2 Identify buyer persona choices and settle on an initial target.

    1.3 Document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).

    Outputs

    Documented steering committee and working team

    Executive Brief on personas and journey

    Personas and initial targets

    Documented team knowledge

    2 Validate Initial Work and Identify Buyer Interviewees

    The Purpose

    Build list of buyer interviewees, finalize interview guide, and validate current findings with analyst input.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Interview efficiently using 75-question interview guide.

    Gain analyst help in persona validation, reducing workload.

    Activities

    2.1 Share initial insights with covering industry analyst.

    2.2 Hear from industry analyst their perspectives on the buyer persona attributes.

    2.3 Reconcile differences; update “current understanding.”

    2.4 Identify interviewee types by segment, region, etc.

    Outputs

    Analyst-validated initial findings

    Target interviewee types

    3 Schedule and Hold Buyer Interviews

    The Purpose

    Validate current persona hypothesis and flush out those attributes only derived from interviews.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Get to a critical mass of persona and journey understanding quickly.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify actual list of 15-20 interviewees.

    3.2 Hold interviews and use interview guides over the course of weeks.

    3.3 Hold review session after initial 3-4 interviews to make adjustments.

    3.4 Complete interviews.

    Outputs

    List of interviewees; calls scheduled

    Initial review – “are you going in the right direction?”

    Completed interviews

    4 Summarize Findings and Provide Actionable Guidance to Colleagues

    The Purpose

    Summarize persona and journey attributes and provide activation guidance to team.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of product market fit requirements, messaging, and marketing, and sales asset content.

    Activities

    4.1 Summarize findings.

    4.2 Create action items for supporting team, e.g. messaging, touch points, media spend, assets.

    4.3 Convene steering committee/executives and working team for final review.

    4.4 Schedule meetings with colleagues to action results.

    Outputs

    Complete findings

    Action items for team members

    Plan for activation

    5 Measure Impact and Results

    The Purpose

    Measure results, adjust, and improve.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Activation of outcomes; measured results.

    Activities

    5.1 Review final copy, assets, launch/campaign plans, etc.

    5.2 Develop/review implementation plan.

    5.3 Reconvene team to review results.

    Outputs

    Activation review

    List of suggested next steps

    Further reading

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Make it easier to market, sell, and achieve product-market fit with deeper buyer understanding.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    B2B marketers without documented personas and journeys often experience the following:

    • Contacts fail to convert to leads because messaging fails to resonate with buyers.
    • Products fail to reach targets given shallow understanding of buyer needs.
    • Sellers’ emails go unopened, and attempts at discovery fail due to no understanding of buyer challenges, pain points, and needs.

    Without a deeper understanding of buyer needs and how they buy, B2B marketers will waste time and precious resources targeting the incorrect personas.

    Common Obstacles

    Despite being critical elements, organizations struggle to build personas due to:

    • A lack of alignment and collaboration among marketing, product, and sales.
    • An internal focus; or a lack of true customer centricity.
    • A lack of tools and techniques for building personas and buyer journeys.

    In today’s Agile development environment, combined with the pressure to generate revenues quickly, high tech marketers often skip the steps necessary to go deeper to build buyer understanding.

    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    With a common framework and target output, clients will:

    • Align marketing, sales, and product, and collaborate together to share current knowledge on buyer personas and journeys.
    • Target 12-15 customers and prospects to interview and validate insights. Share that with customer-facing staff.
    • Activate the insights for more customer-centric lead generation, product development, and selling.

    Clients who activate findings from buyer personas and journeys will see a 50% results improvement.

    SoftwareReviews Insight:
    Buyer personas and buyer journeys are essential ingredients in go-to-market success, as they inform for product, marketing, sales, and customer success who we are targeting and how to engage with them successfully.

    Buyer personas and journeys: A go-to-market critical success factor

    Marketers – large and small – will fail to optimize product-market fit, lead generation, and sales effectiveness without well-defined buyer personas and a buyer journey.

    Critical Success Factors of a Successful G2M Strategy:

    • Opportunity size and business case
    • Buyer personas and journey
    • Competitively differentiated product hypothesis
    • Buyer-validated commercial concept
    • Sales revenue plan and program cost budget
    • Consolidated communications to steering committee

    Jeff Golterman, Managing Director, SoftwareReviews Advisory

    “44% of B2B marketers have already discovered the power of Personas.”
    – Hasse Jansen, Boardview.io!, 2016

    Documenting buyer personas enables success beyond marketing

    Documenting buyer personas has several essential benefits to marketing, sales, and product teams:

    • Achieve a better understanding of your target buyer – by building a detailed buyer persona for each type of buyer and keeping it fresh, you take a giant step toward becoming a customer-centric organization.
    • Team alignment on a common definition – will happen when you build buyer personas collaboratively and among those teams that touch the customer.
    • Improved lead generation – increases dramatically when messaging and marketing assets across your lead generation engine better resonate with buyers because you have taken the time to understand them deeply.
    • More effective selling – is possible when sellers apply persona development output to their interactions with prospects and customers.
    • Better product-market fit – increases when product teams more deeply understand for whom they are designing products. Documenting buyer challenges, pain points, and unmet needs gives product teams what they need to optimize product adoption.

    “It’s easier buying gifts for your best friend or partner than it is for a stranger, right? You know their likes and dislikes, you know the kind of gifts they’ll have use for, or the kinds of gifts they’ll get a kick out of. Customer personas work the same way, by knowing what your customer wants and needs, you can present them with content targeted specifically to their wants and needs.”
    – Emma Bilardi, Product Marketing Alliance, 2020

    Buyer understanding activates just about everything

    Without the deep buyer insights that persona and journey capture enables, marketers are suboptimized.

    Buyer Persona and Journey

    • Product design
    • Customer targeting
    • Personalization
    • Messaging
    • Content marketing
    • Lead gen & scoring
    • Sales Effectiveness
    • Customer retention

    “Marketing eutopia is striking the all-critical sweet spot that adds real value and makes customers feel recognized and appreciated, while not going so far as to appear ‘big brother’. To do this, you need a deep understanding of your audience coming from a range of different data sets and the capability to extract meaning.”
    – Plexure, 2020

    Does your organization need buyer persona and journey updating?

    “Yes,” if experiencing one or more key challenges:

    • Sales time is wasted on unqualified leads
    • Website abandon rates are high
    • Lead gen engine click-through rates are low
    • Ideal customer profile is ill defined
    • Marketing asset downloads are low
    • Seller discovery with prospects is ineffective
    • Sales win/loss rates drop due to poor product-market fit
    • Higher than desired customer churn

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Marketers developing buyer personas and journeys that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, and Product of personas to target will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer targeting and acquisition process.

    Outcomes and benefits

    Building your buyer persona and journey using our methodology will enable:

    • Greater stakeholder alignment – when marketing, product, and sales agree on personas, less time is wasted on targeting alternate personas.
    • Improved product-market fit – when buyers see both pain-relieving features and value-based pricing, “because you asked vs. guessed,” win rates increase.
    • Greater open and click-through rates – because you understood buyer pain points and motivations for solution seeking, you’ll see higher visits and engagement with your lead gen engine, and because you asked “what asset types do you find most helpful” your CTAs become ”lead-gen magnets” because you’ve offered the right asset types in your content marketing strategy.
    • More qualified leads – because you defined a more accurate ideal customer profile (ICP) and your lead scoring algorithm has improved, sellers see more qualified leads.
    • Increased sales cycle velocity – since you learned from personas their content and engagement preferences and what collateral types they need during the down-funnel sales discussions, sales calls are more productive and sales cycles shrink.

    Our methodology for buyer persona and journey creation

    1. Document Team Knowledge of Buyer Persona and Drive Alignment 2. Interview Target Buyer Prospects and Customers 3. Create Outputs and Apply to Marketing, Sales, and Product
    Phase Steps
    1. Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.
    2. Pull stakeholders together, identify initial buyer persona, and begin to document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).
    3. Validate with industry and marketing analyst’s initial buyer persona, and identify list of buyer interviewees.
    1. Hold interviews and document and share findings.
    2. Validate initial drafts of buyer persona and create initial documented buyer journey. Review findings among key stakeholders, steering committee, and supporting analysts.
    3. Complete remaining interviews.
    1. Summarize findings.
    2. Convene steering committee/exec. and working team for final review.
    3. Communicate to key stakeholders in product, marketing, sales, and customer success for activation.
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Steering committee and team selection
    2. Team insights about buyer persona documented
    3. Buyer persona validation with industry and marketing analysts
    4. Sales, marketing, and product alignment
    1. Interview guide
    2. Target interviewee list
    3. Buyer-validated buyer persona
    4. Buyer journey documented with asset types, channels, and “how buyers buy” fully documented
    1. Education deck on buyer persona and journey ready for use with all stakeholders: product, field marketing, sales, executives, customer success, partners
    2. Activation will update product-market fit, optimize lead gen, and improve sales effectiveness

    Our approach provides interview guides and templates to help rebuild buyer persona

    Our methodology will enable you to align your team on why it’s important to capture the most important attributes of buyer persona including:

    • Functional – helps you find and locate your target personas
    • Emotive – deepens team understanding of buyer initiatives, motivations for seeking alternatives, challenges they face, pain points for your offerings to address, and terminology that describes the “space”
    • Solution – enables greater product market fit
    • Behavioral – clarifies how to communicate with personas and understand their content preferences
    Functional – “to find them”
    Job Role Title Org. Chart Dynamics Buying Center Firmographics
    Emotive – “what they do and jobs to be done”
    Initiatives: What programs/projects the persona is tasked with and their feelings and aspirations about these initiatives. Motivations? Build credibility? Get promoted? Challenges: Identify the business issues, problems, and pain points that impede attainment of objectives. What are their fears, uncertainties, and doubts about these challenges? Buyer Need: They may have multiple needs; which need is most likely met with the offering? Terminology: What are the keywords/phrases they organically use to discuss the buyer need or business issue?
    Decision Criteria – “how they decide”
    Buyer Role: List decision-making criteria and power level. The five common buyer roles are champion, influencer, decision maker, user, and ratifier (purchaser/negotiator). Evaluation and Decision Criteria: Which lens – strategic, financial, or operational – does the persona evaluate the impact of purchase through?
    Solution Attributes – “what does the ideal solution look like”
    Steps in “Jobs to Be Done” Elements of the “Ideal Solution” Business outcomes from ideal solution Opportunity scope; other potential users Acceptable price for value delivered Alternatives that see consideration Solution sourcing: channel, where to buy
    Behavioral Attributes – “how to approach them successfully”
    Content Preferences: List the persona’s content preferences – blog, infographic, demo, video – vs. long-form assets (e.g. white paper, presentation, analyst report). Interaction Preferences: Which are preferred among in-person meetings, phone calls, emails, videoconferencing, conducting research via Web, mobile, and social? Watering Holes: Which physical or virtual places do they go to network or exchange info with peers (e.g. LinkedIn)?

    Buyer journeys are constantly shifting

    If you didn’t remap buyer journeys in 2021, you may be losing to competitors that did. Leaders remap buyer journey frequently.

    • The multi-channel buyer journey is constantly changing. Today’s B2B buyer uses industry research sites, vendor content marketing assets, software reviews sites, contacts with vendor salespeople, events participation, peer networking, consultants, emails, social media sites, and electronic media to research purchasing decisions.
    • COVID-19 has dramatically decreased face-to-face interaction. We estimate a B2B buyer spent 20-25% more time online in 2021 than pre-COVID-19 researching software buying decisions. This has diminished the importance of face-to-face selling and given dramatic rise to digital selling and outbound marketing.
    • Content marketing has exploded, but without mapping the buyer journey and knowing where – by channel –and when – by buyer journey step – to offer content marketing assets, we will fail to convert prospects into buyers.

    “~2/3 of [B2B] buyers prefer remote human interactions or digital self-service.” And during Aug. ‘20 to Feb. ‘21, use of digital self-service to interact with sales reps leapt by more than 10% for both researching and evaluating new suppliers.”
    – Liz Harrison, Dennis Spillecke, Jennifer Stanley, and Jenny Tsai McKinsey & Company, 2021

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Marketers are advised to update their buyer journey annually and with greater frequency when the human vs. digital mix is affected due to events such as COVID-19 and as emerging media such as AR shifts asset-type usage and engagement options.

    Our approach helps you define the buyer journey

    Because marketing leaders need to reach buyers through the right channel with the right message at the right time during their decision cycle, you’ll benefit by using questionnaires that enable you to build the below easily and quickly.

    You’ll be more successful by following our overall guidance

    Overarching insight

    Buyer personas and buyer journeys are essential ingredients in go-to-market success, as they inform for product, marketing, sales, and customer success who we are targeting and how to engage with them successfully.

    Align Your Team

    Marketers developing buyer personas and journeys that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, and Product of personas to target will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer targeting and acquisition process.

    Jump-Start Persona Development

    Marketing leaders leverage the buyer persona knowledge not only from in-house experts in areas such as sales and executives but from analysts that speak with their buyers each and every day.

    Buyer Interviews Are a Must

    While leaders will get a fast start by interviewing sellers, executives, and analysts, you will fail to craft the right messages, build the right marketing assets, and design the best buyer journey if you skip buyer interviews.

    Watch for Disruption

    Leaders will update their buyer journey annually and with greater frequency when the human vs. digital mix is effected due to events such as COVID-19 and as emerging media such as AR and VR shifts the way buyers engage.

    Advanced Buyer Journey Discovery

    Digital marketers that ramp up lead gen engine capabilities to capture “wins” and measure engagement back through the lead gen and nurturing engines will build a more data-driven view of the buyer journey. Target to build this advanced capability in your initial design.

    Tools and templates to speed your success

    This blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you gather team insights, interview customers and prospects, and summarize results for ease in communications.

    To support your buyer persona and journey creation, we’ve created the enclosed tools

    Buyer Persona Creation Template

    A PowerPoint template to aid the capture and summarizing of your team’s insights on the buyer persona.

    Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    For interviewing customers and prospects, this tool is designed to help you interview personas and summarize results for up to 15 interviewees.

    Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    A PowerPoint template into which you can drop your buyer persona and journey interviewees list and summary findings.

    SoftwareReviews offers two levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    The "do-it-yourself" step-by-step instructions begin with Phase 1.

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    A Guided Implementation is a series of analysts inquiries with you and your team.

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout each option.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    What does our GI on buyer persona and journey mapping look like?

    Drive an Aligned Initial Draft of Buyer Persona

    • Call #1: Collaborate on vision for buyer persona and the buyer journey. Review templates and sample outputs. Identify your team.
    • Call #2: Review work in progress on capturing working team knowledge of buyer persona elements.
    • Call #3: (Optional) Review Info-Tech’s research-sourced persona insights.
    • Call #4: Validate the persona WIP with Info-Tech analysts. Review buyer interview approach and target list.

    Interview Buyers and Validate Persona and Journey

    • Call #5: Revise/review interview guide and final interviewee list; schedule interviews.
    • Call #6: Review interim interview finds; adjust interview guide.
    • Call #7: Use interview findings to validate/update persona and build journey map.
    • Call #8: Add supporting analysts to final stakeholder review.

    Prepare Communications and Educate Stakeholders

    • Call #9: Review output templates completed with final persona and journey findings.
    • Call #10: Add supporting analysts to stakeholder education meetings for support and help with addressing questions/issues.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Align Team, Identify Persona, and Document Current Knowledge Validate Initial Work and Identify Buyer Interviewees Schedule and Hold Buyer interviews Summarize Findings and Provide Actionable Guidance to Colleagues Measure Impact and Results
    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for buyer persona and journey creation and identify stakeholders.

    1.2 Identify buyer persona choices and settle on an initial target.

    1.3 Document team knowledge about buyer persona (and journey where possible).

    2.1 Share initial insights with covering industry analyst.

    2.2 Hear from industry analyst their perspectives on the buyer persona attributes.

    2.3 Reconcile differences; update “current understanding.”

    2.4 Identify interviewee types by segment, region, etc.

    3.1 Identify actual list of 15-20 interviewees.

    A gap of up to a week for scheduling of interviews.

    3.2 Hold interviews and use interview guides (over the course of weeks).

    3.3 Hold review session after initial 3-4 interviews to make adjustments.

    3.4 Complete interviews.

    4.1 Summarize findings.

    4.2 Create action items for supporting team, e.g. messaging, touch points, media spend, assets.

    4.3 Convene steering committee/exec. and working team for final review.

    4.4 Schedule meetings with colleagues to action results.

    5.1 Review final copy, assets, launch/campaign plans, etc.

    5.2 Develop/review implementation plan.

    A period of weeks will likely intervene to execute and gather results.

    5.3 Reconvene team to review results.

    Deliverables
    1. Documented steering committee and working team
    2. Executive Brief on personas and journey
    3. Personas and initial targets
    4. Documented team knowledge
    1. Analyst-validated initial findings
    2. Target interviewee types
    1. List of interviewees; calls scheduled
    2. Initial review – “are we going in the right direction?”
    3. Completed interviews
    1. Complete findings
    2. Action items for team members
    3. Plan for activation
    1. Activation review
    2. List of suggested next steps

    Phase 1
    Drive an Aligned Initial Draft of Buyer Persona

    This Phase walks you through the following activities:

    • Develop an understanding of what comprises a buyer persona and journey, including their importance to overall go-to-market strategy and execution.
    • Sample outputs.

    This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Program leadership
    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management
    • Representative(s) from Sales
    • Executive Leadership

    1.1 Establish the team and align on shared vision

    Input

    • Typically a joint recognition that buyer personas have not been fully documented.
    • Identify working team members/participants (see below), and an executive sponsor.

    Output

    • Communication of team members involved and the make-up of steering committee and working team
    • Alignment of team members on a shared vision of “Why Build Buyer Personas and Journey” and what key attributes define both.

    Materials

    • N/A

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • CMO/Sponsoring Executive Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
    • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

    60 minutes

    1. Schedule inquiry with working team members and walk the team through the Buyer Persona and Journey Executive Brief PowerPoint presentation.
    2. Optional: Have the (SoftwareReviews Advisory) SRA analyst walk the team through the Buyer Persona and Journey Executive Brief PowerPoint presentation as part of your session.

    Review the Create a Buyer Persona Executive Brief (Slides 3-14)

    1.2 Document team knowledge of buyer persona

    Input

    • Working team member knowledge

    Output

    • Initial draft of your buyer persona

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona Creation Template

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (optional)
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

    2-3 sessions of 60 minutes each

    1. Schedule meeting with working team members and, using the Buyer Persona Template, lead the team in a discussion that documents current team knowledge of the target buyer persona.
    2. Lead the team to prioritize an initial, single, most important persona and to collaborate to complete the template (and later, the buyer journey). Once the team learns the process for working on the initial persona, the development of additional personas will become more efficient.
    3. Place the PowerPoint template in a shared drive for team collaboration. Expect to schedule several 60-minute meets. Quicken collaboration by encouraging team to “do their homework” by sharing persona knowledge within the shared drive version of the template. Your goal is to get to an initial agreed upon version that can be shared for additional validation with industry analyst(s) in the next step.

    Download the Buyer Persona Creation Template

    1.3 Validate with industry analysts

    Input

    • Identify gaps in persona from previous steps

    Output

    • Further validated buyer persona

    Materials

    • Bring your Buyer Persona Creation Template to the meeting to share with analysts

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (Optional)
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
    • Info-Tech analyst covering your product category and SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

    30 minutes

    1. Schedule meeting with working team members and discuss which persona areas require further validation from an Info-Tech analyst who has worked closely with those buyers within your persona.

    60 minutes

    1. Schedule an inquiry with the appropriate Info-Tech analyst and SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to share current findings and see:
      1. Info-Tech analyst provide content feedback given what they know about your target persona and product category.
      2. SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst provide feedback on persona approach and to coach any gaps or important omissions.
    2. Tabulate results and update your persona summary. At this point you will likely require additional validation through interviews with customers and prospects.

    1.4 Identify interviewees and prepare for interviews

    Input

    • Identify segments within which you require persona knowledge
    • Understand your persona insight gaps

    Output

    • List of interviewees

    Materials

    • Interviewee recording template on following slide
    • Interview guide questions found within the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

    1-2 weeks

    1. Identify the types of customers and prospects that will best represent your target persona. Choose interviewees that when interviewed will inform key differences among key segments (geographies, company size, mix of customers and prospects, etc.).
    2. Recruit interviewees and schedule interviews for 45 minutes.
    3. Keep track of Interviewees using the slide following this one.
    4. In preparation for interviews, review the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool. Review the two sets of questions:
      1. Buyer Persona-Related – use to validate areas where you still have gaps in your persona, OR if you are starting with a blank persona and wish to build your personas entirely based on customer and prospect interviews.
      2. Buyer-Journey Related, which we will focus on in the next phase.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    The image shows a table titled ‘Interviewee List.’ A note next to the title indicates: Here you will document your interviewee list and outreach plan. A note in the Segment column indicates: Ensure you are interviewing personas across segments that will give you the insights you need, e.g. by size, by region, mix of customers and prospects. A note in the Title column reads: Vary your title types up or down in the “buying center” if you are seeking to strengthen buying center dynamics understanding. A note in the Roles column reads: Vary your role types according to decision-making roles (decision maker, influencer, ratifier, coach, user) if you are seeking to strengthen decision-making dynamics understanding.

    Phase 2
    Interview Buyers and Validate Persona and Journey

    This Phase walks you through the following activities:

    • Developing final interview guide.
    • Interviewing buyers and customers.
    • Adjusting approach.
    • Validating buyer persona.
    • Crafting buyer journey
    • Gaining analyst feedback.

    This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Program leadership
    • Product Marketing
    • Representative(s) from Sales

    2.1 Hold interviews

    Input

    • List of interviewees
    • Final list of questions

    Output

    • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

    1-2 weeks

    1. Hold interviews and adjust your interviewing approach as you go along. Uncover where you are not getting the right answers, check with working team and analysts, and adjust.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    2.2 Use interview findings to validate what’s needed for activation

    Input

    • List of interviewees
    • Final list of questions

    Output

    • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys
    • Stakeholder feedback that actionable insights are resulting from interviews

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona Creation Template
    • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
    • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

    2 hours

    1. Convene your team, with marketing analysts, and test early findings: It’s wise to test initial interview results to check that you are getting the right insights to understand and validate key challenges, pain points, needs, and other vital areas pertaining to the buyer persona. Are the answers you are getting enabling you to complete the Summary slides for later communications and training for Sales?
    2. Check when doing buyer journey interviews that you are getting actionable answers that drive messaging, what asset types are needed, what the marketing channel mix is, and other vital insights to activate the results. Are the answers you are getting adequate to give guidance to campaigners, content marketers, and sales enablement?
    3. See the following slides for detailed questions that need to be answered satisfactorily by your team members that need to “activate” the results.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    2.2.1 Are you getting what you need from interviews to inform the buyer persona?

    Test that you are on the right track:

    1. Are you getting the functional answers so you can guide sellers to the right roles? Can you guide marketers/campaigners to the right “Ideal Customer Profile” for lead scoring?
    2. Are you capturing the right emotive areas that will support message crafting? Solutioning? SEM/SEO?
    3. Are you capturing insights into “how they decide” so sellers are well informed on the decision-making dynamics?
    4. Are you getting a strong understanding of content, interaction preferences, and news and information sources so sellers can outreach more effectively, you can pinpoint media spend, and content marketing can create the right assets?
    Functional – “to find them”
    Job Role Title Org. Chart Dynamics Buying Center Firmographics
    Emotive – “what they do and jobs to be done”
    Initiatives: What programs/projects the persona is tasked with and their feelings and aspirations about these initiatives. Motivations? Build credibility? Get promoted? Challenges: Identify the business issues, problems, and pain points that impede attainment of objectives. What are their fears, uncertainties, and doubts about these challenges? Buyer Need: They may have multiple needs; which need is most likely met with the offering? Terminology: What are the keywords/phrases they organically use to discuss the buyer need or business issue?
    Decision Criteria – “how they decide”
    Buyer Role: List decision-making criteria and power level. The five common buyer roles are champion, influencer, decision maker, user, and ratifier (purchaser/negotiator). Evaluation and Decision Criteria: Which lens – strategic, financial, or operational – does the persona evaluate the impact of purchase through?
    Solution Attributes – “what does the ideal solution look like”
    Steps in “Jobs to Be Done” Elements of the “Ideal Solution” Business outcomes from ideal solution Opportunity scope; other potential users Acceptable price for value delivered Alternatives that see consideration Solution sourcing: channel, where to buy
    Behavioral Attributes – “how to approach them successfully”
    Content Preferences: List the persona’s content preferences – blog, infographic, demo, video – vs. long-form assets (e.g. white paper, presentation, analyst report). Interaction Preferences: Which are preferred among in-person meetings, phone calls, emails, videoconferencing, conducting research via Web, mobile, and social? Watering Holes: Which physical or virtual places do they go to network or exchange info with peers (e.g. LinkedIn)?

    2.2.2 Are you getting what you need from interviews to support the buyer journey?

    Our approach helps you define the buyer journey

    Because marketing leaders need to reach buyers through the right channel with the right message at the right time during their decision cycle, you’ll benefit by using questionnaires that enable you to build the below easily and quickly.

    2.3 Continue interviews

    Input

    • Final adjustments to list of interview questions

    Output

    • Final buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona Creation Template
    • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and data Capture Tool

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

    1-2 weeks

    1. Continue customer and prospect interviews.
    2. Ensure you are gaining the segment perspectives needed.
    3. Complete the “Summary” columns within the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    Phase 3
    Prepare Communications and Educate Stakeholders

    This Phase walks you through the following activities:

    • Creating outputs for key stakeholders
    • Communicating final findings and supporting marketing, sales, and product activation.

    This Phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Program leadership
    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management
    • Sales
    • Field Marketing/Campaign Management
    • Executive Leadership

    3.1 Summarize interview results and convene full working team and steering committee for final review

    Input

    • Buyer persona and journey interviews detail

    Output

    • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool
    • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • CMO/Sponsoring Executive (Optional)
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
    • SoftwareReviews marketing analyst

    1-2 hours

    1. Summarize interview results within the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    3.2 Convene executive steering committee and working team to review results

    Input

    • Buyer persona and journey interviews summary

    Output

    • Buyer perspectives on their personas and buyer journeys

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales

    1-2 hours

    1. Present final persona and journey results to the steering committee/executives and to working group using the summary slides interview results within the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template to finalize results.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    3.3 Convene stakeholder meetings to activate results

    Input

    • Buyer persona and journey interviews summary

    Output

    Activation of key learnings to drive:

    • Better product –market fit
    • Lead gen
    • Sales effectiveness
    • Awareness

    Materials

    • Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    Participants

    • Initiative Manager – individual leading the buyer persona and journey initiative
    • Working Team – typically representatives in Product Marketing, Product Management, and Sales
    • Stakeholder team members (see left)

    4-5 hours

    Present final persona and journey results to each stakeholder team. Key presentations include:

    1. Product team to validate product market fit.
    2. Content marketing to provide messaging direction for the creation of awareness and lead gen assets.
    3. Campaigners/Field Marketing for campaign-related messaging and to identify asset types required to be designed and delivered to support the buyer journey.
    4. Social media strategists for social post copy, and PR for other awareness-building copy.
    5. Sales enablement/training to enable updating of sales collateral, proposals, and sales training materials. Sellers to help with their targeting, prospecting, and crafting of outbound messaging and talk tracks.

    Download the Buyer Persona and Journey Summary Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    With the help of this blueprint, you have deepened your and your colleagues’ buyer understanding at both the persona “who they are” level and the buyer journey “how do they buy” level. You are among the minority of marketing leaders that have fully documented a buyer persona and journey – congratulations!

    The benefits of having led your team through the process are significant and include the following:

    • Better alignment of customer/buyer-facing teams such as in product, marketing, sales, and customer success.
    • Messaging that can be used by marketing, sales, and social teams that will resonate with buyer initiatives, pain points, sought-after “pain relief,” and value.
    • Places in the digital and physical universe where your prospects “hang out” so you can optimize your media spend.
    • More effective use of marketing assets and sales collateral that align with the way your prospect needs to consume information throughout their buyer journey to make a decision in your solution area.

    And by capturing and documenting your buyer persona and journey even for a single buyer type, you have started to build the “institutional strength” to apply the process to other roles in the decision-making process or for when you go after new and different buyer types for new products. And finally, by bringing your team along with you in this process, you have also led your team in becoming a more customer-focused organization – a strategic shift that all organizations should pursue.

    If you would like additional support, contact us and we’ll make sure you get the professional expertise you need.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    info@softwarereviews.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Software Reviews Research

    Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring

    • Save time and money and improve your sales win rates when you apply our methodology to score contacts with your lead gen engine more accurately and pass better qualified leads over to your sellers.
    • Our methodology teaches marketers to develop your own lead scoring approach based upon lead/contact profile vs. your Ideal Customer Profile (ICP) and scores contact engagement. Applying the methodology to arrive at your own approach to scoring will mean reduced lead gen costs, higher conversion rates, and increased marketing-influenced wins.

    Bibliography

    Bilardi, Emma. “How to Create Buyer Personas.” Product Marketing Alliance, July 2020. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Harrison, Liz, Dennis Spillecke, Jennifer Stanley, and Jenny Tsai. “Omnichannel in B2B sales: The new normal in a year that has been anything but.” McKinsey & Company, 15 March 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Jansen, Hasse. “Buyer Personas – 33 Mind Blowing Stats.” Boardview.io!, 19 Feb. 2016. Accessed Jan. 2022.

    Raynor, Lilah. “Understanding The Changing B2B Buyer Journey.” Forbes Agency Council, 18 July 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Simpson, Jon. “Finding Your Audience: The Importance of Developing a Buyer Persona.” Forbes Agency Council, 16 May 2017. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    “Successfully Executing Personalized Marketing Campaigns at Scale.” Plexure, 6 Jan. 2020. Accessed Dec 2020.

    Ulwick, Anthony W. JOBS TO BE DONE: Theory to Practice. E-book, Strategyn, 1 Jan. 2017. Accessed Jan. 2022.

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}491|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Impact and Result

    • Tracking goal- and action-based metrics allows you to make meaningful, data-driven decisions for your service desk. You can establish internal benchmarks to set your own baselines.
    • Predefining the audience and cadence of each metric allows you to construct targeted dashboards to aid your metrics analysis.

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard – A deck that shows you how to look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Deciding which service desk metrics to track and how to analyze them can be daunting. Use this deck to narrow down your goal-oriented metrics as a starting point and set your own benchmarks.

    • Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard

    2. Service Desk Metrics Workbook – A tool to organize your service desk metrics.

    For each metric, consider adding the relevant overall goal, audience, cadence, and action. Use the audience and cadence of the metric to split your tracked metrics into various dashboards. Your final list of metrics and reports can be added to your service desk SOP.

    • Service Desk Metrics Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    Look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t get paralyzed by benchmarks when establishing metrics

    When establishing a suite of metrics to track, it’s tempting to start with the metrics measured by other organizations. Naturally, benchmarking will enter the conversation. While benchmarking is useful, measuring you organization against others with a lack of context will only highlight your failures. Furthermore, benchmarks will highlight the norm or common practice. It does not necessarily highlight best practice.

    Keeping the limitations of benchmarking in mind, establish your own metrics suite with action-based metrics. Define the audience, cadence, and actions for each metric you track and pair them with business goals. Measure only what you need to.

    Slowly improve your metrics process over time and analyze your environment using your own data as your benchmark.

    Benedict Chang

    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Measure the business value provided by the service desk.
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard or effective dashboards.

    Common Obstacles

    • Becoming too focused on benchmarks or unidimensional metrics (e.g. cost, first-contact resolution, time to resolve) can lead to misinterpretation of the data and poorly informed actions.
    • Sifting through the many sources of data post hoc can lead to stalling in data analysis or slow reaction times to poor metrics.
    • Dashboards can quickly become cluttered with uninformative metrics, thus reducing the signal-to-noise ratio of meaningful data.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.
    • Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.
    • Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.
    • Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Improve your metrics to align IT with strategic business goals

    The right metrics can tell the business how hard IT works and how well they perform.

    • Only 19% of CXOs feel that their organization is effective at measuring the success of IT projects with their current metrics.
    • Implementing the proper metrics can facilitate communication between the business division and IT practice.
    • The proper metrics can help IT know what issues the business has and how the CEO and CIO should tackle them.
    • If the goals above resonate with your organization, our blueprint Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics will take you through the right steps.

    Current Metrics Suite

    19% Effective

    36% Some Improvement Necessary

    45% Significant Improvement Necessary

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    CXOs stress that value is the most critical area for IT to improve in reporting

    • You most likely have to improve your metrics suite by addressing business value.
    • Over 80% of organizations say they need improvement to their business value metrics, with 32% of organizations reporting that significant improvement is needed.
    • Of course, measuring metrics for service desk operations is important, but don’t forget business-oriented metrics such as measuring knowledgebase articles written for shift-left enablement, cost (time and money) of service desk tickets, and overall end-user satisfaction.

    The image shows a bar graph with percentages on the Y-Acis, and the following categories on the X-Axis: Business value metrics; Stakeholder satisfaction reporting; Risk metrics; Technology performance & operating metrics; Cost & Salary metrics; and Ad hoc feedback from executives and staff. Each bar is split into two sections, with the blue section marked a Significant Improvement Necessary, and the purple section labelled Some Improvement necessary. Two sections are highlighted with red circles: Business Value metrics--32% blue; 52% purple; and Technology performance & operating metrics--23% blue and 51% purple.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    Benchmarking used in isolation will not tell the whole story

    Benchmarks can be used as a step in the metrics process

    They can be the first step to reach an end goal, but if benchmarks are observed in isolation, it will only highlight your failures.

    Benchmarking relies on standardized models

    This does not account for all the unique variables that make up an IT organization.

    For example, benchmarks that include cost and revenue may include organizations that prioritize first-call resolution (FCR), but the variables that make up this benchmark model will be quite different within your own organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Benchmarks reflect the norm and common practice, not best practice.

    Benchmarks are open to interpretation

    Taking the time to establish proper metrics is often more valuable time spent than going down the benchmark rabbit hole.

    Being above or below the norm is neither a good nor a bad thing.

    Determining what the results mean for you depends on what’s being measured and the unique factors, characteristics, and priorities in your organization.

    If benchmark data is a priority within your IT organization, you may look up organizations like MetricNet, but keep the following in mind:

    Review the collected benchmark data

    See where IT organizations in your industry typically stand in relation to the overall benchmark.

    Assess the gaps

    Large gaps between yourself and the overall benchmark could indicate areas for improvement or celebration. Use the data to focus your analysis, develop deeper self-awareness, and prioritize areas for potential concern.

    Benchmarks are only guidelines

    The benchmark source data may not come from true peers in every sense. Each organization is different, so always explore your unique context when interpreting any findings.

    Rely on internal metrics to measure and improve performance

    Measure internal metrics over time to define goals and drive real improvement

    • Internally measured metrics are more reliable because they provide information about your actual performance over time. This allows for targeted improvements and objective measurements of your milestones.
    • Whether a given metric is the right one for your service desk will depend on several different factors, including:
      • The maturity and capability of your service desk processes
      • The volume of service requests and incidents
      • The complexity of your environment when resolving tickets
      • The degree to which your end users are comfortable with self-service

    Take Info-Tech’s approach to metrics management

    Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.

    Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.

    Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.

    Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Define action-based metrics to cut down on analysis paralysis

    Every metric needs to be backed with the following criteria:

    • Defining audience, cadence, goal, and action for each metric allows you to keep your tracked metrics to a minimum while maximizing the value.
    • The audience and cadence of each metric may allow you to define targeted dashboards.

    Audience - Who is this metric tracked for?

    Goal - Why are you tracking this metric? This can be defined along with the CSFs and KPIs.

    Cadence - How often are you going to view, analyze, and action this metric?

    Action - What will you do if this metric spikes, dips, trends up, or trends down?

    Activity 1. Define your critical success factors and key performance indicators

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are high-level goals that help you define the direction of your service desk. Key performance indicators (KPIs) can be treated as the trend of metrics that will indicate that you are moving in the direction of your CSFs. These will help narrow the data you have to track and action (metrics).

    CSFs, or your overall goals, typically revolve around three aspects of the service desk: time spent on tickets, resources spent on tickets, and the quality of service provided.

    1. As a group, brainstorm the CSFs and the KPIs that will help narrow your metrics. Use the Service Desk Metrics Workbook to record the results.
    2. Look at the example to the right as a starting point.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys
    High end-user satisfaction score
    Proper resolution of tickets
    Low time to resolve
    Low Cost per Ticket Decreasing cost per ticket (due to efficient resolution, FCR, automation, self-service, etc.)
    Improve Access to Self-Service (tangential to improve customer service) High utilization of knowledgebase
    High utilization of portal

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 2. Define action-based metrics that align with your KPIs and CSFs

    1. Now that you have defined your goals, continue to fill the workbook by choosing metrics that align with those goals.
    2. Use the chart below as a guide. For every metric, define the cadence of measurement, audience of the metric, and action associated with the metric. There may be multiple metrics for each KPI.
    3. If you find you are unable to define the cadence, audience, or action associated with a metric, you may not need to track the metric in the first place. Alternatively, if you find that you may action a metric in the future, you can decide to start gathering data now.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator Metric Cadence Audience Action
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Monthly Management Action low scores immediately, view long-term trends
    High end-user satisfaction score Average end-user satisfaction score from annual survey Annually IT Leadership View IT satisfaction trends to align IT with business direction
    Proper resolution of tickets Number of tickets reopened Weekly Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    SLA breach rate Daily Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    Low time to resolve Average TTR (incidents) Weekly Management Look for trends to monitor resources
    Average TTR by priority Weekly Management Look for TTR solve rates to align with SLA
    Average TTR by tier Weekly Management Look for improperly escalated tickets or shift-left opportunities

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 3. Define the data ownership, metric viability, and dashboards

    1. For each metric, define where the data is housed. Ideally, the data is directly in the ticketing tool or ITSM tool. This will make it easy to pull and analyze.
    2. Determine how difficult the metric will be to pull or track. If the effort is high, decide if the value of tracking the metric is worth the hassle of gathering it.
    3. Lastly, for each metric, use the cadence and audience to place the metric in a reporting dashboard. This will help divide your metrics and make them easier to report and action.
    4. You may use the output of this exercise to add your tracked metrics to your service desk SOP.
    5. A full suite of metrics can be found in our Infrastructure & Operations Metrics Library in the Take Control of Infrastructure Metrics Storyboard. The metrics have been categorized by low, medium, and advanced capabilities for you.

    Example metrics:

    Metric Who Owns the Data? Efforts to Track? Dashboards
    Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Service Desk Low Monthly Management Meeting
    Average end-user satisfaction score Service Desk Low Leadership Meeting
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    SLA breach rate Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup
    Average TTR (incidents) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by priority Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by tier Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR (SRs) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Keep the following considerations in mind when defining which metrics matter

    Keep the customer in mind

    Metrics are typically focused on transactional efficiency and process effectiveness and not what was achieved against the customers’ need and satisfaction.

    Understand the relationships between performance and metrics management to provide the end-to-end service delivery picture you are aiming to achieve.

    Don’t settle for tool defaults

    ITSM solutions offer an abundance of metrics to choose from. The most common ones are typically built into the reporting modules of the tool suite.

    Do not start tracking everything. Choose metrics that are specifically aligned to your organization’s desired business outcomes.

    Establish tension metrics to achieve balance

    Don’t ignore the correlation and context between the suites of metrics chosen and how one interacts and affects the other.

    Measuring metrics in isolation may lead to an incomplete picture or undesired technician behavior. Tension metrics help complete the picture and lead to proper actions.

    Adjust those targets

    An arbitrary target on a metric that is consistently met month over month is useless. Each metric should inform the overall performance by combining capable service level management and customer experience programs to prove the value IT is providing to the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes, including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management, to create a sustainable service desk.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics

    Make faster decisions and improve service delivery by using the right metrics for the job.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Take a data-driven approach to service desk optimization.

    IT Diagnostics: Build a Data-Driven IT Strategy

    Our data-driven programs ask business and IT stakeholders the right questions to ensure you have the inputs necessary to build an effective IT strategy.

    Innovation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}21|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}21|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Digital Ethics = Data Equity
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • sidebar graphic: Visit Link
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Innovation is the at heart of every organization, especially in these fast moving times. It does not matter if you are in a supporting or "traditional" sector.  The company performing the service in a faster, better and more efficient way, wins.

    innovation

    Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}445|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $61,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Low sponsor commitment on projects.
    • Poor quality on completed projects.
    • Little to no visibility into the project portfolio.
    • Organization does not operationalize change .
    • Analyzing, fixing, and redeploying is a constant struggle. Even when projects are done well, they fail to deliver the intended outcomes and benefits.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop applying a one-size-fits-all-projects approach to governance.
    • Engage the sponsor by shifting the accountability to the business so they can get the most out of the project.
    • Do not limit the gating process to project management – expand to portfolio management.

    Impact and Result

    • Increase Project Throughput: Do more projects by ensuring the right projects and right amount of projects are approved and executed.
    • Validate Project Quality: Ensure issues are uncovered and resolved with standard check points in the project.
    • Increase Reporting and Visibility: Easily compare progress of projects across the portfolio and report outcomes to leadership.
    • Reduce Resource Waste: Terminate low-value projects early and assign the right resources to approved projects.
    • Achieve Intended Project Outcomes: Keep the sponsor engaged throughout the gating process to achieve desired outcomes.

    Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a right-sized project gating process, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lay the groundwork for tailored project gating

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

  • Understand the role of gating and why we need it.
  • Determine what projects will follow the gating process and how to classify them.
  • Establish the role of the project sponsor throughout the entire project lifecycle.
    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for Tailored Project Gating
    • Project Intake Classification Matrix
    • Project Sponsor Role Description Template

    2. Establish level 1 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 1 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 2: Establish Level 1 Project Gating
    • Project Gating Strategic Template

    3. Establish level 2 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 2 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 3: Establish Level 2 Project Gating

    4. Establish level 3 project gating

    This phase will help you customize Level 3 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities. It will also help you determine next steps and milestones for the adoption of the new process.

    • Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process – Phase 4: Establish Level 3 Project Gating
    • Project Gating Reference Document
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay the Groundwork for Tailored Project Gating

    The Purpose

    Understand the role of gating and why we need it.

    Determine what projects will follow the gating process and how to classify them.

    Establish the role of the project sponsor throughout the entire project lifecycle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Get stakeholder buy-in for the process.

    Ensure there is a standard leveling process to determine size, risk, and complexity of requests.

    Engage the project sponsor throughout the portfolio and project processes.

    Activities

    1.1 Project Gating Review

    1.2 Establish appropriate project levels

    1.3 Define the role of the project sponsor

    Outputs

    Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Project Sponsor Role Description Template

    2 Establish Level 1 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 1 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a lightweight project gating process for small projects.

    Activities

    2.1 Review level 1 project gating process

    2.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 1 gating process

    2.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    2.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    Outputs

    Documented outputs in the Project Gating Strategic Template

    3 Establish Level 2 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 2 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a heavier project gating process for medium projects.

    Activities

    3.1 Review level 2 project gating process

    3.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 2 gating process

    3.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    3.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    Outputs

    4 Establish Level 3 Project Gating

    The Purpose

    This phase will help you customize Level 3 Project Gates with appropriate roles and responsibilities.

    Come up with a roadmap for the adoption of the new project gating process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a comprehensive project gating process for large projects.

    Activities

    4.1 Review level 3 project gating process

    4.2 Determine what gates should be part of your custom level 3 gating process

    4.3 Establish required artifacts for each gate

    4.4 Define the stakeholder’s roles and responsibilities at each gate

    4.5 Determine next steps and milestones for process adoption

    Outputs

    Documented outputs in the Project Gating Strategic Template

    Documented Project Gating Reference Document for all stakeholders

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}58|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time.

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards – a document that walks you through Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards.

    This blueprint guides you through reviewing Info-Tech’s IT dashboards for your audience and organization, then walks you through practical exercises to customize the dashboards to your audience and organization. The blueprint also gives practical guidance for delivering your dashboards and actioning your metrics.

    • Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards Storyboard

    2. Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide – Ready-made IT dashboards for the CIO to communicate to the CXO.

    IT dashboards with visuals and metrics that are aligned and organized by CIO priority and that allow you to customize with your own data, eliminating 80% of the dashboard design work.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide

    3. IT Dashboard Workbook – A step-by-step tool to identify audience needs, translate needs into metrics, design your dashboard, and track/action your metrics.

    The IT Dashboard Workbook accompanies the Establish High Value IT Metrics and Dashboards blueprint and guides you through customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to your audience, crafting your messages, delivering your dashboards to your audience, actioning metrics results, and addressing audience feedback.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards Workbook

    4. IT Metrics Library

    Reference the IT Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • IT Metrics Library

    5. HR Metrics Library

    Reference the HR Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • HR Metrics Library

    Infographic

    Workshop: Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    The Purpose

    Introduce the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to give the participants an idea of how they can be used in their organization.

    Understand the importance of starting with the audience and understanding audience needs before thinking about data and metrics.

    Explain how audience needs translate into metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of where to begin when it comes to considering dashboards and metrics (the audience).

    Identified audience and needs and derived metrics from those identified needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.

    1.2 Identify your audience and their attributes.

    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.

    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.

    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.

    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Outputs

    Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.

    Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    2 Inventory Your Data and Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    The Purpose

    Provide guidance on how to derive metrics and assess data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the importance of considering how you will measure each metric and get the data.

    Understand that measuring data can be costly and that sometimes you just can’t afford to get the measure or you can’t get the data period because the data isn’t there.

    Understand how to assess data quality and readiness.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, the owner, and the security/compliance requirements.

    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.

    2.3 Assess data readiness and the frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Outputs

    Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    3 Design and Build Your Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with the data identified in previous steps.

    This step may vary as some participants may not need to alter the Info-Tech IT Dashboards other than to add their own data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of how to customize the dashboards to the participants’ organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change in them.

    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Outputs

    Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.

    Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Finalized dashboards.

    4 Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in learning how to create a story around the dashboards.

    Guide participants in planning to action metrics and where to record results.

    Guide participants in how to address results of metrics and feedback from audience about dashboards.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants understand how to speak to their dashboards.

    Participants understand how to action metrics results and feedback about dashboards.

    Activities

    4.1 Craft your story.

    4.2 Practice delivering your story.

    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.

    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Outputs

    Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up

    The Purpose

    Finalize work outstanding from previous steps and answer any questions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants have thought about and documented how to customize the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to use in their organization, and they have everything they need to customize the dashboards with their own metrics and visuals (if necessary).

    Activities

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Outputs

    Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.

    Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    Further reading

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

    Analyst Perspective

    A dashboard is a communication tool that helps executives make data-driven decisions

    CIOs naturally gravitate toward data and data analysis. This is their strength. They lean into this strength, using data to drive decisions, track performance, and set targets because they know good data drives good decisions.

    However, when it comes to interpreting and communicating this complex information to executives who may be less familiar with data, CIOs struggle, often falling back on showing IT activity level data instead of what the executives care about. This results in missed opportunities to tell IT’s unique story, secure funding, reveal important trends, or highlight key opportunities for the organization.

    Break through these traditional barriers by using Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards. Spend less time agonizing over visuals and layout and more time concentrating on delivering IT information that moves the organization forward.

    Photo of Diana MacPherson
    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Common Obstacles

    CIOs often experience these challenges because they:

    • Have a natural bias toward data and see it as the whole story instead of a supporting character in a larger narrative.
    • Assume that the IT activity metrics that are easy to get and useful to them are equally interesting to all their stakeholders.
    • Do not have experience communicating visually to an audience unfamiliar with IT operations or lingo.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time

    Info-Tech Insight

    The purpose of a dashboard is to drive decision making. A well designed dashboard presents relevant, clear, concise insights that help executives make data-driven decisions.

    Your challenge

    CIOs struggle to select the right metrics and dashboards to communicate IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress to their executives. CIOs:

    • Fail to tailor metrics to their audience, often presenting graphs that are familiar and useful to them, but not their executives. This results in dashboards full of IT activities that executives neither understand nor find valuable.
    • Do not consider the timeliness of their metrics, which has the same effect as not tailoring their metrics: the executives do not care about the metrics they are shown.
    • Present too many metrics, which not only clutters the board but also dilutes the message the CIO needs to communicate.
    • Do not act on the results of their metrics and show progress, which makes metrics meaningless. Why measure something if you won’t act on the results?

    The bottom line: CIOs often communicate to the wrong audience, about the wrong things, in the wrong amount, using the wrong metrics, at the wrong time.

    In a survey of 500 executives, organizations that struggled with dashboards identified the reasons as:
    61% Inadequate context
    54% Information overload

    — Source: Exasol

    CXOs and CIOs agree that IT performance metrics need improvement

    When asked which performance indicators should be implemented in your business, CXOs and CIOs both agree that IT needs to improve its metrics across several activity areas: technology performance, cost and salary, and risk.

    A diagram that shows performance indicators and metrics from cxo and cio.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards center key metrics around these activities ensuring you align your metrics to the needs of your CXO audience.

    Info-Tech CEO/CIO Alignment Survey Benchmark Report n=666

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the top CIO priorities

    The top six areas that a CIO needs to prioritize and measure outcomes, no matter your organization or industry, are:

    • Managing to a budget: Reducing operational costs and increasing strategic IT spend
    • Customer/constituent satisfaction: Directly and indirectly impacting customer experience.
    • Risk management: Actively knowing and mitigating threats to the organization.
    • Delivering on business objectives: Aligning IT initiatives to the vision of the organization.
    • Employee engagement: Creating an IT workforce of engaged and purpose-driven people.
    • Business leadership relations: Establishing a network of influential business leaders.

    Deliver High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows Delivering High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Deliver High-Value Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows High-Value Dashboard Process.

    Executives recognize the benefits of dashboards:
    87% of respondents to an Exasol study agreed that their organization’s leadership team would make more data-driven decisions if insights were presented in a simpler and more understandable way
    (Source: Exasol)

    The Info-Tech difference:

    We created dashboards for you so you don’t have to!

    1. Eliminate 80% of the dashboard design work by selecting from our ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Use our IT Dashboard Workbook to adjust the dashboards to your audience and organization.
    3. Follow our blueprint and IT Dashboard Workbook tool to craft, and deliver your dashboard to your CXO team, then action feedback from your audience to continuously improve.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing high-value dashboards

    1. Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Steps

    1. Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    2. Completed Tabs 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    2. Translate Audience Needs into Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Review Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Derive Metrics from Audience Needs
    3. Associate metrics to Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 3 of IT Dashboard Workbook

    3. Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess Data Inventory
    2. Assess Data Quality
    3. Assess Data Readiness
    4. Assess Data Frequency

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    3. Finalized dashboards

    4. Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Design Your Dashboard
    2. Update Your Dashboards
    3. Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 5 and 6 of IT Dashboard Workbook and finalized dashboards

    5. Plan, Record, and Action Your Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Plan How to Record Metrics
    2. Record and Action Metrics

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    How to Use This Blueprint

    Choose the path that works for you

    A diagram that shows path of using this blueprint.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards address several needs:

    1. New to dashboards and metrics and not sure where to begin? Let the phases in the blueprint guide you in using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards to create your own dashboards.
    2. Already know who your audience is and what you want to show? Augment the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards framework with your own data and visuals.
    3. Already have a tool you would like to use? Use the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards as a design document to customize your tool.

    Insight Summary

    The need for easy-to-consume data is on the rise making dashboards a vital data communication tool.

    70%: Of employees will be expected to use data heavily by 2025, an increase from 40% in 2018.
    — Source: Tableau

    Overarching insight

    A dashboard’s primary purpose is to drive action. It may also serve secondary purposes to update, educate, and communicate, but if a dashboard does not drive action, it is not serving its purpose.

    Insight 1

    Start with the audience. Resist the urge to start with the data. Think about who your audience is, what internal and external environmental factors influence them, what problems they need to solve, what goals they need to achieve, then tailor the metrics and dashboards to suit.

    Insight 2

    Avoid showing IT activity-level metrics. Instead use CIO priority-based metrics to report on what matters to the organization. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the CIO priorities: risks, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives.

    Insight 3

    Dashboards show the what not the why. Do not assume your audience will draw the same conclusions from your graphs and charts as you do. Provide the why by interpreting the results, adding insights and calls to action, and marking key areas for discussion.

    Insight 4

    A dashboard is a communication tool and should reflect the characteristics of good communication. Be clear, concise, consistent, and relevant.

    Insight 5

    Action your data. Act and report progress on your metrics. Gathering metrics has a cost, so if you do not plan to action a metric, do not measure it.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Photo of Dashboards

    Key deliverable: Dashboards

    Ready-made risk, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives dashboards that organize your data in a visually appealing way so you can concentrate on the metrics and communication.

    Photo of IT Dashboard Workbook

    IT Dashboard Workbook

    The IT Dashboard Workbook keeps all your metrics, data, and dashboard work in one handy file!

    Photo of IT Dashboard Guide

    IT Dashboard Guide

    The IT Dashboard Guide provides the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and information about how to use them.

    Blueprint benefits

    CIO Benefits

    • Reduces the burden of figuring out what metrics to show executives and how to categorize and arrange the visuals.
    • Increases audience engagement through tools and methods that guide CIOs through tailoring metrics and dashboards to audience needs.
    • Simplifies CIO messages so executives better understand IT needs and value.
    • Provides CIOs with the tools to demonstrate transparency and competency to executive leaders.
    • Provides tools and techniques for regular review and action planning of metrics results, which leads to improved performance, efficiency, and effectiveness.

    Business Benefits

    • Provides a richer understanding of the IT landscape and a clearer connection of how IT needs and issues impact the organization.
    • Increases understanding of the IT team’s contribution to achieving business outcomes.
    • Provides visibility into IT and business trends.
    • Speeds up decision making by providing insights and interpretations to complex situations.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Realize measurable benefits after using Info-Tech’s approach:

    Determining what you should measure, what visuals you should use, and how you should organize your visuals, is time consuming. Calculate the time it has taken you to research what metrics you should show, create the visuals, figure out how to categorize the visuals, and layout your visuals. Typically, this takes about 480 hours of time. Use the ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook to quickly put together a set of dashboards to present your CXO. Using these tools will save approximately 480 hours.

    A study at the University of Minnesota shows that visual presentations are 43% more effective at persuading their audiences (Bonsignore). Estimate how persuasive you are now by averaging how often you have convinced your audience to take a specific course of action. After using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and visual story telling techniques described in this blueprint, average again. You should be 43% more persuasive.

    Further value comes from making decisions faster. Baseline how long it takes, on average, for your executive team to make a decision before using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards then time how long decisions take when you use your Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. Your audience should reach decisions 21% faster according to studies at Stanford University and the Wharton School if business (Bonsignore).

    Case Study

    Visuals don’t have to be fancy to communicate clear messages.

    • Industry: Construction
    • Source: Anonymous interview participant

    Challenge

    Year after year, the CIO of a construction company attended business planning with the Board to secure funding for the year. One year, the CEO interrupted and said, “You're asking me for £17 million. You asked me for £14 million last year and you asked me for £12 million the year before that. I don't quite understand what we get for our money.”

    The CEO could not understand how fixing laptops would cost £17 million and for years no one had been able to justify the IT spend.

    Solutions

    The CIO worked with his team to produce a simple one-page bubble diagram representing each IT department. Each bubble included the total costs to deliver the service, along with the number of employees. The larger the bubble, the higher the cost. The CIO brought each bubble to life as he explained to the Board what each department did.

    The Board saw, for example, that IT had architects who thought about the design of a service, where it was going, the life cycle of that service, and the new products that were coming out. They understood what those services cost and knew how many architects IT had to provide for those services.

    Recommendations

    The CEO remarked that he finally understood why the CIO needed £17 million. He even saw that the costs for some IT departments were low for the amount of people and offered to pay IT staff more (something the CIO had requested for years).

    Each year the CIO used the same slide to justify IT costs and when the CIO needed further investment for things like security or new products, an upgrade, or end of life support, the sign-offs came very quickly because the Board understood what IT was doing and that IT wasn't a bottomless pit.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A diagram that shows Guided Implementation in 5 phases.

    Workshop overview

    Day 1: Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    Activities
    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.
    1.2 Identify your audience’s attributes.
    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.
    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.
    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.
    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Deliverables
    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 2: Inventory Your Data; Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    Activities
    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, and the owner and security/compliance requirements.
    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.
    2.3 Assess data readiness and frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 3: Design and Build Your Dashboards

    Activities
    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change on the dashboards.
    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Deliverables
    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Finalized dashboards.

    Day 4: Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    Activities
    4.1 Craft your story.
    4.2 Practice delivering your story.
    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.
    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 5: Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities
    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    What is an IT dashboard?

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility
    A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    An IT dashboard is…
    a visual representation of data, and its main purpose is to drive actions. Well-designed dashboards use an easy to consume presentation style free of clutter. They present their audience with a curated set of visuals that present meaningful metrics to their audience.

    Dashboards can be both automatically or manually updated and can show information that is dynamic or a snapshot in time.

    Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    We created dashboards so you don’t have to.

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    Use the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and consider the following:

    1. What are your initial reactions to the dashboards?
    2. Are the visuals appealing? If so, what makes them appealing?
    3. Can you use these dashboards in your organization? What makes them usable?
    4. How would you use these dashboards to speak your own IT information to your audience?

    Download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Why Use Dashboards When We Have Data?

    How graphics affect us

    Cognitively

    • Engage our imagination
    • Stimulate the brain
    • Heighten creative thinking
    • Enhance or affect emotions

    Emotionally

    • Enhance comprehension
    • Increase recollection
    • Elevate communication
    • Improve retention

    Visual clues

    • Help decode text
    • Attract attention
    • Increase memory

    Persuasion

    • 43% more effective than text alone

    — Source: (Vogel et al.)

    Phase 1

    Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Documenting impressions for using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your audience and their needs and metrics for your IT dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Info-Tech IT Dashboard organization and audience

    We created a compelling way to organize IT dashboards so you don’t have to. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO Priorities, and these are consistent irrespective of industry or organization. This is a constant that you can organize your metrics around.

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Dashboard Customization

    The categories represent a constant around which you can change the order; for example, if your CXO is more focused on Financials, you can switch the Financials dashboard to appear first.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are aimed at a CXO audience so if your audience is the CXO, then you may decide to change very little, but you can customize any visual to appeal to your audience.

    Phase 1 will get you started with your audience.

    Always start with the audience

    …and not the data!

    Reliable, accurate data plays a critical role in dashboards, but data is only worthwhile if it is relevant to the audience who consumes it, and dashboards are only as meaningful as the data and metrics they represent.

    Instead of starting with the data, start with the audience. The more IT understands about the audience, the more relevant the metrics will be to their audience and the more aligned leadership will be with IT.

    Don’t forget yourself and who you are. Your audience will have certain preconceived notions about who you are and what you do. Consider these when you think about what you want your audience to know.

    46% executives identify lack of customization to individual user needs as a reason they struggle with dashboards.
    — Source: (Exasol)

    Resist the Data-First Temptation

    If you find yourself thinking about data and you haven’t thought about your audience, pull yourself back to the audience.

    Ask first Ask later
    Who is this dashboard for? What data should I show?
    How will the audience use the dashboard to make decisions? Where do I get the data?
    How can I show what matters to the audience? How much effort is required to get the data?

    Meaningful measures rely on understanding your audience and their needs

    It is crucial to think about who your audience is so that you can translate their needs into metrics and create meaningful visuals for your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 1-3 of understanding your audience in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 1.1

    Review and Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience

    Activities:
    1.1.1 Examine Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Info-Tech dashboards reviewed for your organization’s audience.

    1.1.1 Examine the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Complete a quick review of the dashboards and consider how your audience would receive them.
    3. Document your thoughts, with special emphasis on your audience in the Info-Tech Dashboard Impressions slide.

    A diagram that shows Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Reviewing visuals can help you think about how your audience will respond to them

    Jot down your thoughts below. You can refer to this later as you consider your audience.

    Consider:

    • Who is your dashboard audience?
    • Are their needs different from the Info-Tech IT Dashboard audience’s? If so, how?
    • Will the visuals work for your audience on each dashboard?
    • Will the order of the dashboards work for your audience?
    • What is missing?

    Step 1.2

    Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Activities:
    1.2.1 Document your audience’s needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Audience details documented in IT Dashboard Workbook

    Identify Your Audience and dig deeper to understand their needs

    Connect with your audience

    • Who is your audience?
    • What does your audience care about? What matters to them?
    • How is their individual success measured? What are their key performance indicators (KPIs)?
    • Connect the challenges and pain points of your audience to how IT can help alleviate those pain points:
      • For example, poor financial performance could be due to a lack of digitization. Identify areas where IT can help alleviate this issue.
      • Try to uncover the root cause behind the need. Root causes are often tied to broad organizational objectives, so think about how IT can impact those objectives.

    Validate the needs you’ve uncovered with the audience to ensure you have not misinterpreted them and clarify the desired timeline and deadline for the dashboard.

    Document audiences and needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    Typical Audience Needs
    Senior Leadership
    • Inform strategic planning and track progress toward objectives.
    • Understand critical challenges.
    • Ensure risks are managed.
    • Ensure budgets are managed.
    Board of Directors
    • Understand organizational risks.
    • Ensure organization is fiscally healthy.
    Business Partners
    • Support strategic workforce planning.
    • Surface upcoming risks to workforce.
    CFO
    • IT Spend
    • Budget Health and Risks

    Prioritize and select audience needs that your dashboard will address

    Prioritize needs by asking:

    • Which needs represent the largest value to the entire organization (i.e. needs that impact more of the organization than just the audience)?
    • Which needs will have the largest impact on the audience’s success?
    • Which needs are likely to drive action (e.g. if supporting a decision, is the audience likely to be amenable to changing the way they make that decision based on the data)?

    Select three to five of the highest priority needs for each audience to include on a dashboard.

    Prioritize needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    A diagram that shows 3 tiers of high priority, medium priority, and low priority.

    1.2.1 Document Your Audience Needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 2. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove after you have completed your updates.

    A table of documenting audience, including key attributes, desired timeline, deadline, needs, and priority.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 2

    Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Revisiting the Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your prioritized audience’s needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Linking audience needs to metrics has positive outcomes

    When you present metrics that your audience cares about, you:

    • Deliver real value and demonstrate IT’s value as a trusted partner.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Enlighten the business about what IT does and how it is connected to the organization.

    29% of respondents to The Economist Intelligence Unit survey cited inadequate collaboration between IT and the business as one of the top barriers to the organization’s digital objectives.
    — Source: Watson, Morag W., et al.

    Dashboard Customization

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards use measures for each dashboard that correspond with what the audience (CXO) cares about. You can find these measures in the IT Dashboard Workbook. If your audience is the CXO, you may have to change a little but you should still validate the needs and metrics in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 2 covers the process of translating needs into metrics.

    Once you know what your audience needs, you know what to measure

    A diagram that highlights step 4-5 of knowing your audience needs in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 2.1

    Document Desired Outcomes for Each Prioritized Audience Need

    Activities:
    2.1.1 Compare the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your audience’s needs.
    2.1.2 Document prioritized audience needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of how well Info-Tech IT Dashboards address audience needs.
    • Documented desired outcomes for each audience need.

    2.1.1 Revisit Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards and Review for Your Audience

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Click the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Recall your first impressions of the dashboards that you recorded on earlier in Phase 1 and open up the audience and needs information you documented in Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    4. Compare the dashboards with your audience’s needs that you documented on Tab 2.
    5. Record any updates to your thoughts or impressions on the next slide. Think about any changes to the dashboards that you would make so that you can reference it when you build the dashboards.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards contain a set of monthly metrics tailored toward a CXO audience.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Knowing what your audience needs, do the metrics the visuals reflect address them?

    Any changes to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards?

    Consider:

    • Are your audience’s needs already reflected in the visuals in each of the dashboards? If so, validate this in the next activity by reviewing the prioritized needs, desired outcomes, and associated metrics already documented in the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    • Are there any visuals your audience would need that you don’t see reflected in the dashboards? Write them here to use in the next exercise.

    Desired outcomes make identifying metrics easier

    When it’s not immediately apparent what the link between needs and metrics is, brainstorm desired outcomes.

    A diagram that shows an example of desired outcomes

    2.1.2 Document your audience’s desired outcome per prioritized need

    Now that you’ve examined the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and considered the needs of your audience, it is time to understand the outcomes and goals of each need so that you can translate your audience’s needs into metrics.

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows desired outcome per prioritized need

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Deriving Meaningful Metrics

    Once you know the desired outcomes, you can identify meaningful metrics

    A diagram of an example of meaningful metrics.

    Common Metrics Mistakes

    Avoid the following oversights when selecting your metrics.

    A diagram that shows 7 metrics mistakes

    Step 2.2

    Derive Metrics From Audience Needs

    Activities:
    2.2.1 Derive metrics using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented metrics for audience needs.

    2.2.1 Derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Now that you have completed the desired outcomes, you can determine if you are meeting those desired outcomes. If you struggle with the metrics, revisit the desired outcomes. It could be that they are not measurable or are not specific enough.

    2 hours

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Download IT Metrics Library

    Download HR Metrics Library

    Step 2.3

    Associate Metrics to Dashboards

    Activities:
    2.3.1 Review the metrics and identify which dashboard they should appear on.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Metrics associated to each dashboard.

    2.3.1 Associate metrics to dashboards

    30 minutes

    Once you have identified all your metrics from Step 2.2, identify which dashboard they should appear on. As with all activities, if the Info-Tech IT Dashboard meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information.

    A diagram that shows associate metrics to dashboards

    Phase 3

    Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Inventorying your data
    • Assessing your data quality
    • Determining data readiness
    • Determining data measurement frequency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Can you measure your metrics?

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine how easily you can get your metric.

    A diagram that highlights step 5 of measuring your metrics in the high-value dashboard process.

    Make sure you select data that your audience trusts

    40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.
    — Source: Experian, 2020

    Phase 3 covers the process of identifying data for each metric, creating a data inventory, assessing the readiness of your data, and documenting the frequency of measuring your data. Once complete, you will have a guide to help you add data to your dashboards.

    Step 3.1

    Assess Data Inventory

    Activities:
    3.1.1 Download the IT Dashboard Workbook and complete the data inventory section on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data inventory for each metric.

    3.1.1 Data Inventory

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 4. The pre-populated text is arranged into the tables according to the dashboard they appear on; you may need to scroll down to see all the dashboard tables.

    Create a data inventory by placing each metric identified on Tab 3 into the corresponding dashboard table. Complete each column as described below.

    A diagram that shows 9 columns of data inventory.

    Metrics Libraries: Use the IT Metrics Library and HR Metrics Library for ideas for metrics to use and how to measure them.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.2

    Assess Data Quality

    Activities:
    3.2.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to complete an assessment of data quality on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data quality assessment for each metric.

    3.2.1 Assess Data Quality

    1 hour

    Document the data quality on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook by filling in the data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns as described below.

    A diagram that shows data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns.

    Data quality is a struggle for many organizations. Consider how much uncertainty you can tolerate and what would be required to improve your data quality to an acceptable level. Consider cost, technological resources, people resources, and time required.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.3

    Assess Data Readiness

    Activities:
    3.3.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data readiness for each metric

    3.3.1 Determine Data Readiness

    1 hour

    Once the data quality has been documented and examined, complete the Data Readiness section of Tab 4 in the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook. Select a readiness classification using the definitions below. Use the readiness of your data to determine the level of effort required to obtain the data and consider the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    A diagram that shows data readiness section

    Remember: Although in most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach, both because effort is lower and data that is not manipulated is more trustworthy, do not abandon data because it is not perfect but instead plan to make it easier to obtain.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.4

    Assess Data Frequency

    Activities:
    3.4.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data and how frequently you will measure your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to assess data inventory, quality, and readiness.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented frequency of measurement for each metric.

    3.4.1 Document Planned Frequency of measurement

    10 minutes

    Document the planned frequency of measurement for all your metrics on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    For each metric, determine how often you will need to refresh it on the dashboard and select a frequency from the drop down. The Info-tech IT Dashboards assume a monthly refresh.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 4

    Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Designing your dashboards
    • Updating your dashboards
    • Crafting your story
    • Delivering your dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Using your dashboard to tell your story with visuals

    Now that you have linked metrics to the needs of your audience and you understand how to get your data, it is time to start building your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 6 of creating meaningful visuals in the high-value dashboard process.

    Using visual language

    • Shortens meetings by 24%
    • Increases the ability to reach consensus by 21%
    • Strengthens persuasiveness by 43%

    — Source: American Management Association

    Phase 4 guides you through using the Info-Tech IT Dashboard visuals for your audience’s needs and your story.

    Step 4.1

    Design Your Dashboard

    Activities:
    4.1.1 Plan and validate dashboard metrics, data, level of effort and visuals.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Identified and validated metrics, data, and visuals for your IT dashboards.

    Use clear visuals that avoid distracting the audience

    Which visual is better to present?

    Sample A:
    A photo of Sample A visuals

    Sample B:
    A diagram Sample B visuals

    Select the appropriate visuals

    Identify the purpose of the visualization. Determine which of the four categories below aligns with the story and choose the appropriate visual to display the data.

    Relationship

    A photo of Scatterplots
    Scatterplots

    • Used to show relationships between two variables.
    • Can be difficult to interpret for audiences that are not familiar with them.

    Distribution

    A photo of Histogram
    Histogram

    • Use a histogram to show spread of a given numeric variable.
    • Can be used to organize groups of data points.
    • Requires continuous data.
    • Can make comparisons difficult.

    A photo of Scatterplot
    Scatterplot

    • Can show correlation between variables.
    • Show each data plot, making it easier to compare.

    Composition

    A photo of Pie chart
    Pie chart

    • Use pie charts to show different categories.
    • Avoid pie charts with numerous slices.
    • Provide numbers alongside slices, as it can be difficult to compare slices based on size alone.

    A photo of Table
    Table

    • Use tables when there are a large number of categories.
    • Presents information in a simple way.

    Comparison

    A photo of Bar graph
    Bar graph

    • Use to compare categories.
    • Easy to understand, familiar format.

    A photo of Line chart
    Line chart

    • Use to show trends or changes over time.
    • Clear and easy to analyze.

    (Calzon)

    Examples of data visualization

    To compare categories, use a bar chart:
    2 examples of bar chart
    Conclusion: Visualizing the spend in various areas helps prioritize.


    To show trends, use a line graph:
    An example of line graph.
    Conclusion: Overlaying a trend line on revenue per employee helps justify headcount costs.


    To show simple results, text is sometimes more clear:
    A diagram that shows examples of text and graphics.
    Conclusion: Text with meaningful graphics conveys messages quickly.


    To display relative percentages of values, use a pie chart:
    An example of pie chart.
    Conclusion: Displaying proportions in a pie chart gives an at-a-glance understanding of the amount any area uses.

    Choose effective colors and design

    Select colors that will enhance the story

    • Use color strategically to help draw the audience’s attention and highlight key information.
    • Choose two to three colors to use consistently throughout the dashboard, as too many colors will be distracting to the audience.
    • Use colors that connect with the audience (e.g., organization or department colors).
    • Don’t use colors that are too similar in shade or brightness level, as those with colorblindness might have difficulty discerning them.

    Keep the design simple and clear

    • Leave white space to separate sections and keep the dashboard simple.
    • Don’t measure everything; show just enough to address the audience’s needs.
    • Use blank space between data points to provide natural contrast (e.g., leaving space between each bar on a bar graph). Don’t rely on contrast between colors to separate data (Miller).
    • Label each data point directly instead of using a separate key, so anyone who has difficulty discerning color can still interpret the data (Miller).

    Example

    A example that shows colours and design of a chart.

    Checklist to build compelling visuals in your presentation

    Leverage this checklist to ensure you are creating the perfect visuals and graphs for your presentation.

    Checklist:

    • Do the visuals grab the audience’s attention?
    • Will the visuals mislead the audience/confuse them?
    • Do the visuals facilitate data comparison or highlight trends and differences in a more effective manner than words?
    • Do the visuals present information simply, cleanly, and accurately?
    • Do the visuals illustrate messages and themes from the accompanying text?

    4.1.1 Plan and validate your dashboard visuals

    1 hour

    Click the links below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook. Open the IT Dashboard Workbook and select Tab 5. For each dashboard, represented by its own table, open the corresponding Info-Tech IT Dashboard as reference.

    A diagram of dashboard and its considerations when selecting visuals.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 4.2

    Update Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.2.1 Update the visuals on the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with data and visuals identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Dashboards updated with your visuals, metrics, and data identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    4.2.1 Update visuals with your own data

    2 hours

    1. Get the data that you identified in Tab 4 and Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Click the link below to go to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and follow the instructions to update the visuals.

    Do not worry about the Key Insights or Calls to Action; you will create this in the next step when you plan your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Step 4.3

    Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.3.1 Craft Your Story
    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards
    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented situations, key insights, and calls to action for each dashboard/visual.
    • A story to tell for each dashboard.
    • Understanding of how to practice delivering the dashboards using stories.

    Stories are more easily understood and more likely to drive decisions

    IT dashboards are valuable tools to provide insights that drive decision making.

    • Monitor: Track and report on strategic areas IT supports.
    • Provide insights: sPresent important data and information to audiences in a clear and efficient way.

    “Data storytelling is a universal language that everyone can understand – from people in STEM to arts and psychology.” — Peter Jackson, Chief Data and Analytics Officer at Exasol

    Storytelling provides context, helping the audience understand and connect with data and metrics.

    • 93% of respondents (business leaders and data professionals) agreed that decisions made as a result of successful data storytelling have the potential to help increase revenue.
    • 92% of respondents agreed that data storytelling was critical to communicate insights effectively.
    • 87% percent of respondents agreed that leadership teams would make more data-driven decisions if insights gathered from data were presented more simply.

    — Exasol

    For more visual guidance, download the IT Dashboard Guide

    Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

    A diagram of an effective message, including consistent, clearn, relevant, and concise.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-adding communication to your audience.

    Enable good communication with these components

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.

    Be Clear

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Avoid jargon.

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the audience.
    • Tailor the details of the message to the audience’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but wider audiences focus mostly on results; talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “What’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
    • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

    Draft the core messages to communicate

    1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Start with a story or metaphor and then support with the data on your dashboard. Avoid rushing in with data first.
    2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem, you can help. There is value in engaging and working with you further.
    3. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you read it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
    4. Interpret visuals for your audience: Do not assume they will reach the same conclusions as you. For example, walk them through what a chart shows even if the axes are labeled, tell them what a trend line indicates or what the comparison between two data points means.
    5. Identify a couple of key insights: Think about one or two key takeaways you want your audience to leave with.
    6. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication. Dashboards exist to drive decisions, so if you have no call to action, you should ask if you need to include the visual.

    4.3.1 Craft Your Story

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 6. The workbook contains grey text that reflects a sample story about the Info-Tech IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the sample text as reference, then remove after you have entered your information.

    A diagram of dashboard to craft your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. Take the Key Insights and Calls to Action that you documented in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook and place them in their corresponding dashboard.
    2. Add any text to your dashboard as necessary but only if the visual requires more information. You can add explanations more effectively during the presentation.

    A diagram that shows strategic initiatives: deliver value to customers.

    Tip: Aim to be brief and concise with any text. Dashboards simplify information and too much text can clutter the visuals and obscure the message.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    1 hour

    Ideally you can present your dashboard to your audience so that you are available to clarify questions and add a layer of interpretation that would crowd out boards if added as text.

    1. To prepare to tell your story, consult the Situation, Key Insights, and Call to Action sections that you documented for each dashboard in Tab 6 of the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Practice your messages as you walk through your dashboards. The next two slides provide delivery guidance.
    3. Once you deliver your dashboards, update Tab 6 with audience feedback. Often dashboards are iterative and when your audience sees them, they are usually inspired to think about what else they would like to see. This is good and shows your audience is engaged!

    Don’t overwhelm your audience with information and data. You spent time to craft your dashboards so that they are clear and concise, so spend time practicing delivering a message that matches your clear, concise dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your dashboard confidently. While this should be obvious, it needs to be stated explicitly. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation or if you are presenting remotely, look into the camera. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading the text from your dashboard, and instead paraphrase it while maintaining eye/camera contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    Communication Delivery Checklist

    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
    • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
    • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
    • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
    • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
    • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
    • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
    • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g., toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures)
    • Do you have room for feedback on the dashboards? Solicit feedback with your audience after the meeting and record it in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 5

    Plan, record, and action your metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Planning to track your metrics
    • Recording your metrics
    • Actioning your metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Actioning your metrics to drive results

    To deliver real value from your dashboards, you need to do something with the results.

    Don’t fail on execution! The whole reason you labor to create inviting visuals and meaningful metrics is to action those metrics. The metrics results inform your entire story! It’s important to plan and do, but everything is lost if you fail to check and act.

    70%: of survey respondents say that managers do not get insights from performance metrics to improve strategic decision making.
    60%: of survey respondents say that operational teams do not get insights to improve operation decision making.

    (Bernard Marr)

    “Metrics aren’t a passive measure of progress but an active part of an organization’s everyday management….Applying the “plan–do–check–act” feedback loop…helps teams learn from their mistakes and identify good ideas that can be applied elsewhere”

    (McKinsey)

    Step 5.1

    Plan How to Record Metrics

    Activities:
    5.1.1 For each dashboard, add a baseline and target to existing metrics and KPIs.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Baselines and targets identified and recorded for each metric.

    5.1.1 Identify Baselines and Targets

    1 hour

    To action your metrics, you must first establish what your baselines and targets are so that you can determine if you are on track.

    To establish baselines:
    If you do not have a baseline. Run your metric to establish one.

    To establish targets:

    • Use historical data and trends of performance.
    • If you do not have historical data, establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    • You can also run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.
    • The target may not always be a number – it could be a trend. The initial target may be changed after review with stakeholders.

    Actions for Success:
    How will you ensure you can get this metric? For example, if you would like to measure delivered value, to make sure the metric is measurable, you will need to ensure that measures of success are documented for an imitative and then measured once complete.

    • If you need help with Action plans, the IT Metrics Library includes action plans for all of its metrics that may help

    A diagram of identify metrics and to identify baselines and targets.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 5.2

    Record and Action Metrics

    Activities:
    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of what and where to record metrics once run.

    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    1 hour

    After analyzing your results, use this information to update your dashboards. Revisit Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook to update your story. Remember to record any audience feedback about the dashboards in the Audience Feedback section.

    Action your measures as well as your metrics

    What should be measured can change over time as your organization matures and the business environment changes. Understanding what creates business value for your organization is critical. If metrics need to be changed, record metrics actions under Identified Actions on Tab 7. A metric will need to be addressed in one of the following ways:

    • Added: A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    • Changed: A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.
    • Removed: The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.
    • Maintained: The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    A diagram of record results and identify how to address results.

    Don’t be discouraged if you need to update your metrics a few times before you get it right. It can take some trial and error to find the measures that best indicate the health of what you are measuring.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Tips for actioning results

    Sometimes actioning your metrics results requires more analysis

    If a metric deviates from your target, you may need to analyze how to correct the issue then run the metric again to see if the results have improved.

    Identify Root Cause
    Root Cause Analysis can include problem exploration techniques like The 5 Whys, fishbone diagrams, or affinity mapping.

    Select a Solution
    Once you have identified a possible root cause, use the same technique to brainstorm and select a solution then re-run your metrics.

    Consider Tension Metrics
    Consider tension metrics when selecting a solution. Will improving one area affect another? A car can go faster but it will consume more fuel – a project can be delivered faster but it may affect the quality.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    1. Using this blueprint and the IT Dashboard Workbook, you validated and customized the dashboards for your audience and organization, which reduced or eliminated time spent searching for and organizing your own visuals.
    2. You documented your dashboards’ story so you are ready to present them to your audience.
    3. You assessed the data for your dashboards and you built a metrics action-tracking plan to maintain your dashboards’ metrics.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Determine how you can use the Info-Tech IT Dashboards in your organization and the anticipated level of customization.

    A photo of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    Plan your dashboards
    Complete the IT Dashboard Workbook to help plan your dashboards using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of John Corrado
    John Corrado
    Head of IT
    X4 Pharmaceuticals

    As head of IT, John is charged with the creation of strategic IT initiatives that align with X4s vision, mission, culture, and long-term goals and is responsible for the organization’s systems, security, and infrastructure. He works closely developing partnerships with X4tizens across the organization to deliver value through innovative programs and services.

    Photo of Grant Frost
    Grant Frost
    Chief Information & Security Officer
    Niagara Catholic School Board

    Grant Frost is an experienced executive, information technologist and security strategist with extensive experience in both the public and private sector. Grant is known for, and has extensive experience in, IT transformation and the ability to increase capability while decreasing cost in IT services.

    Photo of Nick Scozzaro
    Nick Scozzaro
    CEO and Co-Founder of MobiStream and ShadowHQ
    ShadowHQ

    Nick got his start in software development and mobility working at BlackBerry where he developed a deep understanding of the technology landscape and of what is involved in both modernizing legacy systems and integrating new ones. Working with experts across multiple industries, he innovated, learned, strategized, and ultimately helped push the boundaries of what was possible.

    Photo of Joseph Sanders
    Joseph Sanders
    Managing Director of Technology/Cyber Security Services
    Kentucky Housing Corporation

    In his current role Joe oversees all IT Operations/Applications Services that are used to provide services and support to the citizens of Kentucky. Joe has 30+ years of leadership experience and has held several executive roles in the public and private sector. He has been a keynote speaker for various companies including HP, IBM, and Oracle.

    Photo of Jochen Sievert
    Jochen Sievert
    Director Performance Excellence & IT
    Zeon Chemicals

    Jochen moved to the USA from Duesseldorf, Germany in 2010 to join Zeon Chemicals as their IT Manager. Prior to Zeon, Jochen has held various technical positions at Novell, Microsoft, IBM, and Metro Management Systems.

    Info-Tech Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst
    Donna Bales, Principal Research Director
    Shashi Bellamkonda, Principal Research Director
    John Burwash, Executive Counselor
    Tony Denford, Research Lead
    Jody Gunderman, Senior Executive Advisor
    Tom Hawley, Managing Partner
    Mike Higginbotham, Executive Counselor
    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director
    Gary Rietz, Executive Counselor
    Steve Schmidt, Senior Managing Partner
    Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy
    Ian Tyler-Clarke, Executive Counselor

    Plus, an additional four contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Use this blueprint as a baseline to build a customized IT risk taxonomy suitable for your organization.

    Photo of Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    This blueprint will help you identify the KPIs that matter to your organization.

    Photo of Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    This blueprint will help you Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    Photo of IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    Use this benchmarking service to capture, analyze, and communicate your IT spending and staffing.

    Photo of Key Metrics for Every CIO

    Key Metrics for Every CIO

    This short research piece highlights the top metrics for every CIO, how those align to your CIO priorities, and action steps against those metrics.

    Photo of Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    This blueprint helps you identify communication drivers and goals and collect data to support your presentation. It provides checklists for building and delivering a captivating security presentation.

    Bibliography

    “10 Signs You Are Sitting on a Pile of Data Debt.” Experian, n.d. Web.

    “From the What to the Why: How Data Storytelling Is Key to Success.” Exasol, 2021. Web.

    Bonsignore, Marian. “Using Visual Language to Create the Case for Change.” Amarican Management Association. Accessed 19 Apr. 2023.

    Calzon, Bernardita. “Top 25 Dashboard Design Principles, Best Practices & How To’s.” Datapine, 5 Apr. 2023.

    “Data Literacy.” Tableau, n.d. Accessed 3 May 2023.

    “KPIs Don’t Improve Decision-Making In Most Organizations.” LinkedIn, n.d. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Miller, Amanda. “A Comprehensive Guide to Accessible Data Visualization.” Betterment, 2020. Accessed May 2022.

    “Performance Management: Why Keeping Score Is so Important, and so Hard.” McKinsey. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Vogel, Douglas, et al. Persuasion and the Role of Visual Presentation Support: The UM/3M Study. Management Information Systems Research Center School of Management University of Minnesota, 1986.

    Watson, Morag W., et al. ”IT’s Changing Mandate in an Age of Disruption.” The Economist Intelligence Unit Limited, 2021.

    Learn the right way to manage metrics

    • Parent Category Name: Improve Your Processes
    • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-processes

    Learn to use metrics in the right way. Avoid staff (subconciously) gaming the numbers, as it is only natural to try to achieve the objective. This is really a case of be careful what you wish for, you may just get it.

    Register to read more …

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}279|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Many business groups in the organization are siloed and have disjointed services that lead to a less than ideal customer experience.
    • Service management is too often process-driven and is implemented without a holistic view of customer value.
    • Businesses get caught up in the legacy of their old systems and find it difficult to move with the evolving market.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Customer experience is the new battleground. Parity between products is creating the need to differentiate via customer experience.
    • Don’t forget your employees! Enterprise service management (ESM) is also about delivering exceptional experiences to your employees so they can deliver exceptional services to your customers.
    • ESM is not driven by tools and processes. Rather, ESM is about pushing exceptional services to customers by pulling from organizational capabilities.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand ESM concepts and how they can improve customer service.
    • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s state for ESM, identify the gaps, and create an action plan to move towards an ESM pilot.
    • Increase business and customer satisfaction by delivering services more efficiently.

    Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should move towards ESM, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand ESM and get buy-in

    Understand the concepts of ESM, determine the scope of the ESM program, and get buy-in.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 1: Understand ESM and Get Buy-in
    • Enterprise Service Management Executive Buy-in Presentation Template
    • Enterprise Service Management General Communications Presentation Template

    2. Assess the current state for ESM

    Determine the current state for ESM and identify the gaps.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 2: Assess the Current State for ESM
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool
    • Enterprise Service Management Assessment Tool Action Plan Guide
    • Enterprise Service Management Action Plan Tool

    3. Identify ESM pilot and finalize action plan

    Create customer journey maps, identify an ESM pilot, and finalize the action plan for the pilot.

    • Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management – Phase 3: Identify ESM Pilot and Finalize Action Plan
    • Enterprise Service Management Customer Journey Map Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Plan to Pilot Enterprise Service Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand ESM and Get Buy-In

    The Purpose

    Understand what ESM is and how it can improve customer service.

    Determine the scope of your ESM initiative and identify who the stakeholders are for this program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of ESM concepts.

    Understanding of the scope and stakeholders for your ESM initiative.

    Plan for getting buy-in for the ESM program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the concepts and benefits of ESM.

    1.2 Determine the scope of your ESM program.

    1.3 Identify your stakeholders.

    1.4 Develop an executive buy-in presentation.

    1.5 Develop a general communications presentation.

    Outputs

    Executive buy-in presentation

    General communications presentation

    2 Assess the Current State for ESM

    The Purpose

    Assess your current state with respect to culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Identify your strengths and weaknesses from the ESM assessment scores.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of your organization’s current enablers and constraints for ESM.

    Determination and analysis of data needed to identify strengths or weaknesses in culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand your organization’s mission and vision.

    2.2 Assess your organization’s culture, governance, skills, and tools.

    2.3 Identify the gaps and determine the necessary foundational action items.

    Outputs

    ESM assessment score

    Foundational action items

    3 Define Services and Create Custom Journey Maps

    The Purpose

    Define and choose the top services at the organization.

    Create customer journey maps for the chosen services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of prioritized services.

    Customer journey maps for the prioritized services.

    Activities

    3.1 Make a list of your services.

    3.2 Prioritize your services.

    3.3 Build customer journey maps.

    Outputs

    List of services

    Customer journey maps

    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}255|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,656 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • Organizations must adapt their information security programs to accommodate insurance requirements.
    • Organizations need to reduce insurance costs.
    • Some organizations must find alternatives to cyber insurance.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Shopping for insurance policies is not step one.
    • First and foremost, we must determine what the organization is at risk for and how much it would cost to recover.
    • The cyber insurance market is still evolving. As insurance requirements change, effectively managing cyber insurance requires that your organization proactively manages risk.

    Impact and Result

    Perform an insurance policy comparison with scores based on policy coverage and exclusions.

    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard - A step-by-step document that walks you through how to acquire cyber insurance, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Use this blueprint to score your potential cyber insurance policies and develop skills to overcome common insurance pitfalls.

    • Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy Storyboard

    2. Acquire cyber insurance with confidence – Learn the essentials of the requirements gathering, policy procurement, and review processes.

    Use these tools to gather cyber insurance requirements, prepare for the underwriting process, and compare policies.

    • Threat and Risk Assessment Tool
    • DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • Legacy DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • DRP BIA Scoring Context Example
    • Cyber Insurance Policy Comparison Tool
    • Cyber Insurance Controls Checklist

    Infographic

    Your Company is an Economy: Why This is Your Secret Weapon for Resilience

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    IT specialists often instinctively focus on technical issues, such as server failures or network problems, because they are trained to address the broken parts. However, it's important to consider the context in which these occur. But what if the real problem isn't just the part but the entire system it operates in?

    I want you to take a step back and to stop thinking about your company as a collection of departments and IT systems. Start seeing it for what it truly is: a complex, living, breathing economic system. This isn't some academic analogy. It’s a powerful model that will change how you approach resilience.

    An economic system involves production, resource allocation, and distribution of goods and services, which parallels how a company operates internally. It includes the combination of various departments, the people doing things, the business units, and even the decision-making steps that make up the economic structure of your company. Once you see this, you can never unsee it.

    What is an economic system?

    Let’s quickly demystify this. Forget textbooks and complex theories for a moment. Think about a national economy. It does three basic things:

    1. Production: It makes things. Factories build cars, farms grow food, and programmers write software. This is the creation of value.

    2. Resource Allocation: This process decides who gets what to make those things. Who gets the steel for the cars? The land for the farms? The funding for the software developers? These are all decisions about how to use scarce resources. 

    3. Distribution: This process gets the finished products to the people who need them. Cars go to importers, then dealerships then the customers, food goes to grocery stores, and software gets deployed to servers and then used by clients (in the general sense).

    That's it. Production, allocation, distribution. Every economy, from a simple bartering tribe to the global financial market, operates on these principles. And so does your company.

    So, how is your company an economy?

    Your company doesn't just “do work.” It produces, allocates, and distributes services in its own internal market (and eventually sells outside, otherwise… trouble).

    The production is everywhere. The human resources department produces a “payroll service.” The sales department produces “revenue contracts.” And the IT department? It produces a vast array of services: “compute cycles,” “data storage,” “network connectivity,” and “application uptime.” These are the goods and services that every other part of the company consumes to do their jobs.

    Resource allocation is the lifeblood of your corporate economy. It's the annual budgeting process, the project prioritization meetings, and the daily decisions managers make about where to assign their people. In IT, you are equally part of the allocation process. Most people get to decide at least what they will give priority to that day. Perhaps via the daily scrum or stand-up meetings. Perhaps during the review process. As a manager, when you approve a request for a new high-powered virtual machine for one team, you are making an economic choice. You are allocating a scarce resource that another team can no longer use. As a developer, when you decide that task X is now a higher priority than task Y, you make an economic decision to allocate yourself to task X. It's important to understand that there is an opportunity cost to every decision, whether you label it that way or not. 

    And distribution? That's how these services get to their “consumers.” It’s the internal platforms, the APIs that connect applications, the service desk that fulfills requests, the operations teams that update data via forms into databases, and even the reporting dashboards that deliver information. These are the supply chains and logistics networks of your company’s economy. The consumers are your clients, of course, but also every department that uses a service provided by another department.

    The IT department plays a central role in the company's economy, akin to a central bank and infrastructure provider, by managing essential digital resources like compute, storage, and bandwidth. You control its supply and, through your decisions, influence its value. You also build and maintain the “roads” and “power grid”—the networks and platforms—that the entire corporate economy depends on to function.

    Why This Perspective Is Important for Resilience

    This is where I feel it gets fascinating. When you start seeing your company as an economic system, your understanding of resilience deepens dramatically. You move beyond simply fixing broken things and start thinking about stabilizing a complex, interconnected market.

    It helps you understand true systemic risk.

    When a core database goes down, an engineer sees a technical failure. An economist sees a supply chain collapse. That database isn't just a box with blinking lights; it's a critical supplier of a raw material, namely data. Every single business process, application, and team that creates, updates or consumes that data is now starved of a resource they need to produce their own services. The failure cascades not just through technical dependencies but through economic dependencies. Seeing it this way forces you to ask better questions: Who are the biggest “consumers” of this data supplier? What is the total economic impact of this outage, not just the technical impact? This changes the incident's priority and your response strategy.

    You move beyond simple redundancy.

    The traditional engineering approach to resilience is redundancy. If one server is important, have two. This is like a town having two power plants. It's a good start, but it's not true economic resilience. An economist would ask different questions. Can we diversify our suppliers? Can we re-route via another path? If our primary database provider fails, can we switch to a secondary one, even if it's slower or pricier for a short time? This is the principle of substitution. Can a business process continue to function in a degraded mode, producing a lower-quality “good” for a while instead of stopping completely? This is about economic adaptability, not just technical duplication.

    You could take this even further and move into the realm of business continuity. Can your process work when your primary resource (the database) is not available? How would you redesign your process to work with an alternative solution? This thinking is at the heart of modern operational resilience regulations worldwide. Authorities are no longer just asking if your backups work; they're asking if your firm can fulfill its economic function in the face of severe adversity. They demand a clear grasp of your entire supply chain and a testable exit plan for critical suppliers, including cloud providers.

    You see that this goes way beyond a failing-part view. It goes to the heart of the economic function of your company.

    Incident response becomes economic intervention.

    During a major incident, the incident commander is now no longer just a technical coordinator. You are the head of the “central bank” during a "market crash". Your job is to prevent a localized failure from causing a full-blown corporate recession. Think about your actions:

    • You allocate scarce capital (your top engineers' time) to the most critical problem. The economic cost is the non-delivery of any other product by those people.

    • You implement fiscal policy by prioritizing certain fixes over others to stimulate the quickest “economic” recovery.

    • You manage market confidence through clear, calm, and regular communication to stakeholders, preventing panic from spreading.

    Each decision is an economic intervention designed to restore stability to the system. (If that is not the job description of a central banker, then I eat my hat.)

    Side Note: I often see teams who are obsessed with their own service's uptime, their own local metrics. They proudly report “five nines” of availability, but they do not report on how their service is actually consumed or how critical it is to the company's overall economic output. They've optimized their own factory but don't disclose their output's need level to the company or that their occasional one-hour outage brings the entire company's main assembly line to a halt. Resilience is not about local optimization; it is about the stability of the entire economic system. A dashboard that lists teams in order of availability or whatever other metric is fine, but these numbers must be mapped against their economic relevance. Without the economic relevance weighting, you may be misallocating resources in areas that are not critical or sufficiently important.

    How to Start Thinking Like an Economist in Your Resilience Practice

    This isn't just a theoretical exercise. You can apply this model today to make your organization stronger and yourself more effective to any employer or client.

    First, map your economic flows. Go beyond standard architecture diagrams. Create maps that show how value and services are produced, distributed, and consumed across departments. Identify your most important “supply chains.” Ask business units what IT services are essential for their “production lines” and what the financial impact is when those services are unavailable. This gives you a heat map of economic risk.

    Second, identify your single points of economic failure. In every economy, there are institutions that are “too big to fail.” What are yours? Is it a single authentication service? A legacy mainframe? A specific team of two people who know how a critical system works? These are the areas where a failure will cause a systemic crisis. They require more than just technical redundancy; they need deep, thoughtful resilience planning, including succession plans for people and substitution options for technology.

    Finally, reframe your post-incident reviews. Stop just asking, “What broke and why?” Start asking, “Which economic activity was disrupted?” and “How did the disruption flow through the system?” This shifts the conversation from blaming a component or a team to understanding systemic weaknesses in your company's economy. The goal is not to find a guilty party but to identify where your internal market is fragile and how you can strengthen it with better “monetary policy” (resource allocation) or “infrastructure” (more robust platforms).

    The vicious cycle of a failing economy

    In another article, I mentioned that resilience is a mindset.
     Resilience mindset graphic 

    So what happens when this economic system becomes unstable?

    These issues are typically considered failures and they manifest as irritations, perceived slowness and bugs, all the way to (regular) failures of a process or whole system.

    If this broken economic system is allowed to remain unstable, people will adopt negative behaviors.

    When “the government” (IT) fails to deliver, business teams take matters into their hands and start shadow IT. They may even purchase their own subscriptions.

    In a stable economy, participants trust that resources will be available when needed, but in a broken system, that trust is gone and leads to the hoarding of assets. This may be visible in the requested need for time or even budget allocation. And that leads into protectionism where teams build walls around their data and systems.

    When failures are common, the focus shifts from resolving the systemic problems to assigning blame for the specific symptom. This is akin to the breakdown of trade relations. The applications team blames the infrastructure team for slow servers. The infrastructure team blames the network team for latency. The network team blames the applications team for inefficient code. And around we go.

    Taking it just that little step further: If people live in a failing state long enough, they lose hope. This is learned helplessness. Your most valuable “citizens”—your engineers and business users—become disengaged. They stop reporting bugs because they assume they will never be fixed. They stop suggesting process improvements because they believe their voice doesn't matter.

    And lastly: In a functional system, there are clear processes for requesting services. In your broken economy, these official channels are considered worthless. The only way to get anything done is to generate a crisis. Escalation becomes the primary currency. People learn to bypass the ticketing system and send direct messages to senior leaders because they perceive that's the only way to get a response.

    How to Break the Cycle: Start Small

    To break this cycle, you need to start small and use mechanisms that turn the negative effects of problems into positive effects, like seeing opportunities.

    • Opportunities to correct irritations
    • Opportunities to enhance processes
    • Opportunities to perhaps redesign a service

    Proposing a grand vision will get you polite nods and zero action. I recommend you pick one irritation and fix it. Repeat multiple times until staff starts to perceive a change. Don't try to move the mountain. Remove the first obstacle and make your way up from there. This can be solving an issue, reducing an uncertainty, or actually spotting a way forward. 

    It will go easier as you continue this. Accept that on day one, your credibility is zero. It doesn’t matter whether you're a new manager or a seasoned expert. Trust is earned on the factory floor. Fix one small, nagging irritation for one person. Then another. This is how you build the political and social capital needed to tackle the mountain. It takes time.

    But what will happen next is crucial. There will be a reduction of the negative behaviors. And when you work it efficiently with enough time, you will eliminate those behaviors. And yes, there will be many ifs and buts, and each of the broken elements of a larger chain may require their own solutions. But it is this act of seeing the bigger picture through the constituent parts that will allow you to assign priorities and move closer to the solution in a structural way.
    Seeing step by step results feeds positivism and higher stability. Which in turn again feeds more positivism. 

     

    When you view your company through the lens of an economic system, it elevates the practice of resilience from a purely technical discipline to a value function. It gives you a language to communicate impact and risk to leadership in terms they understand: production, supply, and cost.

    It forces you to see the interconnectedness of everything you do and to appreciate that the failure of a single, seemingly minor component can have large, cascading effects across the entire organization. By thinking like an economist, you stop being just a firefighter, putting out isolated blazes. You become the architect of a more stable, more robust, and ultimately more resilient economy.

    You become the architect of a more stable, more robust, and ultimately more resilient economy. Now, go manage it.

    Always ready for a chat.

    Configuration management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}4|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}4|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}4|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Harness the power of Configuration Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Configuration management is all about being able to manage your assets within the support processes. That means to record what you need. Not less than that, and not more either.

    Asset Management, Configuration Management, Lifecycle Management

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}493|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourced projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and the quality of support. 
    • Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and a decrease of end-user satisfaction.
    • A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and return the confidence of end users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Outsourcing is easy. Realizing the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.
    • You don’t need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.
    • If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that it comes at a cost. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don’t end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Impact and Result

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gain.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Deck – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a strategy for efficient service desk outsourcing.

    This storyboard will help you craft a project charter, create an RFP, and outline strategies to build a long-term relationship with the vendor.

    • Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk – Storyboard
    • Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    2. Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template and Requirements Library – Best-of-breed templates to help you determine processes and build a strategy to outsource them.

    These templates will help you determine your service desk requirements and document your proposed service desk outsourcing strategy.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template

    3. Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template – A structured document to help you outline expectations and communicate requirements to managed service providers.

    This template will allow you to create a detailed RFP for your outsourcing agreement, document the statement of work, provide service overview, record exit conditions, and document licensing model and estimated pricing.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    4. Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template and Scoring Tool – Materials to help you conduct efficient briefings and select the best vendor to fulfill your service desk requirements.

    Use the Reference Interview Template to outline a list of questions for interviewing current/previous customers of your candidate vendors. These interviews will help you with unbiased vendor scoring. The RFP Vendor Scoring Tool will help you facilitate vendor briefings with your list of questions and score candidate vendors efficiently through quantifying evaluations.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Outsource services with your eyes wide open.

    Cost reduction has traditionally been an incentive for outsourcing the service desk. This is especially the case for organizations that don't have minimal processes in place and those that need resources and skills to fill gaps.

    Although cost reduction is usually the main reason to outsource the service desk, in most cases service desk outsourcing increases the cost in a short run. But without a proper model, you will only outsource your problems rather than solving them. A successful outsourcing strategy follows a comprehensive plan that defines objectives, assigns accountabilities, and sets expectations for service delivery prior to vendor outreach.

    For outsourcing the service desk, you should plan ahead, work as a group, define requirements, prepare a strong RFP, and contemplate tension metrics to ensure continual improvement. As you build a project charter to outline your strategy for outsourcing your IT services, ensure you focus on better customer service instead of cost optimization. Ensure that the outsourcer can support your demands, considering your long-term achievement.

    Think about outsourcing like a marriage deed. Take into account building a good relationship before beginning the contract, ensure to include expectations in the agreement, and make it possible to exit the agreement if expectations are not satisfied or service improvement is not achieved.

    This is a picture of Mahmoud Ramin, PhD, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourcing projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and quality of support.

    Common Obstacles

    Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and the decrease of end-user satisfaction.

    A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and reestablish the confidence of end users.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gains.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that need to:

    • Outsource the service desk or portions of service management to improve service delivery.
    • Improve and repatriate existing outsourcing outcomes by becoming more engaged in the management of the function. Regular reviews of performance metrics, staffing, escalation, knowledge base content, and customer satisfaction are critical.
    • Understand the impact that outsourcing would have on the service desk.
    • Understand the potential benefits that outsourcing can bring to the organization.

    This image contains a donut chart with the following information: Salaries and Benefits - 68.50%; Technology - 9.30%; Office Space and Facilities Expense - 14.90%; Travel, Training, and Office Supplies - 7.30%

    Source: HDI 2017

    About 68.5% of the service desk fund is allocated to agent salaries, while only 9.3% of the service desk fund is spent on technology. The high ratio of salaries and expenses over other expense drives organizations to outsource their service desk without taking other considerations into account.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The outsourcing contract must preserve your control, possession, and ownership of the intellectual property involved in the service desk operation. From the beginning of the process, repatriation should be viewed as a possibility and preserved as a capability.

    Your challenge

    This research helps organizations who would like to achieve these goals:

    • Determine objectives and requirements to outsource the service desk.
    • Develop a project charter and build an outsourcing strategy to efficiently define processes to reduce risk of failure.
    • Build an outsourcing RFP and conduct interviews to identify the best candidate for service delivery.
    • Build a long-term relationship with an outsourcing vendor, making sure the vendor is able to satisfy all requirements.
    • Include a continual improvement plan in the outsourcing strategy and contain the option upon service delivery dissatisfaction.

    New hires require between 10 and 80 hours of training (Forward Bpo Inc., 2019).

    A benchmark study by Zendesk from 45,000 companies reveals that timely resolution of issues and 24/7 service are the biggest factors in customer service experience.

    This image contains a bar graph with the following data: Timely issue resolution; 24/7 support; Friendly agent; Desired contact method; Not to repeat info; Proactive support; Self-serve; Call back; Rewards & freebies

    These factors push many businesses to consider service desk outsourcing to vendors that have capabilities to fulfill such requirements.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • In most cases, organizations must perform significant administrative work before they can make a move. Those that fail to properly prepare impede a smooth transition, the success of the vendor, and the ability to repatriate.
    • Successful outsourcing comes from the recognition that an organization is experiencing complete turnover of its service desk staff. These organizations engage the vendor to transition knowledge and process to ensure continuity of quality.
    • IT realizes the most profound hidden costs of outsourcing when the rate of ticket escalation increases, diminishing the capacity of senior technical staff for strategic project work.

    Many organizations may not get the value they expect from outsourcing in their first year.

    Common Reasons:

    • Overall lack of due diligence in the outsourcing process
    • Unsuitable or unclear service transition plan
    • Poor service provider selection and management

    Poor transition planning results in delayed benefits and a poor relationship with your outsourcing service provider. A poor relationship with your service provider results in poor communication and knowledge transfer.

    Key components of a successful plan:

    1. Determine goals and identify requirements before developing an RFP.
    2. Finalize your outsourcing project charter and get ready for vendor evaluation.
    3. Assess and select the most appropriate provider; manage the transition and vendor relationship.

    Outsource the service desk properly, and you could see a wide range of benefits

    Service Desk Outsourcing: Ability to scale up/down; Reduce fixed costs; Refocus IT efforts on core activities; Access to up-to-date technology; Adhere to  ITSM best practices; Increased process optimization; Focus IT efforts on advanced expertise; Reframe to shift-left;

    Info-Tech Insight

    In your service desk outsourcing strategy, rethink downsizing first-level IT service staff. This can be an opportunity to reassign resources to more valuable roles, such as asset management, development or project backlog. Your current service desk staff are most likely familiar with the current technology, processes, and regulations within IT. Consider the ways to better use your existing resources before reducing headcount.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Determine Goals

    Conduct activities in the blueprint to pinpoint your current challenges with the service desk and find out objectives to outsource customer service.

    Define Requirements

    You need to be clear about the processes that will be outsourced. Considering your objectives, we'll help you discover the processes to outsource, to help you achieve your goals.

    Develop RFP

    Your expectations should be documented in a formal proposal to help vendors provide solid information about how they will satisfy your requirements and what their plan is.

    Build Long-Term Relationship

    Make sure to plan for continual improvement by setting expectations, tracking the services with proper metrics, and using efficient communication with the provider. Think about the rainy day and include exit conditions for ending the relationship if needed.

    Info-Tech's methodology

    1. Define the Goal

    2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    3. Develop an RFP and Make a Long-Term Relationship

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    Phase Outcomes

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vision and Goals

    Service Desk Processes to Outsource

    Outsourcing Roles and Responsibilities

    Outsourcing Risks and Constraints

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP

    Continual Improvement Plan

    Exit Strategy

    This is an image of the strategy which you will use to build your requirements for outsourcing the service desk.  it includes: 1. Define the Goal; 2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy; 3. Develop RFP and long-term relationship.

    Insight summary

    Focus on value

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Define outsourcing requirements

    You don't need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.

    Don't focus on cost

    If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that there will be other challenges. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don't end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Emphasize on customer service

    A bad outsourcer relationship will result in low business satisfaction with IT overall. The service desk is the face of IT, and if users are dissatisfied with the service desk, then they are much likelier to be dissatisfied with IT overall.

    Vendors are not magicians

    They have standards in place to help them succeed. Determine ITSM best practices, define your requirements, and adjust process workflows accordingly. Your staff and end users will have a much easier transition once outsourcing proceeds.

    Plan ahead to guarantee success

    Identify outsourcing goals, plan for service and system integrations, document standard incidents and requests, and track tension metrics to make sure the vendor does the work efficiently. Aim for building a long-term relationship but contemplate potential exit strategy.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Use this library to guide you through processes to outsource

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Use this template to craft a proposal for outsourcing your service desk

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Use this template to verify vendor claims on service delivery with pervious or current customers

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Use this tool to evaluate RFP submissions

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the key deliverable, Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Document your project scope and outsourcing strategy in this template to organize the project for efficient resource and requirement allocation

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Determine current challenges with the service desk and identify services to outsource.
    • Make the project charter for an efficient outsourcing strategy that will lead to higher satisfaction from IT.
    • Select the best outsource vendor that will satisfy most of the identified requirements.
    • Reduce the risk of project failure with efficient planning.
    • Understand potential feasibility of service desk outsourcing and its possible impact on business satisfaction.
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through a better service delivery.
    • Conduct more efficient resource allocation with outsourcing customer service.
    • Develop a long-term relationship between the enterprise and vendor through a continual improvement plan.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope your specific challenges and objectives

    Call #3: Identify project stakeholders, and potential risks and constraints

    Call #5: Create a detailed RFP

    Call #6: Identify strategy risks.

    Call #2: Assess outsourcing feasibility and processes to outsourceCall #4: Create a list of metrics to ensure efficient reporting

    Call #7: Prepare for vendor briefing and scoring each vendor

    Call #8: Build a communication plan

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Define the goal

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analysis outsourcing objectives
    • Assess outsourcing feasibility
    • Identify services and processes to outsource

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 1.1

    Identify goals and objectives

    Activities

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1.1.2 Document the benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1.1.3 Identify your outsourcing vision and goals

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure your mission statement

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach your outsourcing objectives

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of strengths and weaknesses of the service desk
    • Challenges with the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk outsourcing vision and goals
    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk
    • Mission statement

    What is your rationale to outsource the service desk?

    Potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk:

    • Bring in the expertise and knowledge to manage tickets according to best-practice guidelines
    • Reduce the timeline to response and resolution
    • Improve IT productivity
    • Enhance IT services and improve performance
    • Augment relationship between IT and business through service-level improvement
    • Free up the internal team and focus IT on complex projects and higher priority tasks
    • Speed up service desk optimization
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through efficient IT services
    • Reduce impact of incidents through effective incident management
    • Increase service consistency via turnover reduction
    • Expand coverage hour and access points
    • Expand languages to service different geographical areas

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1 hour

    Service desk is the face of IT. Service desk improvement increases IT efficiency, lowers operation costs, and enhances business satisfaction.

    Common challenges that result in deciding to outsource the service desk are:

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    ChallengeExample
    Lack of tier 1 supportStartup does not have a dedicated service desk to handle incidents and provide services to end users.
    Inefficient ticket handlingMTTR is very high and end users are frustrated with their issues not getting solved quickly. Even if they call service desk, they are put on hold for a long time. Due to these inefficiencies, their daily work is greatly impacted.
    Restricted service hoursCompany headquartered in Texas does not have resources to provide 24/7 IT service. When users in the East Asia branch have a laptop issue, they must wait until the next day to get response from IT. This has diminished their satisfaction.
    Restricted languagesCompany X is headquartered in New York. An end user not fluent in English from Madrid calls in for support. It takes five minutes for the agent to understand the issue and log a ticket.
    Ticket backlogIT is in firefighting mode, very busy with taking care of critical incidents and requests from upper management. Almost no one is committed to the SLA because of their limited availability.

    Brainstorm your challenges with the service desk. Why have you decided to outsource your service desk? Use the above table as a sample.

    1.1.2 Document benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1 hour

    1. Review the challenges with your current service desk identified in activity 1.1.1.
    2. Discuss possible ways to tackle these challenges. Be specific and determine ways to resolve these issues if you were to do it internally.
    3. Determine potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk to IT, business, and end users.
    4. For each benefit, describe dependencies. For instance, to reduce the number of direct calls (benefit), users should have access to service desk as a single point of contact (dependency).
    5. Document this activity in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Input

    • List of challenges with the current service desk from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Why should you not consider cost reduction as a primary incentive to outsourcing the service desk?

    Assume that some of the costs will not go away with outsourcing

    When you outsource, the vendor's staff tend to gradually become less effective as:

    • They are managed by metrics to reduce costs by escalating sooner, reducing talk time, and proposing questionable solutions.
    • Turnover results in new employees that get insufficient training.

    You must actively manage the vendor to identify and resolve these issues. Many organizations find that service desk management takes more time after they outsource.

    You need to keep spending on service desk management, and you may not get away from technology infrastructure spending.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In their first year, almost 42% of Info-Tech's clients do not get the real value of outsourcing services as expected. This iss primarily because of misalignment of organizational goals with outcomes of the outsourced services.

    Consider the hidden costs of outsourcing

    Expected Costs

    Unexpected Costs

    Example

    Transition CostsSeverance and staff retention
    • Cost to adapt to vendor standards
    • Training cost of vendor staff
    • Lost productivity
    • Format for requirements
    • Training report developers to work with vendor systems
    FeesPrice of the engagement
    • Extra fees for additional services
    • Extra charges for uploading data to cloud storage
    • Portal access
    Management CostsTime directing account
    • Time directly managing vendor staff
    • Checking deliverables for errors
    • Disputing penalty amounts
    Rework CostsDowntime, defect rate, etc. (quality metrics measured in SLAs)
    • Time spent adapting deliverables for unanticipated requirements
    • Time spent assuring the quality and usefulness of deliverables
    • Completing quality assurance and updating knowledgebase articles
    • Adapting reporting for presentation to stakeholders

    Determine strategies to avoid each hidden cost

    Costs related to transitioning into the engagementAdapting to standards and training costs

    Adapting to standards: Define the process improvements you will need to work with each potential vendor.

    Training costs for vendor staff: Reduce training costs by keeping the same vendor staff on all of your projects.

    Fee-related costs

    Fees for additional services (that you thought were included)

    Carefully review each proposed statement of work to identify and reduce extra fees. Understand why extra fees occur in the SLA, the contract, and the proposed statement of work, and take steps to protect yourself and the vendor.

    Management-related costs

    Direct management of vendor staff and dispute resolution

    Direct management of vendor staff: Avoid excessive management costs by defining a two-tier management structure on both sides of the engagement.

    Time spent resolving disputes: Avoid prolonged resolution costs by defining terms of divorce for the engagement up front.

    Rework costs

    Unanticipated requirements and integration with existing systems

    Unanticipated requirements: Use a two-stage process to define requirements, starting with business people and then with review by technical staff.

    Integration with existing systems: Obtain a commitment from vendors that deliverables will conform to standards at points of integration with your systems.

    Your outsourcing strategy should address the reasons you decided to outsource

    A clear vision of strategic objectives prior to entering an outsourcing agreement will allow you to clearly communicate these objectives to the Managed Service Provider (MSP) and use them as a contracted basis for the relationship.

    • Define the business' overall approach to outsourcing along with the priorities, rules, and principles that will drive the outsourcing strategy and every subsequent outsourcing decision and activity.
    • Define specific business, service, and technical goals for the outsourcing project and relevant measures of success.

    "People often don't have a clear direction around what they're trying to accomplish. The strategic goals should be documented. Is this a cost-savings exercise? Is it because you're deficient in one area? Is it because you don't have the tools or expertise to run the service desk yourself? Figure out what problem you're trying to solve by outsourcing, then build your strategy around that.
    – Jeremy Gagne, Application Support Delivery Manager, Allegis Group

    Most organizations are driven to consider outsourcing their service desk hoping to improve the following:

    • Ability to scale (train people and acquire skills)
    • Focus on core competencies
    • Decrease capital costs
    • Access latest technology without large investment
    • Resolve labor force constraints
    • Gain access to special expertise without paying a full salary
    • Save money overall

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use your goals and objectives as a management tool. Clearly outline your desired project outcomes to both your in-house team and the vendor during implementation and monitoring. It will allow a common ground to unite both parties as the project progresses.

    Mitigate pitfalls that lay in the way of desired outcomes of outsourcing

    Desired outcomePitfalls to overcome
    IT can focus on core competencies and strategic initiatives rather than break-fix tasks.Escalation to second- and third-level support usually increases when the first level has been outsourced. Outsourcers will have less experience with your typical incidents and will give up on trying to solve some issues more quickly than your internal level-one staff.
    Low outsourcing costs compared to the costs needed to employ internal employees in the same role. Due to lack of incentive to decrease ticket volume, costs are likely to increase. As a result, organizations often find themselves paying more overall for an outsourced service desk than if they had a few dedicated IT service desk employees in-house.
    Improved employee morale as a result of being able to focus on more interesting tasks.Management often expects existing employee morale to increase as a result of shifting their focus to core and strategic tasks, but the fear of diminished job security often spreads to the remaining non-level-one employees.

    1.1.3 Identify outsourcing vision and goals

    Identify the goals and objectives of outsourcing to inform your strategy.

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    1-2 hours

    1. Meet with key business stakeholders and the service desk staff who were involved in the decision to outsource.
    2. As a group, review the results from activity 1.1.1 (challenges with current service desk operations) and identify the goals and objectives of the outsourcing initiative.
    3. Determine the key performance indicator (KPI) for each goal.
    4. Identify the impacted stakeholder/s for each goal.
    5. Discuss checkpoint schedule for each goal to make sure the list stays updated.

    Use the sample table as a starting point:

    1. Document your table in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.
    IDGoal DescriptionKPIImpacted StakeholdersCheckpoint Schedule
    1Provide capacity to take calls outside of current service desk work hours
    • Decreased in time to response
    • Decreased time to resolve
    • IT Entire organization
    • Every month
    2Take calls in different languages
    • Improved service delivery in different geographical regions
    • Improved end-user satisfaction
    • End users
    • Every month
    3Provide field support at remote sites with no IT presence without having to fly out an employee
    • 40% faster incident resolution and request fulfillment
    • Entire organization
    • Every month
    4Improve ease of management by vendor helping with managing and optimizing service desk tasks
    • Improved service management efficiency
    • Entire organization
    • Every 3 months

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Evaluate organizational demographics to assess outsourcing rationale

    The size, complexity, and maturity of your organization are good indicators of service desk direction with regards to outsourcing.

    Organization Size

    • As more devices, applications, systems, and users are added to the mix, vendor costs will increase but their ability to meet business needs will decrease.
    • Small organizations are often either rejected by vendors for being too small or locked into a contract that is overkill for their actual needs (and budget).

    Complexity

    • Highly customized environments and organizations with specialized applications or stringent regulatory requirements are very difficult to outsource for a reasonable cost and acceptable quality.
    • In these cases, the vendor is required to train skilled support or ends up escalating more tickets back to second- and third-level support.

    Requirements

    • Organizations looking to outsource must have defined outsourcing requirements before looking at vendors.
    • Without a requirement assessment, the vendor won't have guidelines to follow and you won't be able to measure their adherence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although less adherence to service desk best practices can be one of the main incentives to outsourcing the service desk, IT should have minimal processes in place to be able to set expectations with targeting vendors.

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure mission statement

    0.5-1 hour

    The evaluation process for outsourcing the service desk should be done very carefully. Project leaders should make sure they won't panic internal resources and impact their performance through the transition period.

    If the outsourcing process is rushed, it will result in poor evaluation, inefficient decision making, and project failure.

    1. Refer to results in activity 1.1.3. Discuss the service desk outsourcing goals once again.
    2. Brainstorm the most important objectives. Use sticky notes to prioritize the items from the most important to the least important.
    3. Edit the order accordingly.

    Input

    • Project goals from activity 1.1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized list of outsourcing goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach outsourcing objectives

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager

    0.5-1 hour

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statement should use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Can be described as:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample mission statements:

    • To help fulfill organizational goals, IT has decided to empower business stakeholders with outsourcing the service desk.
    • To support efficient IT service provision, better collaboration, and effective communication, [Company Name] has decided to outsource the service desk.
    • [Company Name] plans to outsource the service desk so it can identify bottlenecks and inefficiencies with current service desk processes and enable [Company Name] to innovate and support business growth.
    • Considering the goals and benefits determined in the previous activities, outline a mission statement.
    • Document your outsourcing mission statement in the "Project Overview" section of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Assess outsourcing feasibility

    Activities

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    1.2.2 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    1.2.3 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    1.2.4 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk tasks and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user satisfaction with the service desk
    • List of processes and services to outsource

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    Solicit targeted department feedback on IT's core service capabilities, communications, and business enablement from end users. Use this feedback to assess end-user satisfaction with each service, broken down by department and seniority level.

    1. Complete an end-user satisfaction survey to define the current state of your IT services, including service desk (timeliness and effectiveness). With Info-Tech's end-user satisfaction program, an analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and will go through the report with you.
    2. Evaluate survey results.
    3. Communicate survey results with team leads and discuss the satisfaction rates and comments of the end users.
    4. Schedule to launch another survey one year after outsourcing the service desk.
    5. Your results will be compared to the following year's results to analyze the overall success/failure of your outsourcing project.

    A decrease of business and end-user satisfaction is a big drive to outsourcing the service desk. Conduct a customer service survey to discover your end-user experience prior to and after outsourcing the service desk.

    Don't get caught believing common misconceptions: outsourcing doesn't mean sending away all the work

    First-time outsourcers often assume they are transferring most of the operations over to the vendor, but this is often not the case.

    1. Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.
    2. Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.
    3. The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications (and for customized applications if you'll pay for it). However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite, and that service is very expensive to outsource.
    4. Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Switching to a vendor won't necessarily improve your service desk maturity

    You should have minimal requirements before moving.

    Whether managing in-house or outsourcing, it is your job to ensure core issues have been clarified, processes defined, and standards maintained. If your processes are ad-hoc or non-existent right now, outsourcing won't fix them.

    You must have the following in place before looking to outsource:

    • Defined reporting needs and plans
    • Formalized skill-set requirements
    • Problem management and escalation guidelines
    • Ticket templates and classification rules
    • Workflow details
    • Knowledge base standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you expect your problems to disappear with outsourcing, they might just get worse.

    Define long-term requirements

    Anticipate growth throughout the lifecycle of your outsourcing contract and build that into the RFP

    • Most outsourcing agreements typically last three to five years. In that time, you risk outgrowing your service provider by neglecting to define your long-term service desk requirements.
    • Outgrowing your vendor before your contract ends can be expensive due to high switching costs. Managing multiple vendors can also be problematic.
    • It is crucial to define your service desk requirements before developing a request for proposal to make sure the service you select can meet your organization's needs.
    • Make sure that the business is involved in this planning stage, as the goals of IT need to scale with the growth strategy of the business. You may select a vendor with no additional capacity despite the fact that your organization has a major expansion planned to begin two years from now. Assessing future requirements also allows you to culture match with the vendor. If your outlooks and practices are similar, the match will likely click.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't select a vendor for what your company is today – select a vendor for what your company will be years from now. Define your future service desk requirements in addition to your current requirements and leave room for growth and development.

    You can't outsource everything

    Manage the things that stay in-house well or suffer the consequences.

    "You can't outsource management; you can only outsource supervision." Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    What can be the vendor in charge of?

    What stays in-house?

    • Call and email answering
    • Ongoing daily ticket creation and tracking
    • Tier 1 support
    • Internal escalation to Level 2 support
    • External escalation to specialized Level 2 and Level 3 support
    • Knowledge base article creation
    • Service desk-related hardware acquisition and maintenance
    • Service desk software acquisition and maintenance
    • Security and access management
    • Disaster recovery
    • Staff acquisition
    • Facilities
    • The role of the Service Desk Manager
    • Skills and training standards
    • Document standardization
    • Knowledge base quality assurance and documentation standardization
    • Self-service maintenance, promotion, and ownership
    • Short and long-term tracking of vendor performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    The need for a Service Desk Manager does not go away when you outsource. In fact, the need becomes even stronger and never diminishes.

    Assess current service desk processes before outsourcing

    Process standards with areas such as documentation, workflow, and ticket escalation should be in place before the decision to outsource has been made.

    Every effective service desk has a clear definition of the services that they are performing for the end user. You can't provide a service without knowing what the services are.

    MSPs typically have their own set of standards and processes in play. If your service desk is not at a similar level of maturity, outsourcing will not be pleasant.

    Make sure that your metrics are reported consistently and that they tell a story.

    "Establish baseline before outsourcing. Those organizations that don't have enough service desk maturity before outsourcing should work with the outsourcer to establish the baseline."
    – Yev Khobrenkov, Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing vendors are not service desk builders; they're service desk refiners. Switching to a vendor won't improve your maturity; you must have a certain degree of process maturity and standardization before moving.

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Cleaning Supplies

    SOURCE: PicNet

    Challenge

    • Reckitt Benckiser of Australia determined that its core service desk needed to be outsourced.
    • It would retain its higher level service desk staff to work on strategic projects.
    • The MSP needed to fulfill key requirements outlined by Reckitt Benckiser.

    Solution

    • Reckitt Benckiser recognized that its rapidly evolving IT needs required a service desk that could fulfill the following tasks:
    • Free up internal IT staff.
    • Provide in-depth understanding of business apps.
    • Offer efficient, cost-effective support onsite.
    • Focus on continual service improvement (CSI).

    Results

    • An RFP was developed to support the outsourcing strategy.
    • With the project structure outlined and the requirements of the vendor for the business identified, Reckitt Benckiser could now focus on selecting a vendor that met its needs.

    1.2.1 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    2-3 hours

    Review your prioritized project goals from activity 1.1.4.

    Brainstorm requirements and use cases for each goal and describe each use case. For example: To improve service desk timeliness, IT should improve incident management, to resolve incidents according to the defined SLA and based on ticket priority levels.

    Discuss if you're outsourcing just incident management or both incident management and request fulfillment. If both, determine what level of service requests will be outsourced? Will you ask the vendor to provide a service catalog? Will you outsource self-serve and automation?

    Document your findings in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library.

    Input

    • Outsourcing project goals from activity 1.1.4

    Output

    • List of processes to outsource

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    1.2.2 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Infrastructure manager

    2-3 hours

    Most successful service desk outsourcing engagements have a primary goal of freeing up their internal resources to work on complex tasks and projects. The key outsourcing success factor is to find out internal services and processes that are standardized or should be standardized, and then determine if they can be outsourced.

    1. Review the list of identified service desk processes from activity 1.2.1.
    2. Discuss the maturity level of each process (low, medium, high) and document under the maturity column of the Outsource the Service Desk Requirements Database Library.
    3. Use the following decision matrix for each process. Discuss which tasks are important to strategic objectives, which ones provide competitive advantage, and which ones require specialized in-house knowledge.
    4. Identify processes that receive high vendor's performance advantage. For instance, access to talent, lower cost at scale, and access to technology.
    5. In your outsourcing assessment, consider a narrow scope of engagement and a broad view of what is important to business outcome.
    6. Based on your findings, determine the priority of each process to be outsourced. Document results in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library, and section 4.1 of the service desk outsourcing project charter.
    • Important to strategic objectives
    • Provides competitive advantage
    • Specialized in-house knowledge required

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis, where the X axis is labeled Vendor's Performance Advantage, and the Y axis is labeled Importance to Business Outcomes.

    • Talent/access to skills
    • Economies of scale/lower cost at scale
    • Access to technology

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Maintain staff and training: you need to know who is being hired, how, and why

    Define documentation rules to retain knowledge

    • Establish a standard knowledge article template and list of required information.
    • Train staff on the requirements of knowledge base creation and management. Help them understand the value of the time spent recording their work.
    • It is your responsibility to assure the quality of each knowledge article. Outline accountabilities for internal staff and track for performance evaluations.

    For information on better knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Expect to manage stringent skills and training standards

    • Plan on being more formal about a Service Manager position and spending more time than you allocated previously.
    • Complete a thorough assessment of the skills you need to keep the service desk running smoothly.
    • Don't forget to account for any customized or proprietary systems. How will you train vendor staff to accommodate your needs? What does their turnaround look like: would it be more likely that you acquire a dependable employee in-house?
    • Staffing requirements need to be actively monitored to ensure the outsourcer doesn't have degradation of quality or hiring standards. Don't assume that things run well – complete regular checks and ask for access to audit results.
    • Are the systems and data being accessed by the vendor highly sensitive or subject to regulatory requirements? If so, it is your job to ensure that vendor staff are being screened appropriately.

    Does your service desk need to integrate to other IT services?

    A common challenge when outsourcing multiple services to more than one vendor is a lack of collaboration and communication between vendors.

    • Leverage SIAM capabilities to integrate service desk tasks to other IT services, if needed.
    • "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) is a management methodology that can be applied in an environment that includes services sourced from a number of service providers" (Scopism Limited, 2020).
    • SIAM supports cross-functional integrations. Organizations that look for a single provider will be less likely to get maximum benefits from SIAM.

    There are three layers of entities in SIAM:

    • Customer Organization: The customer who receives services, who defines the relationship with service providers.
    • Service Integrator: End-to-end service governance and integration is done at this layer, making sure all service providers are committed to their services.
    • Service Provider: Responsible party for service delivery according to contract. It can be combination of internal provider, managed by internal agreements, and external provider, managed by SLAs between providers and customer organization.

    Use SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    In the SIAM model, the customer organization keeps strategic, governance, and business activities, while integrating other services (either internally or externally).

    This is an image of the SIAM model

    SIAM Layers. Source: SIAM Foundation BoK

    Utilize SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    SIAM reduces service duplication and improves service delivery via managing internal and external service providers.

    To utilize the SIAM model, determine the following components:

    • Service providers
    • Service consumers
    • Service outcomes
    • Service obstacles and boundaries
    • Service dependencies
    • Technical requirements and interactions for each service
    • Service data and information including service levels

    To learn more about adopting SIAM, visit Scopism.

    1.2.3 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    1-2 hours

    • Discuss principles and goals of SIAM and how integrating other services can apply within your processes.
    • Review the list of service desk processes and tasks to be outsourced from activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.
    • Brainstorm a list of other services that are outsourced/need to be outsourced.
    • Determine providers of each service (both internal and external). Document the other services to be integrated in the project charter template and requirements database library.

    Input

    • SIAM objectives
    • List of service desk processes to outsource

    Output

    • List of other services to outsource and integrate in the project

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Establish requirements for problem management in the outsourcing plan

    Your MSP should not just fulfill SLAs – they should be a proactive source of value.

    Problem management is a group effort. Make sure your internal team is assisted with sufficient and efficient data by the outsourcer to conduct a better problem management.

    Clearly state your organization's expectations for enabling problem management. MSPs may not necessarily need, and cannot do, problem management; however, they should provide metrics to help you discover trends, define recurring issues, and enable root cause analysis.

    For more information on problem management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Improve Incident and Problem Management.

    PROBLEM MANAGEMENT

    INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: Ticket data from incident management is needed for incident matching to identify problems. Critical Incidents are also a main input to problem management.

    EVENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: SMEs and operations teams monitoring system health events can identify indicators of potential future issues before they become incidents.

    APPLICATION, INFRASTRUCTURE, and SECURITY TEAMS

    ACTION: Problem tickets require investigation from relevant SMEs across different IT teams to identify potential solutions or workarounds.

    CHANGE MANAGEMENT

    OUTPUT: Problem resolution may need to go through Change Management for proper authorization and risk management.

    Outline problem management protocols to gain value from your service provider

    • For example, with a deep dive into ticket trend analysis, your MSP should be able to tell you that you've had a large number of tickets on a particular issue in the past month, allowing you to look into means to resolve the issue and prevent it from reoccurring.
    • A proactive MSP should be able to help your service levels improve over time. This should be built into the KPIs and metrics you ask for from the outsourcer.

    Sample Scenario

    Your MSP tracks ticket volume by platform.

    There are 100 network tickets/month, 200 systems tickets/month, and 5,000 end-user tickets/month.

    Tracking these numbers is a good start, but the real value is in the analysis. Why are there 5,000 end-user tickets? What are the trends?

    Your MSP should be providing a monthly root-cause analysis to help improve service quality.

    Outcomes:

    1. Meeting basic SLAs tells a small part of the story. The MSP is performing well in a functional sense, but this doesn't shed any insight on what kind of knowledge or value is being added.
    2. The MSP should provide routine updates on ticket trends and other insights gained through data analysis.
    3. A commitment to continual improvement will provide your organization with value throughout the duration of the outsourcing agreement.

    Phase 2

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify roles and responsibilities
    • Determine potential risks of outsourcing the service desk
    • Build a list of metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 2.1

    Identify project stakeholders

    Activity

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk roles
    • Service desk outsourcing goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcome of this step

    • Outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an outsourcing strategy to capture the vision of your service desk

    An outsourcing strategy is crucial to the proper accomplishment of an outsourcing project. By taking the time to think through your strategy beforehand, you will have a clear idea of your desired outcomes. This will make your RFP of higher quality and will result in a much easier negotiation process.

    Most MSPs are prepared to offer a standard proposal to clients who do not know what they want. These are agreements that are doomed to fail. A clearly defined set of goals (discussed in Phase 1), risks, and KPIs and metrics (covered in this phase) makes the agreement more beneficial for both parties in the long run.

    1. Identify goals and objectives
    2. Determine mission statement
    3. Define roles and responsibilities
    4. Identify risks and constraints
    5. Define KPIs and metrics
    6. Complete outsourcing strategy

    A successful outsourcing initiative depends on rigorous preparation

    Outsourcing is a garbage in, garbage out initiative. You need to give your service provider the information they need to provide an effective product.

    • Data quality is critical to your outsourcing initiative's success.
    • Your vendor will be much better equipped to help you and to better price its services if it has a thorough understanding of your IT environment.
    • This means more than just building a catalog of your hardware and software. You will need to make available documented policies and processes so you and your vendor can understand where they fit in.
    • Failure to completely document your environment can lead to a much longer time to value as your provider will have to spend much more time (and thus much more money) getting their service up and running.

    "You should fill the gap before outsourcing. You should make sure how to measure tickets, how to categorize, and what the cost of outsourcing will be. Then you'll be able to outsource the execution of the service. Start your own processes and then outsource their execution."
    – Kris Krishan, Head of IT and business systems, Waymo

    Case Study

    Digital media company built an outsourcing strategy to improve customer satisfaction

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media

    SOURCE: Auxis

    Challenge

    A Canadian multi-business company with over 13,000 employees would like to maintain a growing volume of digital content with their endpoint management.

    The client operated a tiered model service desk. Tier 1 was outsourced, and tier 2 tasks were done internally, for more complex tasks and projects.

    As a result of poor planning and defining goals, the company had issues with:

    • Low-quality ticket handling
    • High volume of tickets escalated to tier 2, restraining them from working on complex tickets
    • High turn over and a challenge with talent retention
    • Insufficient documentation to train external tier 1 team
    • Long resolution time and low end-user satisfaction

    Solution

    The company structured a strategy for outsourcing service desk and defined their expectations and requirements.

    They engaged with another outsourcer that would fulfill their requirements as planned.

    With the help of the outsourcer's consulting team, the client was able to define the gaps in their existing processes and system to:

    • Implement a better ticketing system that could follow best-practices guidelines
    • Restructure the team so they would be able to handle processes efficiently

    Results

    The proactive planning led to:

    • Significant improvement in first call resolution (82%).
    • MTTR improvement freed tier 2 to focus on business strategic objectives and allowed them to work on higher-value activities.
    • With a better strategy around outsourcing planning, the company saved 20% of cost compared to the previous outsourcer.
    • As a result of this partnership, the company is providing a 24/7 structure in multiple languages, which is aligned with the company's growth.
    • Due to having a clear strategy built for the project, the client now has better visibility into metrics that support long-term continual improvement plans.

    Define roles and responsibilities for the outsourcing transition to form the base of your outsourcing strategy

    There is no "I" in outsource; make sure the whole team is involved

    Outsourcing is a complete top-to-bottom process that involves multiple levels of engagement:

    • Management must make high-level decisions about staffing and negotiate contract details with the vendor.
    • Service desk employees must execute on the documentation and standardization of processes in an effort to increase maturity.
    • Roles and responsibilities need to be clearly defined to ensure that all aspects of the transition are completed on time.
    • Implement a full-scale effort that involves all relevant staff. The most common mistake is to have the project design follow the same top-down pattern as the decision-making process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The service desk doesn't operate in isolation. The service desk interfaces with many other parts of the organization (such as finance, purchasing, field support, etc.), so it's important to ensure you engage stakeholders from other departments as well. If you only engage the service desk staff in your discussions around outsourcing strategy and RFP development, you may miss requirements that will come up when it's too late.

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    2 hours

    1. The sample RACI chart in section 5 of the Project Charter Template outlines which positions are responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each major task within the outsourcing project.
    2. Responsible, is the group that is responsible for the execution and oversight of activities for the project. Accountable is the owner of the task/process, who is accountable for the results and outcomes. Consulted is the subject matter expert (SME) who is actively involved in the task/process and consulted on decisions. Informed is not actively involved with the task/process and is updated about decisions around the task/process.
    3. Make sure that you assign only one person as accountable per process. There can be multiple people responsible for each task. Consulted and Informed are optional for each task.
    4. Complete the RACI chart with recommended participants, and document in your service desk outsourcing project charter, under section 5.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 2.2

    Outline potential risks and constraints

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outsourcing objectives
    • Potential risks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mitigation strategy for each risk
    • Service desk metrics

    Know your constraints to reduce surprises during project implementation

    No service desk is perfect; know your limits and plan accordingly

    Define your constraints to outsourcing the service desk.

    Consider all types of constraints and opportunities, including:

    • Business forces
    • Economic cycles
    • Disruptive tech
    • Regulation and compliance issues
    • Internal organizational issues

    Within the scope of a scouring decision, define your needs and objectives, measure those as much as possible, and compare them with the "as-is" situation.

    Start determining what alternative approaches/scenarios the organization could use to fill the gaps. Start a comparison of scenarios against drivers, goals, and risks.

    Constraints

    Goals and objectives

    • Budget
    • Maturity
    • Compliance
    • Regulations
    • Outsourcing Strategy

    Plan ahead for potential risks that may impede your strategy

    Risk assessment must go hand-in-hand with goal and objective planning

    Risk is inherent with any outsourcing project. Common outsourcing risks include:

    • Lack of commitment to the customer's goals from the vendor.
    • The distraction of managing the relationship with the vendor.
    • A perceived loss of control and a feeling of over-dependence on your vendor.
    • Managers may feel they have less influence on the development of strategy.
    • Retained staff may feel they have become less skilled in their specialist field.
    • Unanticipated expenses that were assumed to be offered by the vendor.
    • Savings only result from high capital investment in new projects on the part of the customer.

    Analyze the risks associated with a specific scenario. This analysis should identify and understand the most common sourcing and vendor risks using a risk-reward analysis for selected scenarios. Use tools and guidelines to assess and manage vendor risk and tailor risk evaluation criteria to the types of vendors and products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Plan for the worst to prevent it from happening. Evaluating risk should cover a wide variety of scenarios including the worst possible cases. This type of thinking will be crucial when developing your exit strategy in a later exercise.

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    1-3 hours

    1. Brainstorm any potential risks that may arise through the outsourcing project. Describe each risk and categorize both its probability of occurring and impact on the organization as high (H), medium (M), or low (L), using the table below:
    Risk Description

    Probability(H/M/L)

    Impact(H/M/L)Planned Mitigation
    Lack of documentationMMUse cloud-based solution to share documents.
    Knowledge transferLMDetailed knowledge-sharing agreement in place in the RFP.
    Processes not followedLHClear outline and definition of current processes.
    1. Identify any constraints for your outsourcing strategy that may restrict, limit, or place certain conditions on the outsourcing project.
      • This may include budget restrictions or staffing limitations.
      • Identifying constraints will help you be prepared for risks and will lessen their impact.
    2. Document risks and constraints in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Define service tiers and roles to develop clear vendor SLAs

    Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.

    Define the tiers and/or services that will be the responsibility of the MSP, as well as escalations and workflows across tiers. A sample outsourced structure is displayed here:

    External Vendor

    Tickets beyond the scope of the service desk staff need to be escalated back to the vendor responsible for the affected system.

    Tier 3

    Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Tier 2

    The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications. However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite as that service is very expensive to outsource.

    Tier 1

    Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you outsource everything, you'll be at the mercy of consultancy or professional services shops later on. You won't have anyone in-house to help you deploy anything; you're at the mercy of a consultant to come in and tell you what to do and how much to spend. Keep your highly skilled people in-house to offset what you'd have to pay for consultancy. If you need to repatriate your service desk later on, you will need skills in-house to do so.

    Don't become obsessed with managing by short-term metrics – look at the big picture

    "Good" metric results may simply indicate proficient reactive fixing; long-term thinking involves implementing proactive, balanced solutions.

    KPIs demonstrate that you are running an effective service desk because:

    • You close an average of 300 tickets per week
    • Your first call resolution is above 90%
    • Your talk time is less than five minutes
    • Surveys reveal clients are satisfied

    While these results may appear great on the surface, metrics don't tell the whole story.

    The effort from any support team seeks to balance three elements:

    FCR: Time; Resources; Quality

    First-Contact Resolution (FCR) Rate

    Percentage of tickets resolved during first contact with user (e.g. before they hang up or within an hour of submitting ticket). Could be measured as first-contact, first-tier, or first-day resolution.

    End-User Satisfaction

    Perceived value of the service desk measured by a robust annual satisfaction survey of end users and/or transactional satisfaction surveys sent with a percentage of tickets.

    Ticket Volume and Cost Per Ticket

    Monthly operating expenses divided by average ticket volume per month. Report ticket volume by department or ticket category, and look at trends for context.

    Average Time to Resolve (incidents) or Fulfill (service requests)

    Time elapsed from when a ticket is "open" to "resolved." Distinguish between ticket resolution vs. closure, and measure time for incidents and service requests separately.

    Focus on tension metrics to achieve long-term success

    Tension metrics help create a balance by preventing teams from focusing on a single element.

    For example, an MSP built incentives around ticket volume for their staff, but not the quality of tickets. As a result, the MSP staff rushed through tickets and gamed the system while service quality suffered.

    Use metrics to establish baselines and benchmarking data:

    • If you know when spikes in ticket volumes occur, you can prepare to resource more appropriately for these time periods
    • Create KB articles to tackle recurring issues and assist tier 1 technicians and end users.
      • Employ a root cause analysis to eliminate recurring tickets.

    "We had an average talk time of 15 minutes per call and I wanted to ensure they could handle those calls in 15 minutes. But the behavior was opposite, [the vendor] would wrap up the call, transfer prematurely, or tell the client they'd call them back. Service levels drive behavior so make sure they are aligned with your strategic goals with no unintended consequences."
    – IT Services Manager, Banking

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your metrics work cooperatively. Metrics should be chosen that cause tension on one another. It's not enough to rely on a fast service desk that doesn't have a high end-user satisfaction rate or runs at too high a cost; there needs to be balance.

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    1-3 hours

    1. Define KPIs and metrics that will be critical to service desk success.
    2. Distribute sticky notes of different colors to participants around the table.
    3. Select a space to place the sticky notes – a table, whiteboard, flip chart, etc. – and divide it into three zones.
    4. Refer to your defined list of goals and KPIs from activity 1.1.3 and discuss metrics to fulfill each KPI. Note that each goal (critical success factor, CSF) may have more than one KPI. For instance:
      1. Goal 1: Increase end-user satisfaction; KPI 1: Improve average transactional survey score. KPI 2: Improve annual relationship survey score.
      2. Goal 2: Improve service delivery; KPI 1: Reduce time to resolve incidents. KPI 2: Reduce time to fulfill service requests.
    5. Recall that tension metrics must form a balance between:
      1. Time
      2. Resources
      3. Quality
    6. Record the results in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • Service desk outsourcing goals
    • Service desk outsourcing KPIs

    Output

    • List of service desk metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Phase 3

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build your outsourcing RFP
    • Set expectations with candidate vendors
    • Score and select your vendor
    • Manage your relationship with the vendor

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 3.1

    Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk processes and requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge management and technology requirements
    • Self-service requirements

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Create a detailed RFP to ensure your candidate vendor will fulfill all your requirements

    At its core, your RFP should detail the outcomes of your outsourcing strategy and communicate your needs to the vendor.

    The RFP must cover business needs and the more detailed service desk functions required. Many enterprises only consider the functionality they need, while ignoring operational and selection requirements.

    Negotiate a supply agreement with the preferred outsourcer for delivery of the required services. Ensure your RFP covers:

    1. Service specification
    2. Service levels
    3. Roles and responsibilities
    4. Transition period and acceptance
    5. Prices, payment, and duration
    6. Agreement administration
    7. Outsourcing issues

    In addition to defining your standard requirements, don't forget to take into consideration the following factors when developing your RFP:

    • Employee onboarding and hardware imaging for new users
    • Applications you need current and future support for
    • Reporting requirements
    • Self-service options
    • Remote support needs and locations

    Although it may be tempting, don't throw everything over the wall at your vendor in the RFP. Evaluate your service desk functions in terms of quality, cost effectiveness, and the value provided from the vendor. Organizations should only outsource functions that the vendor can operate better, faster, or cheaper.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Involve the right stakeholders in developing your RFP, not just service desk. If only service desk is involved in RFP discussion, the connection between tier 1 and specialists will be broken, as some processes are not considered from IT's point of view.

    Identify ITSM solution requirements

    Your vendor probably uses a different tool to manage their processes; make sure its capabilities align with the vision of your service desk.

    Your service desk and outsourcing strategy were both designed with your current ITSM solution in mind. Before you hand the reins to an MSP, it is crucial that you outline how your current ITSM solution is being used in terms of functionality.

    Find out if it's better to have the MSP use their own ITSM tools or your ITSM solution.

    Benefits of operating within your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    Disadvantages of using your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    • If you provide the service catalog, it's easier to control your ITSM tool yourself.
    • Using your own ITSM and giving access to the outsourcer will allow you to build your dashboard and access your operational metrics rather than relying on the MSP to provide you with metrics.
    • Usage of the current tool may be extended across multiple departments, so it may be in the best interest of your business to have the vendor adopt usage of the current tool.
    • While many ITSM solutions have similar functions, innate differences do exist between them. Outsourcers mostly want to operate in their own ticketing solution. As other departments besides IT may be using the service management tool, you will need to have the same tool across the organization. This makes purchasing the new ITSM license very expensive, unless you operate in the same ITSM as the outsourcer.
    • You need your vendor to be able to use the system you have in order to meet your requirements, which will limit your options in the market.
    • If the outsourcer is using your ITSM, you should provide training to them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defining your tool requirements can be a great opportunity to get the tool functionality you always wanted. Many MSPs offer enterprise-level ITSM tools and highly mature processes that may tempt you to operate within their ITSM environment. However, first define your goals for such a move, as well as pros and cons of operating in their service management tool to weigh if its benefits overweigh its downfalls.

    Case Study

    Lone Star College learned that it's important to select a vendor whose tool will work with your service desk

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: ServiceNow

    Challenge

    Lone Star College has an end-user base of over 100,000 staff and students.

    The college has six campuses across the state of Texas, and each campus was using its own service desk and ITSM solution.

    Initially, the decision was to implement a single ITSM solution, but organizational complexity prevented that initiative from succeeding.

    A decision was made to outsource and consolidate the service desks of each of the campuses to provide more uniform service to end users.

    Solution

    Lone Star College selected a vendor that implemented FrontRange.

    Unfortunately, the tool was not the right fit for Lone Star's service and reporting needs.

    After some discussion, the outsourcing vendor made the switch to ServiceNow.

    Some time later, a hybrid outsourced model was implemented, with Lone Star and the vendor combining to provide 24/7 support.

    Results

    The consolidated, standardized approach used by Lone Star College and its vendor has created numerous benefits:

    • Standardized reporting
    • High end-user satisfaction
    • All SLAs are being met
    • Improved ticket resolution times
    • Automated change management.

    Lone Star outsourced in order to consolidate its service desks quickly, but the tools didn't quite match.

    It's important to choose a tool that works well with your vendor's, otherwise the same standardization issues can persist.

    Design your RFP to help you understand what the vendor's standard offerings are and what it is capable of delivering

    Your RFP should be worded in a way that helps you understand what your vendor's standard offerings are because that's what they're most capable of delivering. Rather than laying out all your requirements in a high level of detail, carefully craft your questions in a probing way. Then, understand what your current baseline is, what your target requirements are, and assess the gap.

    Design the RFP so that responses can easily be compared against one another.

    It is common to receive responses that are very different – RFPs don't provide a response framework. Comparing vastly different responses can be like comparing apples to oranges. Not only are they immensely time consuming to score, their scores also don't end up accurately reflecting the provider's capabilities or suitability as a vendor.

    If your RFP is causing a ten minute printer backlog, you're doing something wrong.

    Your RFP should not be hundreds of pages long. If it is, there is too much detail.

    Providing too much detail can box your responses in and be overly limiting on your responses. It can deter potentially suitable provider candidates from sending a proposal.

    Request
    For
    Proposal

    "From bitter experience, if you're too descriptive, you box yourself in. If you're not descriptive enough, you'll be inundated with questions or end up with too few bidders. We needed to find the best way to get the message across without putting too much detail around it."
    – Procurement Manager, Utilities

    Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template contains nine sections

    1. Statement of work
      • Purpose, coverage, and participation ààInsert the purpose and goals of outsourcing your service desk, using steps 1.1 findings in this blueprint as reference.
    2. General information
      • Information about the document, enterprise, and schedule of events ààInsert the timeline you developed for the RFP issue and award process in this section.
    3. Proposal preparation instructions
      • The vendor's understanding of the RFP, good faith statement, points of contact, proposal submission, method of award, selection and notification.
    4. Service overview
      • Information about organizational perspective, service desk responsibility matrix, vendor requirements, and service level agreements (SLAs).
    5. Scope of work, specifications and requirements
      • Technical and functional requirements à Insert the requirements gathered in Phase 1 in this section of the RFP. Remember to include both current and future requirements.
    6. Exit conditions
      • Overview of exit strategy and transition process.
    7. Vendor qualifications and references
    8. Account management and estimated pricing
    9. Vendor certification
    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    The main point of focus in this document is defining your requirements (discussed in Phase 1) and developing proposal preparation instructions.

    The rest of the RFP consists mostly of standard legal language. Review the rest of the RFP template and adapt the language to suit your organization's standards. Check with your legal departments to make sure the RFP adheres to company policies.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    1-2 hours

    1. Review the outsourcing goals you identified in Phase 1 (activity 1.1.3).
    2. For each goal, divide the defined requirements from your requirements database library (activity 1.2.1) into three areas:
      1. People Requirements
      2. Process Requirements
      3. Technical Requirements
    3. Group your requirements based on characteristics (e.g. recovery capabilities, engagement methodology, personnel, etc.).
    4. Validate these requirements with the relevant stakeholders.
    5. Document your results in section 4 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Refined requirements to input into the RFP

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Assess knowledge management and technology requirements to enable the outsourcer with higher quality work

    Retain ownership of the knowledgebase to foster long-term growth of organizational intelligence

    With end users becoming more and more tech savvy, organizational intelligence is becoming an increasingly important aspect of IT support. Modern employees are able and willing to troubleshoot on their own before calling into the service desk. The knowledgebase and FAQs largely facilitate self-serve trouble shooting, both of which are not core concerns for the outsource vendor.

    Why would the vendor help you empower end users and decrease ticket volume when it will lead to less revenue in the future? Ticket avoidance is not simply about saving money by removing support. It's about the end-user community developing organizational intelligence so that it doesn't need as much technical support.

    Organizational intelligence occurs when shared knowledge and insight is used to make faster, better decisions.

    When you outsource, the flow of technical insight to your end-user community slows down or stops altogether unless you proactively drive it. Retain ownership of the knowledgebase and ensure that the content is:

    1. Validated to ensure it accurately describes the best solution.
    2. Actionable to ensure it prescribes repeatable, verifiable steps.
    3. Contextual to ensure the reader knows when NOT to apply the knowledge.
    4. Maintained to ensure the solution remains current.
    5. Applied, since knowledge is a cost with no benefit unless you apply it and turn it into organizational intelligence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include knowledge management process in your ticket handling workflows to make sure knowledge is transferred to the MSP and end users. For more information on knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's Standardize the Service Desk and Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy blueprints.

    Assess self-service requirements in your outsourcing plan

    When outsourcing the service desk, determine who will take ownership of the self-service portal.

    Nowadays, outsourcers provide innovative services such as self-serve options. However, bear in mind that the quality of such services is a differentiating factor. A well-maintained portal makes it easy to:

    • Report incidents efficiently via use-case-based forms
    • Place requests via a business-oriented service catalog
    • Automate request processes
    • Give visibility on ticket status
    • Access knowledgebase articles
    • Provide status on critical systems
    • Look for services by both clicking service lists and searching them
    • Provide 24/7 service via interactive communication with live agent and AI-powered machine
    • Streamline business process in multiple departments rather than only IT

    In the outsourcing process, determine your expectations from your vendor on self-serve options and discuss how they will fulfill these requirements. Similar to other processes, work internally to define a list of services your organization is providing that you can pass over to the outsourcer to convert to a service catalog.

    Use Info-Tech's Sample Enterprise Services document to start determining your business's services.

    Assess admin rights in your outsourcing plan to give access to the outsourcer while you keep ownership

    Provide accessibility to account management to improve self-service, which enables:

    • Group owners to be named who can add or remove people from their operating units
    • Users to update attributes such as photos, address, phone number
    • Synchronization with HRIS (Human Resource Information Systems) to enable two-way communication on attribute updates
    • Password reset self-service

    Ensure the vendor has access rights to execute regular clean up to help:

    • Find stale and inactive user and computer accounts (inactive, expired, stale, never logged in)
    • Bulk move and disable capabilities
    • Find empty groups and remove
    • Find and assess NTFS permissions
    • Automated tasks to search and remediate

    Give admin rights to outsourcer to enable reporting and auditing capabilities, such as:

    • Change tracking and notifications
    • Password reset attempts, account unlocks, permission and account changes
    • Anomaly detection and remediation
    • Privilege abuse, such as password sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Provide your MSP with access rights to enable the service desk to have account management without giving too much authentication. This way you'll enable moving tickets to the outsourcer while you keep ownership and supervision.

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    1-2 hours

    This activity is an expansion to the outcomes of activity 1.2.1, where you determined the outsourcing requirements and the party to deliver each requirement.

    1. Add your identified tasks from the requirements database library to the service desk responsibility matrix (section 4.2 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template).
    2. Break each task down into more details. For instance, incident management may include tier 1, tier 2/3, KB creation and update, reporting, and auditing.
    3. Refer to section 4.1 of your Project Charter to review the responsible party for each use case.
    4. Considering the use cases, assess whether your organization, the MSP, or both parties will be responsible for the task.
    5. Document the results in section 4.2 of the RFP.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Responsible party to deliver each task

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Step 3.2

    Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    Activities

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    3.2.4 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews and evaluate responses for each vendor

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk outsourcing RFP
    • List of service desk outsourcing requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk SLA
    • RFP scores

    Don't rush to judgment; apply due diligence when selecting your vendor

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    1. Call around to get referrals for each vendor
    2. Create a shortlist
    3. Review SLAs and contract terms
    4. Select your vendor

    Recognize warning signs in the MSP's proposal to ensure a successful negotiation

    Vendors often include certain conditions in their proposals that masquerade as appealing but may spell disaster. Watch for these red flags:

    1. Discounted Price
      • Vendors know the market value of their competitors' services. Price is not what sets them apart; it's the type of services offered as well as the culture present.
      • A noticeably low price is often indicative of a desperate organization that is not focused on quality managed services.
    2. No Pushback
      • Vendors should work to customize their proposal to suit both their capabilities and your needs. No pushback means they are not invested in your project as deeply as they should be.
      • You should be prepared for and welcome negotiations; they're a sign that both sides are reaching a mutually beneficial agreement.
    3. Continual SLA Improvement
      • Continual improvement is a good quality that your vendor should have, but it needs to have some strategic direction.
      • Throwing continual SLA improvement into the deal may seem great, but make sure that you'll benefit from the value-added service. Otherwise, you'll be paying for services that you don't actually need.

    Clearly define core vendor qualities before looking at any options

    Vendor sales and marketing people know just what to say to sway you: don't talk to them until you know what you're looking for.

    Geography

    Do you prefer global or local data centers? Do you need multiple locations for redundancy in case of disaster? Will language barriers be a concern?

    Contract Length

    Ensure you can terminate a poor arrangement by having shorter terms with optional renewals. It's better to renew and renegotiate if one side is losing in the deal in order to keep things fair. Don't assume that proposed long-term cost savings will provide a satisfactory service.

    Target Market

    Vendors are aiming at different business segments, from startups to large enterprises. Some will accept existing virtual machines, and others enforce compliance to appeal to government and health agencies.

    SLA

    A robust SLA strengthens a vendor's reliability and accountability. Agencies with special needs should have room in negotiations for customization. Providers should also account for regular SLA reviews and updates. Vendors should be tracking call volume and making projections that should translate directly to SLAs.

    Support

    Even if you don't need a vendor with 24/7 availability, vendors who cannot support this timing should be eliminated. You may want to upgrade later and will want to avoid the hassle of switching.

    Maturity

    Vendors must have the willingness and ability to improve processes and efficiencies over time. Maintaining the status-quo isn't acceptable in the constantly evolving IT world.

    Cost

    Consider which model makes the most sense: will you go with per call or per user pricing? Which model will generate vendor motivation to continually improve and meet your long-term goals? Watch out for variable pricing models.

    Define your SLA requirements so your MSP can create a solution that fits

    SLAs ensure accountability from the service provider and determine service price

    SLAs define the performance of the service desk and clarify what the provider and customer can expect in their outsourcing relationship.

    • Service categories
    • The acceptable range of end-user satisfaction
    • The scope of what functions of the service desk are being measured (availability, time to resolve, time to respond, etc.)
    • Credits and penalties for achieving or missing targets
    • Frequency of measurement/reporting
    • Provisions and penalties for ending the contractual relationship early
    • Management and communication structure
    • Escalation protocol for incidents relating to tiers 2 or 3

    Each MSP's RFP response will help you understand their basic SLA terms and enhanced service offerings. You need to understand the MSP's basic SLA terms to make sure they are adequate enough for your requirements. A well-negotiated SLA will balance the requirements of the customer and limit the liability of the provider in a win/win scenario.

    For more information on defining service level requirements, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements.

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    2-3 hours

    • As a team, review your current service desk SLA for the following items:
      • Response time
      • Resolution time
      • Escalation time
      • End-user satisfaction
      • Service availability
    • Use the sample table as a starting point to determine your current incident management SLA:
    • Determine your SLA expectations from the outsourcer.
    • Document your SLA expectations in section 4.4 of the RFP template.

    Participants: IT Managers, Service Desk Manager, Project Team

    Response
    PriorityResponse SLOResolution SLOEscalation Time
    T1
    Severity 1CriticalWithin 10 minutes4 hours to resolveImmediate
    Severity 2HighWithin 1 business hour8 business hours to resolve20 minutes
    Severity 3MediumWithin 4 business hours24 business hours to resolveAfter 20 minutes without progress
    Severity 4LowSame day (8 hours)72 business hours to resolve After 1 hour without progress
    SLO ResponseTime it takes for service desk to respond to service request or incident. Target response is 80% of SLO
    SLO ResolutionTime it takes to resolve incident and return business services to normal. Target resolution is 80% of SLO

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Get a detailed plan from your selected vendor before signing a contract

    Build a standard process to evaluate candidate vendors

    Use section 5 of Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template for commonly used questions and requirements for outsourcing the service desk. Ask the right questions to secure an agreement that meets your needs. If you are already in a contract with an MSP, tale the opportunity of contract renewal to improve the contract and service.

    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Add your finalized assessment questions into Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool to aggregate responses in one repository for comparison. Since the vendors are asked to respond in a standard format, it is easier to bring together all the responses to create a complete view of your options.

    This is an image of the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    1-2 hours

    Include the right requirements for your organization and analyze candidate vendors on their capability to satisfy them.

    1. Use section 5 of the RFP template to convert your determined requirements into questions to address in vendor briefings.
    2. Review the questions in the context of near- and long-term service desk outsourcing needs. In the template, we have separated requirements into 7 categories:
      • Vendor Requirements (VR)
      • Vendor Qualifications/Engagement/Administration Capabilities (VQ)
      • Service Operations (SO)
      • Service Support (SS)
      • Service Level Agreement (SLA)
      • Transition Processes (TP)
      • Account Management (AM)
    3. Define the priority for each question:
      • Required
      • Desired
      • Optional
    4. Leave the compliance and comments to when you brief with vendors.

    Input

    • Technical and functional requirements

    Output

    • Priority level for each requirement
    • Completed list of requirement questions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    2-3 hours

    1. Enter the requirements questions into the RFP Scoring Tool and use it during vendor briefings.
    2. Copy the Required and Desired priority requirements from the previous activity into the RFP Questions column.
    3. Evaluate each RFP response against the RFP criteria based on the scoring scale.
    4. The Results section in the tool shows the vendor ranking based on their overall scores.
    5. Compare potential outsourcing partners considering scores on individual requirements categories and based on overall scores.

    Input

    • Completed list of requirement questions
    • Priority level for each requirement

    Output

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Director/CIO

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.3 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews, and evaluate responses for each vendor

    1. Outline a list of questions to conduct reference interviews with past/present clients of your candidate vendors.
    2. Use the reference interview template as a starting point. As a group review the questions and edit them to a list that will fulfill your requirements.
    3. Ask your candidate vendors to provide you with a list of three to five clients that have/had used their services. Make sure that vendors enforce the interview will be kept anonymous and names and results won't be disclosed.
    4. Ask vendors to book a 20-30 minute call with you and their client.
    5. Document your interview comments in your updated reference interview template.
    6. Update the RFP scoring tool accordingly.

    Input

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Output

    • Updated list of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Compare pricing models of outsourcing services

    It's a common sales tactic to use a low price as an easy solution. Carefully evaluate the vendors on your short-list and ensure that SLAs, culture, and price all match to your organization.

    Research different pricing models and accurately assess which model fits your organization. Consider the following pricing models:

    Pay per technician

    In this model, a flat rate is allocated to agents tackling your service desk tickets. This is a good option for building long-term relationship with outsourcer's agents and efficient knowledge transfer to the external team; however, it's not ideal for small organizations that deal with few tickets. This is potentially an expensive model for small teams.

    Pay per ticket

    This model considers the number of tickets handled by the outsourcer. This model is ideal if you only want to pay for your requirement. Although the internal team needs to have a close monitoring strategy to make sure the outsourcer's efficiency in ticket resolution.

    Pay per call

    This is based on outbound and inbound calls. This model is proper for call centers and can be less expensive than the other models; however, tracking is not easy, as you should ensure service desk calls result in efficient resolution rather than unnecessary follow-up.

    Pay per time (minutes or hours)

    The time spent on tickets is considered in this model. With this model, you pay for the work done by agents, so that it may be a good and relatively cheap option. As quicker resolution SLA is usually set by the organization, customer satisfaction may drop, as agents will be driven to faster resolution, not necessarily quality of work.

    Pay per user

    This model is based on number of all users, or number of users for particular applications. In this model, correlation between number of users and number of tickets should be taken into account. This is an ideal model if you want to deal with impact of staffing changes on service price. Although you should first track metrics such as mean time to resolve and average number of tickets so you can prevent unnecessary payment based on number of users when most users are not submitting tickets.

    Step 3.3

    Manage the outsource relationship

    Activities

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk SLA
    • List of impacted stakeholder groups
    • List of impacts and benefits of the outsourced service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Vendor management strategy

    Ensure formality of your vendor management practice

    A service desk outsourcing project is an ongoing initiative. Build a relationship plan to make sure the outsourcer complies with the agreement.

    This is an iamge of the cycle of relationship management and pre-contract management.

    Monitor Vendor Performance

    Key Activity:

    Measure performance levels with an agreed upon standard scorecard.

    Manage Vendor Risk

    Key Activity:

    Periodical assessment of the vendors to ensure they are meeting compliance standards.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Manage the contracts and renewal dates, the level of demand for the services/products provided, and the costs accrued.

    COMPLETE Identify and Evaluate Vendors

    Key Activity:
    Develop a plan with procurement and key internal stakeholders to define clear, consistent, and stable requirements.

    COMPLETE Select a Vendor

    Key Activity:
    Develop a consistent and effective process for selecting the most appropriate vendor.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Contracts are consistently negotiated to ensure the vendor and the client have a documented and consistent understanding of mutual expectations.

    Expect the vendor to manage processes according to your standards

    You need this level of visibility into the service desk process, whether in-house or outsourced

    Each of these steps requires documentation – either through standard operating procedures, SLAs, logs, or workflow diagrams.

    • Define key operating procedures and workflows
    • Record, classify, and prioritize tickets
    • Verify, approve, and fulfill tickets
    • Investigate, diagnose, and allocate tickets
    • Resolve, recover, and close tickets
    • Track and report

    "Make sure what they've presented to you is exactly what's happening."
    – Service Desk Manager, Financial Services

    Manage the vendor relationship through regular communication

    Regular contact with your MSP provides opportunities to address issues that emerge

    Designate a relationship manager to act as a liaison at the business to be a conduit between the business and the MSP.

    • The relationship manager will take feedback from the MSP and relate it back to you to bridge the technical and business gap between the two.

    Who should be involved

    • Routine review meetings should involve the MSP and your relationship manager.
    • Technical knowledge may be needed to address specific issues, but business knowledge and relationship management skills are absolutely required.
    • Other stakeholders and people who are deeply invested in the vendor relationship should be invited or at least asked to contribute questions and concerns.

    What is involved

    • Full review of the service desk statistics, escalations, staffing changes, process changes, and drivers of extra billing or cost.
    • Updates to key documentation for the issues listed above and changes to the knowledgebase.
    • Significant drivers of customer satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
    • Changes that have/are being proposed that can impact any of the above.

    Communicate changes to end users to avoid push back and get buy-in

    Top-down processes for outsourcing will leave end users in the dark

    • Your service desk staff has been involved in the outsourcing process the entire time, but end users are affected all the same.
    • The service desk is the face of IT. A radical shift in service processes and points of contact can be detrimental to not only the service desk, but all of IT.
    • Communicating the changes early to end users will both help them cope with the change and help the MSP achieve better results.
      • An internal communication plan should be rolled out in order to inform and educate end users about the changes associated with outsourcing the service desk.
    • Your relationship manager should be tasked with communicating the changes to end users. The focus should be on addressing questions or concerns about the transition while highlighting the value gained through outsourcing to an MSP.
    • Service quality is a two-way street; the end user needs to be informed of proper protocols and points of contact so that the service desk technicians can fulfill their duties to the best of their ability.

    "When my company decided to outsource, I performed the same role but for a different company. There was a huge disruption to the business flow and a lack of communication to manage the change. The transition took weeks before any end users figured out what the new processes were for submitting a ticket and who to ask for help, and from a personal side, it became difficult to maintain relationships with colleagues."
    – IT Specialist for a financial institution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Educate the enterprise on expectations and processes that are handled by the MSP. Identify stakeholder groups affected by the outsourced processes then build a communication plan on what's been changed, what the benefits are, and how they will be impacted. Determine a timeline for communicating these initiatives and how these announcements will be made. Use InfoTech's Sample Communication Plan as a starting point.

    Build a continual improvement plan to make sure your MSP is efficiently delivering services according to expectations

    Ensure that your quality assurance program is repeatable and applicable to the outsourced services

    1. Design a QA scorecard that can help you assess steps the outsourcer agents should follow. Keep the questionnaire high level but specific to your environment. The scorecard should include questions that follow the steps to take considering your intake channels. For instance, if end users can reach the service desk via phone, chat, and email, build your QA around assessing customer service for call, chat, and ticket quality.
    2. Build a training program for agents: Develop an internal monitoring plan to relay detailed feedback to your MSP. Assess performance and utilize KBs as training materials for coaching agents on challenging transactions.
    3. Everything that goes to your service desk has to be documented; there will be no organic transfer of knowledge and experience.
    4. You need to let your MSP know how their efforts are impacting the performance of your organization. Measure your internal performance against the external performance of your service desk.
    5. Constant internal check-ins ensure that your MSP is meeting the SLAs outlined in the RFP.
    6. Routine reporting of metrics and ticket trends allow you to enact problem management. Otherwise, you risk your MSP operating your service desk with no internal feedback from its owner.
    7. Use metrics to determine the service desk functionality.

    Consider the success story of your outsourced service desk

    Build a feedback program for your outsourced services. Utilize transactional surveys to discover and tell outsourcing success to the impacted stakeholders.

    Ensure you apply steps for providing feedback to make sure processes are handled as expected. Service desk is the face of IT. Customer satisfaction on ticket transactions reflects satisfaction with IT and the organization.

    Build customer satisfaction surveys and conduct them for every transaction to get a better sense of outsourced service desk functionality. Collaborate with the vendor to make sure you build a proper strategy.

    • Build a right list of questions. Multiple and lengthy questions may lead to survey taking fatigue. Make sure you ask the right questions and give an option to the customer to comment any additional notes.
    • Give the option to users to rate the transaction. Make the whole process very seamless and doable in a few seconds.
    • Ensure to follow-up on negative feedback. This will help you find gaps in services and provide training to improve customer service.

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    1 hour

    1. In this project, you determined the KPIs based on your service desk objectives (activity 2.2.2).
    2. Refer to your list of metrics in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter.
    3. Think about what story you want to tell and determine what factors will help move the narrative.
    4. Discuss how often you would like to track these metrics. Determine the audience for each metric.
    5. Provide the list to the MSP to create reports with auto-distribution.

    Input

    • Determined CSFs and KPIs

    Output

    • List of metrics to track, including frequency to report and audience to report to

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Reward the MSP for performance instead of "punishing" them for service failure

    Turn your vendor into a true partner by including an "earn back" condition in the contract

    MSPs often offer clients credit requests (service credits) for their service failures, which are applied to the previous month's monthly recurring charge. They are applied to the last month's MRC (monthly reoccurring charges) at the end of term and then the vendor pays out the residual.

    However, while common, service credits are not always perceived to be a strong incentive for the provider to continually focus on improvement of mean-time-to-respond/mean-time-to-resolve.

    • Engage the vendor as a true partner within a relationship only based upon Service Credits.
    • Suggest the vendor include a minor change to the non-performance processes within the final agreement: the vendor implements an "earn back" condition in the agreement.
    • Where a bank of service credits exists because of non-performance, if the provider exceeds the SLA performance metrics for a number of consecutive months (two is common), then an amount of any prior credits received by client is returned to the provider as an earn back for improved performance.
    • This can be a useful mechanism to drive improved performance.

    Measure the outsourced service desk ROI constantly to drive efficient decisions for continual improvement or an exit plan

    Efficient outsourced service desk causes positive impacts on business satisfaction. To address the true value of the services outsourced, you should evaluate the return on investment (ROI) in these areas: Emotional ROI, Time ROI, Financial ROI

    Emotional ROI

    Service desk's main purpose should be to provide topnotch services to end users. Build a customer experience program and leverage transactional surveys and relationship surveys to constantly analyze customer feedback on service quality.

    Ask yourself:

    • How have the outsourced services improved customer satisfaction?
    • How has the service desk impacted the business brand?
    • Have these services improved agents' job satisfaction?
    • What is the NPS score of the service desk?
    • What should we do to reduce the detractor rate and improve satisfaction leveraging the outsourced service desk?

    Time ROI

    Besides customer satisfaction, SLA commitment is a big factor to consider when conducting ROI analysis.

    Ask these questions:

    • Have we had improvement in FCR?
    • What are the mean time to resolve incidents and mean time to fulfill requests?
    • Is the cost incurred to outsourced services worth improvement in such metrics?

    Financial ROI

    As already mentioned in Phase 1, the main motivation for outsourcing the service desk should not be around cost reduction, but to improve performance. Regardless, it's still important to understand the financial implications of your decision.

    To evaluate the financial impact of your outsourced service desk, ask these questions:

    • How much have the outsourced services impacted our business financially?
    • How much are we paying compared to when it was done internally?
    • Considering the emotional, time, and effort factors, is it worth bringing the services in house or changing the vendor?

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3-4 hours

    1. Refer to the results of activity 2.2.2. for the list of metrics and the metrics dashboard over the past quarter.
    2. Consider emotional and time ROI, assess end-user satisfaction and SLA, and run a report comparison with the baseline that you built prior to outsourcing the service desk.
    3. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you stay with the vendor.
    4. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you switch the vendor.
    5. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you repatriate the service desk.
    6. Estimate the non-recurring costs associated with the move, such as the penalty for early contract termination, data center moving costs, and cost of potential business downtime during the move. Sum them to determine the investment.
    7. Calculate the return on investment. Discuss and decide whether the organization should consider rehabilitating the vendor agreement or ending the partnership.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    For more information on conducting this activity, refer to InfoTech's blueprint Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    Define exit conditions to complete your contract with your MSP

    The end of outsourcing is difficult. Your organization needs to maintain continuity of service during the transition. Your MSP needs to ensure that its resources can be effectively transitioned to the next deployment with minimal downtime. It is crucial to define your exit conditions so that both sides can prepare accordingly.

    • Your exit conditions must be clearly laid out in the contract. Create a list of service desk functions and metrics that are important to your organization's success. If your MSP is not meeting those needs or performance levels, you should terminate your services.
    • Most organizations accomplish this through a clear definition of hard and measurable KPIs and metrics that must be achieved and what will happen in the case these metrics are not being regularly met. If your vendor doesn't meet these requirements as defined in your contract, you then have a valid reason and the ability to leave the agreement.

    Examples of exit conditions:

    • Your MSP did not meet their SLAs on priority 1 or 2 tickets two times within a month.
    • If they didn't meet the SLA twice in that 30 days, you could terminate the contract penalty-free.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If things start going south with your MSP, negotiate a "get well plan." Outline your problems to the MSP and have them come back to you with a list of how they're going to fix these problems to get well before you move forward with the contract.

    Try to rehabilitate before you repatriate

    Switching service providers or ending the contract can be expensive and may not solve your problems. Try to rehabilitate your vendor relationship before immediately ending it.

    You may consider terminating your outsourcing agreement if you are dissatisfied with the current agreement or there has been a change in circumstances (either the vendor has changed, or your organization has changed).

    Before doing so, consider the challenges:

    1. It can be very expensive to switch providers or end a contract.
    2. Switching vendors can be a large project involving transfer of knowledge, documentation, and data.
    3. It can be difficult to maintain service desk availability, functionality, and reliability during the transition.

    Diagnose the cause of the problem before assuming it's the MSP's fault. The issue may lie with poorly defined requirements and processes, lack of communication, poor vendor management, or inappropriate SLAs. Re-assess your strategy and re-negotiate your contract if necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There are many reasons why outsourcing relationships fail, but it's not always the vendor's fault.

    Clients often think their MSP isn't doing a great job, but a lot of the time the reason comes back to the client. They may not have provided sufficient documentation on processes, were not communicating well, didn't have a regular point of contact, and weren't doing regular service reviews. Before exiting the relationship, evaluate why it's not working and try to fix things first.

    Don't stop with an exit strategy, you also need to develop a transition plan

    Plan out your transition timeline, taking into account current contract terms and key steps required. Be prepared to handle tickets immediately upon giving notice.

    • Review your outsourcing contract with legal counsel to identify areas of concern for lock-in or breech.
    • Complete a cost/benefit analysis.
    • Bring intellectual property (including ticket data, knowledge base articles, and reports) back in-house (if you'd like to repatriate the service desk) or transfer to the next service desk vendor (if you're outsourcing to another MSP).
    • Review and update service desk standard processes (escalation, service levels, ticket templates, etc.).
    • Procure service desk software, licenses, and necessary hardware as needed.
    • Train the staff (internal for repatriating the service desk, or external for the prospective MSP).
    • Communicate the transition plan and be prepared to start responding to tickets immediately.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Develop a transition plan about six months before the contract notice date. Be proactive by constantly tracking the MSP, running ROI analyses and training staff before moving the services to the internal team or the next MSP. This will help you manage the transition smoothly and handle intake channels so that upon potential exit, users won't be disrupted.

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    3-4 hours

    Create a plan to be prepared in case you need to end your contract with the MSP early.

    Your exit strategy should encompass both the conditions under which you would need to end your contract with the MSP and the next steps you will take to transition your services.

    1. Define the exit conditions you plan to negotiate into your contract with the MSP:
      • Identify the performance levels you will require your MSP to meet.
      • Identify the actions you expect the MSP to take if they fail to meet these performance levels.
      • Identify the conditions under which you would leave the contract early.
    2. Develop a strategy for transitioning services in the event you need to leave your contract with the MSP:
      • Will you hand the responsibility to a new MSP or repatriate the service desk back in-house?
      • How will you maintain services through the transition?
    3. Document your exit strategy in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now re-envisioned your service desk by building a solid strategy for outsourcing it to a vendor. You first analyzed your challenges with the current service desk and evaluated the benefits of outsourcing services. Then you went through requirements assessment to find out which processes should be outsourced. Thereafter, you developed an RFP to communicate your proposal and evaluate the best candidates.

    You have also developed a continual improvement plan to ensure the outsourcer provides services according to your expectations. Through this plan, you're making sure to build a good relationship through incentivizing the vendor for accomplishments rather than punishing for service failures. However, you've also contemplated an exit plan in the RFP for potential consistent service failures.

    Ideally, this blueprint has helped you go beyond requirements identification and served as a means to change your mindset and strategy for outsourcing the service desk efficiently to gain long-term benefits.

    if you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    This is a picture of Info-Tech analyst Mahmoud Ramin

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot of activity 1.2.1 found in this blueprint

    Identify Processes to Outsource
    Identify service desk tasks that will provide the most value upon outsourcing.

    This is a screenshot of activity 3.2.2 found in this blueprint

    Score Candidate Vendors
    Evaluate vendors on their capabilities for satisfying your service desk requirements.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    • Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    • There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    • There must be 50 ways to leave your vendor.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yev Khovrenkov; Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Kamil Salagan; I&O Manager, Bartek Ingredients

    Satish Mekerira; VP of IT, Coherus BioSciences

    Kris Krishan; Head of IT and Business Systems, Waymo

    Kris Arthur; Infra & Security Director, SEKO Logistics

    Valance Howden; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sandi Conrad; Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham Price; Senior Director of Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Barry Cousins; Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Tauschek; VP of I&O Research, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin Stahl; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Yong; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    A special thank-you to five anonymous contributors

    Bibliography

    Allnutt, Charles. "The Ultimate List of Outsourcing Statistics." MicroSourcing, 2022. Accessed July 2022.
    "Considerations for outsourcing the service desk. A guide to improving your service desk and service delivery performance through outsourcing." Giva. Accessed May 2022.
    Hurley, Allison. "Service Desk Outsourcing | Statistics, Challenges, & Benefits." Forward BPO Inc., 2019. Accessed June 2022.
    Mtsweni, Patricia, et al. "The impact of outsourcing information technology services on business operations." South African Journal of Information Management, 2021, Accessed May 2022.
    "Offshore, Onshore or Hybrid–Choosing the Best IT Outsourcing Model." Calance, 2021. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) Foundation Body of Knowledge." Scopism, 2020. Accessed May 2022.
    Shultz, Aaron. "IT Help Desk Outsourcing Pricing Models Comparison." Global Help Desk Services. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Shultz, Aaron. "4 Steps to Accurately Measure the ROI of Outsourced Help Desk Services" Global Help Desk Services, Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Sunberg, John. "Great Expectations: What to Look for from Outsourced Service Providers Today." HDI. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Walters, Grover. "Pivotal Decisions in outsourcing." Muma Case Review, 2019. Accessed May 2022.
    Wetherell, Steve. "Outsourced IT Support Services: 10 Steps to Better QA" Global Held Desk Services. Accessed May 2022. Web.

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}214|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,039 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Your vendor contracts are unorganized and held in various cabinets and network shares. There is no consolidated list or view of all the agreements, and some are misplaced or lost as coworkers leave.
    • The contract process takes a long time to complete. Coworkers are unsure who should be reviewing and approving them.
    • You are concerned that you are not getting favorable terms with your vendors and not complying with your agreement commitments.
    • You are unsure what risks your organization could be exposed to in your IT vendor contacts. These could be financial, legal, or security risks and/or compliance requirements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. There are two phases to CLM. All stages within those phases are important, but choose to improve the phase that can be most beneficial to your organization in the short term. However, be sure to include reviewing risk and monitoring compliance.
    • Educate yourself. Understand the stages of CLM and how each step can rely on the previous one, like a stepping-stone model to success.
    • Consider the overall picture. Contract lifecycle management is the sum of many processes designed to manage contracts end to end while reducing corporate risk, improving financial savings, and managing agreement obligations. It can take time to get CLM organized and working efficiently, but then it will show its ROI and continuously improve.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    • Gain the knowledge required to implement a CLM that will be beneficial to all business units.
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings.
    • Effectively review, store, manage, comply with, and renew agreements with a collaborative process

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a contract management system will save money and time and mitigate contract risk, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Master the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand how the basic operational framework of CLM will ensure cost savings, improved collaboration, and constant CLM improvement.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of CLM
    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    • Contract Manager

    2. Understand the ten stages of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand the two phases of CLM and the ten stages that make up the entire process.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 2: Understand the Ten Stages of CLM
    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool
    • CLM RASCI Diagram
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review Your CLM Process and Learn the Basics

    The Purpose

    Identify current CLM processes.

    Learn the CLM operational framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented overview of current processes and stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of CLM.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    Outputs

    Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    2 Learn More and Plan

    The Purpose

    Dive into the two phases of CLM and the ten stages of a robust system.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A deep understanding of the required components/stages of a CLM system.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity state.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    Outputs

    CLM Maturity Assessment

    CLM RASCI Diagram

    Further reading

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Mitigate risk and drive value through robust best practices for contract lifecycle management.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • The CIO who depends on numerous key vendors for services
    • The CIO or Project Manager who wants to maximize the value delivered by vendors
    • The Director or Manager of an existing IT procurement or vendor management team
    • The Contracts Manager or Legal Counsel whose IT department holds responsibility for contracts, negotiation, and administration

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Implement and streamline the contract management process, policies, and procedures
    • Baseline and benchmark existing contract processes
    • Understand the importance and value of contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Minimize risk, save time, and maximize savings with vendor contracts

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • IT Service Managers
    • IT Procurement
    • Contract teams
    • Finance and Legal departments
    • Senior IT leadership

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Understand the required components of a CLM
    • Establish the current CLM maturity level
    • Implement a new CLM process
    • Improve on an existing or disparate process

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is a vital process for small and enterprise organizations alike. Research shows that all organizations can benefit from a contract management process, whether they have as few as 25 contracts or especially if they have contracts numbering in the hundreds.

    A CLM system will:

    • Save valuable time in the entire cycle of contract/agreement processes.
    • Save the organization money, both hard and soft dollars.
    • Mitigate risk to the organization.
    • Avoid loss of revenue.

    If you’re not managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investment with your vendors and are potentially exposing your organization to contract and monetary risk."

    - Ted Walker
    Principal Research Advisor, Vendor Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Most organizations have vendor overload and even worse, no defined process to manage the associated contracts and agreements. To manage contracts, some vendor management offices (VMOs) use a shared network drive to store the contracts and a spreadsheet to catalog and manage them. Yet other less-mature VMOs may just rely on a file cabinet in Procurement and a reminder in someone’s calendar about renewals. These disparate processes likely cost your organization time spent finding, managing, and renewing contracts, not to mention potential increases in vendor costs and risk and the inability to track contract obligations.

    Complication

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is not an IT buzzword, and it’s rarely on the top-ten list of CIO concerns in most annual surveys. Until a VMO gets to a level of maturity that can fully develop a CLM and afford the time and costs of doing so, there can be several challenges to developing even the basic processes required to store, manage, and renew IT vendor contracts. As is always an issue in IT, budget is one of the biggest obstacles in implementing a standard CLM process. Until senior leadership realizes that a CLM process can save time, money, and risk, getting mindshare and funding commitment will remain a challenge.

    Resolution

    • Understand the immediate benefits of a CLM process – even a basic CLM implementation can provide significant cost savings to the organization; reduce time spent on creating, negotiating, and renewing contracts; and help identify and mitigate risks within your vendor contracts.
    • Budgets don’t always need to be a barrier to a standard CLM process. However, a robust CLM system can provide significant savings to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • If you aren’t managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investments.
    • Even a basic CLM process with efficient procedures will provide savings and benefits.
    • Not having a CLM process may be costing your organization money, time, and exposure to unmitigated risk.

    What you can gain from this blueprint

    Why Create a CLM

    • Improved contract organization
    • Centralized and manageable storage/archives
    • Improved vendor compliance
    • Risk mitigation
    • Reduced potential loss of revenue

    Knowledge Gained

    • Understanding of the value and importance of a CLM
    • How CLM can impact many departments within the organization
    • Who should be involved in the CLM steps and processes
    • Why a CLM is important to your organization
    • How to save time and money by maximizing IT vendor contracts
    • How basic CLM policies and procedures can be implemented without costly software expenditure

    The Outcome

    • A foundation for a CLM with best-practice processes
    • Reduced exposure to potential risks within vendor contracts
    • Maximized savings with primary vendors
    • Vendor compliance and corporate governance
    • Collaboration, transparency, and integration with business units

    Contract management: A case study

    CASE STUDY
    Industry Finance and Banking
    Source Apttus

    FIS Global

    The Challenge

    FIS’ business groups were isolated across the organization and used different agreements, making contract creation a long, difficult, and manual process.

    • Customers frustrated by slow and complicated contracting process
    • Manual contract creation and approval processes
    • Sensitive contract data that lacked secure storage
    • Multiple agreements managed across divisions
    • Lack of central repository for past contracts
    • Inconsistent and inaccessible

    The Solution: Automating and Streamlining the Contract Management Process

    A robust CLM system solved FIS’ various contract management needs while also providing a solution that could expand into full quote-to cash in the future.

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Intelligent workflow approvals (IWA)
    • X-Author for Excel

    Customer Results

    • 75% cycle time reduction
    • $1M saved in admin costs per year
    • 49% increase in sales proposal volume
    • Automation on one standard platform and solution
    • 55% stronger compliance management
    • Easy maintenance for various templates
    • Ability to quickly absorb new contracts and processes via FIS’s ongoing acquisitions

    Track the impact of CLM with these metrics

    Dollars Saved

    Upfront dollars saved

    • Potential dollars saved from avoiding unfavorable terms and conditions
    • Incentives that encourage the vendor to act in the customer’s best interest
    • Secured commitments to provide specified products and services at firm prices
    • Cost savings related to audits, penalties, and back support
    • Savings from discounts found

    Time Saved

    Time saved, which can be done in several areas

    • Defined and automated approval flow process
    • Preapproved contract templates with corporate terms
    • Reduced negotiation times
    • Locate contracts in minutes

    Pitfalls Avoided

    Number of pitfalls found and avoided, such as

    • Auto-renewal
    • Inconsistencies between sections and documents
    • Security and data not being deleted upon termination
    • Improper licensing

    The numbers are compelling

    71%

    of companies can’t locate up to 10% of their contracts.

    Source: TechnologyAdvice, 2019

    9.2%

    of companies’ annual revenue is lost because of poor contract management practices.

    Source: IACCM, 2019

    60%

    still track contracts in shared drives or email folders.

    Source: “State of Contract Management,” SpringCM, 2018

    CLM blueprint objectives

    • To provide a best-practice process for managing IT vendor contract lifecycles through a framework that organizes from the core, analyzes each step in the cycle, has collaboration and governance attached to each step, and integrates with established vendor management practices within your organization.
    • CLM doesn’t have to be an expensive managed database system in the cloud with fancy dashboards. As long as you have a defined process that has the framework steps and is followed by the organization, this will provide basic CLM and save the organization time and money over a short period of time.
    • This blueprint will not delve into the many vendors or providers of CLM solutions and their methodologies. However, we will discuss briefly how to use our framework and contract stages in evaluating a potential solution that you may be considering.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process – project overview

    1. Master the Operational Framework

    2. Understand the Ten Stages of CLM

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Understand the operational framework components.

    1.2 Review your current framework.

    1.3 Create a plan to implement or enhance existing processes.

    2.1 Understand the ten stages of CLM.

    2.2 Review and document your current processes.

    2.3 Review RASCI chart and assign internal ownership.

    2.4 Create an improvement plan.

    2.5 Track changes for measurable ROI.

    Guided Implementations
    • Review existing processes.
    • Understand what CLM is and why the framework is essential.
    • Create an implementation or improvement plan.
    • Review the ten stages of CLM.
    • Complete CLM Maturity Assessment.
    • Create a plan to target improvement.
    • Track progress to measure savings.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1: Review and Learn the Basics

    • Review and capture your current processes.
    • Learn the basic operational framework of contract management.

    Module 2 Results:

    • Understand the ten stages of effective CLM.
    • Create an improvement or implementation plan.
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of your current CLM processes and where to focus your efforts for improvement or implementation.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2
    Activities

    Task – Review and Learn the Basics

    Task – Learn More and Plan

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    2.5 Discuss ROI.

    2.6 Summarize and next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Internal interviews with business units
    2. Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    1. CLM Maturity Assessment
    2. RASCI Diagram
    3. Improvement Action Plan

    PHASE 1

    Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management
    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-4 weeks

    Step 1.1: Document your Current CLM Process

    Step 1.2: Read and Understand the Operational Framework

    Step 1.3: Review Solution Options

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand what your current process(es) is for each stage
    • Do a probative review of any current processes
    • Interview stakeholders for input

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the framework as the core of your plan
    • Review the gaps in your existing process
    • Understand how to prioritize next steps towards a CLM

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Establish ownership of the framework
    • Prioritize improvement areas or map out how your new CLM will look

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document the details of your process for each stage of CLM

    With these tools & templates:

    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Phase 1 Results:

    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.

    What Is Contract Lifecycle Management?

    • Every contract has a lifecycle, from creation to time and usage to expiration. Organizations using a legacy or manual contract management process usually ask, “What is contract lifecycle management and how will it benefit my business?”
    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) creates a process that manages each contract or agreement. CLM eases the challenges of managing hundreds or even thousands of important business and IT contracts that affect the day-to-day business and could expose the organization to vendor risk.
    • Managing a few contracts is quite easy, but as the number of contracts grows, managing each step for each contract becomes increasingly difficult. Ultimately, it will get to a point where managing contracts properly becomes very difficult or seemingly impossible.

    That’s where contract lifecycle management (CLM) comes in.

    CLM can save money and improve revenue by:

    • Improving accuracy and decreasing errors through standardized contract templates and approved terms and conditions that will reduce repetitive tasks.
    • Securing contracts and processes through centralized software storage, minimizing risk of lost or misplaced contracts due to changes in physical assets like hard drives, network shares, and file cabinets.
    • Using policies and procedures that standardize, organize, track, and optimize IT contracts, eliminating time spent on creation, approvals, errors, and vendor compliance.
    • Reducing the organization’s exposure to risks and liability.
    • Having contracts renewed on time without penalties and with the most favorable terms for the business.

    The Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Four Components of the Operational Framework

    1. Organization
    2. Analysis
    3. Collaboration and Governance
    4. Integration/Vendor Management
    • By organizing at the core of the process and then analyzing each stage, you will maximize each step of the CLM process and ensure long-term contract management for the organization.
    • Collaboration and governance as overarching policies for the system will provide accountability to stakeholders and business units.
    • Integration and vendor management are encompassing features in a well-developed CLM that add visibility, additional value, and savings to the entire organization.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Putting a contract manager in place to manage the CLM project will accelerate the improvements and provide faster returns to the organizations. Reference Info-Tech’s Contract Manager Job Description template as needed.

    The operational framework is key to the success, return on investment (ROI), cost savings, and customer satisfaction of a CLM process.

    This image depicts Info-Tech's Operational Framework.  It consists of a series of five concentric circles, with each circle a different colour.  On the outer circle, is the word Integration.  The next outermost circle has the words Collaboration and Governance.  The next circle has no words, the next circle has the word Analysis, and the very centre circle has the word Organization.

    1. Organization

    • Every enterprise needs to organize its contract documents and data in a central repository so that everyone knows where to find the golden source of contractual truth.
    • This includes:
      • A repository for storing and organizing contract documents.
      • A data dictionary for describing the terms and conditions in a consistent, normalized way.
      • A database for persistent data storage.
      • An object model that tracks changes to the contract and its prevailing terms over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Paper is still alive and doing very well at slowing down the many stages of the contract process.

    2. Analysis

    Most organizations analyze their contracts in two ways:

    • First, they use reporting, search, and analytics to reveal risky and toxic terms so that appropriate operational strategies can be implemented to eliminate, mitigate, or transfer the risk.
    • Second, they use process analytics to reveal bottlenecks and points of friction as contracts are created, approved, and negotiated.

    3. Collaboration

    • Throughout the contract lifecycle, teams must collaborate on tasks both pre-execution and post-execution.
    • This includes document collaboration among several different departments across an enterprise.
    • The challenge is to make the collaboration smooth and transparent to avoid costly mistakes.
    • For some contracting tasks, especially in regulated industries, a high degree of control is required.
    • In these scenarios, the organization must implement controlled systems that restrict access to certain types of data and processes backed up with robust audit trails.

    4. Integration

    • For complete visibility into operational responsibilities, relationships, and risk, an organization must integrate its golden contract data with other systems of record.
    • An enterprise contracts platform must therefore provide a rich set of APIs and connectors so that information can be pushed into or pulled from systems for enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), supplier relationship management (SRM), document management, etc.

    This is the ultimate goal of a robust contract management system!

    Member Activity: Document Current CLM Processes

    1.1 Completion Time: 1-5 days

    Goal: Document your existing CLM processes (if any) and who owns them, who manages them, etc.

    Instructions

    Interview internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and/or Procurement to understand what’s currently in place.

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to capture and document current CLM processes.
    2. Establish what processes, procedures, policies, and workflows, if any, are in place for pre-execution (Phase 1) contract stages.
    3. Do the same for post-execution (Phase 2) stages.
    4. Use this worksheet as reference for assessments and as a benchmark for improvement review six to 12 months later.
    This image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Existing CLM Process Discovery Worksheet

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    PHASE 2

    Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-10 weeks

    Step 2.1: Assess CLM Maturity

    Step 2.2: Complete a RASCI Diagram

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the importance of assessing the maturity of your current CLM processes
    • Discuss interview process for internal stakeholders
    • Use data from the Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your maturity results
    • Identify stages that require immediate improvement
    • Prioritize improvement or implementation of process

    Then complete these activities…

    • Work through the maturity assessment process
    • Answer the questions in the assessment tool
    • Review the summary tab to learn where to focus improvement efforts

    Then complete these activities…

    • Using maturity assessment and existing process data, establish ownership for each process stage
    • Fill in the RASCI Chart based on internal review or existing processes

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM RASCI Diagram

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • A full understanding of your current CLM process and where improvement is required
    • A mapping of stakeholders for each stage of the CLM process

    The Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    There are ten key stages of contract lifecycle management.

    The steps are divided into two phases, pre-execution and post-execution.

      Pre-Execution (Phase 1)

    1. Request
    2. Create
    3. Review Risk
    4. Approve
    5. Negotiate
    6. Sign
    7. Post-Execution (Phase 2)

    8. Capture
    9. Manage
    10. Monitor Compliance
    11. Optimize

    Ten Process Stages Within the CLM Framework

    This image contains the CLM framework from earlier in the presentation, with the addition of the following ten steps: 1. Request; 2. Create Contract; 3. Review Risk; 4. Approve; 5. Negotiate; 6. Sign; 7. Capture; 8. Manage; 9. Monitor Compliance; 10. Optimize.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Contract lifecycle management begins with the contract requesting process, where one party requests for or initiates the contracting process and subsequently uses that information for drafting or authoring the contract document. This is usually the first step in CLM.

    Requests for contracts can come from various sources:

    • Business units within the organization
    • Vendors presenting their contract, including renewal agreements
    • System- or process-generated requests for renewal or extension

    At this stage, you need to validate if a non-disclosure agreement (NDA) is currently in place with the other party or is required before moving forward. At times, adequate NDA components could be included within the contract or agreement to satisfy corporate confidentiality requirements.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Stage Input

    • Information about what the contract needs to contain, such as critical dates, term length, coverage, milestones, etc.
    • Some organizations require that justification and budget approval be provided at this stage.
    • Request could come from a vendor as a pre-created contract.
    • Best practices recommend that a contract request form or template is used to standardize all required information.

    Stage Output

    • Completed request form, stored or posted with all details required to move forward to risk review and contract creation.
    • Possible audit trails.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    • At the creation or drafting stage, the document is created, generated, or provided by the vendor. The document will contain all clauses, scope, terms and conditions, and pricing as required.
    • In some cases, a vendor-presented contract that is already prepared will go through an internal review or redlining process by the business unit and/or Legal.
    • Both internal and external review and redlining are included in this stage.
    • Also at this stage, the approvers and signing authorities are identified and added to the contract. In addition, some audit trail features may be added.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For a comprehensive list of terms and conditions, see our Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool within Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    Stage Input

    • Contract request form, risk review/assessment.
    • Vendor- or contractor-provided contract/agreement, either soft copy, electronic form, or more frequently, “clickwrap” web-posted document.
    • Could also include a renewal notification from a vendor or from the CLM system or admin.

    Stage Output

    • Completed draft contract or agreement, typically in a Microsoft Word or Adobe PDF format with audit trail or comment tracking.
    • Redlined document for additional revision and or acceptance.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 1 of 2

    The importance of risk review can not be understated. The contract or agreement must be reviewed by several stakeholders who can identify risks to the organization within the contract.

    Three important definitions:

    1. Risk is the potential for a negative outcome. A risk is crossing the street while wearing headphones and selecting the next track to play on your smartphone. A negative outcome is getting hit by an oncoming person who, unremarkably, was doing something similar at the same time.
    2. Risk mitigation is about taking the steps necessary to minimize both the likelihood of a risk occurring – look around both before and while crossing the street – and its impact if it does occur – fall if you must, but save the smartphone!
    3. Contract risk is about any number of situations that can cause a contract to fail, from trivially – the supplier delivers needed goods late – to catastrophically – the supplier goes out of business without having delivered your long-delayed orders.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 2 of 2

    • Contracts must be reviewed for business terms and conditions, potential risk situations from a financial or legal perspective, business commitments or obligations, and any operational concerns.
    • Mitigating contract risk requires a good understanding of what contracts are in place, how important they are to the success of the organization, and what data they contain.

    Collectively, this is known as contract visibility.

    • Risk avoidance and mitigation are also a key component in the ROI of a CLM system and should be tracked for analysis.
    • Risk-identifying forms or templates can be used to maintain consistency with corporate standards.

    Stage 3: Review Risk

    Stage Input

    • All details of the proposed contract so that a proper risk analysis can be done as well as appropriate review with stakeholders, including:
      • Finance
      • Legal
      • Procurement
      • Security
      • Line-of-business owner
      • IT stakeholders

    Stage Output

    • A list of identified concerns that could expose the business unit or organization.
    • Recommendations to minimize or eliminate identified risks.

    Stage 4: Approve

    The approval stage can be a short process if policies and procedures are already in place. Most organizations will have defined delegation of authority or approval authority depending on risk, value of the contract, and other corporate considerations.

    • Defined approval levels should be known within the organization and can be applied to the approval workflow, expediting the approval of drafted terms, conditions, changes, and cost/spend within the contract internally.
    • Tracking and flexibility needs to considered in the approval process.
    • Gates need to be in place to ensure that a required approver has approved the contract before it moves to the next approver.
    • Flexibility is needed in some situations for ad hoc approval tasks and should include audit trail as required.
    • Approvers can include business units, Finance, Legal, Security, and C-level leaders

    Stage 4: Approve

    Stage Input

    • Complete draft contract with all terms and conditions (T&Cs) and approval trail.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage Output

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    • At this stage, there should be an approved draft of the contract that can be presented to the other party or vendor for review.
    • Typically organizations will negotiate their larger deals for terms and conditions with the goal of balancing the contractual allocation of risk with the importance of the vendor or agreement and its value to the business.
    • Several people on either side are typically involved and will discuss legal and commercial terms of the contract. Throughout the process, negotiators may leverage a variety of tools, including playbooks with preferred and fallback positions, clause libraries, document redlines and comparisons, and issue lists.
    • Audit trails or tracking of changes and acceptances is an important part of this stage. Tracking will avoid duplication and lost or missed changes and will speed up the entire process.
    • A final, clean document is created at this point and readied for execution.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    Stage Input

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage Output

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Saving the different versions of a contract during negotiations will save time, provide reassurance of agreed terms as you move through the process, and provide reference for future negotiations with the vendor.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    • At this stage in the process, all the heavy lifting in a contract’s creation is complete. Now it’s signature time.
    • To finalize the agreement, both parties need to the sign the final document. This can be done by an in-person wet ink signature or by what is becoming more prevalent, digital signature through an e-signature process.
    • Once complete, the final executed documents are exchanged or received electronically and then retained by each party.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    Stage Input

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Stage Output

    • An executed contract or amendment ready to move to the next stage of CLM, capturing in the repository.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Process flow provisions should made for potential rejection of the contract by signatories, looping the contract back to the appropriate stage for rework or revision.

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 1 of 2

    • This is one of the most important stages of a CLM process. Executed agreements need to be stored in a single manageable, searchable, reportable, and centralized repository.
    • All documents should to be captured electronically, reviewed for accuracy, and then posted to the CLM repository.
    • The repository can be in various formats depending on the maturity, robustness, and budget of the CLM program.

    Most repositories are some type of database:

    • An off-the-shelf product
    • A PaaS cloud-based solution
    • A homegrown, internally developed database
    • An add-on module to your ERP system

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 2 of 2

    Several important features of an electronic repository should be considered:

    • Consistent metadata tagging of clauses, terms, conditions, dates, etc.
    • Centralized summary view of all contracts
    • Controlled access for those who need to review and manage the contracts

    Establishing an effective repository will be key to providing measurable value to the organization and saving large amounts of time for the business unit.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Planning for future needs by investing a little more money into a better, more robust repository could pay bigger dividends to the VMO and organization while providing a higher ROI over time as advanced functionality is deployed.

    Stage 8: Manage

    • Once an agreement is captured in the repository, it needs to be managed from both an operational and a commitment perspective.
    • Through a summary view or master list, contracts need to be operationally managed for end dates and renewals, vendor performance, discounts, and rebates.
    • Managing contracts for commitment and compliance will ensure all contract requirements, rights, service-level agreements (SLAs), and terms are fulfilled. This will eliminate the high costs of missed SLAs, potential breaches, or missed renewals.
    • Managing contracts can be improved by adding metadata to the records that allow for easier search and retrieval of contracts or even proactive notification.
    • The repository management features can and should be available to business stakeholders, or reporting from a CLM admin can also alert stakeholders to renewals, pricing, SLAs, etc.
    • Also important to this stage is reporting. This can be done by an admin or via a self-serve feature for stakeholders, or it could even be automated.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 1 of 2

    • At this stage, the contracts or agreements need to be monitored for the polices within them and the purpose for which they were signed.
    • This is referred to as obligation management and is a key step to providing savings to the organization and mitigating risk.
    • Many contracts contain commitments by each party. These can include but are not limited to SLAs, service uptime targets, user counts, pricing threshold discounts and rebates, renewal notices to vendors, and training requirements.
    • All of these obligations within the contracts should be summarized and monitored to ensure that all commitments are delivered on. Managing obligations will mitigate risks, maximize savings and rebates to the organization, and minimize the potential for a breach within the contract.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 2 of 2

    • Monitoring and measuring vendor commitments and performance will also be a key factor in maximizing the benefits of the contract through vendor accountability.
    • Also included in this stage is renewal and/or disposition of the contract. If renewal is due, it should go back to the business unit for submission to the Stage 1: Request process. If the business unit is not going to renew the contract, the contract must be tagged and archived for future reference.

    Stage 10: Optimize

    • The goal of this stage is to improve the other stages of the process as well as evaluate how each stage is integrating with the core operational framework processes.
    • With more data and improved insight into contractual terms and performance, a business can optimize its portfolio for better value, greater savings, and lower-risk outcomes.
    • For high-performance contract teams, the goal is a continuous feedback loop between the contract portfolio and business performance. If, for example, the data shows that certain negotiation issues consume a large chunk of time but yield no measurable difference in risk or performance, you may tweak the playbook to remedy those issues quickly.

    Additional optimization tactics:

    • Streamlining contract renewals with auto-renew
    • Predefined risk review process or template, continuous review/improvement of negotiation playbook
    • Better automation or flow of approval process
    • Better signature delegation process if required
    • Improving repository search with metadata tagging
    • Automating renewal tracking or notice process
    • Tracking the time a contract spends in each stage

    Establish Your Current CLM Maturity Position

    • Sometimes organizations have a well-defined pre-execution process but have a poor post-signature process.
    • Identifying your current processes or lack thereof will provide you with a starting point in developing a plan for your CLM. It’s possible that most of the stages are there and just need some improvements, or maybe some are missing and need to be implemented.
    • It’s not unusual for organizations to have a manual pre-execution process and an automated backend repository with compliance and renewal notices features.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool to outline where your organization is at each stage of the process.

    Member Activity: Assess Current CLM Maturity

    2.1 Completion Time 1-2 days

    Goal: Identify and measure your existing CLM processes, if any, and provide a maturity value to each stage. The resulting scores will provide a maturity assessment of your CLM.

    Instructions

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to document current CLM processes.
    2. Using the CLM worksheet info, answer the questions in the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.
    3. Review the results and scores on Tab 3 to see where you need to focus your initial improvements.
    4. Save the initial assessment for future reference and reassess in six to 12 months to measure progress.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place in the organization

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Member Activity: Complete RASCI Chart

    2.2 Completion Time 2-6 hours

    Goal: Identify who in your organization is primarily accountable and involved in each stage of the CLM process.

    Instructions

    Engage internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and Procurement as required to validate who should be involved in each stage.

    1. Using the information collected from internal reviews, assign a level in the CLM RASCI Diagram to each team member.
    2. Use the resulting RASCI diagram to guide you through developing or improving your CLM stages.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM RASCI Diagram.

    INPUT

    • Internal interview information

    OUTPUT

    • Understanding of who is involved in each CLM stage

    Materials

    • Interview data
    • RASCI Diagram

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Applying CLM Framework and Stages to Your Organization

    • Understand what CLM process you currently do or do not have in place.
    • Review implementation options: automated, semi-automated, and manual solutions.
    • If you are improving an existing process, focus on one phase at a time, perfect it, and then move to the other phase. This can also be driven by budget and time.
    • Create a plan to start with and then move to automating or semi-automating the stages.
    • Building onto or enhancing an existing system or processes can be a cost-effective method to produce near-term measurable savings
    • Focus on one phase at a time, then move on to the other phase.
    • While reviewing implementation of or improvements to CLM stages, be sure to track or calculate the potential time and cost savings and risk mitigation. This will help in any required business case for a CLM.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 1 of 2

    • ROI can be easier to quantify and measure in larger organizations with larger CLM, but ROI metrics can be obtained regardless of the company or CLM size.
    • Organizations recognize their ROI through gains in efficiency across the entire business as well as within individual departments involved in the contracting process. They also do so by reducing the risk associated with decentralized and insecure storage of and access to their contracts, failure to comply with terms of their contracts, and missing deadlines associated with contracts.

    Just a few of the factors to consider within your own organization include:

    • The number of people inside and outside your company that touch your contracts.
    • The number of hours spent weekly, monthly, and annually managing contracts.
    • Potential efficiencies gained in better managing those contracts.
    • The total number of contracts that exist at any given time.
    • The average value and total value of those contract types.
    • The potential risk of being in breach of any of those contracts.
    • The number of places contracts are stored.
    • The level of security that exists to prevent unauthorized access.
    • The potential impact of unauthorized access to your sensitive contract data.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 2 of 2

    Decision-Maker Apprehensions

    Decision-maker concerns arise from a common misunderstanding – that is, a fundamental failure to appreciate the true source of contract management value. This misunderstanding goes back many years to the time when analysts first started to take an interest in contract management and its automation. Their limited experience (primarily in retail and manufacturing sectors) led them to think of contract management as essentially an administrative function, primarily focused on procurement of goods. In such environments, the purpose of automation is focused on internal efficiency, augmented by the possibility of savings from reduced errors (e.g. failing to spot a renewal or expiry date) or compliance (ensuring use of standard terms).

    Today’s CLM systems and processes can provide ROI in several areas in the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Research on ROI of CLM software shows significant hard cost savings to an organization. For example, a $10 million company with 300 contracts valued at $3 million could realize savings of $83,400 and avoid up to $460,000 in lost revenues. (Derived from: ACCDocket, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 1 of 2

    Who should own and/or manage the CLM process within an organization? Legal, VMO, business unit, Sales?

    This is an often-discussed question. Research suggests that there is no definitive answer, as there are several variables.

    Organizations needs to review what makes the best business sense for them based on several considerations and then decide where CLM belongs.

    • Business unit budgets and time management
    • Available Administration personnel and time
    • IT resources
    • Security and access concerns
    • Best fit based on organizational structure

    35% of law professionals feel contract management is a legal responsibility, while 45% feel it’s a business responsibility and a final 20% are unsure where it belongs. (Source: “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics,” Apttus, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 2 of 2

    What type of CLM software or platform should we use?

    This too is a difficult question to answer definitively. Again, there are several variables to consider. As well, several solutions are available, and this is not a one-size-fits-all scenario.

    As with who should own the CLM process, organizations must review the various CLM software solutions available that will meet their current and future needs and then ask, “What do we need the system to do?”

    • Do you build a “homegrown” solution?
    • Should it be an add-on module to the current ERP or CRM system?
    • Is on-premises more suitable?
    • Is an adequate off-the-shelf (OTS) solution available?
    • What about the many cloud offerings?
    • Is there a basic system to start with that can expand as you grow?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When considering what type of solution to choose, prioritize what needs to been done or improved. Sometimes solutions can be deployed in phases as an “add-on” type modules.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Documented current CLM process
    • Core operational framework to build a CLM process on
    • Understanding of best practices required for a sustainable CLM

    Processes Optimized

    • Internal RASCI process identified
    • Existing internal stage improvements
    • Internal review process for risk mitigation

    Deliverables Completed

    • Existing CLM Processes Worksheet
    • CLM Maturity Assessment
    • CLM RASCI Chart
    • CLM improvement plan

    Project Step Summary

    Client Project: CLM Assessment and Improvement Plan

    1. Set your goals – what do you want to achieve in your CLM project?
    2. Assess your organization’s current CLM position in relation to CLM best practices and stages.
    3. Map your organization’s RASCI structure for CLM.
    4. Identify opportunities for stage improvements or target all low stage assessments.
    5. Prioritize improvement processes.
    6. Track ROI metrics.
    7. Develop a CLM implementation or improvement plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project can fit your organization’s schedule:

    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    CLM Blueprint Summary and Conclusion

    • Contract management is a vital component of a responsible VMO that will benefit all business units in an organization, save time and money, and reduce risk exposure.
    • A basic well-deployed and well-managed CLM will provide ROI in the short term.
    • Setting an improvement plan with concise improvements and potential cost savings based on process improvements will help your business case for CLM get approval and leadership buy-in.
    • Educating and aligning all business units and stakeholders to any changes to CLM processes will ensure that cost savings and ROI are achieved.
    • When evaluating a CLM software solution, use the operational framework and the ten process stages in this blueprint as a reference guide for CLM vendor functionality and selection.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Master Contract Review and Negotiation

    Optimize spend with significant cost savings and negotiate from a position of strength.

    Manage Your Vendors Before They Manage You

    Maximize the value of vendor relationships.

    Bibliography

    Burla, Daniel. “The Must Know Of Transition to Dynamics 365 on Premise.” Sherweb, 14 April 2017. Web.

    Anand, Vishal, “Strategic Considerations in Implementing an End-to-End Contract Lifecycle Management Solution.” DWF Mindcrest, 20 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Alspaugh, Zach. “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics from the General Counsel’s Technology Report.” Apttus, 23 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Bishop, Randy. “Contract Management is not just a cost center.” ContractSafe, 9 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Bryce, Ian. “Contract Management KPIs - Measuring What Matters.” Gatekeeper, 2 May 2019. Web.

    Busch, Jason. “Contract Lifecycle Management 101.” Determine. 4 Jan. 2018. Web.

    “Contract Management Software Buyer's Guide.” TechnologyAdvice, 5 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Dunne, Michael. “Analysts Predict that 2019 will be a Big Year for Contract Lifecycle Management.” Apttus, 19 Nov. 2018. Web.

    “FIS Case Study.” Apttus, n.d. Web.

    Gutwein, Katie. “3 Takeaways from the 2018 State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    “IACCM 2019 Benchmark Report.” IAACM, 4 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Linsley, Rod. “How Proverbial Wisdom Can Help Improve Contract Risk Mitigation.” Gatekeeper, 2 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Mars, Scott. “Contract Management Data Extraction.” Exari, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Rodriquez, Elizabeth. “Global Contract Life-Cycle Management Market Statistics and Trends 2019.” Business Tech Hub, 17 June 2017. Web.

    “State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    Teninbaum, Gabriel, and Arthur Raguette. “Realizing ROI from Contract Management Technology.” ACCDocket.com, 29 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Wagner, Thomas. “Strategic Report on Contract Life cycle Management Software Market with Top Key Players- IBM Emptoris, Icertis, SAP, Apttus, CLM Matrix, Oracle, Infor, Newgen Software, Zycus, Symfact, Contract Logix, Coupa Software.” Market Research, 21 June 2019. Web.

    “What is Your Contract Lifecycle Management (CLM) Persona?” Spend Matters, 19 Oct. 2017. Web.

    CIO Priorities 2023

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}84|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    CIOs are facing these challenges in 2023:

    • Trying to understand the implications of external trends.
    • Determining what capabilities are most important to support the organization.
    • Understanding how to help the organization pursue new opportunities.
    • Preparing to mitigate new sources of organizational risk.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • While functional leaders may only see their next move, as head of the organization with a complete view of all the pieces, the CIO has full context awareness. It's up to them to assess their gaps, consider the present scenario, and then make their next move.
    • Each priority carries new opportunities for organizations that pursue them.
    • There are also different risks to mitigate as each priority is explored.

    Impact and Result

    • Inform your IT strategy for the year ahead.
    • Identify which capabilities you need to improve.
    • Add initiatives that support your priorities to your roadmap.

    CIO Priorities 2023 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. CIO Priorities 2023 Report – Read about the priorities on IT leaders' agenda.

    Understand the five priorities that will help navigate the opportunities and risks of the year ahead.

    • CIO Priorities 2023 Report

    Infographic

     

    Further reading

    CIO Priorities 2023

    Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

    Analyst Perspective

    Take a full view of the board and use all your pieces to win.

    In our Tech Trends 2023 report, we called on CIOs to think of themselves as chess grandmasters. To view strategy as playing both sides of the board, simultaneously attacking the opponent's king while defending your own. In our CIO Priorities 2023 report, we'll continue with that metaphor as we reflect on IT's capability to respond to trends.

    If the trends report is a study of the board state that CIOs are playing with, the priorities report is about what move they should make next. We must consider all the pieces we have at our disposal and determine which ones we can afford to use to seize on opportunity. Other pieces are best used by staying put to defend their position.

    In examining the different capabilities that CIOs will require to succeed in the year ahead, it's apparent that a siloed view of IT isn't going to work. Just like a chess player in a competitive match would never limit themselves to only using their knights or their rooks, a CIO's responsibility is to deploy each of their pieces to win the day. While functional leaders may only see their next move, as head of the organization with a complete view of all the pieces, the CIO has full awareness of the board state.

    It's up to them to assess their gaps, consider the present scenario, and then make their next move.

    This is a picture of Brian Jackson

    Brian Jackson
    Principal Research Director, Research – CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group

    CIO Priorities 2023 is informed by Info-Tech's primary research data of surveys and benchmarks

    Info-Tech's Tech Trends 2023 report and State of Hybrid Work in IT: A Trend Report inform the externalities faced by organizations in the year ahead. They imply opportunities and risks that organizations face. Leadership must determine if they will respond and how to do so. CIOs then determine how to support those responses by creating or improving their IT capabilities. The priorities are the initiatives that will deliver the most value across the capabilities that are most in demand. The CIO Priorities 2023 report draws on data from several different Info-Tech surveys and diagnostic benchmarks.

    2023 Tech Trends and Priorities Survey; N=813 (partial), n=521 (completed)
    Info-Tech's Trends and Priorities 2023 Survey was conducted between August 9 and September 9, 2022. We received 813 total responses with 521 completed surveys. More than 90% of respondents work in IT departments. More than 84% of respondents are at a manager level of seniority or higher.

    2023 The State of Hybrid Work in IT Survey; N=518
    The State of Hybrid Work in IT Survey was conducted between July 11 and July 29 and received 518 responses. Nine in ten respondents were at a manager level of seniority or higher.

    Every organization will have its own custom list of priorities based on its internal context. Organizational goals, IT maturity level, and effectiveness of capabilities are some of the important factors to consider. To provide CIOs with a starting point for their list of priorities for 2023, we used aggregate data collected in our diagnostic benchmark tools between August 1, 2021, and October 31, 2022.

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program is intended to be completed by CIOs and their supervisors (CEO or other executive position [CxO]) and will provide the average maturity level and budget expectations (N=107). The IT Management and Governance Diagnostic will provide the average capability effectiveness and importance ranking to CIOs (N=271). The CIO Business Vision Diagnostic will provide stakeholder satisfaction feedback (N=259).

    The 2023 CIO priorities are based on that data, internal collaboration sessions at Info-Tech, and external interviews with CIOs and subject matter experts.

    Build IT alignment

    Assess your IT processes

    Determine stakeholder satisfaction

    Most IT departments should aim to drive outcomes that deliver better efficiency and cost savings

    Slightly more than half of CIOs using Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program rated themselves at a Support level of maturity in 2022. That aligns with IT professionals' view of their organizations from our Tech Trends and Priorities Survey, where organizations are rated at the Support level on average. At this level, IT departments can provide reliable infrastructure and support a responsive IT service desk that reasonably satisfies stakeholders.

    In the future, CIOs aspire to attain the Transform level of maturity. Nearly half of CIOs select this future state in our diagnostic, indicating a desire to deliver reliable innovation and lead the organization to become a technology-driven firm. However, we see that fewer CxOs aspire for that level of maturity from IT. CxOs are more likely than CIOs to say that IT should aim for the Optimize level of maturity. At this level, IT will help other departments become more efficient and lower costs across the organization.

    Whether a CIO is aiming for the top of the maturity scale in the future or not, IT maturity is achieved one step at a time. Aiming for outcomes at the Optimize level will be a realistic goal for most CIOs in 2023 and will satisfy many stakeholders.

    Current and future state of IT maturity

    This image depicts a table showing the Current and future states of IT maturity.

    Trends indicate a need to focus on leadership and change management

    Trends imply new opportunities and risks that an organization must decide on. Organizational leadership determines if action will be taken to respond to the new external context based on its importance compared to current internal context. To support their organizations, IT must use its capabilities to deliver on initiatives. But if a capability's effectiveness is poor, it could hamper the effort.

    To determine what capabilities IT departments may need to improve or create to support their organizations in 2023, we conducted an analysis of our trends data. Using the opportunities and risks implied by the Tech Trends 2023 report and the State of Hybrid Work in IT: A Trend Report, we've determined the top capabilities IT will need to respond. Capabilities are defined by Info-Tech's IT Management and Governance Framework.

    Tier 1: The Most Important Capabilities In 2023

    Enterprise Application Selection & Implementation

    Manage the selection and implementation of enterprise applications, off-the-shelf software, and software as a service to ensure that IT provides the business with the most appropriate applications at an acceptable cost.

    Effectiveness: 6.5; Importance: 8.8

    Leadership, Culture, and Values

    Ensure that the IT department reflects the values of your organization. Improve the leadership skills of your team to generate top performance.

    Effectiveness: 6.9; Importance: 9

    Data Architecture

    Manage the business' databases, including the technology, the governance processes, and the people that manage them. Establish the principles, policies, and guidelines relevant to the effective use of data within the organization.

    Effectiveness: 6.3; Importance: 8.8

    Organizational Change Management

    Implement or optimize the organization's capabilities for managing the impact of new business processes, new IT systems, and changes in organizational structure or culture.

    Effectiveness: 6.1; Importance: 8.8

    External Compliance

    Ensure that IT processes and IT-supported business processes are compliant with laws, regulations, and contractual requirements.

    Effectiveness: 7.4; Importance: 8.8

    Info-Tech's Management and Diagnostic Benchmark

    Tier 2: Other Important Capabilities In 2023

    Ten more capabilities surfaced as important compared to others but not as important as the capabilities in tier 1.

    Asset Management

    Track IT assets through their lifecycle to make sure that they deliver value at optimal cost, remain operational, and are accounted for and physically protected. Ensure that the assets are reliable and available as needed.

    Effectiveness: 6.4; Importance: 8.5

    Business Intelligence and Reporting

    Develop a set of capabilities, including people, processes, and technology, to enable the transformation of raw data into meaningful and useful information for the purpose of business analysis.

    Effectiveness: 6.3; Importance: 8.8

    Business Value

    Secure optimal value from IT-enabled initiatives, services, and assets by delivering cost-efficient solutions and services and by providing a reliable and accurate picture of costs and benefits.

    Effectiveness: 6.5; Importance: 8.7

    Cost and Budget Management

    Manage the IT-related financial activities and prioritize spending through the use of formal budgeting practices. Provide transparency and accountability for the cost and business value of IT solutions and services.

    Effectiveness: 6.5; Importance: 8.8

    Data Quality

    Put policies, processes, and capabilities in place to ensure that appropriate targets for data quality are set and achieved to match the needs of the business.

    Effectiveness: 6.4; Importance: 8.9

    Enterprise Architecture

    Establish a management practice to create and maintain a coherent set of principles, methods, and models that are used in the design and implementation of the enterprise's business processes, information systems, and infrastructure.

    Effectiveness: 6.8; Importance: 8.8

    IT Organizational Design

    Set up the structure of IT's people, processes, and technology as well as roles and responsibilities to ensure that it's best meeting the needs of the business.

    Effectiveness: 6.8; Importance: 8.8

    Performance Measurement

    Manage IT and process goals and metrics. Monitor and communicate that processes are performing against expectations and provide transparency for performance and conformance.

    Effectiveness: 6; Importance: 8.4

    Stakeholder Relations

    Manage the relationship between the business and IT to ensure that the stakeholders are satisfied with the services they need from IT and have visibility into IT processes.

    Effectiveness: 6.7; Importance: 9.2

    Vendor Management

    Manage IT-related services provided by all suppliers, including selecting suppliers, managing relationships and contracts, and reviewing and monitoring supplier performance.

    Effectiveness: 6.6; Importance: 8.4

    Defining the CIO Priorities for 2023

    Understand the CIO priorities by analyzing both how CIOs respond to trends in general and how a specific CIO responded in the context of their organization.

    This is an image of the four analyses: 1: Implications; 2: Opportunities and risks; 3: Case examples; 4: Priorities to action.

    The Five CIO Priorities for 2023

    Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

    1. Adjust IT operations to manage for inflation
      • Business Value
      • Vendor Management
      • Cost and Budget Management
    2. Prepare your data pipeline to train AI
      • Business Intelligence and Reporting
      • Data Quality
      • Data Architecture
    3. Go all in on zero-trust security
      • Asset Management
      • Stakeholder Relations
      • External Compliance
    4. Engage employees in the digital age
      • Leadership, Culture, and Values
      • Organizational Change Management
      • Enterprise Architecture
    5. Shape the IT organization to improve customer experience
      • Enterprise Application Selection & Implementation
      • Performance Measurement
      • IT Organizational Design

    Adjust IT operations to manage for inflation

    Priority 01

    • APO06 Cost and Budget Management
    • APo10 Vendor Management
    • EDM02 Business Value

    Recognize the relative impact of higher inflation on IT's spending power and adjust accordingly.

    Inflation takes a bite out of the budget

    Two-thirds of IT professionals are expecting their budgets to increase in 2023, according to our survey. But not every increase is keeping up with the pace of inflation. The International Monetary Fund forecasts that global inflation rose to 8.8% in 2022. It projects it will decline to 6.5% in 2023 and 4.1% by 2024 (IMF, 2022).

    CIOs must account for the impact of inflation on their IT budgets and realize that what looks like an increase on paper is effectively a flat budget or worse. Applied to our survey takers, an IT budget increase of more than 6.5% would be required to keep pace with inflation in 2023. Only 40% of survey takers are expecting that level of increase. For the 27% expecting an increase between 1-5%, they are facing an effective decrease in budget after the impact of inflation. Those expecting no change in budget or a decrease will be even worse off.

    Looking ahead to 2023, how do you anticipate your IT spending will change compared to spending in 2022?

    Global inflation estimates by year

    2022 8.8%
    2023 6.5%
    2024 4.1%

    International Monetary Fund, 2022

    CIOs are more optimistic about budgets than their supervisors

    Data from Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostic benchmark also shows that CIOs and their supervisors are planning for increases to the budget. This diagnostic is designed for a CIO to use with their direct supervisor, whether it's the CEO or otherwise (CxO). Results show that on average, CIOs are more optimistic than their supervisors that they will receive budget increases and headcount increases in the years ahead.

    While 14% of CxOs estimated the IT budget would see no change or a decrease in the next three to five years, only 3% of CIOs said the same. A larger discrepancy is seen in headcount, where nearly one-quarter of CXOs estimated no change or decrease in the years ahead, versus only 10% of CIOs estimating the same.

    When we account for the impact of inflation in 2023, this misalignment between CIOs and their supervisors increases. When adjusting for inflation, we need to view the responses projecting an increase of between 1-5% as an effective decrease. With the inflation adjustment, 26% of CXOs are predicting IT budgets to stay flat or see a decrease compared to only 10% of CIOs.

    CIOs should consider how inflation has affected their projected spending power over the past year and take into account projected inflation rates over the next couple of years. Given that the past decade has seen inflation rates between 2-3%, the higher rates projected will have more of an impact on organizational budgets than usual.

    Expect headcount to stay flat or decline over 3-5 years

    CIO: 10%; CXO: 24%

    IT budget expectations to stay flat or decrease before inflation

    CIO: 13.6 %; CXO: 3.2%

    IT budget expectations to stay flat or decrease adjusted for inflation

    CIO: 25.8%; CXO: 9.7%

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Opportunities

    Appoint a "cloud economist"

    Organizations that migrated from on-premises data centers to infrastructure as a service shifted their capital expenditures on server racks to operational expenditures on paying the monthly service bill. Managing that monthly bill so that it is in line with desired performance levels now becomes crucial. The expected benefit of the cloud is that an organization can turn the dial up to meet higher demand and turn it down when demand slows. In practice this is sometimes more difficult to execute than anticipated. Some IT departments realize their cloud-based data flows aren't always connected to the revenue-generating activity seen in the business. As a result, a "cloud economist" is needed to closely monitor cloud usage and adjust it to financial expectations. Especially during any recessionary period, IT departments will want to avoid a "bill shock" incident.

    Partner with technology providers

    Keep your friends close and your vendors closer. Look for opportunities to create leverage with your strategic vendors to unlock new opportunities. Identify if a vendor you work with is not entrenched in your industry and offer them the credibility of working with you in exchange for a favorable contract. Offering up your logo for a website listing clients or giving your own time to speak in a customer session at a conference can go a long way to building up some goodwill with your vendors. That's goodwill you'll need when you ask for a new multi-year contract on your software license without annual increases built into the structure.

    Demonstrate IT projects improve efficiency

    An IT department that operates at the Optimize level of Info-Tech's maturity scale can deliver outcomes that lower costs for other departments. IT can defend its own budget if it's able to demonstrate that its initiatives will automate or augment business activities in a way that improves margins. The argument becomes even more compelling if IT can demonstrate it is supporting a revenue-generating initiative or customer-facing experience. CIOs will need to find business champions to vouch for the important contributions IT is making to their area.

    Risks

    Imposition of non-financial reporting requirements

    In some jurisdictions, the largest companies will be required to start collecting information on carbon emissions emitted as a result of business activities by the end of next year. Smaller sized organizations will be next on the list to determine how to meet new requirements issued by various regulators. Risks of failure include facing fines or being shunned by investors. CIOs will need to support their financial reporting teams in collecting the new required data accurately. This will incur new costs as well.

    Rising asset costs

    Acquiring IT equipment is becoming more expensive due to overall inflation and specific pressures around semiconductor supply chains. As a result, more CIOs are extending their device refresh policies to last another year or two. Still, demands for new devices to support new hybrid work models could put pressure on budgets as IT teams are asked to modernize conferencing rooms. For organizations adopting mixed reality headsets, cutting-edge capabilities will come at a premium. Operating costs of devices may also increase as inflation increases costs of the electricity and bandwidth they depend on.

    CASE STUDY
    Leverage your influence in vendor negotiations

    Denise Cornish, Associate VP of IT and Deputy COO,
    Western University of Health Sciences

    Since taking on the lead IT role at Western University in 2020, Denise Cornish has approached vendor management like an auditable activity. She evaluates the value she gets from each vendor relationship and creates a list of critical vendors that she relies upon to deliver core business services. "The trick is to send a message to the vendor that they also need us as a customer that's willing to act as a reference," she says. Cornish has managed to renegotiate a contract with her ERP vendor, locking in a multi-year contract with a very small escalator in exchange for presenting as a customer at conferences. She's also working with them on developing a new integration to another piece of software popular in the education space.

    Western University even negotiated a partnership approach with Apple for a program run with its College of Osteopathic Medicine of the Pacific (COMP) called the Digital Doctor Bag. The partnership saw Apple agree to pre-package a customer application developed by Western that delivered the curriculum to students and facilitated communications across students and faculty. Apple recognized Western as an Apple Distinguished School, a program that recognizes innovative schools that use Apple products.

    "I like when negotiations are difficult.
    I don't necessarily expect a zero-sum game. We each need to get something out of this and having the conversation and really digging into what's in it for you and what's in it for me, I enjoy that. So usually when I negotiate a vendor contract, it's rare that it doesn't work out."

    CASE STUDY
    Control cloud costs with a simplified approach

    Jim Love, CIO, IT World Canada

    As an online publisher and a digital marketing platform for technology products and services companies, IT World Canada (ITWC) has observed that there are differences in how small and large companies adopt the cloud as their computing infrastructure. For smaller companies, even though adoption is accelerating, there may still be some reluctance to fully embrace cloud platforms and services. While larger companies often have a multi-cloud approach, this might not be practical for smaller IT shops that may struggle to master the skills necessary to effectively manage one cloud platform. While Love acknowledges that the cloud is the future of corporate computing, he also notes that not all applications or workloads may be well suited to run in the cloud. As well, moving data into the cloud is cheap but moving it back out can be more expensive. That is why it is critical to understand your applications and the data you're working with to control costs and have a successful cloud implementation.

    "Standardization is the friend of IT. So, if you can standardize on one platform, you're going to do better in terms of costs."

    From priorities to action

    Go deeper on pursuing your priorities by improving the associated capabilities.

    Improve Cost and Budget Management

    Take control of your cloud costs by providing central financial oversight on the infrastructure-as-a-service provider your organization uses. Create visibility into your operational costs and define policies to control them. Right-size the use of cloud services to stay within organizational budget expectations.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Improve Business Value

    Reduce the funds allocated to ongoing support and impose tougher discipline around change requests to lighten your maintenance burden and make room for investment in net-new initiatives to support the business.

    Free up funds for new initiatives

    Improve Vendor Management

    Lay the foundation for a vendor management process with long-term benefits. Position yourself as a valuable client with your strategic vendors and leverage your position to improve your contract terms.

    Elevate Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Prepare your data pipeline to train AI

    Priority 02

    • ITRG06 BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE AND REPORTING
    • ITRG07 DATA ARCHITECTURE
    • ITRG08 DATA QUALITY

    Keep pace as the market adopts AI capabilities, and be ready to create competitive advantage.

    Today's innovation is tomorrow's expectation

    During 2022, some compelling examples of generative-AI-based products took the world by storm. Images from AI-generating bots Midjourney and Stable Diffusion went viral, flooding social media and artistic communities with images generated from text prompts. Exchanges with OpenAI's ChatGPT bot also caught attention, as the bot was able to do everything from write poetry, to provide directions on a cooking recipe and then create a shopping list for it, to generate working code in a variety of languages. The foundation models are trained with AI techniques that include generative adversarial networks, transformers, and variational autoencoders. The end result is an algorithm that can produce content that's meaningful to people based on some simple direction. The industry is only beginning to come to grips with how this sort of capability will disrupt the enterprise.

    Slightly more than one-third of IT professionals say their organization has already invested in AI or machine learning. It's the sixth-most popular technology to have already invested in after cloud computing (82%), application programming interfaces (64%), workforce management solutions (44%), data lakes (36%), and next-gen cybersecurity (36%). It's ahead of 12 other technologies that IT is already invested in.

    When we asked what technologies organizations planned to invest in for next year, AI rocketed up the list to second place, as it's selected by 44% of IT professionals. It falls behind only cloud computing. This jump up the list makes AI the fastest growing technology for new investment from organizations.

    Many AI capabilities seem cutting edge now, but organizations are prioritizing it as a technology investment. In a couple of years, access to foundational models that produce images, text, or code will become easy to access with a commercial license and an API integration. AI will become embedded in off-the-shelf software and drive many new features that will quickly become commonplace.

    To stay even with the competition and meet customer expectations, organizations will have to work to at least adopt these AI-enhanced products and services. For those that want to create a competitive advantage, they will have to build a data pipeline that is capable of training their own custom AI models based on their unique data sets.

    Which of the following technology categories has your organization already invested in?

    A bar graph is depicted the percentage of organizations which already had invested in the following Categories: Cloud Computing; Application Programming; Next-Gen Cybersecurity; Workforce Management Solutions; Data Lake/Lakehouse; Artificial Intelligence or Machine Learning.

    Which of those same technologies does your organization plan to invest in by the end of 2023?

    A bar graph is depicted the percentage of organizations which plan to invest in the following categories by the end of 2023: No-Code / Low-Code Platforms; Next-Gen Cybersecurity; Application Programming Interfaces (APIs); Data Lake / Lakehouse; Artificial Intelligence (AI) or Machine Learning; Cloud Computing

    Tech Trends 2023 Survey

    Data quality and governance will be critical to customize generative AI

    Data collection and analysis are on the minds of both CIOs and their supervisors. When asked what technologies the business should adopt in the next three to five years, big data (analytics) ranked as most critical to adopt among CIOs and their supervisors. Big data (collection) ranked fourth out of 11 options.

    Organizations that want to drive a competitive advantage from generative AI will need to train these large, versatile models on their own data sets. But at the same time, IT organizations are struggling to provide clean data. The second-most critical gap for IT organizations on average is data quality, behind only organizational change management. Organizations know that data quality is important to support analytics goals, as algorithms can suffer in their integrity if they don't have reliable data to work with. As they say, garbage in, garbage out.

    Another challenge to overcome is the gap seen in IT governance, the sixth largest gap on average. Using data toward training custom generative models will hold new compliance and ethical implications for IT departments to contend with. How user data can be leveraged is already the subject of privacy legislation in many different jurisdictions, and new AI legislation is being developed in various places around the world that could create further demands. In some cases, users are reacting negatively to AI-generated content.

    Biggest capability gaps between rated importance and effectiveness

    This is a Bar graph showing the capability gaps between rated importance and effectiveness.

    IT Management and Governance Diagnostic

    Most critical technologies to adopt rated by CIOs and their supervisors

    This is a Bar graph showing the most critical technologies to adopt as rated by CIO's and their supervisors

    CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Opportunities

    Enterprise content discovery

    Many organizations still cobble together knowledgebases in SharePoint or some other shared corporate drive, full of resources that no one quite knows how to find. A generative AI chatbot holds potential to be trained on an organization's content and produce content based on an employee's queries. Trained properly, it could point employees to the right resource they need to answer their question or just provide the answer directly.

    Supply chain forecasts

    After Hurricane Ian shut down a Walmart distribution hub, the retailer used AI to simulate the effects on its supply chain. It rerouted deliveries from other hubs based on the predictions and planned for how to respond to demand for goods and services after the storm. Such forecasts would typically take a team of analysts days to compose, but thanks to AI, Walmart had it done in a matter of hours (The Economist, 2022).

    Reduce the costs of AI projects

    New generative AI models of sufficient scale offer advantages over previous AI models in their versatility. Just as ChatGPT can write poetry or dialogue for a play or perhaps a section of a research report (not this one, this human author promises), large models can be deployed for multiple use cases in the enterprise. One AI researcher says this could reduce the costs of an AI project by 20-30% (The Economist, 2022).

    Risks

    Impending AI regulation

    Multiple jurisdictions around the world are pursuing new legislation that imposes requirements on organizations that use AI, including the US, Europe, and Canada. Some uses of AI will be banned outright, such as the real-time use of facial recognition in public spaces, while in other situations people can opt out of using AI and work with a human instead. Regulations will take the risk of the possible outcomes created by AI into consideration, and organizations will often be required to disclose when and how AI is used to reach decisions (Science | Business, 2022). Questions around whether creators can prevent their content from being used for training AI are being raised, with some efforts already underway to collect a list of those who want to opt out. Organizations that adopt a generative AI model today may find it needs to be amended for copyright reasons in the future.

    Bias in the algorithms

    Organizations using a large AI model trained by a third party to complete their tasks or as a foundation to further customize it with their own data will have to contend with the inherent bias of the algorithm. This can lead to unintended negative experiences for users, as it did for MIT Technology Review journalist Melissa Heikkilä when she uploaded her images to AI avatar app Lensa, only to have it render a collection of sexualized portraits. Heikkilä contends that her Asian heritage overly influenced the algorithm to associate her with video-game characters, anime, and adult content (MIT Technology Review, 2022).

    Convincing nonsense

    Many of the generative AI bots released so far often create very good responses to user queries but sometimes create nonsense that at first glance might seem to be accurate. One example is Meta's Galactica bot – intended to streamline scientific research discovery and aid in text generation – which was taken down only three days after being made available. Scientists found that it generated fake research that sounded convincing or failed to do math correctly (Spiceworks, 2022).

    CASE STUDY
    How MLSE enhances the Toronto Raptors' competitiveness with data-driven practices

    Christian Magsisi, Vice President of Venue and Digital Technology, MLSE

    At the Toronto Raptors practice facility, the OVO Athletic Centre, a new 120-foot custom LG video screen towers over the court. The video board is used to playback game clips so coaches can use them to teach players, but it also displays analytics from algorithmic models that are custom-made for each player. Data on shot-making or defensive deflections are just a couple examples of what might inform the players.

    Vice President of Digital Technology Christian Magsisi leads a functional Digital Labs technical group at MLSE. The in-house team builds the specific data models that support the Raptors in their ongoing efforts to improve. The analytics are fed by Noah Analytics, which uses cognitive vision to provide real-time feedback on shot accuracy. SportsVU is a motion capture system that represents how players are positioned on the court, with detail down to which way they are facing and whether their arms are up or down. The third-party vendors provide the solutions to generate the analytics, but it's up to MLSE's internal team to shape them to be actionable for players during a practice.

    "All the way from making sure that a specific player is achieving the results that they're looking for and showing that through data, or finding opportunities for the coaching staff. This is the manifestation of it in real life. Our ultimate goal with the coaches was to be able to take what was on emails or in a report and sometimes even in text message and actually implement it into practice."

    Read the full story on Spiceworks Insights.

    How MLSE enhances the Toronto Raptors' competitiveness with data-driven practices (cont.)

    Humza Teherany, Chief Technology Officer, MLSE

    MLSE's Digital Labs team architects its data insights pipeline on top of cloud services. Amazon Web Services Rekognition provides cognitive vision analysis from video and Amazon Kinesis provides the video processing capabilities. Beyond the court, MLSE uses data to enhance the fan experience, explains CTO Humza Teherany. It begins with having meaningful business goals about where technology can provide the most value. He starts by engaging the leadership of the organization and considering the "art of the possible" when it comes to using technology to unlock their goals.

    Humza Teherany (left) and Christian Magsisi lead MLSE's digital efforts for the pro sports teams owned by the group, including the Toronto Raptors, Toronto Maple Leafs, and Toronto Argonauts. (Photo by Brian Jackson).

    Read the full story on Spiceworks Insights.

    "Our first goal in the entire buildup of the Digital Labs organization has been to support MLSE and all of our teams. We like to do things first. We leverage our own technology to make things better for our fans and for our teams to complete and find incremental advantages where possible."
    Humza Teherany,
    Chief Technology Officer, MLSE

    From priorities to action

    Go deeper on pursuing your priorities by improving the associated capabilities.

    Improve Data Quality

    The performance of AI-assisted tools depends on mature IT operations processes and reliable data sets. Standardize service management processes and build a knowledgebase of structured content to prepare for AI-assisted IT operations.

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management

    Improve Business Intelligence and Reporting

    Explore the enterprise chatbots that are available to not only assist with customer interactions but also help your employees find the resources they need to do their jobs and retrieve data in real time.

    Explore the best chatbots software

    Improve Data Architecture

    Understand if you are ready to embark on the AI journey and what business use cases are appropriate for AI. Plan around the organization's maturity in people, tools, and operations for delivering the correct data, model development, and model deployment and managing the models in the operational areas.

    Create an Architecture for AI

    Go all in on zero-trust security

    Priority 03

    • BAI09 ASSET MANAGEMENT
    • APO08 STAKEHOLDER RELATIONS
    • MEA03 EXTERNAL COMPLIANCE

    Adopt zero-trust architecture as the new security paradigm across your IT stack and from an organizational risk management perspective.

    Putting faith in zero trust

    The push toward a zero-trust security framework is becoming necessary for organizations for several different reasons over the past couple of years. As the pandemic forced workers away from offices and into their homes, perimeter-based approaches to security were challenged by much wider network footprints and the need to identify users external to the firewall. Supply-chain security became more of a concern with notable attacks affecting many thousands of firms, some with severe consequences. Finally, the regulatory pressure to implement zero trust is rising following President Joe Biden's 2021 Executive Order on Improving the Nation's Cybersecurity. It directs federal agencies to implement zero trust. That will impact any company doing business with the federal government, and it's likely that zero trust will propagate through other government agencies in the years ahead. Zero-trust architecture can also help maintain compliance around privacy-focused regulations concerned about personal data (CSO Online, 2022).

    IT professionals are modestly confident that they can meet new government legislation regarding cybersecurity requirements. When asked to rank their confidence on a scale of one to five, the most common answer was 3 out of 5 (38.5%). The next most common answer was 4 out of 5 (33.3%).

    Zero-trust barriers:
    Talent shortage and lack of leadership involvement

    Out of a list of challenges, IT professionals are most concerned with talent shortages leading to capacity constraints in cybersecurity. Fifty-four per cent say they are concerned or very concerned with this issue. Implementing a new zero-trust framework for security will be difficult if capacity only allows for security teams to respond to incidents.

    The next most pressing concern is that cyber risks are not on the radar of executive leaders or the board of directors, with 46% of IT pros saying they are concerned or very concerned. Since zero-trust requires that organizations take an enterprise risk management approach to cybersecurity and involve top decision makers, this reveals another area where organizations may fall short of achieving a zero-trust environment.

    How confident are you that your organization is prepared to meet current and future government legislation regarding cybersecurity requirements? A circle graph is shown with 68.6% colored dark green, and the words: AVG 3.43 written inside the graph.
    a bar graph showing the confidence % for numbers 1-5
    54%

    of IT professionals are concerned with talent shortages leading to capacity constraints in cybersecurity.

    46%

    of IT professionals are concerned that cyber risks are not on the radar of executive leaders or the board of directors.

    Zero trust mitigates risk while removing friction

    A zero-trust approach to security requires organizations to view cybersecurity risk as part of its overall risk framework. Both CIOs and their supervisors agree that IT-related risks are a pain point. When asked to rate the severity of pain points, 58% of CIOs rated IT-related business risk incidents as a minor pain or major pain. Their supervisors were more concerned, with 61% rating it similarly. Enterprises can mitigate this pain point by involving top levels of leadership in cybersecurity planning.

    Organizations can be wary about implementing new security measures out of concern it will put barriers between employees and what they need to work. Through a zero-trust approach that focuses on identity verification, friction can be avoided. Overall, IT organizations did well to provide security without friction for stakeholders over the past 18 months. Results from Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision Diagnostic shows that stakeholders almost all agree friction due to security practices are acceptable. The one area that stands to be improved is remote/mobile device access, where 78.3% of stakeholders view the friction as acceptable.

    A zero-trust approach treats user identity the same regardless of device and whether it is inside or outside of the corporate network. This can remove friction when workers are looking to connect remotely from a mobile device.

    IT-related business risk incidents viewed as a pain point

    CXO 61%
    CIO 58%

    Business stakeholders rate security friction levels as acceptable

    A bar graph is depicted with the following dataset: Regulatory Compliance: 93.80%; Office/Desktop Computing:	86.50%;Data Access/Integrity: 86.10%; Remote/Mobile Device Access:	78.30%;

    CIO Business Vision Diagnostic, N=259

    Opportunities

    Move to identity-driven access control

    Today's approach to access control on the network is to allow every device to exchange data with every other device. User endpoints and servers talk to each other directly without any central governance. In a zero-trust environment, a centralized zero-trust network access broker provides one-to-one connectivity. This allows servers to rest offline until needed by a user with the right access permissions. Users verify their identity more often as they move throughout the network. The user can access the resources and data they need with minimal friction while protecting servers from unauthorized access. Log files are generated for analysis to raise alerts about when an authorized identity has been compromised.

    Protect data with just-in-time authentication

    Many organizations put process in place to make sure data at rest is encrypted, but often when users copy that data to their own devices, it becomes unencrypted, allowing attackers opportunities to exfiltrate sensitive data from user endpoints. Moving to a zero-trust environment where each data access is brokered by a central broker allows for encryption to be preserved. Parties accessing a document must exchange keys to gain access, locking out unauthorized users that don't have both sets of keys to decrypt the data (MIT Lincoln Laboratory, 2022).

    Harness free and open-source tools to deploy zero trust

    IT teams may not be seeing a budget infusion to invest in a new approach to security. By making use of the many free and open-source tools available, they can bootstrap their strategy into reality. Here's a list to get started:

    PingCastle Wrangle your Active Directory and find all the domains that you've long since forgotten about and manage the situation appropriately. Also builds a spoke-and-hub map of your Active Directory.

    OpenZiti Create an overlay network to enable programmable networking that supports zero trust.

    Snyk Developers can automatically find and fix vulnerabilities before they commit their code. This vendor offers a free tier but users that scale up will need to pay.

    sigstore Open-source users and maintainers can use this solution to verify the code they are running is the code the developer intended. Works by stitching together free services to facilitate software signing, verify against a transparent ledger, and provide auditable logs.

    Microsoft's SBOM generation tool A software bill of materials is a requirement in President Biden's Executive Order, intended to provide organizations with more transparency into their software components by providing a comprehensive list. Microsoft's tool will work with Windows, Linux, and Mac and auto-detect a longlist of software components, and it generates a list organized into four sections that will help organizations comprehend their software footprint.

    Risks

    Organizational culture change to accommodate zero trust

    Zero trust requires that top decision makers get involved in cybersecurity by treating it as an equal consideration of overall enterprise risk. Not all boards will have the cybersecurity expertise required, and some executives may not prioritize cybersecurity despite the warnings. Organizations that don't appoint a chief information security officer (CISO) role to drive the cybersecurity agenda from the top will be at risk of cybersecurity remaining an afterthought.

    Talent shortage

    No matter what industry you're in or what type of organization you run, you need cybersecurity. The demand for talent is very high and organizations are finding it difficult to hire in this area. Without the talent needed to mature cybersecurity approaches to a zero-trust model, the focus will remain on foundational principles of patch management to eliminate vulnerabilities and intrusion prevention. Smaller organizations may want to consider a "virtual CISO" that helps shape the organizational strategy on a part-time basis.

    Social engineering

    Many enterprise security postures remain vulnerable to an attack that commandeers an employee's identity to infiltrate the network. Hosted single sign-on models provide low friction and continuity of identity across applications but also offer a single point of failure that hackers can exploit. Phishing scams that are designed to trick an employee into providing their credentials to a fake website or to just click on a link that delivers a malware payload are the most common inroads that criminals take into the corporate network. Being aware of how user behavior influences security is crucial.

    CASE STUDY
    Engage the entire organization with cybersecurity awareness

    Serge Suponitskiy, CIO, Brosnan Risk Consultants

    Brosnan provides private security services to high-profile clients and is staffed by security experts with professional backgrounds in intelligence services and major law enforcement agencies. Safe to say that security is taken seriously in this culture and CIO Serge Suponitskiy makes sure that extends to all back-office staff that support the firm's activities. He's aware that people are often the weakest link in a cybersecurity posture and are prone to being fooled by a phishing email or even a fraudulent phone call. So cybersecurity training is an ongoing activity that takes many forms. He sends out a weekly cybersecurity bulletin that features a threat report and a story about the "scam of the week." He also uses KnowBe4, a tool that simulates phishing attacks and trains employees in security awareness. Suponitskiy advises reaching out to Marketing or HR for help with engaging employees and finding the right learning opportunities.

    "What is financially the best solution to protect yourself? It's to train your employees. … You can buy all of the tools and it's expensive. Some of the prices are going up for no reason. Some by 20%, some by 50%, it's ridiculous. So, the best way is to keep training, to keep educating, and to reimagine the training. It's not just sending this video that no one clicks on or posting a poster no one looks at. … Given the fact we're moving into this recession world, and everyone is questioning why we need to spend more, it's time to reimagine the training approach."

    CASE STUDY
    Focus on micro-segmentation as the foundation of zero trust

    David Senf, National Cybersecurity Strategist, Bell

    As a cybersecurity analyst and advisor that works with Bell's clients, David Senf sees zero-trust security as an opportunity for organizations to put a strong set of mitigating controls in place to defend against the thorny challenge of reducing vulnerabilities in their software supply chain. With major breaches being linked to widely used software in the past couple of years, security teams might find it effective to focus on a different layer of security to prevent certain breaches. With security policy being enforced at a narrow point/perimeter, attacks are in essence blocked from exploiting application vulnerabilities (e.g. you can't exploit what you can see). Organizations must still ensure there is a solid vulnerability management program in place, but surrounding applications with other controls is critical. One aspect of zero trust, micro-segmentation, which is an approach to network management, can limit the damage caused by a breach. The solutions help to map out and protect the different connections between applications that could otherwise be abused for discovery or lateral movement. Senf advises that knowing your inventory of software and the interdependencies between applications is the first step on a zero-trust journey, before putting protection and detection in place.

    "Next year will be a year of a lot more ZTNA, zero-trust network access, being deployed. So, I think that will give organizations more of an understanding of what zero trust is as well, from a really basic perspective. If I can just limit what applications you can see and no one can even see that application, it's undiscoverable because I've got that ZTNA solution in place. … I would see that as a leading area of deployment and coming to understand what zero trust is in 2023."

    From priorities to action

    Go deeper on pursuing your priorities by improving the associated capabilities.

    Improve Asset Management

    Enable reduced friction in the remote user experience by underpinning it with a hardware asset management program. Creating an inventory of devices and effectively tracking them will aid in maintaining compliance, result in stronger policy enforcement, and reduce the harm of a lost or stolen device.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Improve Stakeholder Relations

    Communicate the transition from a perimeter-based security approach to an "Always Verify" approach with a clear roadmap toward implementation. Map key protect surfaces to business goals to demonstrate the importance of zero-trust security in helping the organization succeed. Help the organization's top leadership build awareness of cybersecurity risk.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Improve External Compliance

    Manage the challenge of meeting new government requirements to implement zero-trust security and other data protection and cybersecurity regulations with a compliance program. Create a control environment that aligns multiple compliance regimes, and be prepared for IT audits.

    Build a Security Compliance Program

    Engage employees in the digital age

    Priority 04

    • ITRG02 LEADERSHIP, CULTURE, AND VALUES
    • BAI05 ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE MANAGEMENT
    • APO03 ENTERPRISE ARCHITECTURE

    Lead a strong culture through digital means to succeed in engaging the hybrid workforce.

    The new deal for employers in a hybrid work world

    Necessity is the mother of innovation.

    The pandemic's disruption for non-essential workers looks to have a long-lasting, if not permanent, effect on the relationship between employer and employee. The new bargain for almost all organizations is a hybrid work reality, with employees splitting time between the office and working remotely, if not working remotely full-time. IT is in a unique position in the organization as it must not only contend with the shift to this new deal with its own employees but facilitate it for the entire organization.

    With 90% of organizations embracing some form of hybrid work, IT leaders have an opportunity to shift from coping with the new work reality to finding opportunities to improve productivity. Organizations that embrace a hybrid model for their IT departments see a more effective IT department. Organizations that offered no remote work for IT rated their IT effectiveness on average 6.2 out of 10, while organizations with at least 10% of IT roles in a hybrid model saw significantly higher effectiveness. At minimum, organizations with between 50%-70% of IT roles in a hybrid model rated their effectiveness at 6.9 out of 10.

    IT achieved this increase in effectiveness during a disruptive time that often saw IT take on a heavier burden. Remote work required IT to support more users and be involved in facilitating more work processes. Thriving through this challenging time is a win that's worth sharing with the rest of the organization.

    90% of organizations are embracing some form of hybrid work.

    IT's effectiveness compared to % working hybrid or remotely

    A bar graph is shown which compares the effectiveness of IT work with hybrid and full remote work, compared to No Remote Work for IT.

    High effectiveness doesn't mean high engagement

    Despite IT's success with hybrid work, CIOs are more concerned about their staff sufficiency, skill, and engagement than their supervisors. Among clients using our CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 49% of CIOs considered this issue a major pain point compared to only 32% of CXOs. While IT staff are more effective than ever, even while carrying more of a burden in the digital age, CIOs are still looking to improve staff engagement.

    Info-Tech's State of Hybrid Work Survey illuminates further details about where IT leaders are concerned for their employee engagement. About four in ten IT leaders say they are concerned for employee wellbeing, and almost the same amount say they are concerned they are not able to see signs that employees are demotivated (N=518).

    Boosting IT employees' engagement levels to match their effectiveness will require IT leaders to harness all the tools at their disposal. Communicating culture and effectively managing organizational change in the digital age is a real test of leadership.

    Staff sufficiency, skill, and engagement issues as a major pain point

    CXO 32%
    CIO 49%

    CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostic

    Opportunities

    Drive effectiveness with a hybrid environment

    IT leaders concerned about the erosion of culture and connectedness due to hybrid work can mitigate those effects with increased and improved communication. Among highly effective IT departments, 55% of IT leaders made themselves highly available through instant messaging chat. Another 54% of highly effective leaders increased team meetings (State of Hybrid Work Survey, n=213). The ability to adapt to the team's needs and use a number of tactics to respond is the most important factor. The greater the number of tactics used to overcome communication barriers, the more effective the IT department (State of Hybrid Work Survey, N=518).

    Modernize the office conference room

    A hybrid work approach emphasizes the importance of not only the technology in the office conference room but the process around how meetings are conducted. Creating an equal footing for all participants regardless of how they join is the goal. In pursuit of that, 63% of organizations say they have made changes or upgrades to their conference room technology (n=496). The conferencing experience can influence employee engagement and work culture and enhance collaboration. IT should determine if the business case exists for upgrades and work to decrease the pain of using legacy solutions where possible (State of Hybrid Work in IT: A Trend Report).

    Understand the organizational value chain

    Map out the value chain from the customer perspective and then determine the organizational capabilities involved in delivering on that experience. It is a useful tool for helping IT staff understand how they're connected to the customer experience and organizational mission. It's crucial to identify opportunities to resolve pain points and create more efficiency throughout the organization.

    Risks

    Talent rejects the working model

    Many employees that experienced hybrid work over the past couple of years are finding it's a positive development for work/life balance and aren't interested in a full-time return to the office. Organizations that insist on returning all employees to the office all the time may find that employees choose to leave the organization. Similarly, it could be hard to hire IT talent in a competitive market if the position is required to be onsite every day. Most organizations are providing flexible options to employees and finding ways to manage work in the new digital age.

    Wasted expense on facilities

    Organizations may choose to keep their physical office only to later realize that no one is going to work there. While providing an office space can help foster positive culture through valuable face time, it has to be used intentionally. Managers should plan for specific days that their teams will meet in the office and make sure that work activities take advantage of everyone being in the same place at the same time. Asking everyone to come in so that they can be on a videoconference meeting in their cubicle isn't the point.

    Isolated employees and teams

    Studies on a remote work environment show it has an impact on how many connections each employee maintains within the company. Employees still interact well within their own teams but have fewer interactions across departments. Overall, workers are likely to collaborate just as often as they did when working in the office but with fewer other individuals at the company. Keep the isolating effect of remote work in mind and foster collaboration and networking opportunities across different departments (BBC News, 2022).

    CASE STUDY
    Equal support of in-office and remote work

    Roberto Eberhardt, CIO, Ontario Legislative Assembly

    Working in the legislature of the Ontario provincial government, CIO Roberto Eberhardt's staff went from a fully onsite model to a fully remote model at the outset of the pandemic. Today he's navigating his path to a hybrid model that's somewhere in the middle. His approach is to allow his business colleagues to determine the work model that's needed but to support a technology environment that allows employees to work from home or in the office equally. Every new process that's introduced must meet that paradigm, ensuring it will work in a hybrid environment. For his IT staff, he sees a culture of accountability and commitment to metrics to drive performance measurement as key to the success of this new reality.

    "While it's good in a way, the challenge for us is it became a little more complex because you have to account for all those things in the office environment and in the remote work approach. Everything you do now, you have to say OK well how is this going to work in this world and how will it work in the other world?"

    Creating purpose for IT through strategy

    Mike Russell, Virginia Community College System

    At the Virginia Community College System (VCCS), CIO Mike Russell's IT team supports an organization that governs and delivers services to all community colleges in the state. Russell sees his IT team's purpose as being driven by the organization's mission to ensure success throughout the entire student journey, from enrolment to becoming employed after graduation. That customer-focused mindset starts from the top-level leadership, the chancellor, and the state governor. The VCCS maintains a six-year business plan that informs IT's strategic plan and aligns IT with the mission, and both plans are living documents that get refreshed every two years. Updating the plans provides opportunities for the chancellor to engage the organization and remind everyone of the purpose of their work.

    "The outcome isn't the degree. The outcome we're trying to measure is the job. Did you get the job that you wanted? Whether it's being re-employed or first-time employment, did you get what you were after?"

    From priorities to action

    Go deeper on pursuing your priorities by improving the associated capabilities.

    Improve Leadership, Culture, and Values

    Help leaders manage their teams effectively in a hybrid environment by providing them with the right tools and tactics to manage the challenges of hybrid work. Focus on promoting teamwork and fostering connection.

    Prepare People Leaders for the Hybrid Work Environment

    Improve Organizational Change Management

    Assign accountability for managing the changes that the organization is experiencing in the digital age. Make a people-centric approach that takes human behavior into account and plans to address different needs in different ways. Be proactive about change.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    Improve Enterprise Architecture

    Develop a foundation for aligning IT's activities with business value by creating a right-sized enterprise architecture approach that isn't heavy on bureaucracy. Drive IT's purpose by illustrating how their work contributes to the overall mission and the customer experience.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Shape the IT organization to improve customer experience

    PRIORITY 05

    • BAI03 ENTERPRISE APPLICATION SELECTION & IMPLEMENTATION
    • MEA01 PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
    • ITRG01 IT ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN

    Tightly align the IT organization with the organization's value chain from a customer perspective.

    IT's value is defined by faster, better, bigger

    The pandemic motivated organizations to accelerate their digital transformation efforts, digitalizing more of their tasks and organizing the company's value chain around satisfying the customer experience. Now we see organizations taking their foot off the gas pedal of digitalization and shifting their focus to extracting the value from their investments. They want to execute on the digital transformation in their operations and realize the vision they set out to achieve.

    In our Trends Report we compared the emphasis organizations are putting on digitalization to last year. Overall, we see that most organizations shifted fewer of their processes to digital in the past year.

    We also asked organizations what motivated their push toward automation. The most common drivers are to improve efficiency, with almost seven out of ten organizations looking to increase staff on high-level tasks by automating repetitive tasks, 67% also wanting to increase productivity without increasing headcount, and 59% wanting to reduce errors being made by people. In addition, more than half of organizations pursued automation to improve customer satisfaction.

    What best describes your main motivation to pursue automation, above other considerations?

    A bar graph is depicted showing the following dataset: Increase staff focus on high-level tasks by automating repetitive tasks:	69%; Increase productivity of existing staff to avoid increasing headcount:	67%; Reduce errors made by people:	59%; Improve customer satisfaction:	52%; Achieve cost savings through reduction in headcount:	35%; Increase revenue by enabling higher volume of work:	30%

    Tech Trends 2023 Survey

    To what extent did your organization shift its processes from being manually completed to digitally completed during past year?

    A bar graph is depicted showing the extent to which organizations shifted processes from manual to digital during the past year for 2022 and 2023, from Tech Trends 2023 Survey

    With the shift in focus from implementing new applications to support digital transformation to operating in the new environment, IT must shift its own focus to help realize the value from these systems. At the same time, IT must reorganize itself around the new value chain that's defined by a customer perspective.

    IT struggles to deliver business value or support innovation

    Many current IT departments are structured around legacy processes that hinder their ability to deliver business value. CIOs are trying to grapple with the misalignment between the modern business structure and keep up with the demands for innovation and agility.

    Almost nine in ten CIOs say that business frustration with IT's failure to deliver value is a pain point. Their supervisors have a slightly more favorable opinion, with 76% agreeing that it is a pain point.

    Similarly, nine in ten CIOs say that IT limits affecting business innovation and agility is a pain point, while 81% of their supervisors say the same.

    Supervisors say that IT should "ensure benefits delivery" as the most important process (CEO-CIO Alignment Program). This underlines the need to achieve alignment, optimize service delivery, and facilitate innovation. The pain points identified here will need to be resolved to make this possible.

    IT departments will need to contend with a tight labor market and economic volatility in the year ahead. If this drives down resource capacity, it will be even more critical to tightly align with the organization.

    Views business frustration with IT failure to deliver value as a pain point

    CXO 76%
    CIO 88%

    Views IT limits affecting business innovation and agility as a pain point

    CXO 81%
    CIO

    90%

    CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Opportunities

    Define IT's value by its contributions to enterprise value

    Communicate the performance of IT to stakeholders by attributing positive changes in enterprise value to IT initiatives. For example, if a digital channel helped increase sales in one area, then IT can claim some portion of that revenue. If optimization of another process resulted in cost savings, then IT can claim that as a contribution toward the bottom line. CIOs should develop their handle on how KPIs influence revenues and costs. Keeping tabs on normalized year-over-year revenue comparisons can help demonstrate that IT contributions are making an impact on driving profitability.

    Go with buy versus build if it's a commodity service

    Most back-office functions common to operating a company can be provided by cloud-based applications accessed through a web browser. There's no value in having IT spend time maintaining on-premises applications that require hosting and ongoing maintenance. Organizations that are still accruing technical debt and are unable to modernize will increasingly find it is negatively impacting employee experience, as users expect their working experience to be similar to their experience with consumer applications. In addition, IT will continue to have capacity challenges as resources will be consumed by maintenance. As they seek to outsource some applications, IT will need to consider the geopolitical risk of certain jurisdictions in selecting a provider.

    Redefine how employee performance is tracked

    The concept of "clocking in" for a shift and spending eight hours a day on the job doesn't help guide IT toward its objectives or create any higher sense of purpose. Leaders must work to create a true sense of accountability by reaching consensus on what key performance indicators are important and tasking staff to improve them. Metrics should clearly link back to business outcomes and IT should understand the role they play in delivering a good customer experience.

    Risks

    Lack of talent available to drive transformation

    CIOs are finding it difficult to hire the talent needed to create the capacity they need as digital demands of their organizations increase. This could slow the pace of change as new positions created in IT go unfilled. CIOs may need to consider reskilling and rebalancing workloads of existing staff in the short term and tap outsourcing providers to help make up shortfalls.

    Resistance to change

    New processes may have been given the official rubber stamp, but that doesn't mean staff are adhering to them. Organizations that reorganize themselves must take steps to audit their processes to ensure they're executed the way they intend. Some employees may feel they are being made obsolete or pushed out of their jobs and become disengaged.

    Short-term increased costs

    Restructuring the organization can come with the need for new tools and more training. It may be necessary to operate with redundant staff for the transitional period. Some additional expenses might be incurred for a brief period as the new structure is being put in place.

    Emphasize the value of IT in driving revenue

    Salman Ali, CIO, McDonald's Germany

    As the new CIO to McDonald's Germany, Salman Ali came on board with an early mandate to reorganize the IT department. The challenge is to merge two organizations together: one that delivers core technology services of infrastructure, security, service desk, and compliance and one that delivers customer-facing technology such as in-store touchscreen kiosks and the mobile app for food delivery. He is looking to organize this new-look department around the technology in the hands of both McDonald's staff and its customers. In conversations with his stakeholders, Ali emphasizes the value that IT is driving rather than discussing the costs that go into it. For example, there was a huge cost in integrating third-party meal delivery apps into the point-of-sales system, but the seamless experience it delivers to customers looking to place an order helps to drive a large volume of sales. He plans to reorganize his department around this value-driven approach. The organization model will be executed with clear accountability in place and key performance indicators to measure success.

    "Technology is no longer just an enabler. It's now a strategic business function. When they talk about digital, they are really talking about what's in the customers' hands and what do they use to interact with the business directly? Digital transformation has given technology a new front seat that's really driving the business."

    CASE STUDY
    Overhauling the "heartbeat" of the organization

    Ernest Solomon, Former CIO, LAWPRO

    LAWPRO is a provider of professional liability insurance and title insurance in Canada. The firm is moving its back-office applications from a build approach to a buy approach and focusing its build efforts on customer-facing systems tied to revenue generation. CIO Ernest Solomon says his team has been developing on a legacy platform for two decades, but it's time to modernize. The firm is replacing its legacy platform and moving to a cloud-based system to address technical debt and improve the experience for staff and customers. The claims and policy management platform, the "heartbeat" of the organization, is moving to a software-as-a-service model. At the same time, the firm's customer-facing Title Plus application is being moved to a cloud-native, serverless architecture. Solomon doesn't see the need for IT to spend time building services for the back office, as that doesn't align with the mission of the organization. Instead, he focuses his build efforts on creating a competitive advantage.

    "We're redefining the customer experience, which is how do we move the needle in a positive direction for all the lawyers that interact with us? How do we generate that value-based proposition and improve their interactions with our organization?"

    From priorities to action

    Go deeper on pursuing your priorities by improving the associated capabilities.

    Improve Enterprise Application Selection & Implementation

    Help leaders manage their teams effectively in a hybrid environment by providing them with the right tools and tactics to manage the challenges of hybrid work. Focus on promoting teamwork and fostering connection.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Improve Performance Measurement

    Drive the most important IT process in the eyes of supervisors by defining business value and linking IT spend to it. Make benefits realization part of your IT governance.

    Maximize Business Value From IT Through Benefits Realization

    Improve IT Organizational Design

    Showcase IT's value to the business by aligning IT spending and staffing to business functions. Provide transparency into business consumption of IT and compare your spending to your peers'.

    IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    The Five Priorities

    Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

    1. Adjust IT operations to manage for inflation
    2. Prepare your data pipeline to train AI
    3. Go all in on zero-trust security
    4. Engage employees in the digital age
    5. Shape the IT organization to improve customer experience

    Expert Contributors

    In order of appearance

    Denise Cornish, Associate VP of IT and Deputy COO, Western University of Health Sciences

    Jim Love, CIO, IT World Canada

    Christian Magsisi, Vice President of Venue and Digital Technology, MLSE

    Humza Teherany, Chief Technology Officer, MLSE

    Serge Suponitskiy, CIO, Brosnan Risk Consultants

    David Senf, National Cybersecurity Strategist, Bell

    Roberto Eberhardt, CIO, Ontario Legislative Assembly

    Mike Russell, Virginia Community College System

    Salman Ali, CIO, McDonald's Germany

    Ernest Solomon, Former CIO, LAWPRO

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Brad, and Seth Patton. "In a Hybrid World, Your Tech Defines Employee Experience." Harvard Business Review, 18 Feb. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    "Artificial Intelligence Is Permeating Business at Last." The Economist, 6 Dec. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    Badlani, Danesh Kumar, and Adrian Diglio. "Microsoft Open Sources Its Software Bill
    of Materials (SBOM) Generation Tool." Engineering@Microsoft, 12 July 2022. Accessed
    12 Dec. 2022.
    Birch, Martin. "Council Post: Equipping Employees To Succeed In Digital Transformation." Forbes, 9 Aug. 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Bishop, Katie. "Is Remote Work Worse for Wellbeing than People Think?" BBC News,
    17 June 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Carlson, Brian. "Top 5 Priorities, Challenges For CIOs To Recession-Proof Their Business." The Customer Data Platform Resource, 19 July 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    "CIO Priorities: 2020 vs 2023." IT PRO, 23 Sept. 2022. Accessed 2 Nov. 2022.
    cyberinsiders. "Frictionless Zero Trust Security - How Minimizing Friction Can Lower Risks and Boost ROI." Cybersecurity Insiders, 9 Sept. 2021. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Garg, Sampak P. "Top 5 Regulatory Reasons for Implementing Zero Trust."
    CSO Online, 27 Oct. 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Heikkilä, Melissa. "The Viral AI Avatar App Lensa Undressed Me—without My Consent." MIT Technology Review, 12 Dec. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    Jackson, Brian. "How the Toronto Raptors Operate as the NBA's Most Data-Driven Team." Spiceworks, 1 Dec. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    Kiss, Michelle. "How the Digital Age Has Transformed Employee Engagement." Spiceworks,16 Dec. 2021. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Matthews, David. "EU Hopes to Build Aligned Guidelines on Artificial Intelligence with US." Science|Business, 22 Nov. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    Maxim, Merritt. "New Security & Risk Planning Guide Helps CISOs Set 2023 Priorities." Forrester, 23 Aug. 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Miller, Michael J. "Gartner Surveys Show Changing CEO and Board Concerns Are Driving a Different CIO Agenda for 2023." PCMag, 20 Oct. 2022. Accessed 2 Nov. 2022.
    MIT Lincoln Laboratory. "Overview of Zero Trust Architectures." YouTube,
    2 March 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    MIT Technology Review Insights. "CIO Vision 2025: Bridging the Gap between BI and AI." MIT Technology Review, 20 Sept. 2022. Accessed 1 Nov. 2022.
    Paramita, Ghosh. "Data Architecture Trends in 2022." DATAVERSITY, 22 Feb. 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Rosenbush, Steven. "Cybersecurity Tops the CIO Agenda as Threats Continue to Escalate - WSJ." The Wall Street Journal, 17 Oct. 2022. Accessed 2 Nov. 2022.
    Sacolick, Isaac. "What's in the Budget? 7 Investments for CIOs to Prioritize." StarCIO,
    22 Aug. 2022. Accessed 2 Nov. 2022.
    Singh, Yuvika. "Digital Culture-A Hurdle or A Catalyst in Employee Engagement." International Journal of Management Studies, vol. 6, Jan. 2019, pp. 54–60. ResearchGate, https://doi.org/10.18843/ijms/v6i1(8)/08.
    "Talent War Set to Become Top Priority for CIOs in 2023, Study Reveals." CEO.digital,
    8 Sept. 2022. Accessed 7 Dec. 2022.
    Tanaka, Rodney. "WesternU COMP and COMP-Northwest Named Apple Distinguished School." WesternU News. 10 Feb. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    Wadhwani, Sumeet. "Meta's New Large Language Model Galactica Pulled Down Three Days After Launch." Spiceworks, 22 Nov. 2022. Accessed 12 Dec. 2022.
    "World Economic Outlook." International Monetary Fund (IMF), 11 Oct. 2022. Accessed
    14 Dec. 2022.

    Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}280|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Business is moving faster than ever and IT is getting more demands at a faster pace.
    • Many IT organizations have traditional structures and approaches that have served them well in the past. However, these frameworks and approaches alone are no longer sufficient for today’s challenges and rapidly changing environment.
    • The inability to adaptively design and deliver services as requirements change has led to diminishing service quality and an increase in shadow IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Being Agile is a mindset. It is not meant to be prescriptive, but to encourage you to leverage the best approaches, frameworks, and tools to meet your needs and get the job done now.
    • The goal of service management is to enable and drive value for the business. Service management practices have to be flexible and adaptable enough to manage and deliver the right service value at the right time at the right level of quality.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand Agile principles, how they align with service management principles, and what the optimal states for agility look like.
    • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s state of agility, identify the gaps, and create a custom roadmap to incorporate agility into your service management practice.
    • Increase business satisfaction. The ultimate outcome of having agility in your service delivery is satisfied customers.

    Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a roadmap for service management agility, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the optimal state for agility

    Understand the components of agility and what the optimal states are for service management agility.

    • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 1: Understand the Optimal States for Agility

    2. Assess your current state of agility

    Determine the current state of agility in the service management practice.

    • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 2: Assess Your Current State of Agility
    • Service Management Agility Assessment Tool

    3. Build the roadmap

    Create a roadmap for service management agility and present it to key stakeholders to obtain their support.

    • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap for Service Management Agility
    • Service Management Agility Roadmap Template
    • Building Agility Into Our Service Management Practice Stakeholders Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define the Optimal States for Agility in Service Management

    The Purpose

    Understand agility and how it can complement service management.

    Understand how the components of culture, structure, processes, and resources enable agility in service management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of Agile principles.

    Identifying opportunities for agility.

    Understanding of how Agile principles align with service management.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand agility.

    1.2 Understand how Agile methodologies can complement service management through culture, structure, processes, and resources.

    Outputs

    Summary of Agile principles.

    Summary of optimal components in culture, structure, processes, and resources that enable agility.

    2 Assess Your Current State of Agility in Service Management

    The Purpose

    Assess your current organizational agility with respect to culture, structure, processes, and resources.

    Identify your agility strengths and weaknesses with the agility score.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand your organization’s current enablers and constraints for agility.

    Have metrics to identify strengths or weaknesses in culture, structure, processes, and resources.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete an agility assessment.

    Outputs

    Assessment score of current state of agility.

    3 Build the Roadmap for Service Management Agility

    The Purpose

    Determine the gaps between the current and optimal states for agility.

    Create a roadmap for service management agility.

    Create a stakeholders presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a completed custom roadmap that will help build sustainable agility into your service management practice.

    Present the roadmap to key stakeholders to communicate your plans and get organizational buy-in.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a custom roadmap for service management agility.

    3.2 Create a stakeholders presentation on service management agility.

    Outputs

    Completed roadmap for service management agility.

    Completed stakeholders presentation on service management agility.

    Purchase Storage Without Buyer's Remorse

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}505|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Storage & Backup Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /storage-and-backup-optimization
    • Storage is a big ticket item that often only gets purchased every three to five years. Many buyers focus on capital costs and rely on vendors for scoping of requirements leading to overspending and buyer’s remorse.
    • Three-quarters of storage buyers are dissatisfied with at least one aspect of their most recent storage purchase, and over 40% of organizations switched vendors, making it critical to understand the market and the important factors to avoiding buyer’s remorse.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Know where to negotiate on price. Many organizations spend as much or more effort on negotiating a better price as they do on assessing current and future requirements; yet, more than 35% of organizations report dissatisfaction with hardware, software, and/or maintenance and support costs from their most recent purchase.
    • Understand support agreements and vendor offerings. Organizations satisfied with their storage purchase spent more effort evaluating support capabilities of vendors and assessing current and future requirements.
    • Determine costs to scale-up your storage. More than 35% of organizations report dissatisfaction with costs to scale their solutions by adding disks or disk trays, following their initial contract, making it crucial to establish scaling costs with your vendor.

    Impact and Result

    • Get peace of mind knowing that the quote you’re about to sign delivers the solution and capabilities around software and support that you think you are getting.
    • Understand contract discounting levels and get advice around where further discounting can be negotiated with the reseller.
    • Future-proof your purchase by capitalizing on Info-Tech’s exposure to other clients’ past experiences.

    Purchase Storage Without Buyer's Remorse Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Purchase storage without buyer's remorse

    Ensure the purchase is the lowest cost with fewest future headaches.

    • Storyboard: Purchase Storage Without Buyer's Remorse

    2. Evaluate storage vendors and their product capabilities

    Select the most appropriate offering for business needs at a competitive price point.

    3. Ensure vendors reveal all details regarding strengths and weaknesses

    Get the lowest priced feature set for the selected product.

    • Storage Reseller Interrogation Script
    [infographic]

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}166|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Devices
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-devices
    • Windows 10 is going EOL in 2025.That is closer than you think.
    • Many of your endpoints are not eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade. You can’t afford to replace all your endpoints this year. How do you manage this Microsoft initiated catastrophe?
    • You want to stay close to the leading edge of technology and services, but how do you do that while keeping your spending in check and within budget?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Windows 11 is a step forward in security, which is one of the primary reasons for the release of the new operating system. Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    Impact and Result

    Windows 11 hardware requirements will result in devices that are not eligible for the upgrade. Companies will be left to spend money on replacement devices. Following the Info-Tech guidance will help clients properly budget for hardware replacements before Windows 10 is no longer supported by Microsoft. Eligible devices can be upgraded, but Info-Tech guidance can help clients properly plan the upgrade using the upgrade ring approach.

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Deck – A look into some of the pros and cons of Microsoft’s latest desktop operating system, along with guidance on moving forward with this inevitable upgrade.

    Discover the reason for the release of Windows 11, what you require to be eligible for the upgrade, what features were added or updated, and what features were removed. Our guidance will assist you with a planned and controlled rollout of the Windows 11 upgrade. We also provide guidance on how to approach a device refresh plan if some devices are not eligible for Windows 11. The upgrade is inevitable, but you have time, and you have options.

    • Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11 Storyboard

    2. What Are My Options If My Devices Cannot Upgrade to Windows 11? – Build a Windows 11 Device Replacement budget with our Hardware Asset Management Budgeting Tool.

    This tool will help you budget for a hardware asset refresh and to adjust the budget as necessary to accommodate any unexpected changes. The tool can easily be modified to assist in developing and justifying the budget for hardware assets for a Windows 11 project. Follow the instructions on each tab and feel free to play with the HAM budgeting tool to fit your needs.

    • HAM Budgeting Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Prepare for the Upgrade to Windows 11

    The upgrade is inevitable, but you have time, and you have options.

    Analyst Perspective

    Upgrading to Windows 11 is easy, and while it should be properly investigated and planned, it should absolutely be an activity you undertake.

    “You hear that Mr. Anderson? That is the sound of inevitability.” ("The Matrix Quotes" )

    The fictitious Agent Smith uttered those words to Keanu Reeves’ character, Neo, in The Matrix in 1999, and while Agent Smith was using them in a very sinister and figurative context, the words could just as easily be applied to the concept of upgrading to the Windows 11 operating system from Microsoft in 2022.

    There have been two common, recurring themes in the media since late 2019. One is the global pandemic and the other is cyber-related crime. Microsoft is not in a position to make an impact on a novel coronavirus, but it does have the global market reach to influence end-user technology and it appears that it has done just that. Windows 11 is a step forward in endpoint security and functionality. It also solidifies the foundation for future innovations in end-user operating systems and how they are delivered. Windows-as-a-Service (WAAS) is the way forward for Microsoft. Windows 10 is living on borrowed time, with a defined end of support date of October 14, 2025. Upgrading to Windows 11 is easy, and while it should be properly investigated and planned, it should absolutely be an activity you undertake.

    It is inevitable!

    P.J. Ryan

    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Windows 10 is going EOL in 2025. That is closer than you think.
    • Many of your endpoints are not eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade. You can’t afford to replace all your endpoints this year. How do you manage this Microsoft-initiated catastrophe?
    • You want to stay close to the leading edge of technology and services, but how do you do that while keeping your spending in check and within budget?

    Common Obstacles

    • The difference between Windows 10 and Windows 11 is not clear. Windows 11 looks like Windows 10 with some minor changes, mostly cosmetic. Many online users don’t see the need. Why upgrade? What are the benefits?
    • The cost of upgrading devices just to be eligible for Windows 11 is high.
    • Your end users don’t like change. This is not going to go over well!

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Spend wisely. Space out your endpoint replacements and upgrades over several years. You do not have to upgrade everything right away.
    • Be patient. Windows 11 contained some bugs when it was initially released. Microsoft fixed most of the issues through monthly quality updates, but you should ensure that you are comfortable with the current level of functionality before you upgrade.
    • Use the upgrade ring approach. Test your applications with a small group first, and then stage the rollout to increasingly larger groups over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a lot of talk about Windows 11, but this is only an operating system upgrade, and it is not a major one. Understand what is new, what is added, and what is missing. Check your devices to determine how many are eligible and ineligible. Many organizations will have to spend capital on endpoint upgrades. Solid asset management practices will help.

    Insight summary

    Windows 11 is a step forward in security, which is one of the primary reasons for the release of the new operating system.

    Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    The hardware requirements for Windows 11 enable security features such as password-less logon, disk encryption, increased startup protection with secure boot, and virtualization-based security.

    Many organizations will have to spend capital on endpoint upgrades.

    Microsoft now insists that modern hardware is required for Windows 11 for not only security but also for improved stability. That same hardware requirement will mean that many devices that are only three or four years old (as well as older ones) may not be eligible for Windows 11.

    Windows 11 is a virtualization challenge for some providers.

    The hardware requirements for physical devices are also required for virtual devices. The TPM module appears to be the biggest challenge. Oracle VirtualBox and Citrix Hypervisor as well as AWS and Google are unable to support Windows 11 virtual devices as of the time of writing.

    Windows 10 will be supported by Microsoft until October 2025.

    That will remove some of the pressure felt due to the ineligibility of many devices and the need to refresh them. Take your time and plan it out, keeping within budget constraints. Use the upgrade ring approach for systems that are eligible for the Windows 11 upgrade.

    New look and feel, and a center screen taskbar.

    Corners are rounded, some controls look a little different, but overall Windows 11 is not a dramatic shift from Windows 10. It is easier to navigate and find features. Oh, and yes, the taskbar (and start button) is shifted to the center of the screen, but you can move them back to the left if desired.

    The education industry gets extra attention with the release of Windows 11.

    Windows 11 comes with multiple subscription-based education offerings, but it also now includes a new lightweight SE edition that is intended for the K-8 age group. Microsoft also released a Windows 11 Education SE specific laptop, at a very attractive price point. Other manufacturers also offer Windows 11 SE focused devices.

    Why Windows 11?

    Windows 10 was supposed to be the final desktop OS from Microsoft, wasn’t it?

    Maybe. It depends who you ask.

    Jerry Nixon, a Microsoft developer evangelist, gained notoriety when he uttered these words while at a Microsoft presentation as part of Microsoft Ignite in 2015: “Right now we’re releasing Windows 10, and because Windows 10 is the last version of Windows, we’re all still working on Windows 10,” (Hachman). Microsoft never officially made that statement. Interestingly enough, it never denied the comments made by Jerry Nixon either.

    Perhaps Microsoft released a new operating system as a financial grab, a way to make significant revenue?

    Nope.

    Windows 11 is a free upgrade or is included with any new computer purchase.

    Market share challenges?

    Doubtful.

    It’s true that Microsoft's market share of desktop operating systems is dropping while Apple OS X and Google Chrome OS are rising.

    In fact, Microsoft has relinquished over 13% of the market share since 2012 and Apple has almost doubled its market share. BUT:

    Microsoft is still holding 75.12% of the market while Apple is in the number 2 spot with 14.93% (gs.statcounter.com).

    The market share is worth noting for Microsoft but it hardly warrants a new operating system.

    New look and feel?

    Unlikely

    New start button and taskbar orientation, new search window, rounded corners, new visual look on some controls like the volume bar, new startup sound, new Windows logo, – all minor changes. Updates could achieve the same result.

    Security?

    Likely the main reason.

    Windows 11 comes with a list of hardware requirements that enable the use of tools and features that, when combined, will reduce malware infections.

    The hardware requirements for Windows 11 enable security features such as password-less logon, disk encryption, increased startup protection with secure boot, and virtualization-based security.

    The features are available on all Windows 11 physical devices, due to the common hardware requirements.

    Windows 11 hardware-based security

    These hardware options and features were available in Windows 10 but not enforced. With Windows 11, they are no longer optional. Below is a description and explanation of the main features.

    Feature What it is How it works
    TPM 2.0 (Trusted Platform Module) Chip TPM is a chip on the motherboard of the computer. It is used to store encryption keys, certificates, and passwords. TPM does this securely with tamper-proof prevention. It can also generate encryption keys and it includes its own unique encryption key that cannot be altered (helpdeskgeek.com). You do not need to enter your password once you setup Windows Hello, so the password is no longer easy to capture and steal. It is set up on a device per device basis, meaning if you go to a different device to sign in, your Windows Hello authentication will not follow you and you must set up your Hello pin or facial recognition again on that particular device. TPM (Trusted Platform Module) can store the credentials used by Windows Hello and encrypt them on the module.
    Windows Hello Windows Hello is an alternative to using a password for authentication. Users can use a pin, a fingerprint, or facial recognition to authenticate.
    Device Encryption Device encryption is only on when your device is off. It scrambles the data on your disk to make it unreadable unless you have the key to unscramble it. If your endpoint is stolen, the contents of the hard drive will remain encrypted and cannot be accessed by anyone unless they can properly authenticate on the device and allow the system to unscramble the encrypted data.
    UEFI Secure Boot Capable UEFI is an acronym for Unified Extensible Firmware Interface. It is an interface between the operating system and the computer firmware. Secure Boot, as part of the firmware interface, ensures that only unchangeable and approved software and drivers are loaded at startup and not any malware that may have infiltrated the system (Lumunge). UEFI, with Secure Boot, references a database containing keys and signatures of drivers and runtime code that is approved as well as forbidden. It will not let the system boot up unless the signature of the driver or run-time code that is trying to execute is approved. This UEFI Secure boot recognition process continues until control is handed over to the operating system.
    Virtualization Based Security (VBS) and Hypervisor-Protected Code Integrity (HVCI) VBS is security based on virtualization capabilities. It uses the virtualization features of the Windows operating system, specifically the Hyper-V hypervisor, to create and isolate a small chunk of memory that is isolated from the operating system. HVCI checks the integrity of code for violations. The Code Integrity check happens in the isolated virtual area of memory protected by the hypervisor, hence the acronym HVCI (Hypervisor Protected Code Integrity) (Murtaza). In the secure, isolated region of memory created by VBS with the hypervisor, Windows will run checks on the integrity of the code that runs various processes. The isolation protects the stored item from tampering by malware and similar threats. If they run incident free, they are released to the operating system and can run in the standard memory space. If issues are detected, the code will not be released, nor will it run in the standard memory space of the operating system, and damage or compromise will be prevented.

    How do all the hardware-based security features work?

    This scenario explains how a standard boot up and login should happen.

    You turn on your computer. Secure Boot authorizes the processes and UEFI hands over control to the operating system. Windows Hello works with TPM and uses a pin to authenticate the user and the operating systems gives you access to the Windows environment.

    Now imagine the same process with various compromised scenarios.

    You turn on your computer. Secure Boot does not recognize the signature presented to it by the second process in the boot sequence. You will be presented with a “Secure Boot Violation” message and an option to reboot. Your computer remains protected.

    You boot up and get past the secure boot process and UEFI passes control over to the Windows 11 operating system. Windows Hello asks for your pin, but you cannot remember the pin and incorrectly enter it three times before admitting temporary defeat. Windows Hello did not find a matching pin on the TPM and will not let you proceed. You cannot log in but in the eyes of the operating system, it has prevented an unauthorized login attempt.

    You power up your computer, log in without issue, and go about your morning routine of checking email, etc. You are not aware that malware has infiltrated your system and modified a page in system memory to run code and access the operating system kernel. VBS and HVCI check the integrity of that code and detect that it is malicious. The code remains isolated and prevented from running, protecting your system.

    TPM, Hello, UEFI with Secure Boot, VBS and HVCI all work together like a well-oiled machine.

    “Microsoft's rationale for Windows 11's strict official support requirements – including Secure Boot, a TPM 2.0 module, and virtualization support – has always been centered on security rather than raw performance.” – Andrew Cunningham, arstechnica.com

    “Windows 11 raises the bar for security by requiring hardware that can enable protections like Windows Hello, Device Encryption, virtualization-based security (VBS), hypervisor-protected code integrity (HVCI), and Secure Boot. These features in combination have been shown to reduce malware by 60% on tested devices.” – Steven J. Vaughan-Nichols, Computerworld

    Can any device upgrade to Windows 11?

    In addition to the security-related hardware requirements listed previously, which may exclude some devices from Windows 11 eligibility, Windows 11 also has a minimum requirement for other hardware components.

    Windows 7 and Windows 10 were publicized as being backward compatible and almost any hardware would be able to run those operating systems. That changed with Windows 11. Microsoft now insists that modern hardware is required for Windows 11 for not only security but also improved stability.

    Software Requirement

    You must be running Windows 10 version 2004 or greater to be eligible for a Windows 11 upgrade (“Windows 11 Requirements”).

    Complete hardware requirements for Windows 11

    • 1 GHz (or faster) compatible 64-bit processor with two or more cores
    • 4 GB RAM
    • 64 GB or more of storage space
    • Compatible with DirectX 12 or later with WDDM 2.0 driver
      • DirectX connects the hardware in your computer with Windows. It allows software to display graphics using the video card or play audio, as long as that software is DirectX compatible. Windows 11 requires version 12 (“What are DirectX 12 compatible graphics”).
      • WDDM is an acronym for Windows Display Driver Model. WDDM is the architecture for the graphics driver for Windows (“Windows Display Driver Model”).
      • Version 2.0 of WDDM is required for Windows 11.
    • 720p display greater than 9" diagonally with 8 bits per color channel
    • UEFI Secure Boot capable
    • TPM 2.0 chip
    • (“Windows 11 Requirements”)

    Windows 11 may challenge your virtual environment

    When Windows 11 was initially released, some IT administrators experienced issues when trying to install or upgrade to Windows 11 in the virtual world.

    The Challenge

    The issues appeared to be centered around the Windows 11 hardware requirements, which must be detected by the Windows 11 pre-install check before the operating system will install.

    The TPM 2.0 chip requirement was indeed a challenge and not offered as a configuration option with Citrix Hypervisor, the free VMware Workstation Player or Oracle VM VirtualBox when Windows 11 was released in October 2021, although it is on the roadmap for Oracle and Citrix Hypervisor. VMware provides alternative products to the free Workstation Player that do support a virtual TPM. Oracle and Citrix reported that the feature would be available in the future and Windows 11 would work on their platforms.

    Short-Term Solutions

    VMware and Microsoft users can add a vTPM hardware type when configuring a virtual Windows 11 machine. Microsoft Azure does offer Windows 11 as an option as a virtual desktop. Citrix Desktop-As-A-Service (DAAS) will connect to Azure, AWS, or Google Cloud and is only limited by the features of the hosting cloud service provider.

    Additional Insight

    According to Microsoft, any VM running Windows 11 must meet the following requirements (“Virtual Machine Support”):

    • It must be a generation 2 VM, and upgrading a generation 1 VM to Windows 11 (in-place) is not possible
    • 64 GB of storage or greater
    • Secure Boot capable with the virtual TPM enabled
    • 4 GB of memory or greater
    • 2 or more virtual processors
    • The CPU of the physical computer that is hosting the VM must meet the Windows 11 (“Windows Processor Requirements”)

    What’s new or updated in Windows 11?

    The following two slides highlight some of the new and updated features in Windows 11.

    Security

    The most important change with Windows 11 is what you cannot see – the security. Windows 11 adds requirements and controls to make the user and device more secure, as described in previous slides.

    Taskbar

    The most prominent change in relation to the look and feel of Windows 11 is the shifting of the taskbar (and Start button) to the center of the screen. Some users may find this more convenient but if you do not and prefer the taskbar and start button back on the left of your screen, you can change it in taskbar settings.

    Updated Apps

    Paint, Photos, Notepad, Media Player, Mail, and other standard Windows apps have been updated with a new look and in some cases minor enhancements.

    User Interface

    The first change users will notice after logging in to Windows 11 is the new user interface – the look and feel. You may not notice the additional colors added to the Windows palette, but you may have thought that the startup sound was different, and the logo also looks different. You would be correct. Other look-and-feel items that changed include the rounded corners on windows, slightly different icons, new wallpapers, and controls for volume and brightness are now a slide bar. File explorer and the settings app also have a new look.

    Microsoft Teams

    Microsoft Teams is now installed on the taskbar by default. Note that this is for a personal Microsoft account only. Teams for Work or School will have to be installed separately if you are using a work or school account.

    What’s new or updated in Windows 11?

    Snap Layouts

    Snap layouts have been enhanced and snap group functionality has been added. This will allow you to quickly snap one window to the side of the screen and open other Windows in the other side. This feature can be accessed by dragging the window you wish to snap to the left or right edge of the screen. The window should then automatically resize to occupy that half of the screen and allow you to select other Windows that are already open to occupy the remaining space on the screen. You can also hover your mouse over the maximize button in the upper right-hand corner of the window. A small screen with multiple snap layouts will appear for your selection. Multiple snapped Windows can be saved as a “Snap Group” that will open together if one of the group windows are snapped in the future.

    Widgets

    Widgets are expanding. Microsoft started the re-introduction of widgets in Windows 10, specifically focusing on the weather. Widgets now include other services such as news, sports, stock prices, and others.

    Android Apps

    Android apps can now run in Windows 11. You will have to use the Amazon store to access and install Android apps, but if it is available in the Amazon store, you can install it on Windows 11.

    Docking

    Docking has improved with Windows 11. Windows knows when you are docked and will minimize apps when you undock so they are not lost. They will appear automatically when you dock again.

    This is not intended to be an inclusive list but does cover some of the more prominent features.

    What’s missing from Windows 11?

    The following features are no longer found in Windows 11:

    • Backward compatibility
      • The introduction of the hardware requirements for Windows 11 removed the backward compatibility (from a hardware perspective) that made the transition from previous versions of Windows to their successor less of a hardware concern. If a computer could run Windows 7, then it could also run Windows 10. That does not automatically mean it can also run Windows 11.
    • Internet Explorer
      • Internet Explorer is no longer installed by default in Windows 11. Microsoft Edge is now the default browser for Windows. Other browsers can also be installed if preferred.
    • Tablet mode
      • Windows 11 does not have a "tablet" mode, but the operating system will maximize the active window and add more space between icons to make selecting them easier if the 2-in-1 hardware detects that you wish to use the device as a tablet (keyboard detached or device opened up beyond 180 degrees, etc.).
    • Semi-annual updates
      • It may take six months or more to realize that semi-annual feature updates are missing. Microsoft moved to an annual feature update schema but continued with monthly quality updates with Windows 11.
    • Specific apps
      • Several applications have been removed (but can be manually added from the Microsoft Store by the user). They include:
        • OneNote for Windows 10
        • 3D Viewer
        • Paint 3D
        • Skype
    • Cortana (by default)
      • Cortana is missing from Windows 11. It is installed but not enabled by default. Users can turn it on if desired.

    Microsoft included a complete list of features that have been removed or deprecated with Windows 11, which can be found here Windows 11 Specs and System Requirements.

    Windows 11 editions

    • Windows 11 is offered in several editions:
      • Windows 11 Home
      • Windows 11 Pro
      • Windows 11 Pro for Workstations
      • Windows 11 Enterprise Windows 11 for Education
      • Windows 11 SE for Education
    • Windows 11 hardware requirements and security features are common throughout all editions.
    • The new look and feel along with all the features mentioned previously are common to all editions as well.
    • Windows Home
      • Standard offering for home users
    • Pro versus Pro for Workstations
      • Windows 11 Pro and Pro for Workstations are both well suited for the business environment with available features such as support for Active Directory or Azure Active Directory, Windows Autopilot, OneDrive for Business, etc.
      • Windows Pro for Workstations is designed for increased demands on the hardware with the higher memory limits (2 TB vs. 6 TB) and processor count (2 CPU vs. 4 CPU).
      • Windows Pro for Workstations also features Resilient File System, Persistent Memory, and SMB Direct. Neither of these features are available in the Windows 11 Pro edition.
      • Windows 11 Pro and Pro for Workstations are both very business focused, although Pro may also be a common choice for non-business users (Home and Education).
    • Enterprise Offerings
      • Enterprise licenses are subscription based and are part of the Microsoft 365 suite of offerings.
      • Windows 11 Enterprise is Windows 11 Pro with some additional addons and functionality in areas such as device management, collaboration, and security services.
      • The level of the Microsoft 365 Enterprise subscription (E3 or E5) would dictate the additional features and functionality, such as the complete Microsoft Defender for Endpoint suite or the Microsoft phone system and Audio Conferencing, which are only available with the E5 subscription.

    Windows 11 Education Editions

    With the release of a laptop targeted specifically at the education market, Microsoft must be taking notice of the Google Chrome educational market penetration, especially with headlines like these.

    “40 Million Chromebooks in Use in Education” (Thurrott)

    “The Unprecedented Growth of the Chromebook Education Market Share” (Carklin)

    “Chromebooks Gain Market Share as Education Goes Online” (Hruska)

    “Chromebooks Gain Share of Education Market Despite Shortages” (Mandaro)

    “Chromebook sales skyrocketed in Q3 2020 with online education fueling demand” (Duke)

    • Education licenses are subscription based and are part of the Microsoft 365 suite of offerings. Educational pricing is one benefit of the Microsoft 365 Education model.
    • Windows 11 Education is Windows 11 Pro with some additional addons and functionality similar to the Enterprise offerings for Windows 11 in areas such as device management, collaboration, and security services. Windows 11 Education also adds some education specific settings such as Classroom Tools, which allow institutions to add new students and their devices to their own environment with fewer issues, and includes OneNote Class Notebook, Set Up School PCs app, and Take a Test app.
    • The level of the Microsoft 365 Education subscription (A3 or A5) would dictate the additional features and functionality, such as the complete Microsoft Defender for Endpoint suite or the Microsoft phone system and Audio Conferencing, which are only available with the A5 subscription.
    • Windows 11 SE for Education:
      • A cloud-first edition of Windows 11 specifically designed for the K-8 education market.
      • Windows 11 SE is a light version of Windows 11 that is designed to run on entry-level devices with better performance and security on that hardware.
      • Windows 11 SE requires Intune for Education and only IT admins can install applications.
    • Microsoft and others have come out with Windows SE specific devices at a low price point.
      • The Microsoft Surface Laptop SE comes pre-loaded with Windows 11 SE and can be purchased for US$249.00.
      • Dell, Asus, Acer, Lenovo, and others also offer Windows 11 SE specific devices (“Devices for Education”).

    Initial Reactions

    Below you can find some actual initial reactions to Windows 11.

    Initial reactions are mixed, as is to be expected with any new release of an operating system. The look and feel is new, but it is not a huge departure from the Windows 10 look and feel. Some new features are well received such as the snap feature.

    The shift of the taskbar (and start button) is the most popular topic of discussion online when it comes to Windows 11 reactions. Some love it and some do not. The best part about the shift of the taskbar is that you can adjust it in settings and move it back to its original location.

    The best thing about reactions is that they garner attention, and thanks in part to all the online reactions and comments, Microsoft is continually improving Windows 11 through quality updates and annual feature releases.

    “My 91-year-old Mum has found it easy!” Binns, Paul ITRG

    “It mostly looks quite nice and runs well.” Jmbpiano, Reddit user

    “It makes me feel more like a Mac user.” Chang, Ben Info-Tech

    “At its core, Windows 11 appears to be just Windows 10 with a fresh coat of paint splashed all over it.” Rouse, Rick RicksDailyTips.com

    “Love that I can snap between different page orientations.” Roberts, Jeremy Info-Tech

    “I finally feel like Microsoft is back on track again.” Jawed, Usama Neowin

    “A few of the things that seemed like issues at first have either turned out not to be or have been fixed with patches.” Jmbpiano, Reddit user

    “The new interface is genuinely intuitive, well-designed, and colorful.” House, Brett AnandTech

    “No issues. Have it out on about 50 stations.” Sandrews1313, Reddit User

    “The most striking change is to the Start menu.” Grabham, Dan pocket-lint.com

    How do I upgrade to Windows 11?

    The process is very similar to applying updates in Windows 10.

    • Windows 11 is offered as an upgrade through the standard Windows 10 update procedure. Windows Update will notify you when the Windows 11 upgrade is ready (assuming your device is eligible for Windows 11).
      • Allow the update (upgrade in this case) to proceed, reboot, and your endpoint will come back to life with Windows 11 installed and ready for you.
    • A fresh install can be delivered by downloading the required Windows 11 installation media from the Microsoft Software Download site for Windows 11.
    • Business users can control the timing and schedule of the Windows 11 rollout to corporate endpoints using Microsoft solutions such as WSUS, Configuration Manager, Intune and Endpoint Manager, or by using other endpoint management solutions.
    • WSUS and Configuration Manager will have to sync the product category for Windows 11 to manage the deployment.
    • Windows Update for Business policies will have to use the target version capability rather than using the feature update referrals alone.
    • Organizations using Intune and a Microsoft 365 E3 license will be able to use the Feature Update Deployments page to select Windows 11.
    • Other modern endpoint management solutions may also allow for a controlled deployment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The upgrade itself may be a simple process but be prepared for the end-user reactions that will follow. Some will love it but others will despise it. It is not an optional upgrade in the long run, so everyone will have to learn to accept it.

    When can I upgrade to Windows 11?

    You can upgrade right now BUT there is no need to rush. Windows 11 was released in October 2021 but that doesn’t mean you have to upgrade everyone right away. Plan this out.

    • Build deployment rings into your Windows 11 upgrade approach: This approach, also referred to as Canary Releases or deployment rings, allows you to ensure that IT can support users if there's a major problem with the upgrade. Instead of disrupting all end users, you are only disrupting a portion of end users.
      • Deploy the initial update to your test environment.
      • After testing is successful or changes have been made, deploy Windows 11 to your pilot group of users.
      • After the pilot group gives you the thumbs up, deploy to the rest of production in phases. Phases are sometimes by office/location, sometimes by department, sometimes by persona (i.e. defer people that don't handle updates well), and usually by a combination of these factors.
      • Increase the size of each ring as you progress.
    • Always back up your data before any upgrade.

    Deployment Ring Example

    Pilot Ring - Individuals from all departments - 10 users

    Ring #1 - Dev, Finance - 20 Users

    Ring #2 - Research - 100 Users

    Ring #3 - Sales, IT, Marketing - 500 Users

    Upgrade your eligible devices and users to Windows 11

    Build Windows 11 Deployment Rings

    Instructions:

    1. Identify who will be in the pilot group. Use individuals instead of user groups.
    2. Identify how many standard rings you need. This number will be based on the total number of employees per office.
    3. Map groups to rings. Define which user groups will be in each ring.
    4. Allow some time to elapse between upgrades. Allow the first group to work with Windows 11 and identify any potential issues that may arise before upgrading the next group.
    5. Track and communicate. Record all information into a spreadsheet like the one on the right. This will aid in communication and tracking.
    Ring Department or Group Total Users Delay Time Before Next Group
    Pilot Ring Individuals from all departments 10 Three weeks
    Ring 1 Dev Finance 20 Two weeks
    Ring 2 Research 100 One week
    Ring 3 Sales, IT Marketing 500 N/A

    What are my options if my devices cannot upgrade to Windows 11?

    Don’t rush out to replace all the ineligible endpoint devices. You have some time to plan this out. Windows 10 will be available and supported by Microsoft until October 2025.

    Use asset management strategies and budget techniques in your Windows 11 upgrade approach:

    • Start with current inventory and determine which devices will not be eligible for upgrade to Windows 11.
    • Prioritize the devices for replacement, taking device age, the role of the user the device supports, and delivery times for remote users into consideration.
    • Take this opportunity to review overall device offerings and end-user compute strategy. This will help decide which devices to offer going forward while improving end-user satisfaction.
    • Determine the cost for replacement devices:
      • Compare vendor offerings using an RFP process.
    • Use the hardware asset management planning spreadsheet on the next slide to budget for the replacements over the coming months leading up to October 2025.

    Leverage Info-Tech research to improve your end-user computing strategy and hardware asset management processes:

    New to End User Computing Strategies? Start with Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy.

    New to IT asset management? Use Info-Tech’s Implement Hardware Asset Management blueprint.

    Use Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool to plan your hardware asset budget

    Build a Windows 11 Device Replacement Budget

    The link below will open up a hardware asset management (HAM) budgeting tool. This tool can easily be modified to assist in developing and justifying the budget for hardware assets for the Windows 11 project. The tool will allow you to budget for hardware asset refresh and to adjust the budget as needed to accommodate any changes. Follow the instructions on each tab to complete the tool.

    A sample of a possible Windows 11 budgeting spreadsheet is shown on the right, but feel free to play with the HAM budgeting tool to fit your needs.

    HAM Budgeting Tool

    Windows 11 Replacement Schedule
    2022 2023 2024 2025
    Department Total to replace Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Left to allocate
    Finance 120 20 20 20 10 10 20 20 0
    HR 28 15 13 0
    IT 30 15 15 0
    Research 58 8 15 5 20 5 5 0
    Planning 80 10 15 15 10 15 15 0
    Other 160 5 30 5 15 15 30 30 30 0
    Totals 476 35 38 35 35 35 35 38 35 50 35 35 35 35 0

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    This project helps support the workforce of the future by answering the following questions: What types of computing devices, provisioning models, and operating systems should be offered to end users? How will IT support devices? What are the policies and governance surrounding how devices are used? What actions are we taking and when? How do end-user devices support larger corporate priorities and strategies?

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    This project will help you analyze the current state of your HAM program, define assets that will need to be managed, and build and involve the ITAM team from the beginning to help embed the change. It will also help you define standard policies, processes, and procedures for each stage of the hardware asset lifecycle, from procurement through to disposal.

    Bibliography

    aczechowski, et al. “Windows 11 Requirements.” Microsoft, 3 June 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Binns, Paul. Personal interview. 07 June 2022.

    Butler, Sydney. “What Is Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and How Does It Work?” Help Desk Geek, 5 August 2021. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Carklin, Nicolette. “The Unprecedented Growth of the Chromebook Education Market Share.” Parallels International GmbH, 26 October 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Chang, Ben. Personal interview. 26 May 2022.

    Cunningham, Andrew. “Why Windows 11 has such strict hardware requirements, according to Microsoft.” Ars Technica, 27 August 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Dealnd-Han, et al. “Windows Processor Requirements.” Microsoft, 9 May 2022. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    “Desktop Operating Systems Market Share Worldwide.” Statcounter Globalstats, June 2021–June 2022. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    “Devices for education.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Duke, Kent. “Chromebook sales skyrocketed in Q3 2020 with online education fueling demand.” Android Police, 16 November 2020. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Grabham, Dan. “Windows 11 first impressions: Our initial thoughts on using Microsoft's new OS.” Pocket-Lint, 24 June 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Hachman, Mark. “Why is there a Windows 11 if Windows 10 is the last Windows?” PCWorld, 18 June 2021. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    Howse, Brett. “What to Expect with Windows 11: A Day One Hands-On.” Anandtech, 16 November 2020. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Hruska, Joel. “Chromebooks Gain Market Share as Education Goes Online.” Extremetech, 26 October 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Jawed, Usama. “I am finally excited about Windows 11 again.” Neowin, 26 February 2022. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Jmbpiano. “Windows 11 - What are our initial thoughts and feelings?” Reddit, 22 November 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Lumunge, Erick. “UEFI and Legacy boot.” OpenGenus, n.d. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Bibliography

    Mandaro, Laura. “Chromebooks Gain Share of Education Market Despite Shortages.” The Information, 9 September 2020. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    Murtaza, Fawad. “What Is Virtualization Based Security in Windows?” Valnet Inc, 24 October 2021. Accessed 17 May 2022.

    Roberts, Jeremy. Personal interview. 27 May 2022.

    Rouse, Rick. “My initial thoughts about Windows 11 (likes and dislikes).” RicksDailyTips.com, 5 September 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    Sandrews1313. “Windows 11 - What are our initial thoughts and feelings?” Reddit, 22 November 2021. Accessed 3 June 2022.

    “The Matrix Quotes." Quotes.net, n.d. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Thurrott, Paul.” Google: 40 Million Chromebooks in Use in Education.” Thurrott, 21 January 2020. Accessed 18 May 2022.

    Vaughan-Nichols, Steven J. “The real reason for Windows 11.” Computerworld, 6 July 2021, Accessed 19 May 2022.

    “Virtual Machine Support.” Microsoft,3 June 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    “What are DirectX 12 compatible graphics and WDDM 2.x.” Wisecleaner, 20 August 2021. Accessed 19 May 2022.

    “Windows 11 Specs and System Requirements.” Microsoft, 2022. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    “Windows Display Driver Model.” MiniTool, n.d. Accessed 13 June 2022.

    Data Quality

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}19|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}19|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Big data after pandemic
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,100
    • member rating average days saved: 8
    • Parent Category Name: Data and Business Intelligence
    • Parent Category Link: /data-and-business-intelligence
    Restore trust in your data by aligning your data management approach to the business strategy

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}350|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,858 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Your on-premises Dynamics CRM or AX needs updating or replacing, and you’re not sure whether to upgrade or transition to the cloud with the new Microsoft Dynamics 365 platform. You’re also uncertain about what the cost might be or if there are savings to be had with a transition to the cloud for your enterprise resource planning system.
    • The new license model, Apps vs. Plans and Dual Use Rights in the cloud, includes confusing terminology and licensing rules that don’t seem to make sense. This makes it difficult to purchase proper licensing that aligns with your current on-premises setup and to maximize your choices in transition licenses.
    • There are different licensing programs for Dynamics 365 in the cloud. You need to decide on the most cost effective program for your company, for now and for the future.
    • Microsoft is constantly pressuring you to move to the cloud, but you don’t understand the why. You're uncertain if there's real value in such a strategic move right now, or if should you wait awhile.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. Do a thorough current state assessment of your hardware and software needs and consider what will be required in the near future (one to four years).
    • Educate yourself. You should have a good understanding of your options from staying on-premises vs. an interim hybrid model vs. a lift and shift to the cloud.
    • Consider the overall picture. There might not be hard cost savings to be realized in the near term, given the potential increase in licensing costs over a CapEx to OpEx savings.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding the best time to transition, from a licensing perspective, could save you significant dollars over the next one to four years.
    • Planning and effectively mapping your current licenses to the new cloud user model will maximize your current investment into the cloud and fully leverage all available Microsoft incentives in the process.
    • Gaining the knowledge required to make the most informed transition decision, based on best timing, most appropriate licensing program, and maximized cost savings in the near term.
    • Engaging effectively with Microsoft and a competent Dynamics partner for deployment or licensing needs.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should learn about Microsoft Dynamics 365 user-based cloud licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Timing

    Review to confirm if you are eligible for Microsoft cloud transition discounts and what is your best time to move to the cloud.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 1: Timing
    • Microsoft License Agreement Summary Tool
    • Existing CRM-AX License Summary Worksheet

    2. Licensing

    Begin with a review to understand user-based cloud licensing, then move to mapping your existing licenses to the cloud users and plans.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 2: Licensing
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 On-Premises License Transition Mapping Tool
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 User License Assignment Tool
    • Microsoft Licensing Programs Brief Overview

    3. Cost review

    Use your cloud mapping activity as well your eligible discounts to estimate your cloud transition licensing costs.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 3: Cost Review
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 Cost Estimator

    4. Analyze and decide

    Start by summarizing your choice license program, decide on the ideal time, then move on to total cost review.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 4: Analyze and Decide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand What You Own and What You Can Transition to the Cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand what you own and what you can transition to the cloud.

    Learn which new cloud user licenses to transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All your licenses in one summary.

    Eligible transition discounts.

    Mapping of on-premises to cloud users.

    Activities

    1.1 Validate your discount availability.

    1.2 Summarize agreements.

    1.3 Itemize your current license ownership.

    1.4 Review your timing options.

    1.5 Map your on-premises licenses to the cloud-based, user-based model.

    Outputs

    Current agreement summary

    On-premises to cloud user mapping summary

    Understanding of cloud app and plan features

    2 Transition License Cost Estimate and Additional Costs

    The Purpose

    Estimate cloud license costs and other associated expenses.

    Summarize and decide on the best timing, users, and program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Good cost estimate of equivalent cloud user-based licenses.

    Understanding of when and how to move your on-premises licensing to the new Dynamics 365 cloud model.

    Activities

    2.1 Estimate cloud user license costs.

    2.2 Calculate additional costs related to license transitions.

    2.3 Review all activities.

    2.4 Summarize and analyze your decision.

    Outputs

    Cloud user licensing cost modeling

    Summary of total costs

    Validation of costs and transition choices

    An informed decision on your Dyn365 timing, licensing, and costs

    2020 Applications Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}159|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Although IT may have time to look at trends, it does not have the capacity to analyze the trends and turn them into initiatives.
    • IT does not have time to parse trends for initiatives that are relevant to them.
    • The business complains that if IT does not pursue trends the organization will get left behind by cutting-edge competitors. At the same time, when IT pursues trends, the business feels that IT is unable to deal with the basic issues.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Take advantage of a trend by first understanding why it is happening and how it is actionable. Build momentum now. Breaking a trend into bite-sized initiatives and building them into your IT foundations enables the organization to maintain pace with competitors and make the technological leap.
    • The concepts of shadow IT and governance are critical. As it becomes easier for the business to purchase its own applications, it will be essential for IT to embrace this form of user empowerment. With a diminished focus on vendor selection, IT will drive the most value by directing its energy toward data and integration governance.

    Impact and Result

    • Determine how to explore, adopt, and optimize the technology and practice initiatives in this report by understanding which core objective(s) each initiative serves:
      • Optimize the effectiveness of the IT organization.
      • Boost the productivity of the enterprise.
      • Enable business growth through technology.

    2020 Applications Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief for a summary of the priorities and themes that an IT organization should focus on this year.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Read the 2020 Applications Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech's 2020 Applications Priorities Report to learn about the five initiatives that IT should prioritize for the coming year.

    • 2020 Applications Priorities Report Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}139|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $63,667 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 110 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.
    • With Adobe’s transition to a cloud-based subscription model, it’s important for organizations to actively manage licenses, software provisioning, and consumption.
    • Without a detailed understanding of Adobe’s various purchasing models, overspending often occurs.
    • Organizations have experienced issues in identifying commercial licensed packages with their install files, making it difficult to track and assign licenses.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on user needs first. Examine which products are truly needed versus nice to have to prevent overspending on the Creative Cloud suite.
    • Examine what has been deployed. Knowing what has been deployed and what is being used will greatly aid in completing your true-up.
    • Compliance is not automatic with products that are in the cloud. Shared logins or computers that have desktop installs that can be access by multiple users can cause noncompliance.

    Impact and Result

    • Visibility into license deployments and needs
    • Compliance with internal audits

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Procuring Adobe software is not the same game as it was just a few years ago. Adopt a comprehensive approach to understanding Adobe licensing to avoid overspending and to maximize negotiation leverage.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage your Adobe agreements

    Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid overspending on Adobe licensing and to remain compliant in case of audit.

    • Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table
    • Adobe ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits
    • Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend

    Learn the essential steps to avoid overspending and to maximize negotiation leverage with Adobe.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Only 18% of Adobe licenses are genuine copies: are yours?

    "Adobe has designed and executed the most comprehensive evolution to the subscription model of pre-cloud software publishers with Creative Cloud. Adobe's release of Document Cloud (replacement for the Acrobat series of software) is the final nail in the coffin for legacy licensing for Adobe. Technology procurement functions have run out of time in which to act while they still retain leverage, with the exception of some late adopter organizations that were able to run on legacy versions (e.g. CS6) for the past five years. Procuring Adobe software is not the same game as it was just a few years ago. Adopt a comprehensive approach to understanding Adobe licensing, contract, and delivery models in order to accurately forecast your software needs, transact against the optimal purchase plan, and maximize negotiation leverage. "

    Scott Bickley

    Research Lead, Vendor Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • IT managers scoping their Adobe licensing requirements and compliance position.
    • CIOs, CTOs, CPOs, and IT directors negotiating licensing agreements in search of cost savings.
    • ITAM/Software asset managers responsible for tracking and managing Adobe licensing.
    • IT and business leaders seeking to better understand Adobe licensing options (Creative Cloud).
    • Vendor management offices in the process of a contract renewal.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand and simplify licensing per product to help optimize spend.
    • Ensure agreement type is aligned to needs.
    • Navigate the purchase process to negotiate from a position of strength.
    • Manage licenses more effectively to avoid compliance issues, audits, and unnecessary purchases.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CFOs and the finance department
    • Enterprise architects
    • ITAM/SAM team
    • Network and IT architects
    • Legal
    • Procurement and sourcing

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand licensing methods in order to make educated and informed decisions.
    • Understand the future of the cloud in your Adobe licensing roadmap.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Adobe’s dominant market position and ownership of the creative software market is forcing customers to refocus the software acquisition process to ensure a positive ROI on every license.
    • In early 2017, Adobe announced it would stop selling perpetual Creative Suite 6 products, forcing future purchases to be transitioned to the cloud.

    Complication

    • Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.
    • With transition to a cloud-based subscription model, organizations need to actively manage licenses, software provisioning, and consumption.
    • Without a detailed understanding of Adobe’s various purchasing models, overspending often occurs.
    • Organizations have experienced issues in identifying commercial licensed packages with their install files, making it difficult to track and assign licenses.

    Resolution

    • Gain visibility into license deployments and needs with a strong SAM program/tool; this will go a long way toward optimizing spend.
      • Number of users versus number of installs are not the same, and confusing the two can result in overspending. Device-based licensing historically would have required two licenses, but now only one may be required.
    • Ensure compliance with internal audits. Adobe has a very high rate of piracy stemming from issues such as license overuse, misunderstanding of contract language, using cracks/keygens, virtualized environments, indirect access, and sharing of accounts.
    • A handful of products are still sold as perpetual – Acrobat Standard/Pro, Captivate, ColdFusion, Photoshop, and Premiere Elements – but be aware of what is being purchased and used in the organization.
      • Beware of products deployed on server, where the number of users accessing that product cannot easily be counted.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Your user-need analysis has shifted in the new subscription-based model. Determine which products are needed versus nice to have to prevent overspending on the Creative Cloud suite.
    2. Examine what you need, not what you have. You can no longer mix and match applications.
    3. Compliance is not automatic with products that are in the cloud. Shared logins or computers with desktop installs that can be accessed by multiple users can cause noncompliance.

    The aim of this blueprint is to provide a foundational understanding of Adobe

    Why Adobe

    In 2011 Adobe took the strategic but radical move toward converting its legacy on-premises licensing to a cloud-based subscription model, in spite of material pushback from its customer base. While revenues initially dipped, Adobe’s resolve paid off; the transition is mostly complete and revenues have doubled. This was the first enterprise software offering to effect the transition to the cloud in a holistic manner. It now serves as a case study for those following suit, such as Microsoft, Autodesk, and Oracle.

    What to know

    Adobe elected to make this market pivot in a dramatic fashion, foregoing a gradual transition process. Enterprise clients were temporarily allowed to survive on legacy on-premises editions of Adobe software; however, as the Adobe Creative Cloud functionality was quickly enhanced and new applications were launched, customer capitulation to the new subscription model was assured.

    The Future

    Adobe is now leveraging the power of connected customers, the availability of massive data streams, and the ongoing digitalization trend globally to supplement the core Creative Cloud products with online services and analytics in the areas of Creative Cloud for content, Marketing Cloud for marketers, and Document Cloud for document management and workflows. This blueprint focuses on Adobe's Creative Cloud and Document Cloud solutions and the enterprise term license agreement (ETLA).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Beware of your contract being auto-renewed and getting locked into the quantities and product subset that you have in your current agreement. Determining the number of licenses you need is critical. If you overestimate, you're locked in for three years. If you underestimate, you have to pay a big premium in the true-up process.

    Learn the “Adobe way,” whether you are reviewing existing spend or considering the purchase of new products

    1. Legacy on-premises Adobe Creative Suite products used to be available in multiple package configurations, enabling right-sized spend with functionality. Adobe’s support for legacy Creative Suites CS6 products ended in May 2017.
    2. While early ETLAs allowed customer application packaging at a lower price than the full Creative Cloud suite, this practice has been discontinued. Now, the only purchasing options are the full suite or single-application subscriptions.
    3. Buyers must now assess alternative Adobe products as an option for non-power users. For example, QuarkXPress, Corel PaintShop Pro, CorelDRAW, Bloom, and Affinity Designer are possible replacements for some Creative Cloud applications.
    4. Document Cloud, Adobe’s latest step in creating an Acrobat-focused subscription model, limits the ability to reduce costs with an extended upgrade cycle. These changes go beyond the licensing model.
    5. Organizations need to perform a cost-benefit analysis of single app purchases vs. the full suite to right-size spend with functionality.

    As Adobe’s dominance continues to grow, organizations must find new ways to maintain a value-added relationship

    Adobe estimates the total addressable market for creative and document cloud to be $21 billion. With no sign of growth slowing down, Adobe customers must learn how to work within the current design monopoly.

    The image contains two pie graphs. The first is labelled FY2014 Revenue Mix, and the second graph is titled FY2017E Revenue Mix.

    Source: Adobe, 2017

    "Adobe is not only witnessing a steady increase in Creative Cloud subscriptions, but it also gained more visibility into customers’ product usage, which enables it to consistently push out software updates relevant to user needs. The company also successfully transformed its sales organization to support the recurring revenue model."

    – Omid Razavi, Global Head of Success, ServiceNow

    Consider your route forward

    Consider your route forward, as ETLA contract commitments, scope, and mechanisms differ in structure to the perpetual models previously utilized. The new model shortchanges technology procurement leaders in their expectations of cost-usage alignment and opex flexibility (White, 2016).

    ☑ Implement a user profile to assign licenses by version and limit expenditures. Alternatives can include existing legacy perpetual and Acrobat classic versions that may already be owned by the organization.

    ☑ Examine the suitability and/or dependency on Document Cloud functions, such as existing business workflows and e-signature integration.

    ☑ Involve stakeholders in the evaluation of alternate products for use cases where dependency on Acrobat-specific functionality is limited.

    ☑ Identify not just the installs and active use of the applications but also the depth and breadth of use across the various features so that the appropriate products can be selected.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram listing the adobe toolkit. The toolkit includes: Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast Tool, Adobe ETLA Forecasted Cost and Benefits, Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe toolkit to prepare for your new purchases or contract renewal

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT asset management (ITAM) and software asset management (SAM) are critical! An error made in a true-up can cost the organization for the remaining years of the ETLA. Info-Tech worked with one client that incurred a $600k error in the true-up that they were not able to recoup from Adobe.

    Apply licensing best practices and examine the potential for cost savings through an unbiased third-party perspective

    Establish Licensing Requirements

    • Understand Adobe’s product landscape and transition to cloud.
    • Analyze users and match to correct Adobe SKU.
    • Conduct an internal software assessment.
    • Build an effective licensing position.

    Evaluate Licensing Options

    • Value Incentive Plan (VIP)
    • Cumulative Licensing Program (CLP)
    • Transactional Licensing Program (TLP)
    • Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA)

    Evaluate Agreement Options

    • Price
    • Discounts
    • Price protection
    • Terms and conditions

    Purchase and Manage Licenses

    • Learn negotiation tactics to enhance your current strategy.
    • Control the flow of communication.
    • Assign the right people to manage the environment.

    Preventive practices can help find measured value ($)

    Time and resource disruption to business if audited

    Lost estimated synergies in M&A

    Cost of new licensing

    Cost of software audit, penalties, and back support

    Lost resource allocation and time

    Third party, legal/SAM partners

    Cost of poor negotiation tactics

    Lost discount percentage

    Terms and conditions improved

    Explore Adobe licensing and optimize spend – project overview

    Establish Licensing Requirements

    Evaluate Licensing Options

    Evaluate Agreement Options

    Purchase and Manage Licenses

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    • Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback.
    • Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers.
    • Review licensing options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Determine the ideal contract type.
    • Review final contract.
    • Discuss negotiation points.
    • License management.
    • Future licensing strategy.

    Guided Implementations

    • Engage in a scoping call.
    • Assess the current state.
    • Determine licensing position.
    • Review product options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Review contract option types.
    • Determine negotiation points.
    • Finalize the contract.
    • Discuss license management.
    • Evaluate and develop a roadmap for future licensing.

    PHASE 1

    Manage Your Adobe Agreements

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Managing Adobe Contracts

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3-6 weeks

    Step 1.1: Establish Licensing Requirements

    Start with a kick-off call:

    • Assess the current state.
    • Determine licensing position.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Complete a deployment count, needs analysis, and internal audit.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast

    Step 1.2: Determine Licensing Options

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review licensing options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Review contract option types.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select licensing option.
    • Document forecasted costs and benefits.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table

    Adobe ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits

    Step 1.3: Purchase and Manage Licenses

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review final contract.
    • Discuss negotiation points.
    • Plan a roadmap for SAM.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Negotiate final contract.
    • Evaluate and develop a roadmap for SAM.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast

    Adobe’s Cloud – Snapshot of what has changed

    1. Since Adobe has limited the procurement and licensing options with the introduction of Creative Cloud, there are three main choices:
      1. Direct online purchase at Adobe.com
      2. Value Incentive Plan (VIP): Creative Cloud for teams–based purchase with a volume discount (minimal, usually ~10%); may have some incentives or promotional pricing
      3. Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA): Creative Cloud for Enterprise (CCE)
    2. Adobe has discontinued support for legacy perpetual licenses, with the latest version being CS6, which is steering organizations to prioritize their options for products in the creative and document management space.
    3. Document Cloud (DC) is the cloud product replacing the Acrobat perpetual licensing model. DC extends the subscription-based model further and limits options to extend the lifespan of legacy on-premises licenses through a protracted upgrade process.
    4. The subscription model, coupled with limited discount options on transactional purchases, forces enterprises to consider the ETLA option. The ETLA brings with it unique term commitments, new pricing structures, and true-up mechanisms and inserts the "land and expand" model vs. license reassignment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adobe’s move from a perpetual license to a per-user subscription model can be positive in some scenarios for organizations that experienced challenges with deployment, management of named users vs. devices, and license tracking.

    Core concepts of Adobe agreements: Discounting, pricing, and bundling

    ETLA

    Adobe has been systematically reducing discounts on ETLAs as they enter the second renewal cycle of the original three-year terms.

    Adobe Cloud Bundling

    Adobe cloud services are being bundled with ETLAs with a mandate that companies that do not accept the services at the proposed cost have Adobe management’s approval to unbundle the deal, generally with no price relief.

    Custom Bundling

    The option for custom bundling of legacy Creative Suite component applications has been removed, effectively raising the price across the board for licensees that require more than two Adobe applications who must now purchase the full Creative Cloud suite.

    Higher and Public Education

    Higher education/public education agreements have been revamped over the past couple of years, increasing prices for campus-wide agreements by double-digit percentages (~10-30%+). While they still receive an 80% discount over list price, IT departments in this industry are not prepared to absorb the budget increase.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adobe has moved to an all-or-one bundle model. If you need more than two application products, you will likely need to purchase the full Creative Cloud suite. Therefore, it is important to focus on creating accurate user profiles to identify usage needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Track deployment and needs

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Track deployment and needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Audit

    The image contains a screenshot of the Adobe Deployment Tool for SAM, specifically the Audit tab.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Cost

    The image contains a screenshot of the Adobe Deployment Tool for SAM, specifically the Cost tab.

    Use Info-Tech’s tools to compare ETLA vs. VIP and to document forecasted costs and benefits

    Is the ETLA or VIP option better for your organization?

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table tool to compare ETLA costs against VIP costs.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table.

    Your ETLA contains multiple products and is a multi-year agreement.

    Use Info-Tech’s ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits tool to forecast your ETLA costs and document benefits.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits.

    Adobe’s Creative Cloud Complete offering provides access to all Adobe creative products and ongoing upgrades

    Why subscription model?

    The subscription model forces customers to an annuity-based pricing model, so Adobe has recurring revenue from a subscription-based product. This increases customer lifetime value (CLTV) for Adobe while providing ongoing functionality updates that are not version/edition dependent.

    Key Characteristics:

    • Available as a month-to-month or annual subscription license
    • Can be purchased for one user, for a team, or for an enterprise
    • Subject to annual payment and true-up of license fees
    • Can only true-up during lifespan of contract; quantities cannot be reduced until renewal
    • May contain auto-renewal clauses – beware!

    Key things to know:

    1. Applications can be purchased individually if users require only one specific product. A few products continue to have on-premises licensing options, but most are offered by per-user subscriptions.
    2. At the end of the subscription period, the organization no longer has any rights to the software and would have to return to a previously owned version.
    3. True-downs are not possible (in contrast to Microsoft’s Office 365).
    4. Downgrade rights are not included or are limited by default.

    Which products are in the Creative Cloud bundle?

    Adobe Acrobat® XI Pro

    Adobe After Effects® CC

    Adobe Audition® CC

    Adobe Digital Publishing Suite, Single Edition

    Adobe InDesign® CC

    Adobe Dreamweaver® CC

    Adobe Edge Animate

    Adobe Edge Code preview

    Adobe Edge Inspect

    Adobe Photoshop CC

    Adobe Edge Reflow preview

    Adobe Edge Web Fonts

    Adobe Extension Manager

    ExtendScript Toolkit

    Adobe Fireworks® CS6

    Adobe Flash® Builder® 4.7 Premium Edition

    Adobe Flash Professional CC

    Adobe Illustrator® CC

    Adobe Prelude® CC

    Adobe Premiere® Pro CC

    Adobe Scout

    Adobe SpeedGrade® CC

    Adobe Muse CC

    Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 6

    Adobe offers different solutions for teams vs. enterprise licensing

    Evaluate the various options for Creative Cloud, as they can be purchased individually, for teams, or for enterprise.

    Bundle Name

    Target Customer

    Included Applications

    Features

    CC (for Individuals)

    Individual users

    The individual chooses

    • Sync, store, and share assets
    • Adobe Portfolio website
    • Adobe Typekit font collection
    • Microsoft Teams integration
    • Can only be purchased through credit card

    CC for Teams (CCT)

    Small to midsize organizations with a small number of Adobe users who are all within the same team

    Depends on your team’s requirements. You can select all applications or specific applications.

    Everything that CC (for individuals) does, plus

    • One license per user; can reassign CC licenses
    • Web-based admin console
    • Centralized deployment
    • Usage tracking and reporting
    • 100GB of storage per user
    • Volume discounts for 10+ seats

    CC for Enterprise (CCE)

    Large organizations with users who regularly use multiple Adobe products on multiple machines

    All applications including Adobe Stock for images and Adobe Enterprise Dashboard for managing user accounts

    Everything that CCT does, plus

    • Employees can activate a second copy of software on another device (e.g. home computer) as long as they share the same Adobe ID and are not used simultaneously
    • Ability to reassign licenses from old users to new users
    • Custom storage options
    • Greater integration with other Adobe products
    • Larger volume discounts with more seats

    For further information on specific functionality differences, reference Adobe’s comparison table.

    A Cloud-ish solution: Considerations and implications for IT organizations

    ☑ True cloud products are typically service-based, scalable and elastic, shared resources, have usage metering, and rely upon internet technologies. Currently, Adobe’s Creative Cloud and Document Cloud products lack these characteristics. In fact, the core products are still downloaded and physically installed on endpoint devices, then anchored to the cloud provisioning system, where the software can be automatically updated and continuously verified for compliance by ensuring the subscription is active.

    ☑ Adobe Cloud allows Adobe to increase end-user productivity by releasing new features and products to market faster, but the customer will increase lock-in to the Adobe product suite. The fast-release approach poses a different challenge for IT departments, as they must prepare to test and support new functionality and ensure compatibility with endpoint devices.

    ☑ There are options at the enterprise level that enable IT to exert more granular control over new feature releases, but these are tied to the ETLA and the provided enterprise portal and are not available on other subscription plans. This is another mechanism by which Adobe has been able to spur ETLA adoption.

    Not all CIOs consider SaaS/subscription applications their first choice, but the Adobe’s dominant position in the content and document management marketplace is forcing the shift regardless. It is significant that Adobe bypassed the typical hybrid transition model by effectively disrupting the ability to continue with perpetual licensing without falling behind the functionality curve.

    VIP plans do allow for annual terms and payment, but you lose the price elasticity that comes with multi-year terms.

    Download Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table tool to compare ETLA costs against VIP costs.

    When moving to Adobe cloud, validate that license requirements meet organizational needs, not a sales quota

    Follow these steps in your transition to Creative Cloud.

    Step 1: Make sure you have a software asset management (SAM) tool to determine Adobe installs and usage within your environment.

    Step 2: Look at the current Adobe install base and usage. We recommend reviewing three months’ worth of reliable usage data to decide which users should have which licenses going forward.

    Step 3: Understand the changes in Adobe packages for Creative Cloud (CC). Also, take into account that the license types are based on users, not devices.

    Step 4: Identify those users who only need a single license for a single application (e.g. Photoshop, InDesign, Muse).

    Step 5: Identify the users who require CC suites. Look at their usage of previous Adobe suites to get an idea of which CC suite they require. Did they have Design Suite Standard installed but only use one or two elements? This is a good way to ensure you do not overspend on Adobe licenses.

    Source: The ITAM Review

    Download Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast tool to track Adobe installs within your environment and to determine usage needs.

    Acquiring Adobe Software

    Adobe offers four common licensing methods, which are reviewed in detail in the following slides.

    Most common purchasing models

    Points for consideration

    • Value Incentive Plan (VIP)
    • Cumulative Licensing Program (CLP)
    • Transactional Licensing Program (TLP)
    • Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA)
    • Adobe, as with many other large software providers, includes special benefits and rights when its products are purchased through volume licensing channels.
    • Businesses should typically refrain from purchasing individual OEM (shrink wrap) licenses or those meant for personal use.
    • Purchase record history is available online, making it easier for your organization to manage entitlements in the case of an audit.

    "Customers are not even obliged to manage all the licenses themselves. The reseller partners have access to the cloud console and can manage licenses on behalf of their customers. Even better, they can seize cross and upsell opportunities and provide good insight into the environment. Additionally, Adobe itself provides optimization services."

    B-lay

    CLP and TLP

    The CLP and TLP are transactional agreements generally used for the purchase of perpetual licenses. For example, they could be used for making Acrobat purchases if Creative Suite products are purchased on the ETLA.

    The image contains a screenshot of a table comparing CLP and TLP.

    Source: “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations”

    VIP and ETLA

    The Value Incentive Plan is aimed at small- to medium-sized organizations with no minimum quantity required. However, there is limited flexibility to reduce licenses and limited price protection for future purchases. The ETLA is aimed at large organizations who wish to have new functionality as it comes out, license management portal, services, and security/IT control aspects.

    The image contains a screenshot of a table comparing VIP and ETLA.

    Source: “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations”

    ETLA commitments risk creating “shelfware-as-a-service”

    The Adobe ETLA’s rigid contract parameters, true-up process, and unique deployment/provisioning mechanisms give technology/IT procurement leaders fewer options to maximize cost-usage alignment and to streamline opex costs.

    ☑ No ETLA price book is publicly published; pricing is controlled by the Adobe enterprise sales team.

    ☑ Adobe's retail pricing is a good starting point for negotiating discounted pricing.

    ☑ ETLA commitments are usually for three years, and the lack of a true-down option increases the risk involved in overbuying licenses should the organization encounter a business downturn or adverse event.

    ☑ Pricing discounts are the highest at the initial ETLA signing for the upfront volume commitment. The true-up pricing is discounted from retail but still higher than the signing cost per license.

    ☑ Technical support is included in the ETLA.

    ☑ While purchases typically go through value-added resellers (VARs), procurement can negotiate directly with Adobe.

    "For cloud products, it is less complex when it comes to purchasing and pricing. If larger quantities are purchased on a longer term, the discount may reach up to 15%. As soon as you enroll in the VIP program, you can control all your licenses from an ‘admin console’. Any updates or new functionalities are included in the original price. When the licenses expire, you may choose to renew your subscriptions or remove them. Partial renewal is also accepted. Of course, you can also re-negotiate your price if more subscriptions are added to your console."

    B-lay

    ETLA recommendations

    1. Assess the end-user requirements with a high degree of scrutiny. Perform an analysis that matches the licensee with the correct Adobe product SKU to reduce the risk of overspending.
    • Leverage metering data that identifies actual usage and lack thereof, match to user profile functional requirements, and then determine end users’ actual license requirements.
  • Build in time to evaluate alternative products where possible and position the organization to leverage a Plan B vendor to replace or mitigate growth on the Adobe platform. Re-evaluate options well in advance of the ETLA renewal.
  • Secure price protection through negotiating a price cap or an extended ETLA term beyond the standard three-year term. Short of obtaining an escalation cap, which Adobe is strongly resisting, build in price increases for the ETLA renewal years.
    • Demand price transparency and granularity in the proposal process.
    • Validate that volume discounts are appropriate and show through to the true-up line item pricing.
  • Negotiate a true-down mechanism upfront with Adobe if usage decline is inevitable or expected due to a merger or acquisition, divestiture, or material restructuring event.
  • INFO-TECH TIP: For further guidance on ETLAs and pricing, contact your Info-Tech representative to set up a call with an analyst.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast tool to match licensees with Adobe product SKUs.

    Prepare for Adobe’s true-up process

    How the true-up process works

    When adding a license, the true-up price will be prorated to 50% of the license cost for previous year’s usage plus 100% of the license cost for the next year. This back-charging adds up to 150% of the overall true-up license cost. In some rare cases, Adobe has provided an “unlimited” quantity for certain SKUs; these Unlimited ETLAs generally align with FTE counts and limit FTE increases to about 5%. Procurement must monitor and work with SAM/ITAM and stakeholder groups to restrain unnecessary growth during the term of an Unlimited ETLA to avoid the risk of cost escalation at renewal time.

    Higher-education specific

    Higher-education clients can license under the ETLA based on a prescribed number of user and classroom/lab devices and/or on a FTE basis. In these cases, the combination of Creative Cloud and Acrobat Pro volume must equal the FTE total, creating an enterprise footprint. FTE calculations establish the full-time faculty plus one-third of part-time faculty plus one-half of part-time staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance takes a different form in terms of the ETLA true-up process. The completion of Adobe's transition to cloud-based licensing and verification has improved compliance rates via phone home telemetry such that pirated software is less available and more easily detected. Adobe has actually decommissioned its audit arm in the Americas and EMEA.

    Audits and software asset management with Adobe

    Watch out for:

    • Virtual desktops, freeware, and test and trial licenses
    • Adobe products that may be bundled into a suite; a manual check will be needed to ensure the suite isn’t recognized as a standalone license
    • Pirated licenses with a “crack” built into the software

    Simplify your process – from start to finish – with these steps:

    Determine License Entitlements

    Obtain documentation from internal records and Adobe to track licenses and upgrades to determine what licenses you own and have the right to use.

    Gather Deployment Information

    Leverage a software asset management tool or process to determine what software is deployed and what is/is not being used.

    Determine Effective License Position

    Compare license entitlements with deployment data to uncover surpluses and deficits in licensing. Look for opportunities.

    Plan Changes to License Position

    Meet with IT stakeholders to discuss the enterprise license program (ELP), short- and long-term project plans, and budget allocation. Plan and document licensing requirements.

    Adobe Genuine Software Integrity Service

    • This service was started in 2014 to combat non-genuine software sold by non-authorized resellers.
    • The service works hand in hand with the cloud movement to reduce piracy.
    • Every Adobe product now contains an executable file that will scan your machine for non-genuine software.
    • If non-genuine software is detected, the user will be notified and directed to the official Adobe website for next steps.

    Detailed list of Adobe licensing contract types

    The table below describes Adobe contract types beyond the four typical purchasing models explained in the previous slides:

    Option

    What is it?

    What’s included?

    For

    Term

    CLP (Cumulative Licensing Program)

    10,000 plus points, support and maintenance optional

    Select Adobe perpetual desktop products

    Business

    2 years

    EA (Adobe Enterprise Agreement)

    100 licenses plus maintenance and support for eligible Adobe products

    All applications

    100+ users requirement

    3 years

    EEA (Adobe Enterprise Education Agreement)

    Creative Cloud enterprise agreement for education establishments

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 or 2 years

    ETLA (Enterprise Term License Agreement)

    Licensing program designed for Adobe’s top commercial, government, and education customers

    All Creative Cloud applications

    Large enterprise companies

    3 years

    K-12 – Enterprise Agreement

    Enterprise agreement for primary and secondary schools

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 year

    K-12 – School Site License

    Allows a school to install a Creative Cloud on up to 500 school-owned computers regardless of school size

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 year

    TLP (Transactional Licensing Program)

    Agreement for SMBs that want volume licensing bonuses

    Perpetual desktop products only

    Aimed at SMBs, but Enterprise customers can use the TLP for smaller requirements

    N/A

    Upgrade Plan

    Insurance program for software purchased under a perpetual license program such as CLP or TLP for Creative Cloud upgrade

    Dependent on the existing perpetual estate

    Anyone

    N/A

    VIP (Value Incentive Plan)

    VIP allows customers to purchase, deploy, and manage software through a term-based subscription license model

    Creative Cloud of teams

    Business, government, and education

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.

    Insight 2

    Adobe has transitioned the vast majority of its software offerings to the cloud-based subscription model. Active management of licenses, software provisioning, and consumption of cloud services is now an ongoing job.

    Insight 3

    With the vendor lock-in process nearly complete via the transition to a SaaS subscription model, Adobe is raising prices on an annual basis. Advance planning and strategic use of the ETLA is key to avoid budget-breaking surprises.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • The key pieces of licensing information that should be gathered about the current state of your own organization.
    • An in-depth understanding of the required licenses across all of your products.
    • Clear methodology for selecting the most effective contract type.
    • Development of measurable, relevant metrics to help track future project success and identify areas of strength and weakness within your licensing program.

    Processes Optimized

    • Understanding of the importance of licensing in relation to business objectives.
    • Understanding of the various licensing considerations that need to be made.
    • Contract negotiation.

    Deliverables Completed

    • Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast
    • Adobe ETLA Forecasted Cost and Benefits
    • Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Take Control of Microsoft Licensing and Optimize Spend

    Create an Effective Plan to Implement IT Asset Management

    Establish an Effective System of Internal IT Controls to Mitigate Risks

    Optimize Software Asset Management

    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Cut PCI Compliance and Audit Costs in Half

    Bibliography

    “Adobe Buying Programs: At-a-glance comparison guide for Commercial and government organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2014. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2018. Web.

    “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Education.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2018. Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    “Adobe Education Enterprise Agreement: Give your school access to the latest industry-leading creative tools.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2014. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Adobe Enterprise Term License Agreement for commercial and government organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2016. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Adobe Investor Presentation – October 2017. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2017. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Cabral, Amanda. “Students react to end of UConn-Adobe contract.” The Daily Campus (Uconn), 5 April 2017. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    de Veer, Patrick and Alecsandra Vintilescu. “Quick Guide to Adobe Licensing.” B-lay, Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Find the best program for your organization.” Adobe, Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    Foxen, David. “Adobe Upgrade Simplified.” Snow Software, 7 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Frazer, Bryant. “Adobe Stops Reporting Subscription Figures for Creative Cloud.” Studio Daily. Access Intelligence, LLC. 17 March 2016. Web.

    “Give your students the power to create bright futures.” Adobe, Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    Jones, Noah. “Adobe changes subscription prices, colleges forced to pay more.” BG Falcon Media. Bowling Green State University, 18 Feb. 2015. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Mansfield, Adam. “Is Your Organization Prepared for Adobe’s Enterprise Term License Agreements (ETLA)?” UpperEdge,30 April 2013. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Murray, Corey. “6 Things Every School Should Know About Adobe’s Move to Creative Cloud.” EdTech: Focus on K-12. CDW LLC, 10 June 2013. Web.

    “Navigating an Adobe Software Audit: Tips for Emerging Unscathed.” Nitro, Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Razavi, Omid. “Challenges of Traditional Software Companies Transitioning to SaaS.” Sand Hill, 12 May 2015. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Rivard, Ry. “Confusion in the Cloud.” Inside Higher Ed. 22 May 2013. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Sharwood, Simon. “Adobe stops software licence audits in Americas, Europe.” The Register. Situation Publishing. 12 Aug. 2016. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Software Licensing Challenges Faced In The Cloud: How Can The Cloud Benefit You?” The ITAM Review. Enterprise Opinions Limited. 20 Nov. 2015. Web.

    White, Stephen. “Understanding the Impacts of Adobe’s Cloud Strategy and Subscriptions Before Negotiating an ETLA.” Gartner, 22 Feb. 2016. Web.

    Project Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}48|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}48|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $303,499
    • member rating average days saved: 42
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • Ill-defined or even lack of upfront project planning will increase the perception that your IT department cannot deliver value because most projects will go over time and budget.
    • The perception is those traditional ways of delivering projects via the PMBOK only increase overhead and do not have value. This is less due to the methodology and more to do with organizations trying to implement best-practices that far exceed their current capabilities.
    • Typical best-practices are too clinical in their approach and place unrealistic burdens on IT departments. They fail to address the daily difficulties faces by staff and are not sized to fit your organization.
    • Take a flexible approach and ensure that your management process is a cultural and capacity fit for your organization. Take what fits from these frameworks and embed them tailored into your company.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • The feather-touch is often the right touch. Ensure that you have a lightweight approach for most of your projects while applying more rigor to the more complex and high-risk developments.
    • Pick the right tools. Your new project management processes need the right tooling to be successful. Pick a tool that is flexible enough o accommodate projects of all sizes without imposing undue governance onto smaller projects.
    • Yes, take what fits within your company from frameworks, but there is no cherry-picking. Ensure your processes stay in context: If you do not inform for effective decision-making, all will be in vain. Develop your methods such that guide the way to big-picture decision taking and support effective portfolio management.

    Impact and results 

    • The right amount of upfront planning is a function of the type of projects you have and your company. The proper levels enable better scope statements, better requirements gathering, and increased business satisfaction.
    • An investment in a formal methodology is critical to projects of all sizes. An effective process results in more successful projects with excellent business value delivery.
    • When you have a repeatable and consistent approach to project planning and execution, you can better communicate between the IT project managers and decision-makers.
    • Better communication improves the visibility of the overall project activity within your company.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should tailor project management practices to the type of projects you do and your company and review our methodology. We show you how we can support you.

    Lay the groundwork for project management success

    Assess your current capabilities to set the right level of governance.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for PM Success (ppt)
    • Project Management Triage Tool (xls)
    • COBIT BAI01 (Manage Programs and Projects) Alignment Workbook (xls)
    • Project Level Definition Matrix (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Project Level Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Management SOP Template (doc)

    Small project require a lightweight framework

    Increase small project's throughput.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 2: Build a Lightweight PM Process for Small Initiatives (ppt)
    • Level 1 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Closure Checklist Template (doc)

    Build the standard process medium and large-scale projects

    The standard process contains fully featured initiation and planning.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 3: Establish Initiation and Planning Protocols for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Level 2 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Kick-Off Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Scope Statement Template (doc)
    • Project Staffing Plan(xls)
    • Communications Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Customer/Sponsor Project Status Meeting Template (doc)
    • Level 2 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Quality Management Workbook (xls)
    • Benefits Management Plan Template (xls)
    • Risk Management Workbook (xls)

    Build a standard process for the execution and closure of medium to large scale projects

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 4: Develop Execution and Closing Procedures for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Team Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Light Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Detailed Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Light Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Detailed Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Deliverable Acceptance Form Template (doc)
    • Handover to Operations Template (doc)
    • Post-Mortem Review Template (doc)
    • Final Sign-Off and Acceptance Form Template (doc)

    Implement your project management standard operating procedures (SOP)

    Develop roll-out and training plans, implement your new process and track metrics.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 5: Implement Your PM SOP (ppt)
    • Level 2 Project Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Process Costing Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Training Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Training Monitoring Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (MS Project)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (xls)

     

     

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}546|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,184 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Organizations have been trying to promote equality for many years. Diversity and inclusion strategies and a myriad of programs have been implemented in companies across the world. Despite the attempts, many organizations still struggle to ensure that their workforce is representative of the populations they support or want to support.
    • IT brings another twist. Many IT companies and departments are based on the culture of white males, and underrepresented ethnic communities find it more of a challenge to fit in.
    • This sometimes means that talented minorities are less incentivized to join or stay in technology.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Diversity and inclusion cannot be a one-time campaign or a one-off initiative.
    • For real change to happen, every leader needs to internalize the value of creating and retaining diverse teams.

    Impact and Result

    • To stay competitive, IT leaders need to be more involved and commit to a plan to recruit and retain people of color in their departments and organizations. A diverse team is an answer to innovation that can differentiate your company.
    • Treat recruiting and retaining a diverse team as a business challenge that requires full engagement. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution that will help IT leaders build a plan to attract, recruit, engage, and retain people of color.

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should recruit and retain people of color in your IT department or organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in this endeavor.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Recruit people of color in IT

    Diverse teams are necessary to foster creativity and guide business strategies. Overcome limitations by recruiting people of color and creating a diverse workforce.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 1: Recruit People of Color in IT
    • Support Plan
    • IT Behavioral Interview Question Library

    2. Retain people of color in IT

    Underrepresented employees benefit from an expansive culture. Create an inclusive environment and retain people of color and promote value within your organization.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 2: Retain People of Color in IT

    Infographic

    Workshop: Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Setting the Stage

    The Purpose

    Introduce challenges and concerns around recruiting and retaining people of color.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a sense of direction.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction to diversity conversations.

    1.2 Assess areas to focus on and determine what is right, wrong, missing, and confusing.

    1.3 Obtain feedback from your team about the benefits of working at your organization.

    1.4 Establish your employee value proposition (EVP).

    1.5 Discuss and establish your recruitment goals.

    Outputs

    Current State Analysis

    Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing Quadrant

    Draft EVP

    Recruitment Goals

    2 Refine Your Recruitment Process

    The Purpose

    Identify areas in your current recruitment process that are preventing you from hiring people of color.

    Establish a plan to make improvements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimized recruitment process

    Activities

    2.1 Brainstorm and research community partners.

    2.2 Review current job descriptions and equity statement.

    2.3 Update job description template and equity statement.

    2.4 Set team structure for interview and assessment.

    2.5 Identify decision-making structure.

    Outputs

    List of community partners

    Updated job description template

    Updated equity statement

    Interview and assessment structure

    Behavioral Question Library

    3 Culture and Management

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for an inclusive culture where your managers are supported.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Awareness of how to better support employees of color.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss engagement and belonging.

    3.2 Augment your onboarding materials.

    3.3 Create an inclusive culture plan.

    3.4 Determine how to support your management team.

    Outputs

    List of onboarding content

    Inclusive culture plan

    Management support plan

    4 Close the Loop

    The Purpose

    Establish mechanisms to gain feedback from your employees and act on them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the plan to create your diverse and inclusive workforce.

    Activities

    4.1 Ask and listen: determine what to ask your employees.

    4.2 Create your roadmap.

    4.3 Wrap-up and next steps.

    Outputs

    List of survey questions

    Roadmap

    Completed support plan

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}335|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • The evolution of natural language processing and machine learning applications has led to specialized AI-assisted toolsets that promise to improve the efficiency and timeliness of IT operations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • These are early days. These AI-assisted toolsets are generating a considerable amount of media attention, but most of them are relatively untested. Early adopters willing to absorb experimentation costs are in the process of deploying the first use cases. Initial lessons are showing that IT operations in most organizations are not yet mature enough to take advantage of AI-assisted toolsets.
    • Focus on the problem, not the tool. Explicit AI questions should be at the end of the list. Start by asking what business problem you want to solve.
    • Get your house in order. The performance of AI-assisted tools depends on mature IT operations processes and reliable data sets. Standardize service management processes and build a knowledgebase of structured content to prepare for AI-assisted IT operations.

    Impact and Result

    • Don’t fall prey to the AI-bandwagon effect. AI-assisted innovations will support shift-left service support strategies through natural language processing and machine learning applications. However, the return on your AI investment will depend on whether it helps you meet an actual business goal.
    • AI-assisted tools presuppose the existence of mature IT operations functions, including standardized processes, high-quality structured content focused on the incidents and requests that matter, and a well-functioning ITSM web portal.
    • The success of AI ITSM projects hinges on adoption. If your vision is to power end-user interactions with chatbots and deploy intelligent agents on tickets coming through the web portal, be sure to develop a self-service culture that empowers end users to help themselves and experiment with new tools and technologies. Without end-user adoption, the promised benefits of AI projects will not materialize.

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should prepare for cognitive service management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review emerging AI technology

    Get an overview of emerging AI applications to understand how they will strengthen a shift-left service support strategy.

    2. Sort potential IT operations AI use cases

    Review potential use cases for AI applications to prioritize improvement initiatives and align them to organizational goals.

    • Disruptive Technology Shortlisting Tool
    • Disruptive Technology Value-Readiness and SWOT Analysis Tool

    3. Prepare for a cognitive service management project

    Develop an ITSM AI strategy to prepare your organization for the coming of cognitive service management, and build a roadmap for implementation.

    • Customer Journey Map (PDF)
    • Customer Journey Map (Visio)
    • Infrastructure Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}185|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,460 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Your organization decided to invest in digital solutions to support their transition to a digital and automated workplace. They are ready to begin the planning and delivery of these solutions.
    • However, IT capacity is constrained due to the high and aggressive demand to meet business priorities and maintain mission critical applications. Technical experience and skills are difficult to find, and stakeholders are increasing their expectations to deliver technologies faster with high quality using less resources.
    • Stakeholders are interested in low and no code solutions as ways to their software delivery challenges and explore new digital capabilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Current software delivery inefficiencies and lack of proper governance and standards impedes the ability to successfully scale and mature low and no code investments and see their full value.
    • Many operating models and culture do not enable or encourage the collaboration needed to evaluate business opportunities and underlying operational systems.This can exacerbate existing shadow IT challenges and promote a negative perception of IT.
    • Low and no code tools bring significant organizational, process, and technical changes that IT and the business may not be prepared or willing to accept and adopt, especially when these tools support business and worker managed applications and services.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Profile your digital end users and their needs and challenges. Discuss current IT and business software delivery and digital product priorities to determine what to expect from low- and no-code.
    • Build your low- and no-code governance and support. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for low- and no-code delivery and management through IT and business collaboration.
    • Evaluate the fit of low- and no-code and shortlist possible tools. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your use cases. Indicate where and how low- and no-code is expected to generate the most return.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code Deck – A step-by-step guide on selecting the appropriate low- and no-code tools and building the right people, processes, and technologies to support them.

    This blueprint helps you develop an approach to understand your low- and no-code challenges and priorities and to shortlist, govern, and manage the right low- and no-code tools.

    • Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code – Phases 1-3

    2. Low- and No-Code Communication Template – Clearly communicate the goal and approach of your low- and no-code implementation in a language your audience understands.

    This template narrates a story to describe the need and expectations of your low- and no-code initiative to get buy-in from stakeholders and interested parties.

    • Low- and No-Code Communication Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Select Your Tools

    The Purpose

    Understand the personas of your low- and no-code users and their needs.

    List the challenges low- and no-code is designed to solve or the opportunities you hope to exploit.

    Identify the low- and no-code tools to address your needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Level set expectations on what low- and no-code can deliver.

    Identify areas where low- and no-code can be the most beneficial.

    Select the tools to best address your problem and opportunities.

    Activities

    1.1 Profile your digital end users

    1.2 Set reasonable expectations

    1.3 List your use cases

    1.4 Shortlist your tools

    Outputs

    Digital end-user skills assessment

    Low- and no-code objectives and metrics

    Low- and no-code use case opportunities

    Low- and no-code tooling shortlist

    2 Deliver Your Solution

    The Purpose

    Optimize your product delivery process to accommodate low- and no-code.

    Review and improve your product delivery and management governance model.

    Discuss how to improve your low- and no-code capacities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Encourage business-IT collaborative practices and improve IT’s reputation.

    Shift the right accountability and ownership to the business.

    Equip digital end users with the right skills and competencies.

    Activities

    2.1 Adapt your delivery process

    2.2 Transform your governance

    2.3 Identify your low- and no-code capacities

    Outputs

    Low- and no-code delivery process and guiding principles

    Low- and no-code governance, including roles and responsibilities, product ownership and guardrails

    List of low- and no-code capacity improvements

    3 Plan Your Adoption

    The Purpose

    Design a CoE and/or CoP to support low- and no-code capabilities.

    Build a roadmap to illustrate key low- and no-code initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure coordinated, architected, and planned implementation and adoption of low- and no-code consistently across the organization.

    Reaffirm support for digital end users new to low- and no-code.

    Clearly communicate your approach to low- and no-code.

    Activities

    3.1 Support digital end users and facilitate cross-functional sharing

    3.2 Yield results with a roadmap

    Outputs

    Low- and no-code supportive body design (e.g. center of excellence, community of practice)

    Low- and no-code roadmap

    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}605|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Given the increasing complexity of software implementations, you are continually challenged with staying above water with your current team.
    • In addition, rapid changes in the business make maintaining project sponsors’ engagement challenging.
    • Project sprawl across the organization has created a situation where each project lead tracks progress in their own way. This makes it difficult for leadership to identify what was successful – and what wasn’t.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    An effective enterprise application implementation playbook is not just a list of steps, but a comprehensive view of what is necessary to support your implementation. This starts with a people-first approach. Start by asking about sponsors, stakeholders, and goals. Without asking these questions first, the implementation will be set up for failure, regardless of the technology, processes, and tools available.

    Impact and Result

    Follow these steps to build your enterprise application playbook:

    • Define your sponsor, map out your stakeholders, and lay out the vision, goals and objectives for your project.
    • Detail the scope, metrics, and the team that will make it happen.
    • Outline the steps and processes that will carry you through the implementation.

    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook Deck - Your implementation doesn’t start with technology, but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

    This blueprint provides the steps necessary to build your own enterprise application implementation playbook that can be deployed and leveraged by your implementation teams.

    • Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook – Phases 1-3

    2. Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook – The key output from leveraging this research is a completed implementation playbook.

    This is the main playbook that you build through the exercises defined in the blueprint.

    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    3. Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook - Timeline Tool – Supporting tool that captures the project timeline information, issue log, and follow-up dashboard.

    This tool provides input into the playbook around project timelines and planning.

    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook - Timeline Tool

    4. Light Project Change Request Form Template – This tool will help you record the requested change, allow assess the impact of the change and proceed the approval process.

    This provides input into the playbook around managing change requests

    • Light Project Change Request Form Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Project

    The Purpose

    Lay out the overall objectives, stakeholders, and governance structure for the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align everyone on the sponsor, key stakeholders, vision, and goals for your project

    Activities

    1.1 Select the project sponsor.

    1.2 Identify your stakeholders.

    1.3 Align on a project vision.

    1.4 List your guiding principles.

    1.5 Confirm your goals and objectives for the implementation project.

    1.6 Define the project governance structure.

    Outputs

    Project sponsor has been selected.

    Project stakeholders have been identified and mapped with their roles and responsibilities.

    Vision has been defined.

    Guiding principles have been defined.

    Articulated goals and objectives.

    Detailed governance structure.

    2 Set up for Success

    The Purpose

    Define the elements of the playbook that provide scope and boundaries for the implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align the implementation team on the scope for the project and how the team should operate during the implementation.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather and review requirements, with an agreed to scope.

    2.2 Define metrics for your project.

    2.3 Define and document the risks that can impact the project.

    2.4 Establish team composition and identify the team.

    2.5 Detail your OCM structure, resources, roles, and responsibilities.

    2.6 Define requirements for training.

    2.7 Create a communications plan for stakeholder groups and delivery teams.

    Outputs

    Requirements for enterprise application implementation with an agreed-to scope.

    Metrics to help measure what success looks like for the implementation.

    Articulated list of possible risks during the implementation.

    The team responsible and accountable for implementation is identified.

    Details of your organization’s change management process.

    Outline of training required.

    An agreed-to plan for communication of project status.

    3 Document Your Plan

    The Purpose

    With the structure and boundaries in place, we can now lay out the details on the implementation plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level plan is in place, including next steps and a process on running retrospectives.

    Activities

    3.1 Define your implementation steps.

    3.2 Create templates to enable follow-up throughout the project.

    3.3 Decide on the tracking tools to help during your implementation.

    3.4 Define the follow-up processes.

    3.5 Define project progress communication.

    3.6 Create a Change request process.

    3.7 Define your retrospective process for continuous improvement.

    3.8 Prepare a closure document for sign-off.

    Outputs

    An agreed to high-level implementation plan.

    Follow-up templates to enable more effective follow-ups.

    Shortlist of tracking tools to leverage during the implementation.

    Defined processes to enable follow-up.

    Defined project progress communication.

    A process for managing change requests.

    A process and template for running retrospectives.

    A technique and template for closure and sign-off.

    Further reading

    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Your implementation doesn’t start with technology, but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

    Analyst Perspective

    Your implementation is not just about technology, but about careful planning, collaboration, and control.

    Recardo de Oliveira

    A successful enterprise application implementation requires more than great software; it requires a clear line of sight to the people, processes, metrics, and tools that can help make this happen.

    Additionally, every implementation is unique with its own set of challenges. Working through these challenges requires a tailored approach taking many factors into account. Building out your playbook for your implementation is an important initial step before diving head-first into technology.

    Regardless of whether you use an implementation partner, a playbook ensures that you don’t lose your enterprise application investment before you even get started!

    Ricardo de Oliveira

    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Given the increasing complexity of software implementations, you are continually challenged with staying above water with your current team.
    • Rapid changes in the business make maintaining project sponsors’ engagement challenging.
    • Project sprawl across the organization has created a situation where project leads track progress in their own way. This makes it difficult for leadership to identify what was successful (and what wasn’t).

    Common Obstacles

    • Your best process experts are the same people you need to keep the business running. The business cannot afford to have its best people pulled into the implementation for long periods of time.
    • Enterprise application implementations generate huge organizational changes and the adoption of the new systems and processes resulting from these projects are quite difficult.
    • People are generally resistant to change, especially large, transformational changes that will impact the day-to-day way of doing things.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Build your enterprise application implementation playbook. Follow these steps to build your enterprise application playbook:
      • Define your sponsor, map out your stakeholders, and lay out the vision, goals, and objectives for your project.
      • Detail the scope, metrics, and the team that will make it happen.
      • Detail the steps and processes that will carry you through the implementation

    Info-Tech Insight

    An effective enterprise application implementation playbook is not just a list of steps; it is a comprehensive view of what is necessary to support your implementation. This starts with a people-first approach. Start by asking about sponsors, stakeholders, and goals. Without asking these questions first, the implementation will be set up for failure, regardless of the technology, processes, and tools available.

    Enterprise Applications Lifescycle Advisory Services. Strategy, selection, implementation, optimization and operations.

    Insight summary

    Building an effective playbook starts with asking the right questions, not jumping straight into the technical details.

    • This blueprint provides the steps required to lay out an implementation playbook to align the team on what is necessary to support the implementation.
    • Build your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook by:
      • Aligning and confirming project’s goals, stakeholders, governance and team.
      • Clearly defining what is in and out of scope for the project and the risks involved.
      • Building up a strong change management process.
      • Providing the tools and processes to keep track of the project.
      • Pulling it all together into an actionable playbook.

    Grapsh showing 39%

    Lack of planning is the reason that 39% of projects fail. Poor project planning can be disastrous: The consequences are usually high costs and time overruns.

    Graph showing 20%

    Almost 20% of IT projects can fail so badly that they can become a threat to a company’s existence. Lack of proper planning, poor communication, and poorly defined goals all contribute to the failure of projects.

    Graph showig 2.5%

    A PwC study of over 10,640 projects found that a tiny portion of companies – 2.5% – completed 100% of their projects successfully. These failures extract a heavy cost – failed IT projects alone cost the United States $50-$150B in lost revenue and productivity.

    Source: Forbes, 2020

    Planning and control are key to enterprise project success

    An estimated 70% of large-scale corporate projects fail largely due to a lack of change management infrastructure, proper oversight, and regular performance check-ins to track progress (McKinsey, 2015).

    Table showing that 88% of projects completed on time, 90% completed within budget and 92% meet original goals. 68% of projects have scope creep, 24% deemed failures and 46% experience budget lose when project fails

    “A survey published in HBR found that the average IT project overran its budget by 27%. Moreover, at least one in six IT projects turns into a ‘black swan’ with a cost overrun of 200% and a schedule overrun of 70%. Kmart’s massive $1.2B failed IT modernization project, for instance, was a big contributor to its bankruptcy.”

    Source: Forbes, 2020

    Sponsor commitment directly improves project success.

    Having the right sponsor significantly improves your chances of success across many different dimensions:

    1. On-time delivery
    2. Delivering within budget
    3. Delivered within an agreed-to scope
    4. Delivered with sufficient quality.
    Graph that shows Project success scores versus sponsor involvement in change communication. Shows increase for projects on time, projects on budget, within scope and overall quality.

    Source: Info-Tech, PPM Current State Scorecard Diagnostic

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Chocolate manufacturer implementing a new ERP

    INDUSTRY

    Consumer Products

    SOURCE

    Carlton, 2021

    Challenge

    Not every ERP ends in success. This case study reviews the failure of Hershey, a 147-year-old confectioner, headquartered in Hershey Pennsylvania. The enterprise saw the implementation of an ERP platform as being central to its future growth.

    Solution

    Consequently, rather than approaching its business challenge on the basis of an iterative approach, it decided to execute a holistic plan, involving every operating center in the company. Subsequently, SAP was engaged to implement a $10 million systems upgrade; however, management problems emerged immediately.

    Results

    The impact of this decision was significant, and the company was unable to conduct business because virtually every process, policy, and operating mechanism was in flux simultaneously. The consequence was the loss of $150 million in revenue, a 19% reduction in share price, and the loss of 12% in international market share.

    Remember: Poor management can scupper implementation, even when you have selected the perfect system.

    A successful software implementation provides more than simply immediate business value…

    It can build competitive advantage.

    • When software projects fail, it can jeopardize an organization’s financial standing and reputation, and in some severe cases, it can bring the company down altogether.
    • Rarely do projects fail for a single reason, but by understanding the pitfalls, developing a risk mitigation plan, closely monitoring risks, and self-evaluating during critical milestones, you can increase the probability of delivering on time, on budget, and with the intended benefits.

    Benefits are not limited to just delivering on time. Some others include:

    • Building organizational delivery competence and overall agility.
    • The opportunity to start an inventory of best practices, eventually building them into a center of excellence.
    • Developing a competitive advantage by maximizing software value and continuously transforming the business.
    • An opportunity to develop a competent pool of staff capable of executing on projects and managing organizational change.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook – Timeline Tool

    Supporting template that captures the project timeline information, issue log, and follow-up dashboard.

    Info-Tech: Project Planning and Monitoring Tool.
    Light Project Change Request Form Template

    This tool will help you record the requested change, and allow you to assess the impact of the change and proceed with the approval process.

    Info-Tech: Light change request form template.

    Key deliverable:

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Record the results from the exercises to define the steps for a successful implementation.

    Build your enterprise application implementation playbook.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Phase Steps

    1. Understand the Project

    1. Identify the project sponsor
    2. Define project stakeholders
    3. Review project vision and guiding principles
    4. Review project objectives
    5. Establish project governance

    2. Set up for success

    1. Review project scope
    2. Define project metrics
    3. Prepare for project risks
    4. Identify the project team
    5. Define your change management process

    3. Document your plan

    1. Develop a master project plan
    2. Define a follow-up plan
    3. Define the follow-up process
    4. Understand what’s next
    Phase Outcomes
    • Project sponsor has been selected
    • Project stakeholders have been identified and mapped with their roles and responsibilities.
    • Vision, guiding principles, goals objectives, and governance have been defined
    • Project scope has been confirmed
    • Project metrics to identify successful implementation has been defined
    • Risks have been assessed and articulated.
    • Identified project team
    • An agreed-to change management process
    • Project plan covering the overall implementation is in place, including next steps and retrospectives

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    The three phases of guided implementation.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889 Activities and deliverables for each module of the workshop. Module 1: understanding the project, Module 2: Set up for success, Modeule 3: Document your plan, and Post Workshop: Next steps and Wrap-up(offsite).

    Phase 1

    Understand the project

    3 phases, phase 1 is highlighted.

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1 Identify the project sponsor

    1.2 Identify project stakeholders

    1.3 Review project vision and guiding principles

    1.4 Review project objectives

    1.5 Establish project governance

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Step 1.1

    Identify the project sponsor

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define the project sponsor's responsibilities

    1.1.2 Shortlist potential sponsors

    1.1.3 Select the project sponsor

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Selected sponsor.

    Sponsor commitment directly improves project success.

    Having the right sponsor significantly improves your chances of success across many different dimensions:

    1. On-time delivery
    2. Delivering within budget
    3. Delivered within an agreed-to scope
    4. Delivered with sufficient quality.

    Graph that shows Project success scores versus sponsor involvement in change communication. Shows increase for projects on time, projects on budget, within scope and overall quality.

    Source: Info-Tech, PPM Current State Scorecard Diagnostic

    Typical project sponsor responsibilities

    • Help define the business goals of their projects before they start.
    • Provide guidance and support to the project manager and the project team throughout the project management lifecycle.
    • Ensure that sufficient financial resources are available for their projects.
    • Resolve problems and issues that require authority beyond that of the project manager.
    • Ensure that the business objectives of their projects are achieved and communicated.

    For further discussion on sponsor responsibilities, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    Portrait of head with multiple layers representing the responsibilities of a sponsor. From top down: Define business goals, provide guidance, ensure human ad financial resources, resolve problems and issues.

    1.1.1 Define the project sponsor’s responsibilities

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Discuss the minimum requirements for a sponsor at your organization.
    2. As a group, brainstorm the criteria necessary for an individual to be a project sponsor:
      1. Is there a limit to the number of projects they can sponsor at one time?
      2. Is there a minimum number of hours they must be available to the project team?
      3. Do they have to be at a certain seniority level in the organization?
      4. What is their role at each stage of the project lifecycle?
    3. Document these criteria on a whiteboard.
    4. Record the sponsor’s responsibilities in section 1.1 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Requirements for a sponsor
    • Your responsibilities as a sponsor

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.1.1 Define the project sponsor’s responsibilities (Continued)

    Example

    Project sponsor responsibilities.

    1.1.2 Shortlist potential sponsors

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Based on the responsibilities defined in Exercise 1.1.1, produce a list of the potential sponsors.
    2. Record the sponsor’s shortlist in section 1.2 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Characteristics of a sponsor
    • Your list of candidates

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.1.2 Shortlist potential sponsors (Continued)

    Example

    Shortlist of potential sponsors. 6 names listed with checkmarks on criteria ranking.

    Don’t forget, the project team is there to support the sponsor

    Given the burden of the sponsor role, the project team is committed to doing their best to facilitate a successful outcome.

    Project Success: Follow best practices, escalate issues, stay focused, communicate, adapt to change.

    • Follow the framework set out by the governance group at the organization to drive efficiency on the project.
    • Ensure stakeholders with proper authority are notified of issues that occur during the project.
    • Stay focused on the project tasks to drive quality on the deliverables and avoid rework after the project.
    • Communicate within the project team to drive coordination of tasks, complete deliverables, and avoid resource waste.
    • Changes are more common than not; the team must be prepared to adjust plans and stay agile to adapt to changes for the project.

    Seek the key characteristics of a sponsor

    Man walking up stairs denoting characteristics of a good sponsor. First step: Leader, second step: Strong Communicator, third step: knowledgeable, fourth step: problem solver, fifth step: delegator, final step: dedicated.

    1.1.3 Select the project sponsor

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Review the characteristics and the list of potential candidates.
    2. Assess availability, suitability, and desire of the selected sponsor.
    3. Record the selected sponsor in section 1.3 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • List of candidates
    • Characteristics of a sponsor
    • Your selected sponsor

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.1.3 Select the project sponsor (Continued)

    Example

    Name of example sponsor with their key traits listed.

    Step 1.2

    Identify the project stakeholders

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify your stakeholders

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Stakeholders’ management plan

    How to find the right stakeholders

    Start with the obvious candidates, but keep an open mind.

    How to find stakeholders

    • Talk to your stakeholders and ask who else you should be talking to, to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don’t miss anyone.
    • Less obvious stakeholders can be found by conducting various types of trace analysis, i.e. following various paths flowing from your initiative through to the path’s logical conclusion.

    Create a stakeholder network map for your application implementation

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Stakeholder network map showing direction of professional influence as well as bidirectional, informal influence relationships.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your enterprise application operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your applications directly.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have substantial informal relationships with your stakeholders.

    Understand how to navigate the complex web of stakeholders

    Identify which stakeholders to include and what their level of involvement should be during requirements elicitation based on relevant topic expertise.

    Graph showing influence vs. interest, divided into 4 quadrants. Low influence and intersest is labeled: Monitor, low influence and high interest is labeled: Keep informed, High influence and low interest is labeled: Keep satisfied, and high influence and high interest is labeled: Involve closely

    Large-scale projects require the involvement of many stakeholders from all corners and levels of the organization, including project sponsors, IT, end users, and business stakeholders. Consider the influence and interest of stakeholders in contributing to the requirements elicitation process and involve them accordingly.

    Map the organization’s stakeholders

    List of various stakeholder titles. As well as a graph showing the influence vs involvement of each stakeholder title. Influence and interest is divided into 4 quadrants: Monitor, Keep informed, keep satisfied, and involve closely.

    1.2.1 Identify your stakeholders

    1-2 hours

    1. As a group, identify all the project stakeholders. A stakeholder may be an individual such as the CEO or CFO, or it may be a group such as front-line employees.
    2. Map each stakeholder on the quadrant based on their expected influence and involvement in the project
    3. Identify stakeholders and add them to the list.
    4. Record the stakeholders list in section 1.4 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    5. Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

      Input

      Output

      • Types of stakeholders
      • Your stakeholders initial list

      Materials

      Participants

      • Whiteboard/flip charts
      • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
      • Project team
      • Operations
      • SMEs
      • Team lead and facilitators
      • IT leaders

    1.2.1 Identify your stakeholders(Continued)

    Example

    Table with rows of stakeholders: Customer, End Users, IT, Vendor and other listed. Columns provide: description, examples, value and involvement level of each stakeholder.

    Step 1.3

    Review project vision and guiding principles

    Activities

    1.3.1 Align on a project vision

    1.3.2 List your guiding principles

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Project vision and guiding principles

    Vision and guiding principles

    GUIDING PRINCIPLES

    Guiding principles are high-level rules of engagement that help to align stakeholders from the outset. Determine guiding principles to shape the scope and ensure stakeholders have the same vision.

    Creating Guiding Principles

    Guiding principles should be constructed as full sentences. These statements should be able to guide decisions.

    EXAMPLES
    • [Organization] is implementing an ERP system to streamline processes and reduce redundancies, saving time and money.
    • [Organization] is implementing an ERP to integrate disparate systems and rationalize the application portfolio.
    • [Organization] is aiming at taking advantage of industry best practices and strives to minimize the level of customization required in solution.

    Questions to Ask

    1. What is a strong statement that will help guide decision making throughout the life of the ERP project?
    2. What are your overarching requirements for business processes?
    3. What do you ultimately want to achieve?
    4. What is a statement that will ensure all stakeholders are on the same page for the project?

    1.3.1 Align on a project vision

    1-2 hours

    1. As a group, discuss whether you want to create a separate project vision statement or restate your corporate vision and/or goals.
      1. A project vision statement will provide project-guiding principles, encompass the project objectives, and give a rationale for the project.
      2. Using the corporate vision/goals will remind the business and IT that the project is to implement an enterprise application that supports and enhances the organizational objectives.
    2. Record the project vision in section 1.5 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Project vision statement defined during strategy building
    • Your project vision

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.3.1 Align on a project vision (Continued)

    Example

    Project Vision

    We, [Organization], will select and implement an integrated software suite that enhances the growth and profitability of the organization through streamlined global business processes, real-time data-driven decisions, increased employee productivity, and IT investment protection.

    Guiding principles examples

    The guiding principles will help guide your decision-making process. These can be adjusted to align with your internal language.

    • Support business agility: A flexible and adaptable integrated business system providing a seamless user experience.
    • Use best practices: Do not recreate or replicate what we have today; focus on modernization. Exercise customization governance by focusing on those customizations that are strategically differentiating.
    • Automate: Take manual work out where we can, empowering staff and improving productivity through automation and process efficiencies.
    • Stay focused: Focus on scope around core business capabilities. Maintain scope control. Prioritize demand in line with the strategy.
    • Strive for "one source of truth": Unify data model and integrate processes where possible. Assess integration needs carefully.

    1.3.2 List your guiding principles

    1-2 hours

    1. Start with the guiding principles defined during the strategy building.
    2. Review each of the sample guiding principles provided and ask the following questions:
      1. Do we agree with the statement?
      2. Is this statement framed in the language we use internally? Does everyone agree on the meaning of the statement?
      3. Will this statement help guide our decision-making process?
    3. Record the guiding principles in section 1.6 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Guiding principles defined during strategy building
    • Your guiding principles

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.3.2 List your guiding principles (Continued)

    Example

    Guiding principals: Support business agility, use best practices, automate, stay focused, strive for `one source truth`.

    Step 1.4

    Review project objectives

    Activities

    1.4.1 Confirm your goals and objectives for the implementation project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    The objectives of the implementation project

    Review the elements of the project charter

    Leverage completed deliverables to get project managers started down the path of success.

    Deliverables of project chaters for PMs. Project purpose, scope, logistics and sign-off.

    1.4.1 List your guiding principles

    1-2 hours

    1. Articulate the high-level objectives of the project. (What are the goals of the project?)
    2. Elicit the business benefits the sponsor is committed to achieving. (What are the business benefits of the project?)
    3. Record Project goals and objectives in section 1.7 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Your BizDevOps objectives and metrics
    • Understanding of various collaboration methods, such as Scrum, Kanban, and Scrumban
    • Your chosen collaboration method

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.4.1 Confirm your goals and objectives for the implementation project (Continued)

    Example:

    Project Objectives: End-user visibility, New business development, employee experience. Business Benefits for each objective listed.

    Step 1.5

    Establish project governance

    Activities

    1.5.1 Define the project governance structure

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Approach to build an effective project governance

    1.5.1 List your guiding principles

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Identify the IT governance structure in place today and document the high-level function of each body (councils, steering committees, review boards, centers of excellence, etc.).
    2. Identify and document the existing enterprise applications governance structure, roles, and responsibilities (if any exist).
    3. Identify gaps and document the desired enterprise applications governance structure, roles, and responsibilities.
    4. Record the project governance structure in section 1.8 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • IT governance structure
    • Your project governance structure

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Governance is NOT management

    Three levels of governance: Team Level, Steering Committee Level, and Executive Governance Level.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You won’t get engagement unless there is a sense of accountability. Do not leave this vague. Accountability needs to be assigned to specific individuals in your organization to ensure the system development achieves what was intended by your organization and not what your system integrator (SI) intended.

    Who is accountable?

    Too many assumptions are made that the SI is accountable for all implementation activities and deliverables – this is simply untrue. All activities can be better planned for, and misunderstandings can be avoided, with a clear line of sight on roles and responsibilities and the documentation that will support these assumptions.

    Discuss, define, and document roles and responsibilities:
    • For each role (e.g. executive sponsor, delivery manager, test lead, conversion lead), clearly articulate the responsibilities of the role, who is accountable for fulfillment, and whether it’s a client role, SI role, or both.
    • Articulate the purpose of each deliverable clearly, define which individual or team has responsibility for it, and document who is expected to contribute.
    • Empower the team by granting them the authority to make decisions. Ease their reluctance to think outside the box for fear of stakeholder or user backlash.
    • The implementation cannot and will not be transformative if the wrong people are involved or if the right people have not been given the tools required to succeed in their role.

    1.5.2 List your guiding principles

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Assess the skills necessary for an enterprise implementation. Inventory the competencies required for an enterprise implementation team. Map your internal resources to each competency as applicable.
    2. Select your internal implementation team. Determine who needs to be involved closely with the implementation. Key stakeholders should also be considered as members of your implementation team.
    3. Identify the number of external consultants/support required for implementation. Consider your in-house skills, timeline, integration environment complexity, and cost constraints as you make your resourcing plan.
    4. Record governance team roles and responsibilities in 1.9 section of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Available resources (internal, external, contract)
    • Your governance structure roles and responsibilities

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    1.5.2 Define governance team roles and responsibilities (Continued)

    Example

    Governance team roles and their responsibilities.

    Phase 2

    Set up for success

    3 phases, phase 2 is highlighted.

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1. Review project scope

    2.2. Define project metrics

    2.3. Prepare for project risks

    2.4. Identify the project team

    2.5. Define your change management process

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Step 2.1

    Review project scope

    Activities

    2.1.1 Gather and review requirements

    2.1.2 Confirm your scope for implementation

    2.1.3 Formulate a scope statement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    The project scope

    Requirements are key to defining scope

    Project scope management includes the processes required to ensure that the project includes all and only the work required to complete the project successfully. Therefore, managing project scope is about defining and controlling what is and is not included in the project.

    PMBOK defines requirements as “conditions or capabilities that are to be met by the project or present in the product, service, or result to satisfy an agreement or other formally imposed specification.” Detailed requirements should be gathered and elicited in order to provide the basis for defining the project scope.

    70% of projects fail due to poor requirements, organizations using poor practices spent 62% more, 4th highest correlation to high IT performance is requirements gathering.

    Well-executed requirements gathering results in:

    • Consistent approach from project to project, resulting in more predictable outcomes.
    • Solutions that meet the business need on the surface and under the hood.
    • Reduce risk for fast-tracked projects by establishing a right-sized approach.
    • Requirements team that can drive process improvement and improved execution.
    • Confidence when exploring solution alternatives.

    Poorly executed requirements gathering results in:

    • IT receiving the blame for any project shortcomings or failures.
    • Business needs getting lost in the translation between the initial request and final output.
    • Inadequate solutions or cost overruns and dissatisfaction with IT.
    • IT losing its credibility as stakeholders do not see the value and work around the process.
    • Late projects that tie up IT resources longer than planned, and cost overruns that come out of the IT budget.
    • Inconsistent project execution, leading to inconsistent outcomes.

    Strong stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas

    High stakeholder satisfaction with requirements results in higher satisfaction in other areas.

    Note: “High satisfaction” was classified as a score greater or equal to eight, and “low satisfaction” was every organization that scored below eight on the same questions.

    2.1.1 Gather and review requirements

    1-2 hours

    1. Once existing documentation has been gathered, evaluate the effectiveness of the documentation and decide whether you need additional information to proceed to current-state mapping.
    2. The initiative team should avoid spending too much time on the discovery phase, as the goal of discovery is to obtain enough information to produce a level-one current-state map.
    3. Consider reviewing capabilities, business processes, current applications, integration, and data migration.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • Your requirements, capabilities, business processes, current applications, integration, and/or data migration
    • Your requirements, capabilities, business processes, current applications, integration, and/or data migration revisited

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.1.1 Requirements list

    Example

    Requirements with description, category and priority.

    2.1.2 Confirm your scope for implementation

    1-2 hours

    1. Based on the requirements, write down features of the product or services, as well as dependencies with other interfaces.
    2. Write down exclusions to guard against scope creep.
    3. Validate the scope by asking these questions:
      1. Will this scope provide a common understanding for all stakeholders, including those outside of IT, as to what the project will accomplish and what it excludes?
      2. Should any detail be added to prevent scope creep later?
    4. Record the project scope in section 2.1 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Input

    Output

    • What’s in scope
    • What’s out of scope
    • What needs to integrate
    • Your scope areas

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.1.2 Scope detail

    Example

    Example of scope detail. Table with scope levels: In scope, out of scope and existing scope. Each scope level has details about it listed.

    Distill your requirements into a scope statement

    Requirements are about the what and the how.
    Scope specifies the features of the product or service – what is in and what is out
    Table showing Requirement document vs. Scope statement. It lists the audience, content, inputs and outputs for each.

    The Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook 2.2 Project Scope Statement includes:

    • Scope description (features, how it interfaces with other solution components, dependencies).
    • Exclusions (what is not part of scope).
    • Deliverables (product outputs, documentation).
    • Acceptance criteria (what metrics must be satisfied for the deliverable to be accepted).
    • Final sign-off (owner).
    • Project exclusions (scope item, details).

    The scope statement should communicate the breadth of the project

    To assist in forming your scope statement, answer the following questions:
    • What are the major coverage points?
    • Who will be using the systems?
    • How will different users interact with the systems?
    • What are the objectives that need to be addressed?
    • Where do we start?
    • Where do we draw the line?

    2.1.3 Formulate a scope statement

    1-2 hours

    1. Lay out the scope description (features, how it interfaces with other solution components, dependencies).
    2. Record the exclusions (what is not part of scope).
    3. Fill out the scope statement.
    4. Record the scope statement in section 2.2 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your scope areas
    • Your scope statement

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Scope statement template
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.1.3 Scope statement

    Example

    Examples of scope statements showing the following: Product or service in scope, project deliverables and acceptance criteria, and project exclusions.

    Step 2.2

    Review project scope

    Activities

    2.2.1 Define metrics for your project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    The project metrics

    Building leading indicators

    Lagging KPIs are relatively simple to identify, whereas leading KPIs can be more elusive.

    For example, take the lagging KPI “Customer Satisfaction.” How do you turn that into a leading KPI? One method is to look at sources of customer complaints. In a retail sales system, backordered items will negatively impact customer satisfaction. As a leading indicator, track the number of orders with backordered lines and the percentage of the total order that was backordered.

    Performance Metrics

    Use leading and lagging metrics, as well as benchmarks, to track the progress of your system.

    Leading KPIs: Input-oriented measures:

    • Number of active users in the system.
    • Time-to-completion for processes that previously experienced efficiency pain points.

    Lagging KPIs: Output-oriented measures:

    • Faster production times.
    • Increased customer satisfaction scores

    Benchmarks: A standard to measure performance against:

    • Number of days to ramp up new users.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Leading indicators make the news; lagging indicators report on the news. Focusing on leading indicators allows you to address challenges before they become large problems with only expensive solutions.

    2.2.1 Define metrics for your project

    1-2 hours

    1. Examine outputs from any feedback mechanisms you have (satisfaction surveys, emails, existing SLAs, burndown charts, resourcing costs, licensing costs per sprint, etc.).
    2. Look at historical trends and figures when available. However, be careful of frequent anomalies, as these may indicate a root cause that needs to be addressed.
    3. Explore the definition of specific metrics across different functional teams to ensure consistency of measurement and reporting.
    4. Record the Project Metrics in section 2.3 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Outputs of any feedback mechanism
    • Historical trends
    • Your project tracking metrics

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.2.1 Metrics

    In addition to delivery metrics and system performance metrics, equip the business with process-based metrics to continuously prove the value of the enterprise software. Review the examples below as a starting point.

    Table showing metrics and desciption. Metrics listed are: Percent of requirements complete, issues found, issues resolved, and percent of processess complete.

    Step 2.3

    Prepare for project risks

    Activities

    2.3.1 Build a risk event menu

    2.3.2 Determine contextual risks

    2.3.3 Determine process risks

    2.3.4 Determine business risks

    2.3.5 Determine change risks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Steps to create your product canvas and product vision statement

    All risks are not created equal

    Project Risk consists of: Contextual risk, process risk, change risk and business risk.

    For more information on Info-Tech’s Four-Pillar Risk Framework, please see Right-Size Your Project Risk Investment.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Pillar Risk Framework

    Unusual risks should be detected by finding out how each project is different from the norm. Use this framework to start this process by confronting the risks that are more easily anticipated.

    2.3.1 Build a risk event menu

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Build and maintain an active menu of potential risk events across the four risk categories.
    2. Record the risk event menu in section 2.4 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk events
    • Your risk events menu

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.3.1 Risk event menu

    Example

    Risk event menu example. A table with: Contextual Risk, process risk, business risk, change risk events with examples for each.

    2.3.2 Determine contextual risks

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Contextual risk factors are those that operate within the context of your department, organization, and/or community.
    2. Fill out contextual risks.
    3. Record the contextual risks in section 2.5 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your risk events menu
    • Your list of people involved in risk management
    • Your contextual risks

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Risk Management Workbook
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.3.2 Contextual risks

    Example

    two tables for Contextual risks. Table 1: Risk identification with event name, risk cause, impact and risk owner. Table 2: shows probability of risk, impact, rating, recommended action, and any mitigations.

    2.3.3 Determine process risks

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Process risks are those that involve project sponsorship, project management, business and functional requirements, work assignment, communication, and/or visibility.
    2. Fill out process risks.
    3. Record the process risks in section 2.6 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your risk events menu
    • Your list of people involved in risk management
    • Your process risks

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Risk Management Workbook
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.3.3 Process risks

    Example

    two tables for Process risks. Table 1: Risk identification with event name, risk cause, impact and risk owner. Table 2: shows probability of risk, impact, rating, recommended action, and any mitigations.

    2.3.4 Determine business risks

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Business risks are those that affect the bottom line of the organization. They usually have implications on revenue, costs, and/or image.
    2. Fill out business risks.
    3. Record the business risks in section 2.7 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your risk events menu
    • Your list of people involved in risk management
    • Your business risks

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Risk Management Workbook
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.3.4 Business risks

    Example

    two tables for Business risks. Table 1: Risk identification with event name, risk cause, impact and risk owner. Table 2: shows probability of risk, impact, rating, recommended action, and any mitigations.

    2.3.5 Determine change risks

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Change risks are those that result from imposing changes on the people and customers of the organization and their daily routines.
    2. Fill change risks.
    3. Record the change risks in section 2.7 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your risk events menu
    • Your list of people involved in risk management
    • Your business risks

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Risk Management Workbook
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.3.5 Change risks

    Example

    two tables for Change risks. Table 1: Risk identification with event name, risk cause, impact and risk owner. Table 2: shows probability of risk, impact, rating, recommended action, and any mitigations.

    Step 2.4

    Identify the project team

    Activities

    2.4.1 Establish team composition

    2.4.2 Identify the team

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Steps to get your project team ready

    Understand the unique external resource considerations for the implementation

    Organizations rarely have sufficient internal staffing to resource an enterprise software implementation project entirely on their own. Consider the options for closing the gap in internal resource availability.

    The most common project resourcing structures for enterprise projects are:

    1. Management consultant
    2. Vendor consultant
    3. System integrator

    When contemplating a resourcing structure, consider:

    • Availability of in-house implementation competencies and resources.
    • Timeline and cost constraints.
    • Integration environment complexity.

    CONSIDER THE FOLLOWING

    Internal Vs. External Roles and Responsibilities

    Clearly delineate between internal and external team responsibilities and accountabilities and communicate this to your technology partner upfront.

    Internal Vs. External Accountabilities

    Accountability is different than responsibility. Your vendor or SI partner may be responsible for completing certain tasks, but be careful not to outsource accountability for the implementation – ultimately, the internal team will be accountable.

    Partner Implementation Methodologies

    Often vendors and/or SIs will have their own preferred implementation methodology. Consider the use of your partner’s implementation methodology; however, you know what will work for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Selecting a partner is not just about capabilities, it’s about compatibility! Ensure you select a partner that has a culture compatible with your own.

    2.4.1 Establish team composition

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Assess the skills necessary for an enterprise implementation.
    2. Select your internal implementation team.
    3. Identify the number of external consultants/support required for implementation.
    4. Document the roles and responsibilities, accountabilities, and other expectations as they relate to each step of the implementation.
    5. Record the team composition in section 2.9 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • List of project team skills
    • Your team composition
    • Your business risks

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.4.1 Team composition

    Example

    Team composition: Role of each team member, and their skills.

    2.4.2 Identify the team

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Identify a candidate for each role and determine their responsibility in the project and their expected time commitment.
    2. The project will require a cross-functional team within IT and business units. Make sure the responsibilities are clearly communicated to the selected project sponsor.
    3. Create a RACI matrix for the project.
    4. Record the team list in section 2.10 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your team composition
    • Your team with responsibilities and commitment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.4.2 Team list

    Example

    Team list: Role of each team member, candidate, responsibilities, and their commitment in hours per week.

    RACI example

    RACI example. Responsibilities and team member roles that are tasked with each responsibility.

    Step 2.5

    Define your change management process

    Activities

    2.5.1 Define OCM structure and resources

    2.5.2 Define OCM team’s roles and responsibilities

    2.5.3 Define requirements for training

    2.5.4 Create a communications plan for stakeholder groups, and delivery teams

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    A structure and procedures for an effective organizational change management

    Define your change management process to improve quality and adoption

    Organizational change management is the practice through which the PMO can improve user adoption rates and maximize project benefits.

    Correlation of change management effectiveness with meeting results.

    “It’s one thing to provide a new technology tool to your end users.

    It’s quite another to get them to use the tool, and still different for them to use the new tool proficiently.

    When your end users fully use a new technology and make it part of their daily work habits, they have ‘adopted’ the new tool.”

    – “End-User Adoption and Change Management Process” (2022)

    Large projects require organizational change management

    Organizational change management (OCM) governs the introduction of new business processes and technologies to ensure stakeholder adoption. The purpose of OCM is to prepare the business to accept the change.

    OCM is a separate body of knowledge. However, as a practice, it is inseparable from project management.

    In IT, project planning tends to fixate on technology, and it underestimates the behavioral and cultural factors that inhibit user adoption. Whether change is project-specific or continuous, it’s more important to instill the desire to change than to apply specific tools and techniques.

    Accountability for instilling this desire should start with the project sponsor. The project manager should support this with effective stakeholder and communication management plans.

    16% of projects with poor change management met or exceeded objectives. 71% of projects with excellent change management finish on or ahead of schedule. 67% of organizations include project change management in their initiatives.

    For further discussion on organizational change, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    Your application implementation will be best served by centralizing OCM

    A centralized approach to OCM is most effective, and the PMO is already a centralized project office and is already accountable for project outcomes.

    What’s more, in organizations where accountabilities for OCM are not explicitly defined, the PMO will likely already be assumed to be the default change leader by the wider organization.

    It makes sense for the PMO to accept this accountability – in the short term at least – and claim the benefits that will come from coordinating and consistently driving successful project outcomes.

    In the long term, OCM leadership will help the PMO become a strategic partner with the executive layer and the business side.

    Short-term gains made by the PMO can be used to spark dialogues with those who authorize project spending and have the implicit fiduciary obligation to drive project benefits.

    Ultimately, it’s their job to explicitly transfer that obligation along with the commensurate resourcing and authority for OCM activities.

    Organizational resistance to change is cited as the #1 challenge to project success that PMOs face. Companies with mature PMOs that effectively manage change meet expectations 90% of the time.

    For further discussion on organizational change, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    2.5.1 Define OCM structure and resources

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Assess the roles and resources that might be needed to help support these OCM efforts.
    2. Record the OCM structure in section 2.11 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project objectives
    • Your OCM structure and resources

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.5.1 OCM structure and resources

    Example

    OCM structure example. Table showing OCM activity and resources available to support.

    2.5.2 Define OCM team’s roles and responsibilities

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Assess the tasks required for the team.
    2. Determine roles and responsibilities.
    3. Record the results in the RACI matrix in section 2.13 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your communications timeline
    • Your OCM structure and resources
    • Your OCM plan and RACI matrix

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    OCM team’s roles and responsibilities

    Example

    Responsibilities for OCM team members.

    2.5.3 Define requirements for training

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Analyze HR requirements to ensure efficient use of HR and project stakeholder time.
    2. Outline appropriate HR and training activities.
    3. Define training content and make key logistical decisions concerning training delivery for staff and users.
    4. Record training requirements in section 2.14 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your OCM Plan and RACI matrix
    • Your HR training needs

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    2.5.3 Training requirements

    Example

    Training requirements example: Project milestones, milestone time frame, hr/training activities, activity timing, and notes.

    Project communication plans must address creation, flow, deposition, and security of project information

    A good communication management plan is like the oil that keeps moving parts going. Ensuring smooth information flow is a fundamental aspect of project management.

    Project communication management is more than keeping track of stakeholder requirements. A communication management plan must address timely and appropriate creation, flow, and deposition of information about the project – as well as the security of the information.

    Create:

    • In addition to standardized status reporting elements discussed for level 1 projects, level 2 and 3 projects may require additional information to be disseminated among key stakeholders and the PMO.

    Flow:

    • The plan must address the methods of communication. Distributed project teams require more careful planning, as they pose additional communication challenges.

    Deposit:

    • As the volume of information continues to grow exponentially, retrieving information becomes a challenge. The plan for depositing project information must be consistent with your organization’s content management policies.

    Security:

    • Preventing unauthorized access and information leaks is important for projectsthat are intended to provide the organization with a competitive edge or for projects that deal with confidential data.
    45% of organizations had established mature communications and engagement processes.

    2.5.4 Create a communications timeline

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Base your change communications on your organization’s cultural appetite for change in general.
    2. Document communications plan requirements.
    3. Create a high-level communications timeline.
    4. Tailor a communications strategy for each stakeholder group.
    5. Record the communications timeline in section 2.12 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your OCM structure and resources
    • Your project objectives
    • Your project scope
    • Your stakeholders’ management plan
    • Your communications timeline

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Example of communications timeline

    Project sponsors are the most compelling storytellers to communicate the change

    Example of project communications timeline. Planning, requirements, design, development, QA, deployment, warranty, and benefits/closure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Communication with stakeholders and sponsors is not a single event, but a continual process throughout the lifecycle of the project implementation – and beyond!

    Phase 3

    Document your plan

    3 phases, phase 3 is highlighted.

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1 Develop a master project plan

    3.2. Define a follow-up plan

    3.3. Define the follow-up process

    3.4. Understand what’s next

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Step 3.1

    Develop a master project plan

    Activities

    3.1.1 Define your implementation steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Steps to create your resourcing and master plans

    Resources Vs. Demand

    Organizations rarely have sufficient internal staffing to resource an enterprise software implementation project entirely on their own. Consider the options for closing the gap in internal resource availability.

    Project demand: Data classification, cloud strategy, application rationalization, recovery planning etc. must be weighted against the organizations internal staffing resources.

    Competing priorities

    Example

    Table for competing priorities: List of projects, their timeline, priority notes, and their implications.

    3.1.1 Define your implementation steps

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Write each phase of the project on a separate sticky note and add it to the whiteboard. Determine what steps make up each phase. Write each step of the phase on a separate sticky note and add it to the whiteboard.
    2. Determine what tasks make up each step. Write each task of the step on a separate sticky note and add it to the whiteboard.
    3. Record the tasks in the Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook – Timeline tool. This tool has an example of a typical list of tasks, to help you start your master plan. Use the timeline for project planning and progress tracking.
    4. Record your project’s basic data and work schedule.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Project's work breakdown structure
    • Your project master plan

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Implementation plan – basic data

    Record your project name, project manager, and stakeholders from previous exercises.

    Example project information form: Project name, estimated start date, estimated end date, project manager, stakeholders, and time off of project.

    Implementation plan – work schedule

    Use this template to keep track of all project tasks, dates, owners, dependencies, etc.

    Use this template to keep track of all project tasks, dates, owners, dependencies, etc.

    “Actual Start Date” and “Actual Completion Date” columns must be updated to be reflected in the Gantt chart.

    This information will also be captured as the source for session 3.2.1 dashboards.

    Step 3.2

    Define a follow up plan

    Activities

    3.2.1 Create templates to enable follow-up throughout the project

    3.2.2 Decide on the tracking tools to help during your implementation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Steps to create the processes and define the tools to track progress

    Leveraging dashboards

    Build a dashboard that reflects the leading metrics you have identified. Call out requirements that represent key milestones in the implementation.

    For further information on monitoring the project, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

    Build a dashboard that reflects the leading metrics you have identified. Call out requirements that represent key milestones in the implementation.

    3.2.1 Create templates to enable follow-up throughout the project

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Create status report, dashboards/charts, budget control, risk/issues/gaps templates, and change request forms.
    2. Build a dashboard that reflects the leading metrics you have identified.
    3. Call out requirements that represent key milestones in the implementation.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your projects master plan
    • Your project follow-up kit

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Dashboards

    Based on the inputs in session 3.1.1 Define Your Implementation Steps, once the “Actual Start Date” and “Actual Completion Date” columns have been updated, this dashboard will present the project status and progress

    Based on the inputs in session 3.1.1 Define Your Implementation Steps, once the “Actual Start Date” and “Actual Completion Date” columns have been updated, this dashboard will present the project status and progress.

    This executive overview of the project's progress is meant to be used during the status meeting.

    Select the right tools

    Use SoftwareReviews to explore product features, vendor experience, and capability satisfaction.

    SoftwareReviews, Requirements Management, 2023

    SoftwareReviews, Project Management, 2023

    SoftwareReviews, Business Intelligence & Analytics, 2023

    3.2.2 Decide on the tracking tools to help during your implementation

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Based on the standards within your organization, select the appropriate project tracking tools to help you track the implementation project.
    2. If you do not have any tools or wish to change them, please see leverage Info-Tech’s SoftwareReviews to help you in making your decision.
    3. Consider tooling across a number of different categories:
      1. Requirements Management
      2. Project Management
      3. Reporting and Analytics
    4. Record the project tracking tools in section 3.3 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project follow-up kit
    • Your project follow-up kit tools

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Example: project tools

    Table listing project tools by type, use, and products available.

    Step 3.3

    Define a follow-up process

    Activities

    3.3.1 Define project progress communication

    3.3.2 Create a change request process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Steps to create your follow-up process

    Project status updates should occur throughout the implementation

    Project status updates can be both formal and informal. Formal status updates provide a standardized means of disseminating information on project progress. It is the lifeblood of project management: Accurate and up-to-date status reporting enables your project manager to ensure that your project can continue to use the resources needed.

    Informal status updates are done over coffee with key stakeholders to address their concerns and discuss key outcomes they want to see. Informal status updates help to build a more personal relationship.

    Ask for feedback during the status update meetings. Use the meeting as an opportunity to align values, goals, and incentives.

    Codify the following considerations:

    • Minimum requirement for a formal status update:
      • Frequency of reporting, as required by the project portfolio
      • Parties to be consulted and informed
      • Recording, producing, and archiving meeting minutes, both formal and informal
    • Procedure for follow-up on feedback generated from status updates:
      • Filing change requests
      • Keeping the change requester/relevant stakeholders in the loop

    3.3.1 Define project progress communication

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Provide a standardized means of disseminating information on project progress.
    2. Create an accurate and up-to-date status report to help keep team engaged and leadership supporting the project.
    3. Record the project progress communication in section 3.5 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project follow-up process
    • Your project progress communication

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Project progress communication

    Example

    Example table of project progress communication. Audience, purpose, delivery/format, communicator, delivery date, and status/notes.

    Manage project scope changes

    1. Change in project scope is unpredictable and almost inevitable regardless of project size. If changes are not properly managed, the project runs the risk of scope creep and loss of progress. Therefore, changes need to be monitored and controlled.
    2. Scope change can be initiated voluntarily by the project sponsor or other stakeholders, or it could be a mandatory reaction to changing project process.
    3. Scope change may also take place due to internal factors such as a stakeholder requiring more extensive insights or external factors such as changing market conditions.
    4. Scope changes have the potential to affect project outcomes either positively or negatively, depending on how the change is managed and implemented. The project manager should take care to maintain focus on the project’s ultimate objectives; consideration needs to be given as to what to do and what to give up.
    5. If changes arise, project managers should ensure that adequate resources and actions are provided so the project can be completed on time and on budget.
    • The project manager needs to use both hard and soft skills: analytical skills for evaluating and quantifying the impact of potential changes and communication skills for communicating and negotiating with stakeholders.
    • Build trust and credibility by taking an evidence-based approach when presenting changes. This gives you room to respectfully push back on certain changes.
    • Assess changes before crossing them off the list, but don’t be afraid to say no. Greater care must be taken when there is very limited budgetary freedom or when scope changes will interfere with the critical path.
    • All change requests must be received by the project manager first so they can make sure that IT project resources are not approached with multiple ad hoc change requests.

    Document your process to manage project change requests

    1 Initial assessment

    Using the scope statement as the reference point:

    • Why do we need the change?
    • Is the change necessary?
    • What is the business value that the change brings to the project?

    Recommend alternative solutions that are easier to implement while consulting the requester.

    2 Minor change

    If the change has been classified as minor, the project manager and the project team can tackle it directly, since it doesn’t affect project budget or schedule in a significant way. Ensure that the change is documented.

    3 conduct an in-depth assessment

    The project manager should bring major changes to the attention of the project sponsor and carry out a detailed assessment of the change and its impact.

    Additional time and resources are required to do the in-depth assessment because the impact on the project can be complex and affect requirements, resources, budget, and schedule.

    4 Obtain approval from the governing body

    Present the results to the governing body. Since a major change significantly affects the project baseline beyond the authorized contingency, it is the responsibility of the governing body to either approve the change with allocation of additional resources or reject the change and maintain course.

    Flow chart to document your process to manage project change requests.

    For further discussion on change requests, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Begin Your Projects With the End in Mind

    3.3.2 Create a change request process

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Identify any existing processes that you have for addressing changes for projects.
    2. Discuss whether or not the current change request process will suit the project at hand.
    3. Define the agreed-to change request process that fits your organization’s culture.
    4. For a change request template, you can leverage, refer to section 3.6 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    5. Make any changes to the template as necessary.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project scope
    • Your change request

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    3.3.2 Create a change request process (Continued)

    Example of a change request process form.

    Step 3.4

    Understand what's next

    Activities

    3.4.1 Run a “lessons learned” session for continuous improvement

    3.4.2 Prepare a closure document for sign-off

    3.4.3 Document optimization and future release opportunities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Lessons learned throughout the project-guiding

    Good project planning is key to smooth project closing

    Begin with the end in mind. Without a clear scope statement and criteria for acceptance, it’s anyone’s guess when or how a project will end.

    During the closing process, the project manager should use planning and execution documents, such as the project charter and the scope statement, to assess project completeness and obtain sign-off based on the acceptance criteria.

    Project completion criteria should be clearly defined. For example, the project is defined as finished when costs are in, vendor receipts are received, financials are reviewed and approved, etc.

    However, there are other steps to be taken after completing the project deliverables. These activities include:

    • Transferring project knowledge and operations to support
    • Completing user training
    • Obtaining business sign-off and acceptance
    • Releasing resources
    • Conducting post-mortem meeting
    • Archiving project assets

    The project manager needs to complete all project management processes, including:

    • Risk management (close out risk assessment and action plan)
    • Quality management (test the final deliverables against acceptance criteria)
    • Stakeholder management (decision log, close out issues, plan and assign owners for resolutions of open issues)
    • Project team management (performance evaluation for team members as well as the project manager)

    3.4.1 Define the process for lessons learned

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Determine the reporting frequency for lessons learned.
    2. Consider attributing lessons learned to project phases.
    3. Coordinate lessons learned check-ins with project milestones to review and reflect.
    4. At each reporting session, the project team should identify challenges and successes informally.
    5. The PM and the PMO should transform the reports from each team member into formalized lessons.
    6. Record lessons learned for each project in section 3.7 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project's lessons learned

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project Lessons Learned Template
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Lessons learned

    Example

    Form: Project successes, notes, areas of imporvement, impact, solution.

    Watch for these potential problems with project closure

    Don’t leave the door open for stakeholder dissatisfaction. Properly close out your projects.

    Potential problems with project closure.

    For further information on project closure issues, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Get Started With Project Management Excellence.

    3.4.2 Prepare a closure document for sign-off

    0.5-1 hour

    1. Create a realistic closure and transition process that gains sign-off from the sponsor.
    2. Prepare a project closure checklist.
    3. Transfer accountability to operations, release project resources, and avoid disrupting other projects that are trying to get started.
    4. Record the project closure document in section 3.8 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project objectives
    • Your project scope
    • Your project's closure checklist

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project closure checklist Template
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Closure checklist

    Project closure checklist. project management checklist, deliverables, goals, benefits, outstanding action items and issues, handover of technical documents, knowledge transfer, sign-off.

    For further information on closure procedures, use Info-Tech’s blueprint, Begin Your Projects With the End in Mind.

    3.4.3 Document optimization and future release opportunities

    0.5-1 hour

    Consider the future opportunities for improvement post-release:

    1. Product and vendor satisfaction opportunities
    2. Capability and feature optimization opportunities
    3. Process optimization opportunities
    4. Integration optimization opportunities
    5. Data optimization opportunities
    6. Cost-saving opportunities
    7. Record optimization and future release opportunities in section 3.9 of Info-Tech’s Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Download

    Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.

    Input

    Output

    • Your project objectives
    • Your project scope
    • Your optimization opportunities list

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook.
    • Project team
    • Operations
    • SMEs
    • Team lead and facilitators
    • IT leaders

    Optimization opportunities

    Example

    Optimization types and opportunities.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build upon your foundations

    Build an ERP Strategy and Roadmap

    • A business-led, top-management-supported initiative partnered with IT has the greatest chance of success. This blueprint provides business and IT the methodology for getting the right level of detail for the business processes that the ERP supports thus avoiding getting lost in the details.

    Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

    • Implementing enterprise software is hard. You need a framework that will greatly improve your chance of success. Traditional Waterfall project implementations have a demonstrated a low success rate for on-time, on-budget delivery.

    Select and Implement a Human Resource Information System

    • Your organization is in the midst of a selection and implementation process for a human resource information system (HRIS), and there is a need to disambiguate the market and arrive at a shortlist of vendors.

    Select and Implement an ERP Solution

    • Selecting and implementing an ERP is one of the most expensive and time-consuming technology transformations an organization can undertake. ERP projects are notorious for time and budget overruns, with only a margin of the anticipated benefits being realized.

    Right-Size Your Project Risk Investment

    • Avoid the all-or-nothing mindset; even modest investments in risk will provide a return. Learn from and record current and historical risk events so lessons learned can easily be embedded into future projects. Assign someone to own the risk topic and make it their job to keep a relevant menu of risks.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build upon your foundations

    Drive Business Value With a Right-Sized Project Gating Process

    • Many organizations have implemented gating as part of their project management process. So, what separates those who are successful from those who are not? For starters, successful gating requires that each gate is treated as an essential audit. That means there need to be clear roles and responsibilities in the framework.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • Organizational change management (OCM) is often an Achilles’ heel for IT departments and business units, putting projects and programs at risk – especially large, complex, transformational projects.

    Get Started With Project Management Excellence

    • Lack of proper scoping at the beginning of the project leads to constant rescoping, rescheduling, and budget overruns.

    ERP Requirements Picklist Tool

    • Use this tool to collect ERP requirements in alignment with the major functional areas of ERP. Review the existing set of ERP requirements as a starting point to compiling your organization's requirements.

    Begin Your Projects With the End in Mind

    • Stakeholders are dissatisfied with IT’s inability to meet or even provide consistent, accurate estimates. The business’ trust in IT erodes every time a project is late, lost, or unable to start.

    Get Started With IT Project Portfolio Management

    • Most companies are struggling to get their project work done. This is due in part to the fact that many prescribed remedies are confusing, disruptive, costly, or ineffective.

    Bibliography

    7 Shocking Project Management Statistics and Lessons We Should Learn.” TeamGantt, Jan. 2017.

    Akrong, Godwin Banafo, et al. "Overcoming the Challenges of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP): A Systematic Review Approach." IJEIS vol.18, no.1 2022: pp.1-41.

    Andriole, S. “Why No One Can Manage Projects, Especially Technology Projects.” Forbes, 1 Dec. 2020.

    Andriole, Steve. “Why No One Can Manage Projects, Especially Technology Projects.” Forbes, 1 Dec. 2020.

    Beeson, K. “ERP Implementation Plan (ERP Implementation Process Guide).” ERP Focus, 8 Aug. 2022.

    Biel, Justin. “60 Critical ERP Statistics: 2022 Market Trends, Data and Analysis.” Oracle Netsuite, 12 July 2022.

    Bloch, Michael, et al. “Delivering Large-Scale IT Projects on Time, on Budget, and on Value.” McKinsey & Company, 2012.

    Buverud, Heidi. ERP System Implementation: How Top Managers' Involvement in a Change Project Matters. 2019. Norwegian School of Economics, Ph.D. thesis.

    Carlton, R. “Four ERP Implementation Case Studies You Can Learn From.” ERP Focus, 15 July 2015.

    Gopinath, S. Project Management in the Emerging World of Disruption. PMI India Research and Academic Conference 2019. Kozhikode Publishers.

    Grabis, J. “On-Premise or Cloud Enterprise Application Deployment: Fit-Gap Perspective.” Enterprise Information Systems. Edited by Filipe, J., Śmiałek, M., Brodsky, A., Hammoudi, S. ICEIS, 2019.

    Harrin, E. The Definitive Guide to Project Sponsors. RGPM, 13 Dec. 2022.

    Jacobs-Long, Ann. “EPMO’s Can Make A Difference In Your Organization.” 9 May 2012.

    Kotadia, C. “Challenges Involved in Adapting and Implementing an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems.” International Journal of Research and Review vol. 7 no. 12 December 2020: 538-548.

    Panorama Consulting Group. "2018 ERP Report." Panorama Consulting Group, 2018. Accessed 12 Oct. 2021.

    Panorama Consulting Group. "2021 ERP Report." Panorama Consulting Group, 2021. Accessed 12 Oct. 2021.

    PM Solutions. (2014). The State of the PMO 2014.

    PMI. Pulse of the Profession. 2017.

    Podeswa, H. “The Business Case for Agile Business Analysis.” Requirements Engineering Magazine, 21 Feb. 2017.

    Project Delivery Performance in Australia. AIPM and KPMG, 2020.

    Prosci. (2020). Prosci 2020 Benchmarking Data from 2007, 2009, 2011, 2013, 2015, 2017, 2019.

    Swartz, M. “End User Adoption and Change Management Process.” Swartz Consulting LLC, 11 July 2022.

    Trammell, H. “28 Important Project Management KPIs (& How To Track Them).” ClearPoint Strategy, 2022.

    “What are Business Requirements?" Requirements.com, 18 Oct. 2018.

    “What Is the Role of a Project Sponsor?” Six Sigma Daily, 18 May 2022.

    “When Will You Think Differently About Programme Delivery?” 4th Global Portfolio and Programme Management Survey. PricewaterhouseCoopers, Sept. 2014.

    Customer Value Contribution

    I'm proud to announce our new Customer Value Contribution Calculator©, or CVCC© in short.

    It enhances and possibly replaces the BIA (Business Impact Analysis) process with a much simpler way.

    More info to follow shortly.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}218|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.
    • It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impact on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative financial impacts of vendor actions.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential financial impacts of vendors’ poor performance. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the financial impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. “What If” Financial Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the financial impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Financial Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of negative vendor actions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Vendor actions can have significant financial consequences for your organization.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Vendors are becoming more influential and essential to the operation of organizations. Often the sole risk consideration of a business is whether the vendor meets a security standard, but vendors can negatively impact organizations’ budgets in various ways. Fortunately, though inherent risk is always present, organizations can offset the financial impacts of high-risk vendors by employing due diligence in their vendor management practices to help manage the overall risks.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.

    It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.

    Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Companies without good vendor management risk initiatives will take on more risk than they should. Solid vendor management practices are imperative –organizations must evolve to ensure that vendors deliver services according to performance objectives and that risks are managed accordingly.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Financial risk impact

    Potential losses to the organization due to financial risks

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore financial risks and their impacts.

    Identifying negative actions is paramount to assessing the overall financial impact on your organization, starting in the due diligence phase of the vendor assessment and continuing throughout the vendor lifecycle.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Financial' highlighted.

    Unbudgeted financial risk impact

    The costs of adverse vendor actions, such as a breach or an outage, are increasing. By knowing these potential costs, leaders can calculate how to avoid them throughout the lifecycle of the relationship.

    Loss of business represents the largest share of the breach

    38%

    Avg. $1.59M
    Global average cost of a vendor breach

    $4.2M

    Percentage of breaches in 2020 caused by business associates

    40.2%

    23.2% YoY
    (year over year)
    (Source: “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021,” IBM, 2021) (Source: “Vendor Risk Management – A Growing Concern,” Stern Security, 2021)

    Example: Hospital IT System Outage

    Hospitals often rely on vendors to manage their data center environments but rarely understand the downstream financial impacts if that vendor fails to perform.

    For example, a vendor implements a patch out of cycle with no notice to the IT group. Suddenly all IT systems are down. It takes 12 hours for the IT teams to return systems to normal. The downstream impacts are substantial.

    • There is no revenue capture during outage (patient registration, payments).
      • The financial loss is significant, impacting cash on hand and jeopardizing future projects.
    • Clinicians cannot access the electronic health record (EHR) system and shift to downtime paper processes.
      • This can cause potential risks to patient health, such as unknown drug interactions.
      • This could also incur lawsuits, fines, and penalties.
    • Staff must manually add the paper records into the EHR after the incident is corrected.
      • Staff time is lost on creating paper records and overtime is required to reintroduce those records into EMR.
    • Staff time and overtime pay on troubleshooting and solving issues take away from normal operations and could cause delays, having downstream effects on the timing of other projects.

    Insight Summary

    Assessing financial impacts is an ongoing, educative, and collaborative multidisciplinary process that vendor management initiatives are uniquely designed to coordinate and manage for organizations.

    Insight 1 Vendors are becoming more and more crucial to organizations’ overall operations, and most organizations have a poor understanding of the potential impacts they represent.

    Is your vendor solvent? Do they have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has their long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Are they unique in their space?

    Insight 2 Financial impacts from other risk types deserve just as much focus as security alone, if not more.

    Examples include penalties and fines, loss of revenue due to operational impacts, vendor replacement costs, hidden costs in poorly understood contracts, and lack of contractual protections.

    Insight 3 There is always an inherent risk in working with a vendor, but organizations should financially quantify how much each risk may impact their budget.

    A significant concern for organizations is quantifying different types of risks. When a risk occurs, the financial losses are often poorly understood, with unbudgeted financial impacts.

    Three stages of vendor financial risk assessment

    Assess risk throughout the complete vendor lifecycle

    1. Pre-Relationship Due Diligence: The initial pre-relationship due diligence stage is a crucial point to establish risk management practices. Vendor management practices ensure that a potential vendor’s risk is categorized correctly by facilitating the process of risk assessment.
    2. Monitor & Manage: Once the relationship is in place, organizations should enact ongoing management efforts to ensure they are both getting their value from the vendor and appropriately addressing any newly identified risks.
    3. Termination: When the termination of the relationship arrives, the organization should validate that adequate protections that were established while forming a contract in the pre-relationship stage remain in place.

    Inherent risks from negative actions are pervasive throughout the entire vendor lifecycle. Collaboratively understanding those risks and working together to put proper management in place enables organizations to get the most value out of the relationship with the least amount of risk.

    Flowchart for 'Assessing Financial Risk Impacts', beginning with 'New Vendor' to 'Sourcing' to the six components of 'Vendor Management'. After a gamut of assessments such as ''What If' Game' one can either 'Accept' to move on to 'Pre-Relationship', 'Monitor & Manage', and eventually to 'Termination', or not accept and circle back to 'Sourcing'.

    Stage 1: Pre-relationship assessment

    Do these as part of your due diligence

    • Review and negotiate contract terms and conditions.
      • Ensure that you have the protections to make you whole in the event of an incident, in the event that another entity purchases the vendor, and throughout the entire lifecycle of your relationship with the vendor.
      • Make sure to negotiate your post-termination protections in the initial agreement.
    • Perform a due-diligence financial assessment.
      • Make sure the vendor is positioned in the market to be able to service your organization.
    • Perform an initial risk assessment.
      • Identify and understand all potential factors that may cause financial impacts to your organization.
      • Include total cost of ownership (TCO) and return of investment (ROI) as potential impact offsets.
    • Review case studies – talk to other customers.
      • Research who else has worked with the vendor to get “the good, the bad, and the ugly” stories to form a clear picture of a potential relationship with the vendor.
    • Use proofs of concept.
      • It is essential to know how the vendor and their solutions will work in the environment before committing resources and to incorporate them into organizational strategic plans.
    • Limit vendors’ ability to increase costs over the years. It is not uncommon for a long-term relationship to become more expensive than a new one over time when the increases are unmanaged.
    • Vendor audits can be costly and a significant distraction to your staff. Make sure to contractually limit them.
    • Many vendors enjoy significant revenue from unclear deliverables and vague expectations that lead to change requests at unknown rates – clarifying expectations and deliverables and demanding negotiated rate sheets before engagement will save budget and strengthen the relationship.

    Visit Info-Tech’s VMO ROI Calculator and Tracker

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive financial risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Financial Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management – Coordinator, IT Operations, Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Finance/Procurement

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to collaboratively pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Financial Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risks but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Financial Risk Impact Tool

    Stage 2.1: Monitor the financial risk

    Ongoing monitoring activities

    Never underestimate the value of keeping the relationship moving forward.

    Examples of items and activities to monitor include;

    Stock photo of a worker being trained on a computer.
    • Fines
    • Data leaks
    • Performance
    • Credit monitoring
    • Viability/solvency
    • Resource capacity
    • Operational impacts
    • Regulatory penalties
    • Increases in premiums
    • Security breaches (infrastructure)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations do not have the resources to dedicate to annual risk assessments of all vendors.

    Consider timing ongoing risk assessments to align with contract renewal, when you have the most leverage with the vendor.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool

    Stage 2.2: Manage the financial risk

    During the lifecycle of the vendor relationship

    • Renew risk assessments annually.
    • Focus your efforts on highly ranked risks.
    • Is there a new opportunity to negotiate?
    • Identify and classify individual vendor risk.
    • Are there better existing contracts in place?
    • Review financial health checks at the same time.
    • Monitor and schedule contract renewals and new service/module negotiations.
    • Perform business alignment meetings to reassess the relationship.
    • Ongoing operational meetings should be supplemental, dealing with day-to-day issues.
    • Develop performance metrics and hold vendors accountable to established service levels.
    Stock image of a professional walking an uneven line over the words 'Risk Management'.

    Stage 3: Termination

    An essential and often overlooked part of the vendor lifecycle is the relationship after termination

    • The risk of a vendor keeping your data for “as long as they want” is high.
      • Data retention becomes a “forever risk” in today’s world of cyber issues if you do not appropriately plan.
    • Ensure that you always know where data resides and where people are allowed to access that data.
      • If there is a regulatory need to house data only in specific locations, ensure that it is explicit in agreements.
    • Protect your data through language in initial agreements that covers what needs to happen when the relationship with the vendor terminates.
      • Typically, all the data that the vendor has retained is returned and/or destroyed at your sole discretion.
    Stock image of a sign reading 'Closure'.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two co-workers laughing. Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings
    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    Stock image of reports and file folders. Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
    • Manage Agile contract risk by selecting the appropriate level of protections for an Agile project.
    • Focus on the correct contract clauses to manage Agile risk.
    Stock photo of three co-workers gathered around a computer screen. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Gain visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}127|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $40,241 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality and failing to benefit from good data quality, including:
      • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
      • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
      • Dissatisfied stakeholders.
    • The chances of successful decision-making capabilities are hindered with poor data quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Address the root causes of your data quality issues and form a viable data quality program.
      • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
      • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
      • Fix data quality issues at the root cause to ensure proper foundation for your data to flow.
    • It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Impact and Result

    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.
    • Develop a prioritized data quality improvement project roadmap and long-term improvement strategy.
    • Build related practices such as artificial intelligence and analytics with more confidence and less risk after achieving an appropriate level of data quality.

    Build Your Data Quality Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a data quality program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your organization’s data environment and business landscape

    Learn about what causes data quality issues, how to measure data quality, what makes a good data quality practice in relation to your data and business environments.

    • Business Capability Map Template

    2. Analyze your priorities for data quality fixes

    Determine your business unit priorities to create data quality improvement projects.

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    3. Establish your organization’s data quality program

    Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit, then determine a strategy for fixing those issues.

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    4. Grow and sustain your data quality practices

    Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Data Quality Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    The Purpose

    Evaluate the maturity of the existing data quality practice and activities.

    Assess how data quality is embedded into related data management practices.

    Envision a target state for the data quality practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the current data quality landscape

    Gaps, inefficiencies, and opportunities in the data quality practice are identified

    Target state for the data quality practice is defined

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition

    1.2 Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers

    1.3 Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles

    1.4 Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities

    1.5 Identify data quality practice future state

    1.6 Analyze gaps in data quality practice

    Outputs

    Data Quality Management Primer

    Business Capability Map Template

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Data Quality Diagnostic

    Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    2.1 Create business unit prioritization roadmap

    2.2 Develop subject areas project scope

    2.3 By subject area 1 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap

    Subject area scope

    Data Lineage Diagram

    3 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2

    The Purpose

    Define improvement initiatives

    Define a data quality improvement strategy and roadmap

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives

    Activities

    3.1 Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs

    3.2 By subject area 2 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Lineage Diagram

    Root Cause Analysis

    Impact Analysis

    4 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3

    The Purpose

    Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Strategy defined for fixing data quality issues for highest priority business unit

    Activities

    4.1 Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state

    4.2 Formulate a data quality resolution plan for the defined subject area

    4.3 By subject area 3 data lineage analysis, root cause analysis, impact assessment, and business analysis

    Outputs

    Data Quality Improvement Plan

    Data Lineage Diagram

    5 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality

    The Purpose

    Plan for continuous improvement in data quality

    Incorporate data quality management into the organization’s existing data management and governance programs

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sustained and communicated data quality program

    Activities

    5.1 Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative

    5.2 Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor

    5.3 Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items

    5.4 Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs

    Outputs

    Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap

    Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Further reading

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Quality Data Drives Quality Business Decisions

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Get ahead of the data curve by conquering data quality challenges.

    Regardless of the driving business strategy or focus, organizations are turning to data to leverage key insights and help improve the organization’s ability to realize its vision, key goals, and objectives.

    Poor quality data, however, can negatively affect time-to-insight and can undermine an organization’s customer experience efforts, product or service innovation, operational efficiency, or risk and compliance management. If you are looking to draw insights from your data for decision making, the quality of those insights is only as good as the quality of the data feeding or fueling them.

    Improving data quality means having a data quality management practice that is sustainably successful and appropriate to the use of the data, while evolving to keep pace with or get ahead of changing business and data landscapes. It is not a matter of fixing one data set at a time, which is resource and time intensive, but instead identifying where data quality consistently goes off the rails, and creating a program to improve the data processes at the source.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is experiencing the pitfalls of poor data quality, including:

    • Unreliable data and unfavorable output.
    • Inefficiencies and costly remedies.
    • Dissatisfied stakeholders.

    Poor data quality hinders successful decision making.

    Common Obstacles

    Not understanding the purpose and execution of data quality causes some disorientation with your data.

    • Failure to realize the importance/value of data quality.
    • Unsure of where to start with data quality.
    • Lack of investment in data quality.

    Organizations tend to adopt a project mentality when it comes to data quality instead of taking the strategic approach that would be all-around more beneficial in the long term.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Address the root causes of your data quality issues by forming a viable data quality program.

    • Be familiar with your organization’s data environment and business landscape.
    • Prioritize business use cases for data quality fixes.
    • Fixing data quality issues at the root cause to ensure a proper foundation for your data to flow.

    It is important to sustain best practices and grow your data quality program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Fix data quality issues as close as possible to the source of data while understanding that business use cases will each have different requirements and expectations from data quality.

    Data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge

    Data enables your organization to make decisions.

    Reliable data is needed to facilitate data consumers at all levels of the enterprise.

    Insights, knowledge, and information are needed to inform operational, tactical, and strategic decision-making processes. Data and information are needed to manage the business and empower business processes such as billing, customer touchpoints, and fulfillment.

    Raw Data

    Business Information

    Actionable Insights

    Data should be at the foundation of your organization’s evolution. The transformational insights that executives are constantly seeking can be uncovered with a data quality practice that makes high-quality, trustworthy information readily available to the business users who need it.

    98% of companies use data to improve customer experience. (Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    High-Level Data Architecture

    The image is a graphic, which at the top shows different stages of data, and in the lower part of the graphic shows the data processes.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    1. Data Quality & Data Culture Diagnostics Business Landscape Exercise
    2. Business Strategy & Use Cases
    3. Prioritize Use Cases With Poor Quality

    Info-Tech Insight

    As data is ingested, integrated, and maintained in the various streams of the organization's system and application architecture, there are multiple points where the quality of the data can degrade.

    1. Understand the organization's data culture and data quality environment across the business landscape.
    2. Prioritize business use cases with poor data quality.
    3. For each use case, identify data quality issues and requirements throughout the data pipeline.
    4. Fix data quality issues at the root cause.
    5. As data flow through quality assurance monitoring checkpoints, monitor data to ensure good quality output.

    Insight:

    Proper application of data quality dimensions throughout the data pipeline will result in superior business decisions.

    Data quality issues can occur at any stage of the data flow.

    The image shows the flow of data through various stages: Data Creation; Data Ingestion; Data Accumulation and Engineering; Data Delivery; and Reporting & Analytics. At the bottom, there are two bars: the left one labelled Fix data quality root causes here...; and the right reads: ...to prevent expensive cures here.

    The image is a legend that accompanies the data flow graphic. It indicates that a white and green square icon indicates Data quality dimensions; a red cube indicates a potential point of data quality degradation; the pink square indicates Root cause of poor data quality; and a green flag indicates Quality Assurance Monitoring.

    Prevent the domino effect of poor data quality

    Data is the foundation of decisions made at data-driven organizations.

    Therefore, if there are problems with the organization’s underlying data, this can have a domino effect on many downstream business functions.

    Let’s use an example to illustrate the domino effect of poor data quality.

    Organization X is looking to migrate their data to a single platform, System Y. After the migration, it has become apparent that reports generated from this platform are inconsistent and often seem wrong. What is the effect of this?

    1. Time must be spent on identifying the data quality issues, and often manual data quality fixes are employed. This will extend the time to deliver the project that depends on system Y by X months.
    2. To repair these issues, the business needs to contract two additional resources to complete the unforeseen work. The new resources cost $X each, as well as additional infrastructure and hardware costs.
    3. Now, the strategic objectives of the business are at risk and there is a feeling of mistrust in the new system Y.

    Three key challenges impacting the ability to deliver excellent customer experience

    30% Poor data quality

    30% Method of interaction changing

    30% Legacy systems or lack of new technology

    95% Of organizations indicated that poor data quality undermines business performance.

    (Source: Experian Data Quality, 2019)

    Maintaining quality data will support more informed decisions and strategic insight

    Improving your organization’s data quality will help the business realize the following benefits:

    Data-Driven Decision Making

    Business decisions should be made with a strong rationale. Data can provide insight into key business questions, such as, “How can I provide better customer satisfaction?”

    89% Of CIOs surveyed say lack of quality data is an obstacle to good decision making. (Larry Dignan, CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock0in and business alignment, 2020)

    Customer Intimacy

    Improve marketing and the customer experience by using the right data from the system of record to analyze complete customer views of transactions, sentiments, and interactions.

    94% Percentage of senior IT leaders who say that poor data quality impinges business outcomes. (Clint Boulton, Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality, 2016)

    Innovation Leadership

    Gain insights on your products, services, usage trends, industry directions, and competitor results to support decisions on innovations, new products, services, and pricing.

    20% Businesses lose as much as 20% of revenue due to poor data quality. (RingLead Data Management Solutions, 10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know)

    Operational Excellence

    Make sure the right solution is delivered rapidly and consistently to the right parties for the right price and cost structure. Automate processes by using the right data to drive process improvements.

    10-20% The implementation of data quality initiatives can lead to reductions in corporate budget of up to 20%. (HaloBI, 2015)

    However, maintaining data quality is difficult

    Avoid these pitfalls to get the true value out of your data.

    1. Data debt drags down ROI – a high degree of data debt will hinder you from attaining the ROI you’re expecting.
    2. Lack of trust means lack of usage – a lack of confidence in data results in a lack of data usage in your organization, which negatively effects strategic planning, KPIs, and business outcomes.
    3. Strategic assets become a liability – bad data puts your business at risk of failing compliance standards, which could result in you paying millions in fines.
    4. Increased costs and inefficiency – time spent fixing bad data means less workload capacity for your important initiatives and the inability to make data-based decisions.
    5. Barrier to adopting data-driven tech – emerging technologies, such as predictive analytics and artificial intelligence, rely on quality data. Inaccurate, incomplete, or irrelevant data will result in delays or a lack of ROI.
    6. Bad customer experience – Running your business on bad data can hinder your ability to deliver to your customers, growing their frustration, which negatively impacts your ability to maintain your customer base.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data quality suffers most at the point of entry. This is one of the causes of the domino effect of data quality – and can be one of the most costly forms of data quality errors due to the error propagation. In other words, fix data ingestion, whether through improving your application and database design or improving your data ingestion policy, and you will fix a large majority of data quality issues.

    Follow Our Data & Analytics Journey

    Data Quality is laced into Data Strategy, Data Management, and Data Governance.

    • Data Strategy
      • Data Management
        • Data Quality
        • Data Governance
          • Data Architecture
            • MDM
            • Data Integration
            • Enterprise Content Management
            • Information Lifecycle Management
              • Data Warehouse/Lake/Lakehouse
                • Reporting and Analytics
                • AI

    Data quality is rooted in data management

    Extract Maximum Benefit Out of Your Data Quality Management.

    • Data management is the planning, execution, and oversight of policies, practices, and projects that acquire, control, protect, deliver, and enhance the value of data and information assets (DAMA, 2009).
    • In other words, getting the right information, to the right people, at the right time.
    • Data quality management exists within each of the data practices, information dimensions, business resources, and subject areas that comprise the data management framework.
    • Within this framework, an effective data quality practice will replace ad hoc processes with standardized practices.
    • An effective data quality practice cannot succeed without proper alignment and collaboration across this framework.
    • Alignment ensures that the data quality practice is fit for purpose to the business.

    The DAMA DMBOK2 Data Management Framework

    • Data Governance
      • Data Quality
      • Data Architecture
      • Data Modeling & Design
      • Data Storage & Operations
      • Data Security
      • Data Integration & Interoperability
      • Documents & Content
      • Reference & Master Data
      • Data Warehousing & Business Intelligence
      • Meta-data

    (Source: DAMA International)

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    • People often think that the main problems they need to fix first are related to data quality when the issues transpire at a much larger level. This blueprint is the key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • Refer to this blueprint to understand data quality in the context of data disciplines and methods for improving your data management capabilities.

    Establish Data Governance

    • Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with this blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Data Quality

    Phase Steps 1. Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape 2. Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes 3. Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program 4. Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Practice
    Phase Outcomes This step identifies the foundational understanding of your data and business landscape, the essential concepts around data quality, as well as the core capabilities and competencies that IT needs to effectively improve data quality. To begin addressing specific, business-driven data quality projects, you must identify and prioritize the data-driven business units. This will ensure that data improvement initiatives are aligned to business goals and priorities. After determining whose data is going to be fixed based on priority, determine the specific problems that they are facing with data quality, and implement an improvement plan to fix it. Now that you have put an improvement plan into action, make sure that the data quality issues don’t keep cropping up. Integrate data quality management with data governance practices into your organization and look to grow your organization’s overall data maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Data Quality is in the eyes of the beholder.”– Igor Ikonnikov, Research Director

    Data quality means tolerance, not perfection

    Data from Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Diagnostic, which represents over 400 business stakeholders, shows that data quality is very important when satisfaction with data quality is low.

    However, when data quality satisfaction hit a threshold, it became less important.

    The image is a line graph, with the X-axis labelled Satisfaction with Data Quality, and the Y axis labelled Rated Importance for Data Quality. The line begins high, and then descends. There is text inside the graph, which is transcribed below.

    Respondents were asked “How satisfied are you with the quality, reliability, and effectiveness of the data you use to manage your group?” as well as to rank how important data quality was to their organization.

    When the business satisfaction of data quality reached a threshold value of 71-80%, the rated importance reached its lowest value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data needs to be good, but truly spectacular data may go unnoticed.

    Provide the right level of data quality, with the appropriate effort, for the correct usage. This blueprint will help you to determine what “the right level of data quality” means, as well as create a plan to achieve that goal for the business.

    Data Roles and Responsibilities

    Data quality occurs through three main layers across the data lifecycle

    Data Strategy

    Data Strategy should contain Data Quality as a standard component.

    ← Data Quality issues can occur throughout at any stage of the data flow →

    DQ Dimensions

    Timeliness – Representation – Usability – Consistency – Completeness – Uniqueness – Entry Quality – Validity – Confidence – Importance

    Source System Layer

    • Data Resource Manager/Collector: Enters data into a database and ensures that data collection sources are accurate

    Data Transformation Layer

    • ETL Developer: Designs data storage systems
    • Data Engineer: Oversees data integrations, data warehouses and data lakes, data pipelines
    • Database Administrator: Manages database systems, ensures they meet SLAs, performances, backups
    • Data Quality Engineer: Finds and cleanses bad data in data sources, creates processes to prevent data quality problems

    Consumption Layer

    • Data Scientist: Gathers and analyses data from databases and other sources, runs models, and creates data visualizations for users
    • BI Analyst: Evaluates and mines complex data and transforms it into insights that drive business value. Uses BI software and tools to analyze industry trends and create visualizations for business users
    • Data Analyst: Extracts data from business systems, analyzes it, and creates reports and dashboards for users
    • BI Engineer: Documents business needs on data analysis and reporting and develops BI systems, reports, and dashboards to support them
    Data Creation → [SLA] Data Ingestion [ QA] →Data Accumulation & Engineering → [SLA] Data Delivery [QA] →Reporting & Analytics
    Fix Data Quality root causes here… to prevent expensive cures here.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Primary Info-Tech Research

    Align source systems to maximize business output.

    A healthcare insurance agency faced data quality issues in which a key business use case was impacted negatively. Business rules were not well defined, and default values instead of real value caused a concern. When dealing with multiple addresses, data was coming from different source systems.

    The challenge was to identify the most accurate address, as some were incomplete, and some lacked currency and were not up to date. This especially challenged a key business unit, marketing, to derive business value in performing key activities by being unable to reach out to existing customers to advertise any additional products.

    For this initiative, this insurance agency took an economic approach by addressing those data quality issues using internal resources.

    Results

    Without having any MDM tools or having a master record or any specific technology relating to data quality, this insurance agency used in-house development to tackle those particular issues at the source system. Data quality capabilities such as data profiling were used to uncover those issues and address them.

    “Data quality is subjective; you have to be selective in terms of targeting the data that matters the most. When getting business tools right, most issues will be fixed and lead to achieving the most value.” – Asif Mumtaz, Data & Solution Architect

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    • Call #1: Learn about the concepts of data quality and the common root causes of poor data quality.
    • Call #2: Identify the core capabilities of IT for improving data quality on an enterprise scale.
    • Call #3: Determine which business units use data and require data quality remediation.
    • Call #4: Create a plan for addressing business unit data quality issues according to priority of the business units based on value and impact of data.
    • Call #5: Revisit the root causes of data quality issues and identify the relevant root causes to the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #6: Determine a strategy for fixing data quality issues for the highest priority business unit.
    • Call #7: Identify strategies for continuously monitoring and improving data quality at the organization.
    • Call #8: Learn how to incorporate data quality practices in the organization’s larger data management and data governance frameworks.
    • Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps on how to evolve your data landscape.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between eight to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 1 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 2 Create a Strategy for Data Quality Project 3 Create a Plan for Sustaining Data Quality
    Activities
    1. Explain approach and value proposition.
    2. Detail business vision, objectives, and drivers.
    3. Discuss data quality barriers, needs, and principles.
    4. Assess current enterprise-wide data quality capabilities.
    5. Identify data quality practice future state.
    6. Analyze gaps in data quality practice.
    1. Create business unit prioritization roadmap.
    2. Develop subject areas project scope.
    3. By subject area 1:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Understand how data quality management fits in with the organization’s data governance and data management programs.
    2. By subject area 2:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate strategies and actions to achieve data quality practice future state.
    2. Formulate data quality resolution plan for defined subject area.
    3. By subject area 3:
    • Data lineage analysis
    • Root cause analysis
    • Impact assessment
    • Business analysis
    1. Formulate metrics for continuous tracking of data quality and monitoring the success of the data quality improvement initiative.
    2. Workshop Debrief with Project Sponsor.
    • Meet with project sponsor/manager to discuss results and action items.
    • Wrap up outstanding items from the workshop, deliverables expectations, GIs.
    Deliverables
    1. Data Quality Management Primer
    2. Business Capability Map Template
    3. Data Culture Diagnostic
    4. Data Quality Diagnostic
    5. Data Quality Problem Statement Template
    1. Business Unit Prioritization Roadmap
    2. Subject area scope
    3. Data Lineage Diagram
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Root Cause Analysis
    3. Impact Analysis
    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan
    1. Data Quality Practice Improvement Roadmap
    2. Data Quality Improvement Plan (for defined subject areas)

    Phase 1

    Define Your Organization’s Data Environment and Business Landscape

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Data quality is a methodology and must be treated as such

    A comprehensive data quality practice includes appropriate business requirements gathering, planning, governance, and oversight capabilities, as well as empowering technologies for properly trained staff, and ongoing development processes.

    Some common examples of appropriate data management methodologies for data quality are:

    • The data quality team has the necessary competencies and resources to perform the outlined workload.
    • There are processes that exist for continuously evaluating data quality performance capabilities.
    • Improvement strategies are designed to increase data quality performance capabilities.
    • Policies and procedures that govern data quality are well-documented, communicated, followed, and updated.
    • Change controls exist for revising policies and procedures, including communication of updates and changes.
    • Self-auditing techniques are used to ensure business-IT alignment when designing or recalibrating strategies.

    Effective data quality practices coordinate with other overarching data disciplines, related data practices, and strategic business objectives.

    “You don’t solve data quality with a Band-Aid; you solve it with a methodology.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Data quality can be defined by four key quality indicators

    Similar to measuring the acidity of a substance with a litmus test, the quality of your data can be measured using a simple indicator test. As you learn about common root causes of data quality problems in the following slides, think about these four quality indicators to assess the quality of your data:

    • Completeness – Closeness to the correct value. Encompasses accuracy, consistency, and comparability to other databases.
    • Usability – The degree to which data meets current user needs. To measure this, you must determine if the user is satisfied with the data they are using to complete their business functions.
    • Timeliness – Length of time between creation and availability of data.
    • Accessibility – How easily a user can access and understand the data (including data definitions and context). Interpretability can also be used to describe this indicator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Quality is a relative term. Data quality is measured in terms of tolerance. Perfect data quality is both impossible and a waste of time and effort.

    How to get investment for your data quality program

    Follow these steps to convince leadership of the value of data quality:

    “You have to level with people, you cannot just start talking with the language of data and expect them to understand when the other language is money and numbers.” – Izabela Edmunds, Information Architect at Mott MacDonald

    1. Perform Phases 0 & 1 of this blueprint as this will offer value in carrying out the following steps.
    2. Build credibility. Show them your understanding of data and how it aligns to the business.
    3. Provide tangible evidence of how significant business use cases are impacted by poor quality data.
    4. Present the ROI of fixing the data quality issues you have prioritized.
    5. Explain how the data quality program will be established, implemented, and sustained.
    6. Prove the importance of fixing data quality issues at the source and how it is the most efficient, effective, and cost-friendly solution.

    Phase 1 deliverables

    Each of these deliverables serve as inputs to detect key outcomes about your organization and to help complete this blueprint:

    1. Data Culture Diagnostic

    Use this report to understand where your organization lies across areas relating to data culture.

    While the Quality & Trust area of the report might be most prevalent to this blueprint, this diagnostic may point out other areas demanding more attention.

    Please speak to your account manager for access

    2. Business Capability Map Template

    Perform this process to understand the capabilities that enable specific value streams. The output of this deliverable is a high-level view of your organization’s defined business capabilities.

    Download this tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your data culture and business capabilities are foundational to starting the journey of data quality improvement.

    Key deliverable:

    3. Data Quality Diagnostic

    The Data Quality Report is designed to help you understand, assess, and improve key organizational data quality issues. This is where respondents across various areas in the organization can assess Data Quality across various dimensions.

    Download this tool

    Data Quality Diagnostic Value

    Prioritize business use cases with our data quality dimensions.

    • Complete this diagnostic for each major business use case. The output from the Data Culture Diagnostic and the Business Capability Map should help you understand which use cases to address.
    • Involve all key stakeholders involved in the business use case. There may be multiple business units involved in a single use case.
    • Prioritize the business use cases that need the most attention pertaining to data quality by comparing the scores of the Importance and Confidence data quality dimensions.

    If there are data elements that are considered of high importance and low confidence, then they must be prioritized.

    Sample Scorecard

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    The image shows a screen capture of a scorecard, with sample information filled in.

    Poor data quality develops due to multiple root causes

    After you get to know the properties of good quality data, understand the underlying causes of why those indicators can point to poor data quality.

    If you notice that the usability, completeness, timeliness, or accessibility of the organization’s data is suffering, one or more of the following root causes are likely plaguing your data:

    Common root causes of poor data quality, through the lens of Info-Tech’s Five-Tier Data Architecture:

    The image shows a graphic of Info-Tech's Five-Tier Data Architecture, with root causes of poor data quality identified. In the data creation and ingestion stages, the root causes are identified as Poor system/application design, Poor database design, Inadequate enterprise integration. The root causes identified in the latter stages are: Absence of data quality policies, procedures, and standards, and Incomplete/suboptimal business processes

    These root causes of poor data quality are difficult to avoid, not only because they are often generated at an organization’s beginning stages, but also because change can be difficult. This means that the root causes are often propagated through stale or outdated business processes.

    Data quality problems root cause #1:

    Poor system or application design

    Application design plays one of the largest roles in the quality of the organization’s data. The proper design of applications can prevent data quality issues that can snowball into larger issues downstream.

    Proper ingestion is 90% of the battle. An ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. This is true in many different topics, and data quality is one of them. Designing an application so that data gets entered properly, whether by internal staff or external customers, is the single most effective way to prevent data quality issues.

    Some common causes of data quality problems at the application/system level include:

    • Too many open fields (free-form text fields that accept a variety of inputs).
    • There are no lookup capabilities present. Reference data should be looked up instead of entered.
    • Mandatory fields are not defined, resulting in blank fields.
    • No validation of data entries before writing to the underlying database.
    • Manual data entry encourages human error. This can be compounded by poor application design that facilitates the incorrect data entry.

    Data quality problems root cause #2:

    Poor database design

    Database design also affects data quality. How a database is designed to handle incoming data, including the schema and key identification, can impact the integrity of the data used for reporting and analytics.

    The most common type of database is the relational database. Therefore, we will focus on this type of database.

    When working with and designing relational databases, there are some important concepts that must be considered.

    Referential integrity is a term that is important for the design of relational database schema, and indicates that table relationships must always be consistent.

    For table relationships to be consistent, primary keys (unique value for each row) must uniquely identify entities in columns of the table. Foreign keys (field that is defined in a second table but refers to the primary key in the first table) must agree with the primary key that is referenced by the foreign key. To maintain referential integrity, any updates must be propagated to the primary parent key.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Other types of databases, including databases with unstructured data, need data quality consideration. However, unstructured data may have different levels of quality tolerance.

    At the database level, some common root causes include:

    1. Lack of referential integrity.
    2. Lack of unique keys.
    3. Don’t have restricted data range.
    4. Incorrect datatype, string fields that can hold too many characters.
    5. Orphaned records.

    Databases and People:

    Even though database design is a technology issue, don’t forget about the people.

    A lack of training employees on database permissions for updating/entering data into the physical databases is a common problem for data quality.

    Data quality problems root cause #3:

    Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data

    Data ingestion is another category of data-quality-issue root causes. When moving data in Tier 2, whether it is through ETL, ESB, point-to-point integration, etc., the integrity of the data during movement and/or transformation needs to be maintained.

    Tier 2 (the data ingestion layer) serves to move data for one of two main purposes:

    • To move data from originating systems to downstream systems to support integrated business processes.
    • To move data to Tier 3 where data rests for other purposes. This movement of data in its purest form means we move raw data to storage locations in an overall data warehouse environment reflecting any security, compliance and other standards in our choices for how to store. Also, it is where data is transformed for unique business purpose that will also be moved to a place of rest or a place of specific use. Data cleansing and matching and other data-related blending tasks occur at this layer.

    This ensures the data is pristine throughout the process and improves trustworthiness of outcomes and speed to task completion.

    At the integration layer, some common root causes of data quality problems include:

    1. No data mask. For example, zip code should have a mask of five numeric characters.
    2. Questionable aggregation, transformation process, or incorrect logic.
    3. Unsynchronized data refresh process in an integrated environment.
    4. Lack of a data matching tool.
    5. Lack of a data quality tool.
    6. Don’t have data profiling capability.
    7. Errors with data conversion or migration processes – when migrating, decommissioning, or converting systems – movement of data sets.
    8. Incorrect data mapping between data sources and targets.

    Data quality problems root cause #4:

    Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures

    Data policies and procedures are necessary for establishing standards around data and represent another category of data-quality-issue root causes. This issue spans across all five of the 5 Tier Architecture.

    Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

    • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
    • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
    • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to policies and procedures include:

    1. Policies are absent or out of date.
    2. Employees are largely unaware of policies in effect.
    3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced.
    4. Policies are in multiple locations.
    5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist.
    6. Policies are managed inconsistently across different silos.
    7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors.
    8. Inadequate policy training program.
    9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum.
    10. Weak policy support from senior management.

    Data quality problems root cause #5:

    Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Some common root causes of data quality issues related to business processes include:

    1. Multiple entries of the same record leads to duplicate records proliferating in the database.
    2. Many business definitions of data.
    3. Failure to document data manipulations when presenting data.
    4. Failure to train people on how to understand data.
    5. Manually intensive processes can result in duplication of effort (creates room for errors).
    6. No clear delineation of dependencies of business processes within or between departments, which leads to a siloed approach to business processes, rather than a coordinated and aligned approach.

    Business processes can impact data quality. How data is entered into systems, as well as employee training and knowledge about the correct data definitions, can impact the quality of your organization’s data.

    These problematic business process root causes can lead to:

    Duplicate records

    Incomplete data

    Improper use of data

    Wrong data entered into fields

    These data quality issues will result in costly and inefficient manual fixes, wasting valuable time and resources.

    Phase 1 Summary

    1. Data Quality Understanding

    • Understanding that data quality is a methodology and should be treated as such.
    • Data quality can be defined by four key indicators which are completeness, usability, timeliness, and accessibility.
    • Explained how to get investment for your data quality program and showcasing its value to leadership.

    2. Phase 0 Deliverables

    Introduced foundational tools to help you throughout this blueprint:

    • Complete the Data Culture Diagnostic and Business Capability Map Template as they are foundational in understanding your data culture and business capabilities to start the journey of data quality improvement.
    • Involve key relevant stakeholders when completing the Data Quality Diagnostic for each major business use case. Use the Importance and Confidence dimensions to help you prioritize which use case to address.

    3. Common Root Causes

    Addressed where multiple root causes can occur throughout the flow of your data.

    Analyzed the following common root causes of data quality:

    1. Poor system or application design
    2. Poor database design
    3. Improper integration and synchronization of enterprise data
    4. Insufficient and ineffective data quality policies and procedures
    5. Inefficient or ineffective business processes

    Phase 2

    Analyze Your Priorities for Data Quality Fixes

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Business Context & Data Quality

    Establish the business context of data quality improvement projects at the business unit level to find common goals.

    • To ensure the data improvement strategy is business driven, start your data quality project evaluation by understanding the business context. You will then determine which business units use data and create a roadmap for prioritizing business units for data quality repairs.
    • Your business context is represented by your corporate business vision, mission, goals and objectives, differentiators, and drivers. Collectively, they provide essential information on what is important to your organization, and some hints on how to achieve that. In this step, you will gather important information about your business view and interpret the business view to establish a data view.

    Business Vision

    Business Goals

    Business Drivers

    Business Differentiators

    Not every business unit uses data to the same extent

    A data flow diagram can provide value by allowing an organization to adopt a proactive approach to data quality. Save time by knowing where the entry points are and where to look for data flaws.

    Understanding where data lives can be challenging as it is often in motion and rarely resides in one place. There are multiple benefits that come from taking the time to create a data flow diagram.

    • Mapping out the flow of data can help provide clarity on where the data lives and how it moves through the enterprise systems.
    • Having a visual of where and when data moves helps to understand who is using data and how it is being manipulated at different points.
    • A data flow diagram will allow you to elicit how data is used in a different use case.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Column Model of Data will help you to identify the essential aspects of your data:

    Business Use Case →Used by→Business Unit →Housed in→Systems→Used for→Usage of the Data

    Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Ensure that the project starts on the right foot by completing Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Before you can identify a solution, you must identify the problem with the business unit’s data.

    Download this tool

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template to identify the symptoms of poor data quality and articulate the problem.

    Info-Tech’s Data Quality Problem Statement Template will walk you through a step-by-step approach to identifying and describing the problems that the business unit feels regarding its data quality.

    Before articulating the problem, it helps to identify the symptoms of the problem. The following W’s will help you to describe the symptoms of the data quality issues:

    What

    Define the symptoms and feelings produced by poor data quality in the business unit.

    Where

    Define the location of the data that are causing data quality issues.

    When

    Define how severe the data quality issues are in frequency and duration.

    Who

    Define who is affected by the data quality problems and who works with the data.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Symptoms vs. Problems. Often, people will identify a list of symptoms of a problem and mistake those for the problem. Identifying the symptoms helps to define the problem, but symptoms do not help to identify the solution. The problem statement helps you to create solutions.

    Define the project problem to articulate the purpose

    1 hour

    Input

    • Symptoms of data quality issues in the business unit

    Output

    • Refined problem description

    Materials

    • Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Participants

    • Data Quality Improvement Project team
    • Business line representatives

    A defined problem helps you to create clear goals, as well as lead your thinking to determine solutions to the problem.

    A problem statement consists of one or two sentences that summarize a condition or issue that a quality improvement team is meant to address. For the improvement team to fix the problem, the problem statement therefore has to be specific and concise.

    Instructions

    1. Gather the Data Quality Improvement Project Team in a room and start with an issue that is believed to be related to data quality.
    2. Ask what are the attributes and symptoms of that reality today; do this with the people impacted by the issue. This should be an IT and business collaboration.
    3. Draw your conclusions of what it all means: what have you collectively learned?
    4. Consider the implications of your conclusions and other considerations that must be taken into account such as regulatory needs, compliance, policy, and targets.
    5. Develop solutions – Contain the problem to something that can be solved in a realistic timeframe, such as three months.

    Download the Data Quality Problem Statement Template

    Case Study

    A strategic roadmap rooted in business requirements primes a data quality improvement plan for success.

    MathWorks

    Industry

    Software Development

    Source

    Primary Info-Tech Research

    As part of moving to a formalized data quality practice, MathWorks leveraged an incremental approach that took its time investigating business cases to support improvement actions. Establishing realistic goals for improvement in the form of a roadmap was a central component for gaining executive approval to push the project forward.

    Roadmap Creation

    In constructing a comprehensive roadmap that incorporated findings from business process and data analyses, MathWorks opted to document five-year and three-year overall goals, with one-year objectives that supported each goal. This approach ensured that the tactical actions taken were directed by long-term strategic objectives.

    Results – Business Alignment

    In presenting their roadmap for executive approval, MathWorks placed emphasis on communicating the progression and impact of their initiatives in terms that would engage business users. They focused on maintaining continual lines of communication with business stakeholders to demonstrate the value of the initiatives and also to gradually shift the corporate culture to one that is invested in an effective data quality practice.

    “Don’t jump at the first opportunity, because you may be putting out a fire with a cup of water where a fire truck is needed.” – Executive Advisor, IT Research and Advisory Firm

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to create your strategy for improving data quality

    Assess IT’s capabilities and competencies around data quality and plan to build these as the organization’s data quality practice develops. Before you can fix data quality, make sure you have the necessary skills and abilities to fix data quality correctly.

    The following IT capabilities are developed on an ongoing basis and are necessary for standardizing and structuring a data quality practice:

    • Meeting Business Needs
    • Services and Projects
    • Policies, Procedures, and Standards
    • Roles and Organizational Structure
    • Oversight and Communication
    • Data Quality of Different Data Types

    Download this Tool

    Data Handling and Remediation Competencies:

    • Data Standardization: Formatting values into consistent standards based on industry standards and business rules.
    • Data Cleansing: Modification of values to meet domain restrictions, integrity constraints, or other business rules for sufficient data quality for the organization.
    • Data Matching: Identification, linking, and merging related entries in or across sets of data.
    • Data Validation: Checking for correctness of the data.

    After these capabilities and competencies are assessed for a current and desired target state, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool will suggest improvement actions that should be followed in order to build your data quality practice. In addition, a roadmap will be generated after target dates are set to create your data quality practice development strategy.

    Benchmark current and identify target capabilities for your data quality practice

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and desired data quality practices in the organization

    Output

    • Assessment of where the gaps lie in your data quality practice

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Line Representatives
    • Business Architects

    Use the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to evaluate the baseline and target capabilities of your practice in terms of how data quality is approached and executed.

    Download this Tool

    Instructions

    1. Invite the appropriate stakeholders to participate in this exercise. Examples:
      1. Business executives will have input in Tab 2
      2. Unique stakeholders: communications expert or executive advisors may have input
    2. On Tab 2: Practice Components, assess the current and target states of each capability on a scale of 1–5. Note: “Ad hoc” implies a capability is completed, but randomly, informally, and without a standardized method.

    These results will set the baseline against which you will monitor performance progress and keep track of improvements over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus on early alignment. Assessing capabilities within specific people’s job functions can naturally result in disagreement or debate, especially between business and IT people. Remind everyone that data quality should ultimately serve business needs wherever possible.

    Visualization improves the holistic understanding of where gaps exist in your data quality practice

    To enable deeper analysis on the results of your practice assessment, Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Scorecard in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool creates visualizations of the gaps identified in each of your practice capabilities and related data management practices. These diagrams serve as analysis summaries.

    Gap assessment of “Meeting Business Needs” capabilities

    The image shows a screen capture of the Gap assessment of 
“Meeting Business Needs” capabilities, with sample information filled in.

    Visualization of gap assessment of data quality practice capabilities

    The image shows a bar graph titled Data Quality Capabilities.

    1. Enhance your gap analyses by forming a relative comparison of total gaps in key practice capability areas, which will help in determining priorities.
    • Example: In Tab 2 compare your capabilities within “Policies, Procedures, and Standards.” Then in Tab 3, compare your overall capabilities in “Policies, Procedures, and Standards” versus “Empowering Technologies.”
  • Put these up on display to improve discussion in the gap analyses and prioritization sessions.
  • Improve the clarity and flow of your strategy template, final presentations, and summary documents by copying and pasting the gap assessment diagrams.
  • Before engaging in the data quality improvement project plan, receive signoff from IT regarding feasibility

    The final piece of the puzzle is to gain sign-off from IT.

    Hofstadter's law: It always takes longer than you expect, even when you take into account Hofstadter’s Law.

    This means that before engaging IT in data quality projects to fix the business units’ data in Phase 2, IT must assess feasibility of the data quality improvement plan. A feasibility analysis is typically used to review the strengths and weaknesses of the projects, as well as the availability of required skills and technologies needed to complete them. Use the following workflow to guide you in performing a feasibility analysis:

    Project evaluation process:

    Present capabilities

    • Operational Capabilities
    • System Capabilities
    • Schedule Capabilities
      • Summary of Evaluation Results
        • Recommendations/ modifications to the project plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While the PMO identifies and coordinates projects, IT must determine how long and for how much.

    Conduct gap analysis sessions to review and prioritize the capability gaps

    1 hour

    Input

    • Current and Target State Assessment

    Output

    • Documented initiatives to help you get to the target state

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality team
    • IT representatives

    Instructions

    • Analyze Gap Analysis Results – As a group, discuss the high-level results on Tab 3: Data Quality Practice Score. Discuss the implications of the gaps identified.
    • Do a line-item review of the gaps between current and target levels for each assessed capability by using Tab 2: Practice Components.
    • Brainstorm Alignment Strategies – Brainstorm the effort and activities that will be necessary to support the practice in building its capabilities to the desired target level. Ask the following questions:
      • What activities must occur to enable this capability?
      • What changes/additions to resources, process, technology, business involvement, and communication must occur?
    • Document Data Quality Initiatives – Turn activities into initiatives by documenting them in Tab 4. Data Quality Practice Roadmap. Review the initiatives and estimate the start and end dates of each one.
    • Continue to evaluate the assessment results in order to create a comprehensive set of data quality initiatives that support your practice in building capabilities.

    Download this Tool

    Create the organization’s data quality improvement strategy roadmap

    1 hour

    Input

    • Data quality practice gaps and improvement actions

    Output

    • Data quality practice improvement roadmap

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality Project Lead
    • Business Executives
    • IT Executives
    • Business Architects

    Generating Your Roadmap

    1. Plan the sequence, starting time, and length of each initiative in the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    2. The tool will generate a Gantt chart based on the start and length of your initiatives.
    3. The Gantt chart is generated in Tab 4: Data Quality Practice Roadmap, and can be used to organize and ensure that all of the essential aspects of data quality are addressed.

    Use the Practice Roadmap to plan and improve data quality capabilities

    Download this Tool

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    To help get you started, Info-Tech has provided an extensive list of data quality improvement initiatives that are commonly undertaken by organizations looking to improve their data quality.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    2 hours

    Create practice-level metrics to monitor your data quality practice.

    Instructions:

    1. Establish metrics for both the business and IT that will be used to determine if the data quality practice development is effective.
    2. Set targets for each metric.
    3. Collect current data to calculate the metrics and establish a baseline.
    4. Assign an owner for tracking each metric to be accountable for performance.
    Metric Current Goal
    Usage (% of trained users using the data warehouse)
    Performance (response time)
    Performance (response time)
    Resource utilization (memory usage, number of machine cycles)
    User satisfaction (quarterly user surveys)
    Data quality (% values outside valid values, % fields missing, wrong data type, data outside acceptable range, data that violates business rules. Some aspects of data quality can be automatically tracked and reported)
    Costs (initial installation and ongoing, Total Cost of Ownership including servers, software licenses, support staff)
    Security (security violations detected, where violations are coming from, breaches)
    Patterns that are used
    Reduction in time to market for the data
    Completeness of data that is available
    How many "standard" data models are being used
    What is the extra business value from the data governance program?
    How much time is spent for data prep by BI & analytics team?

    Phase 2 summary

    As you improve your data quality practice and move from reactive to stable, don’t rest and assume that you can let data quality keep going by itself. Rapidly changing consumer requirements or other pains will catch up to your organization and you will fall behind again. By moving to the proactive and predictive end of the maturity scale, you can stay ahead of the curve. By following the methodology laid out in Phase 1, the data quality practices at your organization will improve over time, leading to the following results:

    Chaotic

    Before Data Quality Practice Improvements

    • No standards to data quality

    Reactive

    Year 1

    • Processes defined
    • Data cleansing approach to data quality

    Stable

    Year 2

    • Business rules/ stewardship in place
    • Education and training

    Proactive

    Year 3

    • Data quality practices fully in place and embedded in the culture
    • Trusted and intelligent enterprise

    (Global Data Excellence, Data Excellence Maturity Model)

    Phase 3

    Establish Your Organization’s Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Create a data lineage diagram to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes

    It is important to understand the various data that exist in the business unit, as well as which data are essential to business function and require the highest degree of quality efforts.

    Visualize your databases and the flow of data. A data lineage diagram can help you and the Data Quality Improvement Team visualize where data issues lie. Keeping the five-tier architecture in mind, build your data lineage diagram.

    Reminder: Five-Tier Architecture

    The image shows the Five-Tier Architecture graphic.

    Use the following icons to represent your various data systems and databases.

    The image shows four icons. They are: the image of a square and a computer monitor, labelled Application; the image of two sheets of paper, labelled Desktop documents; the image of a green circle next to a computer monitor, labelled Web Application; and a blue cylinder labelled Database.

    Use Info-Tech’s Data Lineage Diagram to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit

    2 hours

    Input

    • Data sources and applications used by the business unit

    Output

    • Data lineage diagram

    Materials

    • Data Lineage Diagram Template

    Participants

    • Business Unit Head/Data Owner
    • Business Unit SMEs
    • Data Analysts/Architects

    Map the flow and location of data within a business unit by creating a system context diagram.

    Gain an accurate view of data locations and uses: Engage business users and representatives with a wide breadth of knowledge-related business processes and the use of data by related business operations.

    1. Sit down with key business representatives of the business unit.
    2. Document the sources of data and processes in which they’re involved, and get IT confirmation that the sources of the data are correct.
    3. Map out the sources and processes in a system context diagram.

    Download this Tool

    Sample Data Lineage Diagram

    The image shows a sample data lineage diagram, split into External Applications and Internal Applications, and showing the processes involved in each.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool to document business context

    1 hour

    Input

    • Business vision, goals, and drivers

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement project

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Data Quality project lead
    • Business line representatives
    • IT executives

    Develop goals and align them with specific objectives to set the framework for your data quality initiatives.

    In the context of achieving business vision, mission, goals, and objectives and sustaining differentiators and key drivers, think about where and how data quality is a barrier. Then brainstorm data quality improvement objectives that map to these barriers. Document your list of objectives in Tab 5. Prioritize business units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.

    Establishing Business Context Example

    Healthcare Industry

    Vision To improve member services and make service provider experience more effective through improving data quality and data collection, aggregation, and accessibility for all the members.
    Goals

    Establish meaningful metrics that guide to the improvement of healthcare for member effectiveness of health care providers:

    • Data collection
    • Data harmonization
    • Data accessibility and trust by all constituents.
    Differentiator Connect service consumers with service providers, that comply with established regulations by delivering data that is accurate, trusted, timely, and easy to understand to connect service providers and eliminate bureaucracy and save money and time.
    Key Driver Seamlessly provide a healthcare for members.

    Download this Tool

    Document the identified business units and their associated data

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Business units

    Output

    • Documented business units to begin prioritization

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager

    Instructions

    1. Using Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, document the business units that use data in the organization. This will likely be all business units in the organization.
    2. Next, document the primary data used by those business units.
    3. These inputs will then be used to assess business unit priority to generate a data quality improvement project roadmap.

    The image shows a screen capture of Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units, with sample information inputted.

    Reminder – Not every business unit requires the same standard of data quality

    To prioritize your business units for data quality improvement projects, you must analyze the relative importance of the data they use to the business. The more important the data is to the business, the higher the priority is of fixing that data. There are two measures for determining the importance of data: business value and business impact.

    Business Value of Data

    Business value of data can be evaluated by thinking about its ties to revenue generation for the organization, as well as how it is used for productivity and operations at the organization.

    The business value of data is assessed by asking what would happen to the following parameters if the data is not usable (due to poor quality, for example):

    • Loss of Revenue
    • Loss of Productivity
    • Increased Operating Costs

    Business Impact of Data

    Business impact of data should take into account the effects of poor data on both internal and external parties.

    The business impact of data is assessed by asking what the impact would be of bad data on the following parameters:

    • Impact on Customers
    • Impact on Internal Staff
    • Impact on Business Partners

    Value + Impact = Data Priority Score

    Assess the business unit priority order for data quality improvements

    2 hours

    Input

    • Assessment of value and impact of business unit data

    Output

    • Prioritization list for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Data owners

    Instructions

    Instructions In Tab 5: Prioritize Business Units of the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool, assess business value and business impact of the data within each documented business unit.

    Use the ratings High, Medium, and Low to measure the financial, productivity, and efficiency value and impact of each business unit’s data.

    In addition to these ratings, assess the number of help desk tickets that are submitted to IT regarding data quality issues. This parameter is an indicator that the business unit’s data is high priority for data quality fixes.

    Download this Tool

    Create a business unit order roadmap for your data quality improvement projects

    1 hour

    Input

    • Rating of importance of data for each business unit

    Output

    • Roadmap for data quality improvement projects

    Materials

    • Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    After assessing the business units for the business value and business impact of their data, the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool automatically assesses the prioritization of the business units based on your ratings. These prioritizations are then summarized in a roadmap on Tab 6: Data Quality Project Roadmap. The following is an example of a project roadmap:

    The image shows an example of a project roadmap, with three business units listed vertically along the left hand side, and a Gantt chart showing the time periods in which each Business Unit would work. At the bottom, a table shows the Length of the Project in days (100), and the start date for the first project.

    On Tab 6, insert the timeline for your data quality improvement projects, as well as the starting date of your first data quality project. The roadmap will automatically update with the chosen timing and dates.

    Download this Tool

    Identify metrics at the business unit level to track data quality improvements

    As you improve the data quality for specific business units, measuring the benefits of data quality improvements will help you demonstrate the value of the projects to the business.

    Use the following table to guide you in creating business-aligned metrics:

    Business Unit Driver Metrics Goal
    Sales Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.

    Marketing

    Customer Intimacy Accuracy of customer data. Percent of missing or incomplete records. 10% decrease in customer record errors.
    Finance Operational Excellence Relevance of financial reports. Decrease in report inaccuracy complaints.
    HR Risk Management Accuracy of employee data. 10% decrease in employee record errors.
    Shipping Operational Excellence Timeliness of invoice data. 10% decrease in time to report.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Relating data governance success metrics to overall business benefits keeps executive management and executive sponsors engaged because they are seeing actionable results. Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

    Case Study

    Address data quality with the right approach to maximize the ROI

    EDC

    Industry: Government

    Source: Environment Development of Canada (EDC)

    Challenge

    Environment Development Canada (EDC) would initially identify data elements that are important to the business purely based on their business instinct.

    Leadership attempted to tackle the enterprise’s data issues by bringing a set of different tools into the organization.

    It didn’t work out because the fundamental foundational layer, which is the data and infrastructure, was not right – they didn't have the foundational capabilities to enable those tools.

    Solution

    Leadership listened to the need for one single team to be responsible for the data persistence.

    Therefore, the data platform team was granted that mandate to extensively execute the data quality program across the enterprise.

    A data quality team was formed under the Data & Analytics COE. They had the mandate to profile the data and to understand what quality of data needed to be achieved. They worked constantly with the business to build the data quality rules.

    Results

    EDC tackled the source of their data quality issues through initially performing a data quality management assessment with business stakeholders.

    From then on, EDC was able to establish their data quality program and carry out other key initiatives that prove the ROI on data quality.

    Begin your data quality improvement project starting with the highest priority business unit

    Now that you have a prioritized list for your data quality improvement projects, identify the highest priority business unit. This is the business unit you will work through Phase 3 with to fix their data quality issues.

    Once you have initiated and identified solutions for the first business unit, tackle data quality for the next business unit in the prioritized list.

    The image is a graphic labelled as Phase 2. On the left, there is a vertical arrow pointing upward labelled Priority of Business Units. Next to it, there are three boxes, with downward pointing arrows between them, each box labelled as each Business Unit's Data Quality Improvement Project. From there an arrow points right to a circle. Inside the circle are the steps necessary to complete the data quality improvement project.

    Create and document your data quality improvement team

    1 hour

    Input

    • Individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles

    Output

    • Project team

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Manager
    • Product Manager

    The Data Quality Improvement Plan is a concise document that should be created for each data quality project (i.e. for each business unit) to keep track of the project.

    Instructions

    1. Meet with the data owner of the business unit identified for the data quality improvement project.
    2. Identify individuals who fit the data quality improvement plan team roles.
    3. Using the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template to document the roles and individuals who will fit those roles.
    4. Have an introductory meeting with the Improvement team to clarify roles and responsibilities for the project.

    Download this Tool

    Team role Assigned to
    Data Owner [Name]
    Project Manager [Name]
    Business Analyst/BRM [Name]
    Data Steward [Name]
    Data Analyst [Name]

    Document the business context of the Data Quality Improvement Plan

    1 hour

    Input

    • Project team
    • Identified data attributes

    Output

    • Business context for the data quality improvement plan

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data owner
    • Project Sponsor
    • Product owner

    Data quality initiatives have to be relevant to the business, and the business context will be used to provide inputs to the data improvement strategy. The context can then be used to determine exactly where the root causes of data quality issues are, which will inform your solutions.

    Instructions

    The business context of the data quality improvement plan includes documenting from previous activities:

    1. The Data Quality Improvement Team.
    2. Your Data Lineage Diagram.
    3. Your Data Quality Problem Statement.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    While many organizations adopt data quality principles, not all organizations express them along the same terms. Have multiple perspectives within your organization outline principles that fit your unique data quality agenda. Anyone interested in resolving the day-to-day data quality issues that they face can be helpful for creating the context around the project.

    Download this tool

    Now that you have a defined problem, revisit the root causes of poor data quality

    You previously fleshed out the problem with data quality present in the business unit chosen as highest priority. Now it is time to figure out what is causing those problems.

    In the table below, you will find some of the common categories of causes of data quality issues, as well as some specific root causes.

    Category Description
    1. System/Application Design Ineffective, insufficient, or even incorrect system/application design accepts incorrect and missing data elements to the source applications and databases. The data records in those source systems may propagate into systems in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the 5-tier architecture, creating domino and ripple effects.
    2. Database design Database is created and modeled in an incorrect manner so that the management of the data records is incorrect, resulting in duplicated and orphaned records, and records that are missing data elements or records that contain incorrect data elements. Poor operational data in databases often leads to issues in tiers 2, 3, 4, and 5.
    3. Enterprise Integration Data or information is improperly integrated, transformed, masked, and aggregated in tier 2. In addition, some data integration tasks might not be timely, resulting in out-of-date data or even data that contradicts with other data. Enterprise integration is a precursor of loading a data warehouse and data marts. Issues in this layer affect tier 3, 4 and 5 on the 5-tier architecture.
    4. Policies and Procedures Policies and procedures are not effectively used to reinforce data quality. In some situations, policy gaps are found. In others, policies are overlapped and duplicated. Policies may also be out-of-date or too complex, affecting the users’ ability to interpret the policy objectives. Policies affect all tiers in the 5-tier architecture.
    5. Business Processes Improper business process design introduces poor data into the data systems. Failure to create processes around approving data changes, failure to document key data elements, and failure to train employees on the proper uses of data make data quality a burning problem.

    Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data issues

    A root cause analysis is a systematic approach to decompose a problem into its components. Use fishbone diagrams to help reveal the root causes of data issues.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram on the left, which starts with Process on the left, and then leads to Application and Integration, and then Database and Policies. This section is titled Root causes. The right hand section is titled Lead to problems with data... and includes 4 circles with the word or in between each. The circles are labelled: Completeness; Usability; Timeliness; Accessibility.

    Info-Tech recommends five root cause categories for assessing data quality issues:

    Application Design. Is the issue caused by human error at the application level? Consider internal employees, external partners/suppliers, and customers.

    Database Design. Is the issue caused by a particular database and stems from inadequacies in its design?

    Integration. Data integration tools may not be fully leveraged, or data matching rules may be poorly designed.

    Policies and Procedures. Do the issues take place because of lack of governance?

    Business Processes. Do the issues take place due to insufficient processes?

    For Example:

    When performing a deeper analysis of your data issues related to the accuracy of the business unit’s data, you would perform a root cause analysis by assessing the contribution of each of the five categories of data quality problem root causes:

    The image shows another fishbone diagram, with example information filled in. The first section on the left is titled Application Design, and includes the text: Data entry problems lead to incorrect accounting entries. The second is Integration, and includes the text: Data integration tools are not fully leveraged. The third section is Policies, and includes the text: No policy on standardizing name and address. The last section is Database design, with text that reads: Databases do not contain unique keys. The diagram ends with an arrow pointing right to a blue circle with Accuracy in it.

    Leverage a combination of data analysis techniques to identify and quantify root causes

    Info-Tech Insight

    Including all attributes of the key subject area in your data profiling activities may produce too much information to make sense of. Conduct data profiling primarily at the table level and undergo attribute profiling only if you are able to narrow down your scope sufficiently.

    Data Profiling Tool

    Data profiling extracts a sample of the target data set and runs it through multiple levels of analysis. The end result is a detailed report of statistics about a variety of data quality criteria (duplicate data, incomplete data, stale data, etc.).

    Many data profiling tools have built-in templates and reports to help you uncover data issues. In addition, they quantify the occurrences of the data issues.

    E-Discovery Tool

    This supplements a profiling tool. For Example, use a BI tool to create a custom grouping of all the invalid states (e.g. “CAL,” “AZN,” etc.) and visualize the percentage of invalid states compared to all states.

    SQL Queries

    This supplements a profiling tool. For example, use a SQL statement to group the customer data by customer segment and then by state to identify which segment–state combinations contain poor data.

    Identify the data issues for the particular business unit under consideration

    2 hours

    Input

    • Issues with data quality felt by the business unit
    • Data lineage diagram

    Output

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team
    • Business line representatives

    Instructions

    1. Gather the data quality improvement project team in a room, along with sticky notes and a whiteboard.
    2. Display your previously created data lineage diagram on the whiteboard.
    3. Using color-coded sticky notes, attach issues to each component of the data lineage diagram that team members can identify. Use different colors for the four quality attributes: Completeness, Usability, Timeliness, and Accessibility.

    Example:

    The image shows the data lineage diagram that has been shown in previous sections. In addition, the image shows 4 post-its arranges around the diagram, labelled: Usability; Completeness; Timeliness; and Accessibility.

    Map the data issues on fishbone diagrams to identify root causes

    1 hour

    Input

    • Categorized data quality issues

    Output

    • Completed fishbone diagrams

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, markers, sticky notes
    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Data quality improvement project team

    Now that you have data quality issues classified according to the data quality attributes, map these issues onto four fishbone diagrams.

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, which is titled Example: Root cause analysis diagram for data accuracy.

    Download this Tool

    Get to know the root causes behind system/application design mistakes

    Suboptimal system/application design provides entry points for bad data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Insufficient data mask No data mask is defined for a free-form text field in a user interface. E.g. North American phone number should have 4 masks – country code (1-digit), area code (3-digit), and local number (7-digit). X X
    Too many free-form text fields Incorrect use of free-form text fields (fields that accept a variety of inputs). E.g. Use a free-form text field for zip code instead of a backend look up. X X
    Lack of value lookup Reference data is not looked up from a reference list. E.g. State abbreviation is entered instead of being looked up from a standard list of states. X X
    Lack of mandatory field definitions Mandatory fields are not identified and reinforced. Resulting data records with many missing data elements. E.g. Some users may fill up 2 or 3 fields in a UI that has 20 non-mandatory fields. X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Application Design section is highlighted.

    Get to know the root causes behind common database design mistakes

    Improper database design allows incorrect data to be stored and propagated.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect referential integrity Referential integrity constraints are absent or incorrectly implemented, resulting in child records without parent records, or related records are updated or deleted in a cascading manner. E.g. An invoice line item is created before an invoice is created. X X
    Lack of unique keys Lack of unique keys creating scenarios where record uniqueness cannot be guaranteed. E.g. Customer records with the same customer_ID. X X
    Data range Fail to define a data range for incoming data, resulting in data values that are out of range. E.g. The age field is able to store an age of 999. X X
    Incorrect data type Incorrect data types are used to store data fields. E.g. A string field is used to store zip codes. Some users use that to store phone numbers, birthdays, etc. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Database Design section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind enterprise integration mistakes

    Improper data integration or synchronization may create poor analytical data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Incorrect transformation Transformation is done incorrectly. A wrong formula may have been used, transformation is done at the wrong data granularity, or aggregation logic is incorrect. E.g. Aggregation is done for all customers instead of just active customers. X X
    Data refresh is out of sync Data is synchronized at different intervals, resulting in a data warehouse where data domains are out of sync. E.g. Customer transactions are refreshed to reflect the latest activities but the account balance is not yet refreshed. X X
    Data is matched incorrectly Fail to match records from disparate systems, resulting in duplications and unmatched records. E.g. Unable to match customers from different systems because they have different cust_ID. X X
    Incorrect data mapping Fields from source systems are not properly matched with data warehouse fields. E.g. Status fields from different systems are mixed into one field. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Integration section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind policy and procedure mistakes

    Suboptimal policies and procedures undermine the effect of best practices.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Policy Gaps There are gaps in the policy landscape in terms of some missing key policies or policies that are not refreshed to reflect the latest changes. E.g. A data entry policy is absent, leading to inconsistent data entry practices. X X
    Policy Communications Policies are in place but the policies are not communicated effectively to the organization, resulting in misinterpretation of policies and under-enforcement of policies. E.g. The data standard is created but very few developers are aware of its existence. X X
    Policy Enforcement Policies are in place but not proactively re-enforced and that leads to inconsistent application of policies and policy adoption. E.g. Policy adoption is dropping over time due to lack of reinforcement. X X
    Policy Quality Policies are written by untrained authors and they do not communicate the messages. E.g. A non-technical data user may find a policy that is loaded with technical terms confusing. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Policies section is highlighted

    Get to know the root causes behind common business process mistakes

    Ineffective and inefficient business processes create entry points for poor data.

    Business Process
    Usually found in → Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4 Tier 5
    Issue Root Causes Usability Completeness Timeliness Accessibility
    Lack of training Key data personnel and business analysts are not trained in data quality and data governance, leading to lack of accountability. E.g. A data steward is not aware of downstream impact of a duplicated financial statement. X X
    Ineffective business process The same piece of information is entered into data systems two or more times. Or a piece of data is stalled in a data system for too long. E.g. A paper form is scanned multiple times to extract data into different data systems. X X
    Lack of documentation Fail to document the work flows of the key business processes. A lack of work flow results in sub-optimal use of data. E.g. Data is modeled incorrectly due to undocumented business logic. X X
    Lack of integration between business silos Business silos hold on to their own datasets resulting in data silos in which data is not shared and/or data is transferred with errors. E.g. Data from a unit is extracted as a data file and stored in a shared drive with little access. X X

    The image shows a fishbone diagram, with the following sections, from left to right: Application Design; Integration; Processes; Policies; Database Design; Data Quality Measure. The Processes section is highlighted

    Phase 3 Summary

    1. Data Lineage Diagram
    • Creating the data lineage diagram is recommended to help visualize the flow of your data and to map the data journey and identify the data subject areas to be targeted for fixes.
    • The data lineage diagram was leveraged multiple times throughout this Phase. For example, the data lineage diagram was used to document the data sources and applications used by the business unit
  • Business Context
    • Business context was documented through the Data Quality Practice Assessment and Project Planning Tool.
    • The same tool was used to document identified business units and their associated data.
    • Metrics were also identified at the business unit level to track data quality improvements.
  • Common Root Causes
    • Leverage a root cause analysis approach to pinpoint the origins of your data quality issues.
    • Analyzed and got to know the root causes behind the following:
      1. System/application design mistakes
      2. Common database design mistakes
      3. Enterprise integration mistakes
      4. Policies and procedures mistakes
      5. Common business processes mistakes
  • Phase 4

    Grow and Sustain Your Data Quality Program

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    For the identified root causes, determine the solutions for the problem

    As you worked through the previous step, you identified the root causes of your data quality problems within the business unit. Now, it is time to identify solutions.

    The following slides provide an overview of the solutions to common data quality issues. As you identify solutions that apply to the business unit being addressed, insert the solution tables in Section 4: Proposed Solutions of the Data Quality Improvement Plan Template.

    All data quality solutions have two components to them:

    • Technology
    • People

    For the next five data quality solution slides, look for the slider for the contributions of each category to the solution. Use this scale to guide you in creating solutions.

    When designing solutions, keep in mind that solutions to data quality problems are not mutually exclusive. In other words, an identified root cause may have multiple solutions that apply to it.

    For example, if an application is plagued with inaccurate data, the application design may be suboptimal, but also the process that leads to data being entered may need fixing.

    Data quality improvement strategy #1:

    Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design.

    Technology

    Application Interface Design

    Restrict field length – Capture only the characters you need for your application.

    Leverage data masks – Use data masks in standardized fields like zip code and phone number.

    Restrict the use of open text fields and use reference tables – Only present open text fields when there is a need. Use reference tables to limit data values.

    Provide options – Use radio buttons, drop-down lists, and multi-select instead of using open text fields.

    Data Validation at the Application Level

    Validate data before committing – Use simple validation to ensure the data entered is not random numbers and letters.

    Track history – Keep track of who entered what fields.

    Cannot submit twice – Only design for one-time submission.

    People

    Training

    Data-entry training – Training that is related to data entry, creating, or updating data records.

    Data resolution training – Training data stewards or other dedicated data personnel on how to resolve data records that are not entered properly.

    Continuous Improvement

    Standards – Develop application design principles and standards.

    Field testing – Field data entry with a few people to look for abnormalities and discrepancies.

    Detection and resolution – Abnormal data records should be isolated and resolved ASAP.

    Application Testing

    Thorough testing – Application design is your first line of defence against poor data. Test to ensure bad data is kept out of the systems.

    Case Study

    HMS

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Informatica

    Improve your data quality ingestion procedures to provide better customer intimacy for your users

    Healthcare Management Systems (HMS) provides cost containment services for healthcare sponsors and payers, and coordinates benefits services. This is to ensure that healthcare claims are paid correctly to both government agencies and individuals. To do so, HMS relies on data, and this data needs to be of high quality to ensure the correct decisions are made, the right people get the correct claims, and the appropriate parties pay out.

    To improve the integrity of HMS’s customer data, HMS put in place a framework that helped to standardize the collection of high volume and highly variable data.

    Results

    Working with a data quality platform vendor to establish a framework for data standardization, HMS was able to streamline data analysis and reduce new customer implementations from months to weeks.

    HMS data was plagued with a lack of standardization of data ingestion procedures.

    Before improving data quality processes After improving data quality processes
    Data Ingestion Data Ingestion
    Many standards of ingestion. Standardized data ingestion
    Data Storage Data Storage
    Lack of ability to match data, creating data quality errors.
    Data Analysis Data Analysis
    = =
    Slow Customer Implementation Time 50% Reduction in Customer Implementation Time

    Data quality improvement strategy #2:

    Fix data quality issues using proper database design.

    Technology

    Database Design Best Practices

    Referential integrity – Ensure parent/child relationships are maintained in terms of cascade creation, update, and deletion.

    Primary key definition – Ensure there is at least one key to guarantee the uniqueness of the data records, and primary key should not allow null.

    Validate data domain – Create triggers to check the data values entered in the database fields.

    Field type and length – Define the most suitable data type and length to hold field values.

    One-Time Data Fix (more on the next slide)

    Explore solutions – Where to fix the data issues? Is there a case to fix the issues?

    Running profiling tools to catch errors – Run scans on the database with defined criteria to identify occurrences of questionable data.

    Fix a sample before fixing all records – Use a proof-of-concept approach to explore fix options and evaluate impacts before fixing the full set.

    People

    The DBA Team

    Perform key tasks in pairs – Take a pair approach to perform key tasks so that validation and cross-check can happen.

    Skilled DBAs – DBAs should be certified and accredited.

    Competence – Assess DBA competency on an ongoing basis.

    Preparedness – Develop drills to stimulate data issues and train DBAs.

    Cross train – Cross train team members so that one DBA can cover another DBA.

    Data quality improvement strategy #3:

    Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data.

    Technology

    Integration Architecture

    Info-Tech’s 5-Tier Architecture – When doing transformations, it is good practice to persist the integration results in tier 3 before the data is further refined and presented in tier 4.

    Timing, timing, and timing – Think of the sequence of events. You may need to perform some ETL tasks before other tasks to achieve synchronization and consistence.

    Historical changes – Ensure your tier 3 is robust enough to include historical data. You need to enable type 2 slowly, changing dimension to recreate the data at a point in time.

    Data Cleansing

    Standardize – Leverage data standardization to standardize name and address fields to improve matching and integration.

    Fuzzy matching – When there are no common keys between datasets. The datasets can only be matched by fuzzy matching. Fuzzy matching is not hard science; define a confidence level and think about a mechanism to deal with the unmatched.

    People

    Reporting and Documentations

    Business data glossary and data lineage – Define a business data glossary to enhance findability of key data elements. Document data mappings and ETL logics.

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    Code Review

    Create data quality reports – Many ETL platforms provide canned data quality reports. Leverage those quality reports to monitor the data health.

    ARB (architectural review board) – All ETL codes should be approved by the architectural review board to ensure alignment with the overall integration strategy.

    Data quality improvement strategy #4:

    Improve data quality policies and procedures.

    Technology

    Policy Reporting

    Data quality reports – Leverage canned data quality reports from the ETL platforms to monitor data quality on an on-going basis. When abnormalities are found, provoke the right policies to deal with the issues.

    Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.

    Make the repository searchable and easily navigable. myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    myPolicies helps you do all this and more.

    Go to this link

    People

    Policy Review and Training

    Policy review – Create a schedule for reviewing policies on a regular basis – invite professional writers to ensure polices are understandable.

    Policy training – Policies are often unread and misread. Training users and stakeholders on policies is an effective way to make sure those users and stakeholders understand the rationale of the policies. It is also a good practice to include a few scenarios that are handled by the policies.

    Policy hotline/mailbox – To avoid misinterpretation of the policies, a policy hotline/mailbox should be set up to answer any data policy questions from the end users/stakeholders.

    Policy Communications

    Simplified communications – Create handy one-pagers and infographic posters to communicate the key messages of the polices.

    Policy briefing – Whenever a new data project is initiated, a briefing of data policies should be given to ensure the project team follows the policies from the very beginning.

    Data quality improvement strategy #5:

    Streamline and optimize business processes.

    Technology

    Requirements Gathering

    Data Lineage – Leverage a metadata management tool to construct and document data lineage for future reference.

    Documentations Repository – It is a best practice to document key project information and share that knowledge across the project team and with the stakeholder. An improvement understanding of the project helps to identify data quality issues early on in the project.

    “Automating creation of data would help data quality most. You have to look at existing processes and create data signatures. You can then derive data off those data codes.” – Patrick Bossey, Manager of Business Intelligence, Crawford and Company

    People

    Requirements Gathering

    Info-Tech’s 4-Column Model – The datasets may exist but the business units do not have an effective way of communicating the quality needs. Use our four-column model and the eleven supporting questions to better understand the quality needs. See subsequent slides.

    I don’t know what the data means so I think the quality is poor – It is not uncommon to see that the right data presented to the business but the business does not trust the data. They also do not understand the business logic done on the data. See our Business Data Glossary in subsequent slides.

    Understand the business workflow – Know the business workflow to understand the manual steps associated with the workflow. You may find steps in which data is entered, manipulated, or consumed inappropriately.

    “Do a shadow data exercise where you identify the human workflows of how data gets entered, and then you can identify where data entry can be automated.” – Diraj Goel, Growth Advisor, BC Tech

    Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues

    4 hours

    Input

    • Data profiling results
    • Preliminary root cause analyses

    Output

    • Proposals for data fix
    • Fixed issues

    Materials

    • Data Quality Improvement Plan Template

    Participants

    • Business and Data Analysts
    • Data experts and stewards

    After walking through the best-practice solutions to data quality issues, propose solutions to fix your identified issues.

    Instructions

    1. Review Root Cause Analyses: Revisit the root cause analysis and data lineage diagram you have generated in Step 3.2. to understand the issues in greater details.
    2. Characterize Each Issue: You may need to generate a data profiling report to characterize the issue. The report can be generated by using data quality suites, BI platforms, or even SQL statements.
    3. Brainstorm the Solutions: As a group, discuss potential ways to fix the issue. You can tackle the issues by approaching from these areas:
    Solution Approaches
    Technology Approach
    People Approach

    X crossover with

    Problematic Areas
    Application/System Design
    Database Design
    Data Integration and Synchronization
    Policies and Procedures
    Business Processes
    1. Document and Communicate: Document the solutions to your data issues. You may need to reuse or refer to the solutions. Also brainstorm some ideas on how to communicate the results back to the business.

    Download this Tool

    Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice

    Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management. Data governance enables data quality by providing the necessary oversight and controls for business processes in order to maintain data quality. There are three primary groups (at right) that are involved in a mature governance practice. Data quality should be tightly integrated with all of them.

    Define an effective data governance strategy and ensure the strategy integrates well with data quality with Info-Tech’s Establish Data Governance blueprint.

    Visit this link

    Data Governance Council

    This council establishes data management practices that span across the organization. This should be comprised of senior management or C-suite executives that can represent the various departments and lines of business within the organization. The data governance council can help to promote the value of data governance, facilitate a culture that nurtures data quality, and ensure that the goals of the data governance program are well aligned with business objectives.

    Data Owners

    Identifying the data owner role within an organization helps to create a greater degree of accountability for data issues. They often oversee how the data is being generated as well as how it is being consumed. Data owners come from the business side and have legal rights and defined control over a data set. They ensure data is available to the right people within the organization.

    Data Stewards

    Conflict can occur within an organization’s data governance program when a data steward’s role is confused with that of the steering committee’s role. Data stewards exist to enforce decisions made about data governance and data management. Data stewards are often business analysts or power users of a particular system/dataset. Where a data owner is primarily responsible for access, a data steward is responsible for the quality of a dataset.

    Integrate the data quality management strategy with existing data governance committees

    Ongoing and regular data quality management is the responsibility of the data governance bodies of the organization.

    The oversight of ongoing data quality activities rests on the shoulders of the data governance committees that exist in the organization.

    There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. They strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic, tactical, and operational level:

    The image shows a pyramid, with Executive Sponsors at the top, with the following roles in descending order: DG Council; Steering Committee; Working Groups; Data Owners and Data Stewards; and Data Users. Along the left side of the pyramid, there are three labels, in ascending order: Operational, Tactical, and Strategic.

    The image is a flow chart showing project roles, in two sections: the top section is labelled Governing Bodies, and the lower section is labelled Data Quality Improvement Team. There is a note indicating that the Data Owner reports to and provides updates regarding the state of data quality and data quality initiatives.

    Create and update the organization’s Business Data Glossary to keep up with current data definitions

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Business Data Glossary Template
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data steward

    A crucial aspect of data quality and governance is the Business Data Glossary. The Business Data Glossary helps to align the terminology of the business with the organization’s data assets. It allows the people who interact with the data to quickly identify the applications, processes, and stewardship associated with it, which will enhance the accuracy and efficiency of searches for organization data definitions and attributes, enabling better access to the data. This will, in turn, enhance the quality of the organization’s data because it will be more accurate, relevant, and accessible.

    Use the Business Data Glossary Template to document key aspects of the data, such as:

    • Definition
    • Source System
    • Possible Values
    • Data Steward
    • Data Sensitivity
    • Data Availability
    • Batch or Live
    • Retention

    Data Element

    • Mkt-Product
    • Fin-Product

    Info-Tech Insight

    The Business Data Glossary ensures that the crucial data that has key business use by key business systems and users is appropriately owned and defined. It also establishes rules that lead to proper data management and quality to be enforced by the data owners.

    Download this Tool

    Data Steward(s): Use the Data Quality Improvement Plan of the business unit for ongoing quality monitoring

    Integrating your data quality strategy into the organization’s data governance program requires passing the strategy over to members of the data governance program. The data steward role is responsible for data quality at the business unit level, and should have been involved with the creation and implementation of the data quality improvement project. After the data quality repairs have been made, it is the responsibility of the data steward to regularly monitor the quality of the business unit’s data.

    Create Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team identifies root cause issues.
    • Brainstorm solutions.
    Implement Improvement Plan ↓
    • Data Quality Improvement Team works with IT.
    Sustain Improvement Plan
    • Data Steward should regularly monitor data quality.

    Download this tool

    See Info-Tech’s Data Steward Job Description Template for a detailed understanding of the roles and responsibilities of the data steward.

    Responsible for sustaining

    The image shows a screen capture of a document entitled Business Context & Subject Area Selection.

    Develop a business-facing data quality dashboard to show improvements or a sudden dip in data quality

    One tool that the data steward can take advantage of is the data quality dashboard. Initiatives that are implemented to address data quality must have metrics defined by business objectives in order to demonstrate the value of the data quality improvement projects. In addition, the data steward should have tools for tracking data quality in the business unit to report issues to the data owner and data governance steering committee.

    • Example 1: Marketing uses data for direct mail and e-marketing campaigns. They care about customer data in particular. Specifically, they require high data quality in attributes such as customer name, address, and product profile.
    • Example 2: Alternatively, Finance places emphasis on financial data, focusing on attributes like account balance, latency in payment, credit score, and billing date.

    The image is Business dashboard on Data Quality for Marketing. It features Data Quality metrics, listed in the left column, and numbers for each quarter over the course of one year, on the right.

    Notes on chart:

    General improvement in billing address quality

    Sudden drop in touchpoint accuracy may prompt business to ask for explanations

    Approach to creating a business-facing data quality dashboard:

    1. Schedule a meeting with the functional unit to discuss what key data quality metrics are essential to their business operations. You should consider the business context, functional area, and subject area analyses you completed in Phase 1 as a starting point.
    2. Discuss how to gather data for the key metrics and their associated calculations.
    3. Discuss and decide the reporting intervals.
    4. Discuss and decide the unit of measurement.
    5. Generate a dashboard similar to the example. Consider using a BI or analytics tool to develop the dashboard.

    Data quality management must be sustained for ongoing improvements to the organization’s data

    • Data quality is never truly complete; it is a set of ongoing processes and disciplines that requires a permanent plan for monitoring practices, reviewing processes, and maintaining consistent data standards.
    • Setting the expectation to stakeholders that a long-term commitment is required to maintain quality data within the organization is critical to the success of the program.
    • A data quality maintenance program will continually revise and fine-tune ongoing practices, processes, and procedures employed for organizational data management.

    Data quality is a program that requires continual care:

    →Maintain→Good Data →

    Data quality management is a long-term commitment that shifts how an organization views, manages, and utilizes its corporate data assets. Long-term buy-in from all involved is critical.

    “Data quality is a process. We are trying to constantly improve the quality over time. It is not a one-time fix.” – Akin Akinwumi, Manager of Data Governance, Startech.com

    Define a data quality review agenda for data quality sustainment

    2 hours

    Input

    • Metrics and goals for data quality

    Output

    • Regularly scheduled data quality checkups

    Materials

    • Data Quality Diagnostic
    • Data Quality Dashboard

    Participants

    • Data Steward

    As a data steward, you are responsible for ongoing data quality checks of the business unit’s data. Define an improvement agenda to organize the improvement activities. Organize the activities yearly and quarterly to ensure improvement is done year-round.

    Quarterly

    • Measure data quality metrics against milestones. Perform a regular data quality health check with Info-Tech’s Data Quality Diagnostic.
    • Review the business unit’s Business Data Glossary to ensure that it is up to date and comprehensive.
    • Assess progress of practice area initiatives (time, milestones, budget, benefits delivered).
    • Analyze overall data quality and report progress on key improvement projects and corrective actions in the executive dashboard.
    • Communicate overall status of data quality to oversight body.

    Annually

    • Calculate your current baseline and measure progress by comparing it to previous years.
    • Set/revise quality objectives for each practice area and inter-practice hand-off processes.
    • Re-evaluate/re-establish data quality objectives.
    • Set/review data quality metrics and tracking mechanisms.
    • Set data quality review milestones and timelines.
    • Revisit data quality training from an end-user perspective and from a practitioner perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do data quality diagnostic at the beginning of any improvement plan, then recheck health with the diagnostic at regular intervals to see if symptoms are coming back. This should be a monitoring activity, not a data quality fixing activity. If symptoms are bad enough, repeat the improvement plan process.

    Take the next step in your Data & Analytics Journey

    After establishing your data quality program, look to increase your data & analytics maturity.

    • Artificial Intelligence (AI) is a concept that many organizations strive to implement. AI can really help in areas such as data preparation. However, implementing AI solutions requires a level of maturity that many organizations are not at.
    • While a solid data quality foundation is essential for AI initiatives being successful, AI can also ensure high data quality.
    • An AI analytics solution can address data integrity issues at the earliest point of data processing, rapidly transforming these vast volumes of data into trusted business information. This can be done through Anomaly detection, which flags “bad” data, identifying suspicious anomalies that can impact data quality. By tracking and evaluating data, anomaly detection gives critical insights into data quality as data is processed. (Ira Cohen, The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics, anodot, 2020)

    Consider… “Garbage in, garbage out.”

    Lay a solid foundation by addressing your data quality issues prior to investing heavily in an AI solution.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Are You Ready for AI?

    • Use AI as a compelling event to expedite funding, resources, and project plans for your data-related initiatives. Check out this note to understand what it takes to be ready to implement AI solutions.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence

    • Current AI technology is data-enabled, automated, adaptive decision support. Once you believe you are ready for AI, check out this blueprint on how to get started.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • The data lineage diagram was a key tool used in establishing your data quality program. Check out this blueprint and learn how to optimize your data architecture to provide greatest value from data.

    Create an Architecture for AI

    • Build your target state architecture from predefined best practice building blocks. This blueprint assists members first to assess if they have the maturity to embrace AI in their organization, and if so, which AI acquisition model fits them best.

    Phase 4 Summary

    1. Data Quality Improvement Strategy
    • Brainstorm solutions to your data quality issues using the following data quality improvement strategies as a guide:
      1. Fix data quality issues by improving system/application design
      2. Fix data quality issues using proper database design
      3. Improve integration and synchronization of enterprise data
      4. Improve data quality policies and procedures
      5. Streamline and optimize business processes
  • Sustain Your Data Quality Program
    • Quality data is the ultimate outcome of data governance and data quality management.
    • Sustaining your data quality requires continuous oversight through a data governance practice.
    • There are three primary groups (Data Governance Council, Data Owners, and Data Stewards) that are involved in a mature governance practice.
  • Grow Your Data & Analytics Maturity
    • After establishing your data quality program, take the next step in increasing your data & analytics maturity.
    • Good data quality is the foundation of pursuing different ways of maximizing the value of your data such as implementing AI solutions.
    • Continue your data & analytics journey by referring to Info-Tech’s quality research.
  • Research Contributors and Experts

    Izabela Edmunds

    Information Architect Mott MacDonald

    Akin Akinwumi

    Manager of Data Governance Startech.com

    Diraj Goel

    Growth Advisor BC Tech

    Sujay Deb

    Director of Data Analytics Technology and Platforms Export Development Canada

    Asif Mumtaz

    Data & Solution Architect Blue Cross Blue Shield Association

    Patrick Bossey

    Manager of Business Intelligence Crawford and Company

    Anonymous Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader

    Research Specialist Info-Tech Research Group

    Ibrahim is a Research Specialist at Info-Tech Research Group. In his career to date he has assisted many clients using his knowledge in process design, knowledge management, SharePoint for ECM, and more. He is expanding his familiarity in many areas such as data and analytics, enterprise architecture, and CIO-related topics.

    Reddy Doddipalli

    Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group

    Reddy is a Senior Workshop Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on data management and specialized analytics applications. He has over 25 years of strong industry experience in IT leading and managing analytics suite of solutions, enterprise data management, enterprise architecture, and artificial intelligence–based complex expert systems.

    Andy Neill

    Practice Lead, Data & Analytics and Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy leads the data and analytics and enterprise architecture practices at ITRG. He has over 15 years of experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy. He is an expert in enterprise data architecture, data integration, data standards, data strategy, big data, and development of industry standard data models.

    Crystal Singh

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Crystal is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She brings a diverse and global perspective to her role, drawing from her professional experiences in various industries and locations. Prior to joining Info-Tech, Crystal led the Enterprise Data Services function at Rogers Communications, one of Canada’s leading telecommunications companies.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Igor is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has extensive experience in strategy formation and execution in the information management domain, including master data management, data governance, knowledge management, enterprise content management, big data, and analytics.

    Andrea Malick

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrea Malick is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group, focused on building best practices knowledge in the enterprise information management domain, with corporate and consulting leadership in enterprise architecture and content management (ECM).

    Natalia Modjeska

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Natalia Modjeska is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. She advises members on topics related to AI, machine learning, advanced analytics, and data science, including ethics and governance. Natalia has over 15 years of experience in developing, selling, and implementing analytical solutions.

    Rajesh Parab

    Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Rajesh Parab is a Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group. He has over 20 years of global experience and brings a unique mix of technology and business acumen. He has worked on many data-driven business applications. In his previous architecture roles, Rajesh created a number of product roadmaps, technology strategies, and models.

    Bibliography

    Amidon, Kirk. "Case Study: How Data Quality Has Evolved at MathWorks." The Fifth MIT Information Quality Industry Symposium. 13 July 2011. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    Boulton, Clint. “Disconnect between CIOs and LOB managers weakens data quality.” CIO. 05 February 2016. Accessed June 2020.

    COBIT 5: Enabling Information. Rolling Meadows, IL: ISACA, 2013. Web.

    Cohen, Ira. “The End to a Never-Ending Story? Improve Data Quality with AI Analytics.” anodot. 2020.

    “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK Guide).” First Edition. DAMA International. 2009. Digital. April 2014.

    "Data Profiling: Underpinning Data Quality Management." Pitney Bowes. Pitney Bowes - Group 1 Software, 2007. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Data.com. “Data.com Clean.” Salesforce. 2016. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Dawn of the CDO." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Demirkan, Haluk, and Bulent Dal. "Why Do So Many Analytics Projects Fail?" The Data Economy: Why Do so Many Analytics Projects Fail? Analytics Magazine. July-Aug. 2014. Web.

    Dignan, Larry. “CIOs juggling digital transformation pace, bad data, cloud lock-in and business alignment.” ZDNet. 11 March 2020. Accessed July.

    Dumbleton, Janani, and Derek Munro. "Global Data Quality Research - Discussion Paper 2015." Experian Data Quality. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    Eckerson, Wayne W. "Data Quality and the Bottom Line - Achieving Business Success through a Commitment to High Quality Data." The Data Warehouse Institute. 2002. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “Infographic: Data Quality in BI the Costs and Benefits.” HaloBI. 2015 Web.

    Lee, Y.W. and Strong, D.M. “Knowing-Why About Data Processes and Data Quality.” Journal of Management Information Systems. 2004.

    “Making Data Quality a Way of Life.” Cognizant. 2014. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    "Merck Serono Achieves Single Source of Truth with Comprehensive RIM Solutions." www.productlifegroup.com. ProductLife Group. 15 Apr. 2015. Web. 23 Nov. 2015.

    Myers, Dan. “List of Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality.” Conformed Dimensions of Data Quality (CDDQ). 2019. Web.

    Redman, Thomas C. “Make the Case for Better Data Quality.” Harvard Business Review. 24 Aug. 2012. Web. 19 Aug. 2015.

    RingLead Data Management Solutions. “10 Stats About Data Quality I Bet You Didn’t Know.” RingLead. Accessed 7 July 2020.

    Schwartzrock, Todd. "Chrysler's Data Quality Management Case Study." Online video clip. YouTube. 21 April. 2011. Web. 18 Aug. 2015

    “Taking control in the digital age.” Experian Data Quality. Jan 2019. Web.

    “The data-driven organization, a transformation in progress.” Experian Data Quality. 2020. Web.

    "The Data Quality Benchmark Report." Experian Data Quality. Jan. 2015. Web. 18 Aug. 2015.

    “The state of data quality.” Experian Data Quality. Sept. 2013. Web. 17 Aug. 2015.

    Vincent, Lanny. “Differentiating Competence, Capability and Capacity.” Innovation Management Services. Web. June 2008.

    “7 ways poor data quality is costing your business.” Experian Data Quality. July 2020. Web.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}351|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $133,318 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide to the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey your direction, strategy, and tactics to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    • Products require continuous additions and enhancements to sustain their value. This requires detailed, yet simple communication to a variety of stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A vision without tactics is an unsubstantiated dream, while tactics without a vision is working without a purpose. You need to have a handle on both to achieve outcomes that are aligned with the needs of your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up – lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built-in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a digital product vision that you can stand behind. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a digital product vision

    Define a digital product vision that takes into account your objectives, business value, stakeholders, customers, and metrics.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 1: Define a Digital Product Vision
    • Digital Product Strategy Template
    • Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Build a better backlog

    Build a structure for your backlog that supports your product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 2: Build a Better Backlog
    • Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    3. Build a product roadmap

    Define standards, ownership for your backlog to effectively communicate your strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 3: Build a Product Roadmap
    • Product Roadmap Tool

    4. Release and deliver value

    Understand what to consider when planning your next release.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 4: Release and Deliver Value

    5. Communicate the strategy – make it happen

    Build a plan for communicating and updating your strategy and where to go next.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 5: Communicate the Strategy – Make It Happen!

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Digital Product Vision

    The Purpose

    Understand the elements of a good product vision and the pieces that back it up.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals people can align to.

    Activities

    1.1 Build out the elements of an effective digital product vision

    Outputs

    Completed product vision definition for a familiar product via the product canvas

    2 Build a Better Backlog

    The Purpose

    Define the standards and approaches to populate your product backlog that support your vision and overall strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized backlog with quality throughout that enables alignment and the operationalization of the overall strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Introduction to key activities required to support your digital product vision

    2.2 What do we mean by a quality backlog?

    2.3 Explore backlog structure and standards

    2.4 Define backlog data, content, and quality filters

    Outputs

    Articulate the activities required to support the population and validation of your backlog

    An understanding of what it means to create a quality backlog (quality filters)

    Defining the structural elements of your backlog that need to be considered

    Defining the content of your backlog and quality standards

    3 Build a Product Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define standards and procedures for creating and updating your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Enable your team to create a product roadmap to communicate your product strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    Activities

    3.1 Disambiguating backlogs vs. roadmaps

    3.2 Defining audiences, accountability, and roadmap communications

    3.3 Exploring roadmap visualizations

    Outputs

    Understand the difference between a roadmap and a backlog

    Roadmap standards and agreed-to accountability for roadmaps

    Understand the different ways to visualize your roadmap and select what is relevant to your context

    4 Define Your Release, Communication, and Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Build a release plan aligned to your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what goes into defining a release via the release canvas.

    Considerations in communication of your strategy.

    Understand how to frame your vision to enable the communication of your strategy (via an executive summary).

    Activities

    4.1 Lay out your release plan

    4.2 How to introduce your product vision

    4.3 Communicate changes to your strategy

    4.4 Where do we get started?

    Outputs

    Release canvas

    An executive summary used to introduce other parties to your product vision

    Specifics on communication of the changes to your roadmap

    Your first step to getting started

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}164|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option given the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects, but they have concerns:

    • Despite the longevity and broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its long-term viability and the costs of ongoing support.
    • A clear direction and strategy are needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software. The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a reputation for reliability in the industry.
    • Consider open source as another form of outsource development. Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution. Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team.

    Impact and Result

    • Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.
    • Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.
    • Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard – A guide to learn the fit, value, and considerations of open-source software.

    This research walks you through the misconceptions about open source, factors to consider in its selection, and initiatives to prepare your teams for its adoption.

    • Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software Storyboard

    2. Open-Source Readiness Assessment – A tool to help you evaluate your readiness to embrace open-source software in your environment.

    Use this tool to identify key gaps in the people, processes, and technologies needed to support open source in your organization. It also contains a canvas to facilitate discussions about expectations with your stakeholders and applications teams.

    • Open-Source Readiness Assessment
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take the First Steps to Embrace Open-Source Software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    Analyst Perspective

    With great empowerment comes great responsibilities.

    Open-source software promotes enticing technology and functional opportunities to any organization looking to modernize without the headaches of traditional licensing. Many organizations see the value of open source in its ability to foster innovation, be flexible to various use cases and system configurations, and give complete control to the teams who are using and managing it.

    However, open source is not free. While the software is freely and easily accessible, its use and sharing are bound by its licenses, and its implementation requires technical expertise and infrastructure investments. Your organization must be motivated and capable of taking on the various services traditionally provided and managed by the vendor.

    Photo of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director,
    Application Delivery and Application Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization is looking to invest in new software or a tool to solve key business and IT problems. They see open source as a viable option because of the advertised opportunities and the popularity of many open-source projects.

    Despite the longevity and the broad adoption of open-source software, stakeholders are hesitant about its adoption, its long-term viability, and the costs of ongoing support.

    A clear direction and strategy is needed to align the expected value of open source to your stakeholders’ priorities and gain the funding required to select, implement, and support open-source software.

    Common Obstacles

    Your stakeholders’ fears, uncertainties, and doubts about open source may be driven by misinterpretation or outdated information. This hesitancy can persist despite some projects being active longer than their proprietary counterparts.

    Certain software features, support capabilities, and costs are commonly overlooked when selecting open-source software because they are often assumed in the licensing and service costs of commercial software.

    Open-source software is often technically complicated and requires specific skill sets and knowledge. Unfortunately, current software delivery capability gaps impede successful adoption and scaling of open-source software.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Outline the value you expect to gain. Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Define your open-source selection criteria. Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Assess the readiness of your team. Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Open source is as much about an investment in people as it is about technology. It empowers applications teams to take greater control over their technology and customize it as they see fit. However, teams need the time and funding to conduct the necessary training, management, and ongoing community engagement that open-source software and its licenses require.

    • Position open source in the same light as commercial software.
      The continuous improvement and evolution of popular open-source software and communities have established a trusting and reliable reputation in the industry. Open-source software quality and community support can rival similar vendor capabilities given the community’s maturity and contributions in the technology.
    • Consider open source another form of outsource development.
      Open source is externally developed software where the code is accessible and customizable. Code quality may not align to your organization’s standards, which can require extensive testing and optimization. A thorough analysis of change logs, code repositories, contributors, and the community is recommended – much to the same degree as one would do with prospective outsourcing partners.
    • Treat open source as any internally developed solution.
      Configurations, integrations, customizations, and orchestrations of open-source software are often done at the code level. While some community support is provided, most of the heavy lifting is done by the applications team. Teams must be properly resourced, upskilled, and equipped to meet this requirement. Otherwise, third-party partners are needed.

    What is open source?

    According to Synopsys, “Open source software (OSS) is software that is distributed with its source code, making it available for use, modification, and distribution with its original rights. … Programmers who have access to source code can change a program by adding to it, changing it, or fixing parts of it that aren’t working properly. OSS typically includes a license that allows programmers to modify the software to best fit their needs and control how the software can be distributed.”

    What are the popular use cases?

    1. Programming languages and frameworks
    2. Databases and data technologies
    3. Operating systems
    4. Git public repos
    5. Frameworks and tools for AI/ML/DL
    6. CI/CD tooling
    7. Cloud-related tools
    8. Security tools
    9. Container technology
    10. Networking

    Source: OpenLogic, 2022

    Common Attributes of All Open-Source Software

    • Publicly shared repository that anyone can access to use the solution and contribute changes to the design and functionality of the project.
    • A community that is an open forum to share ideas and solution enhancements, discuss project direction and vision, and seek support from peers.
    • Project governance that sets out guidelines, rules, and requirements to participate and contribute to the project.
    • Distribution license that defines the terms of how a solution can be used, assessed, modified, and distributed.

    Take the first steps to embrace open-source software

    Begin to understand what is required to embrace open-source software in your organization.

    A diagram of open-source community.

    State the Value of Open Source: Discuss current business and IT priorities, use cases, and value opportunities to determine what to expect from open-source versus commercial software.

    Select Your Open-Source Software: Clarify the driving factors in your evaluation of open-source and commercial software using your existing IT procurement practices as a starting point.

    Prepare for Open Source: Clarify the roles, processes, and tools needed for the implementation, use, and maintenance of open-source software.

    Step 1.1: State the Value of Open Source

    Diagram of step 1.1

    Activities

    1.1.1 Outline the value you expect to gain from open-source software

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications team
    • Product owner

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Value proposition for open source
    • Potential open-source use cases

    Use a canvas to frame your open-source evaluation

    A photo of open-source canvas

    This canvas is intended to provide a single pane of glass to start collecting your thoughts and framing your future conversations on open-source software selection and adoption.

    Record the results in the “Open-Source Canvas” tab in the Open-Source Readiness Assessment.

    Open source presents unique software and tooling opportunities

    Innovation

    Many leading-edge and bleeding-edge technologies are collaborated and innovated in open-source projects, especially in areas that are beyond the vision and scope of vendor products and priorities.

    Niche Solutions

    Open-source projects are focused. They are designed and built to solve specific business and technology problems.

    Flexible & Customizable

    All aspects of the open-source software are customizable, including source code and integrations. They can be used to extend, complement, or replace internally developed code. Licenses define how open-source code should be and must be used, productized, and modified.

    Brand & Recognition

    Open-source communities encourage contribution and collaboration among their members to add functionality and improve quality and adoption.

    Cost

    Open-source software is accessible to everyone, free of charge. Communities do not need be consulted prior to acquisition, but the software’s use, configurations, and modifications may be restricted by its license.

    However, myths continue to challenge adoption

    • Open source is less secure or poorer quality than proprietary solutions.
    • Open source is free from risk of intellectual property (IP) infringement.
    • Open source is cheaper than proprietary solutions.

    What are the top perceived barriers to using enterprise open source?

    • Concerns about the level of support
    • Compatibility concerns
    • Concerns about inherent security of the code
    • Lack of internal skills to manage and support it

    Source: Red Hat, 2022

    Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}609|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Selection takes forever. Traditional software selection drags on for years, sometimes in perpetuity.
    • IT is viewed as a bottleneck and the business has taken control of software selection.
    • “Gut feel” decisions rule the day. Intuition, not hard data, guides selection, leading to poor outcomes.
    • Negotiations are a losing battle. Money is left on the table by inexperienced negotiators.
    • Overall: Poor selection processes lead to wasted time, wasted effort, and applications that continually disappoint.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Adopt a formal methodology to accelerate and improve software selection results.
    • Improve business satisfaction by including the right stakeholders and delivering new applications on a truly timely basis.
    • Kill the “sacred cow” requirements that only exist because “it’s how we’ve always done it.”
    • Forget about “RFP” overload and hone in on the features that matter to your organization.
    • Skip the guesswork and validate decisions with real data.
    • Take control of vendor “dog and pony shows” with single-day, high-value, low-effort, rapid-fire investigative interviews.
    • Master vendor negotiations and never leave money on the table.

    Impact and Result

    • Improving software selection is a critical project that will deliver huge value.
    • Hit a home run with your business stakeholders: use a data-driven approach to select the right application vendor for their needs – fast.
    • Shatter stakeholder expectations with truly rapid application selections.
    • Boost collaboration and crush the broken telephone with concise and effective stakeholder meetings.
    • Lock in hard savings and do not pay list price by using data-driven tactics.

    Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Advisory Call Outline

    Info-Tech's expert analyst guidance will help you save money, align stakeholders, and speed up the application selection process.

    • Advisory Call Outline: Software Selection Engagement Deck

    2. Workshop Overview

    Info-Tech's workshop will help you implement a repeatable, data-driven approach that accelerates software selection efforts.

    • Rapid Software Selection Workshop Overview
    [infographic]

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}336|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Mainframes remain a critical part of an organization’s infrastructure and will need to support these platforms for the foreseeable future. Despite the importance, it can be a challenge for organizations to find qualified resources to support them. Meanwhile, companies are unsure of where to find help to train and develop their teams on mainframe technologies and are at risk of a skills gap within their teams.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mainframes continue to have wide usage, particularly in enterprise organizations. The complexity of moving or replatforming many of these applications means these platforms will be around for a long time still.
    • Companies need to be proactive about developing their teams to support their mainframe systems.

    Impact and Result

    • Companies can protect their assets by cultivating a pipeline of qualified resources to support their mainframe infrastructure.
    • There is a robust training ecosystem headed by large, reputable organizations to help develop and support companies' resources. You don’t have to do it alone.

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard – An overview of the solutions available to support your mainframe training and skills development needs.

    Your mainframes are not going to disappear overnight. These systems often support the most critical operations in your organization. You need to ensure you have the right qualified resources to support your platforms.

    • Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}316|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,346 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being re-victimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop and implement a security incident management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Equip your organization for incident response with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 1: Prepare
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Management Charter Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool

    2. Operate

    Act with efficiency and effectiveness as new incidents are handled.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 2: Operate
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Credential Compromise
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Distributed Denial of Service
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malicious Email
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Ransomware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Data Breach
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (PDF)
    • Data Breach Reporting Requirements Summary
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Third-Party Incident
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Blank Template

    3. Maintain and optimize

    Manage and improve the incident management process by tracking metrics, testing capabilities, and leveraging best practices.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 3: Maintain and Optimize
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Root-Cause Analysis Template
    • Security Incident Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare Your Incident Response Program

    The Purpose

    Understand the purpose of incident response.

    Formalize the program.

    Identify key players and escalation points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common understanding of the importance of incident response.

    Various business units becoming aware of their roles in the incident management program.

    Formalized documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current process, obligations, scope, and boundaries of the incident management program.

    1.2 Identify key players for the response team and for escalation points.

    1.3 Formalize documentation.

    1.4 Prioritize incidents requiring preparation.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the incident landscape

    An identified incident response team

    A security incident management charter

    A security incident management policy

    A list of top-priority incidents

    A general security incident management plan

    A security incident response RACI chart

    2 Develop Incident-Specific Runbooks

    The Purpose

    Document the clear response procedures for top-priority incidents.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As incidents occur, clear response procedures are documented for efficient and effective recovery.

    Activities

    2.1 For each top-priority incident, document the workflow from detection through analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident analysis.

    Outputs

    Up to five incident-specific runbooks

    3 Maintain and Optimize the Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure the response procedures are realistic and effective.

    Identify key metrics to measure the success of the program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Real-time run-through of security incidents to ensure roles and responsibilities are known.

    Understanding of how to measure the success of the program.

    Activities

    3.1 Limited scope tabletop exercise.

    3.2 Discuss key metrics.

    Outputs

    Completed tabletop exercise

    Key success metrics identified

    Further reading

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Create a scalable incident response program without breaking the bank.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Security incidents are going to happen whether you’re prepared or not. Ransomware and data breaches are just a few top-of-mind threats that all organizations deal with. Taking time upfront to formalize response plans can save you significantly more time and effort down the road. When an incident strikes, don’t waste time deciding how to remediate. Rather, proactively identify your response team, optimize your response procedures, and track metrics so you can be prepared to jump to action.

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Picture of Céline Gravelines

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For

    • A CISO who is dealing with the following:
      • Inefficient use of time and money when retroactively responding to incidents, negatively affecting business revenue and workflow.
      • Resistance from management to adequately develop a formal incident response plan.
      • Lack of closure of incidents, resulting in being re-victimized by the same vector.

    This Research Will Help You

    • Develop a consistent, scalable, and usable incident response program that is not resource intensive.
    • Track and communicate incident response in a formal manner.
    • Reduce the overall impact of incidents over time.
    • Learn from past incidents to improve future response processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business stakeholders who are responsible for the following:
    • Improving workflow and managing operations in the event of security incidents to reduce any adverse business impacts.
    • Ensuring that incident response compliance requirements are being adhered to.

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Efficiently allocate resources to improve incident response in terms of incident frequency, response time, and cost.
    • Effectively communicate expectations and responsibilities to users.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Security incidents are inevitable, but how they’re dealt with can make or break an organization. Poor incident response negatively affects business practices, including workflow, revenue generation, and public image.
    • The incident response of most organizations is ad hoc at best. A formal management plan is rarely developed or adhered to, resulting in ineffective firefighting responses and inefficient allocation of resources.

    Complication

    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being revictimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Resolution

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies (measured in USD)

    This is a bar graph showing the per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies(measured in USD). the companies are, in decreasing order of cost: Health; Financial; Services; Pharmaceutical; Technology; Energy; Education; Industrial; Entertainment; Consumer; Media; Transportation; Hospitality; Retail; Research; Public

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $148 (in 2018).
    (Source: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study)”

    % of systems impacted by a data breach
    1%
    No Impact
    19%
    1-10% impacted
    41%
    11-30% impacted
    24%
    31-50% impacted
    15%
    > 50% impacted
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    61% Lost
    < 20%
    21% Lost 20-40% 8% Lost
    40-60%
    6% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    58% Lost
    <20%
    25% Lost
    20-40%
    9% Lost
    40-60%
    5% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%

    Source: Cisco, “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report”

    Defining what is security incident management

    IT Incident

    Any event not a part of the standard operation of a service which causes, or may cause, the interruption to, or a reduction in, the quality of that service.

    Security Event:

    A security event is anything that happens that could potentially have information security implications.

    • A spam email is a security event because it may contain links to malware.
    • Organizations may be hit with thousands or perhaps millions of identifiable security events each day.
    • These are typically handled by automated tools or are simply logged.

    Security Incident:

    A security incident is a security event that results in damage such as lost data.

    • Incidents can also include events that don't involve damage but are viable risks.
    • For example, an employee clicking on a link in a spam email that made it through filters may be viewed as an incident.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    The increasing complexity and prevalence of threats have finally caught the attention of corporate leaders. Prepare for the inevitable with an incident response program.

    1. A formalized incident response program reduced the average cost of a data breach (per capita) from $148 to $134, while third-party involvement increased costs by $13.40.
    2. US organizations lost an average of $7.91 million per data breach as a result of increased customer attrition and diminished goodwill. Canada and the UK follow suit at $1.57 and $1.39 million, respectively.
    3. 73% of breaches are perpetrated by outsiders, 50% are the work of criminal groups, and 28% involve internal actors.
    4. 55% of companies have to manage fallout, such as reputational damage after a data breach.
    5. The average cost of a data breach increases by $1 million if left undetected for > 100 days.

    (Sources: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study”; Verizon, “2017 Data Breach Investigations Report”; Cisco, “Cisco 2018 Annual Cybersecurity Report”)

    Threat Actor Examples

    The proliferation of hacking techniques and commoditization of hacking tools has enabled more people to become threat actors. Examples include:
    • Organized Crime Groups
    • Lone Cyber Criminals
    • Competitors
    • Nation States
    • Hacktivists
    • Terrorists
    • Former Employees
    • Domestic Intelligence Services
    • Current Employees (malicious and accidental)

    Benefits of an incident management program

    Effective incident management will help you do the following:

    Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to increase process consistency across the incident response team and the program as a whole. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to innovating.

    Improve threat detection, prevention, analysis, and response
    Enhance your pressure posture through a structured and intelligence-driven incident handling and remediation framework.

    Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.

    Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Establish a clear level of accountability throughout the incident response program, and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.

    Control security costs
    Effective incident management operations will provide visibility into your remediation processes, enabling cost savings from misdiagnosed issues and incident reduction.

    Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increase visibility into current performance levels and accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement with a holistic measurement program.

    Impact

    Short term:
    • Streamlined security incident management program.
    • Formalized and structured response process.
    • Comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Detailed response runbooks that predefine necessary operational protocol.
    • Compliance and audit adherence.
    Long term:
    • Reduced incident costs and remediation time.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.
    • Preserved reputation and brand equity.

    Incident management is essential for organizations of any size

    Your incidents may differ, but a standard response ensures practical security.

    Certain regulations and laws require incident response to be a mandatory process in organizations.

    Compliance Standard Examples Description
    Federal Information Security Modernization Act (FISMA)
    • Organizations must have “procedures for detecting, reporting, and responding to security incidents” (2002).
    • They must also “inform operators of agency information systems about current and potential information security threats and vulnerabilities.”
    Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
    • “Organizations must: (i) establish an operational incident handling capability for organizational information systems that includes adequate preparation, detection, analysis, containment, recovery, and user response activities.”
    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS v3)
    • 12.5.3: “Establish, document, and distribute security incident response and escalation procedures to ensure timely and effective handling of all situations.”
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • 164.308: Response and Reporting – “Identify and respond to suspected or known security incidents; mitigate, to the extent practicable, harmful effects of security incidents that are known to the covered entity; and document security incidents and their outcomes.”

    Security incident management is applicable to all verticals

    Examples:
    • Finance
    • Insurance
    • Healthcare
    • Public administration
    • Education services
    • Professional services
    • Scientific and technical services

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operation, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s incident response blueprint is one of four security operations initiatives

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Threat Intelligence Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Threat Intelligence Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule Template
    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. These analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Operations Event Prioritization Tool
    • Security Operations Efficiency Calculator
    • Security Operations Policy
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • Seccrimewareurity Operations RACI Tool
    • Security Operations TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Incident Response (IR)
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. Incident response teams coordinate root cause and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    Security Incident Management Policy
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    Understand how incident response ties into related processes

    Info-Tech Resources:
    Business Continuity Plan Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    Disaster Recovery Plan Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Security Incident Management Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program
    Incident Management Incident and Problem Management
    Service Desk Standardize the Service Desk

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – project overview

    1. Prepare 2. Operate 3. Maintain and Optimize
    Best-Practice Toolkit 1.1 Establish the Drivers, Challenges, and Benefits.

    1.2 Examine the Security Incident Landscape and Trends.

    1.3 Understand Your Security Obligations, Scope, and Boundaries.

    1.4 Gauge Your Current Process to Identify Gaps.

    1.5 Formalize the Security Incident Management Charter.

    1.6 Identify Key Players and Develop a Call Escalation Tree.

    1.7 Develop a Security Incident Management Policy.

    2.1 Understand the Incident Response Framework.

    2.2 Understand the Purpose of Runbooks.

    2.3 Prioritize the Development of Incident-Specific Runbooks.

    2.4 Develop Top-Priority Runbooks.

    2.5 Fill Out the Root-Cause Analysis Template.

    2.6 Customize the Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool to Standardize Useful Questions for Lessons-Learned Meetings.

    2.7 Complete the Security Incident Report Template.

    3.1 Conduct Tabletop Exercises.

    3.2 Initialize a Security Incident Management Metrics Program.

    3.3 Leverage Best Practices for Continuous Improvement.

    Guided Implementations Understand the incident response process, and define your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Formalize the incident management charter, RACI, and incident management policy.
    Use the framework to develop a general incident management plan.

    Prioritize and develop top-priority runbooks.
    Develop and facilitate tabletop exercises.

    Create an incident management metrics program, and assess the success of the incident management program.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Prepare for Incident Response
    Module 2:
    Handle Incidents
    Module 3:
    Review and Communicate Security Incidents
    Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Formalized stakeholder support
  • Security Incident Management Policy
  • Security Incident Management Charter
  • Call Escalation Tree
  • Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A generalized incident management plan
    • A prioritized list of incidents
    • Detailed runbooks for top-priority incidents
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A formalized tracking system for benchmarking security incident metrics.
    • Recommendations for optimizing your security incident management processes.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Understand the benefits of security incident response management.
    • Formalize stakeholder support.
    • Assess your current process, obligations, and scope.
    • Develop RACI chart.
    • Define impact and scope.
    • Identify key players for the threat escalation protocol.
    • Develop a security incident response policy.
    • Develop a general security incident response plan.
    • Prioritize incident-specific runbook development.
    • Understand the incident response process.
    • Develop general and incident-specific call escalation trees.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your next top-priority incidents:
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Determine key metrics to track and report.
    • Develop post-incident activity documentation.
    • Understand best practices for both internal and external communication.
    • Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.
    • Present the security incident response program to key stakeholders.
    • Workshop executive presentation and debrief.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule subsequent Analyst Calls.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Security Incident Management Policy
    • General incident management plan
    • Security Incident Management Runbook
    • Development prioritization
    • Prioritized list of runbooks
    • Understanding of incident handling process
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Post-Incident Report Analysis Template
    • Root Cause Analysis Template
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Communication plans
    • Workshop summary documentation
  • All final deliverables
  • Measured value for Guided Implementations

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice – it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Purpose Measured Value
    Section 1: Prepare

    Understand the need for an incident response program.
    Develop your incident response policy and plan.
    Develop classifications around incidents.
    Establish your program implementation roadmap.

    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates: 2 FTEs*2 days*$80,000/year = $1,280
    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200

    Section 2: Operate

    Prioritize runbooks and develop the processes to create your own incident response program:

  • Detect
  • Analyze
  • Contain
  • Eradicate
  • Recover
  • Post-Incident Activity
  • Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    4 FTEs*10 days*$80,000/year = $12,800 (if done internally)

    Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    1 consultant*15 days*$2,000/day = $30,000 (if done by third party)
    Section 3: Maintain and Optimize Develop methods of proper reporting and create templates for communicating incident response to key parties. Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance, templates, and tabletop exercises:
    2 FTEs*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,920
    Total Costs To just get an incident response program off the ground. $49,200

    Insurance company put incident response aside; executives were unhappy

    Organization implemented ITIL, but formal program design became less of a priority and turned more ad hoc.

    Situation

    • Ad hoc processes created management dissatisfaction around the organization’s ineffective responses to data breaches.
    • Because of the lack of formal process, an entirely new security team needed to be developed, costing people their positions.

    Challenges

    • Lack of criteria to categorize and classify security incidents.
    • Need to overhaul the long-standing but ineffective program means attempting to change mindsets, which can be time consuming.
    • Help desk is not very knowledgeable on security.
    • New incident response program needs to be in alignment with data classification policy and business continuity.
    • Lack of integration with MSSP’s ticketing system.

    Next steps:

    • Need to get stakeholder buy-in for a new program.
    • Begin to establish classification/reporting procedures.

    Follow this case study to Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Prepare

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Phase 1: Prepare

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
    Prepare Operate Optimize

    This phase walks you through the following activities:

    1.1 Establish the drivers, challenges, and benefits.
    1.2 Examine the security incident landscape and trends.
    1.3 Understand your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    1.4 Gauge your current process to identify gaps.
    1.5 Formalize a security incident management charter.
    1.6 Identify key players and develop a call escalation tree.
    1.7 Develop a security incident management policy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security team
    • IT staff
    • Business leaders

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Formalized stakeholder support.
    • Security incident management policy.
    • Security incident management charter.
    • Call escalation tree.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare for Incident Response
    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 Weeks
    Step 1.1-1.3 Understand Incident Response Step 1.4-1.7 Begin Developing Your Program
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
  • Discuss your current incident management status.
  • Review findings with analyst:
  • Review documents.
  • Then complete these activities…
    • Establish your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Identify the drivers, challenges, and benefits of formalized incident response.
    • Review any existing documentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Discuss further incident response requirements.
    • Identify key players for escalation and notifications.
    • Develop the policy.
    • Develop the plan.

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Policy
    Security Incident Management Plan
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Ready-made incident response solutions often contain too much coverage: too many irrelevant cases that are not applicable to the organization are accounted for, making it difficult to sift through all the incidents to find the ones you care about. Develop specific incident use cases that correspond with relevant incidents to quickly identify the response process and eliminate ambiguity when handled by different individuals.

    Ice breaker: What is a security incident for your organization?

    1.1 Whiteboard Exercise – 60 minutes

    How do you classify various incident types between service desk, IT/infrastructure, and security?

    • Populate sticky notes with various incidents and assign them to the appropriate team.
      • Who owns the remediation? When are other groups involved? What is the triage/escalation process?
      • What other groups need to be notified (e.g. cyber insurance, Legal, HR, PR)?
      • Are there dependencies among incidents?
      • What are we covering in the scope of this project?

    Develop Necessary Documentation for GDPR Compliance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}258|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
    • It can be an overwhelming challenge to understand what documentation is required under the GDPR.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Hiring the right data protection officer (DPO) isn’t always easy. The person you think might be best may result in a conflict of interest. Be aware of all requirements and be objective when hiring for this role.
    • Keep retention to the bare minimum. Limiting the amount of data you are responsible for limits your liability for protecting it.
    • Under the GDPR, cookies constitute personal data. They require a standalone policy, separate from the privacy policy. Ensure pop-up cookie notification banners require active consent and give users the clear opportunity to reject them.

    Impact and Result

    • Save time developing documents by leveraging ready-to-go templates for the DPO job description, retention documents, privacy notice, and cookie policy.
    • Establishing GDPR-compliance documentation will set the foundation for an overall compliant program.

    Develop Necessary Documentation for GDPR Compliance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Hire a data protection officer

    Understand the need for a DPO and what qualities to look for in a strong candidate.

    • Develop Necessary Documentation for GDPR Compliance Storyboard
    • Data Protection Officer Job Description Template

    2. Define retention requirements

    Understand your data retention requirements under the GDPR. Develop the necessary documentation.

    • Data Retention Policy Template
    • Data Retention Schedule Tool – GDPR

    3. Develop privacy and cookie policies

    Understand your website or application’s GDPR requirements to inform users on how you process their personal data and how cookies are used. Develop the necessary documentation.

    • Privacy Notice Template – External Facing
    • Cookie Policy Template – External Facing
    [infographic]

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}483|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Leverage your service desk ticket data to gain insights for your service desk strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Properly analyzing ticket data is challenging for the following reasons:
      • Poor ticket hygiene and unclear ticket handling means the data is often inaccurate or incomplete.
      • Service desk personnel are not sure where to start with analysis.
      • Too many metrics are tracked to parse actionable data from the noise.
    • Ticket data won’t give you a silver bullet, but it can help point you in the right direction.

    Impact and Result

    • Create an iterative framework for tracking metrics, keeping data clean, and actioning your data on day-to-day and month-to-month timelines.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should analyze your service desk ticket data, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Import your ticket data

    Enter your data into our tool. Compare your own ITSM ticket fields to improve ticket data moving forward.

    • Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool

    2. Analyze your ticket data

    Use the ticket analysis tool as a guide to build your own operational dashboards to measure metrics over time. Gain actionable insights from your data.

    • Ticket Analysis Report

    3. Action your ticket data

    Use the data to communicate your findings to the business and leadership using the Ticket Analysis Report.

    [infographic]

    Further reading

    INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Take a data-driven approach to service desk optimization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Photo of Benedict Chang, Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Benedict Chang
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Ken Weston ITIL MP, PMP, Cert.APM, SMC, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Ken Weston ITIL MP, PMP, Cert.APM, SMC
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    The perfect time to start analyzing your ticket data is now

    Service desks improve their services by leveraging ticket data to inform their actions. However, many organizations don’t know where to start. It’s tempting to wait for perfect data, but there’s a lot of value in analyzing your ticket data as it exists today.

    Start small. Track key tension metrics based on the out-of-the-box functionality in your tool. Review the metrics regularly to stay on track.

    By reviewing your ticket data, you’re going to get better organically. You’re going to learn about the state of your environment, the health of your processes, and the quality of your services. Regularly analyze your data to drive improvements.

    Make ticket analysis a weekly habit. Every week, you should be evaluating how the past week went. Every month, you should be looking for patterns and trends.

    Executive Summary

    Your Situation

    Leverage your service desk ticket data to gain insights for improving your operations:

    1. Use a data-based approach to allocate service desk resources.
    2. Design appropriate SLOs and SLAs to better service end users.
    3. Gain efficiencies for your shift-left strategy.
    4. Communicate the current and future value of the service desk to the business.

    Common Obstacles

    Properly analyzing ticket data is challenging for the following reasons:

    • Poor ticket hygiene and unclear ticket handling guidelines can lead to untrustworthy results.
    • Undocumented tickets from various intake channels prevents you from seeing the whole picture.
    • Service desk personnel are not sure where to start with analysis and are too busy to find time.
    • Too many metrics are tracked to parse actionable insights from the noise.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach to improvement:

    • To reduce the noise, standardize your ticket data in a format that will ease analysis.
    • Start with common analyses using the cleaned data set.
    • Identify action items based on your ticket data.

    Analyze your ticket data to help continually improve your service desk.

    Slow down. Give yourself time.

    Give yourself time to observe the new metrics and draw enough insights to make recommendations for improvement. Then, execute on those recommendations. Slow and steady improvement of the service desk only adds business value and will have a positive impact on customer satisfaction.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help service desk managers analyze their ticket data

    Analyzing ticket data involves:

    • Collecting ticket data and keeping it clean. Based on the metrics you’re analyzing, define ticket expectations and keep the data up to date.
    • Showing the value of the service desk. SLAs are meaningless if they are not met consistently. The prerequisite to implementing proper SLAs is fully understanding the workload of the service desk.
    • Understanding – and improving – the user experience. You cannot improve the user experience without meaningful metrics that allow you to understand the user experience. Different user groups will have different needs and different expectations of the level of service. Your metrics should reflect those needs and expectations.

    36% of organizations are prioritizing ticket handling in IT for 2021 (Source: SDI, 2021)

    12% of organizations are focusing directly on service desk improvement (Source: SDI, 2021)

    Common obstacles

    Many organizations face these barriers to analyzing their ticket data:

    • Finding time to properly analyze ticket data is a challenge. Not knowing where to start can lead to not analyzing the proper data. Service desks end up either tracking too much data or not tracking the proper metrics.
    • Data, even if clean, can be housed in various tools and databases. It’s difficult to aggregate data if the data is stored throughout various tools. Comparisons may also be difficult if the data sets aren’t consistent.
    • Shifting left to move tickets toward self-service is difficult when there is no visibility into which tickets should be shifted left.

    What your peers are saying about why they can’t start analyzing their ticket data:

    • “My technicians do not consistently update and close tickets.”
    • “My ITSM doesn’t have the capabilities I need to make informed decisions on shifting tickets left.”
    • “My tickets are always missing data”
    • “I’m constantly firefighting. I have no time for ticket data analysis.”
    • “I have no idea where to start with the amount of data I have.”
    (Source: Info-Tech survey, 2021; N=20.)

    Common obstacles that prevent effective ticket analysis

    We asked IT service desk managers and teams about their biggest hurdles

    Missing or Inaccurate Information
    • Lack of information in the ticket
    • Categories are too general/specific to draw insights
    • Poor ticket hygiene
    Missing Updates
    • Tickets aren’t updated while being resolved
    Correlating Tickets to Identify Trends
    • Not sure where to start with all the data at hand
    No Time
    • No time to figure out the tool or analyze the data properly
    Ineffective Categorization Schemes
    • Reduces the power of ticket data
    Tool Limitations
    • Can’t be easily customized
    • Too customized to be effective
    • Desired dashboards unavailable
    (Source: Info-Tech survey, 2021; N=20)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Repeat this analysis every business cycle:

    • Gather Your Data
      Collect your ticket data OR start measuring the right metrics.
    • Extract & Analyze
      Organize and visualize your data to extract insights
    • Action the Results
      Implement low-effort improvements and celebrate quick successes.
    • Implement Larger Changes
      Reference your ticket data while implementing process, tooling, and other changes.
    • Communicate the Results
      Use your data to show the value of your effort.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Track these metrics as you improve

    Use the data to tell you which aspects of IT need to be shifted left and which need to be automated

    Your data will show you where you can improve.

    As you act on your data, you should see:

    • Lower costs per ticket
    • Decreased average time to resolve
    • Increased end-user satisfaction
    • Fewer tickets escalated beyond Tier 1

    An illustration of the 'Shift Left Strategy' using three line graphs arranged in a table with the same axes but representing different metrics. The header row is 'Metrics,' then values of the x-axes are 'Auto-Fix,' 'User,' 'Tier 1,' 'Tier2/Tier3,' and 'Vendor.' Under 'Metrics' we see 'Cost,' 'Time,' and 'Satisfaction.' The 'Cost' graph begins 'Low' at 'Auto-Fix' and gradually moves to 'High' at 'Vendor.' The 'Time' graph begins 'Low' at 'Auto-Fix' and gradually moves to 'High' at 'Vendor.' The 'Satisfaction' graph begins 'High' at 'Auto-Fix' and gradually moves to 'Low' at 'Vendor.' Below is an arrow directing us away from the 'Vendor' option and toward the 'Auto-Fix' option, 'Shift Ticket Resolution Left.'

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for analyzing service desk tickets

    1. Import Your Ticket Data 2. Analyze Your Ticket Data 3. Communicate Your Insights
    Phase Steps
    1. Import Your Ticket Data
    1. Analyze High-Level Ticket Data
    2. Analyze Incidents, Service Requests, and Ticket Categories
    1. Build Recommendations
    2. Action and Communicate Your Ticket Data
    Phase Outcomes Enter your data into our tool. Compare your own ITSM ticket fields to improve ticket data moving forward. Use the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool as a guide to build your own operational dashboards to measure metrics over time. Gain actionable insights from your data. Use the data to communicate your findings to the business and leadership using the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Insight summary

    Slow down. Give yourself time.

    Give yourself time to observe the new metrics and draw enough insights to make recommendations for improvement. Then, execute on those recommendations. Slow and steady improvement of the service desk only adds business value and will have a positive impact on customer satisfaction.

    Iterate on what to track rather than trying to get it right the first time.

    Tracking the right data in your ticket can be challenging if you don’t know what you’re looking for. Start with standardized fields and iterate on your data analysis to figure out your gaps and needs.

    If you don’t know where to go, ticket data can point you in the right direction.

    If you have service desk challenges, you will need to allocate time to process improvement. However, prioritizing your initiatives is easier if you have the ticket data to point you in the right direction.

    Start with data from one business cycle.

    Service desks don’t need three years’ worth of data. Focus on gathering data for one business cycle (e.g. three months). That will give you enough information to start generating value.

    Let the data do the talking.

    Leverage the data to drive organizational and process change in your organization by tracking meaningful metrics. Choose those metrics using business-aligned goals.

    Paint the whole picture.

    Single metrics in isolation, even if measured over time, may not tell the whole story. Make sure you design tension metrics where necessary to get a holistic view of your service desk.

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint’s key deliverable is a ticket analysis tool. Many of the activities throughout this blueprint will direct you to complete and interpret this tool. The other main deliverable is a stakeholder presentation template to help you document the outcomes of the project.
    Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool Ticket Analysis Report
    Use this tool to identify trends and patterns in your ticket data to action improvement initiatives.

    Sample of the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool blueprint deliverable.

    Use this template to document the justification for addressing service desk improvement, the results of your analysis, and your next steps.

    Sample of the Ticket Analysis Report blueprint deliverable.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Discover and implement the proper metrics to improve your service desk
    • Use a data-based approach to improve your customer service and operational goals
    • Increase visibility with the business and other IT departments using a structured presentation

    Business Benefits

    • Quicker resolutions to incidents and service requests
    • Better expectations for the service desk and IT
    • Better visibility into the current state, challenges, and goals of the service desk
    • More effective support when contacting the service desk

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 3-4 calls over the course of 2-3 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges. Enter your data into the tool.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #2: Assess the current state across the different dashboards.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #3: Identify improvements and insights to include in the communication report.
    • Call #4: Review the service desk ticket analysis report.

    PHASE 1

    Import Your Ticket Data

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1.1 Define your objectives for analyzing ticket data
    • 1.1.2 Identify success metrics
    • 1.1.3 Import your ticket data into the tool
    • 1.1.4 Update your ticket fields for future analysis

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • ITSM Manager
    • Service Desk Technician

    1.1.1 Define your objectives for analyzing ticket data

    Input: Understanding of current service desk process and ticket routing

    Output: Defined objectives for the project

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Ticket Analysis Report

    Participants: Service Desk Staff, Service Desk Manager, IT Director, CIO

    Use the discussion questions below as a guide
    1. Identify your main objective for analyzing ticket data. Use these three sample objectives as a starting point:
      • Demonstrate value to the business by improving customer service.
      • Improve service desk operations.
      • Reduce the number of recurring incidents.
    2. Answer the following questions as a group:
      • What challenges do you have getting accurate data for this objective?
      • What data is missing for supporting this objective?
      • What kind of issues must be solved for us to make progress on achieving this objective?
      • What decisions are held up from a lack of data?
      • How can better ticket data help us to more effectively manage our services and operations?

    Document in the Ticket Analysis Report.

    1.1.2 Identify success metrics

    Select metrics that will track your progress on meeting the objective identified in Activity 1.1.1.

    Input: Understanding of current service desk process and ticket routing

    Output: Defined objectives for the project

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Ticket Analysis Report

    Participants: Service Desk Manager, IT Director, CIO

    Use these sample metrics as a starting point:
    Demonstrate value to the business by improving customer service
    Ticket trends by category by month # tickets by business department % SLAs met by IT teams
    Average customer satisfaction rating % incident tickets closed in one day Service request SLAs met by % Annual IT satisfaction survey result
    Improve service desk operations
    Incident tickets assigned, sorted by age and priority Scheduled requests for today and tomorrow Knowledgebase articles due for renewal this month Top 5-10 tickets for the quarter
    Unassigned tickets by age # incident tickets assigned by tech Open tickets by category Backlog summary by age
    Reducing the number of recurring incidents
    # incidents by category and resolution code Number of problem tickets opened and resolved Correlation of ticket volume trends to events Reduction of volume of recurring tickets
    Use of knowledgebase by users Use of self-service for ticket creation Use of service catalog Use of automated features (e.g. password resets)
    Average call hold time % calls abandoned Average resolution time Number of tickets reopened

    Document in the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Inefficient ticket-handling processes lead to SLA breaches and unplanned downtime

    Analyze the ticket data to catch mismanaged or lost tickets that lead to unnecessary escalations and impact business profitability

    • Ticket Category – Are your tickets categorized by type of asset? By service?
    • Average Ticket Times – How long does it take to resolve or fulfill tickets?
    • Ticket Priority – What is the impact and urgency of the ticket?
    • SLA/OLA Violations – Did we meet our SLA objectives? If not, why?
    • Ticket Channel – How was the issue reported or ticket received?
    • Response and Fulfillment – Did we complete first contact resolution? How many times was it transferred?
    • Associated Tasks and Tickets – Is this incident associated with any other tasks like change tickets or problem tickets?

    Encourage proper ticket-handling procedures to enable data quality

    Ensure everyone understands the expectations and the value created from having ticket data that follows these expectations

    • Create and update tickets, but not at the expense of good customer service. Agents can start the ticket but shouldn’t spend five minutes creating the ticket when they should be troubleshooting the problem.
    • Update the ticket when the issue is resolved or needs to be escalated. If agents are escalating, they should make sure all relevant information is passed along within the ticket to the next technician.
    • Update user of ETA if issue cannot be resolved quickly.
    • Ticket templates for common incidents can lead to fast creation, data input, and categorizations. Templates can reduce the time it takes to create tickets from two minutes to 30 seconds.
    • Update categories to reflect the actual issue and resolution.
    • Reference or link to the knowledgebase article as the documented steps taken to resolve the incident.
    • Validate with the client that the incident is resolved; automate this process with ticket closure after a certain time.
    • Close or resolve the ticket on time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ticket handling ensures clean handovers, whether it is to higher tiers or back to the customer. When filling the ticket out with information intended for another party, ensure the information is written for their benefit and from their point of view.

    Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool overview

    The Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool will help you standardize your ticket data in a meaningful format that will allow you to apply common analyses to identify the actions you need to take to improve service desk operations

    TABS 1 & 2
    INSTRUCTIONS & DATA ENTRY
    TAB 3 : TICKET SUMMARY
    TICKET SUMMARY DASHBOARDS
    TABS 4 to 8: DASHBOARDS
    INCIDENT SERVICE REQUEST CATEGORY
    Sample of the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool, tabs 1 & 2.
    Input at least three months of your exported ticket data into the corresponding columns in the tool to feed into the common analysis graphs in the other tabs.
    Sample of the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool, tab 3.
    This tab contains multiple dashboards analyzing how tickets come in, who requests them, who resolves them, and how long it takes to resolve them.
    Sample of the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool, tabs 4 to 8.
    These tabs each have dashboards outlining analysis on incidents and service requests. The category tab will allow you to dive deeper on commonly reported issues.

    1.1.3 Import your data into our Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool

    You can still leverage your current data, but use this opportunity to improve your service desk ticket fields down the line

    Input: ITSM data log

    Output: Populated Service Desk Ticket Data Analysis Tool

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool

    Participants: Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Technicians

    Start here:

    • Extract your ticket data from your ITSM tool in an Excel or text format.
    • Look at the fields on the data entry tab of the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool.
    • Fill the fields with your ticket data by copying and pasting relevant sections. It is okay if you don’t have all the fields, but take note of the fields you are missing.
    • With the list of the fields you are missing, run through the following activity to decide if you will need to adopt or add fields to your own service desk ticket tool.
    Fields Captured
    Ticket Number Open Date
    Open Time Closed Date
    Closed Time Intake Channel
    Time to Resolve Site Location
    First Contact Resolution Resolution Code
    Category (I, II, III) Ticket Type (Request or Incident)
    Status of Ticket Resolved by Tier
    Ticket Priority Requestor/Department
    SLA Fulfilled Subject
    Technician

    When entering your data, pay close attention to the following fields:

    • Time to Resolve: This is automatically calculated using data in the Open Date, Open Time, Close Date, and Close Time fields. You have three options for entering your data in these fields:
      1. Enter your data as the fields describe. Ensure your data contain only the field description (e.g. Open Date separated from Open Time). If your data contain Open Date AND Open Time, Excel will not show both.
      2. Enter your data only in Open Date and Close Date. If your ITSM does not separate date and time, you can keep the data in a single cell and enter it in the column. The formula in Time to Resolve will still be accurate.
      3. If your ITSM outputs Time to Resolve, overwrite the formula in the Time to Resolve column.
    • SLA: If your ITSM outputs SLA fulfilled: Y/N, enter that directly into the SLA Fulfilled column.
    • Blank Columns: If you do not have data for all the columns, that is okay. Continue with the following activity. Note that some stock dashboards will be empty if that is the case.
    • Incidents vs. Service Requests: If you separate incidents and service requests, be sure to capture that in the SR/Incident for Tabs 4 and 5. If you do not separate the two, then you will only need to analyze Tab 3.
    Fields Captured
    Ticket Number Open Date
    Open Time Closed Date
    Closed Time Intake Channel
    Time to Resolve Site Location
    First Contact Resolution Resolution Code
    Category (I, II, III) Ticket Type (Request or Incident)
    Status of Ticket Resolved by Tier
    Ticket Priority Requestor/Department
    SLA Fulfilled Subject
    Technician

    Use Info-Tech’s tool instead of building your own. Download the Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool.

    1.1.4 Update your ticket fields for future analysis

    Input: Populated Service Desk Ticket Data Analysis Tool

    Output: New ticket fields to track

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Service Desk Ticket Analysis Tool

    Participants: Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Technicians

    As a group, pay attention to the ticket fields populated in the tool as well as the ticket fields that you were not able to populate. Use the example “Fields Captured” table to the right, which lists all fields present in the ticket analysis tool.

    Discuss the following questions:

    1. Consider the fields not captured. Would it be valuable to start capturing that data for future analysis?
    2. If so, does your ITSM support that field?
    3. Can you make the change in-house or do you have to bring in an external ITSM administrator to make the change?
    4. Capture the results in the Ticket Analysis Report.
    Example: Fields Captured - Fields Not Captured
    Ticket Number Open Date
    Open Time Closed Date
    Closed Time Intake Channel
    Time to Resolve Site Location
    First Contact Resolution Resolution Code
    Category (I, II, III) Ticket Type (Request or Incident)
    Status of Ticket Resolved by Tier
    Ticket Priority Requestor/Department
    SLA Fulfilled Subject
    Technician

    Document in the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t wait for your ticket quality to be perfect. You can still draw actions from your ticket data. They will likely be process improvements initially, but the exercise of pulling the data is a necessary first step.

    Common ticket fields tracked by your peers

    Which of these metrics do you track and action?

    • Remember you don’t have to track every metric. Only track metrics that are actionable.

    For each metric that you end up tracking:

    • Look for trends over time.
    • Brainstorm reasons why the metric could rise or fall.

    Associate a metric with each improvement you execute.

    • Performing this step will allow you to better see the value from your team’s efforts.
    • It will also give you a quicker response than waiting for spikes in your data.

    A bar chart of 'Metrics tracked by other organizations' with the x-axis populated by different metrics and the y-axis as '% organizations who track the metric'. The highest percentage of businesses track 'Ticket volume', then 'Ticket trends by category', then 'Tickets by business units'. The lowest three shown are 'Reopened tickets', 'Cost per ticket', and 'Other'.(Source: Info-Tech survey, 2021; N=20)

    PHASE 2

    Analyze Your Ticket Data

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.1.1 Review high-level ticket dashboards
    • 2.2.1 Review incident, service request, and ticket category dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    • IT Managers

    Visualize your ticket data as a first step to analysis

    Identifying trends is easier when looking at diagrams, graphs, and figures

    Start your analysis with common visuals employed by other service desk professionals

    • Phase 2 will walk you through visualizing your data to get a better understanding of your ticket intake, incident management, and service request management.
    • Each step will walk you through:
      • Common visualizations used by service desks
      • Patterns to look for in your visualizations
      • Actions to take to address negative patterns and to continue positive trends
    • Share diagrams that underscore both the value being provided by the service desk as well as the scope of the pain points. Use Info-Tech’s Ticket Analysis Report template as a starting point.

    “Being able to tell stories with data is a skill that’s becoming ever more important in our world of increasing data and desire for data-driven decision making. An effective data visualization can mean the difference between success and failure when it comes to communicating the findings of your study, raising money for your nonprofit, presenting to your board, or simply getting your point across to your audience.” - Cole Knaflic, Founder and CEO, Storytelling with Data: A Data Visualization Guide for Business Professionals

    Use the detailed dashboards to determine the next steps for improvement

    A single number doesn’t tell the whole picture

    Analyze trends over time:

    • Analyze trends by day, by week, by month, and by year to determine:
      • When are the busy periods? (E.g. Do tickets tend to spike every morning, every Monday, or every September?)
      • When are the slow periods? (E.g. Do tickets drop at the end of the day, at midday, on Fridays, or over the summer?)
    • Are spikes or drops in volume consistent trends or one-time anomalies?

    Then build a plan to address them:

    • How will you handle volume spikes, if they’re consistent?
    • What can your resources work on during slow times, if they are consistent?
    • If you assume no shrinkage, can you handle the peaks in volume if you make all FTEs available to work on tickets at a certain time of day?

    Sample of a bar chart comparing tickets that were 'Backlog versus Closed by Month Opened'.

    Look for seasonal trends. In this example, we see high ticket volumes in May and January, with lower ticket volumes in June and July when many staff are taking holidays. However, also be careful to look at the big picture of how you pulled the data. August through October sees a high volume of open tickets because the data set is pulled in November, not because there’s a seasonal spike on tickets not closing at the end of the fiscal year.

    Track ticket data over time

    Make low-effort adjustments before major changes

    Don’t rush to a decision based off the first numbers you see

    Review ticket summary dashboard

    Ideally, you should track ticket patterns over an entire year to get a full sense of trends within each month of the year. At minimum, track for 30 days, then 60, then 90, and see if anything changes. The longer you can track ticket patterns, the more accurate your picture will be.

    Review additional dashboards

    If you separate incidents and service requests, and you have accurate ticket categories, then you can use these dashboards to further break down the data to identify ticket trends.

    The output of the ticket analysis will only be as accurate as its input.
    To get the most accurate results, first ensure your data is accurate, then analyze it over as much time as possible. Aggregating with accurate data will give you a better picture of the trends in demand that your service desk sees.

    Not separating incidents and service requests? Need to fix your ticket categories? Visit Standardize the Service Desk to get started.

    Analyze incidents and requests separately

    Each type has its own set of customer experiences and expectations

    • Different ticket types are associated with radically different prioritization, routing, and service levels. For instance, most incidents are resolved within a business day, but requests take longer to implement.
    • If you fail to distinguish between ticket types, your metrics will obscure service desk performance.
    • From a ticket analysis standpoint, separating ticket types prior to analysis or, better yet, at intake allows for cleaner data. In turn, this means more structured analyses, better insights, and more meaningful actions. Not separating ticket types may still get you to the same conclusions, but it will be much more difficult to sift through the data.

    Incident

    An unanticipated interruption of a service.
    The goal of incident management is to restore the service as soon as possible, even if the resolution involves a workaround.

    Request

    A generic description for a small change or service access.
    Requests are small, frequent, and low risk. They are best handled by a process distinct from incident, change, and project management.

    Not separating incidents and service requests? Need to fix your ticket categories? Visit Standardize the Service Desk to get started.

    Step 2.1

    Analyze Your High-Level Ticket Data

    Dashboards
    • Ticket Volume
    • Ticket Intake
    • Ticket Handling and Resolution
    • Ticket Categorization

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Visualize the current state of your service desk.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    Build your metrics baseline to compare with future metric results.

    Dashboards: Ticket Volume

    Example of a dashboard for ticket volume with two bar charts, one breaking down volume by month, and the other marking certain days or weeks in each month.

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Analyze volume trends by day, by week, by month, and by year to determine:
      • When are the busy periods? (E.g. Do tickets tend to spike every morning, every Monday, or every September?)
      • When are slow periods? (E.g. Do tickets drop at the end of the day, at midday, on Fridays, or over the summer?)
    • Are spikes or drops in volume consistent trends or one-time anomalies?
    • What can your resources be working on during slow times? Are you able to address ticket backlog?

    Dashboards: Ticket Intake

    Example of a dashboard for ticket intake with three bar charts, one breaking it down by 'Intake Channel', one by 'Requestor/Department', and one by 'Location'.

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Determine how to drive intake to the most appropriate solution for your organization:
      • A web portal is the most efficient intake method, but it must be user friendly to increase its adoption.
      • The phone should be available for urgent requests or incidents. Encourage those who call with a request to submit a ticket through the portal.
      • Discourage use of email if it is unstructured, as users don’t provide enough detail, and often two or three transactions are required for triage.
      • If walk-ups are encouraged, structure and formalize the support so it can be resourced and managed rather than interrupt-driven.

    Dashboard: Ticket Handling and Resolution

    Example of a dashboard for ticket handling and resolution with three bar charts, one breaking down 'Tickets Resolved by Technician', one by 'Tier', and one by 'Average Time to Resolve (Hours)'.

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Look at your ticket load by technician and by tier. This is an essential step to set your baseline to measure your shift-left initiatives. If you are focusing on self-service or Tier 1 training, the ticket load from higher tiers should decrease over time.
    • If Tiers 2 and 3 are handling the majority of the tickets, this could be a red flag indicating tickets are inappropriately escalated or Tier 1 could use more training and support.
    • For average time to resolve and average time to resolve by tier, are you meeting your SLAs? If not, are your SLAs too aggressive? Are tickets left open and not properly closed?

    Dashboard: Ticket Categorization

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Ticket categorization is critical to clean data. Having a categorization scheme with categories that are miscellaneous, too specific, or too general easily leads to inaccurate reporting or confusing workflows for technicians.
    • When looking at your ticket categories, first look for duplicate categories that could be collapsed into one.
    • Also look at your top five to seven categories and see if they make sense. Are these good candidates in your organization for automation or shift-left?
    • Compare your Tier 1 categories. The level of specificity for these categories should be comparable to easily run reports. If they are not, assess the need for a category redesign.

    Example of a dashboard for ticket categorization with one horizontal bar chart, 'Incident Ticket Volume by Level 1 Category'.

    Step 2.2

    Analyze Incidents, Service Requests, and Ticket Categories

    Dashboards
    • Incidents
    • Service Requests
    • Volume by Ticket Category
    • Resolution Times by Priority and/or Category
    • Tabs for More Granular Investigation and Reporting

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Visualize your incident and service request ticket load and analyze trends. Use this information and cross reference data sets to gain a holistic view of how the service desk interacts with IT and the business.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    Gain actionable, data-driven improvements based on your incident and service request data. Show the value of the service desk and highlight improvements needed.

    Incident and Service Requests Dashboard: Priority and SLA

    Example of an Incident and Service Requests dashboard for priority and SLA with three charts, one breaking down 'Incident Priority', one 'Average time to resolve (in hours) by priority', and one '% of SLA met'.

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Your ticket priority distribution for overall load and time to resolve (TTR) should look something like above with low-priority tickets having higher load and TTR and high/critical-priority tickets having a lower load and lower TTR. If it is reversed, that is a good indication that the service desk is too reactive or isn’t properly prioritizing its work.
    • If your SLA has a high failure rate, consider reassessing your targets with SLOs that you can meet before publishing them as achievable SLAs.

    Incident and Service Requests Dashboard: Priority and SLA

    Example of an Incident and Service Requests dashboard for resolution and close with three bar charts, one breaking down 'Incident Volume by Resolution Code', one 'Incidents Resolved by Tier', and one 'Average time to resolve (in hours) by Resolution Code'.

    Analyze your data for insights

    • Examine your ticket handling by looking at ticket status and resolution codes.
      • If you have a lot of blanks, then tickets are not properly handled. Consider reinforcing your standards for close codes and statuses.
      • Alternatively, if tickets are left open, you may have to build follow-ups on stale tickets into your process or introduce proper auto-close processes.

    Category, Resolution Time, and Resolution Code Dashboards

    These PivotCharts allow you to dig deeper

    Investigate whether there are trends in ticket volume and resolution times within specific categories and subcategories

    Tab 6, Category Dashboard; tab 7, Resolution Time Dashboard; and tab 8, Resolution Code Dashboard are PivotCharts. Use these tabs to investigate whether there are trends in ticket volume, resolution times, and resolution codes within specific categories and subcategories.

    Start with the charts that are available. The +/- buttons will allow you to show more granular information. By default, this granularity will be into the levels of the ticket categorization scheme.

    For most categorization schemes, there will be too many categories to properly graph. You can apply a filter to investigate specific categories by clicking on the drop-down buttons.

    Example of dashboards featured on next slide

    Use these tabs for more granular investigation and reporting

    TAB 6
    CATEGORY DASHBOARD
    TAB 7
    RESOLUTION TIME DASHBOARD
    TAB 8
    RESOLUTION TIME DASHBOARD
    Sample of the 'Ticket Volume by Second, Third Level Category' dashboard tab.
    Investigate ticket distributions in first, second, and third levels. Are certain categories overcrowded, suggesting they can be split? Are certain categories not being used?
    Sample of the 'Average Resolution Times' dashboard tab.
    Do average resolution times match your service level agreements? Do certain categories have significantly different resolution times? Are there areas that can benefit from shift-left?
    Sample of the 'Volume of Resolution Codes' dashboard tab.
    Are resolution codes being accurately used? Are there trends in resolution codes? Are these codes providing sufficient information for problem management?

    PHASE 3

    Communicate Your Insights

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1.1 Review common recommendations
    • 3.2.1 Review ticket reports daily
    • 3.2.2 Incorporate ticket data into retrospectives and team updates
    • 3.2.3 Regularly review trends with business leaders
    • 3.2.4 Tell a story with your data

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    • IT Managers

    Step 3.1

    Build Recommendations Based on Your Ticket Data

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Review common recommendations

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Review common recommendations as a first step to extracting insights from your own data.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians

    Outcomes of this step

    You will gain an understanding of the common challenges with service desks and ticket analysis in general. See which ones apply to you to inform your ticket data analysis moving forward.

    Review these common recommendations

    1. Fix your ticket categories
      Organize your ticket categorization scheme for proper routing and reporting.
    2. Focus more on self-service
      Self-service is essential to enable shift-left strategies. Focus on knowledgebase processes and portal ease of use.
    3. Update your service catalog
      Improve your service catalog, if necessary, to make it easy for end users to request services and for the service desk to provide those services.
    4. Direct volume toward other channels
      Walk-ups make it more difficult to properly log tickets and assign service desk resources. Drive volume to other channels to improve your ticket quality.
    5. Crosstrain Tier 1 on certain topics
      Tier 1 breadth of knowledge is essential to drive up first contact resolution.
    6. Build more automation
      Identify bottlenecks and challenges with your ticket data to streamline ticket handling and resolution.
    7. Revisit service level agreements
      Update your SLAs and/or SLOs to prioritize expectation management for your end users.
    8. Improve your data quality
      You can only analyze data that exists. Revisit your ticket-handling guidelines and more regularly check tickets to ensure they comply with those standards.

    Optimize your processes and look for opportunities for automation

    Leverage Info-Tech research to improve service desk processes

    Review your service desk processes and tools for optimization opportunities:

    • Clearly establish ticket-handling guidelines.
    • Use ticket templates to reduce time spent entering tickets.
    • Document incident management and service request fulfillment workflows and eliminate any unnecessary steps.
    • Automate manual tasks wherever possible.
    • Build or improve a self-service portal with a knowledgebase to allow users to resolve their own issues, reducing incoming ticket volume to the service desk.
    • Optimize your internal knowledgebase to reduce time spent troubleshooting recurring issues.
    • Leverage AI capabilities to speed up ticket processing and resolution.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes, including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    This project will help you build a strategy to shift service support left to optimize your service desk operations and increase end-user satisfaction.

    Step 3.2

    Action and Communicate Your Ticket Data

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Review your ticket queues daily
    • 3.2.2 Incorporate ticket data into retrospectives and team status updates
    • 3.2.3 Regularly review trends with business leaders
    • 3.2.4 Tell a story with your data

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Organize your scrums to report on the metrics that will inform daily and monthly operations.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    Use the dashboards and data to inform your daily and monthly scrums.

    3.2.1 Review your ticket queues daily

    Clean data is still useless if not used properly

    • The metrics you’ve chosen to measure and visualize in the previous step are useful for informing your day-to-day, week-to-week, and month-to-month strategies for the service desk and IT. Conduct scrums daily to action your dashboard data to help clear ticket queues.
    • Reference your dashboards daily with each IT team.
    • You need to have a dashboard of open tickets assigned to each team.

    Review Daily

    • Ticket volume over the last day (look for spikes)
    • SLA breach risks/SLA breaches
    • Recurring incidents
    • Tickets open
    • Tickets handed over (confirmation of handover)

    3.2.2 Incorporate ticket data into retrospectives and team status updates

    Explain your metric spikes and trends

    • Hold weekly or monthly meetings to review the ticket trends selected during Phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint.
    • Review ticket spikes, identify seasonal trends, and discuss root causes (e.g. projects/changes going live, onboarding blitz).
    • Discuss any actions associated with spikes and seasonal trends (e.g. resource allocation, hiring, training).
    • You can incorporate other IT leaders or departments in this meeting as needed to discuss action items for improvement, quality assurance concerns, customer service concerns, and/or operating level agreement concerns.

    Review Weekly/Monthly

    • Ticket volume
    • Ticket category by priority level over time
    • Tickets from different business groups, VIP groups, and different vertical levels
    • Tickets escalated, tickets that didn’t need to be escalated, tickets that were incorrectly escalated
    • Ticket priority levels over time
    • Most requested services
    • Tickets resolved by which group over time
    • Ability to meet SLAs and OLAs over time by different groups

    3.2.3 Regularly review trends with business leaders

    Use your data to help improve business relationships

    Review the following with business leaders:

    • Volume of work done this past time cycle for the leader’s group
    • Trends and spikes in the data and possible explanations for them (note: get their input on the potential causes of trends)
    • Improvements you plan to execute within the service desk
    • Action items you need from the business leader

    Use your data to show the value you provide to the group. Schedule quarterly meetings with the heads of different business groups to discuss the work that the service desk does for each group.

    Show trends in incidents and service requests: “I see you have a spike in CRM tickets. I’ve been working with the CRM team to address this issue.”

    3.2.4 Tell a story with your data

    Effectively communicate with the business and leadership

    • With your visualized metrics, organize your story into a presentation for different stakeholder groups. You can use the Ticket Analysis Report as a starting point to provide data about:
      • Value provided by the service desk
      • Successes
      • Opportunities for Improvements
      • Current state of KPIs
    • Include information about the causes of data trends and actions you will take in response to the data.
    • For each of these themes, look at the metrics you’ve chosen to track and see which ones fit to tell the story. Let the data do the talking.
    • Consider supplementing the ticket data with data from other systems. For example, you can include data on transactional customer satisfaction surveys, knowledgebase utilization, and self-service utilization.

    Sample of the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Download the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Ticket Analysis Report

    Include the following information as you build your ticket analysis report:

    • Value Provided by the Service Desk
      Start with the value provided by the service desk to different areas of the business. Include information about first contact resolution, average resolution times, ticket volume (e.g. by category, priority, location, requestor).
    • Successes
      Successes is a general field that can include how process improvements have impacted the service desk or how initiatives have enhanced shift-left opportunities. Highlight any positive trends over time.
    • Opportunities for Improvement
      Let the data guide the conversation to where improvements can be made. Day-to-day ops, self-service tools, shifting work left from Tier 2, Tier 3, standardizing a non-standard service, and staffing adjustments are possibilities for this section.
    • Current State of KPIs
      Mean time to resolve, FCR, ticket volume, and end-user satisfaction are great KPIs to include as a starting point.

    Sample of the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Download the Ticket Analysis Report.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You now have a better understanding of how to action your service desk ticket data, including improvements to your current ticket templates for incidents and service requests.

    You also have the data to craft a story to different stakeholder groups to celebrate the successes of the service desk and highlight possible improvements. Continue this exercise iteratively to continue improving the service desk.

    Remember, ticket analysis is not a single event but an ongoing initiative. As you track, analyze, and action more data, you will find more improvements.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Photo of Benedict Chang.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of dashboards we saw earlier. Sample of the 'Ticket Analysis Report'.
    Analyze your dashboards
    An analyst will walk through the ticket data and dashboards with you and your team to help interpret the data and tailor improvements
    Populate your ticket data report
    Given the action items from this solution set, an analyst will help you craft a report to celebrate the successes and highlight needed improvements in the service desk.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    The best type of service desk ticket is the one that doesn’t exist.

    Incident & Problem Management

    Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

    Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog

    Improve user satisfaction with IT with a convenient menu-like catalog.

    Bibliography

    Bayes, Scarlett. “ITSM: 2021 & Beyond.” Service Desk Institute, 2021. Web.

    “Benchmarking Report v.9.” Service Desk Institute, 17 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Bennett, Micah. “The 9 Help Desk Metrics That Should Guide Your Customer Support.” Zapier, 3 Dec. 2015. Web.

    “Global State of Customer Service: The transformation of customer service from 2015 to present day.” Microsoft Dynamics 365, Microsoft, 2020. Web.

    Goodey, Ben. “How to Manually Analyze Support Tickets.” SentiSum, 26 July 2021. Web.

    Jadhav, Megha. “Four Metrics to Analyze When Using Ticketing Software.” Vision Helpdesk Blog, 21 Mar. 2016. Web.

    Knaflic, Cole Nussbaumer. Storytelling with Data: A Data Visualization Guide for Business Professionals. Wiley, 2015.

    Li, Ta Hsin, et al. “Incident Ticket Analytics for IT Application Management Services.” 2014 IEEE International Conference on Services Computing, 2014. Web.

    Olson, Sarah. “10 Help Desk Metrics for Service Desks and Internal Help Desks.” Zendesk Blog, Sept. 2021. Web.

    Paramesh, S.P., et al. “Classifying the Unstructured IT Service Desk Tickets Using Ensemble of Classifiers.” 2018 3rd International Conference on Computational Systems and Information Technology for Sustainable Solutions (CSITSS), 2018. Web.

    Volini, Erica, et al. “2021 Global Human Capital Trends: Special Report.” Deloitte Insights, 21 July 2021. Web.

    “What Kind of Analysis You Can Perform on a Ticket Management System.” Commence, 3 Dec. 2019. Web.

    INFO-TECH RESEARCH GROUP

    Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}536|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • COVID-19 is an unprecedented global pandemic. It’s creating significant challenges across every sector.
    • Collapse of financial markets and a steep decline in consumer confidence has most firms nervous about revenue shortfalls and cash burn rates.
    • The economic impact of COVID-19 is freezing IT budgets and sharply changing IT priorities.
    • The human impact of COVID-19 is likely to lead to staffing shortfalls and knowledge gaps.
    • COVID-19 may be in play for up to two years.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The challenges posed by the virus are compounded by the fact that consumer expectations for strong service delivery remain high:

    • Customers still expect timely, on-demand service from the businesses they engage with.
    • There is uncertainty about how to maintain strong, revenue-driving experiences when faced with the operational challenges posed by the virus.
    • COVID-19 is changing how organizations prioritize spending priorities within their CXM strategies.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech recommends rapidly updating your strategy for customer experience management to ensure it can rise to the occasion.
    • Start by assessing the risk COVID-19 poses to your CXM approach and how it’ll impact marketing, sales, and customer service functions.
    • Implement actionable measures to blunt the threat of COVID-19 while protecting revenue, maintaining consistent product and service delivery, and improving the integrity of your brand. We’ll dive into five proven techniques in this brief!

    Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Research & Tools

    Start here

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should examine the impact of COVID-19 on customer experience strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Storyboard

    1. Assess the impact of COVID-19 on your CXM strategy

    Create a consolidated, updated view of your current customer experience management strategy and identify which elements can be capitalized on to dampen the impact of COVID-19 and which elements are vulnerabilities that the pandemic may threaten to exacerbate.

    2. Blunt the damage of COVID-19 with new CXM tactics

    Create a roadmap of business and technology initiatives through the lens of customer experience management that can be used to help your organization protect its revenue, maintain customer engagement, and enhance its brand integrity.

    [infographic]

    Corporate security consultancy

    Corporate security consultancy

    Based on experience
    Implementable advice
    human-based and people-oriented

    Engage our corporate security consultancy firm to discover any weaknesses within your company’s security management. Tymans Group has extensive expertise in helping small and medium businesses set up clear security protocols to safeguard their data and IT infrastructure. Read on to discover how our consulting firm can help improve corporate security within your company.

    Why should you hire a corporate security consultancy company?

    These days, corporate security includes much more than just regulating access to your physical location, be it an office or a store. Corporate security increasingly deals in information and data security, as well as general corporate governance and responsibility. Proper security protocols not only protect your business from harm, but also play an important factor in your overall success. As such, corporate security is all about setting up practical and effective strategies to protect your company from harm, regardless of whether the threat comes from within or outside. As such, hiring a security consulting firm to improve corporate security and security management within your company is not an unnecessary luxury, but a must.

    Security and risk management

    Our security and risk services

    Security strategy

    Security Strategy

    Embed security thinking through aligning your security strategy to business goals and values

    Read more

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Create a disaster recovey plan that is right for your company

    Read more

    Risk Management

    Risk Management

    Build your right-sized IT Risk Management Program

    Read more

    Check out all our services

    Improve your corporate security with help from our consulting company

    As a consultancy firm, Tymans Group can help your business to identify possible threats and help set up strategies to avoid them. However, as not all threats can be avoided, our corporate security consultancy firm also helps you set up protocols to mitigate and manage them, as well as help you develop effective incident management protocols. All solutions are practical, people-oriented and based on our extensive experience and thus have proven effectiveness.

    Hire our experienced consultancy firm

    Engage the services of our consulting company to improve corporate security within your small or medium business. Contact us to set up an appointment on-site or book a one-hour talk with expert Gert Taeymans to discuss any security issues you may be facing. We are happy to offer you a custom solution.

    Register to read more …

    Build a Data Integration Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}125|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $11,677 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • As organizations process more information at faster rates, there is increased pressure for faster and more efficient data integration.
    • Data integration is becoming more and more critical for downstream functions of data management and for business operations to be successful. Poor integration holds back these critical functions.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Every IT project requires data integration. Regardless of the current problem and the solution being implemented, any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.
    • Data integration problem solving needs to start with business activity. After understanding the business activity, move to application and system integration to drive the optimal data integration activities.
    • Data integration improvement needs to be backed by solid requirements that depend on the use case. Info-Tech’s use cases will help you identify your organization’s requirements and integration architecture for its ideal data integration solution.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a data integration solution that supports the flow of data through the organization and meets the organization’s requirements for data latency, availability, and relevancy.
    • Build your data integration practice with a firm foundation in governance and reference architecture; use best-fit reference architecture patterns and the related technology and resources to ensure that your process is scalable and sustainable.
    • The business’ uses of data are constantly changing and evolving, and as a result, the integration processes that ensure data availability must be frequently reviewed and repositioned in order to continue to grow with the business.

    Build a Data Integration Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should improve its data integration, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how we can help you create a loosely coupled integration architecture.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Collect integration requirements

    Identify data integration pains and needs and use them to collect effective business requirements for the integration solution.

    • Break Down Data Silos With a Data-Centric Integration Strategy – Phase 1: Collect Integration Requirements
    • Data Integration Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Analyze integration requirements

    Determine technical requirements for the integration solution based on the business requirement inputs.

    • Break Down Data Silos With a Data-Centric Integration Strategy – Phase 2: Analyze Integration Requirements
    • Data Integration Trends Presentation
    • Data Integration Pattern Selection Tool

    3. Design the data-centric integration solution

    Determine your need for a data integration proof of concept, and then design the data model for your integration solution.

    • Break Down Data Silos With a Data-Centric Integration Strategy – Phase 3: Design the Data-Centric Integration Solution
    • Data Integration POC Template
    • Data Integration Mapping Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Integration Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Collect Integration Requirements

    The Purpose

    Explain approach and value proposition.

    Review the common business drivers and how the organization is driving a need to optimize data integration.

    Understand Info-Tech’s approach to data integration.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Current integration architecture is understood.

    Priorities for tactical initiatives in the data architecture practice related to integration are identified.

    Target state for data integration is defined.

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss the current data integration environment and the pains that are felt by the business and IT.

    1.2 Determine what the problem statement and business case look like to kick-start a data integration improvement initiative.

    1.3 Understand data integration requirements from the business.

    Outputs

    Data Integration Requirements Gathering Tool

    2 Analyze Integration Requirements

    The Purpose

    Understand what the business requires from the integration solution.

    Identify the common technical requirements and how they relate to business requirements.

    Review the trends in data integration to take advantage of new technologies.

    Brainstorm how the data integration trends can fit within your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business-aligned requirements gathered for the integration solution.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand what the business requires from the integration solution.

    2.2 Identify the common technical requirements and how they relate to business requirements.

    Outputs

    Data Integration Requirements Gathering Tool

    Data Integration Trends Presentation

    3 Design the Data-Centric Integration Solution

    The Purpose

    Learn about the various integration patterns that support organizations’ data integration architecture.

    Determine the pattern that best fits within your environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improvement initiatives are defined.

    Improvement initiatives are evaluated and prioritized to develop an improvement strategy.

    A roadmap is defined to depict when and how to tackle the improvement initiatives.

    Activities

    3.1 Learn about the various integration patterns that support organizations’ data integration architecture.

    3.2 Determine the pattern that best fits within your environment.

    Outputs

    Integration Reference Architecture Patterns

    Data Integration POC Template

    Data Integration Mapping Tool

    Further reading

    Build a Data Integration Strategy

    Integrate your data or disintegrate your business.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Integrate your data or disintegrate your business.

    "Point-to-point integration is an evil that builds up overtime due to ongoing business changes and a lack of integration strategy. At the same time most businesses are demanding consistent, timely, and high-quality data to fuel business processes and decision making.

    A good recipe for successful data integration is to discover the common data elements to share across the business by establishing an integration platform and a canonical data model.

    Place yourself in one of our use cases and see how you fit into a common framework to simplify your problem and build a data-centric integration environment to eliminate your data silos."

    Rajesh Parab, Director, Research & Advisory Services

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • Data engineers feeling the pains of poor integration from inaccuracies and inefficiencies during the data integration lifecycle.
    • Business analysts communicating the need for improved integration of data.
    • Data architects looking to design and facilitate improvements in the holistic data environment.
    • Data architects putting high-level architectural design changes into action.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CIOs concerned with the costs, benefits, and the overall structure of their organization’s data flow.
    • Enterprise architects trying to understand how improved integration will affect overall organizational architecture.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand what integration is, and how it fits into your organization.
    • Identify opportunities for leveraging improved integration for data-driven insights.
    • Design a loosely coupled integration architecture that is flexible to changing needs.
    • Determine the needs of the business for integration and design solutions for the gaps that fit the requirements.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Get a handle on the current data situation and how data interacts within the organization.
    • Understand how data architecture affects operations within the enterprise.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • As organizations process more information at faster rates, there is increased pressure for faster and more efficient data integration.
    • Data integration is becoming more and more critical for downstream functions of data management and for business operations to be successful. Poor integration holds back these critical functions.

    Complication

    • Investments in integration can be a tough sell for the business, and it is difficult to get support for integration as a standalone project.
    • Evolving business models and uses of data are growing rapidly at rates that often exceed the investment in data management and integration tools. As a result, there is often a gap between data availability and the business’ latency demands.

    Resolution

    • Create a data-centric integration solution that supports the flow of data through the organization and meets the organization’s requirements for data accuracy, relevance, availability, and timeliness.
    • Build your data-centric integration practice with a firm foundation in governance and reference architecture; use best-fit reference architecture patterns and the related technology and resources to ensure that your process is scalable and sustainable.
    • The business’ uses of data are constantly changing and evolving, and as a result the integration processes that ensure data availability must be frequently reviewed and repositioned to continue to grow with the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Every IT project requires data integration.Any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.
    2. Integration problem solving needs to start with business activity. After understanding the business activity, move to application and system integration to drive optimal data integration activities.
    3. Integration initiatives need to be backed by requirements that depend on use cases. Info-Tech’s use cases will help identify organizational requirements and the ideal data-centric integration solution.

    Your data is the foundation of your organization’s knowledge and ability to make decisions

    Integrate the Data, Not the Applications

    Data is one of the most important assets in a modern organization. Contained within an organization’s data are the customers, the products, and the operational details that make an organization function. Every organization has data, and this data might serve the needs of the business today.

    However, the only constant in the world is change. Changes in addresses, amounts, product details, partners, and more occur at a rapid rate. If your data is isolated, it will quickly become stale. Getting up-to-date data to the right place at the right time is where data-centric integration comes in.

    "Data is the new oil." – Clive Humby, Chief Data Scientist Source: Medium, 2016

    The image shows two graphics. The top shows two sets of circles with an arrow pointing to the right between them: on the left, there is a large centre circle with the word APP in it, and smaller circles surrounding it that read DATA. On the right, the large circle reads DATA, and the smaller circles, APP. On the lower graphic, there are also two sets of circles, with an arrow pointing to the right between them. This time, the largest circle envelopes the smaller circles. The circle on the right has a larger circle in the centre that reads Apple Watch Heart Monitoring App, and smaller circles around it labelled with types of data. The circle on the right contains a larger circle in the centre that reads Heart Data, and the smaller circles are labelled with types of apps.

    Organizations are having trouble keeping up with the rapid increases in data growth and complexity

    To keep up with increasing business demands and profitability targets and decreasing cost targets, organizations are processing and exchanging more data than ever before.

    To get more value from their information, organizations are relying on more and more complex data sources. These diverse data sources have to be properly integrated to unlock the full potential of your data:

    The most difficult integration problems are caused by semantic heterogeneity (Database Research Technology Group, n.d.).

    80% of business decisions are made using unstructured data (Concept Searching, 2015).

    85% of businesses are struggling to implement the correct integration solution to accurately interpret their data (KPMG, 2014).

    Break Down Your Silos

    Integrating large volumes of data from the many varied sources in an organization has incredible potential to yield insights, but many organizations struggle with creating the right structure for that blending to take place, and data silos form.

    Data-centric integration capabilities can break down organizational silos. Once data silos are removed and all the information that is relevant to a given problem is available, problems with operational and transactional efficiencies can be solved, and value from business intelligence (BI) and analytics can be fully realized.

    Data-centric integration is the solution you need to bring data together to break down data silos

    On one hand…

    Data has massive potential to bring insight to an organization when combined and analyzed in creative ways.

    On the other hand…

    It is difficult to bring data together from different sources to generate insights and prevent stale data.

    How can these two ideas be reconciled?

    Answer: Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework summarizes an organization’s data environment at a conceptual level, and is used to design a common data-centric integration environment.

    Info-Tech’s Data Integration Onion Framework

    The image shows Info Tech's Data Integration Onion Framework. It is a circular graphic, with a series on concentric rings, each representing a category and containing specific examples of items within those categories.

    Poor integration will lead to problems felt by the business and IT

    The following are pains reported by the business due to poor integration:

    59% Of managers said they experience missing data every day due to poor distribution results in data sets that are valuable to their central work functions. (Experian, 2016)

    42% Reported accidentally using the wrong information, at least once a week. (Computerworld, 2017)

    37% Of the 85% of companies trying to be more data driven, only 37% achieved their goal. (Information Age, 2019)

    "I never guess. It is a capital mistake to theorize before one has data. Insensibly one begins to twist facts to suit theories, instead of theories to suit facts." – Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, Sherlock Holmes

    Poor integration can make IT less efficient as well:

    90% Of all company generated data is “dark.” Getting value out of dark data is not difficult or costly. (Deloitte Insights, 2017)

    5% As data sits in a database, up to 5% of customer data changes per month. (Data.com, 2016)

    "Most traditional machine learning techniques are not inherently efficient or scalable enough to handle the data. Machine learning needs to reinvent itself for big data processing primarily in pre-processing of data." – J. Qiu et al., ‎2016

    Understand the common challenges of integration to avoid the pains

    There are three types of challenges that organizations face when integrating data:

    1. Disconnect from the business

    Poor understanding of the integration problem and requirements lead to integrations being built that are not effective for quality data.

    50% of project rework is attributable to problems with requirements. (Info-Tech Research Group)

    45% of IT professionals admit to being “fuzzy” about the details of a project’s business objectives. (Blueprint Software Systems Inc., 2012)

    2. Lack of strategy

    90% Of organizations will lack an integration strategy through to 2018. (Virtual Logistics, 2017)

    Integrating data without a long-term plan is a recipe for point-to-point integration spaghettification:

    The image shows two columns of rectangles, each with the word Application Services. Between them are arrows, matching boxes in one column to the other. The lines of the arrows are curvy.

    3. Data complexity

    Data architects and other data professionals are increasingly expected to be able to connect data using whatever interface is provided, at any volume, and in any format – all without affecting the quality of the data.

    36% Of developers report problems integrating data due to different standards interpretations. (DZone, 2015)

    These challenges lead to organizations building a data architecture and integration environment that is tightly coupled.

    A loose coupling integration strategy helps mitigate the challenges and realize the benefits of well-connected data

    Loose Coupling

    Most organizations don’t have the foresight to design their architecture correctly the first time. In a perfect world, organizations would design their application and data architecture to be scalable, modular, and format-neutral – like building blocks.

    Benefits of a loosely coupled architecture:

    • Increased ability to support business needs by adapting easily to changes.
    • Added ability to incorporate new vendors and new technology due to increased flexibility.
    • Potential for automated, real-time integration.
    • Elimination of re-keying/manual entry of data.
    • Federation of data.

    Vs. Tight Coupling

    However, this is rarely the case. Most architectures are more like a brick wall – permanent, hard to add to and subtract from, and susceptible to weathering.

    Problems with a tightly coupled architecture:

    • Delays in combining data for analysis.
    • Manual/Suboptimal DI in the face of changing business needs.
    • Lack of federation.
    • Lack of flexibility.
    • Fragility of integrated platforms.
    • Limited ability to explore new functionalities.

    Master M&A Cybersecurity Due Diligence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}261|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance

    This research is designed to help organizations who are preparing for a merger or acquisition and need help with:

    • Understanding the information security risks associated with the acquisition or merger.
    • Avoiding the unwanted possibility of acquiring or merging with an organization that is already compromised by cyberattackers.
    • Identifying best practices for information security integration post merger.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The goal of M&A cybersecurity due diligence is to assess security risks and the potential for compromise. To succeed, you need to look deeper.

    Impact and Result

    • A repeatable methodology to systematically conduct cybersecurity due diligence.
    • A structured framework to rapidly assess risks, conduct risk valuation, and identify red flags.
    • Look deeper by leveraging compromise diagnostics to increase confidence that you are not acquiring a compromised entity.

    Master M&A Cybersecurity Due Diligence Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to master M&A cyber security due diligence, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this project.

    [infographic]

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}99|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    COVID-19 has created new risks to physical encounters among workers and customers. New biosecurity processes and ways to effectively enforce them – in the least intrusive way possible – are required to resume these activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    New biosecurity standards will be imposed on many industries, and the autonomous edge will be part of the solution to manage that new reality.

    Impact and Result

    There are some key considerations for businesses considering new biosecurity measures:

    1. If prevention, then ID-based access control
    2. If intervention, then alerts based on data
    3. If investigation, then contact tracing

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge Research & Tools

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge

    Understand how new biosecurity requirements could affect your business and why AI at the edge could be part of the solution.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}411|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $37,093 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Recent crises have increased executive awareness and internal pressure to create a business continuity plan (BCP).
    • Industry and government-driven regulations require evidence of sound business continuity practices.
    • Customers demand their vendors provide evidence of a workable BCP prior to signing a contract.
    • IT leaders, because of their cross-functional view and experience with incident management and DR, are often asked to lead BCP efforts.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • BCP requires input from multiple departments with different and sometimes conflicting objectives. There are typically few, if any, dedicated resources for BCP, so it can't be a full-time, resource-intensive project.
    • As an IT leader you have the skill set and organizational knowledge to lead a BCP project, but ultimately business leaders need to own the BCP – they know their processes, and therefore, their requirements to resume business operations better than anyone else.
    • The traditional approach to BCP is a massive project that most organizations can’t execute without hiring a consultant. To execute BCP in-house, carve up the task into manageable pieces as outlined in this blueprint.

    Impact and Result

    • Implement a structured and repeatable process that you apply to one business unit at a time to keep BCP planning efforts manageable.
    • Use the results of the pilot to identify gaps in your recovery plans and reduce overall continuity risk while continuing to assess specific risks as you repeat the process with additional business units.
    • Enable business leaders to own the BCP going forward. Develop a template that the rest of the organization can use.
    • Leverage BCP outcomes to refine IT DRP recovery objectives and achieve DRP-BCP alignment.

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a business continuity plan, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify BCP maturity and document process dependencies

    Assess current maturity, establish a team, and choose a pilot business unit. Identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives.

    • BCP Maturity Scorecard
    • BCP Pilot Project Charter Template
    • BCP Business Process Workflows Example (Visio)
    • BCP Business Process Workflows Example (PDF)

    2. Conduct a BIA to determine acceptable RTOs and RPOs

    Define an objective impact scoring scale, estimate the impact of downtime, and set recovery targets.

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    3. Document the recovery workflow and projects to close gaps

    Build a workflow of the current steps for business recovery. Identify gaps and risks to recovery. Brainstorm and prioritize solutions to address gaps and mitigate risks.

    • BCP Tabletop Planning Template (Visio)
    • BCP Tabletop Planning Template (PDF)
    • BCP Project Roadmap Tool
    • BCP Relocation Checklists

    4. Extend the results of the pilot BCP and implement governance

    Present pilot project results and next steps. Create BCMS teams. Update and maintain BCMS documentation.

    • BCP Pilot Results Presentation
    • BCP Summary
    • Business Continuity Teams and Roles Tool

    5. Appendix: Additional BCP tools and templates

    Use these tools and templates to assist in the creation of your BCP.

    • BCP Recovery Workflow Example (Visio)
    • BCP Recovery Workflow Example (PDF)
    • BCP Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • BCP Business Process Workarounds and Recovery Checklists
    • Business Continuity Management Policy
    • Business Unit BCP Prioritization Tool
    • Industry-Specific BIA Guidelines
    • BCP-DRP Maintenance Checklist
    • Develop a COVID-19 Pandemic Response Plan Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define BCP Scope, Objectives, and Stakeholders

    The Purpose

    Define BCP scope, objectives, and stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritize BCP efforts and level-set scope with key stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current BCP maturity.

    1.2 Identify key business processes to include in scope.

    1.3 Flowchart key business processes to identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives.

    Outputs

    BCP Maturity Scorecard: measure progress and identify gaps.

    Business process flowcharts: review, optimize, and allow for knowledge transfer of processes.

    Identify workarounds for common disruptions to day-to-day continuity.

    2 Define RTOs and RPOs Based on Your BIA

    The Purpose

    Define RTOs and RPOs based on your BIA.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set recovery targets based business impact, and illustrate the importance of BCP efforts via the impact of downtime.

    Activities

    2.1 Define an objective scoring scale to indicate different levels of impact.

    2.2 Estimate the impact of downtime.

    2.3 Determine acceptable RTO/RPO targets for business processes based on business impact.

    Outputs

    BCP Business Impact Analysis: objective scoring scale to assess cost, goodwill, compliance, and safety impacts.

    Apply the scoring scale to estimate the impact of downtime on business processes.

    Acceptable RTOs/RPOs to dictate recovery strategy.

    3 Create a Recovery Workflow

    The Purpose

    Create a recovery workflow.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an actionable, high-level, recovery workflow that can be adapted to a variety of different scenarios.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct a tabletop exercise to determine current recovery procedures.

    3.2 Identify and prioritize projects to close gaps and mitigate recovery risks.

    3.3 Evaluate options for command centers and alternate business locations (i.e. BC site).

    Outputs

    Recovery flow diagram – current and future state

    Identify gaps and recovery risks.

    Create a project roadmap to close gaps.

    Evaluate requirements for alternate business sites.

    4 Extend the Results of the Pilot BCP and Implement Governance

    The Purpose

    Extend the results of the pilot BCP and implement governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Outline the actions required for the rest of your BCMS, and the required effort to complete those actions, based on the results of the pilot.

    Activities

    4.1 Summarize the accomplishments and required next steps to create an overall BCP.

    4.2 Identify required BCM roles.

    4.3 Create a plan to update and maintain your overall BCP.

    Outputs

    Pilot BCP Executive Presentation

    Business Continuity Team Roles & Responsibilities

    3. Maintenance plan and BCP templates to complete the relevant documentation (BC Policy, BCP Action Items, Recovery Workflow, etc.)

    Further reading

    Develop a Business Continuity Plan

    Streamline the traditional approach to make BCP development manageable and repeatable.

    Analyst Perspective

    A BCP touches every aspect of your organization, making it potentially the most complex project you’ll take on. Streamline this effort or you won’t get far.

    None of us needs to look very far to find a reason to have an effective business continuity plan.

    From pandemics to natural disasters to supply chain disruptions to IT outages, there’s no shortage of events that can disrupt your complex and interconnected business processes. How in the world can anyone build a plan to address all these threats?

    Don’t try to boil the ocean. Use these tactics to streamline your BCP project and stay on track:

    • Focus on one business unit at a time. Keep the effort manageable, establish a repeatable process, and produce deliverables that provide a starting point for the rest of the organization.
    • Don’t start with an extensive risk analysis. It takes too long and at the end you’ll still need a plan to resume business operations following a disruption. Rather than trying to predict what could cause a disruption, focus on how to recover.
    • Keep your BCP documentation concise. Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams instead of traditional manuals.

    No one can predict every possible disruption, but by following the guidance in this blueprint, you can build a flexible continuity plan that allows you to withstand the threats your organization may face.

    Frank Trovato

    Research Director,
    IT Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Sharp

    Senior Research Analyst,
    IT Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Recent crises have increased executive awareness and internal pressure to create a BCP.
    • Industry- and government-driven regulations require evidence of sound business continuity practices.
    • Customers demand their vendors provide evidence of a workable BCP prior to signing a contract.

    IT leaders, because of their cross-functional view and experience with incident management and DR, are often asked to lead BCP efforts.

    Common Obstacles

    • IT managers asked to lead BCP efforts are dealing with processes and requirements beyond IT and outside of their control.
    • BCP requires input from multiple departments with different and sometimes conflicting objectives.
    • Typically there are few, if any, dedicated resources for BCP, so it can't be a full-time, resource-intensive project.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Focus on implementing a structured and repeatable process that can be applied to one business unit at a time to avoid BCP from becoming an overwhelming project.
    • Enable business leaders to own the BCP going forward by establishing a template that the rest of the organization can follow.
    • Leverage BCP outcomes to refine IT DRP recovery objectives and achieve DRP-BCP alignment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As an IT leader you have the skill set and organizational knowledge to lead a BCP project, but you must enable business leaders to own their department’s BCP practices and outputs. They know their processes and, therefore, their requirements to resume business operations better than anyone else.

    Use this research to create business unit BCPs and structure your overall BCP

    A business continuity plan (BCP) consists of separate but related sub-plans, as illustrated below. This blueprint enables you to:

    • Develop a BCP for a selected business unit (as a pilot project), and thereby establish a methodology that can be repeated for remaining business units.
    • Through the BCP process, clarify requirements for an IT disaster recovery plan (DRP). Refer to Info-Tech’s Disaster Recovery Planning workshop for instructions on how to create an IT DRP.
    • Implement ongoing business continuity management to govern BCP, DRP, and crisis management.

    Overall Business Continuity Plan

    IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    A plan to restore IT application and infrastructure services following a disruption.

    Info-Tech’s disaster recovery planning blueprint provides a methodology for creating the IT DRP. Leverage this blueprint to validate and provide inputs for your IT DRP.

    BCP for Each Business Unit

    A set of plans to resume business processes for each business unit. This includes:

    • Identifying business processes and dependencies.
    • Defining an acceptable recovery timeline based on a business impact analysis.
    • Creating a step-by-step recovery workflow.

    Crisis Management Plan

    A plan to manage a wide range of crises, from health and safety incidents to business disruptions to reputational damage.

    Info-Tech’s Implement Crisis Management Best Practices blueprint provides a framework for planning a response to any crisis, from health and safety incidents to reputational damage.

    IT leaders asked to develop a BCP should start with an IT Disaster Recovery Plan

    It’s a business continuity plan. Why should you start continuity planning with IT?

    1. IT services are a critical dependency for most business processes. Creating an IT DRP helps you mitigate a key risk to continuity quicker than it takes to complete your overall BCP, and you can then focus on other dependencies such as people, facilities, and suppliers.
    2. A BCP requires workarounds for IT failures. But it’s difficult to plan workarounds without a clear understanding of the potential IT downtime and data loss. Your DRP will answer those questions, and without a DRP, BCP discussions can get bogged down in IT discussions. Think of payroll as an example: if downtime might be 24 hours, the business might simply wait for recovery; if downtime might be a week, waiting it out is not an option.
    3. As an IT manager, you can develop an IT DRP primarily with resources within your control. That makes it an easier starting point and puts IT in a better position to shift responsibility for BCP to business leaders (where it should reside) since essentially the IT portion is done.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan today.

    Modernize the BCP

    If your BCP relies heavily on paper-based processes as workarounds, it’s time to update your plan.

    Back when transactions were recorded on paper and then keyed into the mainframe system later, it was easier to revert to deskside processes. There is very little in the way of paper-based processes anymore, and as a result, it is increasingly difficult to resume business processes without IT.

    Think about your own organization. What IT system(s) are absolutely critical to business operations? While you might be able to continue doing business without IT, this requires regular preparation and training. It’s likely a completely offline process and won’t be a viable workaround for long even if staff know how to do the work. If your data center and core systems are down, technology-enabled workarounds (such as collaboration via mobile technologies or cloud-based solutions) could help you weather the outage, and may be more flexible and adaptable for day-to-day work.

    The bottom line:

    Technology is a critical dependency for business processes. Consider the role IT systems play as process dependencies and as workarounds as part of continuity planning.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    The traditional approach to BCP takes too long and produces a plan that is difficult to use and maintain.

    The Problem: You need to create a BCP, but don’t know where to start.

    • BCP is being demanded more and more to comply with regulations, mitigate business risk, meet customer demands, and obtain insurance.
    • IT leaders are often asked to lead BCP.

    The Complication: A traditional BCP process takes longer to show value.

    • Traditional consultants don’t usually have an incentive to accelerate the process.
    • At the same time, self-directed projects with no defined process go months without producing useful deliverables.
    • The result is a dense manual that checks boxes but isn’t maintainable or usable in a crisis.

    A pie chart is separated into three segments, Internal Mandates 43%, Customer Demands 23%, and Regulatory Requirements 34%. The bottom of the image reads Source: Info-Tech Research Group.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to right-size and streamline the process.

    • Reduce required effort. Keep the work manageable and maintain momentum by focusing on one business unit at a time; allow that unit to own their BCP.
    • Prioritize your effort. Evaluate the current state of your BCP to identify the steps that are most in need of attention.
    • Get valuable results faster. Functional deliverables and insights from the first business unit’s BCP can be leveraged by the entire organization (e.g. communication, assessment, and BC site strategies).

    Expedite BCP development

    Info-Tech’s Approach to BCP:

    • Start with one critical business unit to manage scope, establish a repeatable process, and generate deliverables that become a template for remaining business units.
    • Resolve critical gaps as you identify them, generating early value and risk mitigation.
    • Create concise, practical documentation to support recovery.

    Embed training and awareness throughout the planning process.

    BCP for Business Unit A:

    Scope → Pilot BIA → Response Plan → Gap Analysis

    → Lessons Learned:

    • Leverage early results to establish a BCM framework.
    • Take action to resolve critical gaps as they are identified.
    • BCP for Business Units B through N.
    • Scope→BIA→Response Plan→Gap Analysis

    = Ongoing governance, testing, maintenance, improvement, awareness, and training.

    By comparison, a traditional BCP approach takes much longer to mitigate risk:

    • An extensive, upfront commitment of time and resources before defining incident response plans and mitigating risk.
    • A “big bang” approach that makes it difficult to predict the required resourcing and timelines for the project.

    Organizational Risk Assessment and Business Impact Analysis → Solution Design to Achieve Recovery Objectives → Create and Validate Response Plans

    Case Study

    Continuity Planning Supports COVID-19 Response

    Industry: Non-Profit
    Source: Info-Tech Advisory Services

    A charitable foundation for a major state university engaged Info-Tech to support the creation of their business continuity plan.

    With support from Info-Tech analysts and the tools in this blueprint, they worked with their business unit stakeholders to identify recovery objectives, confirm recovery capabilities and business process workarounds, and address gaps in their continuity plans.

    Results

    The outcome wasn’t a pandemic plan – it was a continuity plan that was applicable to pandemics. And it worked. Business processes were prioritized, gaps in work-from-home and business process workarounds had been identified and addressed, business leaders owned their plan and understood their role in it, and IT had clear requirements that they were able and ready to support.

    “The work you did here with us was beyond valuable! I wish I could actually explain how ready we really were for this…while not necessarily for a pandemic, we were ready to spring into action, set things up, the priorities were established, and most importantly some of the changes we’ve made over the past few years helped beyond words! The fact that the groups had talked about this previously almost made what we had to do easy.“ -- VP IT Infrastructure

    Download the BCP Case Study

    Project Overview: BCP

    Phases Phase 1: Identify BCP Maturity and Document Process Dependencies Phase 2: Conduct a BIA to Determine Acceptable RTOs and RPOs Phase 3: Document the Recovery Workflow and Projects to Close Gaps Phase 4: Extend the Results of the Pilot BCP and Implement Governance
    Steps 1.1 Assess current BCP maturity 2.1 Define an objective impact scoring scale 3.1 Determine current recovery procedures 4.1 Consolidate BCP pilot insights to support an overall BCP project plan
    1.2 Establish the pilot BCP team 2.2 Estimate the impact of downtime 3.2 Identify and prioritize projects to close gaps 4.2 Outline a business continuity management (BCM) program
    1.3 Identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives 2.3 Determine acceptable RTO/RPO targets 3.3 Evaluate BC site and command center options 4.3 Test and maintain your BCP
    Tools and Templates

    BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Results Presentation

    BCP Maturity Scorecard

    Tabletop Planning Template

    BCP Summary

    Pilot Project Charter

    Recovery Workflow Examples

    Business Continuity Teams and Roles

    Business Process Workflows Examples

    BCP Project Roadmap

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool: Conduct and document a business impact analysis using this document.

    BCP Recovery Workflows Example: Model your own recovery workflows on this example.

    BCP Project Roadmap: Use this tool to prioritize projects that can improve BCP capabilities and mitigate gaps and risks.

    BCP Relocation Checklists: Plan for and manage a site relocation – whether to an alternate site or work from home.

    Key deliverable:

    BCP Summary Document

    Summarize your organization's continuity capabilities and objectives in a 15-page, easy-to-consume template.

    This document consolidates data from the supporting documentation and tools to the right.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Summary Document

    Insight summary

    Focus less on risk, and more on recovery

    Avoid focusing on risk and probability analysis to drive your continuity strategy. You never know what might disrupt your business, so develop a flexible plan to enable business resumption regardless of the event.

    Small teams = good pilots

    Choose a small team for your BCP pilot. Small teams are better at trialing new techniques and finding new ways to think about problems.

    Calculate downtime impact

    Develop and apply a scoring scale to develop a more-objective assessment of downtime impact for the organization. This will help you prioritize recovery.

    It’s not no, but rather not now…

    You can’t address all the organization’s continuity challenges at once. Prioritize high value, low effort initiatives and create a long-term roadmap for the rest.

    Show Value Now

    Get to value quickly. Start with one business unit with continuity challenges, and a small, focused project team who can rapidly learn the methodology, identify continuity gaps, and define solutions that can also be leveraged by other departments right away.

    Lightweight Testing Exercises

    Outline recovery capabilities using lightweight, low risk tabletop planning exercises. Our research shows tabletop exercises increase confidence in recovery capabilities almost as much as live exercises, which carry much higher costs and risks.

    Blueprint benefits

    Demonstrate compliance with demands from regulators and customers

    • Develop a plan that satisfies auditors, customers, and insurance providers who demand proof of a continuity plan.
    • Demonstrate commitment to resilience by identifying gaps in current capabilities and projects to overcome those gaps.
    • Empower business users to develop their plans and perform regular maintenance to ensure plans don’t go stale.
    • Establish a culture of business readiness and resilience.

    Leverage your BCP to drive value (Business Benefits)

    • Enable flexible, mobile, and adaptable business operations that can overcome disruptions large and small. This includes making it easier to work remotely in response to pandemics or facility disruptions.
    • Clarify the risk of the status quo to business leaders so they can make informed decisions on where to invest in business continuity.
    • Demonstrate to customers your ability to overcome disruptions and continue to deliver your services.

    Info-Tech Advisory Services lead to Measurable Value

    Info-Tech members told us they save an average of $44,522 and 23 days by working with an Info-Tech analyst on BCP (source: client response data from Info-Tech's Measured Value Survey).

    Why do members report value from analyst engagement?

    1. Expert advice on your specific situation to overcome obstacles and speed bumps.
    2. Structure the project and stay on track.
    3. Review project deliverables and ensure the process is applied properly.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    Your Trusted Advisor is a call away.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between eight to twelve calls over the course of four to six months.

    Scoping

    Call 1: Scope requirements, objectives, and stakeholders. Identify a pilot BCP project.

    Business Processes and Dependencies

    Calls 2 - 4: Assess current BCP maturity. Create business process workflows, dependencies, alternates, and workarounds.

    Conduct a BIA

    Calls 5 – 7: Create an impact scoring scale and conduct a BIA. Identify acceptable RTO and RPO.

    Recovery Workflow

    Calls 8 – 9: Create a recovery workflow based on tabletop planning.

    Documentation & BCP Framework

    Call 10: Summarize the pilot results and plan next steps. Define roles and responsibilities. Make the case for a wider BCP program.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com | 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Identify BCP Maturity, Key Processes, and Dependencies Conduct a BIA to Determine Acceptable RTOs and RPOs Document the Current Recovery Workflow and Projects to Close Gaps Identify Remaining BCP Documentation and Next Steps Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Assess current BCP maturity.

    1.2 Identify key business processes to include in scope.

    1.3 Create a flowchart for key business processes to identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives.

    2.1 Define an objective scoring scale to indicate different levels of impact.

    2.2 Estimate the impact of a business disruption on cost, goodwill, compliance, and health & safety.

    2.3 Determine acceptable RTOs/RPOs for selected business processes based on business impact.

    3.1 Review tabletop planning – what is it, how is it done?

    3.2 Walk through a business disruption scenario to determine your current recovery timeline, RTO/RPO gaps, and risks to your ability to resume business operations.

    3.3 Identify and prioritize projects to close RTO/RPO gaps and mitigate recovery risks.

    4.1 Assign business continuity management (BCM) roles to govern BCP development and maintenance, as well as roles required to execute recovery.

    4.2 Identify remaining documentation required for the pilot business unit and how to leverage the results to repeat the methodology for remaining business units.

    4.3 Workshop review and wrap-up.

    5.1 Finalize deliverables for the workshop.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop outputs and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Baseline BCP maturity status
    2. Business process flowcharts
    3. Business process dependencies and alternatives recorded in the BIA tool
    1. Potential impact of a business disruption quantified for selected business processes.
    2. Business processes criticality and recovery priority defined
    3. Acceptable RTOs/RPOs defined based on business impact
    1. Current-state recovery workflow and timeline.
    2. RTO/RPO gaps identified.
    3. BCP project roadmap to close gaps
    1. BCM roles and responsibilities defined
    2. Workshop results deck; use this to communicate pilot results and next steps
    1. Finalized deliverables

    Phase 1

    Identify BCP Maturity and Document Process Dependencies

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Current BCP Maturity

    1.2 Establish the pilot BCP team

    1.3 Identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives

    Insights & Outcomes

    Define the scope for the BCP project: assess the current state of the plan, create a pilot project team and pilot project charter, and map the business processes that will be the focus of the pilot.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • BCP Executive Sponsor
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager & Process SMEs

    Step 1.1

    Assess current BCP Maturity

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Complete Info-Tech’s BCP Maturity Scorecard

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive Sponsor
    • BCP Coordinator

    You'll use the following tools & templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Establish current BCP maturity using Info-Tech’s ISO 22301-aligned BCP Maturity Scorecard.

    Evaluate the current state of your continuity plan

    Use Info-Tech’s Maturity Scorecard to structure and accelerate a BCP maturity assessment.

    Conduct a maturity assessment to:

    • Create a baseline metric so you can measure progress over time. This metric can also drive buy-in from senior management to invest time and effort into your BCP.
    • Understand the scope of work to create a complete business continuity plan.
    • Measure your progress and remaining gaps by updating your assessment once you’ve completed the activities in this blueprint.

    This blueprint primarily addresses the first four sections in the scorecard, which align with the creation of the core components of your business continuity plan.

    Info-Tech’s BCP Maturity Scorecard

    Info-Tech’s maturity scorecard is aligned with ISO 22301, the international standard that describes the key elements of a functioning business continuity management system or program – the overarching set of documents, practices, and controls that support the ongoing creation and maintenance of your BCP. A fully functional BCMS goes beyond business continuity planning to include crisis management, BCP testing, and documentation management.

    Audit tools tend to treat every bullet point in ISO 22301 as a separate requirement – which means there’s almost 400 lines to assess. Info-Tech’s BCP Maturity Scorecard has synthesized key requirements, minimizing repetition to create a high-level self-assessment aligned with the standard.

    A high score is a good indicator of likely success with an audit.

    Download Info-Tech's BCP Maturity Scorecard

    Tool: BCP Maturity Scorecard

    Assess your organization’s BCP capabilities.

    Use Info-Tech’s BCP Maturity Scorecard to:

    • Assess the overall completeness of your existing BCP.
    • Track and demonstrate progress towards completion as you work through successive planning iterations with additional business units.
    1. Download a copy of the BCP Maturity Scorecard. On tab 1, indicate the percent completeness for each item using a 0-10 scale (0 = 0% complete, 10 = 100% complete).
    2. If you anticipate improvements in a certain area, make note of it in the “Comments” column.
    3. Review a visual representation of your overall scores on tab 2.

    Download Info-Tech's BCP Maturity Scorecard

    "The fact that this aligns with ISO is huge." - Dr. Bernard Jones MBCI, CBCP

    Step 1.2

    Establish the pilot BCP team

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assign accountability, responsibility, and roles.
    • Develop a project charter.
    • Identify dependencies and alternates for those dependencies.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Executive Sponsor
    • BCP Coordinator

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Assign roles and responsibilities for the BCP pilot project. Set milestones and timelines for the pilot.

    Take a pilot approach for BCP

    Limit the scope of an initial BCP project to get to value faster.

    Pilot Project Goals

    • Establish a repeatable methodology that fits your organization and will accelerate BCP development, with tangible deliverables that provide a template for the rest of the business.
    • Identify high-priority business continuity gaps for the pilot business unit, many of which will also apply to the overall organization.
    • Identify initiatives to start addressing gaps now.
    • Enable business users to learn the BCP methodology and toolset so they can own and maintain their business unit BCPs.

    Accomplishments expected:

    • Define key business processes and process dependencies, and alternatives if dependencies are not available.
    • Classify key business processes by criticality for one business unit, using an objective impact scoring scale.
    • Set recovery objectives for these key processes.
    • Document workarounds and recovery plans.
    • Identify gaps in recovery plans and list action items to mitigate risks.
    • Develop a project plan to structure a larger continuity project.

    What not to expect from a pilot project:

    • A complete organizational BCP (the pilot is a strong starting point).
    • Implemented solutions to all BCP gaps (proposed solutions will need to be evaluated first).

    Structure IT’s role in continuity planning

    Clearly define IT’s role in the pilot BCP project to deliver a successful result that enables business units to own BCP in the future.

    Though IT is a critical dependency for most processes, IT shouldn’t own the business continuity plan. IT should be an internal BCP process consultant, and each business unit must own their plan.

    IT should be an internal BCP consultant.

    • IT departments interact with all business units, which gives IT leaders at least a high-level understanding of business operations across the organization.
    • IT leaders typically also have at least some knowledge of disaster recovery, which provides a foundation for tackling BCP.
    • By contrast, business leaders often have little or no experience with disaster recovery, and don’t have the same level of experience as IT when it comes to working with other business units.

    Why shouldn’t IT own the plan?

    • Business unit managers have the authority to direct resources in their department to participate in the BCP process.
    • Business users are the experts in their processes, and are in the best position to identify dependencies, downtime impacts, recovery objectives, and viable solutions (e.g., acceptable alternate sites or process workarounds).
    • Ultimately, business unit managers and executives must decide whether to mitigate, accept, or transfer risks.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A goal of the pilot is to seed success for further planning exercises. This is as much about demonstrating the value of continuity planning to the business unit, and enabling them to own it, as it is about implementing the methodology successfully.

    Create a RACI matrix for the pilot

    Assemble a small, focused team for the pilot project empowered to discover, report, and present possible solutions to continuity planning challenges in your organization.

    Outline roles and responsibilities on the pilot team using a “RACI” exercise. Remember, only one party can be ultimately accountable for the work being completed.

    Example Pilot BCP Project RACI

    Board Executive Team BCP Executive Sponsor BCP Team Leader BCP Coordinator Pilot Bus. Unit Manager Expert Bus. Unit Staff IT Manager
    Communicate BCP project status I I I A R C C I
    Assign resources to pilot BCP project A R C R C R
    Conduct continuity planning activities I A/R R R R R
    Create pilot BCP deliverables I A R R C C C
    Manage BCP documentation I A C R I C C
    Integrate results into BCMS I I A R R I C C
    Create overall BCP project plan I I A R C C

    R: Responsible for doing the work.

    A: Accountable to ensure the activity/work happens.

    C: Consulted prior to decision or action.

    I: Informed of the decision/action once it’s made.

    "Large teams excel at solving problems, but it is small teams that are more likely to come up with new problems for their more sizable counterparts to solve." – Wang & Evans, 2019

    Info-Tech Insight

    Small teams tend to be better at trialing new techniques and finding new ways to think about problems, both of which are needed for a BCP pilot project.

    Choose one business unit for the pilot

    Many organizations begin their BCP project with a target business unit in mind. It’s still worth establishing whether this business unit meets the criteria below.

    Good candidates for a pilot project:

    • Business processes are standardized and documented.
    • Management and staff are motivated to improve business continuity.
    • The business unit is sufficiently well resourced to spare time (e.g. a few hours a week) to dedicate to the BCP process.
    • If the business unit doesn’t meet these criteria, consider addressing shortfalls before the pilot (e.g. via stakeholder management or business process analysis) or selecting another unit.
    • Many of the decisions will ultimately require input and support from the business unit’s manager(s). It is critical that they are bought into and engaged with the project.
    • The leader of the first business unit will be a champion for BCP within the executive team.
    • Sometimes, there’s no clear place to start. If this is the case for you, consider using Info-Tech’s Business Unit BCP Prioritization Tool to determine the order in which business units should undergo BCP development.

    Create role descriptions for the pilot project

    Use these role descriptions and your RACI chart to define roles for the pilot.

    These short descriptions establish the functions, expectations, and responsibilities of each role at a more granular level.

    The Board and executives have an outsized influence on the speed at which the project can be completed. Ensure that communication with these stakeholders is clear and concise. Avoid involving them directly in activities and deliverable creation, unless it’s required by their role (e.g. as a business unit manager).

    Project Role Description
    Board & Executive Team
    • Will receive project status updates but are not directly involved in deliverable creation.
    Executive Sponsor
    • Liaison with the executive team.
    • Accountable to ensure the pilot BCP is completed.
    • Set project goals and approve resource allocation and funding.
    Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Drive the project and assign required resources.
    • Delegate day-to-day project management tasks to the BCP Coordinator.
    BCP Coordinator
    • Function as the project manager. This includes scheduling activities, coordinating resources, reporting progress, and managing deliverables.
    • Learn and apply the BCP methodology to achieve project goals.
    Expert Business Unit Staff
    • Pilot business unit process experts to assist with BCP development for that business unit.
    IT Manager
    • Provide guidance on IT capabilities and recovery options.
    Other Business Unit Managers
    • Consulted to validate or provide input to the business impact analysis and RTOs/RPOs.

    Identify a suitable BCP Coordinator

    A skilled and committed coordinator is critical to building an effective and durable BCP.

    • Coordinating the BC planning effort requires a perspective that’s informed by IT, but goes beyond IT.
    • For example, many IT professionals only see business processes where they intersect with IT. The BCP Coordinator needs to be able to ask the right questions to help the business units think through dependencies for critical processes.
    • Business analysts can thrive in this role, which requires someone effective at dissecting business processes, working with business users, identifying requirements, and managing large projects.

    Structure the role of the BCP Coordinator

    The BCP Coordinator works with the pilot business unit as well as remaining business units to provide continuity and resolve discrepancies as they come up between business units.

    Specifically, this role includes:

    • Project management tasks (e.g. scheduling, assigning tasks, coordinating resources, and reporting progress).
    • Learning the BCP methodology (through the pilot) so that this person can lead remaining business units through their BCP process. This enables the IT leader who had been assigned to guide BCP development to step back into a more appropriate consulting role.
    • Managing the BCP workflow.

    "We found it necessary to have the same person work with each business unit to pass along lessons learned and resolve contingency planning conflicts for common dependencies." – Michelle Swessel, PM and IT Bus. Analyst, Wisconsin Compensation Rating Bureau (WCRB)

    Template: Pilot Project Charter

    Formalize participants, roles, milestones, risks for the pilot project.

    Your charter should:

    1. Define project parameters, including drivers, objectives, deliverables, and scope.
    2. Identify the pilot business unit.
    3. Assign a BCP pilot team, including a BCP Coordinator, to execute the methodology.
    4. Define before-and-after metrics to enable the team to measure pilot success.
    5. Set achievable, realistic target dates for specific project milestones.
    6. Document risks, assumptions, and constraints.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Pilot Project Charter Template

    Step 1.3

    Identify business processes, dependencies, and alternatives

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify key business processes.
    • Document the process workflow.
    • Identify dependencies and alternates for those dependencies.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    You'll use the following tools & templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Documented workflows, process dependencies, and workarounds when dependencies are unavailable.

    Flowchart business processes

    Workflows help you visually identify process dependencies and optimization opportunities.

    • Business continuity planning is business process focused. You need to document business processes, dependencies, and downtime workarounds.
    • Process documentation is a basic BCP audit requirement, but it will also:
      • Keep discussions about business processes well-scoped and focused – by documenting the process, you also clarify for everyone what you’re actually talking about.
      • Remind participants of process dependencies and workarounds.
      • Make it easier to spot possible process breakdowns or improvements.
      • Capture your work, which can be used to create or update SOP documentation.
    • Use flowcharts to capture process workflows. Flowcharts are often quicker to create, take less time to update, and are ultimately more usable than a dense manual.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Process review often results in discovering informal processes, previously unknown workarounds or breakdowns, shadow IT, or process improvement opportunities.

    1.3.1 Prioritize pilot business unit processes

    Input

    • List of key business unit processes.

    Output

    • List of key business unit processes, now prioritized (at a high-level)

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (leads the discussion)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager

    30 minutes

    1. Create a list of all formal and informal business processes executed by the pilot business unit.
    2. Discuss the impact of process downtime, and do a quick assessment whether impact of downtime for each process would be high, medium, or low across each of these criteria:
      • Revenue or costs (e.g. supports sales, billing, or productivity)
      • Goodwill (e.g. affects internal or external reputation)
      • Compliance (e.g. affects legal or industry requirements)
      • Health or safety (e.g. affects employee/public health & safety)

    Note: A more in-depth analysis will be conducted later to refine priorities. The goal here is a high-level order of priority for the next steps in the planning methodology (identify business processes and dependencies).

    1. In the BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool, Processes and Dependencies tab, record the following:
      • The business processes in rough order of criticality.
      • For each process, provide a brief description that focuses on purpose and impact.
      • For each process, name a process owner (i.e. accountable for process completion – could be a manager or senior staff, not necessarily those executing the process).

    1.3.2 Review process flows & identify dependencies

    Input

    • List of key business unit processes (prioritized at a high level in Activity 1.3.1).
    • Business process flowcharts.

    Output

    • Business process flowcharts

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Microsoft Visio, or other flowcharting software
    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Download Info-Tech’s Business Process Workflows Example

    1.5 hours

    1. Use a whiteboard to flowchart process steps. Collaborate to clarify process steps and dependencies. If processes are not documented, use this as an opportunity to create standard operating procedures (SOPs) to drive consistency and process optimization, as described in the Info-Tech blueprint, Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind.
    2. Record the dependencies in tab 1 of the BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool in the appropriate columns:
      • People – Anyone involved in the process, from providing guidance to executing the steps.
      • IT Applications – Core IT services (e.g. ERP, CRM) required for this process.
      • End-user devices & equipment – End-user devices, locally-installed apps, IoT, etc.
      • Facility – Any special requirements beyond general office space.
      • Suppliers & Service Providers – Third-parties who support this process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Policies and procedures manuals, if they exist, are often out of date or incomplete. Use these as a starting point, but don’t stop there. Identify the go-to staff members who are well versed in how a process works.

    1.3.3 Document workarounds

    Input

    • Business process flowcharts.
    • List of process dependencies.

    Output

    • Workarounds and alternatives in the event dependencies aren’t available.

    Materials

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the activity)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)

    1.5 hours

    Identify alternatives to critical dependencies to help you create contingency plans.

    1. For each business process, identify known alternatives for each primary dependency. Ignore for the moment how long the workaround or alternate would be feasible.
    2. Record alternatives in the Business Continuity Business Impact Analysis Tool, Processes and Dependencies tab, Alternatives columns (a separate column for each category of dependency):
      • People – Can other staff execute the process steps? (Example: managers can step in if needed.)
      • IT Applications – Is there a manual workaround or other alternative while enterprise technology services are unavailable? (Example: database is down, but data is stored on physical forms.)
      • End-User Devices and Equipment – What alternatives exist to the usual end-user technologies, such as workstations and desk phones? (Example: some staff have cell phones.)
      • Facility Location and Requirements – Is there an alternate location where this work can be conducted? (Example: work from home, or from another building on the campus.)
      • Suppliers and External Services – Is there an alternative source for key suppliers or other external inputs? (Example: find alternate suppliers for key inputs.)
      • Additional Inputs or Requirements – What workarounds exist for additional artifacts that enable process steps (e.g. physical inventory records, control lists)? (Example: if hourly pay information is missing, run the same payroll as the previous run and reconcile once that information is available.)

    Phase 2

    Conduct a BIA to Determine Acceptable RTOs and RPOs

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an objective impact scoring scale

    2.2 Estimate the impact of downtime

    2.3 Determine acceptable RTO/RPO targets

    Insights & Outcomes

    Assess the impact of business process downtime using objective, customized impact scoring scales. Sort business processes by criticality and by assigning criticality tiers, recovery time, and recovery point objectives.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Business Process SMEs

    Step 2.1

    Define an objective scoring scale

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify impact criteria that are relevant to your business.
    • Create a scale that defines a range of impact for relevant criteria.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Define an impact scoring scale relevant to your business, which allows you to more-objectively assess the impact of business process downtime.

    Set appropriate recovery objectives

    Recovery time and recovery point objectives should align with business impact.

    The activities in Phase 2 will help you set appropriate, acceptable recovery objectives based on the business impact of process downtime.

    • The recovery time objective (RTO) and recovery point objective (RPO) are the recovery goals set for individual processes and dependencies to ensure your business unit meets its overall acceptable recovery timeline.

    For example:

    • An RTO of four hours means staff and other required resources must be available to support the business processes within four hours of an incident (e.g. relocate to an alternate worksite if necessary, access needed equipment, log-in to needed systems, get support for completing the process from alternate staff, etc.)
    • An RPO of four hours for a customer database means the most recent secondary copy of the data must never be more than four hours old – e.g. running a backup every four hours or less.

    Conduct a Business Impact Analysis (BIA)

    Create Impact Scoring Scales→Assess the impact of process downtime→Review overall impact of process downtime→Set Criticality Tiers→Set Recovery Time and Recovery Point Objectives

    Create financial impact scales

    Identify maximum cost and revenue impacts to build financial impact scales to measure the financial impact of process downtime.

    Work with the Business Unit Manager and Executive Sponsor to identify the maximum impact in each category to the entire business. Use a worst-case scenario to estimate the maximum for each scale. In the future, you can use this scoring scale to estimate the impact of downtime for other business units.

    • Loss of Revenue: Estimate the upper bound for this figure from the previous year, and divide that by the number of business days in the year. Note: Some organizations may choose to exclude revenue as a category where it won’t be lost (e.g. public-sector organizations).
    • Loss of Productivity: Proxy for lost workforce productivity using payroll numbers. Use the fully loaded payroll for the company, divided by the number of working days in the year as the maximum.
    • Increased Operating Costs: Isolate this to known additional costs resulting from a disruption. Does the interruption itself increase operating costs (e.g. if using timesheets for hourly/contract employees and that information is lost or unavailable, do you assume a full work week)?
    • Financial Penalties: If there are known financial penalties (e.g. due to failure to meet SLAs or other contractual obligations), include those values in your cost estimates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cost estimates are like hand grenades and horseshoes: you don’t need to be exact. It’s much easier to get input and validation from other stakeholders when you have estimates. Even weak estimates are far better than a blank sheet.

    Create goodwill, compliance, and safety impact scales

    Create a quantitative, more-objective scoring scale for goodwill, compliance and safety by following the guidance below.

    • Impact on Customers: By default, the customer impact scale is based on the percent of your total customer base impacted. You can also modify this scale to include severity of impact or alter it to identify the maximum number of customers that would be impacted.
    • Impact on Staff: Consider staff that are directly employed by the organization or its subsidiaries.
    • Impact on Business Partners: Which business partners would be affected by a business disruption?
    • Impact on Health & Safety: Consider the extent to which process downtime could increase the risk of the health & safety of staff, customers, and the general public. In addition, degradation of health & safety services should be noted.
    • Impact on Compliance: Set up the scale so that you can capture the impact of any critical regulatory requirements that might not be met if a particular process was down for 24 hours. Consider whether you expect to receive leeway or a grace period from the governance body that requires evidence of compliance.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use just the impact scales that are relevant to your organization.

    Tool: Impact Scoring Scales

    • Define 4-point scoring scales in the BCP business impact analysis tool for a more objective assessment than gut-feel rankings.
    • You don’t need to include every category, if they aren’t relevant to your organization.
    • Refine the scoring scale as needed through the pilot project.
    • Use the same scoring scale for impact analyses with additional business units in the future.

    An image depicting the Business Impact Analysis Tool. A note pointing to the Level of Impact and Direct Cost Impact Scales columns states: Add the maximum cost impacts across each of the four impact scales to the tool. The rest of the scale will auto-populate based on the criteria outlined in the “Level of Impact” column. A note pointing to the column headers states: Change the names of the column headers in this tab. The changes to column headers will populate across the rest of the tool. Indicate exclusions from the scale here. A note pointing to the Goodwill Impact Scales columns reads: Update the Goodwill impact scales. For example, perhaps a critical impact on customers could be defined as “a significant impact on all customers using the organization’s services in a 24-hour period.” A note pointing to the Compliance, Heath and Safety Impact Scales columns reads: Review the compliance and safety impact scales, and update as required.

    Step 2.2

    Estimate the impact of downtime

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Apply the scoring scale developed in step 2.1 to assess the impact of downtime for specific business processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Develop an objective view of the impact of downtime for key business processes.

    2.2.1 Estimate the impact of downtime

    1.5 hours

    Input

    • List of business processes, dependencies, and workarounds, all documented in the BIA tool.

    Output

    • Impact of downtime scores for key business unit processes.

    Materials

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the discussion)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    1. Print a copy of the Scoring Criteria tab to use as a reference, or have it open on another screen. In tab 3 of the BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool use the drop-down menu to assign a score of 0 to 4 based on levels of impact defined in the Scoring Criteria tab.
    2. Work horizontally across all categories for a single process. This will set a benchmark, familiarize you with the scoring system, and allow you to modify any scoring scales if needed. In general, begin with the process that you know to be most critical.
      • For example, if call center sales operations are down:
        • Loss of Revenue would be the portion of sales revenue generated through the call center. This might score a 2 or 3 depending on the proportion of sales generated through the call center.
        • The Impact on Customers might be a 1 or 2 depending on the extent that existing customers might be using the call center to purchase new products or services.
        • The Legal/Regulatory Compliance and Health or Safety Risk might be a 0.
    3. Next, work vertically across all processes within a single category. This will allow you to compare scores within the category as you create them.

    Tool: Impact Analysis

    • The goal of the exercise is to arrive at a defensible ranking of process criticality, based on the impact of downtime.
    • Make sure participants can see the scores you’re assigning during the exercise (e.g. by writing out the scores on a whiteboard, or displaying the tool on a projector or screen) and can reference the scoring scales tab to understand what the scores mean.
    • Take notes to record the rationale behind the impact scores. Consider assigning note-taking duties to one of the participants.

    An image of the Impact Analysis Tool. A note pointing to the column headings states: Any customized column headings from tab 2, Scoring Criteria are automatically ported to this tab. A note pointing to the Impact on Goodwill columns reads: Score each application across each scoring scale from 0 to 4. Be sure to refer back to the scoring scale defined in tab 2. Have the scoring scale printed out, written on a whiteboard, or displayed on a separate screen. A note pointing to the tool's dropdown boxes states: Score categories using the drop-down boxes. A note pointing to the centre columns reads: Ignore scoring for categories you choose to exclude. You can hide these columns to clean up the tool if needed.

    2.2.2 Sort processes into Criticality Tiers

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Processes, with assigned impact scores (financial impact, goodwill impact, compliance and safety impact).

    Output

    • Business processes sorted into criticality tiers, based on the impact of downtime.

    Materials

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the discussion)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    1. In general, consider the Total Impact on Goodwill, Compliance, and Safety first.
      • An effective tactic to start the process is to assign a tier 1 rating to all processes with a Goodwill, Compliance, and Safety score that’s 50% or more of the highest total score, tier 2 where scores are between 25% and 50%, and tier 3 where scores are below 25% (see table below for an example).
      • In step 2.3, you’ll align recovery time objectives with the criticality tiers. So, Tier 1 processes will target recovery before Tier 2 processes, and Tier 2 processes will target recovery before Tier 3 processes.
    2. Next, consider the Total Cost of Downtime.
    • The Total Cost is calculated by the tool based on the Scoring Criteria in tab 2 and the estimates in the BIA.
    • Consider whether the total cost impact justifies changing the criticality rating. “Smoke test” categorization with participants. Are there any surprises (processes more or less critical than expected)?
  • If the categorization doesn’t seem right, check that the scoring scale was applied consistently.
  • Example: Highest total Goodwill, Compliance, and Safety impact score is 18.

    Tier Score Range % of high score
    Tier 1 - Gold 9-18 50-100%
    Tier 2 - Silver 5 to 9 25-50%
    Tier 3 - Bronze 0 to 5 0-25%

    Step 2.3

    Determine acceptable RTO and RPO targets

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify acceptable Recovery Time Objectives (RTOs) and Recovery Point Objectives (RPOs) for business processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes and Insights

    Right-size recovery objectives based on business impact.

    Right-size recovery objectives

    Acceptable RTOs and RPOs must be right-sized to the impact of downtime.

    Rapid recovery typically requires more investment.

    The impact of downtime for most business processes tends to look something like the increasing impact curve in the image to the right.

    In the moments after a disruption, impact tends to be minimal. Imagine, for example, that your organization was suddenly unable to pay its suppliers (don’t worry about the reason for the disruption, for the moment). Chances are, this disruption wouldn’t affect many payees if it lasted just a few minutes, or even a few hours. But if the disruption were to continue for days, or weeks, the impact of downtime would start to spiral out of control.

    In general, we want to target recovery somewhere between the point where impact begins, and the point where impact is intolerable. We want to balance the impact of downtime with the investment required to make processes more resilient.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Account for hard copy files as well as electronic data. If that information is lost, is there a backup? BCP can be the driver to remove the last resistance to paperless processes, allowing IT to apply appropriate data protection.

    Set recovery time objectives and recovery point objectives in the “Debate Space”

    A graph with the X axis labelled as: Increasing downtime/data loss and the Y-axis labelled Increasing Impact. The graph shows a line rising as impact and downtime/data loss increase, with the lowest end of the line (on the left) labelled as minimal impact, and the highest point of the line (on the right) labelled maximum tolerance. The middle section of the line is labelled as the Debate Space, and a note reads: Acceptable RTO/RPO must be between Low Impact and Maximum Tolerance

    2.3.1 Define process-level recovery objectives

    1 hour

    Input

    • Processes, ranked by criticality.

    Output

    • Initial business-defined recovery objectives for each process.

    Materials

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the discussion)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    1. Review the “Debate Space” diagram (shown in previous section) with all participants.
    2. Ask business participants for each process: how much downtime is tolerable, acceptable, or appropriate? How much data loss is tolerable?
      • If participants aren’t yet comfortable setting recovery objectives, identify the point at which downtime and data loss first becomes noticeable and the point at which downtime and data loss becomes intolerable.
      • Choose an RTO and RPO for each process that falls within the range set by these two extremes.

    RTOs and RPOs are business-defined, impact-aligned objectives that you may not be able to achieve today. It may require significant investments of time and capital to enable the organization to meet RTO and RPO.

    2.3.2 Align RTOs within and across criticality tiers

    1 hour

    Input

    • Results from pilot BCP impact analysis.

    Output

    • Initial business-defined recovery objectives for each process.

    Materials

    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • Whiteboard/ flipchart

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • BCP Project Sponsor
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager (optional)

    Set a range for RTO for each Tier.

    1. Start with your least critical/Tier 3 processes. Use the filter in the “Criticality Rating” column in the Impact Analysis tab of the BIA tool to show only Tier 3 processes.
      • What range of RTOs did the group assign for processes in this Tier? Does the group agree that these targets are appropriate for these processes?
      • Record the range of RTOs on the whiteboard or flipchart.
    2. Next, look at Tier 2 processes. Use the same filter to show just Tier 2 processes.
      • Record the range of RTOs, confirm the range with the group, and ensure there’s no overlap with the Tier 3 range.
      • If the RTOs in one Tier overlap with RTOs in another, you’ll need to adjust RTOs or move processes between Tiers (if the impact analysis justifies it).
    Tier RTO
    Tier 1 4 hrs- 24 hrs
    Tier 2 24 hrs - 72 hrs
    Tier 3 72 hrs - 120 hrs

    Phase 3

    Document the Recovery Workflow and Projects to Close Gaps

    3.1 Determine current recovery procedures

    3.2 Identify and prioritize projects to close gaps

    3.3 Evaluate business continuity site and command center options

    Insights & Outcomes

    Outline business recovery processes. Highlight gaps and risks that could hinder business recovery. Brainstorm ideas to address gaps and risks. Review alternate site and business relocation options.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Business Process SMEs

    Step 3.1

    Determine current recovery procedures

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create a step-by-step, high-level recovery workflow.
    • Highlight gaps and risks in the recovery workflow.
    • Test the workflow against multiple scenarios.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Crisis Management Team
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Establish steps required for business recovery and current recovery timelines.

    Identify risks & gaps that could delay or obstruct an effective recovery.

    Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to draft business recovery plans

    Tabletop exercises are the most effective way to test and increase business confidence in business recovery capabilities.

    Why is tabletop planning so effective?

    • It enables you play out a wider range of scenarios than technology-based testing (e.g. full-scale, parallel) due to cost and complexity factors.
    • It is non-intrusive, so it can be executed more frequently than other testing methodologies.
    • It provides a thorough test of your recovery workflow since the exercise is, essentially, paper-based.
    • After you have a BCP in place, this exercise can continue to be a valuable testing exercise for BCP to capture changes in your recovery process.

    A graph titled: Tabletop planning had the greatest impact on respondent confidence in meeting recovery objectives. The graph shows that the relative importance of Tabletop Planning is 57%, compared to 33% for Unit Testing, 3% for Simulation Testing, 6% for Parallel Testing, and 2% for Full-Scale Testing. The source for the graph is Info-Tech Research Group.

    Step 2 - 2 hours
    Establish command center.

    Step 2: Risks

    • Command center is just 15 miles away from primary site.

    Step 2: Gaps

    • Confirm what’s required to set up the command center.
    • Who has access to the EOC?
    • Does the center have sufficient bandwidth, workstations, phones, telephone lines?

    3.1.1 Choose a scenario for your first tabletop exercise

    30 minutes

    Input

    • List of past incidents.
    • Risks to business continuity that are of high concern.

    Output

    • Scenario for the tabletop exercise.

    Materials

    • N/A

    Participant

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the exercise)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot business unit manager

    At the business unit level, the goal is to define a plan to resume business processes after an incident.

    A good scenario is one that helps the group focus on the goal of tabletop planning – to discuss and document the steps required to recover business processes. We suggest choosing a scenario for your first exercise that:

    • Disrupts many process dependencies (i.e. facilities, staff, IT services, suppliers).
    • Does not result in major property damage, harm, or loss of life. Business resumption is the focus of this exercise, not emergency response.
    • Has happened in the past, or is of concern to the business.

    An example: a gas leak at company HQ that requires the area to be cordoned off and power to be shut down. The business must resume processes from another location without access to materials, equipment, or IT services at the primary location.

    A plan that satisfies the gas leak scenario should meet the needs of other scenarios that affect your normal workspace. Then use BCP testing to validate that the plan meets a wider range of incidents.

    3.1.2 Define the BCP activation process

    1 hour

    Input

    • Any existing crisis management, incident response or emergency response plans.
    • BC Scenario.

    Output

    • High level incident notification, assessment, and declaration workflow.

    Materials

    • Cue cards, sticky notes, whiteboard and markers, or Visio template.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Crisis Management Team (if one exists)
    • Business Process SMEs
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager

    Answer the questions below to structure your notification, assessment, and BCP activation procedures.

    Notification

    How will you be notified of a disaster event? How will this be escalated to leadership? How will the team responsible for making decisions coordinate (if they can’t meet on-site)? What emergency response plans are in place to protect health and safety? What additional steps are involved if there’s a risk to health and safety?

    Assessment

    Who’s in charge of the initial assessment? Who may need to be involved in the assessment? Who will coordinate if multiple teams are required to investigate and assess the situation? Who needs to review the results of the assessment, and how will the results of the assessment be communicated (e.g. phone bridge, written memo)? What happens if your primary mode of communication is unavailable (e.g. phone service is down)?

    Declaration

    Who is responsible today for declaring a disaster and activating business continuity plans? What are the organization’s criteria for activating continuity plans, and how will BCP activation be communicated? Establish a crisis management team to guide the organization through a wide range of crises by Implementing Crisis Management Best Practices.

    3.1.3 Document the business recovery workflow

    1 hour

    Input

    • Pilot BIA.
    • Any existing crisis management, incident response, or emergency response plans.
    • BC Scenario

    Output

    • Outline of your BCP declaration and business recovery plan.

    Materials

    • Cue cards, sticky notes, whiteboard and markers, or Visio template.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the exercise)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager

    Do the following:

    1. Create separate flows for facility, IT, and staff disruptions. Include additional workflows as needed.
      • We suggest you outline the recovery process at least to the point where business processes are restored to a minimum viable functional level.
    2. On white cue cards:
      1. Record the step.
      2. Indicate the task owner.
      3. Estimate how long the step will take.
    3. On yellow cue cards, document gaps in people, process, and technology requirements to complete the step.
    4. On red cue cards, indicate risks (e.g. no backup person for a key staff member).

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Tabletop planning is most effective when you keep it simple.

    • Be focused; stay on task and on time.
    • Revisit each step and record risks and mitigation strategies.
    • Discuss each step from start to finish.
    • Revise the plan with key task owners.
    • Don’t get weighed down by tools.
    • Simple tools, like cue cards or whiteboards, can be very effective.

    Tool: BCP Recovery Workflow

    Document the steps you identified in the tabletop to create your draft recovery workflow.

    Why use a flowchart?

    • Flowcharts provide an at-a-glance view, are ideal for crisis scenarios where pressure is high and effective, and where timely communication is necessary.
    • For experienced managers and staff, a high-level reminder of process flows or key steps is sufficient.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation (which could include checklists, vendor documentation/contracts, other flowcharts, etc.)

    Create one recovery workflow for all scenarios.

    Traditional planning calls for separate plans for different “what-if” scenarios. This is challenging not just because it’s a lot more documentation – and maintenance – but because it’s impossible to predict every possible incident. Use the template, aligned to recovery of process dependencies, to create one recovery workflow for each business unit that can be used in and tested against different scenarios.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Recovery Workflow Example

    "We use flowcharts for our declaration procedures. Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management." – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

    "Very few business interruptions are actually major disasters. It’s usually a power outage or hardware failure, so I ensure my plans address ‘minor’ incidents as well as major disasters."- BCP Consultant

    3.1.4 Document achievable recovery metrics (RTA/RPA)

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Pilot BCP BIA.
    • Draft recovery workflow.

    Output

    • RTA and RPA for each business process.

    Materials

    • Pilot BCP BIA.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the exercise)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager

    Add the following data to your copy of the BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    1. Estimate the recovery time achievable (RTA) for each process based on the required time for the process to be restored to a minimum acceptable functional level. Review your recovery workflow to identify this timeline. For example, if the full process from notification, assessment, and declaration to recovery and relocation would take a full day, set the RTA to 24 hours.
    2. Estimate the recovery point achievable (RPA) for each process based on the maximum amount of data that could be lost. For example, if data on a particular system is backed up offsite once per day, and the onsite system was destroyed just before that backup began, the entire day’s data could be lost and the achievable RPO is 24 hours. Note: Enter a value of 9999 to indicate that data is unrecoverable.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Operating at a minimum acceptable functional level may not be feasible for more than a few days or weeks. Develop plans for immediate continuity first, then develop further plans for long-term continuity processes as required. Recognize that for longer term outages, you will evolve your plans in the crisis to meet the needs of the situation.

    3.1.5 Test the workflow of other scenarios

    1 hour

    Input

    • Draft recovery workflow.

    Output

    • Updated draft recovery workflow.

    Materials

    • Draft recovery workflow.
    • Projector or screen.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the exercise)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager

    Work from and update the soft copy of your recovery workflow.

    1. Would any steps change if the scenario changes? If yes, capture the different flow with a decision diamond. See the example Recovery Workflow for a workflow that uses decision diamonds. Identify any new gaps or risks you encounter with red and yellow cards.
    2. Make sure the decision diamonds are as generalized as possible. For example, instead of creating a separate response plan for each scenario that would require you to relocate from your existing building, create one response plan for relocation and one response plan for remaining in place.
    3. See the next section for some examples of different types of scenarios that you may include in your recovery workflow.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Remember that health and safety risks must be dealt with first in a crisis. The business unit recovery workflow will focus on restoring business operations after employees are no longer at risk (e.g. the risk has been resolved or employees have been safely relocated). See Implement Crisis Management Best Practices for ideas on how to respond to and assess a wide range of crises.

    Not all scenarios will have full continuity plans

    Risk management is a business decision. Business continuity planning can help decision makers understand and decide on whether to accept or mitigate high impact, low probability risks.

    For some organizations, it’s not practical or possible to invest in the redundancy that would be necessary to recover in a timely manner from certain major events.

    Leverage existing risk management practices to identify key high impact events that could present major business continuity challenges that could cause catastrophic disruptions to facility, IT, staffing, suppliers, or equipment. If you don’t have a risk register, review the scenarios on the next slide and brainstorm risks with the working group.

    Work through tabletop planning to identify how you might work through an event like this, at a high level. In step 3.2, you can estimate the effort, cost, and benefit for different ideas that can help mitigate the damage to the business to help decision makers choose between investment in mitigation or accepting the risk.

    Document any scenarios that you identify as outside the scope of your continuity plans in the “Scope” section of your BCP Summary document.

    For example:

    A single location manufacturing company is creating a BCP.

    The factory is large and contains expensive equipment; it’s not possible to build a second factory for redundancy. If the factory is destroyed, operations can’t be resumed until the factory is rebuilt. In this case, the BCP outlines how to conduct an orderly business shutdown while the factory is rebuilt.

    Contingency planning to resume factory operations after less destructive events, as well as a BCP for corporate services, is still practical and necessary.

    Considerations for other BCP scenarios

    Scenario Type Considerations
    Local hazard (gas leak, chemical leak, criminal incident, etc.)
    • Systems might be accessible remotely, but hands-on maintenance will be required eventually. “Work from home” won’t be a long-term solution.
    • An alternate site is required for service continuity. Can be within normal commuting distance.
    Equipment/building damage (fire, roof collapse, etc.)
    • Equipment will need repair or replacement (vendor involvement).
    • An alternate site is required for service continuity. Can be nearby.
    Regional natural disasters
    • Utilities may be affected (power, running water, etc.).
    • Expect staff to take care of their families first before work.
    • A geographically distant alternate site is required for service continuity.
    Supplier failure (IT provider outage, disaster at supplier, etc.)
    • Service-level agreements are important to establish recovery timelines. Review contracts and master services agreements.
    Staff (lottery win, work stoppage, pandemic/quarantine)
    • Staff are suddenly unavailable. Expect that no warm handoff to alternates is possible and that time to ramp up on the process is accounted for.
    • In a pandemic scenario, work from home, remote toolsets, and digital/contactless workflows become critical.

    Step 3.2

    Identify and prioritize projects to close gaps

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Brainstorm solutions to identified gaps and risks.
    • Prioritize projects and action items to close gaps and risks.
    • Assess the impact of proposed projects on the recovery workflow.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Identify and prioritize projects and action items that can improve business continuity capabilities.

    3.2.1 Brainstorm solutions to address risks and gaps

    1 hour

    Input

    • Draft recovery workflow.
    • Known continuity risks and gaps.

    Output

    • Ideas for action items and projects to improve business continuity.

    Materials

    • Flipchart

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator (facilitates the exercise)
    • Business Process Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    1. Review each of the risk and gap cards from the tabletop exercise.
    2. As a group, brainstorm ideas to address gaps, mitigate risks, and improve resiliency. Write the list of ideas on a whiteboard or flip chart paper. The solutions can range from quick-wins and action items to major capital investments. The following slides can help you seed ideas to support brainstorming and idea generation.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Try to avoid debates about feasibility at this point. The goal is to get ideas on the board.

    When you’re brainstorming solutions to problems, don’t stop with the first idea, even if the solution seems obvious. The first idea isn’t always the best or only solution – other ideas can expand on it and improve it.

    Step 4: No formal process to declare a disaster and invoke business continuity.

    Step 7: Alternate site could be affected by the same regional event as the main office.

    Step 12: Need to confirm supplier service-level agreements (SLAs).

    1. Continue to create BCP documentation.
    2. Identify a third location for regional disasters.
    3. Contact suppliers to confirm SLAs and validate alignment with RTOs/RPOs.
    4. Add BCP requirements collection to service procurement process?

    Discuss your remote work capabilities

    With COVID-19, most organizations have experience with mass work-from-home.

    Review the following case studies. Do they reflect your experience during the COVID-19 pandemic?

    Unacceptable risk

    • A small insurance company provided laptops to staff so they could work remotely.
    • Complication: Cheque and print stock is a dependency and no plan was made to store check stock offsite in a secure fashion.

    Key dependencies missing

    • A local government provided laptops to key staff so they could work remotely.
    • Complication: The organization didn’t currently own enough Citrix licenses for every user to be online concurrently.

    Unable to serve customers

    • The attestation and land services department of a local government agency provided staff with remote access to key apps.
    • Complication: Their most critical business processes were designed to be in-person – they had no plan to execute these processes from home.

    Consider where your own work-from-home plans fell short.

    • Were your collaboration and communication solutions too difficult for users to use effectively?
    • Did legacy infrastructure affect performance or limit capabilities? Were security concerns appropriately addressed?
    • What challenges did IT face supporting business users on break-fix and new requests?
    • Were there logistical needs (shipping/receiving, etc.) that weren’t met?
    • Develop an updated plan to support work-from-home using Info-Tech’s BCP Relocation Checklists and Home Office Survey template, and integrate these into your overall BCP documentation. Stakeholders can easily appreciate the value of this plan since it’s relevant to recent experience.

    Identify opportunities to improve continuity plans

    What gaps in your continuity response could be addressed with better planning?

    People

    • Alternates are not identified
    • Roles in a disaster are not formalized
    • No internal/external crisis comm. strategy

    Site & Facilities

    • No alternate place of business or command center identified
    • No formal planning or exercises to test alternate site viability

    • Identify a viable secondary site and/or work-from-home plan, and develop a schedule for testing activities. Review in Step 3.3 of the Develop a Business Continuity Plan blueprint.

    External Services & Suppliers

    • Contingency plans for a disruption not planned or formalized
    • No formal review of service-level agreements (SLAs)

    • Contact key suppliers and vendors to establish SLAs, and ensure they meet requirements.
    • Review supplier continuity plans.

    Technology & Physical Assets

    • No secondary site or redundancy for critical IT systems
    • No documented end-to-end IT DR plan

    Tool: BCP Project Roadmap

    Prioritize and visualize BCP projects to present options to decision makers.

    Not all BCP projects can be tackled at once. Enable decision makers to defer, rather than outright reject, projects that aren’t feasible at this time.

    1. Configure the tool in Tab 1. Setup. Adjust criteria and definitions for criteria. Note that shaded columns are required for reporting purposes and can’t be modified.
    2. Add projects and action items in Tab 2. Data Entry. Fields highlighted in red are all required for the dashboard to populate. All other fields are optional but will provide opportunities to track more detailed data on project ideas.
    3. To generate the dashboard in Tab 3. Roadmap, open the Data ribbon and under Queries and Connections click Refresh All. You can now use the slicers on the right of the sheet.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Project Roadmap Tool

    Demonstrate BCP project impacts

    Illustrate the benefits of proposed projects.

    1. Review your recovery workflow.
    2. Make updates to a second copy of the high-level outline to illustrate how the business response to a disaster scenario will change once proposed projects are complete.
    • Remove steps that have been made unnecessary.
    • Remove any risks or gaps that have been mitigated or addressed.
    • Verify that proposed projects close gaps between acceptable and achievable recovery capabilities in the BIA tool.
  • The visual impact of a shorter, less-risky recovery workflow can help communicate the benefits of proposed projects to decision makers.
  • Step 3.3

    Evaluate business continuity site and command center options

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Take a deep dive on the requirements for working from an alternate location.
    • Assess different options for an alternate location.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • Expert Business Unit Staff

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Identify requirements for an alternate business site.

    Tool: Relocation Checklists

    An alternate site could be another company building, a dedicated emergency operations center, or work-from-home. Use this tool to guide and prepare for any relocation exercise.

    • Coordinate your response with the pre-populated checklists in Tabs 1 & 2, identify who’s responsible for items on the checklists, and update your recovery workflows to reflect new steps. When reviewing the checklist, consider what can be done to prepare ahead of a crisis.
      • For example, you may wish to create crisis communication templates to streamline crisis communications during a disaster.
    • Calculate the effort required to provision equipment for relocated users in Tabs 3 & 4.
    • Evaluate your options for alternate sites with the requirements matrix in Tab 5. Use your evaluation to identify how the organization could address shortcomings of viable options either ahead of time or at the time of an incident.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Relocation Checklists

    Create a checklist of requirements for an alternate site

    Leverage the roll-up view, in tab 3, of dependencies required to create a list of requirements for an alternate site in tab 4.

    1. The table on Tab 5 of the relocation checklists is pre-populated with some common requirements. Modify or replace requirements to suit your needs for an alternate business/office site. Be sure to consider distance, transportation, needed services, accessibility, IT infrastructure, security, and seating capacity at a minimum.
    2. Don’t assume. Verify. Confirm anything that requires permissions from the site owner. What network providers have a presence in the building? Can you access the site 24/7 and conduct training exercises? What facilities and services are available? Are you guaranteed the space if needed?

    "There are horror stories about organizations that assumed things about their alternate site that they later found out they weren’t true in practice." – Dr. Bernard Jones, MBCI CBCP

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you choose a shared location as a BCP site, a regional disaster may put you in competition with other tenants for space.

    Identify a command center

    For command center and alternate worksite selection, remember that most incidents are local and short term. Identify an onsite and an offsite command center.

    1. For events where the building is not compromised, identify an onsite location, ideally with remote conferencing capabilities and planning and collaboration tools (projectors, whiteboards, flipcharts). The onsite location can also be used for BCM and crisis management meetings. Remember, most business continuity events are not regional or massively destructive.
    2. For the offsite command center, select a location that is sufficiently far away from your normal business location to maintain separation from local incidents while minimizing commute time. However, consider a geographically distant option (e.g. more than 50 miles away) identified for those scenarios where it is a regional disaster, or plan to leverage online tools to create a virtual command center (see the Insight box below).
    3. The first members of the Emergency Response Team to be notified of the incident will determine which location to use or whether a third alternative is required.

    Info-Tech Insight

    For many organizations, a dedicated command center (TVs on the wall, maps and charts in filing cabinets) isn’t necessary. A conference bridge and collaboration tools allowing everyone to work remotely can be an acceptable offsite command center as long as digital options can meet your command center requirements.

    Create a plan for a return to normal

    Operating in continuity mode for an extended period of time tends to result in higher costs and reduced business capabilities. It’s important to restore normal operations as soon as possible.

    Advance planning can minimize risks and delays in returning to normal operations.

    Leverage the methodology and tools in this blueprint to define your return to normal (repatriation) procedures:

    1. Repeat the tabletop planning exercise to determine the repatriation steps and potential gaps. How will you return to the primary site from your alternate site? Does data need to be re-entered into core systems if IT services are down? Do you need to transfer job duties back to primary staff?
    2. What needs to be done to address the gaps in the return to normal workflow? Are there projects or action items that could make return to normal easier?

    For more on supporting a business move back to the office from the IT perspective, see Responsibly Resume IT Operations in the Office

    Potential business impacts of ongoing operations at a failover site

    • The cost of leasing alternate business worksites.
    • Inability to deliver on strategic initiatives while in emergency/interim operations mode, resulting in lost business opportunities.
    • A growing backlog of work that falls outside of emergency operations mode.
    • Travel and accommodation costs if the alternate site is geographically remote.
    • Additional vendor licensing and contract costs.

    Phase 4

    Extend the Results of the Pilot BCP and Implement Governance

    Phase 4

    4.1 Consolidate BCP pilot insights to support an overall BCP project plan

    4.2 Outline a business continuity management (BCM) program

    4.3 Test and maintain your BCP

    Insights & Outcomes

    Summarize and consolidate your initial insights and documentation. Create a project plan for overall BCP. Identify teams, responsibilities, and accountabilities, and assign documentation ownership. Integrate BCP findings in DR and crisis management practices. Set guidelines for testing, plan maintenance, training, and awareness.

    Participants

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • BCP Executive Sponsor

    Step 4.1

    Consolidate BCP pilot insights to support an overall BCP project plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Summarize and consolidate outputs and key insights from the BCP pilot.
    • Identify outputs from the pilot that can be re-used for the overall BCP.
    • Create a project charter for an overall BCP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Pilot Business Unit Manager
    • BCP Executive Sponsor

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Present results from the pilot BCP, and outline how you’ll use the pilot process with other business units to create an overall continuity program.

    Structure the overall BCP program.

    Template: BCP Pilot Results Presentation

    Highlight key findings from the BCP pilot to make the case for next steps.

    • Highlight critical gaps or risks identified, any potential process improvements, and progress made toward improving overall BCP maturity through the pilot project. Summarize the benefits of the pilot project for an executive audience.
    • Review process recovery objectives (RTO/RPO). Provide an overview of recovery capabilities (RTA/RPA). Highlight any significant gaps between objectives and capabilities.
    • Propose next steps, including an overall BCP project and program, and projects and action items to remediate gaps and risks.
    • Develop a project plan to estimate resource requirements for an overall BCP project prior to delivering this presentation. Quantifying required time and resources is a key outcome as it enables the remaining business units to properly scope and resource their BCP development activities and can help managers overcome the fear of the unknown.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Pilot Results Presentation

    Tool: BCP Summary

    Sum up information from completed BCP documents to create a high-level BCP overview for auditors and executives.

    The BCP Summary document is the capstone to business unit continuity planning exercises. It consolidates your findings in a short overview of your business continuity requirements, capabilities, and maintenance procedures.

    Info-Tech recommends embedding hyperlinks within the Summary to the rest of your BCP documentation to allow the reader to drill down further as needed. Leverage the following documents:

    • Business Impact Analysis
    • BCP Recovery Workflows
    • Business Process Workflows
    • BCP Project Roadmap
    • BCP Relocation Checklists
    • Business Continuity Policy

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Summary Document

    Reuse templates for additional exercises

    The same methodology described in this blueprint can be repeated for each business unit. Also, many of the artifacts from the BCP pilot can be reused or built upon to give the remaining business units a head start. For example:

    • BCP Pilot Project Charter Template. Make a copy to use as a base for the next business unit’s BCP project charter, and update the stakeholders/roles and milestone dates. The rest of the content can remain the same in most cases.
    • BCP Reference Workbook. This tool contains information common to all business units and can be updated as needed.
    • BCP Business Impact Analysis Tool. You may need to start a separate copy for each business unit to allow enough space to capture all business processes. However, use the same scoring scale to drive consistent assessments. In addition, the scoring completed by the pilot business unit provides an example and benchmark for assessing other business processes.
    • BCP Recovery Workflow. The notification, assessment, and declaration steps can be standardized so remaining business units can focus primarily on recovery after a disaster is declared. Similarly, many of the steps related to alternate sites and IT workarounds will also apply to other business units.
    • BCP Project Roadmap Tool. Many of the projects identified by the pilot business unit will also apply to other business units – update the list as needed.
    • The Business Unit BCP Prioritization Tool, BCP Executive Presentation, and Business Continuity Policy Template do not need to be updated for each business unit.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    You may need to create some artifacts that are site specific. For example, relocation plans or emergency plans may not be reusable from one site to another. Use your judgement to reuse as much of the templates as you can – similar templates simplify audit, oversight, and plan management.

    Create an Overall BCP Project Charter

    Modify the pilot project charter to encompass the larger BCP project.

    Adjust the pilot charter to answer the following questions:

    • How much time and effort should the rest of the project take, based on findings from the pilot? When do you expect to meet certain milestones? What outputs and outcomes are expected?
    • In what order should additional business units complete their BCP? Who needs to be involved?
    • What projects to address continuity gaps were identified during the pilot? What investments will likely be required?
    • What additional documentation is required? This section and the appendix include templates to document your BCM Policy, Teams & Contacts, your notification procedures, and more.
    • How does this integrate with the other areas of business resilience and continuity (IT disaster recovery planning and crisis management planning)?
    • What additional activities, such as testing, are required?

    Prioritize business units for further BCP activities.

    As with the pilot, choose a business unit, or business units, where BCP will have the greatest impact and where further BCP activities will have the greatest likelihood of success. Prioritize business units that are critical to many areas of the business to get key results sooner.

    Work with one business unit at a time if:

    • Required resources from the business unit are available to focus on BCP full-time over a short period (one to two weeks).
    • More hands-on guidance (less delegation) is needed.
    • The business unit is large or has complex processes.

    Work with several business units at the same time if:

    • Required resources are only available sporadically over a longer period of time.
    • Less guidance (more delegation) is possible.
    • All business units are small and have well-documented processes.

    Download Info-Tech’s Business Unit BCP Prioritization Tool

    Step 4.2

    Outline a Business Continuity Management (BCM) Program

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify teams and roles for BCP and business continuity management.
    • Identify individuals to fill key roles.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator
    • Executive Sponsor

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Document BCP teams, roles, and responsibilities.

    Document contact information, alternates, and succession rules.

    Outline a Business Continuity Management Program

    A BCM program, also known as a BCM system, helps structure business continuity activities and practices to deliver long-term benefits to your business.

    A BCM program should:

    • Establish who is responsible and accountable for BCP practices, activities, and documentation, and set documentation management practices.
    • Define a process to improve plans. Review and update continuity requirements, suggest enhancements to recovery capabilities, and measure progress and improvements to the plan over time.
    • Coordinate disaster recovery, business continuity, and crisis management planning outputs and practices.
    • Communicate the value of the continuity program to the organization.

    Develop a Business Continuity Management Program

    Phase 4 of this blueprint will focus on the following elements of a business continuity management program:

    • BCM Roles, Responsibilities, and Accountabilities
    • BCM Document Management Practices
    • Integrate BC, IT DR, Crisis Management, and Emergency Management
    • Business Continuity Plan maintenance and testing
    • Training and awareness

    Schedule a call with an Info-Tech Analyst for help building out these core elements, and for advice on developing the rest of your BCM program.

    Create BCM teams

    Include a mix of strong leaders and strong planners on your BC management teams.

    BC management teams (including the secondary teams such as the emergency response team) have two primary roles:

    1. Preparation, Planning, and Governance: Conduct and consolidate business impact analyses. Review, and support the development of recovery workflows, including emergency response plans and business unit recovery workflows. Organize testing and training. Report on the state of the continuity plan.
    2. Leadership During a Crisis: Coordinate and support the execution of business recovery processes. To meet these goals, each team needs a mix of skill sets.

    Crisis leaders require strong crisis management skills:

    • Ability to make quick decisions under pressure with incomplete information.
    • Excellent verbal communication skills.
    • Strong leadership skills. Calm in stressful situations.
    • Team leaders are ideally, but not necessarily, those with the most senior title on each team. It’s more important that the team leader has the appropriate skill set.

    Collectively, the team must include a broad range of expertise as well as strong planning skills:

    • Diverse expertise to be able to plan for and respond to a wide range of potential incidents, from health and safety to reputational damage.
    • Excellent organizational skills and attention to detail.
    • Excellent written communication skills.

    Note: For specific BC team roles and responsibilities, including key resources such as Legal, HR, and IT SMEs required to prepare for and execute crisis management plans, see Implement Crisis Management Best Practices.

    Structure the BCM Team

    Create a hierarchy of teams to govern and coordinate business continuity planning and crisis management.

    BCM Team: Govern business continuity, DR, and crisis management planning. Support the organization’s response to a crisis, including the decision to declare a disaster or emergency.

    Emergency Response Teams: Assist staff and BC teams during a crisis, with a focus first on health and safety. There’s usually one team per location. Develop and maintain emergency response plans.

    Emergency Response Teams: Assist staff and BC teams during a crisis, with a focus first on health and safety. There’s usually one team per location. Develop and maintain emergency response plans.

    IT Disaster Recovery Team: Manage the recovery of IT services and data following an incident. Develop and maintain the IT DRP.

    Business Unit BCP Teams: Coordinate business process recovery at the business unit level. Develop and maintain business unit BCPs.

    “Planning Mode”

    Executive Team → BC Management Team ↓

    • Emergency Response Teams (ERT)
    • Crisis Management Team
    • IT DR Management Team
    • Business Unit BCP Teams

    “Crisis Mode”

    Executive Team ↔Crisis Management Team↓ ↔ Emergency Response Teams (ERT)

    • BC Management Team
    • IT DR Management Team
    • Business Unit BCP Teams

    For more details on specific roles to include on these teams, as well as more information on crisis management, review Info-Tech’s blueprint, Implement Crisis Management Best Practices.

    Tool: BCM Teams, Roles, Contacts, and Vendors

    Track teams, roles, and contacts in this template. It is pre-populated with roles and responsibilities for business continuity, crisis management, IT disaster recovery, emergency response, and vendors and suppliers critical to business operations.

    • Expect overlap across teams. For example, the BC Management Team will include representation from each secondary team to ensure plans are in sync. Similarly, both the Crisis Communication Team and BC Management Team should include a representative from your legal team to ensure legal issues are considered in communications as well as overall crisis management.
    • Clarify spending and decision authority for key members of each team during a crisis.

    Track contact information in this template only if you don’t have a more streamlined way of tracking it elsewhere.

    Download Info-Tech’s Business Continuity Teams and Roles Tool

    Manage key vendors

    Review supplier capabilities and contracts to ensure they meet your requirements.

    Suppliers and vendors might include:

    • Material shipments
    • IT/telecoms service providers
    • Integrators and business process outsourcing providers
    • Independent contractors
    • Utilities (power, water, etc.)

    Supplier RTOs and RPOs should align with the acceptable RTOs and RPOs defined in the BIA. Where they do not, explore options for improvement.

    Confirm the following:

    1. The supplier’s own BC/DR capabilities – how they would recover their own operations in a disaster scenario.
    2. Any continuity services the supplier provides – how they can help you recover your operations in a disaster scenario.
    3. Their existing contractual obligations for service availability (e.g. SLAs).

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Supplier Evaluation Questionnaire

    Organize your BCMS documentation

    Your BCP isn’t any one document. It’s multiple documents that work together.

    Continue to work through any additional required documentation. Build a repository where master copies of each document will reside and can be updated as required. Assign ownership of document management to someone with an understanding of the process (e.g. the BCP Coordinator).

    Governance Recovery
    BCMS Policy BCP Summary Core BCP Recovery Workflows
    Business Process Workflows Action Items & Project Roadmap BCP Recovery Checklists
    BIA Teams, Roles, Contact Information BCP Business Process Workarounds and Recovery Checklists
    BCP Maturity Scorecard BCP Project Charter Additional Recovery Workflows
    Business Unit Prioritization Tool BCP Presentation

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Recovery documentation has a different audience, purpose, and lifecycle than governance documentation, and keeping the documents separate can help with content management. Disciplined document management keeps the plan current and accessible.

    Align your IT DRP with your BCP

    Use the following BCP outputs to inform your DRP:

    • Business process technology dependencies. This includes technology not controlled by IT (e.g. cloud-based services).
    • RTOs and RPOs for business processes.
    • Technology projects identified by the business to improve resilience (e.g. improved mobility support).
    PCP Outputs DRP Activities
    Business processes defined Identify critical applications

    Dependencies identified:

    • People
    • Enterprise tech
    • Personal devices
    • Workspace and facilities
    • Services and other inputs

    Identify IT dependencies:

    • Infrastructure
    • Secondary applications

    Recovery objectives defined:

    • BIA and RTOs/RPOs
    • Recovery workflows

    Identify recovery objectives:

    • BIA and RTOs/RPOs
    • IT Recovery workflows

    Projects identified to close gaps:

    • Resourcing changes (e.g. training secondary staff)
    • Process changes (e.g. optimize processes and define interim processes)
    • Technology changes (e.g. improving mobility)

    Identify projects to close gaps:

    • Projects to improve DR capability (e.g. data replication, standby systems).
    • Projects to improve resiliency (e.g. redundant components)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t think of inconsistencies between your DRP and BCP as a problem. Discrepancies between the plans are part of the discovery process, and they’re an opportunity to have a conversation that can improve alignment between IT service capabilities and business needs. You should expect that there will be discrepancies – managing discrepancies is part of the ongoing process to refine and improve both plans.

    Schedule activities to keep BC and DR in sync

    BC/DR Planning Workflow

    1. Collect BCP outputs that impact IT DRP (e.g. technology RTOs/RPOs).

    2. As BCPs are done, BCP Coordinator reviews outputs with IT DRP Management Team.

    3. Use the RTOs/RPOs from the BCPs as a starting point to determine IT recovery plans.

    4. Identify investments required to meet business-defined RTOs/RPOs, and validate with the business.

    5. Create a DR technology roadmap to meet validated RTOs/RPOs.

    6. Review and update business unit BCPs to reflect updated RTOs/RPOs.

    Find and address shadow IT

    Reviewing business processes and dependencies can identify workarounds or shadow IT solutions that weren’t visible to IT and haven’t been included in IT’s DR plan.

    • If you identify technology process dependencies that IT didn’t know about, it can be an opportunity to start a conversation about service support. This can be a “teachable moment” to highlight the risks of adopting and implementing technology solutions without consulting IT.
    • Highlight the possible impact of using technology services that aren’t supported by IT. For example:
      • RTOs and RPOs may not be in line with business requirements.
      • Costs could be higher than supported solutions.
      • Security controls may not be in line with compliance requirements.
      • IT may not be able to offer support when the service breaks or build new features or functionality that might be required in the future.
    • Make sure that if IT is expected to support shadow IT solutions, these systems are included in the IT DRP and that the risks and costs of supporting the non-core solution are clear to all parties and are compared to an alternative, IT-recommended solutions.

    Shadow IT can be a symptom of larger service support issues. There should be a process for requesting and tracking non-standard services from IT with appropriate technical, security, and management oversight.

    Review and reprioritize BC projects to create an overall BC project roadmap

    Assign the BCP Coordinator the task of creating a master list of BC projects, and then work with the BC management team to review and reprioritize this list, as described below:

    1. Build a list of BC projects as you work with each business unit.
      1. Add proposed projects to a master copy of the BCP Project Roadmap Tool
      2. For each subsequent business unit, copy project names, scoring, and timelines into the master roadmap tool.
    2. Work with the Executive Sponsor, the IT BCM representative, and the BCM team to review and reprioritize projects.
      1. In the master BCP Project Roadmap Tool, review and update project scoring, taking into account the relative importance of each project within the overall list. Rationalize the list (e.g. eliminate duplicate projects).
    3. The project roadmap is a suggested list of projects at this stage. Assign a project sponsor and project manager (from the BC management team or appropriate delegates) to each project to take it through your organization’s normal project scoping and approval process.

    Improving business continuity capabilities is a marathon, not a sprint. Change for the better is still change and introduces risk – massive changes introduce massive risk. Incremental changes help minimize disruption. Use Info-Tech research to deliver organizational change.

    "Developing a BCP can be like solving a Rubik’s Cube. It’s a complex, interdepartmental concern with multiple and sometimes conflicting objectives. When you have one side in place, another gets pushed out of alignment." – Ray Mach, BCP Expert

    Step 4.3

    Test and maintain your BCP

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create additional documentation to support your business continuity plan.
    • Create a repository for documentation, and assign ownership for BCP documentation.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • BCP Coordinator

    In this step, you’ll use these tools and templates:

    Outcomes & Insights

    Create a plan to maintain the BCP.

    Iterate on your plan

    Tend your garden, and pull the weeds.

    Mastery comes through practice and iteration. Iterating on and testing your plan will help you keep up to date with business changes, identify plan improvements, and help your organization’s employees develop a mindset of continuity readiness. Maintenance drives continued success; don’t let your plan become stagnant, messy, and unusable.

    Your BCM program should structure BCP reviews and updates by answering the following:

    1. When do we review the plan?
    2. What are the goals of a review?
    3. Who must lead reviews and update BCP documents?
    4. How do we track reviews, tests, and updates?

    Structure plan reviews

    There are more opportunities for improvements than just planned reviews.

    At a minimum, review goals should include:

    1. Identify and document changes to BCP requirements.
    2. Identify and document changes to BCP capabilities.
    3. Identify gaps and risks and ways to remediate risks and close gaps.

    Who leads reviews and updates documents?

    The BCP Coordinator is likely heavily involved in facilitating reviews and updating documentation, at least at first. Look for opportunities to hand off document ownership to the business units over time.

    How do we track reviews, tests, and updates?

    Keep track of your good work by keeping a log of document changes. If you don’t have one, you can use the last tab on the BCP-DRP Maintenance Checklist.

    When do we review the plan?

    1. Scheduled reviews: At a minimum, plan reviews once a year. Plan owners should review the documents, identify needed updates, and notify the coordinator of any changes to their plan.
    2. As-needed reviews: Project launches, major IT upgrades, office openings or moves, organizational restructuring – all of these should trigger a BCP review.
    3. Testing exercises: Schedule controlled exercises to test and improve different aspects of your continuity plan, and ensure that lessons learned become part of plan documentation.
    4. Retrospectives: Take the opportunity to learn from actual continuity events and crises by conducting retrospectives to evaluate your response and brainstorm improvements.

    Conduct a retrospective after major incidents

    Use a retrospective on your COVID-19 response as a starting point. Build on the questions below to guide the conversation.

    • If needed, how did we set up remote work for our users? What worked, and what didn’t?
    • Did we discover any long-term opportunities to improve business processes?
    • Did we use any continuity plans we have documented?
    • Did we effectively prioritize business processes for recovery?
    • Were expectations from our business users in line with our plans?
    • What parts of our plan worked, and where can we improve the plan?
    1. Gather stakeholders and team members
    2. Ask:
      1. What happened?
      2. What did we learn?
      3. What did we do well?
      4. What should we have done differently?
      5. What gaps should we take action to address?
    3. Prepare a plan to take action

    Outcomes and benefits

    • Confirm business priorities.
    • Validate that business recovery solutions and procedures are effective in meeting business requirements (i.e. RTOs and RPOs).
    • Identify gaps in continuity resources, procedures, or documentation, and options to close gaps.
    • Build confidence in the response team and recovery capabilities.

    Tool: Testing and Maintenance Schedule

    Build a light-weight maintenance schedule for your BCP and DRP plans.

    This tool helps you set a schedule for plan update activities, identify document and exercise owners, and log updates for audit and governance purposes.

    • Add the names of your documents and brainstorm update activities.
    • Activities (document updates, testing, etc.) might be scheduled regularly, as-needed, or both. If they happen “as needed,” identify the trigger for the activity.
    • Start tracking past activities and resulting changes in Tab 3. You can also track crises that tested your continuity capabilities on this tab.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Everyone gets busy. If there’s a meeting you can schedule months in advance, schedule it months in advance! Then send reminders closer to the date. As soon as you’re done the pilot BCP, set aside time in everyone’s calendar for your first review session, whether that’s three months, six months, or a year from now.

    Appendix

    Additional BCP Tools and Templates

    Template Library: Business Continuity Policy

    Create a high-level policy to govern BCP and clarify BCP requirements.

    Use this template to:

    • Outline the organizational commitment to BCM.
    • Clarify the mandate to prepare, validate, and maintain continuity plans that align with business requirements.
    • Define specific policy statements that signatories to the policy are expected to uphold.
    • Require key stakeholders to review and sign off on the template.

    Download Info-Tech’s Business Continuity Policy template

    Template Library: Workarounds & Recovery Checklists

    Capture the step-by-step details to execute workarounds and steps in the business recovery process.

    If you require more detail to support your recovery procedures, you can use this template to:

    • Record specific steps or checklists to support specific workarounds or recovery procedures.
    • Identify prerequisites for workarounds or recovery procedures.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Process Workarounds & Recovery Checklists Template

    Template Library: Notification, Assessment, Declaration

    Create a procedure that outlines the conditions for assessing a disaster situation and invoking the business continuity plan.

    Use this template to:

    • Guide the process whereby the business is notified of an incident, assesses the situation, and declares a disaster.
    • Set criteria for activating business continuity plans.
    • Review examples of possible events, and suggest options on how the business might proceed or react.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan template

    Template Library: BCP Recovery Workflow Example

    Review an example of BCP recovery workflows.

    Use this template to:

    • Generate ideas for your own recovery processes.
    • See real examples of recovery processes for warehousing, supply, and distribution operations.
    • Review an example of working BCP documentation.

    Download Info-Tech’s BCP Recovery Workflows Example

    Create a Pandemic Response Plan

    If you’ve been asked to build a pandemic-specific response plan, use your core BCP findings to complete these pandemic planning documents.

    • At the onset of the COVID-19 crisis, IT departments were asked to rapidly ramp up work-from-home capabilities and support other process workarounds.
    • IT managers already knew that obstacles to working from home would go beyond internet speed and needing a laptop. Business input is critical to uncover unexpected obstacles.
    • IT needed to address a range of issues from security risk to increased service desk demand from users who don’t normally work from home.
    • Workarounds to speed the process up had to be balanced with good IT practices and governance (Asset Management, Security, etc.)
    • If you’ve been asked to update your Pandemic Response Plan, use this template and your core BCP deliverables to deliver a set of streamlined documentation that draws on lessons learned from the COVID-19 pandemic.

    Structure HR’s role in the pandemic plan

    Leverage the following materials from Info-Tech’s HR-focused sister company, McLean & Company.

    These HR research resources live on the website of Info-Tech’s sister company, McLean & Company. Contact your Account Manager to gain access to these resources.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    This blueprint outlined:

    • The streamlined approach to BCP development.
    • A BIA process to identify acceptable, appropriate recovery objectives.
    • Tabletop planning exercises to document and validate business recovery procedures.

    Processes Optimized

    • Business continuity development processes were optimized, from business impact analysis to incident response planning.
    • In addition, pilot business unit processes were identified and clarified to support BCP development, which also provided the opportunity to review and optimize those processes.

    Key Deliverables Completed

    • Core BCP deliverables for the pilot business unit, including a business impact analysis, recovery workflows, and a project roadmap.
    • BCP Executive Presentation to communicate pilot results as well as a summary of the methodology to the executive team.
    • BCP Summary to provide a high-level view of BCP scope, objectives, capabilities, and requirements.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Dr. Bernard A. Jones, MBCI, CBCP

    Professor and Continuity Consultant Berkeley College

    Dr. Jones is a professor at Berkeley College within the School of Professional Studies teaching courses in Homeland Security and Emergency Management. He is a member of the National Board of Directors for the Association of Continuity Professionals (ACP) as well as the Information & Publications Committee Chair for the Garden State Chapter of the ACP. Dr. Jones earned a doctorate degree in Civil Security Leadership, Management & Policy from New Jersey City University where his research focus was on organizational resilience.

    Kris L. Roberson

    Disaster Recovery Analyst Veterans United Home Loans

    Kris Roberson is the Disaster Recovery Analyst for Veterans United Home Loans, the #1 VA mortgage lender in the US. Kris oversees the development and maintenance of the Veterans United Home Loans DR program and leads the business continuity program. She is responsible for determining the broader strategies for DR testing and continuity planning, as well as the implementation of disaster recovery and business continuity technologies, vendors, and services. Kris holds a Masters of Strategic Leadership with a focus on organizational change management and a Bachelors in Music. She is a member of Infragard, the National Association of Professional Women, and Sigma Alpha Iota, and holds a Project+ certification.

    Trevor Butler

    General Manager of Information Technology City of Lethbridge

    As the General Manager of Information Technology with the City of Lethbridge, Trevor is accountable for providing strategic management and advancement of the city’s information technology and communications systems consistent with the goals and priorities of the corporation while ensuring that corporate risks are appropriately managed. He has 15+ years of progressive IT leadership experience, including 10+ years with public sector organizations. He holds a B.Mgt. and PMP certification along with masters certificates in both Project Management and Business Analysis.

    Robert Miller

    Information Services Director Witt/Kieffer

    Bob Miller is the Information Services Director at Witt/Kieffer. His department provides end-user support for all company-owned devices and software for Oak Brook, the regional offices, home offices, and traveling employees. The department purchases, implements, manages, and monitors the infrastructure, which includes web hosting, networks, wireless solutions, cell phones, servers, and file storage. Bob is also responsible for the firm’s security planning, capacity planning, and business continuity and disaster preparedness planning to ensure that the firm has functional technology to conduct business and continue business growth.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Go beyond satisfying auditors to drive process improvement, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

    Select the Optimal Disaster Recovery Deployment Model

    Determine which deployment models, including hybrid solutions, best meet your DR requirements.

    Bibliography

    “Business Continuity Planning.” IT Examination HandBook. The Federal Financial Institution Examination Council (FFIEC), February 2015. Web.

    “Business Continuity Plans and Emergency Contact Information.” FINRA, 12 February 2015. Web.

    “COBIT 5: A Business Framework for the Governance and Management of Enterprise IT.” ISACA, n.d. Web.

    Disaster Resource GUIDE. Emergency Lifeline Corporation, n.d. Web.

    “DR Rules & Regulations.” Disaster Recovery Journal, March 2017. Web.

    “Federal Information Security Management Act (FISMA).” Homeland Security, 2014. Web.

    FEMA. “Planning & Templates.” FEMA, n.d. Web.

    “FINRA-SEC-CFTC Joint Advisory (Regulatory Notice 13-25).” FINRA, August 2013. Web.

    Gosling, Mel and Andrew Hiles. “Business Continuity Statistics: Where Myth Meets Fact.” Continuity Central, 24 April 2009. Web.

    Hanwacker, Linda. “COOP Templates for Success Workbook.” The LSH Group, 2016. Web.

    Potter, Patrick. “BCM Regulatory Alphabet Soup – Part Two.” RSA Link, 28 August 2012. Web.

    The Good Practice Guidelines. Business Continuity Institute, 2013. Web.

    Wang, Dashun and James A. Evans. “When Small Teams are Better than Big Ones.” Harvard Business Review, 21 February 2019. Web.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}510|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: High Impact Leadership
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Sixty to ninety percent of change initiatives fail, costing organizations dollars off the bottom line and lost productivity.
    • Seventy percent of change initiatives fail because of people-related issues, which place a major burden on managers to drive change initiatives successfully.
    • Managers are often too busy focusing on the process elements of change; as a result, they neglect major opportunities to leverage and mitigate staff behaviors that affect the entire team.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Change is costly, but failed change is extremely costly. Managing change right the first time is worth the time and effort.
    • Staff pose the biggest opportunity and risk when implementing a change – managers must focus on their teams in order to maintain positive change momentum.
    • Large and small changes require the same change process to be followed but at different scales.
    • The size of a change must be measured according to the level of impact the change will have on staff, not how executives and managers perceive the change.
    • To effectively lead their staff through change, managers must anticipate staff reaction to change, develop a communication plan, introduce the change well, help their staff let go of old behaviors while learning new ones, and motivate their staff to adopt the change.

    Impact and Result

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    Lead Staff through Change Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn how to manage people throughout the change process

    Set up a successful change adoption.

    • Storyboard: Lead Staff through Change

    2. Learn the intricacies of the change personas

    Correctly identify which persona most closely resembles individual staff members.

    • None

    3. Assess the impact of change on staff

    Ensure enough time and effort is allocated in advance to people change management.

    • Change Impact Assessment Tool

    4. Organize change communications messages for a small change

    Ensure consistency and clarity in change messages to staff.

    • Basic Business Change Communication Worksheet

    5. Organize change communications messages for a large change

    Ensure consistency and clarity in change messages to staff.

    • Advanced Business Change Description Form

    6. Evaluate leadership of the change process with the team

    Improve people change management for future change initiatives.

    • Change Debrief Questionnaire
    [infographic]